Download - Defined Term

United States Patent and Trademark Office
PATENTS Home |Site Index |Search|FAQ |Glossary |Guides|Contacts|eBusiness|eBiz alerts|News|Help
Patents > Guidance, Tools, and Manuals > Classification > USPC Glossary Page
Class Numbers & Titles | Class Numbers Only | USPC Index | International | HELP | Office of Patent Classification USPC Consolidated Glossary Terms Beginning with A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
USPC Consolidated Glossary ­ Alpha Sort
gGREEN​
​
h PRODUCT ­ For class 425
Self­sustaining but not permanently set or cured, (e.g., unvulcanized rubber, etc.).
2DEG (Two­Dimensional Electron Gas) ­ For class 977
State of electrons in quantum well.
A ntisense RNA and DNA ­ For class 800
An approach for inhibiting functions of endogenous cellular genes which targets the gene"s
messenger RNA rather than the gene itself. An RNA or single­stranded DNA molecule that
is complementary (antisense) to the mRNA of the target gene is introduced into cells. This
antisense molecule can base­pair with the mRNA preventing translation of the mRNA into
protein.
A VARIABLE DISPLACEMENT PUMP OR MOTOR ­ For class 060
Includes an expansible chamber and means to vary the volume of fluid admitted to or
discharged from the chamber. The means which varies the volume of fluid will be
generally either (1) means which physically displaces either the piston or working member
or the cylinder or housing of the expansible chamber to vary the effective stroke of the
piston or working member, or (2) means which alters the timing of the inlet or exhaust
valve with respect to the piston or working member timing to vary the effective stroke of
the piston or working member.
ABIETIC ACID ­ For class 516
C 19H 29COOH. Contains a hydrogenated phenanthrene ring system. See also rosin*.
ABNORMAL PEPTIDE LINK ­ For class 930
Exists between a nonalpha­amino group of an amino acid and the carboxyl group ­ in
position 1 ­ of an alpha­amino acid, or between an alpha­amino group of one amino acid
and the carboxyl group ­ not in position 1 ­ of another amino acid.
ABOVE GROUND ­ For class 175
The term ​
gAbove Ground​
h denotes any point which lies outside of a hole being formed in
the earth, this may be either in the open (e.g., on the surface of the earth) or a cellar,
tunnel or other hole in the earth from which a hole is being formed.
ABSORB ­ For class 210
See SORB.
ABSORBING MATERIAL ­ For class 376
See Neutron Absorbing Material.
ABSORPTION ­ For class 423
The ability of a substance to retain or concentrate gases, liquids or dissolved substance
(absorbate) within its bodies.
ABUTMENT ­ For class 418
A partition member having relative movement with a cylinder or reaction member of
which it is a part and moving incident to the expansion and contraction of the working
chamber, the cylinder or reaction member not constituting the working member in this
case.
ACCELERATION CONTROL ­ For class 318
Controlling the change of speed of an electric motor from zero speed to some running
speed value and vice versa, or from one running speed value to another running speed
value. Mere starting of the motor is not considered to be acceleration control unless the
acceleration of the motor is controlled after the starting operation. Acceleration control
includes deceleration control. Deceleration control differs from motor braking in that in
deceleration control no means are utilized for applying an opposing torque or output force
to the driving member of the motor. In deceleration control, for example, the power input
to the motor is varied to decelerate the motor. See the definition of braking below. Mere
stopping of the motor by opening the supply circuit is not deceleration control in the
absence of any means to control the rate of stopping, but is mere stopping. For the
distinction between acceleration control and running speed control, see the definition of
Running Speed Control.
ACCELERATOR ­ For class 210
Agent which promotes an action, but does not necessarily cause the action. An example is
a catalyst as contrasted with a reactant. In subclasses 696+ and 702+ no distinction is
made between an agent which promotes or one which causes and a search for a compound
used as a flocculant is the same as if the compound reacted to cause precipitation.
ACCEPTOR IMPURITY ­ For class 257
An atom or ion different from or foreign to, but present in, a semiconductor material and
which has insufficient valence electrons to complete the normal bonding arrangement in
the semiconductor crystal structure. An acceptor impurity accepts an electron from an
adjacent atom to create a hole. Acceptor impurities are also referred to as p­type
impurities. Common acceptor impurities in silicon or germanium are boron, gallium, and
indium.
ACCEPTOR IMPURITY ­ For class 438
An atom or ion different from or foreign to, but present in, a semiconductor material and
which has insufficient valence electrons to complete the normal bonding arrangement in
the semiconductor crystal structure. An acceptor impurity (also referred to as p­type)
accepts an electron from an adjacent atom to create a positive charge carrier (i.e., a
hole). A donor impurity (also referred to as n­type) provides an electron to the conduction
band of the semiconductor.
ACCEPTOR IMPURITY OR ACCEPTOR ­ For class 330
A material which when added to a semiconductor material in minute quantities, as an
impurity, induces hole conduction, generally causing the semiconductor to be one of ​
gP­
type conductivity​
h.
ACCESS ­ For class 099
The term ​
gaccess​
h is intended to include a cutting means which (a) makes an incision
(usually at a point adjacent either the stem or tip of the food) for the purpose of allowing
the same means and/or another means to separate the core­pit* from the interior of the
food; or, (b) impales the food (and, the place of entry of the impaling means frequently is
used for the same purpose as the incision in (a), immediately above); or, (c) halves the
food (and, once the food is ​
ghalved​
h, an easier ​
gaccess​
h is obtained to separate the core­
pit, seeds, inner membranes, etc.)
ACCESS ­ For class 709
To obtain entry to, or to locate, read into memory, and make ready for, some operation,
for example, regarding disks, files, records, and network entry procedures.
ACCESS ­ For class 718
To obtain entry to, or to locate, read into memory, and make ready for, some operation,
for example, regarding disks, files, records, and network entry procedures.
ACCESS ­ For class 719
To obtain entry to, or to locate, read into memory, and make ready for, some operation,
for example, regarding disks, files, records, and network entry procedures.
ACCESS ­ For class 725
Any means of establishing logical or physical communication with a computer or
communications system. Also, any means of obtaining the use of such a system or any
actions that result in a flow of information involving such a system.
ACCESS CONTROL ­ For class 726
The prevention of unauthorized access to resources of a system or information system,
including the prevention of their use in an unauthorized manner.
ACCESSORIES ­ For class 015
Devices not classifiable elsewhere and which perform no cleaning function but which are
merely ancillary to machines, implements and attachments classified in this class.
ACID ­ For class 216
A chemical compound which yields hydrogen ions when dissolved in water, whose
hydrogen can be replaced by metals or basic radicals, or which reacts with bases to form
salts and water (neutralization).
ACID DYE ­ For class 008
A dye containing organic acid groups, e.g., sulfonic, sulfamic, phosphoric, carboxylic, etc.,
or their salts. Acid dyes are commonly sodium salts of organic acids applied in an acid
bath and used to dye wool, polyamide and silk. Acid dyes have the ability to be
substantive to substrates with basic groups.
ACOUSTO­OPTIC ­ For class 372
The effect, on the properties of a beam of light, by sound energy, interacting with the light
within a volume of matter.
ACT ­ For class 438
Acoustic charge transport
ACTINIDE­ For class 075
A metal of the group Actinium (Ac), Thorium (Th), Protactinium (Pa), Uranium (U),
Neptunium (Np), Plutonium (Pu), Americium (Am), Curium (Cm), Berkelium (Bk),
Californium (Cf), Einsteinium (Es), Fermium (Fm), Mendelevium (Md), Nobelium (No), and
Lawrencium (Lr).
ACTINIDES ­ For class 257
Ac, Th, Pa, U, Np, Pu, Am, Cm, Bk, Cf, E, Fm, Mv, No, Lw.
ACTIVATED ­ For class 502
The state or condition of a material which has been treated or acted upon to enable it to
function as intended. In general a change is effected which is discernible often only in the
ability to perform such function. For instance, activated charcoal.
ACTIVATED SLUDGE ­ For class 210
Common term for an aerobic process of treating sewage with micro­organisms in which
part of the settled sludge from the treatment is diverted and introduced into the feed of
incoming sewage.
ACTIVE ­ For class 424
Denotes a physiological, pharmacological, or biological affect. AMINE Denotes a compound
in which one or more of the valences of a nitrogen atom have been satisfied by a
covalently bonded carbon atom.
ACTIVE ­ For class 504
The expression active as used herein denotes a plant growth regulating effect.
ACTIVE ANTENNA ­ For class 342
Part of the antenna which is directly coupled to free space and radiates electromagnetic
energy into, or collects electromagnetic energy from, free space and is also directly
coupled to a transmitter or receiver.
ACTIVE CARBON ­ For class 502
Sorbent form compressing carbon with either additive or porous structure enhancing
sorbability.
ACTIVE ELEMENT ­ For class 331
A control device for exerting a control on a source of energy proportional to an applied
control signal. A conventional triode, having cathode, control grid on anode, connected as
a conventional amplifier, is an example of an active network, a control potential applied to
the grid causing a flow of anode current, supplied by the anode biasing source,
proportional to the magnitude of the control potential.
ACTIVE ELEMENT ­ For class 343
An element or network whose energy output is modified due to the presence of a source of
energy in the element or network (other than the mere signal energy which passes
through the network) or an element or network in which the energy output from a source
of energy is controlled by the signal input.
ACTIVE MATERIAL ­ For class 429
The element, chemical compound, or composition which chemically reacts to produce a
transfer of electrons through an external circuit.
ACTIVE MEDIA ­ For class 372
The material, in which most of the atoms can be placed in an excited state (i.e.,
population inversion state), so that an electromagnetic wave of the proper frequency
passing through it can stimulate a cascade of photons.
ACTIVE NETWORK ­ For class 330
A network containing a source of energy, or a sink of energy (i.e., a device for absorbing
or dissipating energy other than that accounted for by the resistance of the components of
the networks). Merely dissipating the heat generated by a resistance will not cause the
resistance to be an active element. See Amplifying Device.
ACTIVE NETWORK ­ For class 333
A network containing a source of energy, or a sink of energy (i.e., a device for absorbing
or dissipating energy other than that accounted for by the resistance of the components of
the networks). Merely dissipating the heat generated by a resistance will not cause the
resistance to be an active element.
ACTIVE SOLID­STATE DEVICE ­ For class 438
An electronic device or component that is primarily made up of solid materials, usually
semiconductors, which operates by the movement of charge carriers ­ electrons or holes ­
which undergo energy level changes within the material and can modify an input voltage to
achieve rectification, amplification, or switching action. Active solid­state electronic
devices include diodes, transistors, thyristors, etc., but exclude pure resistors, capacitors,
inductors, or combinations solely thereof. The latter category is characterized as passive.
ACTIVE solid­state ELECTRONIC DEVICE ­ For class 257
An electronic device or component that is made up primarily of solid materials, usually
semiconductors, which operates by the movement of charge carriers ­ electrons or holes ­
which undergo energy level changes within the material and can modify an input voltage to
achieve rectification, amplification, or switching action. Active solid­state electronic
devices include diodes, transistors, thyristors, etc., but exclude pure resistors, capacitors,
inductors, or combinations solely thereof. The latter class of devices is characterized as
passive.
ACTIVE VOLUME ­ For class 376
See Reactor Core.
ACTIVITY ­ For class 435
Rate of metabolic or anabolic action, speed or efficiency. Mere suppression of competing
strains is not viewed as increasing the activity.
ACTUATION ­ For class 081
The manipulation of handles relative to each other, so as to move jaws to engage work,
within the limits of a predetermined range of jaw movement. (See the definition of
gRANGE​
​
h hereunder).
ACTUATION ­ For class 234
The application of operating energy to a mechanism to cause the latter to perform its
appointed function.
ACTUATION (ACTUATE, ACTUATING, ETC.) ­ For class 269
The application of (a) a bias (resilient or gravity), or (b) a mechanical advantage, or (c)
the use of a lost motion mechanism to effect the relative movement of jaws. The use of
levers, inclined planes, pulleys, gears, cams, fluid systems, etc., even where such means
fail to produce force multiplication, or actually provide a force reduction, is considered
enough to constitute actuation means rather than adjustment* means.
ACTUATOR ­ For class 049
(See OPERATOR) The force input means to the closure for imparting movement thereto,
e.g., an operator. The term is broader than ​
goperator​
h since a handle which does not
move relative to the closure is considered an actuator.
ACTUATOR ­ For class 172
A device comprising both a means for imparting movement to an element and a means for
holding the moved element against returning to a position from which it has been moved.
Thus, an actuator may comprise a servomotor, a mechanical power take­off from a motor
or rolling wheel, a hand operated lever and ratchet or merely a handle and a bracket for
holding the element moved by the handle in position. In the case of a mere handle
actuator, however, the handle must be intended to be used merely to move an element to
an adjusted position where it is held in place by a holding means. If the handle is intended
to be used by an attendant so as to hold an element in intermediate positions by continued
application of force by the attendant then the handle is not considered an actuator. See
subclasses 329+ for devices with such handles. If the handle is disclosed as usable as an
actuator to merely move and hold and, alternatively, also as a guiding means to move and
hold by force exerted by the attendant then the handle is considered to be both an actuator
and an attendant hold means and is classified accordingly in the first appropriate subclass
and cross referenced down if necessary. A device comprising merely a means for moving
by direct application of draft force is not considered an actuator. For example, an
implement hitched to a tractor and provided with a latch and a movable hitch whereby the
draft force of the tractor on the movable hitch moves an earth working element with
respect to the implement frame and the latch holds the element in different positions is
not considered to be provided with an actuator, as the term is used in this class. See
subclass 605 for such devices. Also, a device comprising merely a screw bolt or the like is
not considered an actuator, being merely a clamping or an adjusting means.
ACYCLIC ­ For class 204
For the purposes of this class, ​
gacyclic​
h refers to an organic compound which does not
contain a heterocyclic, nitrocyclic, or carbocyclic nucleus.
ACYCLIC ­ For class 260
Denotes a compound which does not contain a ring.
ACYCLIC ­ For class 514
Denotes a compound devoid of any ring­containing moiety. Thus an acyclic chain may
contain any atom as long as it is not a member of a ring.
ACYCLIC ­ For class 520
Denotes a compound devoid of any ring­containing moiety.
ACYCLIC ­ For class 532
This term denotes a compound which does not contain a ring.
ACYCLIC ATOM ­ For class 532
This term denotes an atom which is not a ring member. Figure 1 contains acyclic nitrogen
while Figure 2 does not contain acyclic nitrogen
ACYCLIC BONDING ­ For class 532
As used in regard to bonding or attachment of specified moieties, this term denotes that
the moieties are connected to each other exclusively by atoms and bonds which are not
part of a ring. The compounds in Figure 3 show oxygen attached to a hetero ring by acyclic
bonding. Note that the sulfur­containing compound also has nitrogen and sulfur attached to
the hetero ring by acyclic bonding.
The compounds in Figure 4 would be excluded from a subclass requiring oxygen attached
to a hetero ring by acyclic bonding since a carbocyclic ring is between the oxygen and the
hetero ring in each structure.
ADC ­ For class 438
Analog­to­digital converter
ADDITION AGENT ­ For class 164
In founding, any material, including principal alloying constituents, densifiers, fluidizers,
graphitizers, grain size controllers, etc., added to the molten metal to produce specific
effects in the solid metal.
ADDITION POLYMER FROM UNSATURATED MONOMERS ­ For class 428
Any multiunit chain which is the product of the reaction of unsaturated bonds in the units.
The product may be the result of interaction of molecules of the same compound (as
polyethylene) or of different compounds (as acryronitrile­styrene). Vinyl acetate and
methyl methacrylate are included within the scope of the term because the monomeric
units are linked through the reacted unsaturated bonds and the ester groups are pendant ­
i.e., the units are not linked through the ester groups. (Nonstructural or Composition)
ADDITIVE ­ For class 210
An agent added to a liquid being treated to either cause a desired result or to promote a
result which would occur more slowly or incompletely without the additive. Catalysts filter
aids, chemical agents, seeding agents, buffers are all additives.
ADDITIVE ­ For class 426
Substance or a mixture of substances used primarily for purposes other than its nutritive
value and added to a food in relatively small amounts to (1) impart or improve desirable
properties (2) or suppress undesirable properties, and (3) may become a part of the food
or be transitory in nature. (Compare ingredient below which in some instance may be an
additive).
ADDITIVE COLOR A ­ For class 430
color (red, green, blue) when added to the other two additive colors produce white.
ADDRESS DATA ­ For class 345
Data that represent or identify a source or destination. (also see: Data)
ADDRESS DATA ­ For class 707
Data that represent or identify a source or destination. (Also see Data)
ADDRESS DATA ­ For class 711
Data that specify a location in a memory.
ADDRESS DATA ­ For class 714
Data that represent or identify a source or destination.
ADHESIVE BOND ­ For class 156
The joining of parts (a) by means of a separate glue­like material or (b) by rendering
contacting surfaces tacky by means of solvent and/or heat.
ADJUNCT ­ For class 249
See the Class Definition, section G, above.
ADJUSTABLE ­ For class 172
An adjective describing the capability of two parts of being selectively held in different
positions with respect to one another by some means other than an attendant. A mere
clamp which cooperates with a member such that by loosening the clamp the member
could be set in any desired position and reclamped (e.g., clamp and spike tooth) is not
considered to be an adjusting means. However, any specific structure such as selectively
usable apertures, teeth, slots, etc., for the purpose of permitting the selective change of
the relative positions of two parts is included under this definition. Despite the above
limitation on the meaning of ​
gadjustable​
h if a claim emphasizes the feature of adjustability
it is classifiable in an ​
gadjustable​
h subclass even if structurally the feature comprises a
mere clamp.
ADJUSTABLE INDUCTOR ­ For class 336
A passive inductor wherein the inductor device includes a movable element which may be
adjusted to different positions or adjusted to vary its physical dimensions to change the
effective inductance from one value to another. Examples of such movable elements are:
a tap changing switch, a distortable coil or core, coil length varying means, a movable
core and movable coupled coils. Inductor devices designed to change inductance (1) as a
function of the current flowing through the inductor winding, or (2) in accordance with a
magnetic bias applied to the core of the device, or (3) as a function of the ambient
temperature of the device, and wherein no physical elements of the inductor are moved to
effect such change in inductance, are not considered adjustable under the above definition.
Such variable inductors will be found in subclasses 155+ of this class for magnetically
saturable or high leakage reactance type devices and subclass 179 of this class for devices
responsive to changes in ambient temperature.
ADJUSTMENT ­ For class 081
The changing of structural relationships between members constituting the tool so as to
vary the limits of jaw movement from one predetermined range to another. (See the
definition of ​
gRANGE​
h hereunder).
ADJUSTMENT (ADJUST, ADJUSTING, ETC.) ­ For class 269
The shift of a jaw or jaws into juxtaposition with work without the application of (a) a bias
(resilient or gravity), or (b) mechanical advantage effective to press or grip work, or (c)
utilizing a ​
glost motion mechanism​
h. This shift may be (d) no more than a ​
gquick setting​
h
of a jaw of a particular device (e.g., the use of a split nut to initially position a jaw for
gripping movement along a lead screw) or (e) a change of the range* limits (e.g., the use
of a pawl and rack lock to initially position a jaw for gripping movement by a cam or
eccentric). While the shift of (d) and (e) are both considered to be jaw adjustment only (e)
represents a true variation of range limits; i.e., the full cam throw will move the jaw one
inch (the range whether the pawl and rack setting provides a work accommodating span of
three or ten inches).
ADJUSTMENT­LOCK ­ For class 269
The immobilization, or securing against movement, of structural elements constituting the
means for jaw adjustment*. An adjustment­lock may be effected (a) by a shift in relative
position of the structural elements being immobilized (as, for example, in subclasses 166­
171.5) or (b) by positioning an additional element to effect the desired binding or securing.
The immobilization, securing, or binding referred to may be only relative rather than
absolute, in the sense that further movement or positioning of the structural elements
requires the utilization of actuating* means. The adjustment­lock effected may in fact be
limited to a one way latch or binding. For example, in some of the pawl and rack locks of
subclasses 212­215, the structural elements, when said pawl and rack are engaged, cannot
be further adjusted except in a direction favored by the inclination of both rack teeth and
pawl; and similarly, in the simple cant type lock of subclass 166, the structural elements,
when relatively askew, resist adjustment in a direction tending to further accentuate the
degree of cant but are freely adjustable in the direction tending to reduce the degree of
cant.
ADJUVANT ­ For class 516
A material* which assists the action of another material*, especially an agent*.
ADSORB ­ For class 210
See SORB.
ADSORPTION ­ For class 423
The ability of a substance (usually a solid) to retain or concentrate gases, liquids or
dissolved substances (adsorbate) upon its surface.
ADVANCE ­ For class 173
The forward movement of the tool into or along the work. Such movement is in addition to
the drive movement (i.e., cyclic forward and backward or lateral motion of the tool).
Included under this definition as apparatus functioning under the broad meaning of
advance are means for causing, controlling, or selectively preventing the forward
movement of the tool into or along the work.
ADVANCE ­ For class 175
Motion in a direction towards the desired depth or direction of a hole being formed.
AEROBIC ­ For class 210
Treating liquids, generally sewage, with micro­organisms in the presence of oxygen
generally supplied as air or other source of oxygen but sometimes using residual dissolved
oxygen. Best known method is ​
gactivated sludge​
h. The micro­organisms convert noxious
materials to less noxious stuff, e.g., to water, methane, nitrogen oxides, carbon dioxide.
AEROGEL ­ For class 516
A dispersion* of a gas in a liquid or solid. A common example is silica­gel which is a light
fluffy silica particle having a porous amorphous matrix. Cf. aerosol*.
AEROSOL ­ For class 516
A colloid system of a discontinuous solid or a liquid phase (dispersand*) in a gas or vapor
continuous phase (dispersant*). See smoke* and fog*.
AES ­ For class 438
Auger electron spectroscopy
AGENT ­ For class 516
Refers to the effective material*, energy, or means which acts in the given context. A
colloid system making or stabilizing agent acts to form or stabilize a colloid system;
usually characterized by its tendency to collect at the interface between two immiscible
phases and not to be confused with the material which constitutes the continuous or
discontinuous phases, particularly noting that gas propellants for aerosols and foams are
NOT colloid system making agents. A colloid system breaking, resolving, or inhibiting
agent acts to dissipate the interface between two immiscible phases. The term agent also
includes subcombinations of an agent composition, such as adjuvants*. (Thus, the term
agent may apply to a compound or composition which may not be fully functional for its
stated context, or its functionality may be greatly enhanced by another component which
is not present.) Note that although a compound can be an agent, this class does not
provide for compounds, per se. An agent may be physical or energy.
AGGREGATION ­ For class 516
See flocculation*.
AGING OR AGEING ­ For class 148
Also termed precipitation hardening or strengthening. A process whereby the
hardness/strength of a metal alloy may be increased by subjecting a supersaturated solid
solution to elevated temperature to precipitate out a secondary phase containing the
solute. Aging may also be manifested as a spontaneous increase in hardness at room
temperature. Aging for a longer time than that corresponding to maximum hardness at the
particular temperature is termed overageing. Aging after or during straining is known as
strain aging. Maraging steels are a specific group of high nickel (i.e., greater than ten
percent Nickel), low carbon martensitic steels which can be fabricated while in a
comparatively ductile martensitic condition and later strengthened by aging treatment.
AGITATION ­ For class 404
Brisk shaking, regular or motion, or to­and­fro movement of material or device to effect
any one or several of many different purposes during road building, (e.g., vibration
imparted to road aggregate for compaction, agitation of uncured road slab to provide a
smooth upper surface or agitation of material to mix constituents). Individual subclass
definitions must be checked for possible special limitations imposed upon the use of this
term ­ e.g., subclasses 113 and 133.
AGITATOR ­ For class 366
A stirrer or a deflector.
ALCOHOL ­ For class 514
Denotes an organic compound having the general structure C­OH wherein the carbon atom
bound to the oxygen atom of the hydroxyl group cannot be doubled bonded to oxygen,
sulfur, selenium, or tellurium or triple bonded to nitrogen. The terms as used herein
includes phenols.
ALCOHOL ­ For class 520
Denotes an organic compound having the general structure C­OH wherein the carbon atom
bound to the oxygen atom of the hydroxyl group cannot be double bonded to oxygen,
sulfur, selenium, or tellurium, or triple bonded to nitrogen. The terms as used herein
include phenols.
ALCOSOL ­ For class 516
A colloid system of a dispersand* (discontinuous phase), in a liquid alcohol dispersant*
(continuous phase). Examples are metal oxides such as silica or rare earth oxides
dispersed in lower and higher liquid alcohols. See sol*.
ALDEHYDE ­ For class 514
Denotes an organic compound having the general structure ­C­[C(=O)]n ­H or H­[C(=O)]n­
H (n is 1 or more and wherein the carbon atom bonded to the­[C(=O)]­n group is not
double bonded to oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium, or triple bonded to nitrogen.
ALDEHYDE ­ For class 520
Denotes an organic compound having the group ­C(=O)H [i.e., ­CHO] bonded directly to
hydrogen or to an additional carbon,which carbon is not double bonded to chalcogen (i.e.,
oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium), or triple bonded to nitrogen.
ALDEHYDE DERIVATIVE ­ For class 520
Denotes the following: A. Compounds having a X­CH2­OH group where X is other than
carbon or hydrogen (e.g., paraformaldehyde, methyol derivatives of urea, etc.); B.
Heterocyclic compounds having only carbon and oxygen as alternating ring members (the
number of ring carbon atoms must equal the number of ring oxygen atoms). An example
is trioxane, which is shown as Figure 1 at the end of the “Aldehyde Derivative” definition;
C. Hexamethylene tetramine (i.e., urotropine) or derivatives thereof. Hexamethylene
tetramine per se is shown as Figure 2 at the end of the “Aldehyde Derivative” definition. A
derivative, for purposes of this definition, requires the basic hexamethylene tetramine ring
structure, where substitution has been made for the hydrogens bonded to the ring carbons.
Compounds having a ­CH2OH bonded to atoms other than C, H, or oxygen are regarded as
being two compounds; for instance, a methylol derivative of melamine is regarded as a
mixture of melamine and formaldehyde, and methylol urea is regarded as being a mixture
of urea and formaldehyde. A structurally unspecified novolak is proper for this area in that
it is considered as a mixture of a phenol and an aldehyde. If a novolak of specified
structure is claimed as prepared from specific reactants, then classification is proper on
the basis of the specific reactants.
ALDEHYDE OR KETONE CONDENSATION PRODUCT ­ For class 428
A resin resulting from the reaction of an aldehyde or a ketone and a polyfunctional active
hydrogen containing compound, which, with the elimination of water, produces a chain of
alkylidene units alternating with the residue of the hydrogen supplying compound. Phenol
formaldehyde, urea formaldehyde and polyamino (e.g., melamine) aldehyde or furfural
resins are within the scope of the term. (Nonstructural or Composition)
ALDEHYDE­TYPE ­ For class 520
An aldehyde­type reactant is limited to an aldehyde derivative or methylol derivative.
ALE ­ For class 438
Atomic layer epitaxy
ALEP ­ For class 438
Angle­lapping edge profilometry
ALGAECIDE ­ For class 210
Any material capable of inhibiting or destroying algal growth.
ALICYCLIC ­ For class 260
Denotes a carbocyclic compound not containing a benzene nucleus. Thus,
decahydronaphthalene is alicyclic, but 1,2,3,4­tetrahydronaphthalene is aromatic.
ALICYCLIC RING OR RING SYSTEM ­ For class 514
This term denotes a carbocyclic ring which is not a benzene ring or a polycyclo carbocyclic
ring system which does not have a benzene ring as one of the cyclos.
ALICYCLIC RING OR RING SYSTEM ­ For class 532
This term denotes a carbocyclic ring which is not a benzene ring or a polycyclo carbocyclic
ring system which does not have a benzene ring as one of the cyclos.
ALKALI METAL­ For class 075
A metal of the group Lithium (Li), Sodium (Na), Potassium (K), Rubidium (Rb), Cesium
(Cs), and Francium (Fr).
ALKALI METAL­ For class 420
A metal of the groups Lithium, Sodium, Potassium, Rubidium, Cesium and Francium.
ALKALI METALS ­ For class 257
Li, Na, K, Rb, Cs, Fr.
ALKALI METALS ­ For class 423
The metal elements of the first group of the periodic system, consisting of Li, Na, K, Rb,
Cs.
ALKALI METALS ­ For class 588
The metal elements in group I of the periodic system consisting of Li, Na, K, Rb, and Cs.
ALKALI­FORMING METAL ­ For class 204
A metal element chosen from the group consisting of the alkali metals (lithium (Li),
sodium (Na), potassium (K), rubidium (Rb), cesium (Cs), and francium (Fr)), the alkaline
earth metals (calcium (Ca), strontium (Sr), barium (Ba), and radium (Ra)), and
magnesium (Mg) (included due to its similarity in properties to the alkaline earth metals).
ALKALINE EARTH METAL ­ For class 501
Alkaline Earth Metal is considered to be generic to calcium, strontium, and barium. In this
class (501), magnesium is not considered to be an alkaline earth metal and compositions
containing magnesium compounds are generally provided for apart from those of alkaline
earth metals.
ALKALINE EARTH METAL­ For class 075
A metal of the group Calcium (Ca), Strontium (Sr), Barium (Ba), and Radium (Ra).
ALKALINE EARTH METAL­ For class 420
A metal of the group Calcium, Strontium, Barium and Radium.
ALKALINE EARTH METALS ­ For class 423
The metal elements in Group II A of the periodic system, consisting of Mg, Ca, Sr, Ba.
ALKALINE EARTH METALS ­ For class 588
The metal elements in group II of the periodic system consisting of Mg, Ca, Sr, and Ba.
ALKALINE­EARTH METALS ­ For class 257
Ca, Sr, Ba, Ra.
ALKENYL ­ For class 532
This term denotes an acyclic carbon chain which contains a carbon­to­carbon double bond
and is represented by the formula ­CnH2n­1.
ALKENYLENE ­ For class 532
This term denotes an acyclic carbon chain which contains a carbon­to­carbon double bond
and is represented by the formula ­(CnH2n­2)­.
ALKYL ­ For class 532
This term denotes an acyclic carbon or a saturated acyclic carbon chain represented by the
formula ­CnH2n+1.
ALKYLENE ­ For class 532
This term denotes an acyclic carbon or a saturated acyclic carbon chain represented by the
formula CnH2n­.
ALKYNLENE ­ For class 532
This term denotes an acyclic carbon chain which contains a carbon­to­carbon triple bond
and is represented by the formula ­(CnH2n­4).
ALKYNYL ­ For class 532
This term denotes an acyclic carbon chain which contains a carbon­to­carbon triple bond
and is represented by the formula ­(CnH2n­3)­.
ALLOY ­ For class 075
A union, possessing metallic properties of two or more metallic elements or of nonmetallic
element (s) and metallic elements(s) which are not pure compounds and which are
miscible with each other, which at least to a certain extent when molten forms a more or
less homogeneous liquid having a metallic matrix and which does not separate into distinct
layers when solid. Such combinations when solidified from a melt may consist of
mechanical mixtures, entectics, entectoids, solid solutions, or in part of chemical
compounds one or more of which may exist at the same time. Intermetallic compounds
are considered alloys for purposes of classification. Note. The term ​
galloy​
h when used in
the various definitions of Class 75 is considered to include a ​
gmetallic composition​
h (q.v.)
of the type that is found in Class 420.
ALLOY ­ For class 420
A union, possessing metallic properties of two or more metallic elements, or of
nonmetallic element(s) and metallic element(s) which are not pure compounds and which
are miscible with each other, at least to a certain extent when molten, to form a more, or
less homogeneous liquid having a metallic matrix and which do not separate into distinct
layers when solid. Such combinations when solidified from a melt may consist of
mechanical mixtures, entectics, entectoids, solid solutions, or in part of chemical
compounds one, or more of which may exist at the same time. Intermetallic compounds
are considered alloys for purposes of classification.
ALLOY JUNCTION ­ For class 257
A fused junction produced by combining one or more elemental impurity metals with a
semiconductor. Typical alloyed junctions include indium­ germanium and aluminum­silicon.
ALLOY JUNCTION ­ For class 438
A fused junction produced by combining one or more elemental impurity metals with a
semiconductor. Typical alloyed junctions include indium­germanium and aluminum­silicon.
ALLOY TRANSISTOR ­ For class 257
A transistor in which the emitter­base and collector­base junctions are alloy junctions.
ALPHANUMERIC ­ For class 345
Any symbol found in the ASCII character set.
ALPHANUMERIC ­ For class 715
Any symbol found in the ASCII character
ALTERNATING CURRENT ­ For class 363
Alternating current includes pulsating current which is of such a character as to have the
characteristics of alternating current (e.g., such as to be applied to the primary of a
transformer to produce alternating current in the secondary).
ALTERNATING MOTION ­ For class 074
The intermittent movement along a path, first in one direction and then in the opposite
along such path.
ALTERNATING­CURRENT COMMUTATING MOTOR ­ For class 318
A motor having a commutator electrically connected to a winding of the motor, the motor
being designed to operate on alternating current. Such motors are sometimes referred to
as ​
gseries A­C motors​
h, ​
guniversal motors​
h. See the definition of Repulsion motor above,
and the definition of self­commutated impulse or reluctance motors below.
AMALGAMATION ­ For class 075
The use of a liquid metal to collect, to alloy, or to adhere a desired free metal without
melting the desired free metal with heat.
AMD ­ For class 438
Active matrix display
AMG ­ For class 438
Alternative­metal, virtual­ground (metallization)
AMINE­ ­ For class 514
Denotes an organic compound having a nitrogen atom single or double bonded to a carbon
atom and wherein the carbon atom bonded to the nitrogen atom is devoid of a double bond
to oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium or triple bonded to nitrogen. In addition, those
compounds wherein the same nitrogen atom is bonded to a ­C(=X)­ group (X is O, S, Se,
or Te) and to a carbon atom which is not double bonded to oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or
tellurium, are not considered as being amines, e.g., ­C­NH­C(X=)­ Although amides may
be considered chemically as amines, it has been found expedient for this class to exclude
compounds containing only amide nitrogen herefrom. Therefore, as used throughout this
area, the term amide is not to be confused as being an amine. A compound, however,
which contains a nitrogen atom bonded to a non ­C(=X)­ carbon atom and which contains
either a nitrogen atom bonded to a ­C(=X)­ group or an amide group, is considered as
being an amine.
AMINE ­ For class 520
Denotes an organic compound having a nitrogen atom single or double bonded to a carbon
atom and wherein the carbon atom bonded to the nitrogen atom is devoid of a double bond
to oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium or triple bonded to nitrogen. In addition, those
compounds wherein the same nitrogen atom is bonded to a ­C(=X)­ group (X is O, S, Se,
or Te) and to a carbon atom which is not double bonded to oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or
tellurium, are not considered as being amines, e.g., ­C(=X)NH­CH3, etc. Although amides
may be considered chemically as amines, it has been found expedient for these classes to
exclude compounds containing only amide nitrogen herefrom. Therefore, as used
throughout this area, the term amide is not to be confused as being an amine. A
compound, however, which contains a nitrogen atom bonded to a non ­C(=X)­ carbon atom
and which contains either a nitrogen atom bonded to a ­C(=X)­ group of an amide group,
is considered as being an amine. An organic amine salt of a carboxylic acid has been
classified as if it were a mixture of an amine and a carboxylic acid. An organic diamine
salt of a dicarboxylic acid where the amine salt­forming groups are identical is considered
as being a single amine compound, whereas, if the amine groups are different then they
are regarded as two amine compounds. Where the amine groups contain two or more
nitrogen atoms bonded to the same or different noncarbonyl carbon atom then they are to
be regarded as polyamines.
AMINO ACIDS ­ For class 930
Compounds in which at least one amino group and at least one carboxyl group are bound
to the same carbon skeleton and the nitrogen atom of the amino group may form part of a
ring.
AMINO NITROGEN ­ For class 514
Denotes any nitrogen in an organic compound other than a nitrogen in an inorganic ion of
an addition salt, a nitro (­NO2) or nitroso (­NO). Component parts of an ​
gadduct​
h will be
considered to be attached to each other ionically except if it is clear that the mode of
attachment is nonionic.
AMINO NITROGEN ­ For class 532
Denotes any nitrogen in an organic compound other than a nitrogen in an inorganic ion of
an addition salt, a nitro (­NO2) or nitroso (­NO). Component parts of an ​
gadduct​
h will be
considered to be attached to each other ionically except if it is clear that the mode of
attachment is nonionic.
AMORPHOUS ­ For class 117
Noncrystalline; having no molecular lattice structure; e.g., glass, liquid.
AMORPHOUS ­ For class 148
A term signifying a lack of regular crystalline order, much like the absence of long­range
crystalline order in glass.
AMPLIFICATION, NEUTRON ­ For class 376
See Subcritical Reactor.
AMPLIFIER ­ For class 330
Electric circuit means wherein a variable electrical current or voltage input signal is
applied to an electrical amplifying device to control a source of electrical energy applied to
the same device and from which is derived an output signal of substantially the same
wave form as the input signal and substantially linearly related thereto.
AMPLIFIER ­ For class 725
A unidirectional device that is capable of delivering an enlargement of the waveform of the
electric current, voltage, or power supplied to it.
AMPLIFIER CHANNEL OR CHANNEL ­ For class 330
A part of an amplifier system in which a single signal path may be traced from a source to
a load, and which path includes an amplifier as defined above. Such channel may be a
cascade amplifier.
AMPLIFYING DEVICE ­ For class 330
An electrical transducer of the active type wherein the electrical energy supplied by one
system (power supply) is controlled by the electrical energy supplied by another system
(signal source) limited to the active transducer device element itself such as a vacuum
tube, transistor, controllable gas tube, saturable reactor, variable resistive element, etc..
See Active Elements.
AMPLITUDE LIMITER ­ For class 330
A means in a circuit to limit the amplitude of the electrical voltage across it or the current
in it to a value below or above a fixed predetermined value, particularly the former.
AMPLITUDE RANGE ­ For class 333
The ratio of the highest amplitude to the lowest amplitude of an undulating wave.
AMPLITUDE RANGE COMPRESSOR ­ For class 333
A nonlinear device having an input and an output, the amplitude range of the output wave
being less than the amplitude range of the input wave.
AMPLITUDE RANGE EXPANDER ­ For class 333
A nonlinear device having an input and an output, the amplitude range of the output wave
being larger than the amplitude range of the input wave.
AMPLITUDE STABILIZATION ­ For class 331
The correction for, prevention of, or compensation for an undesired change in amplitude of
the generated waves of the oscillator from a desired value.
ANAEROBIC ­ For class 210
Treating liquids, generally sewage by micro­organisms which change noxious stuff to
innocuous materials, in the absence of oxygen. Some solids are made into water and
gases as methane, carbon monoxide, etc. A septic tank is an example of anaerobic
digestion of sewage.
ANALOG ­ For class 388
Of or pertaining to the general class of devices or circuits in which the output varies as a
continuous function of the input (cf., ​
gdigital​
h below).
ANALOG CONTROL ­ For class 388
A control circuit utilizing analog, as opposed to digital, signals.
ANALYTE ­ For class 435
The compound or composition to be measured.
AND ­ For class 425
When used in a subclass title indicates plural basic subject matter of this class. And/or has
not been used; see ​
gOR​
h.
ANGLE OF ATTACK ­ For class 416
The acute angle between the chord* of a working member* and the velocity vector of the
working fluid* flow relative to the member. See Figure I.
ANGSTROM ­ For class 210
A unit of length used to measure wavelength of lights and diameters of atoms or
molecules. Designated by A and equal to 10­8cm.
ANIMAL CHARCOAL ­ For class 502
See Bone Black
ANIMAL MEMBRANE ­ For class 428
Material derived from an animal and found there originally in film or layer form, e.g.,
bladder,skin or scale. Glue or gelatin in a film form is not included here because neither
exists in the animal as a layer or foil. (Nonstructural or Composition)
ANIONIC SUBSTITUENT ­ For class 510
Denotes that portion of an organic compound which is negatively charged in an aqueous
solution at a neutral pH (i.e., pH=7) and is attached to the portion of the molecule of
higher molecular weight by covalent bonding. Examples of common anionic substituents
include carboxyl, sulfate, or phosphate monoester or sulfonate groups, as well as their
salts, including betaines.
ANISEIKONIA ­ For class 351
The inequality in shape and size between the two ocular images seen in binocular vision.
ANNEAL ­ For class 065
See Subclass References to the Current Class, above, for a subclass reference to the term
ganneal.​
​
h
ANNEALING ­ For class 148
A single thermal heat treatment wherein the heating of a metal workpiece to a
temperature results in improved formability.
ANODE ­ For class 330
An electrode which acts as the positive terminal of an electric discharge or which acts as
the positive terminal of an electric field to cause a discharge or accelerate the electrons in
an electric discharge.
ANODES ­ For class 313
An electrode which acts as the positive terminal of the discharge or which acts as the
positive terminal of an electric field to cause a discharge or accelerate the electrons in a
discharge. See the definition of cathode above, and the definition of control electrode
below.
ANTENNA ­ For class 725
That part of a transmitting or receiving system that is designed to radiate or to receive
electromagnetic waves, such as radio waves.
ANTENNA ARRAY ­ For class 343
A plurality of active antennas coupled to a common source or load to produce a directive
radiation pattern. Usually the spatial relationship also contributes to the directivity of the
antenna.
ANTENNA COMPONENT ­ For class 343
A portion of the antenna performing a distinct function and limited for use in an antenna,
as for example, a reflector, director or active antenna.
ANTENNA COUNTERPOISE ­ For class 343
Structure of conductive material most closely associated with ground but insulated from or
capacitively coupled to the natural ground, and aiding in the function of the natural ground,
particularly where variations or limitations of the characteristics of the natural ground
interfere with its proper function, and such structure being connected to the terminal of the
signal receiver or source opposing the active antenna terminal.
ANTENNA COUPLING NETWORK ­ For class 343
A passive network (which may be resistive, inductive or capacitive or any combination
thereof) for transmitting the signal energy between the active antenna and a source or
receiver of such signal energy.
ANTENNA GROUNDING STRUCTURE ­ For class 343
Ground, or structure most closely associated with or simulating ground which is connected
to the terminal of the signal receiver or source opposing the active antenna terminal, (i.e.,
the signal receiver or source is interposed between the active antenna and this structure),
for establishing a reference potential level for operating the active antenna.
ANTENNA INHERENT REACTANCE ­ For class 343
This includes not only the distributed reactance of the active antenna but also the natural
reactance due to its location and surroundings, as for example, the capacity relation
inherent in the position of the active antenna relative to ground.
ANTENNA LEAD­IN ­ For class 343
A conductive means (transmission line, feed line) for conveying the signal energy between
the active antenna and the signal source or receiver, and extending directly from the
active antenna towards the source or receiver.
ANTENNA SHIELD ­ For class 343
A conductive or low reluctance structure, such as a wire, plate or grid which is adapted to
be placed in the vicinity of an active antenna to reduce, as by dissipation through a
resistance or by conduction to ground, undesired electromagnetic radiation, or electric or
magnetic fields, which are directed toward the active antenna from an external source or
which emanate from the active antenna.
ANTENNA TUNING ­ For class 343
Adjusting an inductance or capacity combined with the active antenna but distinct and
separate therefrom, the inductance or capacity providing a reactance which combines with
the inherent reactance of the active antenna to establish a resonance in a circuit including
the active antenna, this resonance being at a frequency other than the natural electrical
resonant frequency of the active antenna, adjustment of the inductance or capacity
changing this resonance; or adjusting the length of an electrically long linear antenna to
alter the electrical resonance of the antenna.
ANTIBODY ­ For class 436
A protein of the globulin in type that is formed in an animal organism in response to the
administration of an antigen and that is capable of combining specifically with that antigen.
Abbr Ab. See also immunoglobulin.
ANTI­CATHODE ­ For class 313
Same as ​
gtarget​
h or anode. Used in reference to X­ray tube anodes.
ANTIFERROMAGNETISM ­ For class 428
Antiferromagnetism occurs when the exchange interaction between neighboring atoms
cancel each other, so the net magnetic moment is zero. Examples of antiferromagnetic
materials are (Pt, Ir, Cr , and Pd) Mn alloys, and select transition metal oxides.
ANTIGEN ­ ANTIBODY COMPLEX ­ For class 436
The generally insoluble molecular aggregate that is formed by the specific interaction of
antigens and antibodies. It is also referred to as the immune complex.
ANTIGEN ­ For class 436
A substance, frequently a protein that can stimulate an animal organism to produce
antibodies and that can combine specifically with the antibodies thus produced; called also
complete antigen as distinct from a hapten. Abbr Ag.
ANTILOCK OR ANTISKID ­ For class 701
A process of controlling a vehicle to enhance the braking performance during deceleration
of the vehicle by manipulating the brake pressure.
ANTISPIN ­ For class 701
A process of controlling a vehicle to enhance the driveability of the vehicle during starting
or acceleration of the vehicle by manipulating at least one of (1) brake pressure, (2)
engine torque, and (3) transmission torque.
ANVIL ­ For class 072
An undriven tool which, as disclosed, is designed and intended to react against work with
sufficient force to enable an operation of the class type to be effected in some portion of
the work. Note. An undriven flat­faced tool is regarded as an ​
gAnvil​
h, even though work of
a specific shape may be deformed into flatness against it.
ANVIL ­ For class 083
A tool comprising a smooth­faced, imperforate member, the smooth face having the
purpose of contacting the work and providing a reaction surface against which a relatively
movable tool may abut in its work penetrating movement.
ANVIL ­ For class 227
A nonactuated (fixed or adjustably positionable) tool having a face portion designed and
intended to react against a driven member to restrict the movement of the material of
said member in at least one direction during the driving of said member.
APCVD ­ For class 438
Atmospheric­pressure CVD
APD ­ For class 438
Avalanche photodiode
APERTURE ­ For class 396
An aperture is an opening in the camera through which light passes in order to expose a
photographic medium.
APERTURE PLATE ­ For class 352
A portion of the gate which confines the recorded image to a single frame in a motion
picture camera gate or confines the projected light beam to a single frame in a motion
picture projector.
APERTURE VALUE (Av) ­ For class 396
Aperture value is a logarithmic number indicative of aperture size.
APPLICAITON PROGRAM ­ For class 719
A computer program designed to perform a certain type of work, such as an application to
manipulate text, numbers, graphics, or a combination of these elements. An application
differs from an operating system (which runs a computer), a utility (which performs
maintenance or general­purpose chores), and a language (with which computer programs
are created).
APPLICATION PROGRAM ­ For class 709
A computer program designed to perform a certain type of work, such as an application to
manipulate text, numbers, graphics, or a combination of these elements. An application
differs from an operating system (which runs a computer), a utility (which performs
maintenance or general­purpose chores), and a language (with which computer programs
are created).
APPLICATION PROGRAM ­ For class 713
A computer program designed to perform a certain type of work, such as an application to
manipulate text, numbers, graphics or a combination of these elements. An application
differs from an operating system (which runs a computer), a utility (which performs
maintenance or general­purpose chores), and a language (with which computer programs
are created).
APPLICATION PROGRAM ­ For class 718
A computer program designed to perform a certain type of work, such as an application to
manipulate text, numbers, graphics, or a combination of these elements. An application
differs from an operating system (which runs a computer), a utility (which performs
maintenance or general­purpose chores), and a language (with which computer programs
are created).
APPLICATOR ­ For class 228
A device by or through which heat, pressure, vibratory energy, flux* and/or filler* may be
applied directly to the work*.
APPLICATOR ­ For class 401
A coating tool or such a tool combined with a manually manipulable holder.
APRON ­ For class 037
This device is the pivotally mounted front covering for a scoop adapted to pivot to an open
position when loading and unloading and to a closed position when holding and transporting
material.
APRON ­ For class 400
A member closely adjacent to the cylindrical platen* of a typewriter that serves to guide a
record­medium* into close contact with the platen. It is usually a thin sheet of relatively
rigid material having a length dimension approximating the length of the platen and is
arcuately shaped to approximately the radius of the platen whereby it conforms to part of
the periphery of the platen. It is usually located underneath the platen and closely adjacent
thereto so that the record­medium is guided between the apron and the platen to be
partially wrapped around the platen. The apron may also serve as a mounting for feed­
rollers* that cooperate with the platen to move the record­medium in a line­space*
direction.
AQUASOL ­ For class 516
See hydrosol*.
AQUEOUS ­ For class 210
A liquid containing water. Generally water is the major part as in blood, brine, milk, etc.,
but may comprise a substantial but not major portion as in a water­alcohol mixture of
various proportions. Usually trace amounts of water are not considered aqueous.
ARBITRARILY VARYING ­ For class 329
Indicates having a future value which is not predictable from past values. (Arbitrary is the
opposite of repetitious).
ARBITRARILY VARYING ­ For class 332
Indicates having a future value which is not predictable from past values. (Arbitrary is the
opposite of repetitious).
ARC ­ For class 373
A prolonged electrical discharge, or series of prolonged discharges between two
electrodes, or between an electrode and a current carrying material.
ARC ­ For class 438
antireflective coating
ARCHITRAVE ­ For class 052
The finish around and extending away from a door or window opening.
ARM ­ For class 901
The appendage emanating from the base* of the robot and running to, but not including
the end effector*.
ARMATURE ­ For class 388
The moving element in an electromechanical device such as the rotating part of a
generator or motor, the movable part of a relay, or the spring mounted portion of a bell or
buzzer.
AROMATIC ­ For class 260
Denotes a compound which contains a benzene nucleus whether or not it is condensed with
other rings.
AROMATIC ­ For class 424
Denotes a compound which contains a benzene nucleus whether or not it is condensed with
other rings.
ARRANGEMENT ­ For class 705
Either a device or a method of use of a device for performing the indicated process.
ARRAY ­ For class 234
A plurality of tools or sensing elements arranged to be driven as a group by a common
actuator.
ARRAY ­ For class 506
Set of compounds maintained in a specified spatial distribution (e.g., in the wells of a 96­
well plate, in pins held in a rack, or at the tip of optical fibers arranged in a bunch, etc.).
ARRAY ­ For class 977
Arrangement of multiple units, usually ordered; array may be organized in linear, flat, or
3­dimensional positioning of the multiple units.
ARTICLE ­ For class 428
A discrete determinate three dimensional thing substantially in its ultimate use form, as
distinguished from stock material (e.g., sheet, etc.) from which such articles may be
manufactured. These articles are limited to subclasses 2 through 34.1, part of subclass 542
and subclass 576. (Structural)
ARTIFICIAL ATOM ­ For class 977
Quantum dot that confines a certain number or electrons producing an electron waveform
structure quantum, which is mechanically analogous to an atom; alternatively used to
describe hollow spherical fullerene, such as buckyballs filled with a dopant, etc.
ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE (AI) ­ For class 701
Computer emulation of aspects of human intelligence such as speech recognition,
deduction, inference, creative response, the ability to learn from past experience, and the
ability to make reasonable inferences from incomplete information. Examples of AI include
expert systems, neural networks, and fuzzy logic.
ARTIFICIAL LINES ­ For class 333
Networks for simulating impedance characteristics of a smooth or loaded electrically long
transmission line over a frequency range.
ARYL ­ For class 520
Denotes a benzene ring or a carboxylic ring system having a benzene ring as part of the
system.
ARYL ­ For class 987
Denotes an independent benzene ring or a benzene ring which is part of a fused or bridged
ring system.
ARYL RING OR RING SYSTEM ­ For class 514
This term denotes a benzene ring or a polycyclo carbocyclic ring system having a benzene
ring as one of the cyclos.
ARYL RING OR RING SYSTEM ­ For class 532
This term denotes a benzene ring or a polycyclo carbocyclic ring system having a benzene
ring as one of the cyclos.
ASBESTOS ­ For class 428
A native magnesium calcium silicate. Asbestos is not considered to be included in the term
gmetal compound​
​
h for purposes of this class, but is included in silicon containing, unless
specifically stated otherwise in a title or definition. (Nonstructural or Composition)
ASG ­ For class 438
Arsenosilicate glass
a­Si ­ For class 438
Amorphous silicon
ASPHALT ­ For class 208
A brown to black solid bituminous substance either occurring naturally or obtained as a
residue from certain petroleums, coal tars, lignite tar, etc.
ASSEMBLED SHOE ­ For class 012
includes within its scope the upper and sole when they are secured together. In shoe
making, the upper including various parts thereof, such as the vamp, toe tip, quarters,
linings, etc., are assembled and secured. The thus assembled upper is generally
conformed to shoe shape by a lasting operation and attached to a sole. When the upper
and sole are attached the product is known as a shoe in the trade. It will be noted that this
term includes within its scope, (1) partially completed shoes, (2) shoes having outsoles
and heels which are ready for wear, and (3) shoes being worn by their wearers.
ASSEMBLING ­ For class 029
The physical act of or means for juxtaposing, associating, integrating, joining and/or
putting together, with or without securing, of machines, devices, and things (articles).
ASSEMBLY ­ For class 072
The act or operation of bringing into juxtaposition or contact a plurality of preforms (self­
shape­sustaining objects) and/or joining said preforms, i.e., so treating one or more of
them as to restrict their relative mobility. Note. The mere ordering, stacking, or piling of
workpieces prior to a metal­deforming operation thereupon, or the similar handling of
products, is not regarded as ​
gAssembly​
h for the purposes of this class.
ASTIGMATISM ­ For class 351
Defect of vision caused by unequal curvature of the refracting surfaces of the eye.
ATOMIC FORCE MICROSCOPE (AFM) ­ For class 977
Instrument with a nanosized tip that manipulates or detects based upon a separation
dependency force between the tip and the object being manipulated or detected.
ATTACHED DIRECTLY OR BONDED DIRECTLY ­ For class 514
These terms are used to show that specified moieties are connected by bonds only.
ATTACHED DIRECTLY OR BONDED DIRECTLY ­ For class 532
These terms are used to show that specified moieties are connected by bonds only.
ATTACHED INDIRECTLY ­ For class 514
This term denotes that at least one atom, as well as bond, connects specified moieties.
ATTACHED INDIRECTLY ­ For class 532
This term denotes that at least one atom, as well as bonds, connects specified moieties.
ATTACHMENTS ­ For class 015
As an exception to the other GLOSSARY definitions, patents which recite that (1) a cleaning
or coating means is attached to an object which is cleaned or coated thereby or (2) that
any device is attached to a cleaning or coating agency, have been classified as
attachments regardless of whether they are machines or not, disregarding the relative
superiority of these subclasses in the classification schedule.
ATTENUATOR ­ For class 330
Devices and networks consisting of one or more elements which exhibit only a positive
resistance effect and which reduce the intensity of the energy passing through the device
by dissipation, (1) the elements being proportioned to permit a change in their value to
control the energy loss while maintaining substantially constant input and/or output
impedance of the device, and/or (2) the elements being proportioned to permit the device
to be inserted in the circuit to provide an energy loss without introducing any reflections in
the circuit, and/or (3) the elements being combined with a long line or long line element,
and/or (4) the device or network having an impedance equal to the impedance of a
specified long line, and/or (5) the device or network is claimed as being particularly
modified for use over a frequency band so that its characteristics are particularly related
to frequency.
ATTENUATOR ­ For class 333
Devices and networks consisting of one or more elements which exhibit only a positive
resistance effect and which reduce the intensity of the energy passing through the device
by dissipation, (a) the elements being proportioned to permit a change in their value to
control the energy loss while maintaining substantially constant input and/or output
impedance of the device, and/or (b) the elements being proportioned to permit the device
to be inserted in the circuit to provide an energy loss without introducing any reflections in
the circuit, and/or (c) the elements being combined with a long line or long line element,
and/or (d) the device or network having an impedance equal to the impedance of a
specified long line, and/or (e) the device or network is claimed as being particularly
modified for use over a frequency band so that its characteristics are particularly related
to frequency.
ATTITUDE ­ For class 701
Orientation of a vehicle with respect to a reference plane. An example in an automobile
would be orientation of the vehicle body relative to the road surface whereas in
aeronautics it may define the orientation of the aircraft relative to the earth.
AUDIO ­ For class 725
Pertaining to frequencies corresponding to a normally audible sound wave. Note: These
frequencies range roughly from 15 Hz to 20,000 Hz.
AUSTEMPERING ­ For class 148
A procedure that involves preliminary quenching of austenized metal to a temperature in
the lower bainite range, usually in a molten salt bath, holding at this temperature until
transformation is complete, and quenching or air cooling to room temperature. If desired,
a lower hardness level may be produced by including an additional tempering step.
AUSTENIZING ­ For class 148
A process of heating to an elevated temperature within the austenitic range.
AUTODOPING ­ For class 438
The introduction via the vapor phase of impurities from an existing substrate region (and
adjacent supports, e.g., susceptors, etc.) into another substrate region, typically during
growth of the same.
AUTOMATIC CONTROL ­ For class 323
Includes means for sensing the existence of, the magnitude or level of, or a deviation of a
predetermined condition (e.g., the existence, magnitude of change of temperature,
voltage, etc.) combined with means for initiating the operation of a control means to
perform a control function on the system upon the occurrence of the predetermined
condition.
AUTOMATIC CONTROL ­ For class 363
Includes means for sensing the existence of, the magnitude of, or a deviation of a
predetermined condition, e.g., the existence, magnitude or change of temperature voltage,
etc., combined with means for initiating the operation of a controlled means to perform a
controlling operation.
AUTOMATIC FREQUENCY STABILIZATION ­ For class 331
The restoration of the generated frequency of the oscillator to a desired value by sensing
the deviation in frequency, in direction and amount, from the desired value and instituting
a corrective action proportional to sensed deviation to adjust the frequency determining
element of the oscillator in such direction and amount so as to return the oscillator
frequency to the desired value.
AUTOMATIC STARTING AND STOPPING ­ For class 318
Starting, stopping, or the combination of these two operations is treated in this class as a
single motor operation. Automatic starting and stopping (i.e., starting or stopping which is
initiated in response to a condition) is classified for the most part in subclass 445 or in the
subclasses specified in the notes to the definition of those subclasses. If the stopping
control involves motor braking, then the patent is classified in the braking control
subclasses. If the stopping control involves motor deceleration control, but not motor
braking, then the patent is classified in the motor acceleration control subclasses. If the
starting control involves motor acceleration control, then the patent is classified in the
motor acceleration subclasses. See diverse motor operations for the classification where
the system has means for automatic starting or stopping of the motor and also means for
performing another control operation. Where the motor is stopped and then started in the
reverse direction of motion, the patent is classified in the motor reversing control
subclasses. See below, for a definition of Reversing Control. Where the motor armature or
primary current is controlled during the starting and/or stopping period other than for
acceleration, deceleration, or braking control, see definition of Motor Load Control.
AUTOTHERMIC DISTILLATION ­ For class 201
A thermolytic distillation operation in which the distilland, either by combustion of a
portion of itself or by other chemical change, furnishes at least part of the heat for
thermolysis and volatilization of either the inherent or the thermolized volatile matter.
AUXILIARY DISCHARGE ELECTRODE ­ For class 315
An electrode which is connected in the circuit so that the discharge is initiated between it
and one of the principal electrodes, the auxiliary discharge conditioning the discharge
space between the principal electrodes so that a discharge between the principal
electrodes can be established.
AUXILIARY GRID ­ For class 330
Any grid, of an electronic tube other than the signal input grid.
AUXILIARY STARTING ELECTRODE ­ For class 313
An electrode designed for use in a discharge device having at least two principal discharge
electrodes and the auxiliary starting electrode. The starting electrode is designed to be
connected in the circuit so that the discharge is initiated between it and one of the
principal electrodes, the auxiliary discharge conditioning the discharge space so that a
discharge between the principal electrodes can be established. An auxiliary starting
electrode does not necessarily differ in structure or material from any other electrode.
Auxiliary starting electrodes are usually simple electrodes, a wire or rod, and are usually
not formed from as heavy or strong material as the principal electrodes. Usually an
auxiliary starting electrode is placed close to a principal electrode so that the discharge
may be initiated between the auxiliary starting electrode and the main electrode at a
smaller voltage than is necessary to initiate the discharge between the principal
electrodes. The auxiliary starting electrode may be supplied with current only during the
starting period or it may be supplied with current during the operation of the device so
that a continuous discharge takes place between it an done of the principal electrodes to
assure ionization in the discharge space so that the discharge between the principal
electrodes may take place at the proper time. The latter type of auxiliary starting
electrodes are also known as ​
gholding electrodes​
h. Where a plurality of auxiliary starting
electrodes are used, they may be spaced at intervals between the principal electrodes so
that the discharge may first be established between one principal electrode and the nearer
auxiliary starting electrode, then to a more remote auxiliary starting electrode and so on
until the discharge is established between the principal electrodes. If a plurality of
auxiliary starting electrodes are used, one may be placed close to each of a plurality of
principal electrodes. In as much as the determination of whether or not an electrode is an
auxiliary starting electrode depends upon the circuit connections to the discharge device,
and this class includes only the structure of the discharge device, per se, only in
subclasses 170+ (liquid electrode discharge devices) and subclasses 596+ and 601+ (gas
or vapor­type discharge devices) is the classification based upon one of the electrodes
being an auxiliary starting electrode.
AUXILIARY­OPERATION ­ For class 234
Any of the functions to be found in a selective cutting machine other than the selection* of
tools, (e.g., tool actuation*, feed* of pattern or workpiece, change of code*, shift of
control to or from a keyboard or pattern­senser*, starting or stopping of any portion of the
machine, etc.).
AUXILIARY­RECORD­PROGRAM ­ For class 400
A set of instructions used in a programmed­control­system* of a typewriter, which set of
instructions may be readily removed from the typewriter so that another set of
instructions may be inserted into the typewriter to perform a different or a modified
sequence of typing functions.
AVALANCHE BREAKDOWN ­ For class 257
A sudden change from high dynamic electrical resistance to very low dynamic resistance in
a reverse biased semiconductor device, e.g., a reverse biased junction between p­type and
n­type semiconductor materials, wherein current carriers are created by electrons or holes
which have gained sufficient speed to dislodge valence electrons. Avalanche breakdown
can cause structural damage to a semiconductor device.
AVALANCHE BREAKDOWN ­ For class 438
A sudden change from high dynamic electrical resistance to very low dynamic resistance in
a reverse biased semiconductor device (e.g., a reverse biased junction between p­type
and n­type semiconductor materials) wherein current carriers are created by electrons or
holes which have gained sufficient speed to dislodge valence electrons. Avalanche
breakdown can cause structural damage to a semiconductor device.
AXIAL LEAD ­ For class 257
A wire lead coming from the end of and along the axis of a resistor, capacitor, or other
component.
AXIS­OF­BEND ­ For class 072
That imaginary line used as a center about which the bending of moving work occurs. For
convenience in illustrating the application of the term to the deformation of planiform
work, three such axes may be considered, all being related to the direction of work
movement and to the disposition of a planar nonthickness surface (see Figure III­1). The
three axes are defined as follows:
(A) X­Axis is a line both parallel to the direction of movement of the work and parallel to a
nonthickness surface thereof.
(B) Y­Axis is a line both perpendicular to the direction of movement of the work (i.e.,
length) and perpendicular to a nonthickness surface thereof.
(C) Z­Axis is a line both perpendicular to the direction of movement of the work and
parallel to a nonthickness surface thereof.
In the case of strand or rodlike work (i.e., wherein a cross section taken transverse to its
length shows substantially equal width and thickness), corresponding or analogous axes
are used for convenience.
Figure III­2 shows the product partially bent around a Z­Axis to form a transverse bend or
the first convolution of a spiral coil.
Figure 111­3 shows the product bent around a Z­Axis and additionally deflected along the
Z­Axis­of­Bend, to form a helical­coil from rod.
Figure III­4 shows the operation termed “levelling” wherein each successive work portion
is deflected in alternation about a plurality or parallel Z­Axes, whereby each portion
travels through an undulating path.
Figure III­5 shows the side margins of the work bent around the X­Axis to form a trough.
Further bending of the side margins obviously form a tube.
AZEOTROPIC DISTILLATION ­ For class 203
A separatory distillation of a liquid in which a substance is added to the distilland mixture
in order to assist separation of its components by forming with one or more of the
components a mixture having a minimum boiling point. (The art has also used the term for
a distillation process in which two substances in the starting material are removed by their
forming a minimum boiling mixture).
BACK BONDED ­ For class 257
The bonding of active chips to a substrate using the back of the chip opposite the side
containing active solid­state devices.
BACK­ For class 412
The back is that portion of a book formed where and when the sections of it are united by
sewing, stitching(), or stapling. The term back is sometimes erroneously used to describe
the portion of the outer covering member which encloses the back, but the term spine(*)
is preferred for this portion of the covering member.
BACKER ­ For class 052
Means forming an extended surface against which a settable material is cast, e.g.,
troweled, spread, poured etc., the material when set forming a wear surface or facing.
BACKHOE ­ For class 037
This is a material handling machine which includes a boom pivoted to a vehicle, a handle
or dipstick pivoted to the boom, and bucket or scoop pivoted to the dipstick with the open
top of the bucket facing back toward the vehicle.
BACKING­ For class 412
The book making operation referring to the step for making the back() of the book(*),
wherein the back(*) has been previously sewn and glued, whereby the back edge of the
sheets(*), signatures(*), quires(*), etc., which make up the book(*) are splayed outwards
from the center of the book(*) and gives the back(*) a convex shape. This adds to the
permanence of the back and provides an abutment for the boards in the book(*) covering
member. Rounding and backing(*) are considered synonymous for purposes of the terms
of this Glossary.
BACTERICIDE ­ For class 210
Any material capable of inhibiting or destroying bacteria.
BAIT ­ For class 065
See Subclass References to the Current Class, above, for a subclass reference to the term
gbait.​
​
h
BALANCED CIRCUIT ­ For class 330
A circuit having its conductors electrically symmetrical with respect to a reference
potential plane (e.g., ground). The potential between the two sides and ground are equal
and of opposite sign. For example, a horizontal two­wire line may be a balanced line. See
Push­Pull Stage.
BALANCED CIRCUIT ­ For class 333
A circuit having its conductors electrically symmetrical with respect to a reference
potential plane (e.g., ground). The potentials between the two sides and ground are equal
and of opposite sign. For example, a horizontal two wire line may be a balanced line.
BALL BOND ­ For class 257
A bond formed by a round, ball­shaped lead on a semiconductor device.
BALLISTIC TRANSPORT DEVICE ­ For class 257
An active solid­state electronic device in which an active layer is present through which
carriers* pass, wherein the active layer is thinner than the mean free path of the carriers*
in the material in that layer, so that carriers* can pass through the layer without
scattering. Carriers* are typically injected into the ballistic transport layer as ​
ghot​
h
carriers*, having an energy, in the case of electrons, substantially greater than the
minimum of the conduction band*, or in the case of holes, substantially lower than the
maximum of the valence band. Ballistic electron injectors include heterojunctions, tunnel
barriers, and punchthrough (e.g., planar doped or camel) barriers.
BAND ­ For class 053
A species of cover in which the cover material completely encircles the contents in one
direction only, such as girth, leaving the contents fully exposed on two sides or ends, and
which is in frictional contact with the contents so as to be retained thereon. See
gBINDING​
​
h.
BAND GAP ­ For class 257
The difference between the energy levels of electrons bound to their nuclei (valence
electrons) and the energy levels that allow electrons to migrate freely (conduction
electrons). The band gap depends on the particular semiconductor involved.
BAND GAP ­ For class 438
The difference between the energy levels of electrons bound to their nuclei (valence
electrons) and the energy levels that allow electrons to migrate freely (conduction
electrons). The band gap depends on the particular semiconductor involved.
BANDWIDTH ­ For class 370
The width of a communications channel.
BANDWIDTH ­ For class 725
The range of frequencies within which performance, with respect to some characteristic,
falls within specific limits. For example, the specified frequency range over which the
amplitude response does not vary more than a defined amount. Bandwidth is commonly
defined at the points where the response is 3 dB less than the reference value (0.707 root­
mean­square voltage ratio). In broadband networks, the frequency range that a
component, circuit, or system passes or uses. Also, the range of frequencies, expressed in
hertz, that can pass over a given channel. For example, a television channel typically
occupies a bandwidth of 6,000,000 Hz (6 MHz), and cable systems typically occupy 5­300
MHz or higher of the electromagnetic spectrum.
BARK ­ For class 144
The peripheral natural covering of a tree*.
Bark spectrum ­ For class 704
The width of one critical band.
BARRIER ­ For class 049
A construction forming an extended indefinite surface preventing or inhibiting the passage
of persons or things, e.g., wall, ceiling, floor, roof or cover.
BARRIER ­ For class 052
A construction forming an extended indefinite surface preventing or inhibiting the passage
of persons or things, e.g., wall, ceiling, floor, roof or cover.
BARRIER ­ For class 249
A construction forming an extended indefinite surface preventing or inhibiting the passage
of persons or things, e.g., wall, ceiling, floor, etc.
BARRIER LAYER DEVICE ­ For class 029
An electrical component consisting of two conductors placed either in contact with each
other or separated by an interface layer to which contacts or terminals have been secured,
which component has a nonlinear resistance characteristic, as a result of the electrical
action of the interface between the two conductors rather than from the characteristic of
the conductors.
BARRIER REGION OR LAYER ­ For class 257
A region which extends on both sides of a semiconductor junction in which all carriers are
swept away from the junction region. The region is depleted of carriers. This is also
referred to as a depletion region.
BARRIER REGION OR LAYER ­ For class 438
A region which extends on both sides of a semiconductor junction in which all carriers are
swept away from the junction region. The region is depleted of carriers. This is also
referred to as a depletion region. Not to be confused with diffusion barrier layers
associated with metallization schemes for active solid state devices.
BARRITT DIODE ­ For class 257
Barrier injection transit time diode. A bipolar or device in which a type of breakdown
known as punchthrough occurs and wherein the punchthrough structure device is operable
at microwave frequencies. In bipolar transistors a direct current path is formed from
emitter to collector due to the formation of a depletion region throughout the base region
and charge carriers from the emitter punch through to the collector. Carriers flowing from
the emitter to the collector take a controlled time to pass through the depletion layer,
leading to a controlled delay in current after a voltage is applied, and effective negative
impedance.
BASE ­ For class 075
A metal which is present in an amount of over 50% by weight in an alloy.
BASE ­ For class 117
The surface upon which a coating is formed, except where a surface has been previously
coated and a second coating is applied, in which case the initial surface is the base.
Contrast with substrate*.
BASE ­ For class 313
A member attached to the lamp or discharge device so that it may be attached to a
supporting socket or supported on a surface. The base usually includes electrical connector
means for connecting the lamp or discharge device in a circuit. Where the lamp or
discharge device is provided with an envelope, the base is usually attached to the
envelope, as by cementing, or the envelope is formed so as to have an integral base
portion.
BASE ­ For class 338
Unless otherwise indicated an element along which the resistance element extends to
impart a rigidity or reinforcement to the resistance element not otherwise present.
BASE ­ For class 420
A metal which is present in an amount of over 50 percent by weight in an alloy, or metallic
composition.
BASE ­ For class 428
That substance or material which has been covered or saturated or permeated, either
partially or completely by another material. This term is synonymous with Substrate.
(Structural)
BASE ­ For class 901
The supporting structure for the arm*.
BASE CURRENT ­ For class 257
The electrical current that flows in the base terminal of a bipolar transistor.
BASE ELECTRODE ­ For class 330
See the definition of point contact or junction transistor above.
BASE REGION ­ For class 257
The region between the emitter and collector of a bipolar transistor into which minority
carriers are injected by the emitter.
BASIC DYE ­ For class 008
A basic or cationic dye will dye substrates having acidic properties, e.g., polyacrylonitrile,
acid modified polyester, etc. They include diphenylmethane, triphenylmethane, xanthene,
naphtroperinone, quinophthalone, quaternary ammonium group, etc., containing dyes.
BASIC INGREDIENT ­ For class 426
Principal constituent (except added water) of a composition considered to be the
fundamental part and by which the composition is (usually) identified. Usually the basic
ingredient constitutes the major portion of the composition, e.g., chocolate milk­milk is the
basic ingredient. In those instances wherein a plurality of percentages of the ingredients
are given that ingredient which constitutes 50 of the total composition (excluding added
water) is considered to be the basic ingredient. The 50% may be determined by summing
like ingredients, e.g., lactose, whey and butter fat are all lacteal derived.
BASIC RECEIVER ­ For class 348
A receiver for converting incoming electric signals into television pictures and the
associated sound.
BATCH ­ For class 065
A properly proportioned mixture of raw materials to be delivered to a melting apparatus.
BATCH CHARGER ­ For class 065
Mechanical means for introducing a batch to a melting apparatus.
BATT ­ For class 264
A term of art for a web or sheet of material generally formed by random interfelting of
mass deposited discrete fibers or from tangled or matted filaments, e.g., cotton batting.
BATTERY ­ For class 320
A unit source of D.C. voltage consisting of a plurality of voltaic cells electrically connected
in series, parallel, or both, to increase available voltage or power from a single cell.
"Plural batteries" include a combination or association of two or more structurally
dependent, or independent, battery units.
BATTERYCELL ­ For class 429
Two spaced electrodes provided with means to transfer an ionic current therebetween.
BBCO ­ For class 438
Barium bismuth copper oxide (a HTSC)
BBD ­ For class 438
Bucket brigade device
BBL ­ For class 438
Buried bit­line
BEAD ­ For class 065
(1) A small piece of glass fused onto an electrical conductor, (2) an enlarged rounded
portion on an edge of an article or stock material, (3) small discrete particles of glass.
BEAM LEADS ­ For class 257
Flat, metallic leads which extend beyond the edges of a chip component like wooden
beams extend from a roof overhang. Beam leads are used to interconnect a component to
film circuitry.
BEAM TUBE ­ For class 331
An active element comprising a source of charged particles, means for concentrating the
particles into a directed beam, means for exerting a control on the beam (e.g., beam
accelerating electrode, control grid, deflecting means, slow wave structure, buncher type
resonator, reflector electrode, etc.) and means for deriving output energy from the
controlled beam.
BEAT FREQUENCY ­ For class 331
The resulting difference (or sum) frequency wave, among other waves, produced when
two waves of different frequencies are combined in a nonlinear device.
BEATER ­ For class 460
A rotary device mounted behind or in front of the cylinder on a combine which strikes the
grains.
BED ­ For class 438
Band edge discontinuity
BELOW GROUND ­ For class 175
​Below Ground​
g
h denotes any point within a hole being formed in the earth from the point
at which the earth is pierced by the means forming the hole.
BELT ­ For class 474
A power transferring member forming an endless loop and constructed of flexible material
or of articulated rigid links to permit the member to conform to a radius of curvature of a
pulley* drive face and intended, in use, to be driven in an endless path; and, by contact
with the pulley drive face, to transmit power to or extract power from the pulley.
BENDING ­ For class 156
Distortion of a workpiece by bodily moving a portion of it throughout its entire thickness
relative to a second portion during which the thickness of the workpiece remains
substantially the same and no significant plastic flow occurs.
BENDING ­ For class 264
Distorting or deforming of a workpiece or self sustaining body by curving or moving a
portion thereof through its entire thickness relative to another portion during which the
thickness thereof remains substantially the same and no significant plastic flow occurs.
BENZENE NUCLEUS ­ For class 260
Denotes the presence of a six­membered ring, all of whose members are carbons and
containing three conjugated double bonds, thus:
BENZENE RING ­ For class 514
This term includes in all cases except where there are explicit limitations to the contrary,
substituted benzene rings, including substitution in the form of an additional fused or
bridged ring or ring system.
BENZENE RING ­ For class 532
This term includes, in all cases except where there are explicit limitations to the contrary,
substituted benzene rings, including substitution in the form of an additional fused or
bridged ring or ring system. Thus, for example, if a subclass reads: ​
gBenzene ring bonded
directly to the five­membered hetero ring​
h, the moiety bonded directly to the hetero ring
may be phenyl, chlorophenyl, dinitrophenyl, naphthyl, etc. All that is necessary to satisfy
the terminology of the subclass is that a substituted or unsubstituted benzene ring be
bonded directly to the hetero ring.
BERYL ­ For class 117
Beryllium aluminum silicate; Be3Al2Si6O18; 3BeO.Al2O3.6SiO2; emerald; aquamarine.
Usually green.
BESSEMER CONVERTER ­ For class 075
A device having passages in its bottom (i.e., tuyeres) through which a gas containing
gaseous Oxygen (e.g., air, etc.) is passed upwardly through molten metal or molten
metalliferous material (e.g., matte, etc.) to treat the metal or material.
BEVEL GEAR ­ For class 475
A gear having radial teeth extending in the same general direction as the rotational axis of
the gear, but inclined with respect to the rotational axis of the gear.
BH ­ For class 438
Buried heterostructure
BHF ­ For class 438
Buffered hydrofluoric acid
BIAS ­ For class 257
A direct current or voltage applied to an active solid­state device that establishes certain
operating characteristics of the device.
BIAS CONTROL ­ For class 330
Control, as defined above applied to control of bias voltage or current of an amplifying
device. This is distinguished from signal feedback in that the bias control voltage or
current has a smoothed average value which adds to or subtracts from the bias voltage or
current and is unlike the signal feedback voltage which varies instantaneously with the
signal at the point from which it is derived. See also, Bias, Bias Voltage or Bias Current.
BIAS, BIAS VOLTAGE, BIAS CURRENT ­ For class 330
In an amplifying device, usually, a steady D.C.. voltage or current applied between two
electrodes usually referred to the input electrodes to form an electric reference means for
the control means, which influences the current flow of an electronic tube or
semiconductor device or the flux relationships of a magnetic saturable reactor. See also
Bias Control and Power Supply.
BIC ­ For class 438
Breakdown of insulator for conduction
BICFET ­ For class 438
Bipolar inversion channel FET
BiCMOS ­ For class 438
Integrated bipolar and CMOS
BICONTINUOUS EMULSION ­ For class 516
Type of emulsion wherein the aqueous or polar phase and the oily or non­polar phases are
characterized as both being continuous. Commonly associated with emulsion
polymerization.
BICYCLO RING SYSTEM ­ For class 514
This term denotes a polycyclo ring system which contains exactly two rings.
BI­DIRECTIONAL ­ For class 379
Capable of use, particularly in transmitting information in two opposite directions.
Additionally, when used to describe an audio transducer, capable of conversion of sound
both to and from electrical signal variations.
BI­FET ­ For class 257
An active solid­state electronic device that contains both bipolar and field effect
transistors.
BILATERAL ­ For class 257
A characteristic of an active solid­state electronic device that permits it to support current
flow in opposite directions.
BiMOS ­ For class 438
Integrated bipolar and MOSFET
BINARY COMPOUND ­ For class 257
A substance that always contains the same two elements in a fixed atomic ratio.
BINARY COMPOUND ­ For class 423
A chemical compound consisting of 2 elements only with 2 or more atoms; e.g., NaC1,
FeC13, Fe304, etc.
BINARY COMPOUND ­ For class 438
A substance that always contains the same two elements in a fixed atomic ratio.
BINDING ­ For class 053
The embracing by means of a filament, strand or wire of either an accumulated bunch of
articles, a series of coils, or a single encased package. It differs from banding in that no
substantial area of the contents is covered, and the binder is usually tied, knotted, or
twisted. Except where applied to a package for this class, (see subclass 138.6), the
process of and apparatus for applying a binding is not here classified. See ​
gPackaging and
Binding Elsewhere Classified​
h of the Class Definition for binding, per se.
BINDING ­ For class 100
The disposing of a flexible filament, strand, or band taut and circumferentially closed
about material.
BINOCULAR ­ For class 359
Pertaining to the use of both eyes in the act of viewing.
BINOCULAR COORDINATION ­ For class 351
Fusion of the sight responses of both eyes, or correct space perception.
BIOCHEMICAL ­ For class 435
By means of a bacteria, yeast, animal or plant cell, or virus, or the parts thereof.
BIOCHEMICAL METHOD ­ For class 506
Process involving the use of micro­organisms, enzymes, vectors, or antibodies.
BIOLOGICALLY ACTIVE POLYPEPTIDE ­ For class 520
Denotes polypeptide chains which have been built up primarily from alpha­ or beta­amino
carboxylic acids and which exhibit biological activity similar to naturally occurring proteins
or polypeptides; such activity may be, for example, hormone activity (e.g., insulin, etc.),
immuno­activity (e.g., antigen or antibody, etc.), antibiotic activity (e.g., bacitracin or
bleomycin, etc.), or antiviral activity (e.g., interferon, etc.). Mere statements that a
material demonstrates any of these activities is sufficient to create a presumption that a
biologically active polypeptide is present. On the other hand, a material merely disclosed
as a polypeptide which has been built­up from amino acids will not be presumed to have
biological activity, and will be placed in Class 520 according to the disclosed structure and
function as appropriate.
BIOMIMETICS or BIOMIMICRY ­ For class 977
Nanotechnology designed to mimic biological structure/processes.
BIONANOTECHNOLOGY (NANOBIOTECHNOLOGY) ­ For class 977
Branch of nanotechnology that uses biological structures, such as proteins, ATPs, DNA,
etc., as building blocks of nanoscale devices. Sometimes called ​
gwet­dry​
h technology,
wherein the term ​
gwet​
h pertains to biological components and ​
gdry​
h refers to engineered,
inorganic nanoparticles.
BIPOLAR ­ For class 257
An active solid­state electronic device in which both positive and negative current carriers
are used to support current flow.
BIPOLAR ­ For class 438
An active solid­state electronic device in which both positive and negative current carriers
are used to support current flow.
BIPOLAR TRANSISTOR ­ For class 257
An active solid­state electronic device with a base electrode and two or more junction
electrodes in which both positive and negative current carriers are used to support current
flow.
BIPOLAR TRANSISTOR ­ For class 438
An active solid­state electronic device with a base electrode and two or more junction
electrodes in which both positive and negative current carriers are used to support current
flow.
BIPROPELLANT ­ For class 060
A reaction motor propellant consisting of two separate substances (usually liquid) fed into
the reaction zone separately. One of the substances is a fuel (e.g., hydrazine); while the
other is an oxidizer (e.g., fluorine).
BIRD"S BEAK ­ For class 438
The lateral encroachment of the localized oxidation region associated with a recessed
oxide isolation structure.
BIREFRINGENT ­ For class 359
Certain crystalline materials have their outer electrons bound more strongly in one
direction than another resulting in the material having two refractive indices depending on
the direction of the oscillation. Such materials are termed birefringent and, if an
unpolarized light ray enters such a material obliquely, it will be refracted into two different
linearly polarized rays having directions of polarization which are normal to one another.
BIREFRINGENT ­ For class 372
The property of dividing a ray of light into two polarized rays (known as the ordinary and
extraordinary rays), the directions of polarization of the rays being at right angles to each
other.
BITUMINOUS OR TARRY RESIDUE ­ For class 428
A composition or compound having the characteristics of a tar or pitch no matter what the
origin. This term includes all asphalts, bitumens, pitches and tars from coal, mineral oil,
cotton seed pitch and the residue from the destructive distillation of wood, and natural oil
distillations. Carbohydrate 1) polyhydroxy mono­aldehydes and polyhydroxy mono­
ketones, generally having the formula Cn(H2O)m and substances which are hydrolized to
these. The term includes cellulose, starch dextran, dextrin, sugar, and lignin.
(Nonstructural or Composition) Note. Wheat paste, which contains gluten, is considered
polyamide.
BJT ­ For class 438
Bipolar junction transistor
BKBO ­ For class 438
Barium potassium bismuth oxide (a HTSC)
BLADE ­ For class 415
A working member on the runner which contacts the working fluid. This member may
variously be called a bucket, vane, pocket or float in the art literature.
BLADE ­ For class 416
A working member* which has a thickness dimension substantially less than its width or
length, the thickness being generally uniform from edge to edge.
BLADE ANGLE ­ For class 416
The acute angle between the chord* of any section of a rotating working member* and its
plane of rotation. As the blade angle usually varies from the hub to the tip, the U.S.
custom is to designate blade angle numerically as that angle occurring at 75% of the radial
distance from the hub to the tip. See Figures I and II.
BLANK ­ For class 072
A discrete piece of material which is intended to be subjected to an operation of the class
type.
BLANK ­ For class 428
See definition of intermediate­article*. (Structural)
BLANK HOLDER ­ For class 072
A mechanism, incorporated in a metal­deforming device, intended to grip a blank prior to
and during deformation thereof. (Often arranged to permit a desired amount of slippage of
said blank in response to the application of deforming force thereto, thereby modifying the
effect of the metal­deforming tools). See ​
gClamp​
h.
BLANKET MATERIAL ­ For class 376
A layer of fertile material placed external to core of the fission reactor. See Fertile
Material.
BLANKING INTERVAL ­ For class 725
In television systems, the range of a composite picture signal containing either vertical or
horizontal synchronizing information. This range is separate from the range containing
picture information.
BLAST FURNACE ­ For class 075
A type of shaft furnace specifically designed to reduce metal compounds (e.g., ore, etc.)
to elemental metal using a combustible solid reductant (e.g., coke, etc.). The furnace is
designed to operate continuously for a long period of time, with solid reductant, metal
compound, and any other desired solid additive (e.g., flux, etc.) being continuously or
periodically added at the top of the furnace and the resulting molten metal and by­product
slag being continuously or periodically tapped from the bottom of the furnace. A gas
containing gaseous Oxygen (e.g., air, etc.) is preheated (usually by the exhaust gas) and
is injected into the furnace through tuyeres above the molten metal and slag level.
BLEEDING ­ For class 516
See syneresis.
BLIND STITCH ­ For class 112
A stitch in which the sewing thread penetrates only one nonthickness surface of a layer or
component. See Figure 1.
BLM ­ For class 438
Ball limiting metallization
BLOCH WAVELENGTH ­ For class 257
The effective wavelength of electrons in a semiconductor crystal, sometimes referred to as
a wave packet or wave function. It can be an order of magnitude larger than the de broglie
wavelength of electrons having the same energy.
BLOCK ­ For class 052
A module whose depth is substantial relative to its length and height and which in use
forms a stable load­bearing member.
BLOCK ­ For class 428
A relatively large piece of material whose thickness is many times that of a web* or
sheet* compared with its width. (Structural)
BLOCK ­ For class 725
To restrict the passage, progress, or exchange of data.
BLOCK COPOLYMER ­ For class 520
A. The structure is given, i.e., a long polymer backbone has attached or coupled to one or
both of its terminal ends one or more polymers at least three reactant units in length or;
B. The copolymer is named as a block providing that the disclosure is otherwise silent as
to its structure or if the structure is likewise given, it is consistent with that described
above or; C. The structure can be ascertained from the following limiting process
conditions (a) Treating a nonterminated solid polymer, that is, one which is terminally
active or ​
gliving​
h, with an ethylenic reactant with subsequent polymerization to form
additional blocks. The process may be continued to produce higher order block
copolymers. For example, treating dilithiated polystyrene with butadiene to yield an ABA
block copolymer; and (b) two or more nonidentical solid polymer chain ends are coupled
directly or through the use of a chemical agent. For example, the coupling of hydroxy
terminated solid polybutadiene with hydroxy terminated polyethylene glycol terephthalate
with phosgene.
BLOCK­TYPE COPOLYMER ­ For class 520
The structure is given, i.e., to a long solid polymer backbone possessing terminally active
sites (i.e., functional groups), or that is a ​
gliving polymer​
h is attached or coupled, through
chemical reaction with those functional groups or sites, an ethylenic reactant containing
one or more functional groups or sites; an example is to contact hydroxy terminated
polybutadiene glycol with allyl isocyanate, or two or more identical solid polymer chain
ends are coupled directly or through the use of a chemical agent. For purposes here,
identical means those polymer segments which contain the same carbon backbone but
differ in stereo regularity (e.g., isotactic, syndiotactic, atactic) optical activity, or degree
of polymerization. Thus, coupling lithium terminated polystyrene segments with molecular
weights of 25,000 and 100,000, respectively, with stannic chloride is proper for this area.
BLOSSOM­END ­ For class 099
This expression relates to the surface area of food at the location of the natural
attachment to the food of the flower or calyx of food such as a cherry or strawberry and
may also include a small portion of adjacent skin; the expression is arbitrarily extended to
include the tip or root of food such as a turnip or potato.
BLOWING ­ For class 065
Shaping or forming an undefined mass of glass in a soft state by introducing gas within a
confined opening within the mass, i.e., by inflating.
BLOWING ­ For class 425
Forming a plastic mass or preform by introducing gas under pressure within the mass or
preform.
BLOWN FATTY ACID ­ For class 516
Fatty acid treated to oxidize, commonly by passing (blowing) air, oxygen, ozonized air, or
ozone through the material under mildly elevated temperatures. The process forms
ketones from hydroxy groups and hydroxy groups at unsaturation sites. Process conditions
also control the degree of polymerization and esterification reactions.
BLOWN OIL ­ For class 516
Oil treated to oxidize, commonly by passing (blowing) air, oxygen, ozonized air, or ozone
through the material under mildly elevated temperatures. The process forms ketones from
hydroxy groups and hydroxy groups at unsaturation sites.
BLUEING ­ For class 148
A process of forming a protective oxide coating on ferrous metal.
BMD ­ For class 438
Bulk micro defect
BODY ­ For class 462
A sheet* in the form of a strip*, leaf*, or book* or any other article to be subjected to a
process or apparatus of this class.
BOE ­ For class 438
Buffered oxide etch
BOILER ­ For class 122
Used as a generic term for a liquid heater. The nature of the liquid heated is immaterial.
Whether the liquid heated is conducted from the boiler as liquid or vapor depends upon the
amount supplied and the degree of heat attained, and for this reason generally no
distinction has been noted in the classification, similar structures being classified together
regardless of the ultimate effect. In the type of boilers known as ​
gflashers​
h this distinction
is of importance and provision has been made therefor.
BOLT ­ For class 070
A securing element mounted on one part and having a portion or portions movable to
cooperative engagement with a keeper on another part to prevent relative movement
between said parts.
BOND ­ For class 425
Uniting by adhesive means or fusion (a mechanical interlock is excluded).
BONDING AREA ­ For class 257
The area, defined by the extent of a metallization land or the top surface of a terminal, to
which a lead is or is to be bonded.
BONDING PAD ­ For class 257
A metallized area to which an electrical connection is to be made. It is also called a
bonding island or a controlled collapse chip connection.
BONDING PAD ­ For class 438
A metallized area to which an external electrical connection is to be made.
BONDING WIRE ­ For class 257
Fine wire for making electrical connections in hybrid circuits between various bonding pads
on the semiconductor device substrate and device terminals or substrate lands.
BONE BLACK ­ For class 502
Solid residue from chafing bones ­ @10%carbon, 80% Ca3(PO4), used particularly in
decolorizing sugar solutions.
BOOK ­ For class 281
Consists of two or more sheets secured together (a) only at their margins or (b) only at a
restricted field within the margins or (c) only at their margins and at a restricted field
within the margins. A folded sheet has not been classified as a book. When a margin of
one sheet is attached to a margin of another sheet to obtain in effect a single sheet of
greater area, the resulting article is still regarded as a sheet rather than a book.
BOOK ­ For class 283
consists of two or more sheets secured together, in the manner recited in the class
definition of Class 281.
BOOK ­ For class 462
Two or more sheets* secured together only at their margins or at a portion thereof, in
particular, the outside limit or edge and adjoining surface of the sheets. A single folded
sheet is not considered to be a book; however, a stack of two or more folded sheets
becomes a book when bonded together along the fold lines.
BOOK­ For class 412
A book consists of two or more sheets() secured together either: (a) only at their margins;
or (b) only at a restricted field within the margins; or (c) only at their margins and at a
restricted field within the margins. When a margin of one sheet is attached to a margin of
another sheet(*) to obtain in effect a single sheet(*) or greater area, the resulting article
is still regarded as a sheet(*) rather than a book. A folded sheet is not considered to be a
book. Book and bound book are synonomous terms and in both, a covering member has
not yet been applied. See this Glossary for the definition of the term completed book(*).
BOOM ­ For class 037
This is a device comprising an elongated beam adapted to project from an excavating
device for the purpose of supporting the excavating equipment and wherein the device is
normally pivoted to a support.
BOOM ­ For class 212
An elongated member protruding from a mast, crane body, trolley, or other supporting
structure and from which the load is suspended.
BOOT ­ For class 713
To start up a computer or the process of starting or resetting a computer.
BORE ­ For class 175
The hole formed by the boring means. It is not limited to a vertically extending hole, but
can extend at any angle into the earth.
BOREWALL ­ For class 175
The wall which forms the periphery of a hole in the earth. In the case of a lined hole the
inside wall of the lining constitutes a borewall for purposes of classification.
BORING MEANS ­ For class 175
A combination of parts comprising an earth boring or drilling device. It may comprise
merely a tool provided with a handle for manipulating the same to form a hole in the
earth, or a complex combination of parts including above ground structure for supporting,
feeding and driving a tool for boring a hole in the earth.
BOSE­EINSTEIN CONDENSATE ­ For class 977
State of matter occurring in certain materials at low temperature wherein particles
behaving under Fermi­Dirac statistics, such as electrons, etc., behave like particles under
Bose­Einstein statistics, such as photons, etc.; also occurs in superconducting materials.
BOSE­EINSTEIN STATISTICS ­ For class 977
Statistical distribution of boson particles, such as photons (light particles), etc., occurring
between energy states.
BOTTOM­UP MANUFACTURING ­ For class 977
Manufacturing that starts with atomic or molecular particles and builds up; term is often
contrasted with top­down manufacturing employing etching, deposition, evaporation, etc.,
associated with traditional semiconductor processes in which processing involves bulk
addition or removal steps.
BOULE ­ For class 117
(From French; ball) A lump of material. In this class the term applies to the raw, single­
crystal* product.
BOWL ­ For class 037
This device is a portion of a scoop which holds and carries the excavated material during
transport. The scoop portion can be adapted to be used in connection with an apron,
elevator, or ejector.
BOWL ­ For class 494
A receptacle­like member having generally­imperforate sidewalls and constituting that
portion of a SEPARATOR within which the subdividing of material into two or more
components takes place, or, at least, commences. Ordinarily considered as part of the
member are such devices or structure as are either affixed thereto or integral therewith.
The art term, rotor, is sometimes used to mean approximately the same as BOWL. (See
the Class Definition, (2) Note and (3) Note, above, and see Subclass References to the
Current Class, above, for a discussion of the phrase ​
ggenerally closed.​
h)
BOX ­ For class 438
Buried oxide
BOXES ­ For class 438
Buried oxide with etch stop
BPSG ­ For class 438
Borophosphosilica glass
BPTEOS ­ For class 438
borophosphoTEOS
BRACE ARM ­ For class 351
A relatively long and slender temple supporting arm or arc substantially identical to the
shape of the upper contour edge of a lens.
BRACKISH ­ For class 210
Somewhat salty, but substantially less so than sea water.
BRAKE ­ For class 425
A baker"s kneading machine. In bread making ​
gbraking​
h is kneading.
BRAKE ­ For class 475
Mechanism to selectively or automatically stop a moving part with respect to a stationary
part.
BRAKE OR CLAMP ­ For class 225
A means for applying friction directly or indirectly to the work, the means as disclosed
being intended to slow, stop or prevent work motion. Class 51 for device for feeding and
severing strips utilized for manifolding.
BRAKE: ­ For class 477
Mechanism operable to stop a rotatable part with respect to a stationary part. If a brake is
used as a part of transmission (i.e., in a planetary transmission to change gear ratio or
direction), such a brake is classified with transmission control rather than brake control.
BRAKE­SLIP ­ For class 701
The slippage of a wheel caused by the braking operation during deceleration of the vehicle.
BREAKDOWN ­ For class 257
A sudden change from high dynamic electrical resistance to a very low dynamic resistance
in a reverse biased semiconductor device, e.g., a reverse biased junction between p­type
and n­type semiconductor materials, wherein reverse current increases rapidly for a small
increase in reverse applied voltage, and the device behaves as if it had negative electrical
resistance.
BREAKDOWN ­ For class 438
A sudden change from high dynamic electrical resistance to a very low dynamic resistance
in a reverse biased semiconductor device (e.g., a reverse biased junction between p­type
and n­type semiconductor materials) wherein reverse current increases rapidly for a small
increase in reverse applied voltage, and the device behaves as if it had negative electrical
resistance.
BREAKDOWN POINT/VOLTAGE ­ For class 257
The voltage value at which breakdown occurs.
BREAKER, COLLOID SYSTEM; BREAKING, COLLOID SYSTEM ­ For class 516
The effective material*, energy, or means used for accomplishing the act of breaking or
resolving (i.e., destroying) a colloid system, such as agent* compositions specialized and
designed for or peculiar to use in colloid system breaking. See emulsion breaker.
BREAKOVER ­ For class 257
The start of current flow in a silicon controlled rectifier.
BREEDER MATERIAL ­ For class 376
See (a) Blanket Material and (b) Fertile Material.
BRIDGE ­ For class 212
An elongated member supported horizontally at two spaced points and which either serves
as or bears a track or guide between the supporting points on which a load­supporting
trolley or a traveling bridge is adapted to move.
BRIDGE ­ For class 351
The connecting part between the lens supporting members of spectacles or eyeglasses.
BRIDGE (­WALL) ­ For class 065
A hollow wall generally having an air space between refractory blocks from which it is
formed and providing an opening or throat adjacent its bottom used in a tank furnace to
separate a working end from a fining or melting zone.
BRINE ­ For class 210
A relatively concentrated salt water solution sometimes from wells or industrial sources
and including sea water.
BRIQUET ­ For class 044
Defined as a fuel object, of a size suitable to be manipulated by a human hand, made, by
consolidating, usually including pressing and shaping, smaller­sizes, loose, broken,
comminuted or other divided carbonaceous powder, particles, chunks, lumps, fibers,
sheets, etc.
BROWNIAN MOTION ­ For class 977
Stochastic motion of a particle suspended in a surrounding gas or liquid comprised of other
particles, molecules, or atoms, which is in thermodynamic equilibrium.
BRUSH ­ For class 388
A piece of conductive material, usually carbon or graphite, which rides on the commutator
of a motor and forms the electrical connection between the motor and a power source.
BSD ­ For class 438
Back side damage
BSE ­ For class 438
buried storage electrode
BSG ­ For class 438
Borosilica glass
BSQ ­ For class 438
Bias sputter quartz
BST ­ For class 438
Barium strontium titanate
BUCKET BRIGADE DEVICE ­ For class 257
A charge transfer device in which only a portion of the charge carriers (electrons or holes)
at each storage site are transferred to the next storage site.
BUCKLE­ For class 024
A securing means wherein either member is adapted to allow structure­to­be­secured () to
pass therethrough, or wherein the members are adapted to allow structure­to­be­
secured(*) to pass completely therebetween in a path generally parallel to the longitudinal
axis of the members. Buckles are designed to adjustably secure belts, bands, or similar
longitudinal articles and generally operate by having one end of the belt band, etc., fixed
securely to one end of the buckle with another frictionally or resiliently securing the belt,
band, etc., or by passing through a provided for aperture in the belt, band, etc., and
generally also has two connected, relatively movable members.
BUCKMINSTERFULLERENE or BUCKYBALL ­ For class 977
Soccer­ball­shaped form of fullerene (C60).
BUFFER ­ For class 725
A device in which data are stored temporarily, in the course of transmission from one
point to another and used to compensate for a difference in the flow of data or time of
occurrence of events when transmitting data from one device to another. Also, the act of
such temporary storage of data.
BULK DEPOSITION OF PARTICULATE MATERIAL ­ For class 156
The fluent delivery of a stream of separate loose pieces onto a receiving surface. The
relative size of the pieces is not significant, rather it is the manner in which they are
handled, as a mass or stream rather than each particle being individually manipulated.
BULK MATERIAL ­ For class 425
A mass or pile of stock material lacking any shape that contributes to a final shape after
molding. Bulk material may have a definite shape but it must not contribute its shape to a
final desired form.
BULK­CHANNEL CCD ­ For class 257
A charge coupled device in which charge is stored and transferred below the surface of the
device.
BULK­EFFECT DEVICE ­ For class 257
An active solid­state device made up of a semiconductor material whose electrical
characteristics and electronic properties are exhibited throughout the entire body of the
material, rather than in just a localized region thereof, e.g., the surface.
BUMP CONTACT ­ For class 257
A term used to describe, typically, solder bumps on a chip or substrate which are found on
only one side of the chip or substrate as, for example, on a flip­chip.
BURIED CHANNEL CCD ­ For class 257
See BULK­CHANNEL CCD.
BURNABLE POISON ­ For class 376
A substance with high neutron capture cross section which has a capture reaction product
of low capture cross section and which is purposely put in a fission reactor to influence the
long term reactivity variations.
BURNER ­ For class 431
Term generic to ​
gburner assembly​
h, ​
gburner head​
h and ​
gflame holder​
h.
BURNER ASSEMBLY ­ For class 431
A unitary device or fixture including a flame holder and associated feeding or supporting
elements.
BURNER HEAD ­ For class 431
A device by which fluent fuel is passed to a combustion space where it forms a flame
projecting from the device.
BURST ­ For class 348
Also called reference burst, the portion of the composite or noncomposite color­picture
signal, comprising a few cycles of a sine wave of chrominance subcarrier frequency, that
is used to establish a reference for demodulating the chrominance signal.
BUS ­ For class 345
A conductor used for transferring data, signals, or power.
BUS ­ For class 709
A conductor used for transferring data, signals, or power.
BUS ­ For class 710
A conductor used for transferring data, signals, or power.
BUS ­ For class 711
A conductor used for transferring data, signals, or power.
BUS ­ For class 712
A conductor used for transferring data, signals, or power.
BUS ­ For class 713
A conductor used for transferring data, signals, or power.
BUS ­ For class 714
A conductor used for transferring data, signals or power.
BUS ­ For class 718
A conductor used for transferring data, signals, or power.
BUS ­ For class 719
A conductor used for transferring data, signals, or power.
BY­PRODUCT MATERIALS ­ For class 376
Are nuclear reaction products (except special nuclear fuel material (see Nuclear Fuel)
including gases yielded in or made radioactive by exposure to the radiation incident to the
process of producing or utilizing special nuclear fuel in the nuclear reaction.
CABLE ­ For class 049
A flexible connector such as a rope, chain or the like.
CABLE ­ For class 439
An elongated, flexible assembly of two or more elongated conductors intended to transmit
electricity from one end to the other, the conductors being electrically insulated from one
another but physically held together in association with one another. Note. The two or
more physically associated but mutually insulated conductors are usually further enclosed
within an outer protective or insulating covering or sheath. Note. A stranded, wire­type
conductor is considered to be a single conductor.
CABLE ­ For class 725
A transmission line or group of transmission lines mechanically assembled into a complex
flexible form. Note: The conductors are insulated and are closely spaced and usually have
a common outer cover which may be an electric portion of the cable. In communication
cables, an insulated conductor or combination of electric conductors that are insulated
from each other. A shield is usually provided. Further, an assembly of one or more
conductors within an enveloping protective sheath, constructed to allow use of the
conductors separately or in groups, such as a coaxial cable or optical cable.
CABLE­ For class 187
A flaccid, elongated, flexible element which can transmit force only when under tension
(e.g., rope, wire, chain).
CAIBE ­ For class 438
Chemically assisted ion beam etching
CALCULATING OPERATION: ­ For class 700
Arithmetic and or some limited logic operations performed upon or with signals
representing numbers or values.
CALCULATING OPERATIONS ­ For class 701
Arithmetic and/or some limited logic operations performed upon or with signals
representing numbers or values.
CALCULATING OPERATIONS ­ For class 702
Arithmetic or some limited logic operations performed upon or with signals representing
numbers or values.
CALCULATING OPERATIONS ­ For class 705
Arithmetic or some limited logic operations performed upon or with signals representing
numbers or values.
CALCULATION OPERATIONS ­ For class 708
Arithmetic or some limited logic operations performed upon or with signals representing
numbers or values. These include arithmetic and related logic operations. A related logic
operation is one that is associated with arithmetic computations.
CALL ADDRESS SIGNAL ­ For class 379
An electrical representation of a called terminal designation (i.e., telephone number) which
controls switching apparatus to establish a connection from a calling terminal.
CAM, ECCENTRIC ­ For class 269
A rotatable, pivotal or rockable member having a contour, which contour is not uniformly
concentric with the pivotal or rotational axis of the member, and which contour, as it
moves with respect to said axis, imparts a to­and­fro movement to a follower element
bearing against said contour. The movement of said follower element, as the point of
mutual contact between the member and the element shifts along the contour, is thus
prescribed by the configuration of said contour with respect to the axis of rotation. The
contour may be a modification of a peripheral or radial surface with respect to the pivotal
or rotational axis or a configured groove, ridge or slot lying in the general plane of either
surface. Thus, the effective movement of a follower element, caused by pivoting or
rocking the cam member, is measurable along lines normal to the member axis or parallel
to the member axis. The follower element is usually mounted for sliding or pivoting
movement with respect to the cam member. In some instances, the contour, referred to
above, is part of the follower element. In this class, the terms ​
gcam​
h and ​
geccentric​
h are
used interchangeably. See (3) Note under subclass 165 and (1) Note under subclass 229
for wedge adjustment and wedge actuating means.
CAMERA ­ For class 396
A camera is a device which, when actuated, uses light to record an image of an object
which may be chemically developable to become visible. It generally includes (a) a light­
tight enclosure, (b) a lens for forming an image of an object at an image plane, (c) a
holder for a photographic medium at the image plane, (d) a device to control the light flux
reaching the photographic medium, and (e) an opaque device selectively operable to pass
light to a photographic medium for a period of time. See References to Other Classes,
above (e.g., Classes 250 and 378), for information regarding picture­making devices of
diverse energy spectra.
CAMERA STRUCTURE ­ For class 396
Camera structure is that subcombination of a camera not otherwise provided for in another
class.
CAMERA, MOTION PICTURE ­ For class 352
A device for photographically recording periodically a series of images of an object upon a
single actuation.
CAPACITANCE ­ For class 334
The property of a capacitor to store and hold an electric charge and which is equivalent to
the ratio of the equivalent charge stored in the capacitor to the resultant change of
potential.
CAPACITOR ­ For class 257
A component used in electrical and electronic circuits which stores a charge of electricity,
usually for very brief periods of time, with the ability to rapidly charge and discharge. A
capacitor is usually considered a passive component since it does not rectify, amplify, or
switch and because charge carriers do not undergo energy level changes therein, although
some active solid­state devices function as voltage variable capacitors.
CAPACITOR ­ For class 320
An electrical energy storage device consisting essentially of two electrically conductive
surfaces (e.g., plates, electrodes, etc.) separated by an insulator or dielectric (e.g., air,
paper, mica glass, plastic, oil, etc.), whereby an electric charge, in the form of a direct
voltage between said conductive surfaces, can be either stored on said surfaces or
released therefrom to a load. "Plural capacitors" include a combination or association of
two or more structurally dependent, or independent, capacitor units.
CAPACITOR ­ For class 334
That property of a system of conductors and dielectrics used to secure an appreciable
capacitance by allowing the storage of electricity when a potential difference exists
between the conductors. There must be at least two or more conductors separated by a
dielectric.
CAPACITOR ­ For class 438
A component used in electrical and electronic circuits which stores a charge of electricity,
usually for very brief periods of time, with the ability to rapidly charge and discharge. A
capacitor is usually considered a passive component since it does not rectify, amplify, or
switch and because charge carriers do not undergo energy level changes therein, although
some active solid state devices function as voltage variable capacitors.
CAPPING ­ For class 164
Intentionally stopping the rimming action in steel after completion of teeming.
CAPTURE ELEMENT ­ For class 073
That structure which physically contacts the source to separate it into sample and residue
portions.
CARBAMATE ­ For class 516
A compound based on carbamic acid, NH 2COOH, in the form of its salts and derivatives.
CARBOCYCLIC ­ For class 260
Denotes the presence of one or more rings, none of which is a heterocyclic or a nitrocyclic
ring, of which the ring members of at least one ring are all carbons.
CARBOCYCLIC ­ For class 514
This term denotes a ring or ring system where all ring members are carbons.
CARBOCYCLIC ­ For class 532
This term denotes a ring or ring system where all ring members are carbons.
CARBOHYDRATE ­ For class 426
Compound, the monomeric units of which contain at least five carbon atoms, and their
reaction products wherein the carbon skeleton of carbohydrate unit is not destroyed.
Alcohols and acids corresponding to carbohydrates, such as, sorbitol ascorbic acid, or
mannonic acid are not considered as being carbohydrates.
CARBOHYDRATE ­ For class 977
Polyhydroxy aldehydes or ketones which frequently have the empirical formula (CH2O)n
and their derivatives, frequently termed saccharides; common forms are
monosaccharides, oligosaccharides, and polysaccharides.
CARBOHYDRATE A ­ For class 430
polyhydroxy mono­aldehyde and a polyhydroxy mono­ketone, generally having the
formula C (H2O) and substances which are hydrolyzed to these. The term includes
cellulose, starch, dextran, and sugar.
CARBOHYDRATE DERIVATIVE ­ For class 520
Denotes reaction products of carbohydrates wherein the carbon skeleton of the
carbohydrate is not destroyed. Included herein are cellulose nitrate, cellulose acetate,
cellulose ethers, viscose, cellulose xanthate, chitin, etc.
CARBOHYDRATE; CARBOHYDRATE­DERIVATIVE ­ For class 516
Carbohydrates are compounds which are saccharides whose monomeric units are
polyhydroxy mono­aldehydes or polyhydroxy mono­ketones, having the formula Cn(H2O)n,
where n is five or six, or the corresponding cyclic hemiacetals thereof. Carbohydrate­
derivatives maintain the carbon skeleton and the carbonyl function or hemi­acetal function
of the saccharide. See section LINES WITH OTHER CLASSES AND WITHIN THIS CLASS,
subsection Glossary References, for additional information concerning this definition.
CARBOHYDRATES ­ For class 520
Denotes polyhydroxy aldehydes (i.e., aldoses) and polyhydroxy ketones (i.e., ketoses) of
the empirical formula Cx(H2O)x where x is five or more; and substances hydrolyzable to
said polyhydroxy (aldehydes or ketones). Included herein for example are the following:
(a) monosaccharide sugars such as pentoses (e.g., arabinose, arabinulose, etc.) hexoses
(e.g., glucose, levulose, etc.) and the heptoses (e.g., mannoheptose, etc.); (b)
disaccharides (e.g., lactose, maltose, sucrose, cellobiose, etc.); (c) trisaccharides (e.g.,
raffinose, etc.); (d) polysaccharides (e.g., starches, celluloses, dextrins, hemicelluloses,
glycogen, insulin, etc.); (e) complex polysaccharides (e.g., gum arabic, pectins, etc.).
Excluded herefrom are lignin, tannin, and derivatives thereof. Also excluded are the simple
gtriose​
​
h (i.e., glyceradehyde di­hydroxy acetone) or ​
gtetrose​
h (i.e., erythrose, threose
and keto tetroses) sugars since these sugars have less than five carbons; such materials
are treated as polyhydroxy (aldehydes or ketones).
CARBON ­ For class 428
Inorganic material. (Nonstructural or Composition)
CARBONACEOUS MATERIAL ­ For class 201
Any solid material (mixture or compound) other than an inorganic carbonate which
contains carbon or carbon containing compounds such as coke or wood.
CARBONYLIC ­ For class 260
Denotes the presence of the carbonyl group, C=O.
CARBOXAMIDO ­ For class 510
Denotes a substituent wherein a trivalent nitrogen atom is single bonded to a carbonyl (­
C(=O)­) group.
CARBOXYL (Carboxylic Acid) ­ For class 510
Denotes the presence of a ­C(=O)OH group.
CARBOXYL GROUP ­ For class 516
Structure comprised of a carbonyl group (C=O) with a hydroxyl group (OH) attached to the
carbonyl carbon.
CARBOXYLIC ­ For class 424
Denotes the presence of a moiety.
CARBOXYLIC ACID OR DERIVATIVE ­ For class 520
A. A carboxylic acid denotes the carboxyl group, represented as ­COOH or ­C(=O)OH,
bonded to: (1) a carbon atom that is not double­bonded to sulfur, selenium, or tellurium,
or triple bonded to nitrogen; (2) hydrogen; or (3) [­C(O=)­]n, where n is an integer (e.g.,
oxalic acid, etc.). A carboxylic acid derivative is limited to: 1. nitride; 2. carboxylic acid
ester; 3. carboxylic acid anhydride; 4. carboxylic acid salt; 5. carboxylic acid amide; 6.
carboxylic acid imide; 7. carboxylic acid lactam; 8. carboxylic acid halide; and 9. lactone.
B. A carboxylic acid anhydride denotes the basic structure ­C(=O)­O­C(=O)­, the carbons
of which may independently be bonded to: (1) hydrogen; (2) a carbon atom that is not
double bonded to sulfur, selenium, or tellurium; or (3) [­C(=O)­]n, where n is an integer.
In either of (2) or (3), supra, the ­C(=O)­O­C(=O)­ group may be part of a ring. C. A
carboxylic acid ester denotes the structure ­C(=O)­O­C­, where the carbon atom bonded to
the ­O­ of the ­C(=O)­O­ group may not be double bonded to chalcogen (i.e., oxygen,
sulfur, selenium, or tellurium), or triple bonded to nitrogen, and the carbonyl carbon of the
­C(=O)­O­C­ group may be bonded to (1) hydrogen; (2) a carbon atom that is not double
bonded to sulfur, selenium, or tellurium, or triple bonded to nitrogen; or (3) [­C(=O)­]n,
where n is an integer. D. A nitride denotes the structure ­CbN bonded to carbon, which
carbon may not be double bonded to chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or
tellurium), or triple bonded to nitrogen. E. A carboxylic acid amide denotes the structure ­
C(=O)­NH2, where substitution may be made for the hydrogens, and the carbonyl carbon
may be bonded to (1) hydrogen; (2) a carbon atom that is not double bonded to sulfur,
selenium, or tellurium, or triple bonded to nitrogen; or (3) [­C(=O)­]n, where n is an
integer. F. A carboxylic acid halide denotes the structure ­C(=O)­hal, where hal is halogen
and the carbonyl carbon may be bonded to (1) hydrogen; (2) [­C(=O)­]n, where n is an
integer; or (3) a carbon atom that is not double bonded to sulfur, selenium, or tellurium,
or triple bonded to carbon. G. The imide of a dicarboxylic acid is a heterocyclic ring having
as ring members the group ­C(=O)­NH­C(=O)­, where substitution may be made for
hydrogen; all remaining ring members are carbon atoms. H. The lactam of a carboxylic
acid is a heterocyclic ring having as ring members the group ­NH­C(=O)­, where
substitution may be made for hydrogen; all remaining ring members are carbon atoms. I.
The lactone of a carboxylic acid is a heterocyclic ring having as ring members the group ­
C(=O)­O­; all remaining ring members are carbon atoms, and the carbon atoms bonded to
either the carbon or oxygen or the ­C(=O)O­ group may not themselves be double bonded
to chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium). J. A carboxylic acid salt denotes
the structure ­C(=O)­O­⊖X⊕, where X is a cation and ionic bonding exists between the
cation, X, and the ­C(=O)O­ group. The carbon of the ­C(=O)O­ group may be bonded to:
(1) hydrogen; (2) a carbon atom that is not double bonded to sulfur, selenium, or
tellurium, or triple bonded to nitrogen; or (3) [­C(=O)­]n, where n is an integer. In the
above definitions of carboxylic acids and their derivations, certain derivations may
technically fit into more than one derivative grouping. A lactone, for example, is a species
of an ester, and a lactam is a species of an amide. Compounds that are themselves
multifunctional (i.e., possess more than one functional group) are classified on the basis of
the first appearing functional group in the hierarchy. A polycarboxylic reactant requires the
presence of at least two carboxylic acid groups, or of at least one carboxylic acid group
and at least one carboxylic acid derivative, or at least two identical carboxylic acid
derivatives, or at least two different carboxylic acid derivatives.
A cyclic carboxylic anhydride having the group ­C(=O)­O­C(=O)­ as members of a ring is
considered as a polycarboxylic acid. Compounds having both a cyclic anhydride group and
a free carboxyl (­COOH) group are considered as tricarboxylic acids. An example is
trimellitic anhydride, which is shown as Figure 1 at the end of the “Carboxylic Acid or
Derivative” definition. A compound containing two cyclic anhydride groups is considered a
tetracarboxylic acid. An example is pyromellitic dianhydride, which is shown in Figure 2 at
the end of the “Carboxylic Acid or Derivative” definition.
CARBURIZING ­ For class 148
A process wherein a metal substrate is treated with an externally supplied source of
carbon resulting in the carburization of the metal by chemical reaction or diffusion.
CARBURIZING (Carbonizing) ­ For class 164
Introducing carbon into ferrometals by heating above the transformation temperature
range while in contact with carbonaceous material that may be solid, liquid, or gaseous.
CARCASS ­ For class 452
Includes the dead body of either a land or marine animal.
CARRIAGE ­ For class 400
A mechanism for supporting a record­medium* or for supporting a type­head­carrier*,
which mechanism is provided with means to effect relative movement between the record­
medium and a type­head­carrier that is at the print­point*, the movement occurring along
a line that is parallel to the print­line*. A ​
gcarriage­feed​
h means effects carriage
movement in the direction that causes character* symbols to be imprinted in succession,
thus ​
gcarriage feed​
h also effects character­space* and word­space* distances. In most
typewriters used for typing a European language said direction is from left to right, but
there are some typewriters capable of imprinting successive characters from right to left
even though the words will be read from left to right, and there are other typewriters
intended to imprint successive characters from right to left because the words will be read
from right to left. In any event, the carriage­feed direction is always the direction that
causes characters to be imprinted in succession. In some typewriters the record­medium
is held to a platen that is mounted on a carriage, and the ​
gplaten carriage​
h (together with
the record­medium) is moved relative to the main frame of the typewriter. Each
successively actuated type­member* is impressed at a print­point that is stationary
relative to the main frame. The platen­carriage (e.g., right to left) is opposite to the
direction in which successive characters are imprinted and read (e.g., left to right). (The
directions mentioned apply except as noted above.) In some typewriters the record­
medium is held to a platen that does not move during the imprinting of a print­line. The
type­member is on a type­head* that is on a type­head­carrier that is mounted on a
carriage, and the type­head carriage is moved relative to the main frame of the
typewriter. Each successively actuated type­member is impressed at a print­point that is
moved relative to the main frame. The ​
gtype­head carriage​
h movement (e.g., left to right)
is in the direction in which successive characters are imprinted and read (e.g., left to
right). In both forms of typewriter noted above, the term carriage feed is applied to
movement of the carriage in the direction that effects imprinting of successive characters
and words*. Thus, for a platen­carriage typewriter, carriage feed is usually from right to
left (but note the exception above), whereas for a type­head­carriage typewriter, carriage
feed is usually from left to right. Either typewriter is also capable of carriage reversal,
which is in the direction opposite to carriage feed, and is used for ​
gcarriage return​
h (e.g.,
to start a new print­line) or is used for carriage backspace (e.g., to move a carriage a
distance equivalent of one or more character­spaces in a reverse direction).
CARRIAGE­RACK ­ For class 400
A bar having teeth or notches along one of its sides, which bar is affixed to a carriage*,
and which teeth or notches cooperate with a pawl* or a pinion gear to enable or cause
movement of the bar and the carriage to which it is affixed. There may be provision for
adjustment of the bar relative to the carriage, but the adjustment is usually made at the
time of manufacture of the typewriter, or may be made subsequently during a period of
time when the typewriter is not being used for typing. When a carriage­rack cooperates
with a pawl, it acts as a ratchet*, and for a discussion of how a pawl and ratchet operates
as a carriage­feed mechanism, see the definition of pawl in this Glossary,
CARRIER ­ For class 226
(n) As used in this class, a member on which a material engaging part is slidingly or
rotatably (including pivotally) mounted, which member entirely supports the part against
gravity while allowing relative movement between the member and the part. This term is
applied only to that member of a device which is immediately connected to the material­
engaging part. A member can be a complex of parts which move integrally together.
CARRIER ­ For class 257
A mobile free electron or hole.
CARRIER ­ For class 329
An electrical or electromagnetic repetitious sinusoidal wave.
CARRIER ­ For class 332
Is an electrical or electromagnetic repetitious sinusoidal wave.
CARRIER ­ For class 355
(a) The element that contains the original image to be imaged onto a receiver. The carrier
is commonly a photographic negative, but may be a positive, a document, a book page,
etc.; and (b) a substance in electrophotos:graphic developer which conveys a toner
material to a copy substrate but which does not, itself, become a part of the developed
copy.
CARRIER ­ For class 401
A member attached to a piece of solid coating material so as to be movable therewith in a
guide#.
CARRIER ­ For class 406
An auxiliary device for use in a fluid current conveyor comprising a container for carrying
material or articles while being conveyed through the fluid current conveyor.
CARRIER ­ For class 416
A Load bearing structure (e.g., hub, etc.) which mounts one or more working members*
and which, at least in part, partakes of the motion of the member.
CARRIER CONCENTRATION ­ For class 257
The number of electrical charge carriers in a given volume, usually a cubic centimeter, of
semiconductor material.
CARRIER, MOTION PICTURE ­ For class 352
The vehicle for the individual pictures of a motion picture series, generally a flexible strip.
CASCADE AMPLIFIER ­ For class 330
A series of amplifiers wherein the input for each amplifier except the first (to which the
electric signal source is connected) is coupled from the output of the prior amplifier.
CASE HARDENING ­ For class 148
A term most often applied to carburizing or nitriding processes which result in a hardened
surface on the workpiece.
CASE­SHIFT ­ For class 400
Case­shift is the relative movement between a record­medium* and a type­face* or a
type­die* that is at the print­point*, which movement is effected by pressing a case­shift
key* concurrently with the pressing of a character* key. In most typewriters, selection of
which character is to be imprinted in sequence is made by selection of the character keys.
In a typewriter with a case­shift, a choice of upper­case* (i.e., ​
gCAPITAL​
h letter) or lower­
case* (i.e., ​
gsmall​
h letter) form of the selected letter is possible by concurrently pressing
or not pressing the case­shift key. Analogous choice of other characters that appear on the
various character keys is also possible with the case­shift key. In some typewriters case­
shift is effected by moving into one of two positions (or in other typewriters one of three
positions) any of (a) a type­bar­segment*, or (b) a platen, or (c) a type­head* that carries
at least two fixedly related type­face elements; in all of these the movement occurs in a
plane substantially parallel to the plane occupied by the type­face at the print­point. In
some typewriters a type­head is on a type­head­carrier* and includes a type­set­
assemblage* thereon, and in such typewriters case­shift is effected by moving the type­
head so that the chosen type­face (i.e., upper­case or lower­case) will be impacted
against the record­medium. In some typewriters, case­shift may also be used to imprint a
character in a different font* or a character in a different language for specialized uses.
CASING ­ For class 166
A pipe which lines all or a portion of the wall of a well. The casing may be adjacent the
wall of the well for only a part of its length and lie within another casing section for the
remainder of its length. The casing usually is of metal and is used with cement between it
and the well wall. The casing is intended to form the permanent lining of the well.
CASING ­ For class 175
A tube which is introduced in a preformed bore and forms a lining for the bore.
CASING ­ For class 313
A container or enclosure for a lamp or discharge device, or a part thereof. See Envelope
above.
CASING ­ For class 415
A member which cooperates with a runner member and provides a flow path for the
working fluid. This member may also be called a curb in the art literature.
CASTING ­ For class 065
Forming a glass preform by flowing molten glass in the form of a stream into or onto
molds, rolls or tables. (Teeming is synonymous to casting).
CASTING ­ For class 164
The formation of an article by pouring or forcing molten metal into a mold or die and
permitting it to solidify.
CASTING ­ For class 264
A process of molding or forming wherein impressions are made with fluent or molten
materials as by pouring into a mold with hardening or setting of said material in said
mold.
CASTING ­ For class 425
Forming a preform by pouring fluent stock onto or into a shaping surface. Synonym:
Teeming.
CATALYST ­ For class 423
A substance which either increases or decreases the speed of a chemical reaction without
itself undergoing a permanent change.
CATALYST ­ For class 502
An agent which affects or effects a chemical reaction by its presence in the reaction mass
(other than by dissolving or dispersing the reactants) generally being recoverable from the
products as if it did not enter into the reaction and merely provided the impetus for
reaction of other materials. While it was originally thought that a catalyst did not enter the
reaction and instead provided sites at which the reactants, per se, interacted, it is
understood now that at least some transitory intermediates may involve the catalyst. The
catalyst, however does not contribute substance to the desired final product even though it
may remain inseparable from such product.
CATALYST ­ For class 588
A substance which either increases or decreases the speed of a chemical reaction.
CATALYZE ­ For class 502
Affecting, effecting, promoting, or initiating a reaction by being present­generally by
presenting a contact surface and usually recoverable from the product in essentially
unchanged form and operating other than by merely acting as a solvent. The strict
classical concept of a catalyst is not rigidly adhered to now and the catalyst may
disappear, change or be included as an incidental moiety in the final product. A catalyst
may inhibit one reaction while promoting or allowing another reaction but an agent strictly
preventing or retarding a reaction is a preservative for Class 252 Compositions, subclasses
380+. Examples of these retardants or inhibitors are anti­oxidant and anti­knock
compositions. An agent that encourages a reaction by dispersing the reactants such as a
more effective solvent is not a catalyst. A catalyst may be gaseous, liquid or solid.
CATARACT CORRECTION LENS ­ For class 351
A lens, usually with cylindrical correction, to optically compensate for diminution of vision
or opacity of the lens of the eye.
CATEGORY ­ For class 725
Any of several fundamental and distinct classes to which entities or concepts belong. Also,
a division within a system of classification.
CATHANODE ­ For class 313
An electrode designed to serve as an anode with respect to a cathode and to be heated by
the discharge so that another surface of the electrode emits electrons to a second anode.
See subclass 305 for discharge devices having a cathanode.
CATHODE ­ For class 313
An electrode which acts as the negative device. In some discharge devices, such as spark
gaps, there is no difference in structure between the cathode and anode. Consequently, the
use of the words ​
gcathode​
h and ​
ganode​
h have been avoided except where there is some
significance in structure between the two electrodes.
CATHODE IMPEDANCE ­ For class 330
The impedance from the cathode of an electronic tube to ground or a reference potential.
CATHODE OR CATHODE ELECTRODE ­ For class 330
The negative electrode of the two electrodes of an electronic tube between which an
electric discharge occurs (for negative charge carrier particles); in a vacuum tube the
electrode which emits the electrons and is negatively charged with respect to the electrode
which collects the electrons.
CATHODE RAY DEVICE ­ For class 313
A discharge device having means for forming the electric discharge into a restricted beam
or ray, usually pencil­like.
CATHODE­HEATER ­ For class 330
A filament in proximity to an indirectly heated cathode with terminals designed to receive
a source of power to heat the cathode to its electron emitting temperature.
CATIONIC SUBSTITUENT ­ For class 510
Denotes that portion of an organic compound which is positively charged in an aqueous
solution at a neutral pH (i.e., pH=7) and is attached to the portion of the molecule of
higher molecular weight by covalent bonding. Examples of common cationic substituents
include primary, secondary, or tertiary amino groups, as well as quaternary ammonium
substituents.
CAVITY ­ For class 072
(DIE CAVITY) A passageway closed at one end; a chamber or blind hole having at least one
work­shape­imposing portion of closed perimeter definable in a plane normal to the
direction of relative motion of a co­acting tool or work forcer, or of the disclosed flow of
work. See ​
gOrifice​
h and ​
gPassageway​
h.
CAVITY ­ For class 428
A hole or a hollow place in a body. (Structural)
CB JUNCTION ­ For class 257
The collector­base junction of a bipolar transistor.
CBE ­ For class 117
Chemical Beam Epitaxy*.
CBIC ­ For class 438
Complementary bipolar IC
CBKR ­ For class 438
Cross bridge Kelvin resistor (test structure)
CCB ­ For class 438
Controlled collapse bonding
CCC ­ For class 438
Corrugated capacitor cell
CCD ­ For class 438
Charge coupled device
CDE ­ For class 438
Chemical dry etching
CDI ­ For class 438
Collector diffusion isolation
CEL ­ For class 438
Contrast enhancement layer
CELL ­ For class 257
An individual integrated circuit element located on a large, or master chip of,
semiconductor material.
CELL ­ For class 320
Short for, or used interchangeably with, a voltaic cell only in this class.
CELL ­ For class 428
A closed cavity (which may be empty or full) in a component*. (Structural)
CELL ­ For class 715
The intersection of a row and a column of DATA*.
CELL­ For class 349
For the purpose of this class, a cell is the minimum combination of elements necessary to
physically contain an entire liquid crystal layer given a stimulus or excitation. In a matrix
addressed liquid crystal device, a single pixel is not a cell.
CELLULAR ­ For class 725
Of, relating to, or consisting of cells. In a radio frequency system, that which characterizes
a system in which a geographical area is divided into small sections, each served by a
transmitter of limited range so that any available radio frequency channel can be used in
different parts of the area simultaneously.
CELLULOSIC ­ For class 428
A carbohydrate material derived from the structural matter of plant life, usually from the
stems. The term includes lignocellulose (e.g., wood and bark) relatively pure cellulose
(e.g., cotton and linen) and chemically modified forms of cellulose as cellophane,
pyroxylin, viscose and rayon. While pyroxylin may be plasticized with minor amounts of
camphor and/or castor oil, for purposes of classification, pyroxylin is considered cellulosic.
(Nonstructural or Composition)
CEMENTATION ­ For class 075
A process of recovering a free metal from solution wherein a more electropositive free
metal displaces a less electropositive metal from solution as a free metal while the more
electropositive metal goes into solution in ionic form.
CENTRAL CHAMBER ­ For class 166
A generic term covering both a central conduit, as defined below, and a receptacle for
bodily transport of fluid material from inside the well to the top of the well or bodily
transport of material from the top of the well for discharge at a point in the well. In a well
device the central chamber is considered to be the primary locus from which or to which
fluid is moved. For example, the ​
gcentral chamber​
h in a tester is the sample chamber
receiving the test fluid, whether this be a receptacle or a tubing, while the ​
gcentral
chamber​
h in a liquid discharging washer is the primary place from which liquid flows,
whether this be a tubing or a receptacle.
CENTRAL CONDUIT ­ For class 166
Any passage forming conduit which extends from the top of the well into the well and is
positioned within another conduit. The central conduit may be, for example, a string of
tubing positioned within another tubing or within the casing, or it may be a string of casing
positioned within the well bore.
CENTRIFUGE ­ For class 210
A process or means in which a liquid is revolved about an axis at such a number of
revolutions per unit of time that the apparent weight of constituents increases to a point
where the constituents tend to concentrate in strata similar to gravity­induced separation
based on relative densities.
CER ­ For class 438
Contact end resistor (test structure)
CERAMIC ­ For class 428
Clay containing, therefore silicon containing. (Nonstructural or Composition)
CERAMIC ­ For class 501
Inorganic compositions which are heat treated to harden them during their manufacture or
subsequent use by firing, calcining, sintering, or fusion of at least a portion of the
inorganic material, including glass compositions, fired clay compositions which form, e.g.,
porcelain or brick, and refractories. Such materials typically, but not necessarily, include
earthy materials, such as metal (and especially mixed metal) silicates.
CERDIP ­ For class 438
ceramic DIP
CHAFF ­ For class 460
These are seed coverings and small stem pieces which are separated from seed and
threshed grain during threshing or processing operation.
CHAFFER ­ For class 460
A moving device having lips, loovers or similar means that separates the chaff from
threshed grain or seed.
CHAIN ­ For class 514
This term denotes a plurality of atoms which connect specified groups or atoms. The
atoms of the chain must be nonionically attached to each other and to the specified groups
or atoms. If the chain may not include any ring members it will be designated as acyclic.
When the chain may include ring members the title will state that the chain may include a
ring. The chain ends where it attaches to the specified groups or atoms and does not
include any part of them. The chain may have substituents but the substituents are not
part of the chain.
CHAIN ­ For class 532
This term denotes a plurality of atoms which connect specified groups or atoms. The
atoms of the chain must be nonionically attached to each other and to the specified groups
or atoms. If the chain may not include any ring members it will be designated as acyclic.
When the chain may include ring members the title will state that the chain may include a
ring. The chain ends where it attaches to the specified groups or atoms and does not
include any part of them. The chain may have substituents but the substituents are not
part of the chain.
CHALCEDONY ­ For class 117
Microcrystalline form of quartz; usually milky or grayish in color.
CHALCOGEN ­ For class 423
Also known as chalcogenide(s), the elements oxygen, sulfur, selenium, tellurium and
polonium.
CHALCOGEN ­ For class 588
Also known as chalcogenides, specifically O, S, Se, or Te.
CHALCOGEN ­ For class 987
Limited to oxygen (O), sulfur (S), selenium (Se), or tellurium (Te).
CHANGE­KEY ­ For class 070
That key designed for operation of an individually distinct lock operating mechanism
embodying a specific combination or design.
CHANNEL ­ For class 257
A path for conducting current between a source and drain of a field effect transistor.
CHANNEL ­ For class 373
A hollow loop, or ring which will contain material to be heated, and which permits the
insertion of a core of iron to improve the coupling between a primary coil and a secondary
in the loop, or ring.
CHANNEL ­ For class 438
A path for conducting current between a source and drain of a field effect transistor.
CHANNEL ­ For class 725
A single path for transmitting electric signals, usually in distinction from other parallel
paths. A band of frequencies. Note: The word ​
gpath​
h is to be interpreted in a broad sense
to include separation by frequency division or time division. The term ​
gchannel​
h may
signify either a one­way path, providing transmission in one direction only, or a two­way
path, providing transmission in two directions.
CHANNEL LENGTH EFFECTS ­ For class 257
Operating characteristics of FETs which depend on the length (distance between source and
drain) of the channel regions. Such effects include switching speed change and threshold
voltage change with channel length change.
CHANNEL PINCH­OFF REGION ­ For class 257
The location in a current channel portion of a field effect transistor (FET) where the current
is reduced to a minimum value due to its diameter being reduced to a minimum.
CHANNEL PINCH­OFF REGION ­ For class 438
The location in a current channel portion of a field effect transistor (FET) where the current
is reduced to a minimum value due to its diameter being reduced to a minimum.
CHANNEL STOP ­ For class 257
Means for limiting channel formation in a semiconductor device by surrounding the
affected area with a ring of highly doped, low resistivity semiconductor material. In a field
effect transistor, it is a region of highly doped material of the same type as the lightly
doped substrate used to prevent leakage paths along the chip surface from developing.
Also referred to as ​
gchanstop.​
h
CHANNEL STOP ­ For class 438
Means for limiting channel formation in a semiconductor device by surrounding the
affected area with a ring of highly doped, low resistivity semiconductor material. In a field
effect transistor, it is a region of highly doped material of the same type as the lightly
doped substrate used to prevent leakage paths along the chip surface from developing.
Also referred to as ​
gchanstop.​
h
CHANNEL WIDTH EFFECTS ­ For class 257
Operating characteristics of FETs which depend on the width (horizontal distance
perpendicular to channel length and parallel to upper surface of device) of the channel.
Such effects include conductance and threshold voltage change with channel width change.
chanstop ­ For class 438
channel stop isolation structure
CHAPLET ­ For class 164
A device for holding a core in place.
CHAR ­ For class 201
The generic term applied to the carbonaceous residue from a thermolytic distillation of any
carbonaceous material. It encompasses such terms as bone black, charcoal and coke.
CHAR ­ For class 202
The generic term applied to the carbonaceous residue from a thermolytic distillation of any
carbonaceous material. It encompasses such terms as bone black, charcoal and coke.
CHAR ­ For class 502
Carbonaceous reside from pyrolysis of organic material generally of a hard burned pitch
appearance.
CHARACTER ­ For class 400
A single symbol imprinted on a record­medium* by a type­member* and intended to be
read by the human eye, or intended to be ​
gread​
h by a mechanical or electrical scanner,
for the purpose of conveying intelligence to the reader (i.e., human reader or mechanical
greader​
​
h). It forms one of the elements needed to form a word*. In most typewriters a
character is formed by impressing a single type­member against a record­medium, usually
via an inking means. However, a single character may also be formed by impressing a
plurality of different type­members either simultaneously or successively in the same zone
or area of the record­medium. A character may be (a) one of the letters in an alphabet,
either upper­case* (i.e., ​
gCAPITAL​
h letter), or lower­case* (i.e., ​
gsmall​
h letter), or (b)
one of the numeral digits (i.e., ​
g0​
h through ​
g9​
h), or (c) a punctuation mark [e.g., comma
(,), colon (:), etc.], or (d) one of a variety of signs and symbols incorporated into a
typewriter intended for general usage [e.g., dollar sign ($), ampersand symbol (&), etc.].
The number or variety of characters that a particular typewriter may imprint is limited
only by the size of the typewriter and the area allotted to the key­board* and the type­
members of that typewriter.
CHARACTERISTIC ­ For class 329
An attribute associated with the size or shape of a wave or signal. Examples are
amplitude, frequency, or phase of a sine wave and repetition rate, position, amplitude, or
width of a nonsine wave.
CHARACTERISTIC ­ For class 332
Is an attribute associated with the size or shape of a wave or signal. Examples are
amplitude, frequency, or phase of a sine wave and repetition rate, position, amplitude or
width of a nonsine wave.
CHARACTERISTIC CURVE ­ For class 257
A graph showing the relationship between two or more changing parameters, e.g., current
and voltage of an electronic device.
CHARACTERISTIC IMPEDANCE ­ For class 333
The impedance which a long line or a long line element would have if it were infinitely
long. A long line which is terminated in its characteristic impedance is not resonant.
CHARACTER­SPACE ­ For class 400
Character­space is the distance that the carriage* or the record­medium* is moved to
effect the separation of one imprinted character* from a subsequently imprinted character
of the same word*. In most alphabets the width of one character (i.e., the distance that it
extends along the print­line*) differs from the width of another character. In many
typewriters the character­space distances are in equal increments of carriage feed. Due to
the fact that successively imprinted characters have different widths, the spaces between
the successive characters are unequal. To compensate for different widths, some
typewriters are provided with mechanism to vary the carriage feed. This mechanism
causes the carriage feed to be proportional to the width of the character imprinted by a
type­face*. The unequal increments of carriage feed produced by this mechanism results
in equal spaces between successively imprinted characters, thereby improving the
uniformity and appearance of the typing.
CHARGE ­ For class 149
As used herein refers to a mixture of ingredients producing a composition of this class or a
definite quantity of shapeless or structureless material forming a composition of this class;
or at least two compounds or compositions or any mixtures of these associated together or
composited but in an unmixed condition, e.g., a primary explosive associated but not
intermixed with a secondary explosive, or those compositions including only nominal
structure or form.
CHARGE ­ For class 373
The material heated by the furnace.
CHARGE CARRIER ­ For class 257
A mobile conduction electron or hole in a semiconductor.
CHARGE CARRIER ­ For class 438
A mobile conduction electron or hole in a semiconductor.
CHARGE CARRIER PARTICLE ­ For class 330
A charged particle of matter involved in a flow of space current (electric discharge) and by
means of which such current flows (current flow other than an electromagnetic wave
propagated in open or confined space). Such charge carrier particles may be ions of a gas
or charged atomic particles such as electrons.
CHARGE CONFINEMENT ­ For class 257
Restriction of electrical charge carriers, e.g., electrons or holes, to specified locations,
e.g., by quantum wells, gate electrode potentials, etc.
CHARGE CONFINEMENT ­ For class 438
Restriction of electrical charge carriers (e.g., electrons or holes) to specified locations
(e.g., by quantum wells, gate electrode potentials, etc.).
CHARGE GAS, GAS, OR SYSTEM FLUID ­ For class 096
(Terms used in Class 55 subclass titles and definitions). These terms are used
synonymously and mean the inlet mixture of gas carrying therein solids or fluids, the
mixture during separation, or a gaseous constituent after separation.
CHARGE INJECTION DEVICE ­ For class 257
A field effect device in which storage sites for packets of electric charge are induced at or
below the surface of an active solid­state device by an electric field applied to the device
and wherein carrier potential energy per unit charge minima are established at a given
storage site and such charge packets are injected into the device substrate or into a data
bus. This type device differs from a charge transfer device in that, in the latter, charge is
transferred to adjacent charge storage sites in a serial manner, whereas, in a charge
injection device, the charge is injected in a non­serial manner to the device substrate or to
a data bus.
CHARGE INJECTION DEVICE ­ For class 438
A field effect device in which storage sites for packets of electric charge are induced at or
below the surface of an active solid­state device by an electric field applied to the device
and wherein carrier potential energy per unit charge minima are established at a given
storage site and such charge packets are injected into the device substrate or into a data
bus. This type device differs from a charge transfer device in that, in the latter, charge is
transferred to adjacent charge storage sites in a serial manner, whereas, in a charge
injection device, the charge is injected in a nonserial manner to the device substrate or to
a data bus.
CHARGE TRANSFER DEVICE ­ For class 257
A semiconductor device in which discrete packets of electrical charge are transferred from
one location to another. Examples of charge transfer devices include charge­coupled
devices (CCDs) and bucket­brigade devices (BBDs).
CHARGE: ­ For class 123
a quantity of ​
gworking fluid​
h intended to be ignited for a working stroke of the ​
gpiston​
h.
CHARGE: BATTERY OR CELL ­ For class 320
The act of adding electrical energy (e.g., supplying current, etc.) into a battery or cell
from a diverse source of electrical energy to increase the amount of useful and available
chemical energy stored in the battery or cell; or, the amount of chemical energy stored in
a battery or cell that is available for useful conversion to electrical energy for supplying an
electric load.
CHARGE: CAPACITOR ­ For class 320
The act of applying an electric potential across the electrodes or plates of a capacitor from
a diverse source of electrical energy to increase the amount of useful and available
electrical energy stored in the capacitor, or the amount of energy stored in a capacitor
that is available for release to usefully supply electrical energy to an electric load.
CHARGE­COUPLED DEVICE ­ For class 257
A charge transfer device in which all carriers (electrons or holes) are transferred from one
storage site to the next upon application of a shifting voltage.
CHARGING ­ For class 373
The function of supplying a charge to a furnace.
CHARGING CIRCUIT ­ For class 320
The electric circuit or path that extends from a charging source to a battery, cell, or
capacitor to be charged.
CHARGING SOURCE ­ For class 320
The immediate source from which electric energy is derived for addition into a battery,
cell, or capacitor, where the polarity of the source is such as to cause current to flow in
opposition to the normal polarity of the battery, cell, or capacitor, if the latter is polarized,
and may be, for example: (1) a mere charging circuit; (2) means for collecting
atmospheric, parasitic, or other stray electric charge or currents; (3) means for converting
electrical energy having one or more particular electrical characteristics into electrical
energy having a different characteristic (e.g., electrical converters such as a combination
alternating current source and rectifier, where the rectifier is considered to be the
"immediate source"; (4) means for converting energy, other than electrical, into electric
energy (e.g., electrical generator, fuel cell, etc.).
CHARGING SOURCE CONTROL ­ For class 320
Any control that effects the flow of energy from a charging source, including (a) direct
control of the charging source itself or (b) the flow or delivery of energy from the charging
source to a load.
CHARTS ­ For class 351
A light reflecting or transmitting panel with symbols or pictures of varying size for testing
the refraction of the eye.
CHEEK ­ For class 164
The intermediate part of a flask or mold that has more than two parts.
CHEMFET ­ For class 438
Chemically sensitive FET
CHEMICAL EVOLUTION PROCESS ­ For class 506
Process using in vitro selection systems that evolve to enrich mixtures of chemical
compounds in those components having selected properties. The terminology ​
gdirected
molecular evolution​
h is commonly employed when the process is applied to mixtures of
macromolecules (e.g., RNA aptamers, etc.). Selected compounds are then amplified
(​
gcopied​
h) using biochemical methods (e.g., enzymatic reverse transcription of RNA
aptamers to DNA, PCR amplification, and finally retranscription to RNA, etc.). This concept
has been adapted to organic chemistry and opened a new branch of combinatorial
chemistry named ​
gdynamic combinatorial chemistry​
h wherein the enrichment in the
(usually low­molecular weight) compounds having a selected property results from the
equilibration process that carries out a preferential destruction and recycling of unselected
compounds.
CHEMICAL FORCE MICROSCOPE ­ For class 977
Scanning probe microscope with a chemically functionalized tip.
CHEMICAL PROCESS A ­ For class 430
process involving a chemical reaction or the recitation of chemical composition, compound,
etc., in the claims which are involved in a chemical reaction during the process.
CHEMICAL REACTION ­ For class 060
The transformation of the molecules of one or more substances into other kinds of
molecules.
CHEMICAL REACTION ­ For class 117
For purposes of Class 117, chemical reaction is given a broad meaning. The following are
included: metathesis; changing the water of hydration; forming intermetallic compounds
from constituent elements or from alloys; forming compound semiconductor material from
constituent elements; forming ions (ionization) or ionized plasma. Not included are:
dissolution of a compound and solidification (e.g. crystallization) of the same compound; a
change of phase (e.g., amorphous to single­crystal*); change of crystal phase or form
(e.g., face centered cubic to body centered cubic).
CHEMICAL TREATING AGENT ­ For class 520
Denotes a chemical material which is added to the formed solid polymer and which causes
or is present during a process wherein a change in a bond of the polymer is effected.
Claims reciting a ​
gchemical treating agent​
h are classified on the basis of the first­
appearing material utilized as part of the chemical agent. No attempt has been made to
classify on the basis of functionality of the chemically active material and therefore all
materials in a composition are regarded equally (e.g., diluent, reactant, catalyst, etc.).
Processes and products which refer to mere cross­linking, curing, or vulcanizing will be
classified on the basis of the product treated.
CHILL ­ For class 164
A piece of metal applied to the casting to hasten the solidification in that area.
CHIP ­ For class 257
A single crystal substrate of semiconductor material on which one or more active or
passive solid­state electronic devices are formed. A chip may contain an integrated circuit.
A chip is not normally ready for use until packaged and provided with external connectors.
CHIP ­ For class 438
A single crystal substrate of semiconductor material on which one or more active or
passive solid­state electronic devices are formed. A chip may contain an integrated circuit.
A chip is not normally ready for use until packaged and provided with external connectors.
CHIP CARRIER ­ For class 257
A package with terminals, for solid­state electronic devices, including chips which
facilitates handling of the chip during assembly of the chip to other electronic elements.
CHIP CARRIER ­ For class 438
A package with terminals, for solid­state electronic devices, including chips which
facilitates handling of the chip during assembly of the chip to other electronic elements.
CHIP COMPONENT ­ For class 257
A circuit element (active or passive) for use in microelectronics. Besides integrated
circuits, the term includes diodes, transistors, resistors, and capacitors.
CHL ­ For class 438
Current hugging logic
CHOPPER ­ For class 363
A device for interrupting current at regular intervals.
CHORD ­ For class 416
The straight line in a plane normal to the longitudinal axis of a working member* joining
the leading and trailing edges of the member*. See Figure I.
CHROMATICITY TEST ­ For class 351
Determination of the visual sensitivity or adaptation to color.
CHROMATOGRAPHY ­ For class 210
A process in which a liquid is flowed along a linear path comprising a sorbent, with which
the liquid competes in affinity for a constituent of the liquid. The constituent is sorbed from
the moving liquid by the relatively immobile sorbent and redissolved by a later passing
portion of the liquid until an equilibrium of the sorbing­dissolving step is set up causing the
constituent to concentrate in a specific volume of the sorbent and to move along the path
of the liquid at a slower rate than such liquid. A comprehensive treatise on
chromatography is to be found in Kirk­Othmer Encyclopedia of Chemical Technology 2nd
ed. Vol. 5, pp. 413­450.
CHRYSOBERYL ­ For class 117
Beryllium aluminate; BeO.Al2O3; cat"s eye; alexandrite; optionally with up to about 10
wt% chromium oxide and titanium oxide.
CHUTE ­ For class 198
A structure capable of guiding a gravity induced flow of material therethrough or thereon.
While a chute is more often than not an inclined passageway in the form of a trough, it
occasionally takes the form of a conduit. Inasmuch as a chute with a gate, especially a
chute in the form of a conduit, presents structure closely related to that of a hopper, such
structures are distinguished on the basis of whether a storage concept exists (hopper) or
does not exist (chute). A receptacle positioned in such manner as to impart the property of
gravity induced flow to material contained therein, and, therefore, to be a source of supply
to components ​
gdownstream​
h thereof. While it is not essential that the contained material
be ​
gstored​
h for a finite period of time, there should be a concept of supporting it for an
interval longer than that required for mere passage therethrough. A hopper has an inlet
and an outlet, although the inlet may be merely an open side (of the receptacle). The
outlet, however, will have a provision whereby passage of the contents can be controlled
(e.g., possibly a conveyor). The provision of chutelike structure integral with the hopper,
whereby material is guided into the inlet or out of the outlet, should not be considered as
constituting a separate element. (This is in line with what appears to be a basic difference
between chutes and hoppers; namely, a chute guides whereas a hopper stores and may
guide). ​
gGravity­induced​
h is not intended to be construed to exclude those nondriven
conveyors which utilize mechanical means (e.g., a vibrator) to start to maintain flow (i.e.,
bridge breaking).
CID ­ For class 438
Charge injection device
CIPHER ­ For class 380
Information concealed by substitution or interchange of text characters for those in the
original message.
CIRCUIT ­ For class 250
A closed or closable conducting path through which, or along which, electric current can
travel.
CIRCUIT ­ For class 257
A number of devices interconnected in a one or more closed paths to perform a desired
electrical or electronic function.
CIRCUIT MAKING AND/OR BREAKING ­ For class 320
Fully establishing and/or fully interrupting the conductivity of an electrical path between
two or more points in an electrical circuit by physical movement of electrically conductive
elements into and out of physical contact with each other.
CIRCUIT MAKING AND/OR BREAKING DEVICE ­ For class 318
A device for fully establishing and/or fully interrupting the electrical conductivity of an
electrical path or circuit between two or more points in an electrical circuit by relative
movement of electrically conductive elements into and/or out of physical contact with each
other.
CLADDING BARRIER ­ For class 257
A higher band gap material which encases a lower band gap material that defines the walls
of a quantum well.
CLADDING BARRIER ­ For class 438
A higher band gap material which encases a lower band gap material that defines the walls
of a quantum well.
CLAMP ­ For class 072
(See ​
gWork­Gripping Clamp​
h and compare ​
gBlank Holder​
h).
CLAMP COUPLE ELEMENT ­ For class 269
Structure limited to one jaw* plus the means to adjust* and/or actuate* said jaw relative
to a disclosed, but not claimed, coacting jaw.
CLAMSHELL ­ For class 037
This device is an excavating or handling tool having two similar jaws which close upon
material for excavating and open for dumping.
CLASP­ For class 024
A securing mechanism or element including two coacting members or member segments
having gripping surfaces which engage portions of structure­to­be­securedon opposite
sides in a jawlike manner to thereby (a) prevent or hinder the movement of structure­to­
be secured* relative to the surfaces in at least one direction, (b) prevent or hinder the
separation of distinct portions of the structure­to­be­secured* from each other, or (c)
perform a securement of structure­to­be­secured* by overedge engagement thereof. The
gripping surfaces of the coacting members or member segments are intended to be always
easily moved into and out of engagement with the structure­to­be­secured* by either
direct manual or tool force thereon or actuation of an attached operator*. In addition, both
of the coacting members or member segment, when engaging with or disengaging from
the structure­to­be­secured*, do not exceed the elastic limit of or destroy any portion of
the securing mechanism or element. If the mechanism or element is formed from either a
single piece or plural fixedly attached pieces of rigid* material, then the structural shape
of the gripping surfaces and the outward force of the compressed structure­to­be­secured*
provide the gripping force required above.
CLATHRATES AND INTERCALATES (INCLUSION COMPOUNDS) ­ For class 532
Clathrates and intercalates (inclusion compounds), per se, are classified hierarchically and
subject to the limitations set forth in the compound (element) classes based both on the
encapsulant and encapsulate. For example, a clathrate of urea and hydrogen peroxide is
classified in Class 564, subclass 32, urea and an organic compound in Class 564, subclass
1.5, dextran and iodine in Class 536, subclass 112, etc. Where a patent does not state that
a material is either a clathrate or an intercalate, the assumption is made that the material
is either a coated or encapsulated product classified in Class 428, subclasses 402+.
CLAY ­ For class 501
The naturally occurring earthy materials (or artificial compositions having generally
equivalent chemical and physical properties) containing a substantial proportion (30
percent or more) of colloidal particles (under .002mm.), and which becomes plastic when
mixed with water and which plastic material is capable of being hardened when fired and
containing a major proportion of hydrated aluminum silicates which are derived by the
weathering or decomposition of granite or other feldspathic rock. Note. Many natural
materials are considered to be clays, e.g., kaolin, fire clays, ball clays, china clays,
bentonite, fuller"s earth, bauxite, montmorillonite, halloysite, and argillaceous earths.
Note. Typical clay containing ceramic compositions or articles are, e.g., common or face
brick, structural blocks, porcelain bricks, pottery, china, terra cotta, tile, sewer pipe, and
some coating and filling compositions.
CLAY ­ For class 502
A naturally occurring hydrated aluminum silicate originally derived from the earth, having
physical properties due at least in part to the size and distribution of colloidal particles,
and properties including plasticity. Thirty or more percent of the particles are under 0.002
mm in diameter. Note. The use of the term clay in a document is considered to meet the
above definition. Note. Terms recognized as clay: attapulgite, bentonite, fuller"s earth,
halloysite, illite kaolin, montmorillonite, mullite. Note. Some earthy silicon compounds that
are not clay or zeolite include Asbestos, Diaspore, Diatomaceous earth, Diatomite,
Feldspar, Guhr, Kieselgahr, Mica, Quartz, Sand, and Silica.
CLEAN ­ For class 072
To loosen, separate, or remove from the surface of metal a spot or layer of any substance
generally distinguishable from the work material without intended redimensioning of said
material.
CLEANING ­ For class 431
The dislodging of extraneous matter or incrustations.
CLEANSING ­ For class 173
The act of removing matter resulting from the operation of the tool on the work.
CLEANSING FLUID ­ For class 173
A fluid which is adapted to perform a cleansing function upon work. Such a fluid may be
solely described as performing some other function, such as cooling the work, so long as it
is directed in such a manner as to inherently cleanse the work.
CLIENT ­ For class 725
The requesting device in a communications network. In a client­server network, for
example, a user interface could reside in the client workstation while the storage and
retrieval functions could reside in the server database.
CLIP ­ For class 725
A portion of motion video material consisting of plural fields or frames of video data.
CLIP­ For class 024
A securing mechanism or element including a member which (1) is intended to be
connected or attached to a rigid or semirigid supporting member (e.g., wall, floor, roof) or
article (e.g., pen, vehicle) having an additional and usually principle function other than
normally associated with this class, and (2) has a gripping surface intended to coact with
the surface of the supporting member or article to engage the opposite sides of a distinct
structure­to­be­securedpositioned therebetween to prevent or hinder either (a) the
movement of the structure­to­be­secured* relative to the surfaces in one direction, or (b)
the separation of a structure­to­be­secured* from the supporting member or article. The
gripping surface of the member is intended to be always easily moved into and out of
engagement with the structure­to­be­secured* by either direct manual or tool force
thereon or actuation of an attached operator*. In addition, the gripping surface, when
engaging with or disengaging from the structure­to­be­secured does not exceed the elastic
limit of or destroy any portion of the securing mechanism or element. If the mechanism or
element is formed from either a single piece or plural fixedly attached pieces of rigid*
material, then the structural shape of the gripping surfaces and the outward force of the
compressed structure­to­be­secured provide the gripping force required above.
CLOSED COIL ­ For class 336
is a coil which is not designed to be connected to an external source or to a circuit, but
which has the ends of the coil connected together so that a magnetic field can induce
current therein which current flows in the closed path formed by the closed coil and
generates a magnetic field in opposition to the current inducing field.
CLOSED DIE ­ For class 072
A tool* which comprises a work­shape­imposing orifice*, cavity*, or passageway*. (See
diagrams under subclasses 276, 327, 350, and 360 for examples of ​
gClosed Die​
h).
CLOSED LOOP CONTROL ­ For class 388
A method of control in which the power input of a motor is adjusted by a control circuit
which compares a reference signal with a feedback signal proportional to an output
parameter (e.g., speed) of the motor to modify the power input of the motor so as to
achieve or maintain some desired operating condition of the motor (e.g., constant running
speed).
CLOSED SYSTEM ­ For class 425
Plural fluid containing elements in fluid tight relation when under pressure.
CLOSURE ­ For class 049
A closure is an obstructive structure whose presence in or before a passage bars traffic
through the passage. The character of passage varies depending on the thing or things the
passage is intended to accommodate. For example, a single rod across a doorway
prevents passage of a person but not a small animal; a letter slot permits passage of a
letter but not a large package, a window sash permits passage of light but not air, a
shutter permits passage of air but restricts the passage of light.
CLOSURE ­ For class 053
A species of cover in which a separate cover member completes the encasement or
confinement of contents within a preformed receptacle when said member is assembled
within, over or around the aperture of said receptacle.
CLOSURE ­ For class 413
A lid, bottle cap, the top of a can.
CLOTH ­ For class 428
A fabric* which for purposes of this class is considered to be made of mechanically
intertwined, interlooped, interwoven, or intertangled strands*, strand­portions* or strand
like strips*. See Class 442, class definition. (Structural)
CLSEG ­ For class 438
Confined lateral SEG
CLUTCH ­ For class 475
Mechanism to selectively or automatically couple two relatively moving parts together for
common movement or to uncouple such parts.
CLUTCH: ­ For class 477
Mechanism operable to couple two relatively rotatable parts together for common rotation
or to uncouple such parts. The clutch* as used in the definition of this class or subclasses
is a clutch* that may be used without a gear transmission* or in advance of or behind a
gear transmission* in a power train. If a clutch is used as a part of transmission (i.e., in a
planetary transmission to change gear ratio or direction), such a clutch is classified with
transmission control rather than clutch control.
CML ­ For class 438
Current mode logic (i.e., ECL)
CMOS ­ For class 257
See COMPLEMENTARY METAL OXIDE SEMICONDUCTOR.
CMOS ­ For class 438
Complementary (NMOS and PMOS) FETs
CMP ­ For class 438
chemical­mechanical polishing/planarization
COAGULATE ­ For class 516
The product of coagulation; the irreversible combination of semisolid particles (e.g., fats,
proteins, oils) to form a mass. Often brought about by the addition of a coagulant. See
flocculate.
COAL TAR ­ For class 208
Mixture of aromatic hydrocarbons obtained by the distillation of bituminous coal.
COALESCE ­ For class 210
The merging together of small droplets or particles of a material or constituent dispersed
in a liquid to form larger bodies of the material or constituent which may be more easily
handled.
COALESCENCE ­ For class 516
The phenomenon of the merging of two or more drops of liquid (e.g., oil or water droplets
in emulsions) or particles (e.g., solid particles in sols* and dispersions*) resulting in a
larger drop or particle having a lower interfacial surface area and a generally less stable
condition.
COATING ­ For class 065
See Subclass References to the Current Class, above, for a subclass reference to the term
gcoating.​
​
h
COATING ­ For class 118
The term ​
gcoating​
h is used throughout the definitions in a generic sense to mean either (1)
an initially fluent film or layer of material lying on or bonded to the surface of a base, or
(2) an impregnating material which penetrates the base either partially or completely and
all or part of which is retained therein, either in its original form or physically or
chemically combined therewith.
COAX (COAXIAL CABLE) ­ For class 725
A two­conductor (center conductor, shield system), concentric, constant impedance
transmission line used as the trunk medium in the baseband system. In broadband
networks, a cable with two conductors where one completely surrounds the other. Coax
cables are unbalanced transmission lines that have an outer conductor that shields the
center conductor from electrostatic interference. The two conductors are spaced by an
insulating dielectric that, depending on the mechanical and material configuration, affects
the speed, attenuation, and impedance of transmission.
COB ­ For class 438
(a) chip­on­board or (b) capacitor over bit­line
COD ­ For class 438
Catastrophic optical damage
CODE ­ For class 234
A system of symbols arbitrarily used to represent directions, words, letters, or numerical
values. In this class, the term ​
gcode​
h wherever employed without further limitation should
be regarded as meaning Combinational­Code*.
CODE ­ For class 380
Information concealed by substitution of words or symbols for words of the concealed
message.
CODED­INTERPOSER ­ For class 234
An element which is movable to and from an effective position in which position portions
of said element engage tools of a plurality of tool pairs, thereby completing a drive train
for the subsequent effective transmission of actuating power to the corresponding tool
pairs. (Cf. Interposer).
CODED­SELECTOR­MEANS ­ For class 234
An element which is movable to and from an effective position in which it determines the
selection of a plurality of tool pairs by other mechanism. (Note. This element differs from
a coded­interposer* in that (a) it does not engage the selected tools, and (b) it has only
one effective position, as distinguished from the differentially positionable coded­
interposer* found in subclass 98).
CODING OR ECODING ­ For class 506
Strategy whereby a surrogate analyte is associated with each member of a library in order
to record its structure or the reaction sequence used for its preparation. This is usually
achieved by the use of tags or labels attached to particles or solid supports on which the
library members are assembled.
COG ­ For class 438
Chip­on­glass
COHERENCE LENGTH ­ For class 257
The typical distance an electron can travel before it is scattered (e.g., by a phonon, a
defect, or an impurity).
COHERENCE LENGTH ­ For class 438
The typical distance an electron can travel before it is scattered (e.g., by a phonon, a
defect, or an impurity, etc.).
COHERENT LIGHT ­ For class 372
A single frequency of light. A light beam in which the electric vector at any point in it is
related to that at any other point by a definite, continuous sinusoidal function.
COHERER ­ For class 257
A term which encompasses both active and passive type devices, the passive type being a
resistor whose resistance decreases when subjected to a high frequency signal, and the
active type being a rectifier which is made up of active solid­state particles which conduct
and rectify current when connected into a cohesive element but which loses that
characteristic when the particles are separated (e.g., by shaking a container in which the
particles are located).
COHERER ­ For class 438
A term which encompasses both active and passive type devices, the passive type being a
resistor whose resistance decreases when subjected to a high frequency signal, and the
active type being a rectifier which is made up of active solid­state particles which conduct
and rectify current when connected into a cohesive element but which loses that
characteristic when the particles are separated (e.g., by shaking a container in which the
particles are located, etc.).
COIL ­ For class 072
The product of an operation in which work is bent so that it surrounds an Axis­Of­Bend*
through more than 360 degrees of revolution. As used in this class, the operation involves
moving the work and progressively deflecting successive portions thereof in the same
general direction which is arcuate with respect to the direction of movement of the work.
Note. To produce a SPIRAL­COIL, the work is bent by deflection and wound, one
convolution on a successive convolution, to form a scroll of gradually increasing diameter.
Note. To produce a HELICAL­COIL, the work if deflected as described above, but an
additional deflection or diversion is imposed on successive convolutions. The additional
deflection is directed along the Axis­Of­Bend*. The additional component of bend is
measured in terms of pitch, which term is used here in the same sense as applied to a
screw or helix.
COIL ­ For class 336
A conductor which creates a magnetic field due to the flow of current therein. It may be
formed into one or more convolutions or turns, or have only a partial turn, or be straight.
COIL AXIS ­ For class 336
That path along which a unit magnetic pole would experience a maximum force when a
current is caused to flow in the coil conductor. For example, in a long, uniform, single
layer cylindrical coil, the coil axis corresponds to the geometrical axis of the coil.
COIL SPRING ­ For class 267
an element in the form of a spiral and which exhibits resilient characteristic when distorted
from its original shape. May be in the form of a helix, a volute spiral or flat spiral.
COKE ­ For class 201
Strictly this is the amorphous, solid residue of coal after the volatile material has been
distilled off in a thermolytic distillation. The term is also applied in the art to the solid,
carbonaceous residue from the thermolytic distillation of such materials as oil shale,
petroleum and pitch.
COKE ­ For class 202
Strictly this is the amorphous, solid residue of coal after the volatile material has been
distilled off in a thermolytic distillation. The term is also applied in the art to the solid,
carbonaceous residue from the thermolytic distillation of such materials as oil shale,
petroleum and pitch.
COKING ­ For class 208
A cracking type conversion in which solid, free carbon or coke as a product thereof.
Additional liquid or gaseous hydrocarbon may also be obtained.
COLLATING­TABLE ­ For class 400
A platform or support used while a plurality of sheets or webs are arranged or assembled
according to an orderly system. The sheets or webs may include record­medium* pieces
or transfer­medium* pieces in any desired order or sequence and the assemblage of
pieces comprises that which is to be typed on. The term ​
gcollating​
h as used in this class
(400) is used to describe a simple structure that is used for collating, usually manually. It
differs somewhat from the term collating as applied to a machine that accomplishes a
similar result of arranging or assembling plural sheets or webs.
COLLECTIVE PITCH CHANGE ­ For class 416
Wherein the blade angles of all working members* of a single impeller are adjusted
simultaneously.
COLLECTOR ­ For class 257
That end region of a bipolar transistor which forms one of the main current regions and
which is reverse biased in operation with respect to the base region.
COLLECTOR CURRENT ­ For class 257
The current which flows through the terminal of the collector region of a bipolar transistor.
COLLECTOR DIFFUSION ISOLATION (CDI) ­ For class 257
An electrical isolation technology used for bipolar devices which employs an epitaxial
layer, which forms transistor base regions, laid on a substrate of the same conductivity
type (p or n) as the epitaxial layer, with an opposite conductivity type region, more
heavily doped than the epitaxial base layer and located between the layer and the
substrate, forming the collector and isolating the transistor from the substrate.
COLLECTOR DIFFUSION ISOLATION (CDI) ­ For class 438
An electrical isolation technology used for bipolar devices which employs an epitaxial
layer, which forms transistor base regions, laid on a substrate of the same conductivity
type (p or n) as the epitaxial layer, with an opposite conductivity type region, more
heavily doped than the epitaxial base layer and located between the layer and the
substrate, forming the collector and isolating the transistor from the substrate.
COLLECTOR ELECTRODE ­ For class 330
See the definition of point contact or junction type transistor below.
COLLOID ­ For class 977
Suspension of finely divided particles in a continuous medium, which may be gaseous,
liquid, or solid.
COLLOID SYSTEM ­ For class 516
Also called colloid dispersions* or colloid suspensions. Sometimes simply colloid, but this
is not preferred because this may also be used to refer to colloid­sized particles, per se. A
colloid system is a multi­phase combination of matter in which one or more constituents
has one or more dimensions below about five microns, however systems having particles
of 20 to 50 microns have been described. Nobel prize winning research chemist, Wolfgang
Ostwald (1853­1932), reportedly said "There are not sharp differences between mechanical
suspensions, colloidal solutions, and molecular solutions. There is a gradual and continuous
transition from the first through the second to the third." With respect to particles in
suspension, in colloid systems the particles are governed by surface forces and therefore
act as individual flow units, as contrasted to non­colloid mixtures which are governed by
gravity or body (e.g. drag) forces. Macromolecules may form either true solutions or
colloid systems and categorization properly depends upon the properties relevant to the
intended use. Foams are colloid systems because they contain two phases and the liquid
film has a thickness which is colloid­sized. Most common colloid systems are composed of
particles of a colloid­sized dispersed phase (the subdivided or discontinuous phase)
surrounded by a continuous phase. See also sol*.
COLLOIDAL ­ For class 210
A state of very fine division of a material dispersed throughout a liquid almost to the point
of a true solution and either impossible or extremely difficult to filter or cause to settle.
COLOPHONY ­ For class 516
See Rosin*.
COLOR IMAGE IN OR ON AN IMAGE RECORD ­ For class 430
At least a portion of the image record absorbs only part of the light in the visible
electromagnetic spectrum, excludes black image on white background, or vice versa,
includes black image on green background.
COMBINATION ­ For class 070
The prearranged or predetermined secret or nonpublic succession or order of movement of
blocking elements, or the peculiar arrangement or scheme of fixed or movable elements
designed to secure against public operation or control.
COMBINATIONAL­CODE ­ For class 234
A system of symbols each comprising two or more marks or perforations which by their
number and/or position arbitrarily represent bits of information. (Cf. one­hole­ code*,
defined below).
COMBINATIONAL­CODING­MEANS ­ For class 234
Means which is differentially responsive to distinguishable forces or input­impulses* to
prepare corresponding predetermined distinct combinations of less than the total number
of tool pairs for actuation. (Note. This is the subject matter of subclass 94 of this class).
COMBINATORIAL LIBRARY ­ For class 506
A set of compounds (a library) prepared by combinatorial synthesis. This set may consist
of a collection of pools or sublibraries.
COMBINATORIAL SYNTHESIS ­ For class 506
Combinatorial synthesis is the preparation of sets of diverse entities by the combination of
sets of chemical building blocks (e.g., reagents, etc.).
COMBINE ­ For class 460
A machine in which six major operations are performed during harvesting; cutting the
standing grain (cutting unit); feeding the cut grain to the threshing unit (feeding unit);
threshing and rethreshing the grain or seed from the heads; separating the grain from the
straw and chaff; cleaning the threshed grain; collecting the threshed grain for convenient
handling (grain handling unit).
COMBINED ­ For class 347
Means connected with the marking* device for adapting the device to a particular
marking* purpose.
COMBUSTION ­ For class 110
The chemical action resulting from the direct combination of oxygen gas, generally in air,
with a combustible material accompanied by the evolution of heat and light.
COMBUSTION ­ For class 431
The direct combination of oxygen gas and a burnable substance.
COMBUSTION CHAMBER ­ For class 110
The structure immediately surrounding the combustion reaction and generally above the
fuel (*) or refuse (*) grate and designed to support or promote the combustion reaction.
COMBUSTION CHAMBER: ­ For class 123
that volume of a ​
gcylinder​
h enclosed by the ​
ghead​
h and the ​
gpiston​
h when the piston is
closest to the head.
COMFET ­ For class 438
Conductivity modulation FET (i.e., IGBT)
COMMERCIAL ­ For class 725
An advertisement provided within broadcast or point­to­point networks.
COMMON­ or GATE­CONFIGURATION ­ For class 257
A unipolar transistor in which the gate region is common to both input and output circuits.
COMMON­BASE CONFIGURATION ­ For class 257
A bipolar transistor in which the base region is common to both the input and output
circuit. This is also known as a grounded­base bipolar transistor circuit.
COMMON­COLLECTOR CONFIGURATION ­ For class 257
A bipolar transistor in which the collector region is common to both the input and output
circuit. It is also known as an emitter­follower bipolar transistor circuit.
COMMON­DRAIN CONFIGURATION ­ For class 257
A unipolar transistor in which the drain region is common to both the input and output
circuit.
COMMON­EMITTER CONFIGURATION ­ For class 257
A bipolar transistor in which the emitter region is common to both the input and output
circuit. It is also known as a grounded­emitter bipolar transistor circuit.
COMMUNICATION ­ For class 342
The conveying or transferring or information; specifically a system, as a radio, television,
telephone for conveying or transferring information.
COMMUNICATION ­ For class 343
The conveying or transferring of information; specifically a system, as radio, telephone,
telegraph for conveying or transferring information. For a general statement of the classes
which include communication devices, apparatus and systems,see section V below.
COMMUNICATIONS ­ For class 375
The transmission of information from one point to another.
COMMUTATOR ­ For class 388
The part of a motor armature to which the armature windings are connected. It consists of
a set of conductors arranged about the rotation axis of the armature and insulated from
the axis and from one another. A set of stationary contacts, called ​
gbrushes​
h ride on the
outer face of the conductors and thereby connect the armature windings to a power
source.
COMPACTING ­ For class 419
Forming of particulate material into a body or shape by the application of pressure to the
particulate material without heating.
COMPANDER ­ For class 333
An amplitude range compressor connected to an amplitude range expander with or without
an intervening transmission line so that the amplitude range of the input wave is first
decreased in the compressor and then increased in the expander.
COMPLEMENTARY METAL OXIDE SEMICONDUCTOR (CMOS) ­ For class 257
Both n­type and p­type metal oxide semiconductor devices, e.g., transistors, formed on
the same substrate.
COMPLETED BOOK­ For class 412
A book() which has had its covering member attached.
COMPLEX COMPOUND ­ For class 423
A chemical combination of two or more compounds or ions; e.g., 4 KCN and Fe (Cn)2 give
the complex compound K4Fe (Cn)6; 2 HF and Si F4give the complex acid H2 Si F6. An
electrically charged radical or group of atoms, e.g., Cu (NH3) 2+, is a complex ion.
COMPONENT ­ For class 112
A distinct unitary element of a composite web or sheet which is longitudinally coextensive
therewith and which, if separated from said multi­part web or sheet, would be recognized
as a web or sheet by itself.
A component may consist of plural layers as in the folded component shown in Figure 2.
COMPONENT ­ For class 257
An electronic device ­ active or passive ­ which has distinct electrical characteristics and
has terminals for connection to other components to form a circuit.
COMPONENT ­ For class 403
An element or a characteristic of a member used in effecting a connection.
COMPONENT ­ For class 428
A distinct unitary element of a composite stock material* which is longitudinally
coextensive therewith and which, if separated from the remainder of such stock material*,
would be recognized as a web*, sheet*, rod*, strand*, tube or block by itself. A
component may consist of plural layers* as in the folded component shown in Figure 1.
See also (2) Note under A, above. (Structural)
COMPONENT ­ For class 451
A distinct unitary element of a composite tool in the form of a layer* or a constituent of a
layer.
COMPONENT ­ For class 902
A device within a data processing system* designed to process data (e.g., encrypting,
modulating, transmitting, receiving, comparing, performing arithmetical calculations, etc.)
after it has been entered by a user* (i.e., input) in order to formulate a response to the
user (i.e., output) or to protect the data. Within the context of this collection, system
components generally include a central data processor, a communication processor and
network, and terminals at points distant from the central data processor and
communicating with it through the communication components.
COMPONENT, REACTOR ­ For class 376
For the purpose of this class, relates to any of the functional segments or parts
comprising, when properly associated together, a nuclear reactor, e.g., fuel, moderator,
coolant (fluid or solid), control rod, reflector, shield, etc.
COMPOSITE ­ For class 425
A preform or product made of diverse materials, each of which is identifiable, at least in
part, in the final product.
COMPOSITE ­ For class 428
A stock­material* comprising a plurality of components*. (Structural)
COMPOSITE COLOR SIGNAL ­ For class 348
A color picture signal with all blanking and synchronizing signals. Including luminance and
chrominance components; vertical­ and horizontal­sync pulses; vertical­ and horizontal­
blanking pulses; and the color burst signal, with or without accompanying audio.
COMPOSITE SHEET ­ For class 112
A sheet comprising a plurality of components.
COMPOSITE VIDEO SIGNAL ­ For class 348
A signal in television that conveys all of the intelligence present in the image together with
the synchronizing information (e.g., vertical and horizontal pulses) with or without audio
information.
COMPOSITE WEB ­ For class 112
A web comprising a plurality of components.
COMPOSITION ­ For class 428
A product having a plurality of constituents* or elements, none of which are in a defined
spatial or ordered relationship to each other or to the surface or shape of the body in
which they are contained, that is, a random mixture of elements. (Structural)
COMPOSITION ­ For class 588
A mixture of material(s) such as elements, compounds, etc. which materials are not
present in a ratio of small whole numbers based on molar ratios, i.e., mixtures.
COMPOUND ­ For class 257
A homogeneous material which has definite proportions of chemically combined atoms or
ions.
COMPOUND ­ For class 423
A substance whose molecules consist of unlike atoms, whose constituents cannot be
separated by physical means, whose properties are entirely different from those of its
constituent elements and which contains definite proportions of its constituent elements,
depending on their atomic weights.
COMPOUND ­ For class 423
The elements or compounds comprising a material or produced from it by analysis.
COMPOUND ­ For class 516
See LINES WITH OTHER CLASSES AND WITHIN THIS CLASS, above.
COMPOUND ­ For class 588
A substance whose molecules consist of unlike atoms, whose constituents cannot be
separated by physical means, whose properties are entirely different from those of its
constituent elements, and which contains definite proportions of its constituent elements,
depending on their atomic weights.
COMPOUND SEMICONDUCTOR ­ For class 438
A semiconductor composed of a chemical compound formed of elements from two or more
different groups of the chemical periodic chart (e.g., Group III (B, Al, Ga, In) and Group V
(N, P, As, Sb) for the following compounds: AlP, AlAs, AlSb, GaP, GaAs, GaSb, InP, InAs,
and InSb, or a compound of silicon and carbon (SiC)).
COMPRESSOR OR VOLUME COMPRESSOR ­ For class 330
A device that compresses the volume range, as in recording sound, radio­telephone
transmission, etc.. In compressing the signal volume range the amplification of large
signals is reduced and of small signals is increased.
COMPUTER ­ For class 345
A machine that inputs data, processes data, stores data, and outputs data.
COMPUTER ­ For class 705
A machine that inputs data, processes data, stores data, and outputs data.
COMPUTER ­ For class 706
A machine that inputs data, processes data,stores data and outputs data.
COMPUTER ­ For class 709
A machine that inputs data, processes data, stores data, and outputs data.
COMPUTER ­ For class 710
A machine that inputs data, processes data, stores data, and outputs data.
COMPUTER ­ For class 711
A machine that inputs data, processes data, stores data, and outputs data.
COMPUTER ­ For class 712
A machine that inputs data, processes data, stores data, and outputs data.
COMPUTER ­ For class 713
A machine that inputs data, processes data, stores data, and outputs data.
COMPUTER ­ For class 714
A machine that inputs data, processes data, stores data, and outputs data.
COMPUTER ­ For class 715
A machine that inputs DATA*, processes data, stores data, and outputs data.
COMPUTER ­ For class 718
A machine that inputs data, processes data, stores data, and outputs data.
COMPUTER ­ For class 719
A machine that inputs data, processes data, stores data, and outputs data.
COMPUTER PROGRAM ­ For class 706
An algorithm and data structures constituting a set of instructions in some computer
language, intended to be executed on a computer to perform a useful task.
COMPUTER: ­ For class 700
A machine that inputs data, processes data, stores data, and outputs data.
COMPUTER: ­ For class 707
A machine that inputs data, processes data, stores data, and outputs data.
COMPUTER­READABLE STORAGE MEDIA ­ For class 706
Physical material on which data bits are read and written by a computer; excluding paper
and other non­computer written media.
CONCAVE ­ For class 460
A device consisting of a series of bars that are held together by rods or straps and is
curved to match the cylinder. It is sometimes adjustable up and down to allow the
operator to change the cylinder to concave clearance.
CONCAVE SPACING ­ For class 460
The radial distance between the concave and the cylinder on a combine.
CONCEALED STITCH ­ For class 112
A stitch in which the sewing thread completely penetrates one or more layers of material
and is hidden from view on at least one side of the assembly by a fold of material
overlying the stitch. See Figure 3.
CONCENTRATED LIGHT SOURCE ­ For class 353
The source of illumination for the projector. It may be either a projection lamp or a lens
and mirror system utilizing sunlight.
CONCENTRATED LIGHT SOURCE ­ For class 355
The source of illumination for the copier. It is usually a projection lamp but may be a lens
or mirror system utilizing sunlight.
CONCENTRATION GRADIENT ­ For class 257
A difference in dopant concentration (p­ or n­type) from one position to another in a
semiconductor.
CONCENTRIC LINES ­ For class 330
A transmission line in which one conductor extends within a second hollow conductor.
CONDENSATE ­ For class 201
See Distillate in the Class Definition section.
CONDENSATE ­ For class 202
See distillate in the Class Definition.
CONDENSATE ­ For class 203
See ​
gdistillate​
h in the class definition.
CONDENSATE ­ For class 425
Material derived by a change in physical state from a vapor to a liquid.
CONDENSATION ­ For class 260
Denotes combination between at least two or more molecules of the same or different
carbon compounds between carbons thereof.
CONDENSED ­ For class 435
Bridged or fused.
CONDENSED­BILLING ­ For class 400
A term used in the typewriter industry for the production of a condensed or summary
record of a succession of typed documents (e.g., bills or numerical data). The operation
includes the typing of plural copies (e.g., an ​
goriginal copy​
h and one or more ​
gcarbon
copies​
h, or duplicate ​
goriginal copies​
h) simultaneously on plural record­medium* pieces.
At least one of the pieces is intended to be complete as to heading, address, and other
information that is to be sent to one user. At least another piece is to be retained by the
typist, and is not required to be complete; that is, it may omit much of the information,
but may be a composite or summary or condensed record of the information that is to be
sent. The record­medium on which the condensed­billing is typed is therefore moved in
line­space* distances that differ from the line­space distances of the complete record
medium.
CONDENSER ­ For class 320
An obsolete or out­of­favor term for "capacitor." Although still used in the automotive field
to refer to a capacitor used across ignition points to prevent arcing, it is interpreted as
being synonymous with "capacitor" in this class, with no implied limitation to its use.
CONDENSING LENS ­ For class 353
A lens which parallels the light from the light source for uniform distribution over the
object to be projected and makes the light impinge on the object at right angles to the
plane of the object.
CONDENSING LENS ­ For class 355
A lens or combination of lenses used to gather light from a source and converge
(condense) it onto an image plane.
CONDITION RESPONSIVE ­ For class 198
Apparatus having (1) means to sense a condition of the environment surrounding the
conveyor and means responsive to said sensing means to cause a change in the operating
condition of the conveyor, or (2) means to sense a particular condition which may or may
not exist relative to the conveyor itself, such as speed, overload, motor temperature, etc.,
and means responsive to said sensing means to act to change the operating condition of
the conveyor.
CONDITION RESPONSIVE ­ For class 475
Mechanism to sense a condition or change of condition in the environment of a planetary
gear transmission; and, in response to such sensing, effect a control function on the
transmission or on a drive train* to or from such transmission.
CONDUCTION ELECTRONS ­ For class 257
In a conductor or n­type semiconductor, outer shell electrons that are bound so loosely
that they can move freely in the conduction band of a solid material under the influence of
an electric field.
CONDUCTION BAND ­ For class 257
A partially filled energy band in which electrons can move freely, permitting a material to
carry electric current where electrons are the current carriers.
CONDUCTION BAND ­ For class 438
A partially filled energy band in which electrons can move freely, permitting a material to
carry electric current where electrons are the current carriers.
CONDUCTION ELECTRONS ­ For class 438
In a conductor or n­type semiconductor, outer shell electrons that are bound so loosely
that they can move freely in the conduction band of a solid material under the influence of
an electric field.
CONDUCTIVITY ­ For class 257
The ability of a material to conduct electric current. Its converse is resistivity.
CONDUCTIVITY WATER ­ For class 210
An extremely pure water characterized by high ohmic resistance due to very low rate of
ionization. See POLISHING.
CONDUCTOR ­ For class 257
A material which offers comparatively little resistance to the flow of current.
CONDUCTOR ­ For class 336
A body designed to have an electric current flowing therein. For the purpose of
classification, a magnetic core is distinguished from a conductor. A conductor is designed
to be connected to a source of electromotive force, or to have induced therein a voltage by
inductive coupling from a current carrying conductor. A conductor, when used as a coil,
and connected either directly or by mutual inductance to a source of electromotive force,
creates a magnetic field due to the flow of current in the conductor. See the definition of
core.
CONDUCTOR ­ For class 338
A body which is essentially a carrier of electric current with a minimum of loss as by
heating.
CONDUCTOR ­ For class 439
A member intended to transmit electricity from one portion or end thereof to another
portion or end thereof, and to which electricity­transmitting member the electricity­
conducting part of an electrical connector is intended to be electrically joined or attached.
Note. A conductor may include such diverse members as an electrical cable, a wire (either
stranded or solid), a grounding plate, an inductive shield, a bus bar, or an electricity­
transmitting path formed of a conductive film deposited on an insulating plate or panel,
etc.
CONDUCTOR SPACING ­ For class 257
The distance between adjacent edges (not centerline to centerline) of isolated conductive
patterns in a conductor layer.
CONFIGURATION ­ For class 330
The arrangement of electrodes of a transistor as input and output electrodes, e.g.,
common base configuration, where the base is included in both the input and output
circuits of a transistor amplifier.
CONFINEMENT PLASMA ­ For class 376
For the purpose of this class, is either the containment or restraint force or the means
(structure) for producing such force placed upon the charged particles or plasma, e.g., by
electric or magnetic fields, so as to restrict said particles or plasma within a given volume.
CONNECTING ­ For class 385
The physical or mechanical joining of optical waveguiding structures to provide a stable
region of light transfer therebetween. The waveguiding structures which are joined
together are characterized by terminal ends which are mechanically prepared. This
includes ferrule type housings for demountable as well as permanent connections,
mechanical sleeves which partially or wholly surround and secure the ends of the
structures or the light transfer regions, and "assistance­type" structures which serve to
align and guide the ends of waveguiding structures into an effective light transfer
relationship. The waveguiding structures which can be connected (as defined herein)
include optical fibers, optical fiber bundles, nonfiber­like optical waveguides, and electro­
optical transmitting or receiving devices (e.g., semiconductor laser diodes).
CONNECTING ROD: ­ For class 123
The most common link for transmitting power from a ​
gpiston​
h to a ​
gcrankshaft​
h.
CONNECTOR ­ For class 403
A retainer which serves to hold the members against separation.
CONNECTOR ­ For class 439
A device for forming an electricity­conducting joint between conductors of electricity,
wherein the device either (1) consists solely of an electricity­conducting element having a
contact surface for forming the joint or (2) comprises an assembly which includes an
electricity­conducting element having a contact surface for forming the joint and further
includes any structure necessary to support, carry, or encase the conductive element; and
wherein the joint is of a type which may be readily made and broken, repeatedly, either
(a) by engaging or disengaging the conductive element or (b) by engaging or disengaging
the conductive element with a conductor.
CONNECTOR AREA ­ For class 257
That portion of metallized conductors used for providing external electrical connections
from a component to a chip or other component.
CONNECTOR AREA ­ For class 438
That portion of the electrical conductors (e.g., bonding pad, die bond, etc.) used for
providing external electrical connections from a component to a chip or other component.
CONSOLIDATE ­ For class 075
To form into a compact mass.
CONSOLIDATION ­ For class 419
Forming of particulate material into a unitary body without heating. This may or may not
include the application of pressure to the particulate material (e.g., slip casting).
CONSTITUENT ­ For class 428
A discrete element* (e.g., strand*, fiber*, particle*, etc.) of a component* or product.
CONTACT ­ For class 257
The parts of a conductor designed to touch or be touched by other such parts of an
electrical conductor to carry current to or from the conductor.
CONTACT ­ For class 438
The point or part of a conductor which touches another electrical conductor or electrical
component to carry electrical current to or from the conductor or electrical component.
CONTACT ­ For class 439
An electricity­conducting component of an electrical connector, including a contact surface
intended to form a readily made and broken electricity­conducting joint by directly
engaging either a conductor or a corresponding surface of a cooperating joint­forming
conductive component, so as to permit the passage of electricity through the joint from
one component to the other.
CONTACT WINDOW ­ For class 257
An opening in an insulating layer to expose an underlying conductor to permit electrical
contact thereto. It is also called a via hole.
CONTAINED IN ­ For class 506
A library ​
gcontained in​
h a micro­organism, a cell, or a vector is a library in which the
members are present in the respective biological entity (e.g., in a plasmid, etc.).
CONTAINER ­ For class 413
For purposes of this class is a closed can (e.g., soft drink, beer), full or empty.
CONTAINING ­ For class 532
This term is to be interpreted broadly. In a subclass which specifies halogen containing, for
example, the halogen may be attached to other parts of the compound by ionic bonding or
nonionic bonding. Further, the element contained in a material may be in any form. In a
subclass such as­­ Heavy metal containing catalyst (or material) utilized­­, the metal may
be in elemental or compound form.
CONTAINMENT ­ For class 588
To hold or enclose totally to prevent any leaching or leaking of the hazardous or toxic
material into the environment, and any use of a container that is destroyed with the
waste.
CONTAINS ­ For class 528
For purposes of this class, the term ​
gcontains​
h under a specific reactant subclass includes
the term ​
gwith​
h and merely requires the presence of the ​
gcontains​
h material. The required
moiety, element, etc., may be in the specific reactant or in an additional reactant.
CONTAMINATE ­ For class 588
To make a first substance impure (hazardous or toxic) by contact with or by the addition
of a second or more substances.
CONTENTS ­ For class 053
The goods or materials which are, or are to be, confined within the space defined by the
cover of the package, An insert sheet or coupon, to be packaged with other goods is
considered to be a part of a group contents. See ​
gGROUP FORMING​
h. A package resulting
from a first packaging operation may become the contents of a second packaging
operation.
CONTINUOUS CASTING ­ For class 164
Process of forming a product of indeterminate length wherein a portion of the product is
removed from a forming mold or surface as a further contiguous portion is cast.
CONTINUOUS CASTING STRAND ­ For class 164
Semi­solidified product of a continuous casting process or apparatus comprising a
generally molten center contained within a cooler solidified shell.
CONTROL ­ For class 072
To start, or to modify the operating condition of, any portion of a work­treating or handling
device Note. ​
gStopping​
h is ordinarily regarded as an aspect of ​
gControl​
h, but is separately
treated in this class in accordance with the class schedule. See subclasses 1+.
CONTROL ­ For class 323
Includes either the maintenance of a condition at a predetermined value or the variation of
a condition from one value to another.
CONTROL ­ For class 330
A selective adjustment of an element of an amplifier to vary the operation of the amplifier
in a desired manner, or the characteristic of a part of the amplifier whereby in response
directly to signal, or by means of a developed voltage or current in response to the signal,
or by a voltage from some outside source, the impedance characteristics of a circuit
element, or the electrical characteristics (bias or energizing voltage) of an amplifying
device are automatically altered to change the operation of the amplifier in a
predetermined manner. Such control may be by a nonlinear impedance element alone in a
biasing or power supply circuit. The term control has not been applied in this class, when a
nonlinear impedance element is in the signal path and affects the signal only, without any
control from a separate path being applied to vary such impedance.
CONTROL ­ For class 347
Means to regulate the operation of the head*, the medium, and the other parts of the
marking* device so that the device will operate in the intended manner.
CONTROL ­ For class 363
Includes either the maintenance of a condition at a predetermined value or the variation of
a condition from one value to another.
CONTROL ­ For class 725
To regulate the passage, progress, or exchange of data.
CONTROL ELECTRODE ­ For class 313
An electrode designed to influence or control the discharge current flowing between other
electrodes. It may depend for its effect on either its electro­static effect or on the current
flow thereto. The most common type of control electrode is the control grid. Since,
however, the grid may be used as an anode, and the anode as a grid in many types of
discharge devices, the use of the expression ​
gcontrol electrode​
h has been avoided where
possible and similar structures placed together irrespective of whether the disclosure
indicated that the grid electrode is to be used as an anode or control electrode. Patents
relating to discharge devices having one or more grid electrodes interposed between a
cathode and an anode are classified in subclasses 293+ or in the subclasses referred to in
the notes to these subclasses. See subclass 308 and the subclasses referred to in the notes
thereto for other discharge devices having a control electrode.
CONTROL ELECTRODE ­ For class 330
An electrode designed to influence or control the discharge current flowing between other
electrodes. It may depend for its effect on either its electrostatic effect or on the current
flow thereto. The most common types of control electrodes are the signal control grid, or
the gain control electrode or grid.
CONTROL ELEMENT ­ For class 376
For the purpose of this class, is rods, tubes, plates, etc., of a reactivity affecting material
used to hold a fission reactor at a given power level or to vary the rate of reaction.
Control elements can be given three names corresponding to three different functions,
namely: (a) power control, regulating or fine control (affecting only a small change in
reactivity); (b) safety or scram (capable or reducing the reactivity below critical and used
general when some emergency condition exists, such as power level to high); and (c) shim
(affecting a relatively large change in reactivity of a reactor, i.e., it is used for coarse
control or reactivity).
CONTROL GRID ­ For class 330
A control electrode having grid construction.
CONTROL INPUT ­ For class 137
Stream or energy field, referred to in the subclass definition, (C) (1) and (C) (2) above,
that causes the diversion or alteration of the output stream.
CONTROL ROD ­ For class 376
See Control Element.
CONTROL­ For class 187
Means for regulating the operation of a separate and distinct force generating,
transmitting, or retarding device (e.g., motor, drive­means*, brake) which moves or stops
the movement of a relatively movable component of apparatus proper for this class (e.g.,
elevator car), and includes both (a) an information input component (e.g., sensor,
information storage means, manual push button) and (b) a distinct component which
effects the operation of the force generating, transmitting, or retarding device in a
particular manner based on the input information.
CONTROLLABLE PITCH ­ For class 416
Comprises means for adjusting blade angle* during impeller* operation.
CONVECTIVE DISTILLATION ­ For class 203
A separatory distillation operation in which an inert vapor is passed through a heated liquid
to reduce the partial vapor pressure of the component in the liquid desired to be
recovered. It permits the separation of heat sensitive high boiling substances at
temperatures below their decomposition temperature. Steam distillation is the most
commonly used type of convective distillation.
CONVENTIONAL CHANNEL ­ For class 348
A portion of the spectrum assigned for the standard operation of a specific carrier and the
minimum number of sidebands necessary to convey intelligence.
CONVERSION ­ For class 208
A treatment of the mineral oil which results in an alteration of the hydrocarbon molecule
making up the mineral oil.
CONVERSION ­ For class 363
This class (363), includes only the following: (1) Changing alternating current to direct
current (rectification); (2) Changing direct current to alternating current (inverting); (3)
Systems having means for performing a combination of the conversions of (1) and (2)
above so that the input and output current are of the same character, but the system
includes intermediate means to convert the current to a different character (e.g., A.C. to
D.C. to A.C.); (4) Changing the frequency of alternating current from one frequency to a
different frequency; (5) Changing electrical energy having one number phases to a
different number of phases; (6) Combination of any of the above.
CONVERSION ­ For class 376
For the purpose of this class, is the process of artificially bringing about a change or
transformation in the nucleus of an atom. Nuclear conversion is generally caused by
subjecting a material to particle bombardment, usually by neutron irradiation as happens
in a fission reactor. See also Transmutation.
CONVEYOR ­ For class 175
A mechanical device for receiving and carrying cuttings, for example, it may consist of a
simple chute for directing cuttings away from the bore entrance, a helical screw fixed to
the tool shaft, or a power­driven endless carrier type device extending between any two
points within the bore or from any point within the bore to any location above ground.
CONVEYOR ­ For class 271
Refers to ​
gmeans for moving and placing the individual sheet with respect to a device for
operation on the sheet.​
h Thus, in the subclasses indented under ​
gFeeding​
h, the
gConveyor​
​
h may be modified by means for orienting, retarding or interrupting the feed
relative to the operation; and in the subclasses indented under ​
gDelivering​
h, the
gConveyor​
​
h should be limited to a means for transporting the individual sheet from the
operation or placing the individual sheet in a receiver for a stack of such sheets. In either
case the conveyor of Class 271 is distinct from a conveyor of other classes, wherein
material or articles are transported from an input location to an output location. Class 271
has also for many years included a device wherein a stack of sheets is moved as an article
to a position at which sheets are removed from the stack by a separator, but has not
included a device wherein a stack of sheets is formed by a delivery means, and
subsequently the stack of sheets is moved as an article away from the formation position.
See References With Other Classes, above, for the location of patents not proper for Class
271.
CONVOLUTE ­ For class 425
To twist or to coil with one part of a preform overlapping another part.
COOLANT ­ For class 376
A fluid (liquid, gaseous, or particulate) whose function is to absorb heat from the reactor
core and to deliver this absorbed heat to a heat exchanger or other utilization means
exterior to the reactor core.
COPE ­ For class 164
The upper or topmost section of a flask, mold, or pattern.
COPY (n.) ­ For class 234
A tangible object which carries or exhibits a picture, design, or record of data, for the
guidance or direction of an operative or attendant of a selective cutting machine. (Cf.
pattern*).
COPYING CAMERA OR PROJECTION PRINTER ­ For class 355
Apparatus for projecting an image of an original, by passing light through or around the
original or reflecting light from the original, onto a photosensitive recording surface for the
purpose of making a copy of the original. The image is usually enlarged or reduced in size
with reference to the original. A copying camera or projection printer generally includes
(1) a concentrated light source from either an artificial or natural emanation, (2) a
condensing lens or other light paralleling element, (3) a holding or positioning device for
the original, (4) a projection objective or projection lens system for directing light after it
passes through or is reflected from the original to form an image, (5) a holder for the
photosensitive medium which receives the image, and (6) opaque structure to keep
unwanted light from reaching the photosensitive medium. The cameras or projectors in
this class utilize artificial or natural light within the visible spectrum. The original to be
projected is planar in nature with the plane extending transverse to the direction of
projection, and may be transparent or opaque. The planar original is usually in the form of
flexible film and may be caused to take a curved form in the original holder or film gate.
In operation the original is positioned outside one focal plane of the projection lens system
and an image is formed on a photosensitive medium outside the opposite focal plane of
the projection lens system. The closer the original is to one focal plane the farther the
image will be from the other focal plane, and the bigger the image will be. In the camera
or projector, the relative positioning of the object is usually obtained by moving the
projection lens system and adjusting its focal length rather than by changing the position of
the original.
CORE ­ For class 164
A separable part of a mold that is used to create openings and various shaped cavities in
the casting.
CORE ­ For class 249
See the Class Definition, C, and see References to the Current Class for a reference to the
difference between a core and plunger.
CORE ­ For class 336
A magnetic or magnetizable body having a magnetic permeability greater than one. The
proximate purpose of a core is to increase the inductance of an associated coil by
increasing the number of magnetic flux interlinkages of the coil. Although the material of
the core is electrically conductive such electrical conductivity is usually minimized by using
magnetic material of high resistivity in the form of bundles of fine wires, stacks of thin
laminations insulated from each other or a suspension of iron powder in an electrically
insulating binder.
CORE ­ For class 425
A separable static male shaping surface providing a hollow portion in a casting. A core is
differentiated from a plunger in that a plunger moves during a shaping operation.
CORE ­ For class 428
intermediate portion of a composite* product. In a composite web* or sheet*, a core lies
between two other components*; in a rod* or strand* or filament*, a core is the inner
portion covered with another layer. If a core is claimed, per se, it is to be assumed for
purposes of this class that the other layer(s)* or component(s)* are included. (Structural)
CORE BOX ­ For class 164
A box or container in which foundry cores are made.
CORE PRINT ­ For class 164
A special projection on a pattern for forming impressions or core seats in the mold into
which the core itself is inserted. Also refers to the projection on the core itself which fits
into the core seat.
CORE, REACTOR ­ For class 376
See Reactor Core.
CORE­PIT ­ For class 099
That portion of an article of food that is located in and around the geometrical center of
the food; however, the outer periphery of the core­pit is NOT necessarily equidistant for
the outer periphery of the food, (e.g., a generally ellipsoidal ​
gpit​
h in a generally spherical
peach). Further, in some varieties of food (e.g., a relatively small variety of apple) a
drilling or punch­die type means which may remove a substantially right circular cylinder
section, when aligned with the stem­blossom axis of the apple, will usually remove not
only the seed pocket but also that portion of the apple containing matter connected to both
the stem and blossom ends of the apple. Thus, the core­pit portion may include a central
portion only, or a central portion plus a right­circular­cylinder section containing the
central portion.
CORE­PIT ­ For class 099
This expression usually precedes the word ​
gmeans​
h, and is intended to comprehend a
gmechanical treatment​
​
h which contacts all or a portion of the core­pit and then severs,
tears away, separates, and/or removes the core­pit from the remaining portion of the
food.
CORK ­ For class 428
The outer bark of cork oak. The cork may be in the form of slabs or may be used as a
filler in finely divided form. (Nonstructural or Composition)
CORRELATION ­ For class 704
A statistical measurement of the interdependence or association between two variables
that are quantitative or qualitative in nature. A typical calculation would be performed by
multiplying a signal by either another signal (cross­correlation) or by a delayed version of
itself (autocorrelation).
CORROSION (See METAL CORROSION) ­ For class 510
CORRUGATE ­ For class 425
To shape a layer into parallel rows of wavelike folds extending along its width or length
and transverse to the thickness.
CORRUGATING ­ For class 065
Shaping a layer throughout its thickness into a row of wavelike folds.
CORUNDUM ­ For class 117
Natural aluminum oxide; Al2O3; sometimes with intended small amounts of cobalt
(green), chromium (red; i.e., ruby), iron (yellow), magnesium, or silica; synthetic emery.
COUNTER EMF ­ For class 388
A voltage developed in an inductive circuit (e.g., in an armature winding) by an alternating
or pulsating current. The polarity of this voltage is at every instant opposite that of the
applied voltage.
COUPLING ­ For class 385
The interchange of light radiation among or between waveguiding structures,wherein the
mechanical interconnection between the structures is of little or no importance. The
radiation interchange may be accomplished through any of a number of physical
phenomena, including the evanescent wave coupling phenomenon, various modal coupling
phenomena, refraction, reflection, as well as through induced changes in structure
parameters which govern light transmission (for example, electro­optically or
electromagnetically induced refractive index changes in an "interaction" or coupling
region). However, devices for input/output of a light wave to/from an optical confinement
area, or devices for manipulating an optical wave within or adjacent to an optical
confinement area, which employ holography, are classified in the holography area of the
Class 359 schedule.
COUPLING NETWORKS ­ For class 333
(a) Networks including significant reactive structure for effecting the transfer of oscillatory
energy from one circuit to another circuit and having attenuation and/or delay
characteristics over a frequency range for attenuating and/or delaying in a predetermined
manner wave energy passing therethrough, and/or providing an impedance match between
the network and at least one of the circuits; (b) smoothing type wave filters having shunt
capacitance, or series inductance, or both usually designed to pass direct current and to
reduce the effect of any undesired alternating or pulsating current, or to pass direct
current and low frequency alternating current or pulsating current and to reduce the effect
of any undesired higher frequency alternating or pulsating current.
COUPLING PART ­ For class 439
An electrical connector comprising a contact and additional supporting structure specially
adapted to mate with a specific complementary electrical connector. Note. A ​
gspecific
complementary electrical connector​
h is also a ​
gcoupling part​
h in this class, but may be
referred to as a ​
gmating part​
h in order to distinguish it from the first mentioned coupling
part. Also, such a ​
gcounterpart​
h and the complementary contact thereof may be referred
to as the ​
gcounter­contact​
h. Note. A relatively short, generally stationary rodlike
connector is not considered to be a ​
gcoupling part​
h even though it otherwise meets the
limitations of this definition, because such structure has not been so considered in the
past. Similarly, a connector for interfitting with such a short rodlike connector is not
considered to be a ​
gcoupling part​
h. Such a connector may commonly be used on an
automobile electrical energy battery. Note further that this restriction does not apply to a
generally fixed socket and a cooperating short rodlike connector. Note. A bare wire (or
cable) making electrical contact is not a coupling part; nor is a connector for making direct
engagement with such a wire. Also, neither a threaded stud nor a ring for fitting over such
a stud is considered to be a coupling part.
COVALENT BONDING ­ For class 257
The sharing of electrons by atoms in which each atom contributes one of a pair of
electrons shared by another atom and forming a bond between those two atoms.
COVER ­ For class 052
Generally synonymous with ​
groof​
h but used where ​
groof​
h in some instances may be inapt,
e.g., a covering supported by an article, a canopy, a man­hole closure, etc.
COVER ­ For class 053
A member, made from sheet material stock which serves to confine the contents by either
a complete encasement or a partial encasement, and which fully encircles or encompasses
the contents in at least one direction. A band, closure, preformed container, carton or
receptacle, though said members are not ​
gmade from sheet material​
h, are each
considered covers for this class. A spindle or core which extends into or through a
preformed aperture in the contents is considered to be a partial cover. See subclass 581.
See ​
gBAND​
h, ​
gCLOSURE​
h, and ​
gRECEPTACLE​
h.
COVER­ADJUNCT ­ For class 053
Some accessory, device or abiding characteristic which is supplied to, or formed integral
with, a cover to perform some function in addition to the mere enclosing of the contents.
Such adjuncts include the addition to a cover of (1) a filament, strand, wire, stamp, label,
handle, or display support, (2) a filler piece for the gap resulting between two or more
folded flaps, (3) some auxiliary cover seam retaining device, including a staple, a clip, a
sewn stitch, or a simultaneously integrally formed and set tab­and­slot retaining means,
(4) a coating, printing, embossing or other marking, ornamenting or display feature, (5)
some means to provide for opening the cover such as, e.g., a tear strip, (6) a cover
attached reinforcement, article holder, or article remover, or (7) a window or window
opening, (8) a contents contacting sealing spot, disc or gasket, (9) a superimposed disc
which is applied to a hood or cap so as to depress said disc and a portion of the hood or
cap within the aperture of a receptacle, (10) a cam actuated sealing or gripping means on
the closure for fastening said closure, or (11) a protection strip placed over the contents of
a receptacle (e.g., matches) and inserted between the side of the receptacle and the
contents. However, the operations of slitting or notching of cover blanks and flaps
preparatory to the shaping of the cover, or the application of adhesive to the cover to aid
in seam retaining are not considered cover­adjuncts for this class. Nor is the addition of a
transitory characteristic to a cover for the purpose of aiding in the packaging, e.g., the
addition of moisture to a wrapper, considered to be a cover­adjunct.
CRACKING ­ For class 208
A conversion treatment in which the hydrocarbons of the mineral oil are broken down to a
shorter carbon chain length, resulting in hydrocarbons having a lower boiling temperature,
which may be carried out in the presence of a catalyst (catalytic cracking) or in the
absence of any catalyst (thermal cracking).
CRACKLED ­ For class 065
Glassware having a surface which was intentionally cracked by water immersion and
partially healed by reheating.
CRANKSHAFT: ­ For class 123
The most common type of ​
goutput shaft​
h, which is journaled to turn about a fixed axis and
including an offset portion for receiving energy from the piston.
CRASH­ For class 412
A loose weave binding cloth which is generally applied with adhesive to the back() of a
bound book(*) as a reinforcing material prior to the application of the book(*) covering
member.
CREAM ­ For class 510
Denotes a thick, usually opaque, emulsion having little or no tendency to flow.
CREPE ­ For class 008
Crepe is a general classification of fabrics characterized by a broad range of crinkled or
grained surface effects.
CRITICAL ­ For class 376
For the purpose of this class, is the term used to describe the condition in which a chain
reaction is being maintained at a constant level, i.e., it is just self­sustaining. In order for
this state to exist a sufficient quantity of fissile material (critical mass) must be assembled
in the proper shape and concentration.
Critical bandwidths ­ For class 704
Bandwidths of the hearing process, as measured by the masking effect of a white, random
noise in which a person detects a pure tone.
CROSS­LINKER DYE ADDITIVE ­ For class 008
A cross­linker dye additive is a compound added to assist in dyeing which reacts
chemically with both the dye and substrate, other than due to chelate formation.
CRUCIBLE ­ For class 117
A vessel for containing a molten material. The crucible may be of the same material as
the molten material and may ultimately become molten.
CRUCIBLE ­ For class 373
A component of the furnace which holds, or otherwise contains the charge.
CRUCIBLE FURNACE ­ For class 075
A furnace in which the material to be heated is placed in a refractory container, the
container is covered with a lid, and the covered container is heated in a furnace. The
material is heated solely by heat conducted through the walls of the crucible.
CRYOSAR ­ For class 257
An active solid­state device which operates at cryogenic temperatures, i.e., at
temperatures at or below 77 degrees Kelvin, by avalanche breakdown caused by impact
ionization of device impurities.
CRYPTANALYSIS ­ For class 380
Determination of encryption code of encrypted message (i.e., codebreaking).
CRYPTOCRYSTALLINE ­ For class 117
Microscopic crystalline structure, indistinguishable to the naked eye.
CRYPTOGRAPHY ­ For class 380
The study of secret information storage or communication.
CRYPTOGRAPHY ­ For class 705
Secret information storage or communication. This includes equipment or process which
(a) conceals or obscures intelligible information by transforming such information so as to
make the information unintelligible to a casual or unauthorized recipient, or (b) extracts
intelligible information from such a concealed representation, including breaking of
unknown codes and messages.
CRYSTAL ­ For class 257
A solid substance whose atoms are arranged with periodic geometric regularity, called a
lattice.
CRYSTAL BOUNDARY ­ For class 117
The interface between a crystal and its surroundings; e.g., another crystal, air.
CRYSTAL DEFECT ­ For class 257
Any nonuniformity in a crystal lattice. There are four categories of crystal defects: (1)
point defects, (2) line defects, (3) area defects, and (4) volume defects. Point defects
include any foreign atom at a regular lattice site (substitutional site) or between lattice
sites (interstitial site), anti­site defects in compound semiconductors, e.g., Ga in As or As
in Ga, missing lattice atoms, and host atoms located between lattice sites and adjacent to
a vacant site (Frenkel defects). Line defects, also called edge dislocations, include extra
planes of atoms in a lattice. Area defects include twins or twinning (a change in crystal
orientation across a lattice) and grain boundaries (a transition between crystals having no
particular positional orientation to one another. Volume defects include precipitates of
impurity or dopant atoms caused by volume mismatch between a host lattice and
precipitates.
CRYSTAL DEFECT ­ For class 438
Any nonuniformity in a crystal lattice. There are four categories of crystal defects: (a)
point defects, (b) line defects, (c) area defects, and (d) volume defects. Point defects
include any foreign atom at a regular lattice site (i.e., substitutional site) or between
lattice sites (i.e., interstitial site), antisite defects in compound semiconductors (e.g., Ga
in As or As in Ga), missing lattice atoms, and host atoms located between lattice sites and
adjacent to a vacant site (i.e., Frenkel defects). Line defects, also called edge or screw
dislocations, include extra planes of atoms in a lattice. Area defects include twins or
twinning (i.e., a change in crystal orientation across a lattice) and grain boundaries (i.e., a
transition between crystals having no particular positional orientation to one another).
Volume defects include precipitates of impurity or dopant atoms caused by volume
mismatch between a host lattice and precipitates.
CSBH ­ For class 438
Channeled substrate buried heterostructure
CSL ­ For class 117
Coherent Superlattice.
CSL ­ For class 438
Coherent superlattice
C­SUBSTITUENT ­ For class 260
Indicates that the substituent is bonded to a carbon.
CTD ­ For class 438
Charge transfer device
CTSL ­ For class 117
Coherent Tilted Superlattice.
CTSL ­ For class 438
Coherent tilted superlattice
CULLET ­ For class 065
Waste or broken glass.
CULLET ­ For class 425
Waste or broken plastic.
CUP ­ For class 029
A tube having one end closed.
CUPOLA ­ For class 075
A shaft furnace primarily designed to melt metal by use of a solid fuel charged with the
metal. A gas containing gaseous Oxygen (e.g., air) is blown into the bottom of the furnace
to burn the fuel and cause the metal to melt from the heat of combustion.
CURE ­ For class 425
A chemical or physical treatment to obtain a stable state of a preform or product, (e.g., by
vulcanizing, drying, etc.).
CURRENT CONVERSION ­ For class 363
The transformation of electrical energy from alternating current to direct current or the
transformation of direct current to alternating current.
CURRENT OR VOLTAGE MAGNITUDE CONTROL ­ For class 363
Includes controlling either the amplitude of the current or voltage, or controlling the
average or effective value of the current or voltage, even though the amplitude is not
controlled.
CUSHIONING MEANS: ­ For class 410
Fore­and­aft slide cushioning means ­ Load unit protection means supplementing load
accommodation. The effect of inadvertently inertial forces which could cause damage to
the load unit is mitigated by means so supplementing accommodation as to permit such an
extent of reactive movement of the load unit or the accommodating means, or both as to
be adequate to prevent damage that could occur were the load rigidly fixed to the freight
carrier. When the forces guarded against and the reactive movement acts in the direction
along the longitudinal axis of the freight carrier, this is recognized as fore­and­ aft
direction slide cushioning. The effect of only mere compression­relaxation of a resilient
block is not intended to be included in the cushioning concept.
CUT ­ For class 072
To separate any portion of a workpiece from any other portion of the same workpiece by a
step of machining (e.g., grinding, drilling, boring, milling, planing), severing (e.g.,
breaking, sawing, slicing, shearing), or by intrusion of a sharp­edged or pointed tool
without removal of material (e.g., stabbing, splitting, intrusive punching). See ​
gSever​
h
and ​
gPierce​
h.
CUT­OFF ­ For class 141
The term as used in this class means some mechanically operative element or device (not
gas pressure) which arrests flow of material.
CUTOFF ­ For class 257
A minimum value of voltage or current applied to an active device which stops the device
from operating in a particular manner.
CUTTER ­ For class 407
See Tool*.
CUTTING EDGE ­ For class 408
A marginal portion of a tool comprising a line or point on the surface of the tool formed by
the intersection of a plurality of planar surfaces, specifically adapted to perform a cutting
function.
CVD ­ For class 117
Chemical Vapor Deposition. CVD may be employed to produce single­crystal*, polycrystal,
or amorphous material. See also MOCVD.
CVD ­ For class 438
Chemical vapor deposition
CYANO ­ For class 987
Denotes a triple bond between an adjacent carbon and nitrogen atom. As used in this
class, cyano is always bonded directly to a phosphorus atom through the carbon atom.
CYCLE ­ For class 425
A sequence of manipulative steps governed by a mechanism such as a cam, timer,
program means, etc.
CYCLIC PITCH CHANGE ­ For class 416
Wherein the blade angle of each working member of an impeller is varied for only a
predetermined limited portion of each working cycle, each working member being
similarly adjusted in sequence as it, in turn, reaches the predetermined portion of the
working cycle. though the impeller need comprise only a single working member.
CYCLICAL OPERATION ­ For class 141
This term describes a filling system in which no operator intervention is required from the
time a receiver is placed in filling position at least until the receiver is filled and ready to
be removed. The flow of contents material may be cut off by a movement of the receiver
which occurs in the sequence of events in the machine.
CYCLO ­ For class 532
This term refers to a ring of a polycyclo ring system.
CYCLOALIPHATIC ­ For class 987
Denotes a ring composed solely of a carbon atom and includes aryl.
CYCLONE ­ For class 210
A device using centrifugal force to separate. The process is called cyclonic; see centrifuge.
CYLINDER ­ For class 091
A rigid external member which permanently surrounds the piston, the latter constituting a
relatively moving wall for the expansible chamber, the other walls of which are formed by
the cylinder, and the cylinder ordinarily including the abutment or reaction surface against
which the motive fluid acts or the piston forming the abutment for the cylinder when the
cylinder is movable and the piston fixed. However, the abutment or reaction surface for
the piston need not necessarily be formed by the cylinder, but may be formed by a second
relatively movable opposed piston within the cylinder. If the piston withdraws from the
cylinder merely to control the motive fluid, the piston is still considered to be permanently
surrounded by the cylinder.
CYLINDER ­ For class 092
A rigid external member which permanently surrounds the piston, the latter constituting a
relatively moving wall for the expansible chamber, the other walls of which are formed by
the cylinder, and the cylinder ordinarily including the abutment or reaction surface against
which the motive fluid acts, or the piston forming the abutment for the cylinder when the
cylinder is movable and the piston fixed. However, the abutment or reaction surface for
the piston need not necessarily be formed by the cylinder but may be formed by a second
relatively movable opposed piston within the cylinder.
CYLINDER ­ For class 418
An external member having wall or surface portions forming part of the working chamber
of the rotary expansible chamber device, the member being either fixed or movable and
may surround a fixed reaction member to move or be moved by the working fluid and
may also include an abutment or reaction surface against which working fluid acts.
However, the abutment or reaction surface for the rotary expansible chamber device need
not necessarily be formed by the cylinder but may be formed by relatively movable
opposed rotating members within the cylinder at least one of which is a working member.
CYLINDER ­ For class 460
A device consisting of bars mounted on two hubs that are supported on a shaft that run the
length of the threshing unit. There are three types of cylinders; rasp­bar cylinder, spike­
tooth cylinder, and angle­bar cylinder.
CYLINDER: ­ For class 123
a member having an internally facing surface of a shape generated by a straight line
rotating a fixed distance about an axis.
CZ ­ For class 117
Abbreviation for Czochralski. J. Czochralski was the Polish inventor of the basic single
crystal pulling method (1918) bearing his name.
Cz ­ For class 438
Czoshralski (melt pulling)
D.C. COUPLING ­ For class 330
A signal coupling network including a D.C.. conductive path. In a four terminal network
such paths must be traced between terminals on the circuits to and from which the
coupling is made which vary in voltage with the signal (this excludes D.C.. paths limited to
ground leads or D.C.. shunt paths).
D.C. PATH OR D.C. CONDUCTIVE PATH ­ For class 330
A path for current in a network which can conduct D.C.. current.
DADBS ­ For class 438
diacetoxyditertiarybutoxysilane
DADIS ­ For class 438
diacetoxydiisopropoxysilane
DATA ­ For class 345
Representation of information in a coded manner suitable for communication,
interpretation, or processing. Also see: Address Data; Instruction Data; Status Data; User
Data.
DATA ­ For class 705
Representation of information in a coded manner suitable for communication,
interpretation, or processing.
DATA ­ For class 706
Representation of information in a coded manner suitable for communication,
interpretation or processing.
DATA ­ For class 707
Representation of information in a coded manner suitable for communication,
interpretation, or processing. See Address Data, Instruction Data, Status Data, and User
Data in this Glossary.
DATA ­ For class 709
Representation of information in a coded manner suitable for communication,
interpretation, or processing.
Address data: data that represent or identify a source or destination.
Instruction data: data that represent an operation and identify its operands, if any.
Status data: data that represent conditions of data, digital data processing systems,
computers, peripherals, memory, etc.
Streamed data: data consisting of a more­or­less continuous series of bits, bytes, or other
small, structurally uniform units.
User data: data other than address data, instruction data, or status data.
DATA ­ For class 710
Representation of information in a coded manner suitable for communication,
interpretation, or processing.
Address data ­ Data that represent or identify a source or destination.
Instruction data ­ Data that represent an operation and identify its operands, if any.
Status data ­ Data that represent conditions of data, computers, peripherals, memory, etc.
User data ­ Data other than address data, instruction data, or status data.
DATA ­ For class 711
Representation of information in a coded manner suitable for communication,
interpretation, or processing. See ADDRESS DATA, INSTRUCTION DATA, STATUS DATA,
and USER DATA in this glossary,
DATA ­ For class 712
Representation of information in a coded manner suitable for communication,
interpretation, or processing.
Address data­Data that represent or identify a source or destination.
Instruction data­Data that represent an operation and identify its operands, if any.
Status data­Data that represent conditions of data, digital data processing systems,
computers, peripherals, memory, etc.
User data­Data other than address data, instruction data, or status data.
DATA ­ For class 713
Representation of information in a coded manner suitable for communication,
interpretation, or processing.
Address data ­ Data that represent or identify a source or destination.
Instruction data ­ Data that represent an operation and identify its operands, if any.
Status data ­ Data that represent conditions of data, computers, peripherals, memory, etc.
User data ­ Data other than address data, instruction data, or status data.
DATA ­ For class 714
Representation of information in a coded manner suitable for communication,
interpretation, or processing.
DATA ­ For class 715
Representation of information in a coded manner suitable for communication,
interpretation, or processing.
DATA ­ For class 718
A representation of information in a coded manner suitable for communication,
interpretation, or processing. Address data: data that represent or identify a source or
destination. Instruction data: data that represent an operation and identify its operands, if
any. Status data: data that represent conditions of data, digital data processing systems,
computers, peripherals, memory, etc. Streamed data: data consisting of a more­or­less
continuous series of bits, bytes, or other small, structurally uniform units. User data: data
other than address data, instruction data, or status data.
DATA ­ For class 719
A representation of information in a coded manner suitable for communication,
interpretation, or processing.
Address data: data that represent or identify a source or destination.
Instruction data: data that represent an operation and identify its operands, if any.
Status data: data that represent conditions of data, digital data processing systems,
computers, peripherals, memory, etc.
Streamed data: data consisting of a more­or­less continuous series of bits, bytes, or other
small, structurally uniform units.
User data: data other than address data, instruction data, or status data.
DATA ­ For class 725
Any representation of a digital or analog quantity to which meaning has been assigned. A
representation of facts, concepts, or instructions, in a manner suitable for communication,
interpretation, or processing by humans or by automatic means.
DATA PROCESSING ­ For class 345
See PROCESSING, below.
DATA PROCESSING ­ For class 701
For the purpose of this class, data processing is defined as a systematic operation on data
in accordance with a set of rules which results in a significant change in the data.
DATA PROCESSING ­ For class 702
For the purpose of this class, data processing is defined as a systematic operation on data
in accordance with a set of rules which results in a significant change in the data.
DATA PROCESSING ­ For class 705
(For the purpose of this class) A systematic operation on data in accordance with a set of
rules which results in a significant change in the data.
DATA PROCESSING ­ For class 706
See PROCESSING, below
DATA PROCESSING ­ For class 707
See Processing, below.
DATA PROCESSING ­ For class 709
See PROCESSING, below.
data processing ­ For class 710
See PROCESSING, below.
DATA PROCESSING ­ For class 711
See PROCESSING below.
DATA PROCESSING ­ For class 712
See PROCESSING, below.
DATA PROCESSING ­ For class 713
See PROCESSING, below.
DATA PROCESSING ­ For class 714
See PROCESSING, below.
DATA PROCESSING ­ For class 715
See PROCESSING*, below.
DATA PROCESSING ­ For class 718
See PROCESSING, below.
DATA PROCESSING ­ For class 719
See PROCESSING, below.
DATA PROCESSING (for the purpose of this class): ­ For class 700
A systematic operation on data in accordance with a set of rules which results in a
significant change in the data.
DATA: ­ For class 700
Representation of information in a coded manner suitable for communication,
interpretation, or processing.
DATABASE ­ For class 707
A collection of data arranged for ease of storage, retrieval, updating, searching and sorting
by computerized means.
DBR ­ For class 438
distributed Bragg reflector
DCFL ­ For class 438
direct­coupled FET logic
DCG ­ For class 438
dichromated gelatin
DCS ­ For class 438
dichlorosilane
DDE ­ For class 438
double diffused epitaxy
DDI ­ For class 438
deep dielectric isolation
DE BROGLIE WAVELENGTH ­ For class 257
The wavelength of a particle, based on L.V. de Broglie"s theory that particles exhibit
wavelike characteristics.
DE BROGLIE WAVELENGTH ­ For class 977
Wavelength of a particle under quantum mechanical conditions wherein the particle acts as
a wave; calculated by a ratio of Planck​
f s constant to the particle​
f s momentum.
DEAD­BOLT ­ For class 070
An unbiased bolt normally at rest, whether or not so held, and movable only by a
positively initiated external force.
DEBITEUSE ­ For class 065
A slotted floating, refractory block through which glass issues in the formation of a glass
sheet during a drawing operation.
DECODING ­ For class 506
Method enabling the determination of the structure of a library member or the reaction
sequence leading to its preparation, which method involves ​
greading​
h (e.g., determining
the structure of, etc.) a surrogate analyte (e.g., code, tag, label, etc.) associated with said
library member.
DECONVOLUTION ­ For class 506
Process of fractionating (normally by resynthesis or by elaborating a partial library) a pool
with some level of the desired activity to give a set of smaller pools. See also iterative
deconvolution.
DECRYPTING OR DECIPHERING ­ For class 380
A process of extracting concealed information from an intentionally obscured form and
changing it into a form intelligible to a recipient with proper authorization or equipment.
DEEP DEPLETION ­ For class 257
The condition in which a depletion layer formed in a MOS active device due to voltage
applied to the gate electrode of the device, is deeper than the maximum depth at which
inversion would normally be expected to occur at room temperature in a semiconductor
device at the surface closest to the gate electrode, without formation of an inversion layer.
DEEP DEPLETION ­ For class 438
The condition in which a depletion layer formed in a MOS active device due to voltage
applied to the gate electrode of the device is deeper than the maximum depth at which
inversion would normally be expected to occur at room temperature in a semiconductor
device at the surface closest to the gate electrode, without formation of an inversion layer.
DEEP GROOVE ISOLATION ­ For class 257
Electrical isolation of adjacent devices in a single monolithic semiconductor chip by
grooves extending deeply into and below the surface of the chip between the devices.
DEEP LEVEL CENTERS ­ For class 438
Energy levels that can act as traps located in the forbidden band of a semiconductor
material that are not near the conduction or valence band edges.
DEEP­LEVEL CENTERS ­ For class 257
Energy levels that can act as traps located in the forbidden band of a semiconductor
material that are not near the conduction or valence band edges.
DEFLECTOR ­ For class 072
An element of instrumentality which engages successively presented portions of moving
work and forces said portions from a first path of motion into a second and different path
of motion. Note. The ​
gDeflector​
h may comprise a single deflecting surface forcing all
portions of work in a single direction, or a plurality of elements acting differently upon
different portions of work.
DEFLECTOR ­ For class 239
A solid means arranged exteriorly of the egress port or last point of confinement for
dispersing or redirecting the effluent. Some deflectors may be abrupt continuations of the
terminal flow conducting means unitarily formed therewith.
DEFLECTOR ­ For class 366
(1) An element or device secured within and in fixed relation to the mixing chamber, or
(2) a stationary device in a movable mixing chamber for diverting or separating portions
of material and then permitting them to recombine so as to commingle, thus causing or
assisting in agitation of the material.
DEFORM ­ For class 227
In this class is used in the sense imparted by the Class Definition and Lines With Other
Classes and Within This Class in Class 72.
DEFORMING ­ For class 029
The physical act of or means for shaping without any substantial removal of material. This
term includes forging, rolling, densifying, extruding, drawing and stretching.
DEGENERATION ­ For class 257
Doping of a semiconductor to such an extent that the Fermi level lies within the conduction
band (N+ semiconductor) or within the valence band (P+ semiconductor). Also, in circuit
applications, negative feedback between two or more active solid­state devices.
DEGENERATION ­ For class 438
Doping of a semiconductor to such an extent that the Fermi level lies within the conduction
band (i.e., N+ semiconductor) or within the valence band (i.e., P+ semiconductor). Also,
in circuit applications, negative feedback between two or more active solid­state devices.
DEGREE OF FREEDOM ­ For class 901
Each linear or rotary movement along or about a given axis.
DEIS ­ For class 438
dual electron injection structure
DELAY ­ For class 333
Includes phase distortion and also includes the retardation of a single pulse with respect to
time.
DELAY NETWORK ­ For class 330
Networks including significant structure for retarding wave energy a predetermined period
of time over a range of frequencies.
DELAY NETWORK ­ For class 333
Networks including significant structure for retarding wave energy a predetermined period
of time over a range of frequencies.
DELIVERING ­ For class 271
Refers to the ​
gmeans for removing the individual sheet from the operation after having
been operated on or placing the individual sheet on a receiver after having been operated
on.​
h
DELIVERY ­ For class 725
The act of sending something, such as motion video data, to an intended destination.
DEMODULATOR ­ For class 329
A device which extracts an arbitrarily varying modulating signal from an electrical or
electromagnetic modulated signal of less than infrared frequency.
DEMOGRAPHICS ­ For class 725
The statistical characteristics of human populations, such as age or income, used
especially to identify markets.
DENDRIMER ­ For class 977
Artificially manufactured molecule, such as a synthesized polymer, etc.
DENOMINATIONAL­STOP ­ For class 400
A component of the carriage* mechanism that causes stopping of the carriage in any of
selected denominational column positions. In a denominational column a sequence of
numerical digits is imprinted on one print­line* and further sequences of numeral digits
are imprinted in successive print­lines, one print­line below the previous print­line. The
distinguishing characteristic of a denominational column is that the decimal point of
successive print­lines of numeral digits is in vertical array, or in the instance where the
decimal point of successive numbers is not actually imprinted, the ​
gunits​
h digit of the
successive numbers is in vertical array. Thus the position where the carriage will be
stopped to imprint each of a succession of numbers will depend on whether the first digit
of a sequence of numeral digits is to be a ​
ghundreds​
h digit, or a ​
gtens​
h digit, etc. A
denominational­stop is usually a ​
gcounter stop​
h (see the discussion under the definition of
tab­rack* in this Glossary).
DENSITY FUNCTIONAL THEORY (DFT) ­ For class 977
Theory explaining and calculating the electronic structure of molecules and solids.
DEPLETION LAYER ­ For class 257
See DEPLETION REGION.
DEPLETION MODE ­ For class 257
The operation of a field­effect transistor having appreciable channel conductivity for zero
gate­ source voltage and whose channel conductivity may be increased or decreased
according to the polarity of the applied gate­source voltage, by changing the gate­to­
source voltage from zero to a finite value, resulting in a decrease in the magnitude of the
drain current.
DEPLETION MODE ­ For class 438
The operation of a field effect transistor having appreciable channel conductivity for zero
gate­source voltage and whose channel conductivity may be increased or decreased
according to the polarity of the applied gate­source voltage, by changing the gate­to­
source voltage from zero to a finite value, resulting in a decrease in the magnitude of the
drain current.
DEPLETION REGION ­ For class 257
The region extending on both sides of a reverse biased semiconductor junction in which
free carriers are removed from the vicinity of the junction. It is also called a space charge
region, a barrier region, or an intrinsic semiconductor region.
DEPLETION REGION ­ For class 438
The region extending on both sides of a reverse biased semiconductor junction in which
free carriers are removed from the vicinity of the junction. It is also called a space charge
region, a barrier region, or an intrinsic semiconductor region.
DEPOLARIZATION ­ For class 320
The process of preserving or restoring a primary cell by partially or completely removing
its increased resistance (i.e., polarization) as the potential of an electrode changes during
electrolysis.
DEPOSITORY ­ For class 402
An article adapted to include a sheet retainer*, of this class, for the retention of apertured
sheets* and intended to receive both (1) the nonthickness surface (See Fig. 1) and (2) the
thickness surface (See Fig. 1) of the sheet or either (1) or (2) above.
DEPUTER ­ For class 065
See debiteuse.
DERIVATIVE ­ For class 435
For purposes of this class derivatives included with the production of a named compound
are only the inorganic anion or inorganic cation salts thereof, e.g., metal, ammonium,
halogen, carbonate, etc.
DESALINATION ­ For class 210
The process of removing inorganic salts, most usually sodium chloride, from water.
DESIGNATED CHEMICAL COMPOSITION (DCC) ­ For class 204
A composition in which at least one of the chemical atoms can either be deduced with
certainty or be determined to belong to a limited select group of elements (as indicated in
the exemplary lists of terms provided below); except that for the purposes of this class,
gorganic​
​
h is considered to be too broad, eventhough inherently reciting the presence of a
carbon atom. An exemplary list of terms used to describe compositions to be regarded as
DCC"s is as follows: alcohol, alkali or alkaline earth metal, amine, carbon black,
carboxylic acid, chalcogen, drying oil, ether, fat, fatty acid or ester, halogen, hydrocarbon,
latex, metal hydrate, peroxide, peroxy­, proton donor, sulfide, water, etc. An exemplary
list of terms used to describe compositions not to be regarded as DCC"s is as follows:
amphoteric, anionic, antioxidant, blue, cationic, cosolvent, conductor, crystalline, curing
catalyst, deliquescent, dielectric, dispersant, drier, electrophoretic, emulsifier, fibrous,
filler, fluorescent, free radical, gas, humectant, hydrophillic, inorganic compound,
insulator, ionic, Lewis acid or base, liquid, lubricant, luminescent, metal containing,
mineral, numerically described without designating a chemical atom or a limited select
group of elements, organic compound, organic solvent, organometallic, particulate,
phosphorescent, pigment, plastic, plasticizer, preservative, solid, solvent, stabilizer,
surface active agent, surfactant, wax, Ziegler or Natta catalysts, etc. These lists are not
intended to be exhaustive.
DESIGNATED ELEMENTAL NONACTIVE INGREDIENT ­ For class 514
Denotes an elemental material either metallic or nonmetallic and which is identified by its
chemical nature, e.g., iron, silver, etc., or is identified in a generic manner, e.g., alkali
metal atom, etc. The term nonactive as used herein denotes the absence of any
physiological, pharmacological or biological affect attributed to the elemental material.
DESIGNATED INORGANIC NONACTIVE INGREDIENT ­ For class 514
Denotes an inorganic compound which is identified by at least one chemical atom, e.g.,
sodium­containing, etc., or is identified as a generic type of inorganic chemical compound,
e.g., alkali metal­containing, etc. The term nonactive as used herein denotes the absence
of any physiological, pharmacological or biological affect attributed to the inorganic
material.
DESIGNATED NONREACTANT MATERIAL (DNRM) ­ For class 522
As used in this class, designated nonreactant material (DNRM) is a material wherein at
least one of the chemical atoms can be deduced with certainty. For purposes of this class,
organic material although inherently reciting the presence of a carbon atom is considered
to be too broad. An exemplary list of materials to be regarded as DNRM"s is as follows:
metal hydrate, chalcogen, carboxylic acid, peroxy, peroxide, latex, alkali or alkaline earth
metal, transition metal, halogen, proten donor, sulfiede, drying oil, fat, fatty acid or ester,
water, carbon black, etc. This list is by no means limited to the above examples. The
following list is not exhaustive and merely enumerates certain materials that will not be
considered as DNRM"s, e.g., organic compound, metal containing, inorganic compound,
organometallic compound, solvent, wax, magnetic, hydrophobic, hydrophillic,
antiplasticizer, plasticizer, filler, preservative, antioxidant, antiozonant, stablizer,
lubricant, fibrous additive, particulate additive, liquid, solid, gas, dispersant, emulsifier,
crystalline, plastic, flourescent, phosphorescent, liminescent, deliquescent, drier,
dessicant, humectant, blue color,numerically described without providing a chemical atom,
Lewis acid or base, mineral, organic solvent, cosolvent, Ziegler or Natta catalysts, alfin
catalyst, free radical, amphoteric, anionic, ionic, denaturant, electrostatic, dielectric,
conductor, insulator, etc. This list is to be regarded as illustrative rather than exhaustive.
DESIGNATED ORGANIC ACTIVE INGREDIENT (DOAI) DENOTES ­ For class 514
(1) The active ingredient is identified by at least one chemical atom, e.g., organic
phosphorus compound, etc., or (2) The active ingredient is identified as a generic type of
chemical atom, e.g., alcohol, ether, etc. The term active denotes the presence of a
physiological, pharmacological or biological affect.
DESIGNATED ORGANIC NONACTIVE INGREDIENT DENOTES ­ For class 514
(1) A nonactive ingredient is identified by at least one chemical atom or (2) the nonactive
ingredient is identified as a generic type of chemical compound, e.g., starch, etc. The term
nonactive denotes the absence of any physiological, pharmacological or biological affect
attributed to the organic material.
DESTROYING ­ For class 588
To convert the hazardous or toxic waste to an environmentally safe substance to include
the steps used to prepare the waste for destruction as well as the actual destruction.
DESTRUCTIVE DISTILLATION ­ For class 201
See thermolytic distillation.
DESTRUCTIVE DISTILLATION ­ For class 202
See thermolytic distillation.
DETECT ­ For class 095
The term ​
gdetect,​
h which is used in many of the control subclasses, is used in both a
quantitative and a qualitative sense. This means that a definite measurement of a process
variable is made (e.g., temperature, pressure, concentration, etc.) or that the presence of
a particular event is determined (e.g., presence of sparking, change in liquid level
determined by position of float, etc.).
DETECT ­ For class 096
The term ​
gdetect,​
h which is used in many of the control subclasses, is used in both a
quantitative and a qualitative sense. This means that a definite measurement of a process
variable is made (e.g., temperature, pressure, concentration, etc.) or that the presence of
a particular event is determined (e.g., presence of sparking, change in liquid level
determined by position of float, etc.).
DETECTOR ­ For class 083
A mechanism for sensing a physical property or characteristic of, or the presence or
absence or passage of, the work or the product or a movable element of a machine; which
mechanism effects a signal or impulse as a result of such sensing. The signal or impulse is
sent through a transmitter, (see definition of ​
gtransmitter​
h below) and effects or initiates
the functioning of a machine part or assembly controlled by the detector.
DETECTOR ­ For class 250
A material or device whose response to radiant energy is used to indicate the presence or
amount of incident radiation. Also, called ​
gSignalling Means​
h.
DETECTOR ­ For class 378
A material or device whose response to X­ray energy is used to indicate the presence or
amount of incident radiation.
DETERGENT ­ For class 516
A compound and/or composition characterized by the ability to remove unwanted materials
from a solid surface by physicochemical means, i.e., emulsifying, dispersing, suspending,
dissolving, etc.
DEVELOPING APPARATUS ­ For class 396
Developing apparatus is that which makes a photographic image visible.
DEVICE ­ For class 705
An assemblage of components at a single location or which may have its several
components at geos:graphically distinct locations, i.e., a network.
DEVICE (ACTIVE) ­ For class 257
The physical realization of an individual electrical element in a physically independent body
which cannot be further divided without destroying its stated function. Examples are
transistors, pnpn structures, and tunnel diodes.
DEVICE (ACTIVE) ­ For class 438
The physical realization of an individual electrical element in a physically independent body
which cannot be further divided without destroying its stated function. Examples are
transistors, pnpn structures, and tunnel diodes.
DEVITRIFY ­ For class 065
The changing of glass in the amorphous state to crystalline state generally by holding a
glass melt at a temperature which favors crystal growth.
DEZ ­ For class 438
diethylzinc
DFB ­ For class 438
distributed feedback (laser)
DH ­ For class 438
double­hetero
DHBT ­ For class 438
double­hetero bipolar transistor
DHF ­ For class 438
dilute hydrofluoric acid
DI ­ For class 438
dielectric isolation
DIALING ­ For class 379
Generating a call address signal. Although a dial is a rotary pulse generating switch, the
term dialing is sometimes used generically as in the terms "tone dialing" and "resistance
dialing".
DIALYSATE ­ For class 210
See DIALYSIS.
DIALYSIS ­ For class 210
A process of separating a dissolved constituent from a liquid by transport or migration
from the liquid through a membrane into a second liquid. The membrane may be
semipermeable or the second liquid may have greater affinity for the constituent but the
net effect of the combined membrane­extracting liquid is to selectively remove a
constituent from the first liquid. The process is provided for in subclasses 644+. An in­
depth explanation is given in Kirk Othmer Encyclopedia of Chemical Technology 2nd ed.
Vol. 7, pp. 1­20. Dialysate is the product of a dialysis method and the term is not always
used for the same product, including retentate and diffusate.
DIAPHRAGM ­ For class 396
A diaphragm is a device to change the light flux passing through the aperture.
DIASPORE ­ For class 117
Al2O3.H2O; a natural hydrous aluminum oxide; HAlO2.
DIASTACE ­ For class 435
For purposes of this class classified as an amylase.
DIATOMACEOUS EARTH ­ For class 516
Diatomite, Kieselguhr. Siliceous material composed of the skeletal remains of small,
prehistoric organisms (diatoms). About 88% silica.
DIBL ­ For class 438
drain induced barrier lowering
DICHROIC ­ For class 359
As used in one sense, the term dichroic refers to (1) the property of some materials to
absorb to a greater degree one or the other of the two orthogonal component vectors
which can be considered as constituting ordinary light. This results in producing light
polarized to a degree depending upon the relative absorption of the two components. The
term dichroic is also used to refer to (2) an optical element which will transmit light of one
color and reflect other colors with little light being absorbed. These elements are usually
composed of superimposed strata of dielectric materials.
DIE ­ For class 072
A metal­deforming tool* which, as disclosed, has a shaping or reshaping function with
regard to the portion(s) of work engaged by it. Note. For the purposes of this class, a
gDie​
​
h may be regarded as a tool which leaves or impresses its characteristic mark on the
engaged face portion of work. The mark may be a three­dimensional imprint of the die
face (see ​
gTool Face​
h), or may simply be the trace or track left by passage of the ​
gDie​
h
while in forcible engagement with the work, with or without accompanying deformation in
other portions of the work. If the tool­engaged face of the work remains unaltered in
shape or position, the tool is regarded as an anvil*; if altered in position only, the tool in
question is a work­forcer*. See ​
gAnvil​
h, ​
gClosed Die​
h. ​
gTool​
h, and ​
gWork­ Forcer​
h.
DIE ­ For class 257
A tiny piece of semiconductor material, separated from a semiconductor slice, on which
one or more active electronic components are formed. Sometimes called a chip.
DIE ­ For class 425
An apparatus part having a work contacting part for shaping or reshaping the work.
DIE ­ For class 438
A tiny piece of semiconductor material, separated from a semiconductor slice, on which
one or more active electronic components are formed. Sometimes called a chip.
DIE BOND ­ For class 257
Attachment of a semiconductor chip to a substrate or chip carrier or package, usually with
an epoxy, eutectic, or solder alloy.
DIE BOND ­ For class 438
Attachment of a semiconductor chip to a substrate or chip carrier or package, usually with
an epoxy, eutectic, or solder alloy.
DIET ­ For class 438
dielectrically encapsulated trench capacitor
DIFFERENTIAL TRANSMISSION ­ For class 475
Mechanism having separate outputs driven simultaneously from a different member of a
planetary gear transmission; the arrangement being such that a change in speed of one of
the outputs, in at least one mode of operation, has a direct effect on the speed of the
other output.
DIFFRACTION ­ For class 356
The bending of a light ray in passing the edge formed by contiguous opaque and
transparent edges.
DIFFRACTION ­ For class 359
A phenomenon resulting from the wave nature of light, e.g., light passing through a slit of
decreasing width, forms a narrower and narrower beam until the slit width approaches the
wavelength of light, after which further decreasing of the slit width results in a beam
having a larger and larger divergence.
DIFFRACTION ­ For class 372
The bending of a light ray in passing the edge formed by contiguous opaque and
transparent areas.
DIFFRACTION PATTERN ­ For class 359
The intensity profile of a light beam after having passed by a diffracting aperture or
object.
DIFFUSATE ­ For class 210
The material passed through in a diffusing process.
DIFFUSE ­ For class 210
The passing of a constituent through a membrane or septum.
DIFFUSE ­ For class 356
Pertaining to the scattering or random deviation of transmitted or reflected light.
DIFFUSE ­ For class 359
Pertaining to the scattering or random deviation of transmitted or reflected light.
DIFFUSED JUNCTION ­ For class 257
A junction between two different conductivity regions within a semiconductor and which is
formed by diffusion of appropriate impurity atoms into the material.
DIFFUSED JUNCTION ­ For class 438
A junction between two different conductivity regions within a semiconductor and which is
formed by diffusion of appropriate impurity atoms into the material.
DIFFUSED TRANSISTOR ­ For class 257
A transistor in which the emitter and collector junctions are formed by diffusion of dopant
atoms into the semiconductor material.
DIFFUSION ­ For class 257
(1) The movement of carriers from a region of concentration to one of lower
concentration; (2) a process of adding impurities to a semiconductor material to change its
electrical characteristics.
DIFFUSION BARRIER ­ For class 257
An obstacle to the diffusion of charge carriers in an active solid­state device.
DIFFUSION BARRIER ­ For class 438
An obstacle to the diffusion of atoms in a metallization scheme for an active solid­state
device.
DIFFUSION CURRENT ­ For class 257
Current caused by charge carriers diffusing from a volume of high carrier concentration to
a volume of lower carrier concentration in a solid­state material.
DIFFUSION LENGTH ­ For class 257
In a homogeneous semiconductor material, the average distance minority carriers move
during their lifetime (i.e., between generation and recombination).
DIGEST ­ For class 210
Process in which material is acted upon by micro­organisms to cause a chemical change.
The composting of sludge is a digestion process.
DIGGERS ­ For class 171
Devices which are forced into a mass of earth and are then raised to lift an object
disposed in said earth and/or to lift portions of the earth itself with objects embedded
therein.
DIGITAL ­ For class 375
Of or pertaining to the class of devices or circuits in which the output varies in discrete
steps (i.e., pulses or "on­off" operation).
DIGITAL ­ For class 388
Of or pertaining to the general class of devices or circuits in which the output varies in
discrete steps (cf., ​
ganalog​
h above).
DIGITAL CIRCUIT ­ For class 326
A circuit which operates at two or more discrete well​
defined logic levels or states, in the
manner of a switch, such as either ​
gon​
h or ​
goff​
h or ​
ghigh​
h or ​
glow​
h (i.e., high voltage or
low voltage).
DIGITAL CONTROL ­ For class 388
A control circuit utilizing digital, as opposed to analog, signals.
DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING SYSTEM ­ For class 345
An arrangement of processor(s) in combination with either memory or peripherals, or
both, performing data processing.
DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING SYSTEM ­ For class 709
An arrangement of processor(s) in combination with either memory or peripherals, or
both, performing data processing.
DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING SYSTEM ­ For class 710
An arrangement of processor(s) in combination with either memory or peripherals, or
both, performing data processing.
DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING SYSTEM ­ For class 711
An arrangement of processor(s) in combination with either memory or peripherals, or
both, performing data processing.
DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING SYSTEM ­ For class 712
An arrangement of processor(s) in combination with either memory or peripherals, or
both, performing data processing.
DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING SYSTEM ­ For class 713
An arrangement of processor(s) in combination with either memory or peripherals, or
both, performing data processing.
DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING SYSTEM ­ For class 714
An arrangement of processor(s) in combination with either memory or peripherals, or
both, performing data processing.
digital data processing system ­ For class 718
An arrangement of processor(s) in combination with either memory or peripherals, or
both, performing data processing.
DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING SYSTEM ­ For class 719
An arrangement of processor(s) in combination with either memory or peripherals, or
both, performing data processing.
DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING SYSTEM: ­ For class 707
An arrangement of processor(s) in combination with either memory or peripherals, or
both, performing data processing.
DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING SYSTEMS ­ For class 715
An arrangement of processor(s) in combination with either memory or peripherals, or
both, performing data PROCESSING*.
DIGITAL SIGNAL ­ For class 326
An electrical signal with discrete, well­defined logic levels or states. Digital normally
means binary or two­state.
dILATANT; DILATANCY ­ For class 516
The property of a material wherein when subjected to shear the rate of increase of strain
decreases with increasing shear. Examples are pastry doughs and highly concentrated
solid colloid­sized particle suspensions.
DIMER OR TRIMER OF AN ALIPHATIC MONOCARBOXYLIC ACID ­ For class 520
Denotes dimeric or trimeric fatty acids prepared, e.g., by free radical, ionic, thermal
polymerization, etc., of a monomeric fatty acid which can be saturated or unsaturated
monocarboxylic acid having at least eight carbon atoms. So­called ​
gpolymeric fatty​
h acids
in the absence of other disclosure are presumed to be a mixture of dimers and trimers of
aliphatic monocarboxylic acids. Included herein are reaction products of dimers or trimers
wherein the dimer or trimer structure is not destroyed. Dimers or trimers of ethylenically
unsaturated aliphatic monocarboxylic acids are presumed to be unsaturated in the absence
of disclosure to the contrary.
DIODE ­ For class 257
An electronic device which has two terminals and an asymmetrical or nonlinear voltage­
current characteristic.
DIODE ­ For class 330
Refers to any electronic tube, solid element, semiconductor, barrier layer device or other
current carrier means limited to two electrodes and without additional magnetic or
electrostatic means to influence the current flow, and which has marked unidirectional
current characteristics.
DIODE ISOLATION ­ For class 257
A technique in which a high electrical resistance between an integrated circuit element and
its substrate is achieved by surrounding the element with a reverse biased pn junction.
DIODE ISOLATION ­ For class 438
A technique in which a high electrical resistance between an integrated circuit element and
its substrate is achieved by surrounding the element with a reverse biased pn junction.
DIP ­ For class 438
dual­in­line package
DIP (DUAL IN­LINE PACKAGE) ­ For class 438
A chip carrier or package consisting of a plastic or ceramic body with two rows of vertical
leads in which a semiconductor integrated circuit is assembled and sealed. The leads are
typically inserted into a circuit board and secured by soldering.
DIP (DUAL­IN­LINE PACKAGE) ­ For class 257
A chip carrier or package consisting of a plastic or ceramic body with two rows of vertical
leads in which a semiconductor integrated circuit is assembled and sealed. The leads are
typically inserted into a circuit board and secured by soldering.
DIP PEN NANOLITHOGRAPHY ­ For class 977
Method of fabrication utilizing a scanning probe tip to draw nanostructures on surfaces.
DIPLEX FILTER ­ For class 725
A filter having a low pass and a high pass filter that divide the frequency spectrum into
two separate frequency bands that do not overlap. The diplex filter allows the placement
of duplex signals onto a cable by the use of frequency division multiplexing.
DIRECT BAND GAP SEMICONDUCTOR ­ For class 257
A semiconductor material in which an electron transition from the conduction to the
valence band, or vice versa, does not require a change in crystal momentum for the
electron. Gallium arsenide is a direct band gap semiconductor material.
DIRECT BAND GAP SEMICONDUCTOR ­ For class 438
A semiconductor in which an electron transition from the conduction to the valence band,
or vice versa, does not require a change in crystal momentum for electrons. Gallium
arsenide is an example of a direct band gap semiconductor.
DIRECT CURRENT ­ For class 363
Direct current includes pulsating current which is of such character as to have the
characteristics of direct current (e.g., such as the output of half­wave rectifier which may
be smoothed by filters to produce a substantially nonpulsating current).
DIRECT DYE ­ For class 008
Direct dyes, also known as substantive dyes, are generally sulfonated azo compounds very
similar to acid dyes in constitution, good for dyeing cellulose fibers or protein fibers.
DIRECTED MOLECULAR EVOLUTION ­ For class 506
Directed molecular evolution is a process for enriching a library in members having a
property or activity of interest. Directed molecular evolution involves cycles of taking a
library, subjecting it to a screen to select for the desired property or activity, and
amplifying the ​
ghits​
h to provide the starting library for the subsequent cycle. ​
gMutations​
h
may be introduced at the amplification stage in order to increase the diversity of the
library. This subject matter involves aspects of creating and screening libraries.
DIRECTLY HEATED CATHODE OR FILAMENTARY CATHODE ­ For class 330
A filament designed to have its terminals connected to a source of current, the filament
being heated by the current passing through it and effective to emit electrons, designed to
serve as a cathode of an electronic tube as defined above.
DIRECTLY HEATED CATHODE: ­ For class 313
A filament designed to have its terminals connected to a source of current, the filament
being heated by the current passing through it.
DIRECTOR ­ For class 343
A conductive (usually metallic) structure (e.g., a rod) which reradiates into free space
impinging electromagnetic radiation (waves) coming from or going to the active antenna,
the velocity of the reradiated wave having a component in the direction of velocity of the
impinging wave, thereby to modify the radiation pattern of the active antenna, there being
no significant potential relationship between the active antenna and the conductive
structure.
DISASSEMBLY ­ For class 029
The physical act of or means for dissociating, disengaging, and/or taking apart of
machines, devices, and things (articles).
DISAZO ­ For class 008
Disazo for the purpose of this class is define d as a compound containing two or more azo
(­N=N­) groups.
DISCHARGE ­ For class 320
The act of removing available electrical energy from storage in a battery, cell, or capacitor
via flow of electric current from the battery or capacitor to a load.
DISCHARGE ASSISTANT ­ For class 221
Any means (other than the weight of the article alone) which affirmatively segregates,
separates or moves an article from a supply to a point of egress. All of the supply less one
article may be moved to leave a segregated or separated article in discharge position or
subject to further manipulation.
DISCHARGE CIRCUIT ­ For class 320
An electrical device or path which allows flow of electrical current from a battery or
capacitor to an electrical load, especially that path or device that controls or regulates said
flow.
DISCHARGE CONTROL DEVICE ­ For class 315
Any means associated with the discharge device (for example only, an electromagnet, a
control grid or an auxiliary discharge electrode) intended to be used to control or influence
the discharge between the principal electrodes of the discharge device.
DISCHARGE CONTROL ELECTRODE ­ For class 315
Any electrode which is designed to influence or control the discharge between the principal
electrodes. It may be a control grid or an auxiliary discharge electrode. It may depend for
its effect on either its electro­static effect or on the current flow thereto.
DISCHARGE MEANS ­ For class 221
Any means which either (1) affirmatively segregates, separates or moves an article from
a supply to a point of egress or (2) permits separation or segregation of articles by
gravitational movement thereof. A discharge means may be either a discharge assistant or
a releaser.
DISCHARGE MODIFIER ­ For class 239
Any means which changes the characteristic of the fluid leaving the terminus as by
whirling, deflecting, removing, or quieting turbulence, etc.
DISCHARGE PATH ­ For class 330
The path of the free electrical charge carrier particles between the electrodes of an
electronic tube.
DISCHARGING ­ For class 373
The function of removing a charge from a furnace.
DISCRETE CIRCUIT ­ For class 257
A circuit which has an individual identity and which is fabricated prior to installation, or is
separately packaged and is not part of an integrated circuit.
DISCRETE ELECTRICAL SIGNAL ­ For class 708
Discontinuous signals which can assume only a finite number of states.
DISJOIN (DISJOINING) ­ For class 099
These expressions are used to indicate that one portion of a naturally occurring article of
food is detached or disunited from an immediately adjacent portion of the food without
necessarily being spatially separated to a significant extent. For example: rolling, with
some slight pressure, a hard­boiled fowl egg will disunite at least part of the bond between
the outer shell* and the interior of the egg; however, unless the shell is totally removed,
the membrane between the shell and the interior egg portions keeps the shell attached.
Thus, at least portions of the shell have been disjoined from the inner portions although
the same, or other portions of the shell, have not been spatially separated from the inner
portions.
DISLOCATION ­ For class 257
A region in a crystal in which the atoms are not arranged in a perfect lattice­like structure.
See CRYSTAL DEFECT for examples of crystal defects/dislocations.
DISLOCATION ­ For class 438
A line defect in a crystal, either of the edge type or screw type, in which the atoms are not
arranged in a perfect latticelike structure. See CRYSTAL DEFECT for other examples of
crystalline defects.
DISORDERED ­ For class 438
Crystalline arrangement in which the different constituent atoms of a compound
semiconductor randomly occupy lattice sites.
DISPARATE ARTICLE ­ For class 052
An article which does not form an essential component of a building construction of plural
components, but is in the nature of an adjunct having no essential load­bearing,
supporting, joining or protective function.
DISPENSER ­ For class 141
A mechanism which affirmatively effects or permits separation of a portion of the contents
material supply thereof and discharge in a definite direction or path.
DISPENSER ­ For class 226
(n) A device which moves material to an operative (e.g., a person who operates such
device and who will use the material). (Compare with Feeder).
DISPEROID ­ For class 516
The suspended particles in a dispersion.
DISPERSAND ­ For class 516
The suspended colloid­sized particles in a dispers ant*. Often referred to as the
discontinuous phase.
DISPERSANT ­ For class 516
The dispersing medium or continuous phase.
DISPERSE DYE ­ For class 008
Disperse dyes are water­insoluble, neutral dyes applied to the substrate from a fine
aqueous suspension, which were originally developed for use in dyeing of cellulose acetate
and polyester materials.
DISPERSION ­ For class 210
A mixture of a liquid with an insoluble material in very fine subdivision almost but not
quite a true solution.
dispersion ­ For class 516
A suspension of particles in a solid, liquid, or gas to form a biphasic or polyphasic
composition. Colloid­sized particles form colloid dispersions. See also colloid system.
DISPLACEMENT REACTION FOR METALS ­ For class 075
In the reaction A + BC = AC + B, the metal A, being more positive than the metal B, is
oxidized. The displacement series or electromotive series for metals in decreasing order of
their negative potentials is: (negative) Vanadium (V), Tungsten (W), Molybdenum (Mo),
Gold (Au), Osmium (Os), Platinum (Pt), Iridium (Ir), Tantalum (Ta), Palladium (Pd),
Ruthenium (Ru), Antimony (Sb), Bismuth(Bi), Arsenic (As), Mercury (Hg), Silver (Ag),
Copper (Cu), Titanium (Ti), Tin (Sn), Lead (Pb), Germanium (Ge), Zirconium (Zr), Cerium
(Ce), Nickel (Ni), Cobalt (Co), Thallium (Tl), Niobium (Nb), Cadmium (Cd), Iron (Fe),
Chromium (Cr), Zinc (Zn), Manganese (Mn), Uranium (U), Gadolinium (Gd), Indium (In),
Gallium (Ga), Aluminum (Al), Rare Earth Metals, Beryllium (Be), Scandium (Sc), Yttrium
(Y), Magnesium (Mg), Lithium (Li), Calcium (Ca), Strontium (Sr), Barium (Ba), Sodium
(Na), Potassium (K), Rubidium (Rb), Cesium (Cs) (positive).
DISPLAY ATTRIBUTE ­ For class 715
A value or code that determines how its representative element is presented.
DISPLAY CONTROLLER ­ For class 345
An electrical circuit which actuates a display device* in accordance with received image
data*.
DISPLAY CONTROLLER ­ For class 715
An electrical circuit which actuates a DISPLAY DEVICE* in accordance with received IMAGE
DATA*.
DISPLAY DEVICE ­ For class 345
A communication device which converts image data* into a visual image*.
DISPLAY DEVICE ­ For class 715
A communication device which converts IMAGE DATA* into a VISUAL IMAGE*.
DISPLAY ELEMENT ­ For class 345
Means for producing a visual effect in a display device* comprised of a plurality (e.g.,
matrix) of such means.
DISPLAY SYSTEM ­ For class 345
A system which comprises one or more display termnals* or one or more display
devices*.
DISPLAY TERMINAL ­ For class 345
A unit which comprises at least one display device* and user interface control means
(e.g., mouse).
DISPLAYED BY ­ For class 506
A library ​
gdisplayed by​
h a micro­organism is a library present at the surface of such a
micro­organism (e.g., of a bacteria, etc.).
DISSIPATING TERMINATIONS: (FOR LONG LINES) ­ For class 333
Networks specialized for use with and designed for connection to the end of a long line
transmission line and including a resistive component for dissipating the wave energy
propagated along the line and presenting an essentially resistive impedance to the line.
DISSOLVE ­ For class 352
The gradual diminishing of the intensity of an image until it is no longer recognizable.
DISTANCE ­ For class 342
The space between two points, which may be immediately juxtaposed or widely spaced.
DISTANCE ­ For class 343
The space between two points, which may be immediately juxtaposed or widely spaced.
DISTANCE ­ For class 704
A statistical measurement for comparing elements defined by variables or vectors using
scalar or vector subtraction of those elements. Examples: distance=a­b, |a­b|, (a­b).5 or
two vectors may be treated as objects such that the straight line distance is measured
between them.
DISTILLAND ­ For class 201
For the purpose of this class is the carbonaceous material which is undergoing a distillation
operation.
DISTILLAND ­ For class 202
The material which is undergoing a distillation operation.
DISTILLAND ­ For class 203
For purposes of this class the liquid or liquefied material which is undergoing a distillation
operation.
DISTILLATE ­ For class 201
The liquid product condensed from vapor during the distillation operation.
DISTILLATE ­ For class 202
The liquid product condensed from vapor during the distillation operation.
DISTILLATE ­ For class 203
The liquid product condensed from vapor during the distillation operation.
DISTINCT ­ For class 425
An independent entity.
DISTORTING ­ For class 029
The physical act of altering the form, configuration, dimensions, proportions, or contour of
a part or stock within the elastic limits of the material of which it is made without any
removal of material.
DISTRIBUTED PARAMETER CHARACTERISTICS ­ For class 330
A conductor or conductive means designed to operate at microwave or other high
frequencies, so that the conductive means exhibits both distributed capacitance and
distributed inductance at such frequencies.
DISTRIBUTED PARAMETER RESONATOR ­ For class 331
A resonator of the distributed network type, the capacitance, inductance and resistance of
which cannot be isolated into separate lumped capacitors, inductors or resistors and
wherein the time factor of propagation of wave energy in the network is appreciable.
DISTRIBUTED PARAMETERS ­ For class 330
When the impedance of a transmission device or line at the operating frequency or band of
frequencies is due primarily to the parameters of the device or line itself, and in
considering the inductance, capacitance and resistance of the device or line they must be
considered as mixed together and spread out along the device or line rather than being
considered as in separate discrete lumps or devices as in the case of simple series and
parallel circuits, the transmission device or line may be said to have distributed
parameters. Examples of circuits with distributed parameters include telephone, telegraph
and power lines for high frequency energy.
DISTRIBUTED PARAMETERS ­ For class 333
When the impedance of a transmission device or line at the operating frequency or band of
frequencies is due primarily to the parameters of the device or line itself, and in
considering the inductance, capacitance and resistance of the device or line they must be
considered as mixed together and spread out along the device or line rather than being
considered as in separate discrete lumps or devices as in the case of simple series and
parallel circuits, the transmission device or line ay be said to have distributed parameters.
Examples of circuits with distributed parameters include telephone, telegraph and power
lines for high frequency energy.
DISTRIBUTION ­ For class 725
A general term used, by reason of specific physical or electrical characteristics, to denote
application or restriction of the modified term, or both, to that part of an electrical system
used for conveying energy to the point of utilization from a source or from one or more
main receiving stations.
DISTRIBUTION MEANS ­ For class 415
At least one member positioned in the working fluid flow path and proximate to the runner
to convey, guide, distribute or direct the fluid immediately prior or subsequent to its
contact with the runner. Encompassed within this term is a pipe, nozzle or vane.
DISTRIBUTOR ­ For class 091
Means which comprises or includes a part which is movable relative to the working
member of a cyclically operable motor to control a motive fluid port or passage in such a
manner as to cyclically control inlet and/or exhaust flow of motive fluid to or from the
motor. The distributor need not entirely cut off the motive fluid flow, but may cyclically
control the amount of flow (i.e., throttling).
DISTRIBUTOR ­ For class 239
A generic term to cover all means for effecting flow modification (e.g., dispersion,
broadcast, projection, or scattering, etc.) of fluid, slurries or fluent material, coming within
the class definition. Means altering or adjusting the quantity of fluid being delivered
through the discharge port or the character of the flow as, for example, the dispersion
pattern, the droplet size, the amount of turbulence or any other control for smoothing out
or disturbing the discharge. This term is used as being generic to discharge modification
and to flow regulation.
DIVERSE ­ For class 425
Differing from one another.
DIVERSE MOTOR OPERATIONS ­ For class 318
For the purpose of classification in the subclasses entitled ​
gplural, diverse motor
operations control​
h the following limitations are applied relative to the nature of the
several operations: (I). Starting, stopping, or the combination of these two operations is
treated as a single motor operation control. However, since mere starting or stopping is an
incident to many other motor operations (such, for example, as acceleration, reversing,
braking to a stop, etc. in which actual starting or stopping may take place) such mere
starting and/or stopping will not be considered a motor operation control which is included
in this subclass as combinable with other motor operations, unless means are provided for
effecting an automatic starting and/or stopping in response to a predetermined condition.
Thus, ordinary (e.g., manual) starting or stopping combined with running­speed control is
not included in the plural diverse motor operations control subclasses, whereas automatic
starting and stopping in response to thermal changes combined with means for causing the
motor to run in either direction (reversing) is included as plural diverse motor operations
control. For example; automatic opening of motor circuit at limit of travel plus
simultaneously shorting the armature for dynamic braking is classified as combined
braking and automatic starting and/or stopping. Likewise, automatically opening the circuit
of the motor while running at an appreciable speed coupled with a braking operation
simultaneously with or shortly thereafter is considered a plural operational control. The
following motor operations controls are included in the plural diverse motor operations
control subclasses: (a) Reversing control; (b) Acceleration control; (c) Running­speed
control; (d) Braking control; (e) Motor load control, and (f) Automatic starting and/or
stopping. For definitions of the various individual controls listed above see the other
sections under Definitions of Motor Operation Control of this class which pertain to the
several individual motor controls. The following are not included herein as combinable
motor controls: (a) Phase or Power Factor Control; (b) Temperature control of the motor,
including heating or cooling thereof; (c) Signalling, testing, indicating or measuring of
conditions in or about the motor; (d) Ordinary or mere starting and/or stopping of the
motor; (e) Phase splitting or phase conversion to adapt a motor for operation from a
source of electrical supply having a different number of phases than that for which the
motor is wound; and (f) Means for lubricating the motor.
DLP ­ For class 438
double layer polysilicon
DLTS ­ For class 438
deep level transient spectroscopy
DMAH ­ For class 438
dimethylaluminumhydride
DMD ­ For class 438
(a) depletion mode device (also D­mode or D­type) or (b) deformable mirror device
DMOS ­ For class 438
double diffused MOS
DMOSFET ­ For class 257
Depletion type metal oxide semiconductor field effect transistor. Such devices are
normally in the on condition with no applied gate voltage.
DMOSFET ­ For class 438
Depletion­type metal oxide semiconductor field effect transistor. Such devices are
normally in the on condition with no applied gate voltage.
DMS ­ For class 438
dilute magnetic semiconductor
DNRM ­ For class 523
Designated nonreactant material (as discussed in this class definition)
DOCTOR, WIPER, OR SCRAPER ­ For class 118
Any instrument acting on the coating or on the work for the purpose of spreading or
removing surplus coating material. The instrument may be, for example, a solid scraper
blade, a roller squeegee or as in the case of an ​
gair doctor​
h a gaseous blast. For
definitions of terms appearing in subclass titles and not mentioned in the above definitions,
see the definitions to the particular subclass in which the term appears.
DOCUMENT ­ For class 715
An electronic FILE*.
DOES ­ For class 438
doublehetero optoelectronic switch
DOG ­ For class 070
A movable blocking element, other than a tumbler, in the form of a pawl or catch, adapted
to releasably detain a movable part.
DOGHOUSE ­ For class 065
A boxlike wing on a glass furnace through which a batch or floaters, etc., are introduced
into the furnace.
DONOR IMPURITY ­ For class 257
An element which when added to a semiconductor provides unbound or free electrons to
the semiconductor which may serve as current carriers. Typically, donors are atoms which
have more valence electrons than the atoms of the semiconductor material into which they
are introduced in small quantities as an impurity or dopant. Since such donor impurities
have more valence electrons than the semiconductor, a semiconductor doped with donor
impurities is an n­type semiconductor.
DONOR IMPURITY ­ For class 438
An element which when added to a semiconductor provides unbound or free electrons to
the semiconductor which may serve as current carriers. Typically, donors are atoms which
have more valence electrons than the atoms of the semiconductor material into which they
are introduced in small quantities as an impurity or dopant. Since such donor impurities
have more valence electrons than the semiconductor, a semiconductor doped with donor
impurities is an n­type semiconductor.
DONOR IMPURITY OR DONOR ­ For class 330
A material which when added to a semiconductor in minute quantities, as an impurity,
induces electron conduction, generally causing the semiconductor to become one of ​
gN­
type conductivity​
h.
DOPANT ­ For class 117
A desired material intentionally present in an amount insufficient to satisfy the lattice unit
cell, which may be present interstitially or by occupying crystal lattice positions
substitutionally.
DOPANT ­ For class 257
An impurity added to a semiconductor material to change its electrical conductivity or
other characteristics. N­type (negative) dopants, such as phosphorus, for a group IV
semiconductor such as silicon typically come from group V of the periodic table. When
added to silicon n­type dopants create a material that contains conduction electrons. P­
type (positive) dopants, such as boron, for a group IV semiconductor such as silicon,
typically come from group III and result in holes.
DOPANT ­ For class 438
An impurity added from an external source to a material by diffusion, coating, or
implanting into a substrate, such as changing the properties thereof. In semiconductor
technology, an impurity may be added to a semiconductor to modify its electrical
properties or to a material to produce a semiconductor having desired electrical
properties. N­type (negative) dopants (e.g., such as phosphorus for a group IV
semiconductor) typically come from group V of the periodic table. When added to a
semiconductor, n­type dopants create a material that contains conduction electrons. P­type
(positive) dopants (e.g., such as boron for a group IV semiconductor) typically come from
group III and result in conduction holes (i.e., vacancies in the electron shells).
DOPING ­ For class 117
The process of introducing a dopant* into a material.
DOPING OF SEMICONDUCTOR ­ For class 438
Adding controlled amounts of conductivity modifying material, referred to as electrically
active dopant or impurity, to a semiconductor material or to a material to produce a
semiconductor having desired electrical properties for this class.
DOPING PROFILE ­ For class 257
The point to point concentration throughout a semiconductor of an impurity atom doped
into the semiconductor.
DOPING PROFILE ­ For class 438
The point to point concentration throughout a semiconductor of an impurity atom doped
into the semiconductor.
DOUBLE­DIFFUSED MOS (DMOS) ­ For class 257
A metal oxide semiconductor having diffused junctions in which successive diffusions of
different impurity types are made in the same well­defined region of the semiconductor.
DOUBLE­DIFFUSED MOS (DMOS) ­ For class 438
A metal oxide semiconductor having diffused junctions in which successive diffusions of
different impurity types are made in the same well­defined region of the semiconductor.
DOUGH ­ For class 425
A soft semi­solid mass capable of being kneaded or of being shaped into a self­sustaining
form, (e.g., clay bread dough, etc.).
DOWEL ­ For class 404
Rod or bar reinforcement­often relatively movable with respect to road, pavement or joint
components­which reinforcement bridges, links or joins adjacent components so that load,
stress or movement of one component is both inhibited by, and transmitted to, another
component.
DRAFT ­ For class 164
The taper that is provided on otherwise verticle faces of a pattern to facilitate its removal
from the sand mold.
DRAG ­ For class 164
The lower or bottom section of a flask, mold, or pattern. Also referred to as nowel.
DRAIN ­ For class 257
The electrode of a field effect transistor which receives charge carriers which pass through
the transistor channel from the source electrode.
DRAIN ­ For class 438
The electrode of a field effect transistor which receives charge carriers which pass through
the transistor channel from the source electrode.
DRAIN CURRENT ­ For class 257
The flow of charge carriers in the drain region of a field effect transistor.
DRAIN­SOURCE SATURATION CURRENT ­ For class 257
The maximum amount of current carried by the drain of a field­effect transistor when the
gate­ source voltage equals zero volts.
DRAM ­ For class 438
dynamic random­access memory
DRAW BAR ­ For class 164
A bar used for lifting the pattern from the sand of the mold.
DRAW RING ­ For class 065
A refractory device placed in a supply of molten glass to define an area for drawing.
DRAW SHIELD ­ For class 065
Baffle means isolating stock being drawn from the hot atmosphere existing above a supply
of molten glass.
DRAWING ­ For class 065
Forming stock, generally sheet or tube, by utilizing the self­cohesiveness of glass in a
plastic condition to effect an operation similar to a ​
gtaffy­pull​
h.
DRAWSTRING­ For class 024
A securing mechanism including both a string (i.e., a thin elongated flaccid member) and
guiding means therefor (e.g., eyelet, hollow hem) located on a portion of the structure­to­
be­secured* which surrounds an opening; wherein the string (a) encircles the opening, (b)
draws the perimeter of the structure­to­be­secured* toward the center of the opening to
close or tighten it when a portion of the string is pulled through its guiding means to
shorten the effective length of the remaining portion of the string encircling the opening,
and (c) secures the perimeter of the structure­to­be­secured* in its new position when the
extracted portion of the string which was pulled through the guide means is prevented
from moving (e.g., tied).
DREDGE ­ For class 037
This is a machine for excavating material at the bottom or the banks of a body of water.
DRESSING ­ For class 452
Includes the preparation of animals (land or marine) for eatable consumption.
DRIFT CURRENT ­ For class 257
Current produced in a solid­state electronic device by charge carriers (e.g., holes or
electrons) drifting in the direction of an applied electric field.
DRILLING FLUID ­ For class 175
Any fluid, gaseous or liquid, which is introduced into the bore for the purpose of lubricating
or cleaning any part of the boring means, or to displace or assist the tool in displacing the
formation, or to flush or clean the bore of cuttings.
DRIVE ­ For class 173
The motion of a tool which performs a function upon work. Impact is included under the
definition of this term. Also, any means to cause the drive motion of a tool such as a
motor, cooperating gearing or mechanical movement elements, or an impacting device.
DRIVE ­ For class 175
A part of the boring means which comprises a motion generating, applying, or transmitting
means which is specifically adapted to repeatedly or continuously act upon a boring tool to
cause the tool to bore by cutting or penetrating into the earth. Drive is divided into the
following major categories: (1) Feed. The sustained forced advance of a boring tool by
means other than mere gravity, adapted to cause the tool to cut or penetrate either with
or without another type of drive means; (2) Impact Drive. The actuation of a boring tool
by a means adapted to deliver a series of blows upon a tool or tool shaft, said impact
delivering means being adapted to move relative to said tool or tool shaft; (3)
Reciprocating Drive. The actuation of a boring tool by means adapted to cause the tool to
partake of to and fro axial movement, at least one direction of axial movement being
caused by the drive; (4) Rotary Drive. The actuation of a boring tool by means causing the
tool to continuously rotate about its own axis, and includes uniform or step by step
unidirectional or oscillatory motion.
DRIVE SLIP ­ For class 701
The slippage of a wheel caused by the driving condition during acceleration of the vehicle.
DRIVE TRAIN ­ For class 475
Mechanism including a group of interconnected elements which transfers rotational power
from a power source* to a load device*.
DRIVE­MEANS­ For class 187
Means for supplying a motive force to an element to be moved which includes both force
generating means (e.g., motor) and structural linkage (e.g., gears) needed to transmit the
force from the generating means to the element.
DRIVER ­ For class 227
A tangible instrumentality having a surface portion which is specifically designed and
intended, upon actuation of said instrumentality, to act upon a member (or work) with
sufficient force, to impart translatory motion there to effect an operation of the class type.
DRIVER­CARRIAGE ­ For class 227
Structure to support the driver in a device of the class type.
DRIVING­STATION ­ For class 227
That region of a machine wherein work must be located for an intended driving operation
of the class type to be performed thereon.
DROSS ­ For class 164
The scum that forms on the surface of molten metals.
DRUM ­ For class 425
A hollow cylinder, substantially circular in cross­section, which has a surface used as a
shaping or working surface.
DRY ­ For class 426
Products which are as a complete product free or relatively free from water and under
normal ambient conditions involve such characteristics, but not necessarily each and every
one, as free flowing, dry to the touch, nontacky or sticky, nonadhesive, granular, powder,
tablet, flake, flour, meal, particulate, pellet, finely divided, etc.
DRY TONER ­ For class 430
Particulate material which develops an electrostatic, magnetic, or electrical image by
attraction of the particulate material to the image.
DRYING OIL ­ For class 516
A liquid fat which readily absorbs oxygen from air, polymerizes, becomes resinous, and
which can thereby form a hard film. The property of drying is due to the presence of
unsaturation in the hydrocarbon length of fatty acid oil, usually the glycerides of linoleic*
and linolenic* acids. Common sources include linseed, tung, perilla, soybean, fish and
dehydrated castor oils. Drying oils have high iodine number; nondrying oils, low.
DSP ­ For class 438
double stacked capacitor
DTL ­ For class 438
diode­transistor logic
DUAL GUARD­BAND ISOLATION ­ For class 257
A type of electrical isolation of functional elements of an integrated circuit comprised of
two distinct unused areas of chip surface area adjacent to the elements desired to be
electrically isolated.
DUAL GUARD­BAND ISOLATION ­ For class 438
A type of electrical isolation of functional elements of an integrated circuit comprised of
two distinct unused areas of chip surface area adjacent to the elements desired to be
electrically isolated.
DUAL­IN­LINE (DIP) ­ For class 257
See DIP.
DUF ­ For class 438
diffusion under film
DUT ­ For class 438
device under test
DUV ­ For class 438
deep ultraviolet
DYE ADDITIVE ­ For class 008
A dye additive or assistant is defined to be any material added to a dye to help in dyeing
and is not basically a part of the dye itself.
DYEING ­ For class 008
Is employed in this classification in its understood and accepted meaning in the art, that is
to say, it denotes imparting a substantially permanent color to organic fibrous or
filamentous material or other porous material by the use of substances, or preparations
possessing tincorial properties and which are not dependent for their ability to become
fixed to the base solely upon the presence of an adhesive of bindive vehicle or ingredient,
as distinguished from the application of an insoluble pigment suspended in a bindive
vehicle, e.g., paint or any colored coating composition where the coloring agent does not
actually color the base.
DYNAMIC LIBRARY ­ For class 506
Collection of compounds, in solution, in dynamic equilibrium (i.e., constantly changing). If
the composition of the library is altered by the presence of a target which selectively binds
certain library members, then shifting of the equilibrium will lead to an increase in the
amount of those components which bind to the target with relatively high affinity. A
dynamic library contains all the potentially possible combinations of the components
undergoing dynamic random connection, whether these combinations are or are not
actually present in the conditions used. It is a virtual library. A real entity is generated in
the presence of the target.
DYNAMIC RANDOM ACCESS MEMORY (DRAM) ­ For class 257
solid­state memory in which the information decays over time and needs to be periodically
refreshed.
DYNAMIC RANDOM ACCESS MEMORY (DRAM) ­ For class 438
Solid­state memory in which the information decays over time and needs to be
periodically refreshed.
DYNAMIC SUBJECT MATTER ­ For class 249
Means for preforming a function in which motion of the means or a part thereof is
essential to accomplishment of the function.
DYNAMIC SUBJECT MATTER ­ For class 425
Apparatus in which motion of a part is essential to accomplish a desired function, (e.g.,
shaping, cutting, etc.).
DYNAMOELECTRIC MACHINE ­ For class 363
A device for converting electrical energy into mechanical energy or mechanical energy into
electrical energy or combinations thereof which involve electromagnetic induction. (Also
see particular type).
DYNAMOTOR ­ For class 363
Also called a rotary converter or synchronous inverter. A rotating device for changing a
D.C. voltage to another value. It is a combination electric motor and D.C. generator with
two or more armature windings and a common set of field poles. One armature winding
receives the direct current and rotates (thus operating as a motor), while the others
generate the required voltage (and thus operate as dynamos or generators).
DZ ­ For class 438
denuded zone ­E­
E nhancer ­ For class 800
Element is a cis­acting sequence that increases the utilization of (some) eukaryotic
promoters and can function in either orientation and in any location (upstream or
downstream) relative to the promoter.
EAR ­ For class 460
The article usually consists of grain bearing spike of a cereal plant such as an ear of corn.
EAROM ­ For class 438
electrically alterable read­only memory
EARTH ­ For class 037
This term is applied to the fragmental material composing part of the surface of the globe.
EARTH WORKING ELEMENT ­ For class 172
Synonymous with ​
gtool​
h.
EARTHENWARE ­ For class 425
A product made of (1) slightly porous opaque clay fired at low heat; (2) inorganic settable
ingredient containing, (e.g., Portland cement type, etc.), (3) powdered metal (4) ceramics
other than glass or slag; (5) alkali metal silicate containing.
EARTHENWARE, PORCELAIN ­ For class 501
These terms designate fine grained or fully vitreous, high fired white or translucent
ceramic materials, frequently, but not always containing clay or similar plastic
components. Among many terms used to designate somewhat similar materials are
stoneware, earthenware, porcelain, pottery, china, whiteware, tile, crockery,
sanitaryware, terra cotta, bisque, rakuware, and slip cast ware. They are not intended for
use in the high temperature or corrosive environments where materials referred to as
refractories are typically employed.
EB ­ For class 438
(a) extrinsic base or (b) electron beam
EB JUNCTION ­ For class 257
Emitter base junction in a bipolar transistor.
EBES ­ For class 438
electron beam exposure system
EBIC ­ For class 438
electron beam induced current
EBL ­ For class 438
electron beam lithography
ECL ­ For class 438
emitter coupled logic
ECR ­ For class 438
electron cyclotron resonance
EDFFG ­ For class 117
Edge­Defined Film­Fed Growth. Also abbreviated as EDFG and EFG.
EDIBLE ­ For class 099
An object that is subject to consumption by an human or animal by chewing or masticating
prior to swallowing.
EDP ­ For class 438
ethylene­diamine­pyrocatechol etchant
EDTA ­ For class 438
ethylenediaminotetraacetic acid
EELS ­ For class 438
electron energy loss spectroscopy
EEPROM ­ For class 438
electrically erasable programmable read­only memory
EFFLUENT ­ For class 210
The liquids flowing out of a process, normally the mainstream, can be either a desired
product or discard.
EFG ­ For class 438
edge­defined film­fed growth (also EDFFG or EDFG)
EG ­ For class 438
extrinsic gettering
EGSi ­ For class 438
electronic­grade silicon
EJECTOR ­ For class 221
Any discharge assistant which acts directly upon an article or articles to be dispensed at
any one operation to segregate or separate the same from the remainder of the supply.
Followers are discharge assistants which are not included in this term since they exert
force through the entire supply rather than directly on the articles to be dispensed.
EJECTOR ­ For class 347
The mechanism which projects the fluid* onto the medium*.
EJECTOR ­ For class 425
Means to release or remove a product from a shaping surface.
EL ­ For class 438
electroluminescent
ELECTRIC CARRIERS OF A TRANSISTOR ­ For class 330
Current flow in a transistor may be by negative carriers (electrons) or positive carriers
(holes).
ELECTRIC DISCHARGE ­ For class 330
The flow of current between two spaced electrodes at different potentials or the charge
carrier particles conveying the current from one spaced electrode to the other.
ELECTRIC ENERGY GENERATORS ­ For class 322
As used herein are devices and apparatus for converting any character of nonelectric
energy to electric energy.
ELECTRIC GENERATING ­ For class 322
As used herein involves the conversion of any character of nonelectric energy to electric
energy.
ELECTRIC LAMP ­ For class 313
A device for converting electrical energy into visible light or ultraviolet light. Most lamps
also generate infrared rays, but infrared ray generators are included only when they have
structure analogous to electric lamps or electric space discharge devices. See the notes
below. Electric lamps may be in the form of electric space discharge devices, for which
see the next paragraph.
ELECTRIC MOTOR ­ For class 388
A machine which transforms electrical energy into mechanical work. Note: For a
description of each of the several types of electric motor, see section IA above.
ELECTRIC MOTOR: ­ For class 318
A machine which transforms electric energy into mechanical energy.
ELECTRIC SIGNAL SOURCE OR SIGNAL SOURCE ­ For class 330
The source of electrical signal energy to be amplified or the source of electrical signal
energy which controls the electric power supply applied to the amplifying device.
ELECTRIC SOURCE CIRCUIT ­ For class 363
The circuit designed to be connected to a source of electric energy.
ELECTRIC SPACE DISCHARGE DEVICES ­ For class 313
(the shorter expression ​
gDISCHARGE DEVICES​
h is used in these definitions) Any device
which is intended to have an electrical current flow between two spaced electrodes, at
least part of the path followed by the discharge being constituted by a gas, vapor, or
vacuum.
ELECTRIC SPACE DISCHARGE DEVICES ­ For class 315
The shorter expression ​
gDISCHARGE DEVICES​
h is used in these definitions, are defined for
the purpose of classification in this class as including any device which is intended to have
an electrical current flow between two spaced electrodes, at least part of the path followed
by the discharge being constituted by a gas, vapor, or vacuum.
ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT ­ For class 330
An electrical network providing one or more closed paths.
ELECTRICAL COMPONENT: ­ For class 029
A self­contained active or passive element designed for and capable of utilizing electricity
to produce a specified electrical characteristic property, or output other than normal
conductivity associated with any electrical structure.
ELECTRICAL NETWORK OR NETWORK ­ For class 330
An arrangement of electrically connected electrical elements and/or devices which are
capable of carrying electric A.C. or D.C. current. Note. A network does not define the
structure in space of the network elements or their arrangement in space relative to each
other; it merely defines the elements or devices broadly by type as to the electrical
function they perform and the electrical connections which will carry current between such
elements and/or devices.
ELECTRICAL NOISE OR RANDOM WAVE GENERATOR ­ For class 331
A wave generator system wherein the frequency determining element consists of a
material medium including electrically charged, chargeable or ionizable particles, the
application of electrical energy to the medium by the driving means causing random
translatory motion of the charged or ionizable particles resulting in the generation of an
infinite number of waves of different frequencies which are fortuitously related, having no
definite phase relationship, period, amplitude or shape.
ELECTRICAL SOURCE CIRCUIT ­ For class 323
The input terminals which are to be connected to a source of electrical energy.
ELECTRICAL SPACE DISCHARGE DEVICE ­ For class 363
An apparatus which is intended to have an electrical current flow between two spaced
electrodes, at least part of the current path being constituted by a gas vapor or vacuum.
gElectronic tube​
​
h is used as the name for an electric space discharge device in this class.
Included are discharge devices which operate in the open, i.e., not in an enclosed
envelope.
ELECTRODE ­ For class 313
A filament or glower of an electric lamp or a member arranged to emit, and/or collect,
and/or control the movement of electrons or ions in a discharge device.
ELECTRODE ­ For class 330
(1) In a vacuum tube, electronic tube or in any discharge device, the conductive elements
between which the electric discharge takes place, and to which the power supply is
applied; any additional conductive means placed in proximity to the electric discharge
and/or other electrodes to affect electrostatically the discharge or the potentials of the
electrodes with which they are in proximity. (2) In a magnetic amplifying device or in a
resistive amplifying device, (including semiconductive devices) the terminals of windings
which influence the operation of the magnetic device or the resistor or semiconductor
terminals by means of which electric current may flow in or out of the resistor or
semiconductor or by means of which a potential may be applied to the resistor or
semiconductor.
ELECTRODE ­ For class 373
An electrical conducting element that emits, or collects electrons, or ions, or controls their
movement by means of an electric field on it.
ELECTRODE ­ For class 429
The electron current carrying material or structure at which the current producing chemical
reaction takes place
ELECTROLYSIS ­ For class 204
A process which is characterized by conduction of an electric current between two or more
electrodes through an electrolyte and resulting in a chemical change (e.g., oxidation,
reduction, etc.) (other than that brought about by the mere heating effect of the electric
current) at one or more of the electrodes (e.g., electrolytic coating or etching, etc.) or at
another location in contact with the electrolyte as a direct result of the electric current
passing therethrough (e.g., electrolytic material treatment, etc.), such chemical change
being the process objective and not merely as a means of conducting an electric current
through the electrolyte (as is the case in ​
gelectrophoresis​
h as defined in subclass 450 of
this class).
ELECTROLYTE ­ For class 204
A substance which is or forms a liquid, solid, or gel containing dissociated ions to conduct
an electrolytic current (usually an ionic compound is dissolved in solution or melted into a
fused state to provide an electrically conductive medium).
ELECTROLYTE ­ For class 429
A material capable of passing an ionic current.
ELECTROMAGNETIC OPERATOR ­ For class 334
A machine or device which is capable of exerting a force upon the control or actuator of an
element or circuit to thus move or control the element or circuit, the machine or device
being operated by the interaction of the magnetic effect of an electrical current and/or
magnetic field. An example, of this type of machine or device is a relay, solenoid or
electric motor connected to the shaft of a variable capacitor, the machines or devices
responding to a flow of current and/or voltage through them to thus drive or move the
shaft of the variable capacitor.
ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVE POLARIZATION CONVERTER ­ For class 342
Structure which acts directly on the electromagnetic wave energy to modify the
polarization pattern of the wave, for example, to change a plane polarized wave into a
circularly polarized wave.
ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVE POLARIZATION FILTER ­ For class 343
Structure which acts directly on the electromagnetic wave to filter out wave energy of an
undesired polarization and to pass wave energy of a desired polarization.
ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVE REFRACTOR ­ For class 343
Structure which is shaped or positioned to delay or accelerate transmitted electromagnetic
waves, passing through such structure, an amount which varies over the wave front, to
alter the direction of propagation of the waves emitted from the structure with respect to
the waves impinging on the structure, or to bring the wave to a focus, or to alter the wave
front (such as to convert a spherical wave front to a planar wave front or vice versa).
ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES ­ For class 522
The term ​
gelectromagnetic waves​
h as employed herein includes, for example, X­rays and
gamma rays; ultraviolet, infrared, and visible light rays, and short electric and radio
waves. Energy which produces merely a thermal effect or heat waves, per se, is excluded.
Microwave energy is considered to produce a thermal effect unless there is a direct
statement to the contrary, and is not proper for this class.
ELECTROMECHANICAL RESONATOR ­ For class 331
A resonator comprising an electrically driven material body wherein the mass and
compliance parameters of the body determine the mechanical period of vibration of the
body and wherein the driving electrical circuit for the body exhibits electrical resonance
characteristics which are determined by the mechanical period of vibration of the body.
ELECTROMECHANICAL TRANSDUCER ­ For class 330
Means to convert the electric signal to mechanical vibrations and means further to convert
the mechanical vibrations back to electric signals, such means generally serving as either
time or phase delay means or means to determine the transmission frequency of the
coupling network.
ELECTROMIGRATION ­ For class 438
Mass transport of ions (i.e., usually metal) in a material as a response to the passage of
current through the material by momentum exchange between thermally activated ions
and conduction electrons.
ELECTRON ­ For class 257
The negatively charged particle in an atom that orbits the nucleus in specific energy levels.
ELECTRON BEAM ­ For class 373
A narrow stream of electrons moving in the same direction under the influence of an
electric, or magnetic field.
ELECTRON FLOW ­ For class 257
Movement of electrons from a source of negative potential to a positive potential.
ELECTRON­HOLE PAIR ­ For class 257
A positive charge carrier (i.e., hole) and a negative charge carrier (i.e., electron)
considered together as being created or destroyed as part of one and the same event.
ELECTRON­HOLE PAIR ­ For class 438
A positive charge carrier (i.e., hole) and a negative charge carrier (i.e., electron)
considered together as being created or destroyed as part of one and the same event.
ELECTRONIC ­ For class 326
Pertaining to that branch of science which deals with the motion, emission, and behavior of
currents of free electrons, especially in vacuum, gas, or phototubes and special conductors
or semiconductors. The term electronic is contrasted with electric, which pertains to the
flow of large currents in metal conductors.
ELECTRONIC DEVICE ­ For class 326
A device in which conduction is principally by the movement of electrons through a
vacuum, gas, or semiconductor. This definition excludes inductors, capacitors, resistors,
and similar components.
ELECTRONIC PROGRAM GUIDE (EPG) ­ For class 725
A display interface which allows user s interaction with a program grid having intersecting
row(s) and column(s) of video program information.
ELECTRONIC TUBE ­ For class 323
An apparatus which is intended to have an electric current flow between two spaced
electrodes, at least part of the current path being constituted by a gas, vapor, or vacuum,
gElectronic Tube​
​
h is used as the name for an electric space discharge device in this class.
Included are discharge devices which operate in the open, i.e., not in an enclosed
envelope.
ELECTRONIC TUBE ­ For class 330
An electric space discharge device, that is, a device in which electricity flows from one
electrode to another by means of free electrical charge carrier particles traveling in a
vacuum, gas or vapor; included are electric space discharge devices (also called electronic
tubes) which operate in the open, i.e., not in an enclosed envelope. The electrical charge
carrier particles may be of any type, usually electrons for vacuum tubes or charged ions
for gas or vapor tubes.
ELECTRONIC TUBE ­ For class 363
An electrical space discharge device.
ELECTRO­OPTIC ­ For class 372
The effect, on the properties of a beam of light, by an electrical field, interacting with the
light within a volume of matter.
ELECTROPHORESIS ­ For class 356
The effect in which charged particles suspended in a liquid are moved under the influence
of an electrostatic field.
ELECTROPOLISHING ­ For class 205
The electrolytic erosion of solid surfaces to produce bright or mirrorlike surfaces. The
effect usually results from a selective electrolytic erosion of the high points of a base
material surface to thus reduce surface irregularities.
ELECTROSLAG DEVICE ­ For class 373
Apparatus enabling one, or more electrodes to be immersed in a slag layer which floats on
top of the melt.
ELECTROSTATOGRAPHY ­ For class 399
The formation and utilization of latent electrostatic charge patterns for recording or
reproducing patterns in viewable form, for example: reproducing information from an
original or carrier by selectively exposing a photoconductive member to an electrical or
magnetic condition that produces a latent image whereby the image is developed to a
visible image, then transferred and fixed from the photoconductive member to a medium.
ELEMENT ­ For class 205
An electrode, a workpiece, a tool, or an electrolyte.
ELEMENT ­ For class 338
Resistance element unless otherwise indicated.
ELEMENT ­ For class 351
Component part of an optical instrument unless otherwise indicated.
ELEMENT ­ For class 428
See definition of constituent*. (Structural)
ELO ­ For class 438
epitaxial lateral overgrowth
ELONGATED CONDUCTOR: ­ For class 029
A body whose longitudinal dimension is much greater than any of its lateral dimensions
and which is designed for the stated proximate purpose of carrying an electric current or
electromagnetic energy.
EMBOSSING ­ For class 065
Altering a surface configuration only of glass by raising a boss or protuberance thereon or
causing surface portions to be depressed below the plane of the glass surface.
EMBOSSING ­ For class 425
Altering a surface configuration only.
EMD ­ For class 438
enhancement mode device (also E­mode or E­type)
EMI ­ For class 438
electromagnetic interference
EMISSIVE CATHODE ­ For class 313
A low work function electrode.
EMITTER ­ For class 257
The region of a bipolar junction transistor from which charge carriers flow through the
emitter­base junction into the base region of the device.
EMITTER CURRENT ­ For class 257
The amount of current flowing from the emitter across the emitter­base junction into the
base region of the device.
EMITTER ELECTRODE ­ For class 330
See the definition of point contact or junction type transistor in this Glossary.
E­MOSFET ­ For class 257
Enhancement mode metal oxide semiconductor device. See ENHANCEMENT MODE and
MOSFET.
EMP ­ For class 438
electron microprobe
EMULSIFYING AGENT ­ For class 516
The effective material*, energy, or means used for accomplishing the act of making an
emulsion colloid system, such as agent* compositions specialized and designed for or
peculiar to use in emulsion making. Typically, this is a surfactant added to aid in the
emulsification of two immiscible liquids. Characteristically resides at the interface in a
stable emulsion.
EMULSION ­ For class 516
A colloid system of two or more immiscible liquid phases. Examples are water­in­oil
(w/o), oil­in­water (o/w), water­in­oil­in­water (w/o/w). Also includes immiscible
oils/solvents.
EMULSION BREAKER ­ For class 516
The effective material*, energy, or means used for accomplishing the act of destroying an
emulsion colloid system, such as agent* compositions specialized and designed for or
peculiar to use in emulsion breaking.
ENCAPSULATING ­ For class 588
To immobilize hazardous or toxic waste materials by any means to include vitrification,
combining with organoclay and mixing, adding a cement material, or enclosing in a
container the hazardous or toxic waste material. The hazardous or toxic waste material is
held in place and is not permitted to be leached or leaked out into the environment.
ENCLOSURE ­ For class 052
Means surrounding an area or volume to be occupied by persons, animals or goods.
ENCRYPTING OR ENCIPHERING ­ For class 380
A process of obscuring information by intentionally changing it to a form unintelligible to a
casual or unauthorized observer.
ENCRYPTION ­ For class 725
The process of encoding data to prevent unauthorized access, especially during
transmission. Encryption is usually based on a key that is essential for decoding.
END EFFECTOR ­ For class 901
A device connected to the distal end of the robots arm* which carries out the robots
intended function.
END EFFECTOR: ­ For class 700
A terminal on a robot arm that carries a hand, welding gun, painting nozzle, or other tool.
END FACE ­ For class 092
The end face of the piston consists of the portion thereof which is opposite the abutment of
reaction surface of the cylinder and which is adapted to contact the working fluid.
END SHEETS­ For class 412
The sheet() of paper at the front(*) and end of a book(*) overlaying the inner sides of the
boards of the covering member serving with the linings(*) to secure the book(*) to its
associated covering member.
ENDLESS ­ For class 425
A closed loop, such as the peripheral surface of a roll, a cylinder or a drum.
ENERGY LEVELS ­ For class 257
The possible energy values that an atom or molecule or subatomic particle (e.g., an
electron) can have.
ENGINE ­ For class 440
A device which converts thermal energy into mechanical energy or power to produce force
or motion.
ENGINE: ­ For class 477
A primary source of rotational energy.
ENHANCEMENT MODE ­ For class 257
The operation of a field effect transistor which has a channel formed therein between its
source and drain regions and which normally does not conduct current through its channel
with zero voltage applied to its gate electrode. Voltage of the correct polarity will
accumulate minority carriers in the channel to permit conduction of current in the channel,
thus turning on the transistor.
ENHANCEMENT MODE ­ For class 438
The operation of a field effect transistor which has a channel formed therein between its
source and drain regions and which normally does not conduct current through its channel
with zero voltage applied to its gate electrode. Voltage of the correct polarity will
accumulate minority carriers in the channel to permit conduction of current in the channel,
thus turning on the transistor.
ENTERPRISE ­ For class 705
A conventional business organization, a governmental organization or a nonprofit
organization.
ENTITY ­ For class 709
A computer or process that can be treated as a unit and, often, as a member of a
particular category or type.
ENTITY ­ For class 718
A computer or process that can be treated as a unit and, often, as a member of a
particular category or type.
eNTITY ­ For class 719
A computer or process that can be treated as a unit and, often, as a member of a
particular category or type.
ENTRANCE ­ For class 052
An opening for persons or things, but not for a fluid or a mass of particles having a fluid
like characteristic.
ENVELOPE ­ For class 313
A gas tight enclosure for an electric lamp or discharge device. It may be evacuated or
filled with a gas or vapor. In general the distinction between an envelope and a mere
jacket, casing or housing is that the envelope is sealed, so as to be gas tight.
ENVIRONMENT ­ For class 709
A set of resources made available to the user of a system which defines specifications
such as the command path (where to look for files), the system prompt and, sometimes,
the location of resources or working files.
ENVIRONMENT ­ For class 718
A set of resources made available to the user of a system which defines specifications
such as the command path (where to look for files), the system prompt and, sometimes,
the location of resources or working files.
ENVIRONMENT ­ For class 719
A set of resources made available to the user of a system which defines specifications
such as the command path (where to look for files), the system prompt and, sometimes,
the location of resources or working files.
ENVIRONMENTALLY SAFE SUBSTANCE ­ For class 588
Is any material that in any of its chemical or physical interactions with the environment
results in no measurable adverse effects or degradations on the environment.
ENZYME ­ For class 977
Protein that functions as a biochemical catalyst for a biochemical reaction.
EPB ­ For class 438
epoxidated polybutadiene (an EB resist)
EPD ­ For class 438
etch pit density
EPI ­ For class 438
epitaxial (single crystalline) layer
EPITAXIAL LATERAL OVERGROWTH ­ For class 438
Process of epitaxial deposition through an exposed opening in an insulating layer with
deposition continuing epitaxially over the insulating layer laterally from the opening.
EPITAXIAL LAYER ­ For class 257
An added layer of crystal that takes on the same crystalline orientation as the substrate
crystal.
EPITAXY ­ For class 117
Formation of a single­crystal* on a substrate* (which acts as a seed*) or the product of
such a process. Usually, the formed crystal bears a definite crystallos:graphic relationship
to the substrate*. Typically, the term applies to coating or layer formation when the width
and length are substantially larger than the height and when the substrate* remains as a
significant or integral part of the product in use.
EPITAXY ­ For class 257
The growth of a crystal of one substance on the surface of a crystal of the same or
another substance so that the crystal lattice of the base substance controls the orientation
of the atoms in the grown crystal.
EPITAXY ­ For class 438
The controlled growth of a single crystal of one material on the surface of a crystal of the
material (i.e., homo) or onto another substance (i.e., hetero) so that the crystal lattice of
the base material controls the orientation of the atoms in the grown single crystal layer.
EPITOPE ­ For class 435
A single antigenic determinant portion of the antigen which combines with the antibody
site.
EPP ­ For class 438
ethylene­piperidine­pyrocatechol etchant
EPR ­ For class 438
electron paramagnetic resonance
EPROM ­ For class 438
erasable programmable read­only memory
EPS ­ For class 438
effective punchthrough stopper
EPW ­ For class 438
etchant mix of ethylenediamine, pyrocatechol, and water
EQUALIZER ­ For class 330
Networks with attenuation or attenuation and phase distortion characteristics which vary
over a frequency range for use in a wave transmission system for modifying the
attenuation or attenuation and phase characteristics of the wave energy as a function of
frequency.
EQUALIZER ­ For class 333
Networks with attenuation or attenuation and phase distortion characteristics which vary
over a frequency range for use in a wave transmission system for modifying the
attenuation or attenuation and phase characteristics of the wave energy as a function of
frequency.
ERROR ­ For class 710
Manifestation of a fault as an undesired event that occurs when actual behavior deviates
from the behavior that is required by initial specifications.
ERROR ­ For class 712
Manifestation of a fault as an undesired event that occurs when actual behavior deviates
from the behavior that is required by initial specifications.
ERROR ­ For class 713
Manifestation of a fault as an undesired event that occurs when actual behavior deviates
from the behavior that is required by initial specifications.
ERROR ­ For class 714
Manifestation of a fault as an undesired event that occurs when actual behavior deviates
from the behavior that is required by initial specification. This includes a change in
information content of pulse or pulse coded data to a state or value other than the normal
state or value of a properly operating device or system.
ESAKI DIODE ­ For class 257
A heavily doped pn junction diode where conduction occurs through the junction potential
barrier due to a quantum mechanical effect even though the carriers which tunnel through
the potential barrier do not have enough energy to overcome the potential barrier. Esaki
tunneling involves a tunneling barrier formed by a macroscopic depletion layer between n­
type and p­type regions. It does not involve a resonant tunneling barrier using controlled
quantum confinement, a layer located between junctions, nor a thin superlattice layer.
ESAKI DIODE ­ For class 438
A heavily doped pn­junction diode where conduction occurs through the junction potential
barrier due to a quantum mechanical effect even though the carriers which tunnel through
the potential barrier do not have enough energy to overcome the potential barrier. Esaki
tunneling involves a tunneling barrier formed by a macroscopic depletion layer between n­
type and p­type regions. It does not involve a resonant tunneling barrier using controlled
quantum confinement, a layer located between junctions, nor a thin superlattice layer.
ESCA ­ For class 438
electron spectroscopy for chemical analysis
ESD ­ For class 438
electrostatic discharge
ESR ­ For class 438
(a) equivalent series resistance or (b) electron spin resonance
ESSENTIAL OIL ­ For class 516
Volatile component of plants which imparts the characteristic odor to flowers, leaves,
stems, or twigs, or wood, or derivable from plant constituents. Various methods are used
to derive including distillation, pressing, solvent extraction, and fat extraction.
Distinguished from fatty oils by usually being terpenes*, fairly volatile, non­greasy, and
non­saponifiable (except those with esters). Most essential oils are mixtures, an exception
being oil of wintergreen which is essentially pure methyl salicylate.
ESTER ­ For class 428
A compound which is identical to that obtained by the replacing of a hydroxy hydrogen of
an alcohol or a phenol with an acid radical. (Nonstructural or Composition)
ESTER LINKAGE ­ For class 428
The chemical grouping obtained by replacing the hydroxy hydrogen of an alcohol or a
phenol with an acid radical. (Nonstructural or Composition)
ESTER­TYPE WAX ­ For class 204
A ​
gwax​
h which is essentially an ester in chemical structure, (e.g., montan wax, carnauba
wax, etc.).
ESTER­TYPE WAXES ­ For class 507
Means waxes which are essentially esters in chemical structure, e.g., beeswax, montan
wax, carnauba wax, spermaceti, etc.
ESTER­TYPE WAXES ­ For class 507
Waxes which are essentially esters in chemical structure (e.g., beeswax, montan wax,
carnauba wax, spermaceti, etc.).
ETHER ­ For class 514
Denotes an organic compound having oxygen bonded directly to two carbon atoms, which
carbons cannot be double bonded to oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium, or triple
bonded to nitrogen.
ETHER ­ For class 520
Denotes an organic compound characterized by the presence of an oxygen atom bonded
directly to two carbon atoms, where the carbon atoms may not be double bonded to
chalcogen (i.e., oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium), or triple bonded to nitrogen. An
example is dimethyl ether, CH3­O­CH3.
ETHYLENIC ­ For class 987
Denotes a double bond or triple between adjacent acyclic carbon atoms.
ETHYLENICALLY UNSATURATED ­ For class 520
Requires the presence of two carbon atoms bonded to each other by a double or triple
bond, provided that the double bond is not part of a benzene ring. Indane (Fig. 1) is not
within the scope of olefinically unsaturated; coumarone (Fig. 2) and indene (Fig. 3) are
within said scope.
EVAPORATION ­ For class 201
The process of changing a solid or liquid into a vapor. This is the generic term for both
sublimation and vaporization. It differs from ​
gdistillation​
h in that distillation includes the
additional step of condensing vapor produced to a liquid.
EVAPORATION ­ For class 202
The process of changing a solid or liquid into a vapor. This is the generic term for both
sublimation and vaporization. It differs from ​
gdistillation​
h in that distillation includes the
additional step of condensing vapor produced to a liquid.
EVAPORATION ­ For class 203
The process of changing a solid or liquid into a vapor. This is the generic term for both
sublumination and vaporization. It differs from ​
gdistillation​
h in that distillation includes the
additional step of condensing vapor produced to a liquid.
EXCESS CARRIERS ­ For class 257
Charge carriers present in a semiconductor in excess of those present in thermal
equilibrium.
EXCITATION ­ For class 704
Stimulation of the vocal tract by vibratory action of the vocal cords or by a turbulent air
flow. In a digital system, the vocal tract is typically modelled with a filter and excitation of
the filter is performed using time representations of pitch (voiced excitation) and noise
(unvoiced excitation).
EXCITATION­ For class 349
For the purpose of this class, excitation is a force or energy which selects the state of the
liquid crystal material.
Exon ­ For class 800
A continuous coding segment of a eukaryotic gene. Many eukaryotic genes are "split" and
have exons interspersed with nonsense DNA called introns. Thus, it is a part of the gene
which encodes protein.
EXPANDER OR VOLUME EXPANDER ­ For class 330
A device that expands the volume range, as in recording sound, radio­telephone
transmission, etc. In expanding the signal volume range, the amplification of large signals
is increased, and the amplification of small signals is reduced. Expanders are used
generally to restore a signal after compression.
EXPENDABLE­ SHEATH­ ­ For class 401
A holder# for a piece of solid coating material which is adapted or required to have a
portion thereof, adjacent the tool*, removed so as to expose the coating material as it is
attrited in use. See HOLDER.
EXPLOSIVE ­ For class 102
The term is used to include a detonating, deflagrating, or thermic composition of the type
defined in the class definition of Class 149, Explosive and Thermic Compositions or
Charges.
EXPLOSIVE COMPOSITIONS ­ For class 149
Are classified (a) as HIGH EXPLOSIVE, which, for the purpose of this class, is one whose
rate of reaction is substantially instantaneous or detonating in character, and is either (1)
an extremely sensitive or highly reactive or detonating chemical compound which is known
as a PRIMARY EXPLOSIVE and is used to initiate the secondary or other explosive
component of the charge; or (2) is a composition of a combination of two or more primary
explosives and as such is known as a SECONDARY or other DERIVED EXPLOSIVE. Such an
explosive reacts with detonating force or brisance which is sufficient to shatter the
surrounding medium; (b) as LOW EXPLOSIVE, which for the purpose of this class, is
controlled to some time interval, less than instantaneous, and as compared to that of high
explosive, is slow or deflagrating (burning) in character. It has the property or power to
displace the surrounding medium. Although it may be used for certain blasting purposes it
is used principally as PROPELLANT to set in motion bullets, missiles or similar devices
regardless of size.
EXPLOSIVE OR THERMIC COMPONENT ­ For class 149
As used in this class covers (1) explosive or thermic compositions, per se, (2) the oxidant
portion, (3) the fuel portion of such compositions. See also (4) Note class definition.
EXPOSURE ­ For class 396
Exposure is the act of allowing light to reach the photographic medium.
EXPOSURE ­ For class 430
Application of radiation to form or perfect an image.
EXPOSURE CONTROL CIRCUIT ­ For class 396
An exposure control circuit is an electronic circuit to control the exposure.
EXPOSURE OBJECTIVE ­ For class 396
An exposure objective is an objective that focuses light from the object onto a
photographic medium.
EXPOSURE SYSTEM ­ For class 396
An exposure system is one that has means to regulate or adjust an amount of light
reaching the photographic medium.
EXPOSURE TIME ­ For class 396
Exposure time is the length of time an exposure occurs.
EXPOSURE TIME VALUE (Tv) ­ For class 396
Exposure time value is a logarithmic number indicative of exposure time.
EXPOSURE VALUE (Ev) ­ For class 396
Exposure value is the sum of the aperture value and exposure time value.
EXTRACTIVE DISTILLATION ­ For class 202
A separatory distillation in which a generally less volatile substance, often referred to as a
solvent, is added to the distillation column to preferentially remove some components of
the vapor by dissolving it. The added substance and the dissolved component are removed
below the point at which the less volatile substance is added to the distillation column.
EXTRACTIVE DISTILLATION ­ For class 203
A separatory distillation in which a generally less volatile substance, often referred to as a
solvent, is added to the distillation column to preferentially remove some component of
the vapor by dissolving it. The added substance and the dissolved component are removed
below the point at which the less volatile substance is added to the distillation column.
EXTRACTORS ­ For class 171
Devices which comprise means to engage a portion of a buried or partially buried object
and to temporarily fasten itself to said object in order to hold onto the object while it is
lifted out of the ground.
EXTRINSIC SEMICONDUCTOR ­ For class 257
A semiconductor whose charge carrier concentration and, therefore, electrical properties
depend on impurity, atoms introduced therein.
EXTRINSIC SEMICONDUCTOR ­ For class 438
A semiconductor whose charge carrier concentration and, therefore, electrical properties
depend on impurity atoms introduced therein.
EXTRUDANT ­ For class 264
A shaped body of material formed by forcing a supply of said material through a confining
orifice whereby the cross­sectional area of the extruded portion corresponds to the
dimensions of the orifice.
EXTRUDANT ­ For class 425
A shaped body of material formed by forcing the material through a confining, shaping
orifice.
EYE CONTACT LENSES ­ For class 351
Opthalmic lenses that fit over the cornea of the eye and which float on the tear of the eye
or are held in place by the eyelids.
EYEGLASSES ­ For class 351
Spectacles, pince­nez or other mountings with lenses to correct defects of vision of the
human eye.
FABRIC ­ For class 428
A web*, sheet* or film disclosed as used in the manufacture of household furnishings
(e.g., draperies, upholstery, etc) shoes, etc., roofing, clothing, tires, etc. and is claimed as
a textile*, cloth* or fabric. See Class 442, class definition. (Structural)
FACE BONDED ­ For class 257
A chip mounting technique wherein semiconductor chips are provided with small mounting
pads, turned face down, and bonded directly to conductors on a substrate.
FACE BONDED ­ For class 438
A chip mounting technique wherein semiconductor chips are provided with small mounting
pads, turned face down, and bonded directly to conductors on a substrate.
FACER OR FACING (SEE MODULE) ­ For class 052
An element or structure which (1) forms an exposed surface section of a barrier or (2) the
panel held by a frame, a framing element or an elongated sustainer, e.g., the movable
closure part of a door or window. In the latter respect it differs from a module in that it is
not used in repetition to form an extended surface.
FAILURE ­ For class 710
Manifestation of an error as a nonperformance of an expected system service as required
by the initial specifications.
FAILURE ­ For class 712
Manifestation of an error as a nonperformance of an expected system service as required
by the initial specifications.
FAILURE ­ For class 713
Manifestation of an error as a nonperformance of an expected system service as required
by the initial specifications.
FAMOS ­ For class 438
floating­gate avalanche­injection MOS
FANNED LEADS ­ For class 257
Leads placed through a package wall at closer intervals than normal and radiated (fanned)
out on the exterior of the package until a desired center­to­center lead spacing is
achieved.
FAR FIELD ­ For class 342
The space beyond the near field of an antenna in which radiation is essentially confined to
a fixed pattern falls off inversely with the square of the distance.
FASIC ­ For class 438
folded bit­line adaptive sidewall isol. capacitor cell
FAST (FISSION) REACTOR ­ For class 376
A nuclear reactor in which most of the fissions are caused by neutrons moving with
substantially the high speeds they possess at the time of their birth in fission. Such
reactors contain little or no moderator.
FAST NEUTRONS ­ For class 376
See Thermal Neutrons.
FASTENER ­ For class 403
A retainer which serves to hold the members or one or more components against
separation.
FAT ­ For class 516
Naturally occurring glycerides. Natural fats are the natural oils which oils which are solid
at room temperature.
FAT and FATTY OIL ­ For class 106
The glyceryl triester (triglyceride) of the same or different higher fatty acids (e.g., oleic,
myristic, palmitic, stearic, linolenic, etc.) or mixtures thereof present in a single oil or fat
(e.g., lard, tallow, castor oil, etc.).
FAT, FATTY OIL ­ For class 106
The glyceryl triester (triglyceride) of the same or different higher fatty acids (e.g., oleic,
myristic, palmitic, stearic, linolenic, etc.) or mixtures thereof present in a single oil or fat
(e.g., lard, tallow, castor oil, etc.).
FAT, FATTY OIL ­ For class 106
The glyceryl triester (triglyceride) of the same or different higher fatty acids (e.g., oleic,
myristic, palmitic, stearic, linolenic, etc.) or mixtures thereof present in a single oil or fat
(e.g., lard, tallow, castor oil, etc.).
FAT, FATTY OIL ­ For class 106
The glyceryl triester (triglyceride) of the same or different higher fatty acids (e.g., oleic,
myristic, palmitic, stearic, linolenic, etc.) or mixtures thereof present in a single oil or fat
(e.g., lard, tallow, castor oil, etc.).
FAT, FATTY OIL ­ For class 106
The glyceryl triester (triglyceride) of the same or different higher fatty acids (e.g., oleic,
myristic, palmitic, stearic, linolenic, etc.) or mixtures thereof present in a single oil or fat
(e.g., lard, tallow, castor oil, etc.).
FAT, FATTY OIL ­ For class 106
The glyceryl triester (triglyceride) of the same or different higher fatty acids (e.g., oleic,
myristic, palmitic, stearic, linolenic, etc.) or mixtures thereof present in a single oil or fat
(e.g., lard, tallow, castor oil, etc.).
FAT, FATTY OIL ­ For class 106
The glyceryl triester (triglyceride) of the same or different higher fatty acids (e.g., oleic,
myristic, palmitic, stearic, linolenic, etc.) or mixtures thereof present in a single oil or fat
(e.g., lard, tallow, castor oil, etc.).
FAT, FATTY OIL ­ For class 106
The glyceryl triester (triglyceride) of the same or different higher fatty acids (e.g., oleic,
myristic, palmitic, stearic, linolenic, etc.) or mixtures thereof present in a single oil or fat
(e.g., lard, tallow, castor oil, etc.).
FAT, FATTY OIL ­ For class 106
The glyceryl triester (triglyceride) of the same or different higher fatty acids (e.g., oleic,
myristic, palmitic, stearic, linolenic, etc.) or mixtures thereof present in a single oil or fat
(e.g., lard, tallow, castor oil, etc.).
FAT, FATTY OIL ­ For class 106
The glyceryl triester (triglyceride) of the same or different higher fatty acids (e.g., oleic,
myristic, palmitic, stearic, linolenic, etc.) or mixtures thereof present in a single oil or fat
(e.g., lard, tallow, castor oil, etc.).
FAT, FATTY OIL ­ For class 106
The glyceryl triester (triglyceride) of the same or different higher fatty acids (e.g., oleic,
myristic, palmitic, stearic, linolenic, etc.) or mixtures thereof present in a single oil or fat
(e.g., lard, tallow, castor oil, etc.).
FAT, FATTY OIL ­ For class 106
The glyceryl triester (triglyceride) of the same or different higher fatty acids (e.g., oleic,
myristic, palmitic, stearic, linolenic, etc.) or mixtures thereof present in a single oil or fat
(e.g., lard, tallow, castor oil, etc.).
FAT, FATTY OIL ­ For class 106
The glyceryl triester (triglyceride) of the same or different higher fatty acids (e.g., oleic,
myristic, palmitic, stearic, linolenic, etc.) or mixtures thereof present in a single oil or fat
(e.g., lard, tallow, castor oil, etc.).
FAT, FATTY OIL ­ For class 106
The glyceryl triester (triglyceride) of the same or different higher fatty acids (e.g., oleic,
myristic, palmitic, stearic, linolenic, etc.) or mixtures thereof present in a single oil or fat
(e.g., lard, tallow, castor oil, etc.).
FAT, FATTY OIL ­ For class 106
The glyceryl triester (triglyceride) of the same or different higher fatty acids (e.g., oleic,
myristic, palmitic, stearic, linolenic, etc.) or mixtures thereof present in a single oil or fat
(e.g., lard, tallow, castor oil, etc.).
FAT, FATTY OIL ­ For class 204
A glyceride of a higher fatty acid, including naturally occurring mixtures thereof.
FATS and FATTY OILS ­ For class 507
The glycerides of higher fatty acids, including naturally occurring mixtures thereof present
in a single oil or fat.
FATS, FATTY OILS ­ For class 507
Means the glycerides of higher fatty acids, including naturally occurring mixtures thereof
present in a single oil or fat.
FATTY ACID ­ For class 514
Denotes an aliphatic monocarboxylic acid having an unbroken chain of at least seven
carbon atoms bonded to the carboxyl group.
FATTY ACID ­ For class 516
Organic* compounds comprising a hydrocarbon chain with a carboxylic acid at one end.
The term usually implies an unbroken hydrocarbon chain of seven or more carbon atoms.
Saturated, unsaturated, and polyunsaturated occur naturally. The most common fatty acids
in natural fats or oils are palmitic, stearic, oleic, lauric, and myristic.
FATTY ACID ­ For class 520
Denotes an aliphatic monocarboxylic acid having an unbroken chain of at least seven
acyclic carbon atoms bonded to the carboxyl group. Fatty acid glycerol ester denotes a
mono­, di­, or tri­ester of a fatty acid with glycerol. The so­called drying or semidrying
oils are naturally occurring fatty acid glycerol esters (i.e., glycerides). The drying or
semidrying property relates to the degree of ethylenic unsaturation. Naturally occurring
fatty acid glycerides (i.e., fats and fatty oils) include but are not limited to linseed oil,
perilla oil, olive oil, oititica oil, soybean oil, fish oil, castor oil, tallow, and other natural
glycerides: alfalfa, apricot kernel, beechnut, bontio, Brazil nut, candlenut, cedar nut,
chaulmoogra, cherry kernel, coconut, corn, cottonseed, croton seed, grapefruit seed,
grapeseed, hempseed, isano, ivory wood seed, jute seed, mustard seed, oat, orange seed,
plum kernel, poppyseed, poyok, rice, rye, safflower, sesame, stillingia, sunflower,
teaseed, thistle seed, tobacco seed, tomato seed, walnut, wheat, wild rose seed. Naturally
occurring fats and fatty oils are treated in this Class 520 Series as fatty acid glycerol
esters. A fatty acid derived from naturally occurring glyceride denotes the carboxylic acids
normally obtained by saponification of the naturally occurring glycerides (i.e., oleic,
linoleic, linolenic, licanic, eleostearic, ricinoleic, arachidic, stearic, palmitic, lauric, erucic,
palmitoleic, capric, caprylic, myristic and clupanodonic acids). Carboxylic acids specifically
enumerated above will be treated as fatty acids derived from naturally occurring
glycerides only where there is specific disclosure that the acid is derived from a naturally
occurring glyceride source. Tall oil denotes the mixture of fatty acids, rosin, and
unsaponifiable material obtained by treatment of Kraft (or sulfite) process black liquor. In
this Class 520 Series, tall oil is usually treated as if it were a mixture of fatty acids
derived from naturally occurring glycerides unless otherwise specifically stated; see
appropriate subclass definitions for exceptions. Fatty acid derived from tall oil denotes the
fatty acid portion of tall oil In this series, derivatives or modifications of the fatty acid
glycerol ester, fatty acid derived from a naturally occurring glyceride, tall oil, or fatty
acids derived from tall oil are excluded, except as specifically provided for in the following
list: salts of the fatty acid moiety, blown oils, refined oils and acids, stand oils, boiled oils,
bodied oils, hydrogenated oils or acids, dehydrogenated oils or acids, dehydrated castor oil
or dehydrated castor oil fatty acids. Synthetically produced fatty acids having the same
structure as fatty acids derived from naturally occurring glycerides are included herein.
Dimerized or trimerized or ​
gpolymeric​
h fatty acids are excluded as ​
gfatty acids​
h for
purposes of this Class 520 Series; similarly, adducts of fatty acids or fatty acid glycerol
esters with alpha, beta ethylenically unsaturated carboxylic acids are excluded as ​
gfatty
acids​
h.
FATTY ALCOHOL ­ For class 507
An alcohol containing an unbroken chain of at least seven carbon atoms bonded to a
hydroxy group.
FATTY ALCOHOL ­ For class 507
Means an alcohol containing an unbroken chain of at least 7 carbon atoms bonded to a
hydroxy group.
FATTY STILL RESIDUES ­ For class 204
Bottoms, tars, or pitches resulting from the distillation of fats, fatty oils, and ester­type
waxes, (e.g., stearine pitch, etc.).
FATTY STILL RESIDUES ­ For class 507
By this term it is intended to include the bottoms, tars, or pitches resulting from
distillation of fats, oils, and waxes.
FATTY STILL RESIDUES ­ For class 507
Intended to include the bottoms, tars, or pitches resulting from distillation of fats, oils, and
waxes.
FAULT ­ For class 710
A flaw in a functional unit (hardware or software).
FAULT ­ For class 712
A flaw in a functional unit (hardware or software).
FAULT ­ For class 713
A flaw in a functional unit (hardware or software).
FAULT ­ For class 714
A flaw in a functional unit (hardware or software).
FCT ­ For class 438
field controlled thyristor
FEC ­ For class 438
floating electrode capacitor
FED ­ For class 438
field emission device
FEED ­ For class 053
Feed or delivery, as distinct from infeed, is transfer, conveyance, movement or translation
of assembly components to or from what is established as a work position; at which
position further motion of the components with respect to each other ­ generally a straight
line movement along the major axis of either or both components ­ is called infeed. Thus,
for example, motion of a closure element from a hopper or magazine to a superimposed
position over the aperture of a receptacle is referred to as feed or delivery while the final
juxtapositioning of the closure and receptacles previously aligned and oriented is
considered infeed.
FEED ­ For class 208
The mineral oil which is subjected to treating processes provided for in this class, which in
most cases, is a mixture of hydrocarbons.
FEED ­ For class 210
The liquid to be treated, prior to processing.
FEED ­ For class 226
(v) To move material to an operation*. (n) The act of moving material to an operation*.
FEED (of pattern, card, web, etc.) ­ For class 234
The progressive advancement of an object through a tool field and/or a field of pattern­
sensers*, as distinguished from the mere presentation of an object to a machine.
FEEDBACK ­ For class 388
The return of energy from the output of a motor to the input for the purpose of controlling
the input so as to achieve or maintain a desired output condition.
FEEDER ­ For class 226
(n) A device which moves material to an operation*. (Compare with Dispenser).
FEEDER ­ For class 401
Means to guide fluent coating material from a reservoir to or through a coating tool or to a
work surface.
FEEDER ­ For class 460
The component of a grain thresher that transports the crop from the cutter or crop pickup
apparatus to the threshing system. Apparatuses prior to approximately 1950 included
bundle handling and a band cutter.
FEEDING ­ For class 271
Refers to the ​
gmeans for moving individual sheet from a stack​
h and involves use of a
gseparator or a conveyor.​
​
h
FEED­ROLL ­ For class 226
A roll* which is disclosed as driven so as to impart motion to the material whereby the
material is moved to an operation.
FEED­ROLLER ­ For class 400
A rotatable element having a cylindrical or cylindroidal periphery that contacts a surface of
a sheet or web of record­medium* material or transfer­medium* material and enables or
causes movement of the sheet or web. Usually a feed­roller cooperates with a second
element and the sheet or web lies between the feed­roller and the second element, the
opposite surfaces of the sheet or web being closely adjacent to the corresponding surfaces
of the feed­roller and the second element and in nonsliding contact therewith. When the
second element is a platen* the feed­roller serves as a ​
gpressure roller​
h to urge the sheet
or web toward the platen, and the platen is rotated to cause feed movement of the sheet
or web. When the second element is another feed­roller either or both of the feed­rollers
may be driven for rotation, the rollers being rotated in opposite rotational directions to
cause feed movement, and the two feed­rollers cooperate to form a feed­roller couple.
FEMALE MOLD ­ For class 425
A receptacle having structure for imparting a desired configuration to a removable product
formed therein from stock material.
FERMENT ­ For class 426
Any enzyme or any living organism that is capable of causing or modifying a fermentation.
FERMENTATE ­ For class 424
Denotes the final chemical compound, or compounds, that are produced by a fermentation
process and includes compounds which are of known as well as unknown structure.
FERMENTATION ­ For class 435
The use of a microorganism or enzyme to carry a molecular transformation.
FERMI­DIRAC STATISTICS ­ For class 977
Statistical distribution of fermionic particles, such as electrons between energy states, etc.
FERRIMAGNETISM ­ For class 428
Ferrimagnetic materials exhibit exchange interaction between neighboring atoms leading to
adjacent moments; however, the magnetic moments are unequal and opposite in direction.
The magnetic properties of ferrimagnetic materials are strongly temperature dependent
and are characterized by their Curie temperature. Examples of ferrimagnetic materials are
rare earth­transition metal amorphous alloys, such as GdFeCo, TbFeCo, and select granular
transition­metal alloys.
FERRITE SPINELS ­ For class 117
MFe2O4, where M = divalent metal (or mixtures thereof) and having the cubic lattice
structure.
FERROMAGNETISM ­ For class 428
Ferromagnetic materials exhibit exchange interaction between neighboring atoms leading
to adjacent moments. Ferromagnetism is temperature dependent and field strength
dependent. Typical ferromagnetic materials include transition metals such as Fe, Ni, and
Co and their alloys.
FERTILE MATERIAL ­ For class 376
An element (isotope) capable of being readily transformed or converted into a fissionable
substance by capture of a neutron, examples include, U238 and Th232.
FET ­ For class 117
Field Effect Transistor.
FET ­ For class 257
Acronym for field effect transistor.
FET ­ For class 438
field effect transistor
FIB ­ For class 438
focused ion beam
FIBER ­ For class 065
See Subclass References to the Current Class, above, for a subclass reference to the term
gfiber.​
​
h
FIBER ­ For class 112
A relatively short, slender, flexible element of macroscopic size and finite length and
having a width and thickness of the same order magnitude. A fiber is generally of staple
length to facilitate being spun, twisted, or otherwise secured together into a composite
strand but may be of shorter length requiring bonding, felting, or matting to form a strand
or layer. It may be of animal (e.g., wool, rabbit hair); vegetable (e.g., cotton, jute,
hemp); or mineral (e.g., asbestos, glass, metal) origin; and may be either natural,
modified, or synthetic.
FIBER ­ For class 264
A discrete particle, generally bulk or mass handled because of its small size, wherein the
particle has a length considerably greater than its breadth or cross­sectional diameter.
FIBER ­ For class 428
A relatively short, slender, flexible element of macroscopic size and finite length and
having a width and thickness of the same order of magnitude. A fiber is generally of staple
length to facilitate its being spun, twisted or otherwise secured together into a composite
strand but may be of shorter length requiring bonding, felting or matting to form a strand
or layer. It may be of animal (e.g., wool, rabbit hair), vegetable (e.g., cotton, jute,
hemp), or mineral (e.g., asbestos, glass, metal) origin and may be either natural,
modified or synthetic. See also Filament. (Structural)
FIBER ­ For class 451
A relatively short, slender, flexible element of macroscopic size and finite length and
having a width and thickness of the same order of magnitude. A fiber is generally of staple
length to facilitate its being spun, twisted, or otherwise secured together into a composite
strand but may be shorter length requiring bonding, felting, or matting to form a strand or
layer. It may be of animal (e.g., wool, rabbit hair), vegetable (e.g., cotton, jute, hemp),
or mineral (e.g., asbestos, glass, metal) origin and may be either natural, modified, or
synthetic.
FIBER ­ For class 501
A slender, elongated structure of relatively small, uniform diameter having a much greater
length, which may have a relatively short finite length or an indeterminate length.
FIBER (OPTICAL CABLE) ­ For class 725
Fiber: any filament or fiber, made of dielectric materials, that guides light, whether or not
it is used to transmit signals. Optical cable: a fiber, multiple fibers, or fiber bundle in a
structure fabricated to meet optical, mechanical, and environmental specifications which is
used for the transmission of signals.
FIDUCIAL ­ For class 356
A reference direction formed as by a light ray, level, compass, or scale from which
another direction is measured or compared.
FIELD EFFECT TRANSISTOR ­ For class 257
A unipolar transistor in which current carriers are injected at a source terminal and pass to
a drain terminal through a channel of semiconductor material whose conductivity depends
largely on an electric field applied to the semiconductor from a control electrode. There
are two main types of FET, a junction FET and an insulated­gate FET. In the junction FET,
the gate is isolated from the channel by a pn junction. In an insulated­gate FET, the gate is
isolated from the channel by an insulating layer, so that the gate and channel form a
capacitor with the insulating layer as the capacitor dielectric.
FIELD EFFECT TRANSISTOR (FET) ­ For class 438
A unipolar transistor in which current carriers are injected at a source terminal and pass to
a drain terminal through a channel of semiconductor material whose conductivity depends
largely on an electric field applied to the semiconductor from a control electrode. There
are two main types of FETs, a junction FET and an insulated­gate FET. In the junction FET,
the gate is isolated from the channel by a pn­junction. In an insulated­gate FET, the gate is
isolated from the channel by an insulating layer so that the gate and channel form a
capacitor with the insulating layer as the capacitor dielectric.
FIELD OXIDE ­ For class 257
A thin (on a macroscopic scale) film made up of an oxide of a material which overlies a
device substrate to reduce parasitic capacitive coupling between conductors overlying the
oxide and the substrate or devices below the oxide layer (e.g., in the substrate).
FIELD OXIDE ­ For class 438
A thin (on a macroscopic scale) film made of an oxide of a material which overlies a
device substrate to reduce parasitic capacitive coupling between conductors overlying the
oxide and the substrate or devices below the oxide layer (e.g., in the substrate). See
bird"s beak.
FIELD WINDING ­ For class 388
A coil of insulated wire which produces a magnetic field in the space occupied by the
motor armature.
FILAMENT ­ For class 065
See Subclass References to the Current Class, above, for a subclass reference to the term
gfilament.​
​
h
FILAMENT ­ For class 313
A wire, ribbon or rod conducting member. It may be made of metal or nonmetal. In this
class filaments, per se, are classified in subclasses 341+ irrespective of whether the
filament is to be used in a lamp or discharge device, and irrespective of whether the
filament is to be heated by passing a current through the filament (directly heated
cathode) or is to be heated by the discharge in a discharge device (see thermionic
cathode).
FILAMENT ­ For class 330
A wire, ribbon, or rod conductive member.
FILAMENT ­ For class 373
A slender thread of material.
FILAMENT ­ For class 428
A fine threadlike body or structure whose width and thickness are of the same order of
magnitude. See also fiber. (Structural)
FILE ­ For class 707
A named collection of data.
FILE ­ For class 715
A block of stored INFORMATION*.
FILLER ­ For class 228
A metallic material to be applied to the work in order to join meeting face* together and
become an integral part of the product*.
FILLING ­ For class 053
The step of placing a contents within a cover. It is not necessary that the contents occupy
the entire space encased; i.e., the cover may be only partially filled by a filling operation.
FILLING HEAD ­ For class 141
The portion of a dispenser or source part of the system which comprises the flow outlet or
flow confining terminus and other flow confining structure which may be in advance (up­
stream) of it back to the supply.
FILM STRIP ­ For class 353
An indeterminate length of film having a plurality of images thereon.
FILM STRIP ­ For class 355
An indeterminate length of film having either a plurality of images thereon or enough
space for a plurality of images.
FILTER ­ For class 095
An article or mass of material made of closely spaced or intimately arranged intermeshed
or unconnected fibers, elements, strands, or particles that collectively act as a barrier to
physically retain at least one constituent of a fluid mixture on its surfaces or in the spaces
between the fibers, elements, strands, or particles while permitting passage of the
remaining constituents. A filter has no ​
gchemical​
h affinity for a constituent of a fluid
mixture. The retention of the constituent by the filter depends upon a mechanical
entrapment of solid or liquid particles because of their relatively large size compared with
the interstices or spaces between individual fibers, elements, strands, or particles. The
retained particles can be removed by brushing, wiping, shaking, or similar mechanical
action.
FILTER ­ For class 096
An article or mass of material made of closely spaced or intimately arranged intermeshed
or unconnected fibers, elements, strands, or particles that collectively act as a barrier to
physically retain at least one constituent of a fluid mixture on its surfaces or in the spaces
between the fibers, elements, strands, or particles while permitting passage of the
remaining constituents. A filter has no ​
gchemical​
h affinity for a constituent of a fluid
mixture. The retention of the constituent by the filter depends upon a mechanical
entrapment of solid or liquid particles because of their relatively large size compared with
the interstices or spaces between individual fibers, elements, strands, or particles. The
retained particles can be removed by brushing, wiping, shaking, or similar mechanical
action.
FILTER ­ For class 210
Method of and apparatus for removing solid particles from a liquid by passing the same
through a medium with openings smaller than the particles. Microfiltration is filtration
down to coolidal and polymeric molecular size. Ultrafiltration and hyperfiltration are more
likely transport or diffusion across a membrane process but are called filtration down to
molecular and ionic size. See subclasses 650 and 652.
FILTER ­ For class 330
A frequency selective means.
FILTER ­ For class 362
A type of transparent or translucent selected wavelength modifier which absorbs light of at
least one wavelength (i.e., color) and transmits light of another wavelength.
FILTER ELEMENT ­ For class 210
Filter medium combined with supporting structure or having a specified shape.
FILTER MEDIUM ­ For class 210
Solid separating material or member for separating a constituent from the prefilt due to
openings between material particles or in the member.
FILTRATE ­ For class 210
Liquid which has been clarified by passing it through a filter medium.
FILTRATION ­ For class 210
The separation of solids from a liquid or a liquid from liquids by a solid separating medium
due to openings in the medium or between discrete particles.
FINAL CONTROL DEVICE ­ For class 323
That element or group of elements which ultimately produces the controlled output of a
system. This excludes any condition sensors or control signal processing circuitry.
FINING ­ For class 065
See Subclass References to the Current Class, above, for a subclass reference to the term
gfining.​
​
h
FINISHING ­ For class 404
Treatment or working of material to either (1) modify the internal orientation of
constituents of a mass of material (usually a mixture of road aggregate) or (2) provide a
desired surface characteristic for such massed material. The terms ​
gfinishing​
h has been
loosely used in patent literature to cover many different processes and devices so long as
the desired result is achieved. For this reason the term has not been used in subclass
titles.
FIPOS ­ For class 438
full isolation by porous oxidized silicon
FIRE TUBES ­ For class 122
Include both small and large tubes through which the products of combustion pass unless
the term ​
gflue​
h is used with them, in which case ​
gfire tubes​
h would refer to the small
tubes, and ​
gflues​
h to the large tubes for the products of combustion.
FIRE­POLISHING ­ For class 065
Heating of the outer surface of hard glass to a temperature where that surface only melts
and surface tension causes smoothing thereof, the heating usually being by fire or flame
contact of the glass surface.
FISSILE MATERIAL ­ For class 376
See Fissionable Material.
FISSION ­ For class 376
The splitting of a heavy nucleus into two (or, very rarely, more) fragments (fission
products) of more or less equal mass accompanied by the emission of neutrons and the
release of energy. It can be spontaneous or it can be caused by the impact or a neutron, a
fast charged particle or a photon. See Fissionable Material. Cf. Spallation.
FISSIONABLE MATERIAL ­ For class 376
Any element or isotope the nucleus of which can be caused by nuclear bombardment to
undergo nuclear fission and to produce a fission chain reaction U233, U235, and Pu239, are
examples. Unless a patent refers to a distinction, ​
gfissionable​
h and ​
gfissile​
h are
considered synonymous for the purpose of this class.
FLACCID ­ For class 403
Structure, which when subjected to a distortion force less than or equal to earth"s
gravitational force, is incapable (in at least one of its orientations) of maintaining its
previous formational shape or being self supporting over any appreciable dimension.
FLACCID­ For class 024
Structure which, when subjected to a distortion force less than or equal to earth"s
gravitational force, is incapable (in at least one of its orientations) of maintaining its
previous formational shape or being self­supporting over any appreciable dimension.
FLAIL ­ For class 460
An implement consisting of a free­swinging stick tied to the end of another stick or a
plurality of swinging knives or blades which are mounted on a rotating shaft, used to
thresh grains.
FLAKE ­ For class 428
A small thin mass having a width or length greater than its thickness. The term flake is
considered to denote structure and is classified accordingly. (Structural)
FLAME HOLDER ­ For class 431
Generic term for the part of a combustion device confining the flame or supporting the
base of a flame. It includes burner heads, the flame supporting portion of wicks, the pots
of pot type burners, etc.
FLARE ­ For class 425
Reshaping a tubular portion by spreading a portion outwardly.
FLASH ­ For class 164
A thin film of metal formed on a casting where the metal has flowed between mating parts
of the mold.
FLASH BACK ­ For class 431
The spread of flame from a combustion area into a feed passage of a burner head.
FLASH DEVICE ­ For class 396
A flash device is a means to produce one or more bursts of light to provide scene
illumination for exposure.
FLASH VAPORIZATION ­ For class 203
The process in which the distilland is heated under pressure high enough to prevent
ebullition (usually above atmospheric pressure) and the heated distilland is then introduced
into a zone of lesser pressure resulting in the volatilization of at least a position of the
distilland.
FLASHING ­ For class 052
Thin sheet of material covering or extending into a joint to deflect liquid from the joint.
FLASHING ­ For class 065
Applying a thin layer of opaque or colored glass to the surface of clear glass, or vice
versa.
FLASK ­ For class 164
A box, usually of metal or wood, used to hold sand in which a mold is formed.
FLAT PACK ­ For class 257
An integrated circuit package with leads extending from it in the same plane as that of the
package. It has a low profile.
FLEXIBLE TRACK ­ For class 305
An annular band made either of a single piece of flexible material or of a plurality of
individual treads or sections movably connected together.
FLINT ­ For class 431
A body of material that produces igniting sparks when struck. It is generally made of an
alloy of iron and cerium.
FLIP­CHIP ­ For class 257
A term which describes the situation wherein a semiconductor device which has all
terminations on one side thereof in the form of bump contacts, has a passivated surface
and has been flipped over and attached to a matching substrate.
FLIP­CHIP ­ For class 438
A term which describes the situation wherein a semiconductor device which has all
terminations on one side thereof in the form of bump contacts, has a passivated surface,
and has been flipped over and attached to a matching substrate.
FLOATERS ­ For class 065
Refractory blocks floating on molten glass in a tank furnace to prevent gall or scum from
entering the working end.
FLOATING DIFFUSION ­ For class 257
A region of a semiconductor device in which impurity atoms have been doped and which is
electrically floating, that is, has no direct electrical connection.
FLOATING DIFFUSION ­ For class 438
A region of a semiconductor device in which impurity atoms have been doped and which is
electrically floating, that is, has no direct electrical connection.
FLOATING GATE ­ For class 257
A gate electrode that is electrically floating, that is, has no direct electrical connection.
FLOATING GATE ­ For class 438
A gate electrode that is electrically floating, that is, has no direct electrical connection.
FLOC ­ For class 210
Flocculated clumps of suspended or dispersed small particles resulting from accretion and
used as sites for further accretion of suspended matter. See subclass 715.
FLOCCULATE; FLOCCULATING AGENT​
f FLOCCULANT ­ For class 516
Flocculate is the aggregation or combination of suspended colloid­sized particles to form
small clumps or short clusters of elongated strands. Flocculating agent* is the effective
material*, energy, or means used for accomplishing the act of flocculating an colloid
system, such as agent* compositions specialized and designed for or peculiar to use in
flocculation. Typical flocculating agents*: alum, ferric chloride, lime and polyelectrolytic
polymer such as polyacrylamide. See coagulate*.
FLOCCULATION ­ For class 210
A clumping together of finely divided particles of material dispersed in a liquid to a state
where filtration or settling of the material is possible. See subclasses 702+.
FLOTATION ­ For class 423
A process for the concentration of selective separation of components of ores by grinding
the ores with a frothing agent, floating them on water and agitating the mixture with
compressed air, causing the wet gangue (earthy portion of the ore) to settle and
permitting the concentrated ore to be skimmed off.
FLOTOX ­ For class 438
floating gate tunnel oxide
FLOW LINE: ­ For class 166
A tubular member adapted to transmit well fluid* away from the well.
FLOW REGULATOR ­ For class 239
Means for altering or adjusting the quantity of effluent.
FLOW­REGULATOR ­ For class 401
Means (e.g., valve), including a part which is movable, to open, close, or restrict a
passage for coating material or for gas, and thus to control movement of coating material
in the implement. A removable closure, however, will not be considered to be a flow­
regulator.
FLUENT MATERIAL ­ For class 249
Fluent material is (1) any material, which at the normal temperature range of an
apparatus, lacks ability to retain a shape but instead readily conforms in shape to the
configuration of a surface upon or within which it is placed or (2) any material which is
handled as a mass of no predetermined shape and in the normal operation of a shaping
device takes a form which in no way corresponds in general structure or dimensions to
that of the original mass.
FLUENT MATERIAL ­ For class 250
A liquid, gas or mass of granular solid material that does not of itself maintain its own
spatial form but flows. Whether or not a granular material should be considered fluent or
not is determined in each case by how it is handled. Generally if the handling means has
walls to hold up the material, the material is fluent. Thus, for example, coal is necessarily
fluent in a pail or bin but not necessarily fluent in a pile.
FLUENT MATERIAL ­ For class 425
A material which lacks ability to retain a shape at working temperatures, but instead
readily conforms in shape to the configuration of a surface upon or within which it is
placed.
FLUID ­ For class 166
A material capable of flowing. A naturally occurring fluid in the earth. It includes gases,
liquids, plastics, and solids which can be handled in the manner of a liquid.
FLUID ­ For class 210
Material that flows, generally gas or liquid but sometimes including mixtures of these with
particulate solids such as slurry, sludge, gels, etc. Some materials are thixatropic, i.e.,
fluid when agitated but jellylike when at rest. Pumpable sludge is considered a liquid for
treatment in this class.
FLUID ­ For class 239
Includes any material which is handled like a fluid (i.e., may be caused to flow) and meets
the definition of those materials accepted by this class in the class definition.
FLUID ­ For class 347
The flowable substance which is projected from the ejector* mechanism or which is used
to enhance the transport or generation of charged particles.
FLUID CONVEYOR INLET ­ For class 406
The point at which the load is first guided or supported and is acted upon by the fluid
current. The inlet must also be subsequent to any structure (e.g., terminal, receptacle) for
statically supporting the load at the entrance to the conveyor.
FLUID CONVEYOR OUTLET ­ For class 406
The point at which the load is either no longer guided or supported, or is no longer acted
upon by the fluid current. The outlet must also be prior to any structure (e.g., terminal,
receptacle) for statically supporting the load at the exit from the conveyor.
FLUID CURRENT CONVEYOR ­ For class 406
Structure which guides or supports the load from the fluid conveyor inlet* to the fluid
conveyor outlet* and wherein the fluid current acts upon the load from the inlet* to the
outlet*.
FLUID MIXTURE ­ For class 095
The phrase ​
gfluid mixture​
h is used throughout the definitions to mean (a) a gas and solid
or liquid particles entrained therein, (b) a liquid and gas entrained therein, or (c) a
plurality of gases.
FLUID MIXTURE ­ For class 096
The phrase ​
gfluid mixture​
h is used throughout the definitions to mean (a) a gas and solid
or liquid particles entrained therein, (b) a liquid and gas entrained therein, or (c) a
plurality of gases.
FLUID(S) ­ For class 277
A liquid, gas, or particulate matter (e.g., dust, etc.) suspended in a liquid or gas.
FLUIDIZED BED ­ For class 075
A bed of solid particles with gas flowing upward through the particles with sufficient
velocity to keep the particles suspended and in motion in the gas without blowing them
bodily out of the top of the bed. The suspended particles act much like a fluid.
FLUIDIZED BED ­ For class 423
A mass of solid particles maintained in a state of constant turbulent motion in a gas
stream, resulting in a suspension of finely divided particles in a stream of gas thus
increasing the surface area and therefor surface activity of the particles.
FLUIDIZED BED (FISSION) REACTOR ­ For class 376
A reactor in which the fuel in the form of particles is maintained in a fluidized state by a
fluid medium. (The fuel and the fluid are general moving in opposite directions). See
subclass 355. (Includes also support of fuel in pellet form in a liquid bath by an upwardly
flowing liquid).
FLUORESCENT OR PHOSPHORESCENT MATERIAL ­ For class 313
A material which absorbs radiant energy of one wave length (e.g., light) and is excited
thereby to cause it to emit radiant energy of another wave length (e.g., light of another
wave length), or a material which is excitable by the impact of electrons, ions, or
analogous energy (e.g., gamma rays) thereon to emit light energy without becoming
incandescent.
FLUOROUS SYNTHESIS ­ For class 506
Approach for solution­phase synthesis which takes advantage of the ability of highly
fluorinated groups to partition out of aqueous and most organic solutions into a third phase
comprising a fluorinated solvent. The fluorinated side chain can act as a soluble support
for synthesis.
FLUX ­ For class 164
(1) A substance that, by chemical action, promotes fusion of a solid material. (2) A
material capable of forming with gangue or other earthy matter, a liquid melt having the
fusibility and chemical characteristics suitable to a specific furnace process. Also,
protective flux to retard undesirable reactions.
FLUX ­ For class 228
A nonmetallic material to be applied to the work in order to: (1) shield the work from
atmospheric oxygen or other harmful gases, (2) chemically remove oxides or other films,
or (3) otherwise augment bonding.
FLYING ­ For class 083
Moving with the work material. The term ​
gflying​
h means that the part so described has, at
the time of cutting, a motion component in the direction of the work as it moves to and
through the cutting station.
FLYING TOOL ­ For class 072
A tool*, other than a roller, having a tool face which, as disclosed, engages and acts upon
bodily moving work while itself moving substantially in the same direction and at the same
speed as such work.
FOAM ­ For class 516
A colloid system characterized as a gas suspended in a liquid; wherein the gas is the
dispersand* (discontinuous) phase and the liquid is the dispersant* (continuous) phase.
FOCUSING ­ For class 396
Focusing is the act of obtaining a sharp image of a subject by adjusting a lens system.
FOG ­ For class 516
A colloid system characterized as a suspension of colloid­sized liquid droplets in a gas;
wherein the liquid is the dispersand* (discontinuous) phase and the gas is the dispersant*
(continuous) phase. See aerosol*.
FOLLOWER ­ For class 401
A member movable in a guide# and adapted to contact a piece of solid coating material
therein to advance it to and through the opening in response to an applied force.
FONT ­ For class 400
A complete assortment of type in the same style and size to imprint character* symbols
having a substantially uniform appearance. Examples of font include elite and pica (both
refer to size of type), italic (i.e., having slope to the right), and cursive (i.e., having
flowing lines connecting individual characters in a style resembling handwriting), these
being only a few of the fonts used in various typewriters.
FOOD ­ For class 099
A man­made or naturally­occurring discrete article consumable by animals or humans for
nourishment.
FOOTPRINT ­ For class 257
Also called a land pattern. It is a combination of lands used to mount a surface mount
component. Metal pads on a substrate surface are arranged in the same pattern as the
leads or pads on the component itself.
FORBIDDEN ENERGY BAND ­ For class 438
The energy band of a material which is located between a solid material"s conduction and
valence bands. It is defined by the amount of energy that is needed to release an electron
from its valence band to its conduction band. Electrons cannot exist in this gap. They are
either below it, and bound to an atom, or above it, and able to move freely.
FORBIDDEN ENERGY BAND/REGION/GAP ­ For class 257
The energy band of a material which is located between a solid material"s conduction and
valence bands. It is defined by the amount of energy that is needed to release an electron
from its valence band to its conduction band. Electrons cannot exist in this gap. They are
either below it, and bound to an atom, or above it, and able to move freely.
FORCE: ­ For class 073
The strength or energy exerted upon or brought to bear or the cause of motion or change
in motion or a state of rest.
FORCE: ­ For class 073
The strength or energy exerted upon or brought to bear or the cause of motion or change
in motion or a state of rest.
FORMAT ­ For class 348
The particular method for combining the time variable video signal with a synchronizing
signal to allow reconstruction of an image from the originating video signal.
FORWARD BIAS ­ For class 257
An external voltage applied in the conducting direction of a pn junction. A positive potential
is connected to the p­type material and a negative potential to the n­type semiconductor
material.
FORWARD BREAKOVER POTENTIAL ­ For class 257
The value of positive terminal voltage at which a regenerative device (e.g., a silicon
controlled rectifier), with its gate circuit open, becomes conductive.
FORWARD CURRENT ­ For class 257
The current which flows across a semiconductor junction when a forward bias is applied
across the junction.
FOULING ­ For class 210
The act of depositing on the membrane surface something which will impede its proper
functioning. Sometimes also termed ​
gblinding​
h.
FOUR­LAYER DIODE ­ For class 257
A semiconductor diode with three junctions and only two terminals connected to the outer
layers forming the junctions. This includes two terminal pnpn thyristors.
FOUR­PHASE CCD ­ For class 257
A charge coupled device having four electrode sets and four gate voltages.
FOUR­SIDE LEAD LAYOUT ­ For class 257
The situation wherein there are leads through all four sides of an integrated circuit
package.
FOX ­ For class 438
field oxide
FPD ­ For class 438
field programmable device
FPGA ­ For class 438
field programmable gate array
FRACTIONAL DISTILLATION ­ For class 202
A separatory distillation operation in which distillate is collected over specific temperature
intervals.
FRACTIONAL DISTILLATION ­ For class 203
A separatory distillation operation in which distillate is collected over specific temperature
intervals.
FRACTIONATION ­ For class 208
The separation of one portion of the hydrocarbons of a mineral oil from another,
regardless of the steps employed for affecting such separation. The separated fractions
usually differ from each other in some chemical or physical property as for instance in
boiling range (in the case of distillation) or solubility in a solvent (as in extraction).
FRAME ­ For class 351
Mechanical parts, not including lenses, which serve to surround or support or which serve
to interconnect elements of the frame.
FRAME ­ For class 352
The space or area on a motion picture carrier normally occupied by one picture of a
motion picture series.
FRAME ­ For class 396
A frame is the space or area on a photographic medium normally occupied by one picture.
FRAME TRANSFER CCD ­ For class 257
A charge coupled device area imager array with a separate image area, storage area, and
read­out register area, the storage area being located between the image area and the
readout area. This is distinguished from an interline­transfer CCD in which the sensing and
storage/readout function areas are located next to each other.
FRAME TRANSFER CCD ­ For class 438
A charge coupled device area imager array with a separate image area, storage area, and
read­out register area, the storage area being located between the image area and the
readout area. This is distinguished from an interline­ transfer CCD in which the sensing
and storage/readout function areas are located next to each other.
FREE ELECTRON ­ For class 257
An electron not bound to a particular atom, but free to circulate among the atoms of a
solid material.
FREE EDGE­ For class 412
The edge or edges of the bound book() which are not involved with the fastening together
of the sheets(*), etc., into the book(*). The free edge is opposite the back(*) e.g., where
the binding, stitching(*), sewing, etc. is located; the other edges are known as the head,
i.e., the top edge and foot or bottom edge also known as the tail.
FREE RUNNING OSCILLATOR ­ For class 331
An oscillator wherein the driving system continuously supplies the losses of the frequency
determining means so as to produce sustained oscillations.
FREE SPACE ­ For class 342
Space where the movement of energy in any direction is substantially unimpeded, such as
the atmosphere, the ocean or the earth.
FREE SPACE ­ For class 343
Space where the movement of energy in any direction is substantially unimpeded, such as
interplanetary space, the atmosphere, the ocean and other large bodies of water or the
earth.
FREQUENCY ­ For class 334
The number of complete alternations or cycles made by an alternating signal per unit of
time. The frequency unit most used is cycles per second.
FREQUENCY ADJUSTING MEANS ­ For class 331
Means for setting or controlling the generated frequency of the oscillator by varying a
frequency determining element of the oscillator.
FREQUENCY BAND ­ For class 334
A plurality of different frequency channels which are grouped together into a particular
bunch or group of channels all designated or used for the same purpose. An example of
this is the broadcast band which consists of a plurality of frequency channels whose center
frequencies are separated by a specified amount, each frequency being used for the same
purpose, namely the transmission of speech. A second example of a band of frequencies is
the use of certain channels of frequencies for the transmission of television. Here the
common purpose of the plural channels of frequencies making up the band is the
transmission of a video signal plus an audio signal.
FREQUENCY CONVERSION ­ For class 363
The transformation of electrical energy having a first frequency to electrical energy having
a second frequency.
FREQUENCY DETERMINING ELEMENT ­ For class 331
A passive network or device of the resonant or time constant type, which network or
device forms the element of the oscillator which sets or determines the frequency or
periodicity of the generated oscillations.
FREQUENCY DOMAIN ­ For class 348
A way of looking at the frequency of waveform components.
FREQUENCY RESPONSIVE MEANS ­ For class 330
Circuit means which acts on the signal to affect some frequency component of the signal
differently from any other frequency components of the signal, for example, a tuned
circuit or filter circuit which eliminates a frequency component, or an equalizer which
emphasizes the signal amplitude of some frequency or frequency range of the signal with
respect to others (e.g., tone control). See also, Frequency Selective Means, below.
FREQUENCY RESPONSIVE NETWORK ­ For class 333
As the frequency of the applied energy changes over a band, the impedance of the
network varies as a function of the frequency. Frequency responsive networks and devices
are designed to obtain desired characteristics where a band of frequencies or different
frequencies are involved.
FREQUENCY SELECTIVE MEANS ­ For class 330
Network means composed of some reactive elements which permit the passage of certain
frequency components or a frequency component and block others. See also, Frequency
Responsive Means.
FREQUENCY STABILIZATION ­ For class 331
The correction for, prevention of, or compensation for an undesired drift or change in the
frequency of the generated waves of the oscillator from a desired value.
FRIT ­ For class 501
A glass composition in a powdered or granulated state prepared by fusing the glass and
quenching it in a cold liquid. Frits form an important part of the batches used in
compounding glazes and enamels.
FRONT­ For class 412
The first page or first sheet() of a book(*).
FTIR ­ For class 438
Fourier transform infrared spectroscopy
FUEL ­ For class 060
A single substance or a mixture of substances which react with another substance (called
the oxidizer) to form at least one new substance in which at least a portion of the fuel
forms at least a portion of the more positive (electron donor) portion of the new
substance. e.g. H2 + Cl2​
¨ 2HCl Hydrogen is considered the fuel. CH4 2O2​
¨ CO2 + 2H2O
Methane is the fuel and oxygen in the oxidizer. BE + F2​
¨ BeF2 Beryllium is the fuel and
fluorine in the oxidizer.
FUEL ­ For class 110
A combustible material having good combustible properties such as a relatively low
ignition temperature, a long burning time, and a minimum of impurities which hinder
combustion and used primarily to produce heat.
FUEL CELL ­ For class 320
An electrochemical generator that uses the reaction of oxygen and a hydrocarbon fuel, or
derivative thereof (e.g., hydrogen, etc.), to convert chemical energy into electricity. It is
distinguishable from a voltaic cell because of its use of a hydrocarbon for fuel, and
because it can operate continuously without a voltaic cell"s inherent chemical degradation
of electrodes, as long as fuel and oxygen are available or supplied.
FUEL CELL ­ For class 429
A device used to produce an electrical current wherein one of the reactants is fed to the
cell.
FUEL COMPONENT: ­ For class 149
For the purpose of this class is a material intended for reacting, or to be used in
combination, with an oxidant component and includes such finely divided materials as
metals (including alloys and intermetallic compounds), metalloids, metal­metalloid
compounds, hydrides of metals or metalloids, carbon, sulfur, vegetable material,
carbohydrates, hydrocarbons and nitrogen containing organic compounds generally.
(Certain substances as gels, paraffins, sulfur, etc., need not be finely divided.)
FUEL, FUEL ELEMENT, or FUEL COMPONENT ­ For class 376
See Nuclear Fuel.
FUGITIVE MATERIAL ­ For class 419
A material which is incorporated in the powder admixture which is wholly destroyed or
separated from the other materials in a subsequent step prior to or during the
consolidation or sintering operation.
FUGITIVE TINTING ­ For class 008
Denotes the application of a temporary or easily removable coloration to a material for
identification or like purpose.
FULL­BANK ­ For class 234
An assemblage of elements (e.g., tools or pattern­sensers*), which covers all significant
points of an area to be operated on, usually in one cycle.
FULLERENE ­ For class 977
Any of various cage­like, hollow molecules composed of hexagonal and pentagonal groups
of atoms, and especially those formed from carbon, that constitute the third form of
carbon after diamond and graphite; alternatively, a class of cage­like carbon compounds
composed of fused, pentagonal, or hexagonal sp2 carbon rings.
FULLERIDE ­ For class 977
Fullerene doped with alkali metal.
FULLY IONIZED ­ For class 376
For the purpose of this class, is state in which atoms are entirely stripped of their orbital
electrons for atoms of low mass number, this occurs at kinetic temperatures in the region
of 1 Kev or more. In other words, matter is in a state of complete ionization; it consists of
a gas composed of positively charged nuclei and an equivalent number of negative
electrons with no neutral particles. See also Plasma.
FUME ­ For class 516
Particles of solids or liquids suspended in a gas, e.g., smoke from combustion. Also the
vapors evolved from concentrated sulfuric or nitric acids, or from solvents.
FUMED SILICA ­ For class 516
The colloid­sized form of silica formed by the vapor phase hydrolysis of silanes or
halosilanes in a Hydrogen­oxygen flame. Generally characterized by high purity,
amorphous crystallinity, and colloid­sized particle.
FUNCTION ­ For class 400
In general, an operation performed on or by a typewriter during use of the typewriter for
typing. As used by the typewriter industry, however, the term ​
gfunction​
h is limited to an
operation other than (a) impressing a type­member* against a record­medium* to imprint
a character* (which thereby concurrently effects a character­space*), or (b) effecting a
word­space*. Examples of typewriter operations considered by the industry to be functions
are: backspace, carriage return, case­shift*, tabular stopping, line­space* (i.e., for
record­medium feed), ribbon feed, and similar typewriter movements.
FUNNEL ­ For class 141
A fluid handling device of increasingly restricted capacity in the direction of flow and
having its free end arranged to enter into the inlet of a receiver, being ordinarily designed
to collect an unconfined flow and channel it into a narrower flow path or one which is out
of line with the previous path or flow direction. The material may be retained in the funnel
body by valve means, and the funnel may comprise the only claimed supply means of the
filling system or an intermediate or final receiver, and may be supported by either the
preceding or succeeding flow confining means, or by a means external to the flow system.
FURNACE ­ For class 373
A chamber, enclosure, or other holding means for heating materials therein.
FUROX ­ For class 438
fully recessed oxide isolation
FUSED OR BRIDGED RING SYSTEM ­ For class 514
Denotes a ring system having at least two rings which (a) share with each other two
adjacent ring atoms, or (b) share with each other three or more ring atoms and wherein
each ring having shared atoms is either a heterocyclic ring or a carbocyclic ring.
FUSED OR BRIDGED RING SYSTEM ­ For class 520
Denotes a ring system having at least two rings which (a) share with each other two
adjacent ring atoms, or (b) share with each other three or more ring atoms and wherein
each ring having shared atoms is either a heterocyclic ring or a carbocyclic ring.
FUSION ­ For class 376
For the purpose of this class, is a nuclear reaction in which light nuclei combine to form a
nucleus of a heavier mass number. See also Thermonuclear Fusion Reaction.
FUSION BONDING ­ For class 065
Welding by bringing glass, while molten or softened by heating, into intimate contact with
another part with subsequent cooling to solid phase whereby uniting is effected.
FUZZY LOGIC ­ For class 701
A form of AI in which variables can have degrees of truthfulness or falsehood represented
by a range of values between 1 (true) and 0 (false). The outcome of an operation using
fuzzy logic can be expressed as a probability rather than as a certainty (e.g., inexact
reasoning).
GAGGER ­ For class 164
A piece of metal used to support sand in deep pockets of sand molds.
GAIN ­ For class 257
The ratio of the magnitude of the electrical output of a device to the magnitude of its
electrical input.
GAIN ­ For class 330
The ratio of the amplifier output power, voltage, or current to the amplifier input power,
voltage or current.
GAIN CONTROL ELECTRODE ­ For class 330
An electrode designed, together with the electron tube in which it is incorporated, to
receive a D.C.. control voltage (other than the signal but which is usually derived from the
signal), whereby changes in the control voltage change the gain of the tube.
GALLIUM ARSENIDE ­ For class 257
A semiconducting chemical compound which is often used in active solid­state devices.
GAMMA RAY ­ For class 378
In this class the term "gamma ray" is considered to be synonymous with the term "X­ray".
Gamma rays are usually considered to be produced by some natural phenomenon such as
the decay of an atomic nucleus whereas X­rays are usually considered to be produced by
an electronic tube or other manufactured device.
GANG MOLD ­ For class 425
A single mold having plural shaping compartments in which plural articles are formed by
one operation.
GARNET, SYNTHETIC ­ For class 117
Term applied to crystals having the same complicated cubic structure as mineral garnets
or beryl, but usually without the silicon; e.g., yttrium­iron, Y3Fe5O12. Other variations
include substituting part of the yttrium and/or iron with valence­equivalent metals.
GAS ­ For class 095
Matter of very low density and viscosity, relatively great expansion and contraction with
changes in pressure and temperature, that is readily diffusive, with a tendency to expand
indefinitely, with molecules in free movement. The term ​
ggas​
h includes ​
gvapor​
h (q.v.).
GAS ­ For class 096
Matter of very low density and viscosity, relatively great expansion and contraction, with
changes in pressure and temperature, that is readily diffusive, with a tendency to expand
indefinitely, with molecules in free movement. The term ​
ggas​
h includes ​
gvapor​
h (q.v.).
GAS ­ For class 216
Matter of very low density and viscosity, and relatively great expansion and contraction
with changes in pressure and temperature, that is readily diffusive, with a tendency to
expand indefinitely, with molecules or atoms in free movement. The term gas includes
vapor.
GAS OR VAPOR DISCHARGE DEVICE ­ For class 315
Any type of electric space discharge which, as claimed, depends upon ionization of a gas
or vapor for its operation. Discharge devices which have their discharge electrodes in an
unconfined (non­enclosed) atmosphere as well as those having their discharge electrodes
in a confined (enclosed) atmosphere are included in this definition.
GAS OR VAPOR GENERATING MATERIAL ­ For class 313
Solid or liquid material which is placed within the envelope and generates a gas or vapor
by virtue of a chemical change, by volatilization, or by giving off an absorbed gas or
vapor. It may do this during normal operation or it may be caused to do so by treatment
preliminary to placing the device in operation.
GAS OR VAPOR TUBE ­ For class 330
An electric discharge device which depends, for its operation, at least in part, upon
ionization of a gas or vapor.
GASEOUS FLUID MIXTURE ­ For class 095
The phrase ​
ggaseous fluid mixture​
h is used throughout the definitions to mean (a) a gas
and solid or liquid particles entrained therein or (b) a plurality of gases.
GASEOUS FLUID MIXTURE ­ For class 096
The phrase ​
ggaseous fluid mixture​
h is used throughout the definitions to mean (a) a gas
and solid or liquid particles entrained therein or (b) a plurality of gases.
GASEOUS SPACE DISCHARGE DEVICE ­ For class 331
A space discharge device having at least two electrodes in a gaseous or vapor medium,
conduction between the electrodes taking place by ionization of the medium.
GASEOUS SUSPENSION ­ For class 075
The suspension of solid in gas. This may be in a fluidized bed (q.v.) or in any other system
(such as a conduit) where solids are suspended in a gas.
GATE ­ For class 164
The end of the runner where the molten metal enters the mold.
GATE ­ For class 257
The control electrode or region of a field effect transistor, located between the source and
drain electrodes, and regions thereof.
GATE ­ For class 352
A portion of a motion picture device which positions the motion picture carrier in the plane
of focus of the optical system of the motion picture device.
GATE ­ For class 438
The control electrode or control region that exerts an effect on a semiconductive region
directly associated therewith, such that the conductivity characteristic of the
semiconductor region is altered in a temporary manner, often resulting in an on­off type
switching action. The control electrode or control region of a field effect transistor is
located between the source and drain electrodes, and regions thereof.
GATE ARRAY ­ For class 257
A repeating geometric arrangement of groups of active solid­state devices, each group
being connectable into a logic circuit, in one integrated, monolithic semiconductor chip.
GATE ARRAY ­ For class 438
A repeating geometric arrangement of groups of active solid­state devices, each group
being connectable into a logic circuit, in one integrated, monolithic semiconductor chip.
GATE CHARGE ­ For class 257
The electrical charge on a gate electrode.
GATE CONTROLLED DIODE ­ For class 257
A three terminal semiconductor diode with the ability to be turned on or off by a pulse
applied to its gate electrode.
GATE CONTROLLED DIODE ­ For class 438
A three terminal semiconductor diode with the ability to be turned on or off by a pulse
applied to its gate electrode.
GATE TRIGGER CURRENT ­ For class 257
The amount of current needed to commence gate current flow in a four layer
semiconductor device (e.g., a thyristor).
GATE TRIGGER VOLTAGE ­ For class 257
The amount of voltage needed to begin gate current flow in a four layer semiconductor
device (e.g., a silicon controlled rectifier).
GATHERER ­ For class 065
Means used to remove discrete charges of molten glass from a supply.
GDMS ­ For class 438
glow discharge mass spectroscopy
GEAR TRANSMISSION: ­ For class 477
Mechanism including at least one gearing power path*, said mechanism being capable of
changing the speed ratio* or rotational direction between a mechanical output of an
engine* and a load*.
GEARING POWER PATH: ­ For class 477
Mechanism including relatively rotatable bodies having engaging surfaces or which are
drivingly connected by a belt or chain whereby a rotatable body will impart to or receive
rotary motion or power from another rotary body by rolling contact.
GEL ­ For class 210
A colloidal dispersion of a solid in a liquid with a jellylike texture. Use of a gel in
chromatography is in subclass 635, and separating the constituents of a gel are in subclass
702.
GEL ­ For class 510
Denotes a colloidal solution of liquid in solid having a thick consistency with little or no
tendency to flow.
GEL ­ For class 516
A solid or semisolid colloid system formed of a continuous or semicontinuous solid phase
and a liquid phase (either discontinuous or continuous or mixed), often identified by its
outward gelatinous appearance, and which exhibits properties of a solid such as plasticity,
elasticity, or rigidity. Gels are typically characterized by a physical property of the system,
such as the yield point (defined as the shearing force required to result in the flow of said
gel), which is a measure of the gel strength. A variety of compositions can form gels,
including but not limited to; solubilized polymers, cross­linked polymers, concentrated
surfactant solutions having crystalline­like properties (e.g., liquid crystal phases),
organically modified and unmodified hydrous metal oxides (e.g., silica, silicates, alumina,
iron, etc.), and organically modified and unmodified hydrous mixed metal oxides (e.g.,
clays, bentonites, synthetic aluminosilicates). See Thixotropic*.
GENE THERAPY ­ For class 977
Treatment of a disease or disorder via insertion of a foreign gene into a cell or cells in
order to change the genetic content thereof.
GENERAL PURPOSE DIGITAL COMPUTER ­ For class 706
Digital computer having a single central processing unit, primarily storage, at least one
input device, and a display media.
GENERAL TREATING CLASS ­ For class 426
Class that includes the treatment of an edible, per se.
GENRE ­ For class 725
A category of video composition characterized by a particular style, form, or content.
GEOGRAPHIC ­ For class 725
Belonging to or characteristic of a particular region.
GERMANIUM ­ For class 257
A semiconductor material used in active solid­state devices.
GETTERING ­ For class 117
A process or operation that reduces or removes impurities or defects from a region either
by complete removal (e.g., volatilization) or by transporting them to another region.
GETTERING ­ For class 438
The elimination or reduction of unwanted constituents (i.e., impurities) or defects from a
substrate.
GETTERS ­ For class 313
Materials which, when used in closed containers, reduce the gas or vapor content of the
container. A getter may react with the gas or vapor in the container to form a solid
nonvaporizable material, or to adsorb or absorb the gas or vapor, or may reduce the
amount of the gas or vapor in the container in any other way. The material may be a
getter for one gas or vapor and may not have any effect upon another gas or vapor.
GGG ­ For class 117
Gadolinium Gallium Garnet. Composite oxide compound Gd3Ga5O12. Useful as substrate in
magnetic bubble domain memory and as man­made gemstones.
GILD ­ For class 438
gas immersion laser doping
GLASS ­ For class 065
An inorganic product (a) the constituents of which generally include a ​
gglass former​
h (e.g.,
As2O3, B2O3 GeO2, P2O5, SiO2, V2O5) which has an essential characteristic of creating or
maintaining, singly, or in a mixture, that type of structural disorder characteristic of a
glassy condition, other oxides which approach glass forming properties (e.g., A12O3, BeO,
PbO, Sb2O3 TiO2, ZnO and ZrO2) as well as oxides that are practically devoid of glass
forming tendencies (e.g., BaO, CaO, K2O, Li2O, MgO, Na2O and SrO), however, pure and
modified silica, silicon and slag are also included; (b) formed by fusion and cooled to a
rigid condition generally without crystallization; (c) having no definite melting point
(whereby the mass has the characteristic of passing through a plastic state before
reaching a liquid state when heated); (d) incapable in the solid state of permanent
deformation; and (e) which fractures when subject to deformation tension.
GLASS ­ For class 216
Must have all of the attributes described in 1­5 below: (1) An inorganic product the
constituents of which generally include a glass former (e.g., As2O3, B2O3, GeO2, P2O5,
SiO2, V2O5) which has an essential characteristic of creating or maintaining, singularly, or
in a mixture that type of structural disorder characteristic of a glassy condition, other
oxides which approach glass forming properties (e.g., Al2O3, BeO, PbO, Sb2O3, TiO2, ZnO,
and ZrO2), as well as oxides that are practically devoid of glass forming tendencies (e.g.
BaO, CaO, K2O, Li2O, MgO, Na2O, and SrO). Pure and modified silica, silicon, and slag are
also included. (2) Formed by fusion and cooled to a rigid condition generally without
crystallization. (3) Having no definite melting point, whereby the mass has the
characteristic of passing through a plastic state before reaching a liquid state when heated.
(4) Incapable in the solid state of permanent deformation. (5) Fractures when subject to
deformation tension.
GLASS ­ For class 428
An amorphous, hard, brittle, often transparent material comprising a fused mixture of the
silicates of the alkali and alkaline earth, or heavy metals. Glass is not considered to be
included in the term ​
gmetal compound​
h for purposes of this class, unless specifically
included in a title or definition. (Nonstructural or Composition)
GLASS ­ For class 501
Inorganic compositions which solidify from the molten state without crystallizing, to have
that molecular disorder characteristic of the glass state, which have no definite melting
point, are incapable in the solid state of permanent deformation, which fracture when
subjected to deformation tension and include as components at least one ​
gglass former​
h
material. Note. Typical glass formers are, e.g., oxides of silicon, beryllium, boron,
germanium, phosphorus, vanadium, lead, tin, zinc, zirconium, and titanium, as well as
such nonoxide compounds as GeS, metal fluorides, or iodides, and some metallic
selenides, tellurides, arsenides, and phosphides. These compositions may also include
other oxides devoid of glass forming tendencies, e.g., oxides of alkali metals, alkaline
earth metals, and magnesium. Note. Many ceramic compositions containing primarily slag,
the by product of metal refining and smelting are considered to be glasses. Note. Neither
transparency to light nor the absence of color are necessary for a composition to be
considered as a glass for the purpose of this class. Note. Water glass, clear synthetic resin
compounds, and isinglass are not considered to be glass for the purpose of classification in
Class 501. Note. Organic, noncrystalline solid materials, such as synthetic resins which
may be referred to as organic glasses, are not considered to be glass for the purpose of
classification in Class 501.
GLASS ­ For class 520
An amorphous, hard, brittle, often transparent material comprising a fused mixture of the
silicates of the alkali alkaline earth, or heavy metals.
GLASS TREATING ­ For class 065
Effecting a change in a physical or chemical property of glass, generally involving specific
heating followed by controlled cooling.
GLASS WORKING ­ For class 065
Molding, shaping, severing of uniting of glass while in a plastic state.
GLOW DISCHARGE ­ For class 372
A type of discharge in which a uniform glow is created through the entire volume of a
gaseous active media rather than a channel or spark discharge through a restricted portion
of the active media.
GLOW DISCHARGE ­ For class 373
The phenomenon of electrical conduction in gasses shown by a slight luminosity, without
great hissing, or noise, and without appreciable heating, or volatilization of the electrode,
when the electrostatic pressure exceeds a certain value.
GLOWER ­ For class 313
Any body made of a material which when heated by the passage of an electric current
therethrough emits light rays. The term glower includes filaments and also includes other
bodies which are not of filamentary dimensions such as, rods and bars made of second
class conductors.
GLYCERIDE ­ For class 516
An ester of glycerol and fatty acid(s) in which one or more of the hydroxyl groups of the
glycerol have been replaced by any combination of acid radicals. Mono­glyceride has one
fatty acid ester, di­glyceride two, and triglyceride has three. Naturally occurring fats and
oils are mainly triglycerides of fatty acids, most commonly are palmitic, stearic, and oleic.
GLYCEROL ­ For class 516
1,2,3­propanetriol.
GOB ­ For class 065
A discrete portion of molten glass (a) delivered by a feeder or (b) gathered on a punty or
blow pipe.
GRAETZEL CELL ­ For class 977
Photovoltaic cell that uses nanoscale titanium dioxide and organic dye to obtain electrical
current from incident light.
GRAFT COPOLYMER ­ For class 520
The structure is given, i.e., a long solid polymer backbone (substrate) is attached to a
pendant (nonterminal) polymer or copolymer (superstrate) having at least three reactant
units in length or; The copolymer is so named as a graft providing that the disclosure is
otherwise silent as to the structure or, if structure is likewise recited, it is consistent with
that required in A. above, or the structure can be ascertained from the following limiting
process conditions: (a) the disclosure states there is a reaction between a solid
polymerized unsaturated reactant and an unpolymerized unsaturated reactant in the
presence of a catalyst or; (b) the disclosure does not state whether or not any reaction
has occurred between the solid polymerized unsaturated reactant and the unpolymerized
unsaturated reactant, but relates that a product is obtained which is inseparable by a
variety of physical techniques such as, extraction, precipitation, ion exchange, etc. In the
absence of one or more of these requirements the reaction is considered to produce a
polymeric blend.
GRAFT­TYPE COPOLYMER ­ For class 520
The structure is given, i.e., a long solid polymer backbone (substrate) possessing
nonterminal active sites or functional groups is attached (grafted) through a chemical
reaction of these functional groups or sites to an ethylenic reactant containing one or more
functional groups or active sites. The reaction product may or may not possess
unsaturated pendant groups depending on the mode of chemical reaction. The following
examples will illustrate this point:
The structure can be ascertained when:
There is disclosed a reaction between the solid polymerized unsaturated reactant and the
unpolymerized unsaturated reactant which reaction uses specific art­recognized terms,
e.g., “esterification, acylation, sulfonylation, cyanoethylation, addition to, reaction or
condensation with, halogenation, nitration, sulfonation, alkylation, amination, etc.”.
Examples of these reactions would be:
There is disclosed an interaction between two or more solid polymers through their
respective nonterminal functional groups or through the use of an intermediate reactant or
chemical agent, e.g., causing salt, ester, amide, urea formation. Examples of these
reactions would be (a) Contacting polypropylene and polyethylene with benzoyl peroxide.
(b) Contacting polyvinylamine and polyallylamine with glyoxal. (c) Contacting
chloromethylated polystyrene with polyvinylamine. (d) Contacting polyacrylic acid with
polyvinylamine.
In the absence of one or more of these requirements the reaction is considered to produce
a polymeric blend. See the Glossary for the definition of the terms “specified intermediate
condensation product” (SICP) and “specified polymer­forming intermediates” (SPFI).
GRAIN ­ For class 099
This term is interpreted to include those seeds to which the term is ordinarily applied,
e.g., wheat, oats, cottonseed, corn, coffee beans, barley, etc., and to exclude larger
vegetables such as beets, nuts, potatoes, etc.
GRAIN ­ For class 144
Fibers of wood* that extend along the length of a tree*.
GRAIN ­ For class 460
This term is interpreted to include those seeds to which the term is ordinarily applied,
e.g., wheat, oats, cotton seeds, corn, coffee, bean, barley, etc., and to exclude larger
vegetables such as beets, nuts, potatoes, etc.
GRAIN OR POWDER ­ For class 149
In the armament arts refers to a charge exhibiting certain definite structural
characteristics, but as used in this class the mere reference to ​
ggrain​
h or ​
gpowder​
h
without recitation of definite structure, or with reference merely to nominal shape, will be
construed as being virtually synonymous with the term ​
ggranule​
h and with finely divided
gparticulate​
​
h or ​
gpowdered​
h material.
GRAPHENE ­ For class 977
Two­dimensional sheet form of fullerene.
GRAPHITE ­ For class 428
Inorganic material as is carbon. (Nonstructural or Composition)
GRAPHOEPITAXY ­ For class 438
The growth of a single crystalline layer across the surface of a nonsingle crystalline
substrate by commencing growth at a seeding portion/region thereof.
GRATE ­ For class 460
A separating device to separate the grain from the straw after threshing.
GRAVITY, BY ­ For class 210
A separation process depending on differences in density to separate freely movable
constituents such as cream rising to the top of the milk. Draining or allowing a liquid to
drip from solids held by a screen or grid is not gravity separation.
green acids ­ For class 516
The oil insoluble sulfonic acid products of sulfonation of petroleum*. Also called sludge
acids. C.f. mahogany* acids.
GRID ­ For class 330
Is used in the conventional sense referring to the intended use and structure of the
element in an electronic tube, particularly in a vacuum tube.
GRID ELECTRODE ­ For class 313
An electrode having one or more apertures therein, usually formed of open­work material,
such as wire mesh, perforated sheet material, or of wires or bars as of coiled wire, or
other foraminous structure, and sometimes used as the control electrode in a discharge
device. As pointed out in the definition of ​
gcontrol electrode​
h above, the terms ​
ggrid
electrode​
h and ​
gcontrol electrode​
h are not synonymous in this class.
GRID OR GRID ELECTRODE ­ For class 330
An electrode having one or more apertures therein, usually formed of open­work material
such as wire mesh, etc.., and usually used as the signal or control electrode, or auxiliary
electrode of an electron tube.
GRIN­SCH ­ For class 438
graded index separate confinement heterostructure
GRIPPER ­ For class 226
(n) As used in this class, a movable device comprising a plurality of substantially opposed
surface elements (commonly termed jaws) relatively movable toward and away from a
common line or plane (to engage corresponding opposed areas on material) and hold such
material frictionally to the elements, whereby additional movement imparted to the
elements in a material advancing direction will also be imparted to the material.
GROUND ­ For class 037
This term is applied to the solid surface of the earth or the floor of a body of water,
especially a sea, river, or lake.
GROUP FORMING ­ For class 053
The accumulating or gathering of an associated collection of articles, of the same or of
different characteristics, by means of a plurality of feeding operations, for placement as a
contents in a single cover. An insert sheet or coupon to be packaged with other goods is
considered to be an article of different characteristics from the goods. On the other hand,
an inner cover, or a section of plural section cover is not considered to be a part of the
contents of an outer cover. See ​
gCONTENTS​
h.
GTO ­ For class 438
gate turn­off
GUIDE ­ For class 083
Passive means to direct the movement of something (e.g., work, product, machine part) in
a desired path. (Note: although a guide may be movable for the purpose of adjustment,
yet it accomplishes its directing function by presenting an obstacle to movement in an
undesired direction, rather than by causing the directed thing or part to move with it).
GUIDE ­ For class 401
That part of an implement which defines a path of travel for a piece of solid coating
material to and through an opening in the implement to a use position of the tool* end of
the piece.
GUIDE ROLL ­ For class 474
A device rotatable about an axis and having a belt*­contacting face radially spaced from
the axis of rotation for intended engagement with the belt to aid in directing the belt along
an intended path of travel. A guide roll, as distinguished from a pulley*, is not intended to
provide driving power to, or extract power from, a belt.
GULL­WING ­ For class 257
The name given to lead configurations of some surface mounted devices. Gull wings
extend from the side of a component package and have an L­shaped bend at component
ends, which extend down to the substrate surface and away from the component.
GUM ­ For class 428
See natural oil, gum, rosin or lac below. (Nonstructural or Composition)
GUNN DIODE ­ For class 257
A diode in which electrons under the influence of sufficiently high electric fields are
transferred between energy valleys of different momentum in the conduction band of the
active semiconductor device material or holes under the influence of sufficiently high
electric fields are transferred between energy valleys of different momentum in the
valence band of the active semiconductor device material. A Gunn diode does not normally
have a pn junction and cannot be used as a rectifier.
GUNN DIODE ­ For class 438
A diode in which electrons under the influence of sufficiently high electric fields are
transferred between energy valleys of different momentum in the conduction band of the
active semiconductor device material or holes under the influence of sufficiently high
electric fields are transferred between energy valleys of different momentum in the
valence band of the active semiconductor device material. A Gunn diode does not normally
have a pn junction and cannot be used as a rectifier.
GUNN EFFECT ­ For class 257
An inter valley transfer effect wherein electrons under the influence of sufficiently high
electric fields are transferred between energy valleys of different momentum in the
conduction band of the active semiconductor device material, or holes under the influence
of sufficiently high electric fields are transferred between energy valleys of different
momentum in the valence band of the active semiconductor device material.
GUNN EFFECT ­ For class 438
An intervalley transfer effect wherein electrons under the influence of sufficiently high
electric fields are transferred between energy valleys of different momentum in the
conduction band of the active semiconductor device material, or holes under the influence
of sufficiently high electric fields are transferred between energy valleys of different
momentum in the valence band of the active semiconductor device material.
HALL EFFECT DEVICE ­ For class 257
An active solid­state device in which a current is flowing and is in a magnetic field
perpendicular to the current, and in which a voltage is produced that is perpendicular to
both the current flow direction and the magnetic field direction.
HALL EFFECT DEVICE ­ For class 438
An active solid­state device in which a current is flowing and is in a magnetic field
perpendicular to the current, and in which a voltage is produced that is perpendicular to
both the current flow direction and the magnetic field direction.
HALOGEN­ For class 075
An element of the group Fluorine (F), Chlorine (Cl), Bromine (Br), Iodine (I), and Astatine
(At).
HALOGENATED HYDROCARBON ­ For class 514
Denotes a compound containing only carbon, hydrogen, and halogen, or only carbon and
halogen.
HALOGENATED HYDROCARBON ­ For class 520
Denotes a compound containing only carbon, hydrogen, and halogen, or only carbon and
halogen.
HALOGENS ­ For class 257
F, Cl, Br, I, At.
HALOGENS ­ For class 423
Also known as halogenides, the nonmetallic elements of the seventh group of the periodic
system and consisting of F, C1, Br, I, At.
HALOGENS ­ For class 588
The elements (F, Cl,Br, I, or At).
HAMMER HEAD ­ For class 173
The striking element of an impacting device.
HAND (MANIPULATE) ­ For class 269
The term ​
ghand​
h (or ​
gmanipulate​
h) is used in the sense of ​
gby contact with a living being​
h
and includes hand, foot, head, etc. Specific recital of foot, pedal, etc. is limited to such
recital.
HAND­ACTUATED; HAND­OPERATED() ­ For class 024
The term hand­actuated or hand­operated is used in the sense of like contact with a living
being and solely applies to the use of the hand in operating a fastener (i.e., moving
portions of the fastener relative to each other) of the Class 24 type.
HANDLE ­ For class 081
The generic term for either a handle­member or a handle­lever where no distinction
between the two members is necessary.
HANDLE­LEVER (OR GRIP­LEVER) ­ For class 081
A hand­gripped element connected to a handle­member and to a movable jaw as by pivot,
link or motion­converting means, which hand­gripped element actuates the movable jaw.
HANDLE­MEMBER ­ For class 081
A member which is gripped by the hand of the operator to which member one of the jaws
is fixedly attached at least during the actuation of the jaws.
HAPTEN ­ For class 436
A substance that can react selectively with antibodies of the appropriate specificity but
stimulates the production of these antibodies in an animal only when it is coupled to a
carrier.
HARMFUL CHEMICAL SUBSTANCE ­ For class 588
Harmful chemical substances are chemical waste substances which are too hazardous or
toxic to be discarded in an ordinary municipal landfill.
HARMONIC OR SINE WAVE OSCILLATOR ­ For class 331
A free running oscillator for generating sinusoidal or nearly sinusoidal waves. They usually
utilize a resonator of the lumped LC or the distributed parameter type as the frequency
determining element.
HAZARDOUS WASTE ­ For class 435
Material that when present in the environment produces for man and other living
organisms a dangerous, risky, or perilous environmental situation in so for as the
physiological well being of the organism is concerned (e.g., all caustic chemicals, irritants,
cancer causing agents, and other tumor producing materials).
HAZARDOUS WASTE ­ For class 588
Materials that when present in the environment produce for man and other living
organisms an acute and/or cumulative effect that is a dangerous, risky, or perilous
environmental situation in so far as the physiological well being of the organism is
concerned (e.g., caustic chemicals, irritants, cancer causing agents, and other tumor
producing materials).
HBT ­ For class 438
heterojunction bipolar transistor
HDC ­ For class 438
high dielectric constant
HDI ­ For class 438
high density interconnects
HDMI ­ For class 438
high density multilayer interconnects
HEAD (Marker) ­ For class 347
The section of the marking device which produces the visibly distinguishable or latent
symbol or mark on the medium in accordance with an information signal.
HEAD: ­ For class 123
the portion of a cylinder which closes off one end thereof.
HEADEND ­ For class 725
In broadband networks, the central location that has access to signals traveling in both
inbound and outbound directions. The logical root of the broadband coaxial cable system.
HEADER ­ For class 053
The means to either (1) hold and position, (2) hold and secure, or (3) juxtaposition and
secure a separate closure element during infeed.
HEADER ­ For class 257
A slab­like or flat plug­in base for a package that is designed to be used with a cover or
lid.
HEARTH ­ For class 373
The part of the furnace upon which the charge is placed and melted down, or refined.
HEAT ­ For class 374
Kinetic energy of macroscopically non­observable random modes of motion of atoms and
molecules.
HEAT SINK ­ For class 257
Devices used to absorb or transfer heat away from heat sensitive devices or device
components.
HEATED CATHODE ­ For class 313
Either a directly heated cathode or an indirectly heated cathode.
HEAVY METAL ­ For class 260
Denotes any metal having a specific gravity greater than 4 and, as employed herein,
includes arsenic and antimony.
HEAVY METAL ­ For class 424
Denotes any metal having a specific gravity greater than 4 and as employed herein
includes arsenic and antimony.
HEAVY METAL ­ For class 532
This term denotes any metal having a specific gravity greater than four and includes
arsenic.
HEAVY METAL ­ For class 588
A metal other than the following (light) metals, lithium (Li), sodium (Na), Potassium (K),
Rubidium (Rb), Cesium (Cs), Francium (Fr), Calcium (Ca), Strontium (Sr), Barium (Ba),
Beryllium (Be), Magnesium (Mg), and Aluminum (Al).
HEAVY METAL­ For class 075
A metal other than a light metal (q.v.).
HEAVY METALS ­ For class 257
Metals other than light metals ­ see LIGHT METALS.
HELICAL COIL SPRING ­ For class 267
an element in the form of a serial lying on the surface of a cylinder and which exhibits
resilient characteristics when distorted from its original shape.
HEMT ­ For class 438
high electron mobility transistor (Hetero MESFET)
HERBICIDE ­ For class 504
The term denotes a compound or composition which adversely affects the growth or the
life span of a plant.
HET ­ For class 438
hot electron transistor (bipolar)
HETERO ­ For class 435
Containing only O, N, S, Se, or Te in addition to carbon in a ring.
HETERO ATOM ­ For class 008
The hetero atoms are nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur, selenium, and tellurium.
HETERO RING ­ For class 008
A hetero ring is a ring which contains only carbon and hetero atoms.
HETERO RING ­ For class 514
Denotes the presence of one or more carbon atoms covalently bonded in a closed ring with
at least one atom of oxygen, nitrogen, sulfur, selenium or tellurium and having no other
atoms in the ring.
HETERO RING ­ For class 532
This term denotes a ring having carbon and at least one atom from the group consisting of
nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur, selenium and tellurium as ring members; and contains no other
element as a ring member.
To qualify as a hetero ring, nonionic bonding must exist between all ring members. Inner
salt compounds such as betaines, sulfobetaines, etc., wherein two ring members are
attached to each other by ionic bonding, are not regarded as hetero rings.
HETEROCYCLIC ­ For class 260
Denotes the presence of a ring whose members are composed of at least one carbon and
one or more atoms of the elements taken from the group consisting of nitrogen, oxygen,
sulfur, selenium, and tellurium.
HETEROCYCLIC ­ For class 424
Denotes the presence of one or more carbon atoms covalently bonded in a closed ring with
at least one atom of oxygen, nitrogen, sulfur, selenium or tellurium and having no other
atoms in the ring.
HETEROCYCLIC ­ For class 430
Organic compound containing a ring composed of carbon and at least one element from
the group consisting of nitrogen, sulfur, selenium, tellurium, and oxygen.
HETEROCYCLIC ­ For class 510
Denotes an organic compound wherein one or more carbon atoms are covalently bonded in
a ring system with at least one hetero atom of oxygen, sulfur, nitrogen, selenium, or
tellurium and having no other atoms in the ring.
HETEROCYCLIC ­ For class 520
Denotes an organic compound wherein one or more carbon atoms are covalently bonded in
a ring system with at least one hetero atom of oxygen, sulfur, nitrogen, selenium, or
tellurium and there are no other different atoms in the ring.
HETERODYNE FREQUENCY ­ For class 331
Beat frequency (which see).
HETEROJUNCTION /HETEROINTERFACE ­ For class 257
An interface between two dissimilar semiconductor materials. For example, one material
may by InAs and the other may be InAlAs, or one material may be GaAs and the other
material may be GaAlAs.
HETEROJUNCTION/HETEROINTERFACE ­ For class 438
An interface between two dissimilar semiconductor materials. For example, one material
may by InAs and the other may be InAlAs, or one material may be GaAs and the other
material may be GaAlAs.
HETEROSTRUCTURE ­ For class 257
See HETEROJUNCTION.
Hi­C ­ For class 438
high capacitance
HIC ­ For class 438
hybrid integrated circuit
HIGH ELECTRON (HOLE) MOBILITY TRANSISTOR (HEMT) ­ For class 257
A heterojunction field effect transistor with impurity ions located on the side of the hetero
junction with lower affinity for the charge carriers (holes or electrons) injected at the
source that pass to the drain via a channel adjacent the hetero junction.
HIGH ELECTRON MOBILITY TRANSISTOR (HEMT) ­ For class 438
A heterojunction field effect transistor with impurity ions located on the side of the
heterojunction with lower affinity for the charge carriers (holes or electrons) injected at
the source that pass to the drain via a channel adjacent the heterojunction.
HIGHER FATTY ACID ­ For class 106
Aliphatic monocarboxylic acid containing an unbroken chain of at least seven carbon atoms
bonded to a carboxyl group (e.g., lauric, palmitic, stearic, oleic, ricinoleic, linoleic,
behenolic, etc.). Where there are several unbroken chains of carbon atoms bonded to the ­
C(=O)O­ group, one of the chains must contain at least seven carbon atoms.
HIGHER FATTY ACID ­ For class 106
Aliphatic monocarboxylic acid containing an unbroken chain of at least seven carbon atoms
bonded to a carboxyl group (e.g., lauric, palmitic, stearic, oleic, ricinoleic, linoleic,
behenolic, etc.). Where there are several unbroken chains of carbon atoms bonded to the ­
C(=O)O­ group, one of the chains must contain at least seven carbon atoms.
HIGHER FATTY ACID ­ For class 106
Aliphatic monocarboxylic acid containing an unbroken chain of at least seven carbon atoms
bonded to a carboxyl group (e.g., lauric, palmitic, stearic, oleic, ricinoleic, linoleic,
behenolic, etc.). Where there are several unbroken chains of carbon atoms bonded to the ­
C(=O)O­ group, one of the chains must contain at least seven carbon atoms.
HIGHER FATTY ACID ­ For class 204
A monocarboxylic acid containing an unbroken chain of at least seven carbon atoms
bonded to a carboxyl group, (e.g., stearic acid, etc.).
HIGHER FATTY ACID ­ For class 507
A monocarboxylic acid containing an unbroken chain of at least seven carbon atoms
bonded to a carboxyl group (e.g., lauric, palmitic, stearic, oleic, ricinoleic, linoleic, and
behenolic, etc.). Where there are several unbroken chains of carbon atoms bonded to the
carboxyl group, one of the chains must contain at least seven carbon atoms.
HIGHER FATTY ACID ­ For class 507
Means a monocarboxylic acid containing an unbroken chain of at least 7 carbon atoms
bonded to a carboxyl group, e.g., lauric, palmitic, stearic, oleic, ricinoleic, linoleic, and
behenolic, etc. Where there are several unbroken chains of carbon atoms bonded to the
carboxyl group, one of the chains must contain at least 7 carbon atoms.
HIGHER FATTY ACID ­ For class 510
Denotes a monocarboxylic acid having an acyclic chain of at least seven uninterrupted
carbons attached directly to the carboxyl carbon by covalent bonding.
HIGH­VACUUM TUBE ­ For class 315
A vacuum tube evacuated to such a degree that its electrical characteristics are essentially
unaffected by gaseous ionization.
HIMOS ­ For class 438
(see COMFET)
HINGE AXIS ­ For class 016
Any axis about which a hinged member* rotates during operation of the hinge.
HINGE PIN ­ For class 016
An elongated rodlike element about which a hinged member* swings (e.g., ​
gpintle​
h).
HINGED MEMBER ­ For class 016
Any device or portion thereof (e.g., closure, seat back, etc.) which is adapted to be
swingably connected by a hinge to another device or portion thereof (e.g., frame, box, sill,
etc.).
HIPOX ­ For class 438
high pressure oxidation
HLB ­ For class 516
Hydrophile Lipophile Balance. The most commonly used HLB system was developed by
W.C. Griffin (1949). The system employs certain empirical formulas to calculate the HLB
number between 0 and 20; high numbers correspond to hydrophilic surfactants with high
water solubility and functionally good solubilizing agents*, detergents, and o/w stabilizers;
low numbers correspond to hydrophobic (or lipophilic) surfactants with low water
solubility, which solubilize water into oils and stabilize w/o emulsions.
HMDS ­ For class 438
hexamethyldisilizane
HNA ­ For class 438
hetchant mix of hydrofluoric, nitric, and acetic acids
HOLDER ­ For class 401
That part of an implement which retains a piece of solid coating material, or which retains
a unit consisting of a piece and an expendable sheath, in such a manner as to expose the
tool* end of the piece and to be manipulable therewith as a single entity (e.g., sleeve,
wrapper). The holder and the piece, or the holder and the unit, may be relatively
adjustable manually, but not by advancing means (as defined in subclass 55).
HOLDER MOUNTED FOR MOVEMENT ­ For class 269
A device in which a work holder is structurally related with respect to a member on which
it is supported so that the work holder may be moved to a limited extent or in a definite
path(s) with respect to its supporting member. The entire holder, i.e., the structure which
contacts and thus actually supports the work, must be capable of movement while work is
held. In the case of a work underlying support (as in subclasses 289­314), such underlying
support is considered mounted for movement even though the clamps or fastening means
needed to keep work from sliding off are not claimed.
HOLDER SUPPORT, MOUNT, OR BASE ­ For class 269
A work holder support is the structure for positioning work contacting elements, including
the associated adjusting and/or operating means for said work contacting elements, with
respect to a reference member (table, floor, wall, rack, bench, etc.). Such support
structure may be integral or articulated with a work contacting assembly and is provided
with means for maintaining position of said assembly with respect to the reference
member. The position maintained may be adjustable with respect to a particular reference
member by (a) relative shifting of parts or links constituting the work holder support or by
(b) relative shifting of the articulated joint structure between the work contacting assembly
and the work holder support. The position may also be varied by (c) temporary fastening
means selectively securing the work holder support to different reference members or
different portions of the same reference member. A work holder support means such as
(a) or (b) above is generally disclosed as positionable either (1) preparatory to engaging
work or (2) while the work is being held. Since in many instances the structure for (1) will
serve for (2) and vise versa, no attempt has been made to distinguish classificationwise on
this basis. Both (1) and (2) are treated, unless specifically noted otherwise, as (2) and
provided for under Holder Mounted for Movement*. A work holder support means such as
(c) above is not considered as a Holder Mounted for Movement* and if claimed, per se,
will be found in Class 248, Supports.
HOLDING CURRENT ­ For class 257
The minimum current needed to maintain a generative type active solid­state device (e.g.,
a thyristor) in an ​
gon​
h or conducting condition.
HOLDING ELECTRODES ­ For class 313
See the definition of auxiliary starting electrode above.
HOLE ­ For class 257
An empty energy level in the valence band of a semiconductor crystal which exhibits
properties of a real particle and can act as a mobile positive charge carrier.
HOLE ­ For class 438
An empty energy level in the valence band of a semiconductor crystal which exhibits
properties of a real particle and can act as a mobile positive­charge carrier.
HOLE FLOW ­ For class 257
The current in a semiconductor material due to the movement of holes therein.
HOLLOW WORK ­ For class 072
Material or article of indeterminate length having exterior and interior surfaces extending
in the length dimension; each surface, as viewed in a cross section normal to the length
dimension, showing an unbroken periphery; the interior surface of which is intended to be
treated by a metal­deforming tool of limited length.
HOLOGRAPHY ­ For class 359
The optical recording of an object wave formed by the resulting interference pattern of two
(or more) mutually coherent, component light beams. Generally, a coherent beam is first
split into two component beams, one of which irradiates an object, the second of which
irradiates a recording medium. The diffraction or scattering of the first wave by the object
forms an object wave which proceeds to and interferes with a second coherent beam (i.e.,
reference beam) at the medium. The resulting pattern is a two­dimensional (thin) or
three­dimensional (thick) hologram of the object wave, depending on the thickness of the
recording medium.
HOMOGENEOUS (FISSION) REACTOR ­ For class 376
A reactor in which the fuel and moderator are intimately mixed or dispersed (e.g., the fuel
may be a uranium salt dissolved in heavy water) as a solution or slurry.
HOMOGENEOUS FUEL ­ For class 376
See Homogeneous Fission Reactor.
HOMOGENIZE ­ For class 065
See Subclass References to the Current Class, above, for a subclass reference to the term
ghomogenize.​
​
h
HOMOJUNCTION ­ For class 257
An interface between regions of opposite polarity in the same semiconductor material.
HOMOJUNCTION ­ For class 438
An interface between regions of opposite polarity in the same semiconductor material.
HOMOPOLAR OR UNIFORM­FIELD MOTORS ­ For class 318
A noncommutating motor having a magnetic field producing means combined with one or
more electric conductors mounted to move relative to and in proximity to the field
producing means, the field producing means being so constructed or energized that the
magnetic field produced thereby is, at any instant of time, of the same polarity or
direction throughout its extent with reference to the path of travel of the movable electric
conductor or conductors.
HOPPER ­ For class 221
A container, bin or receptacle for retaining a quantity of articles in a jumbled mass.
HOT CARRIER DIODE ­ For class 257
A diode in which electrons (or holes) have energies greater than those that are in thermal
equilibrium with the material of at least one of the regions forming the diode. Schottky
barrier diodes typically have ​
ghot carriers​
h (hot electrons) injected into the metal from the
semiconductor.
HOT CARRIER DIODE ­ For class 438
A diode in which electrons (or holes) have energies greater than those that are in thermal
equilibrium with the material of at least one of the regions forming the diode. Schottky
barrier diodes typically have ​
ghot carriers​
h (hot electrons) injected into the metal from the
semiconductor.
HOT ELECTRONS ­ For class 257
See HOT CARRIER DIODE.
HOT­TOP ­ For class 164
An insulated portion of a mold that retains metal molten in that area so that it can feed
into the mold and alleviate shrinkage voids.
HPSC ­ For class 438
half­Vccsheath plate capacitor
HTO ­ For class 438
high temperature oxide
HTSC ­ For class 438
high temperature superconductor
HULL or HULLING ­ For class 099
These expressions are treated as being species of skin* disjoining*; however, an exception
is recognized, as follows: Grain­hulling equates a covering of dirt or similar impurities,
with the naturally occurring outer covering of grain*.
HUSK ­ For class 460
The material consisting of the dry outer covering of the ear of corn.
HYBRID CIRCUIT ­ For class 257
A small printed circuit having miniature components, which may include passive
components (resistors, capacitors, and inductors, deposited on a printed circuit board. A
ghybrid circuit​
​
h is NOT an integrated circuit, and is not classifiable in this class.
HYBRID CIRCUIT ­ For class 438
A small printed circuit having miniature components which may include passive
components (resistors, capacitors, and inductors) deposited on a printed circuit board.
HYBRID TYPE NETWORK ­ For class 333
A network for coupling one wave transmission line to two or more wave transmission lines
in such manner that there is a conjugate relation between at least two of these coupled
transmission lines to prevent any interchange of energy between the conjugately related
lines.
HYDROCARBON ­ For class 044
Used in this class, it means an organic compound which consists exclusively of carbon and
hydrogen.
HYDROMETALLURGY ­ For class 075
A somewhat inexact term for processes involving solution in water or other liquid in which
metalliferous material or metal is treated to prepare free metal, to purify, or to refine free
metal, or to prepare intermediate materials more suitable for use in preparing free metal
(e.g., extracting, leaching, beneficiating, etc.).
HYDROPHILIC ­ For class 210
Water attractive or wettable.
HYDROPHOBIC ­ For class 210
Water­repellent or nonwettable.
HYDROSOL ­ For class 516
A colloid system of a dispersand* (discontinuous phase), in an aqueous liquid dispersant*
(continuous phase). Examples are metal oxides such as silica or rare earth oxides
dispersed in an aqueous phase. See sol*.
HYPERFILTRATION ­ For class 210
Filtration to the ultimate degree to molecular or ionic size, but most likely membrane
transport or diffusion phenomenon. See FILTER and subclass 652.
HYPERGOLE ­ For class 060
A substance (fuel or oxidizer) which ignites spontaneously on contact with the other
member of a hypergolic mixture. For example: aniline is hypergolic with nitric acid.
HYPERLINK ­ For class 715
An embedded link including code directing process flow to an alternate or additional
DOCUMENT* or location in a document.
I ntron ­ For class 800
DNA sequences in eukaryotes that lie within genes, but do not code for protein. In most
instances, introns have no apparent function. Their presence "splits" the coding region of
the gene into segments called exons. In the synthesis of messenger RNA, introns are
copied into RNA, but they are removed by splicing, which restores the continuity of the
coding sequence.
I2L ­ For class 438
integrated injection logic
IB ­ For class 438
(a) intrinsic base or (b) ion beam
IBD ­ For class 438
ion beam deposition
IC ­ For class 438
integrated circuit
ICP ­ For class 438
inductively coupled plasma
IDENTIFIED ­ For class 430
A substance, layer, or product is considered identified when it is claimed in terms of its
chemical constitution instead of merely its function. The terms ​
gorganic​
h and ​
ginorganic​
h
are not considered identified, but any other positive chemical identification is considered
sufficient even if generic, e.g., heterocyclic, synthetic resin, hydrocarbon, etc. Negative
definition, per se, e.g., nonaqueous, etc., is not considered identification, but if combined
with sufficient other material, e.g., nonaqueous alcohol. The term acid or base or their
equivalents are considered identification. The identification of any ingredient of a layer is
sufficient to make the layer identified.
IDENTIFIER ­ For class 902
A data bearing record intended to identify either an account or the record"s bearer,
whereby authorization for a transaction* can be obtained.
IDENTIFYING ­ For class 506
Determining the exact nature (e.g., chemical structure or sequence listing, etc.) of a
particular library member or of a particular subset of library members.
IG ­ For class 438
intrinsic gettering
IGBT ­ For class 438
insulated gate bipolar transistor (e.g., COMFET, HIMOS)
IGFET ­ For class 438
insulated gate field effect transistor
IID ­ For class 438
impurity induced disordering
IJP ­ For class 438
ink jet printhead
ILB ­ For class 438
inner lead bonding
ILD ­ For class 438
interlayer dielectric
ILLUMINATING MEANS ­ For class 362
Basic subject matter of the class or subcombinations thereof.
IMAGE ­ For class 353
The optical counterpart of an object produced by a lens or other optical system. In an
image projection system an image of an object is formed on a screen or other viewing
surface. A photographic camera forms an image of an object on a photosensitive film.
After the film is developed, a picture of the original object appears on the film. A picture
of this type is generally employed as the object in image projectors.
IMAGE ­ For class 355
The representation of an object (original or carrier) produced by the transmission or
reflection of light incident upon the original or carrier.
IMAGE ­ For class 399
The representation of an object (e.g.,original, carrier) produced by the transmission or
reflection of light incident upon the original.
IMAGE ­ For class 430
The likeness or reproduction of (a) an object, or (b) an instrumented or discernible
phenomenon.
IMAGE ­ For class 715
See VISUAL IMAGE below.
IMAGE ANALYSIS­ For class 382
For the purpose of this class, image analysis* is defined as a systematic operation or
series of operations performed on data representative of an observed image with the aim
of measuring a characteristic of the image, detecting variations and structure in the
image, or transforming the image in a way that facilitates its interpretation.
IMAGE DATA ­ For class 345
The information provided to form the visual image*.
IMAGE DATA ­ For class 715
DATA* representing a VISUAL IMAGE*.
IMAGE FORMER ­ For class 359
An optical device capable of producing an image from light rays proceeding from an
object.
IMAGE RECORD ­ For class 430
A record, made using an imaging process, where the image is located, e.g., the image
may be in or on a radiation conductor containing element or may be in or on receptor
element, etc.
IMAGE SENSOR ­ For class 348
A generic name for both cathode­ray tube and solid­state imaging devices which converts
an optical image of an object into an electrical signal representative of the object image.
IMAGE, LATENT ­ For class 355
The invisible image produced by the action of light alone or with other electrostatic charge
producing means on, or in, a photoreceptor. A latent image may be made visible by
development.
IMAGE, LATENT ­ For class 399
The invisible image produced by the action of light alone or with other electrostatic
charge­producing means on, or in, a photoreceptor. A latent image may be made visible
by development.
IMAGE­BEARING MEMBER ­ For class 399
A substrate for holding an electrostatic charge pattern or a toner image.
IMAGING ­ For class 399
Forming an image that is a reproduction of an original.
IMAGING ­ For class 430
The application of radiation to form an image.
IMAGING SYSTEM­ For class 382
For the purpose of this class, an imaging system is any means which acquires an image.
For example, it includes video cameras, CCD arrays, scanners, etc.
IMHOFF ­ For class 210
A two­story septic tank of special design to allow digestion of sludge in lower chamber
with settling in upper chamber and passage of settled sludge from upper to lower
chamber. Process is anaerobic and provided for in subclasses 602+.
IMMA ­ For class 438
ion microprobe mass analysis
IMMEDIATE­PRECURSOR ­ For class 117
The precursor immediately next to the growing single­crystal* and from which the single­
crystal* forms or grows. Contrast with precursor*.
IMMOBILIZE ­ For class 588
To contain the hazardous or toxic waste by any means that keeps the hazardous or toxic
waste in a matrix or container such as cement, organoclay, glass, or in an actual physical
container.
IMMUNOADSORBENT ­ For class 436
An insoluble material that is used for the purification of antibodies by adsorbing them from
a serum; a gel for trapping antibodies, or an inert solid to which either antigens or haptens
have been covalently linked are two examples.
IMMUNOASSAY ­ For class 436
An assay that utilizes antigen antibody reactions for the determination of chemical
substances.
IMMUNOELECTROPHORESIS ­ For class 436
A technique for identifying antigens in complex mixtures by first separating the antigens in
one dimension by means of gel electrophoresis, and then allowing them to react with
antibodies by means of two dimensional double diffusion through the gel; a pattern of
precipitin arcs is thereby produced. Abbr IE.
IMMUNOGLOBULIN ­ For class 436
1. A protein of animal origin that has a known antibody activity. 2. A protein that is closely
related to an antibody by its chemical structure and by its antigenic specificity.
IMPACT, MECHANICAL SHOCK, OR VIBRATION­PRODUCING MOTOR ­ For class 318
An electric motor having means for moving one of the motor parts into impact or
percussive contact with one or more other parts of either the motor structure or a part
which is structurally combined with the motor structure, or a motor whose prime or
essential function is to transmit mechanical shock or vibrations to a device or mechanism
secured to the motor or upon which the motor may be mounted, (e.g., rotary motor with
the rotor unbalanced to produce vibrations which are transmitted to its support.
IMPACTING ­ For class 173
A type of drive function which includes striking a mass of material (e.g., tool) with another
mass of material (e.g., hammer head).
IMPACTING DEVICE ­ For class 173
A means including a mass of material (i.e., hammer head) which is specifically intended to
deliver a blow to a tool. The mass of material need not necessarily strike the tool directly,
but may deliver the blow through an intervening element (e.g., anvil).
IMPALING OR SNAGGING ­ For class 171
The act of removing or unearthing an object at least partially imbedded in the ground by
an extractor which penetrates through the surface of the object or which passes through or
around a reentrant or restricted portion of the object to form a temporary connection
between said object and the extractor.
IMPATT ­ For class 438
impact ionization avalanche transist time (diode)
IMPEDANCE ­ For class 323
Includes an inductance, a capacitance, or a resistance or any combination thereof and
excluding any source of electric energy. Inductances are usually grouped with
transformers in the subclasses that follow.
IMPEDANCE ­ For class 363
Includes an inductance, or a capitance, or a resistance, or any combination thereof, and
excludes any source of electrical energy.
IMPEDANCE MATCHING NETWORK ­ For class 330
Coupling networks which include one or more impedance elements construed or
proportioned to substantially eliminate the reflected wave energy between the network and
at least one of the connected circuits caused by impedance differences.
IMPEDANCE MATCHING NETWORK ­ For class 333
Coupling networks which include one or more impedance elements construed or
proportioned to substantially eliminate the reflected wave energy between the network and
at least one of the connected circuits caused by impedance differences.
IMPEDANCE OR IMPEDANCE DEVICE ­ For class 318
A means having inductance, capacity, resistance or any combination thereof and excluding
any source of electric energy.
IMPELLER ­ For class 416
A device comprising at least one working member* which functions to react with a working
fluid* such that action movement of the member causes reaction movement of the fluid or
action movement of the fluid causes reaction movement of the working member. In its
simplest form, a single impeller is considered to comprise a working member or members
and any parts rigidly connected therewith whereby the impeller is supported for
movement. In the case of an impeller having a working member which has relative
movement with respect to another impeller part or another working member, the
definition of impeller is considered to include those mechanical elements which permit or
cause relative motion of the working members and at least partly partake of the motion of
the working member and are closely associated therewith to form a unitary device having
a unitary impelling function. In view of the many embodiments an impeller may have, it is
not possible to more definitely define the concept, but in most cases it will be apparent
which elements forms part of the impeller and which elements, on the other hand,
comprise support* means for the impeller of means for transmitting power to or from the
impeller. In those subclasses in which the precise limits of the impeller, per se, are apt to
be troublesome, an effort is made to define the impeller concept in more detail insofar as
it concerns the concept of the particular subclass.
IMPLEMENT ­ For class 015
Defined in this class as a work contacting cleaning or coating agency subcombination which
as disclosed, could be either (1) manipulated manually as a tool, (2) moved by a machine,
as defined above and constituting a part thereof, or (3) held in place by support means for
direct manual application of the work thereto. (Note: A hand held nozzle is not an
implement as defined above and is classified elsewhere as a machine subcombination).
IMPLEMENT ­ For class 172
A combination of parts comprising an earth working device. It may mean merely an earth
working portion or a complex combination of parts including a tractor. Usually it indicates
a complete device which as an entity may be readily attached to a tractor in the field.
IMPLEMENT ­ For class 249
A work containing agency which as disclosed, could be either (1) manipulated manually as
a utensil, (2) a subcombination of a machine or press couple, or (3) held in place by
support means for direct manual or machine application of work thereto.
IMPRESSION ­ For class 462
A discontinuity in a surface resulting from applying pressure, usually mechanical, against a
surface to mark it such as to produce indicia thereon.
IMPURITY ­ For class 257
A foreign material present in a semiconductor crystal, such as boron or arsenic in silicon,
which is added to the semiconductor to produce either p­type or n­type semiconductor
material, or to otherwise result in material whose electrical characteristics depend on the
impurity dopant atoms.
IMPURITY ­ For class 438
A foreign material present in a semiconductor crystal, such as boron or arsenic in silicon,
which is added to the semiconductor to produce either p­type or n­type semiconductor
material, or to otherwise result in material whose electrical characteristics depend on the
impurity dopant atoms.
IN SILICO LIBRARY ­ For class 506
A library which has no physical existence, being constructed solely in electronic form or on
paper. An in silico library is one type of virtual library. The building blocks required for
such a library may not exist, and the chemical steps for creating such a library may not
have been tested. These libraries are used in the design and evaluation of possible
libraries.
IN SITU ­ For class 249
The utilization of a mold at the job site wherein upon removal of mold parts the product
remains in its permanent location.
IN SITU ­ For class 425
Remaining in the same place.
INACCESSIBLE HOLE ­ For class 175
A hole or cavity in the earth which is not large enough to permit both a human operator
and a boring means to be located therein. A specific disclosure that the hole or cavity is a
well or borehole and that the supporting or carrying means for the boring means
substantially fills said hole or cavity will be considered an inaccessible hole.
INCANDESCENT LAMP ­ For class 313
Lamps which are provided with a filament or glower adapted to be heated to
incandescence by the passage of an electric current therethrough.
INCINERATE ­ For class 588
To burn to highly oxidized ashes. The oxidation is chemically near completion.
INCINERATION ­ For class 110
The combustion of refuse (*) for primary purpose of disposing of that refuse rather than
for producing heat.
INCLUDING HYDROGENATED ­ For class 514
Denotes that a ring system which by definition has ring unsaturation possesses a degree of
saturation which may be different than the ring system definition would normally indicate.
INCLUDING HYDROGENATED ­ For class 532
This term, as a parenthetical expression, is used following the name of a heterocyclic ring
or ring system which is unsaturated, e.g., oxazoles, etc. For example, if a subclass is
entitled ​
g1, 3­Oxazoles (including hydrogenated)​
h, the parenthetical expression ​
g(including
hydrogenated)​
h means that the subclass is generic to fully unsaturated 1,3­oxazoles and to
1,3­oxazoles wherein one or two of the ring double bonds have been replaced by a single
bond; i.e., the subclass is generic to oxazoles, oxazolines and oxazolidines. When the
name of such a heterocyclic ring is used in indents where no degree of ring saturation or
unsaturation is specified, the name of the heterocyclic ring will again be construed as
generic to all possible degrees of ring saturation and unsaturation. If, for example, a
subclass entitled ​
gNitrogen bonded directly to ring carbon of the oxazole ring were
indented under ​
g1, 3­Oxazoles (including hydrogenated​
h the nitrogen subclass be
construed as embracing nitrogen bonded directly to the ring carbon of an oxazole, of an
oxazoline, or of an oxazolidine. When used following the name of a heterocyclic ring
system, such as quinoline, the parenthetical expression indicates that the subclass is
generic to compounds having the fully unsaturated form of the ring system, as well as to
compounds wherein any number of ring double bonds of the ring system have been
replaced by single bonds. The statement made above, re indents, is also applicable to
heterocyclic ring systems.
INCLUSION COMPOUNDS ­ For class 532
See CLATHRATES AND INTERCALATES (INCLUSION COMPOUNDS).
INCLUSIONS ­ For class 164
Particles of dirt, slag or other impurities occurring in metals that were mechanically
entrapped during solidification.
INDEFINITE LENGTH WORK ­ For class 156
A piece of material handled at points intermediate its ends whereby the length is
immaterial to the manner of handling.
INDEFINITE LENGTH WORK ­ For class 264
A self sustaining body, which because of its relatively large length is handled at a point
intermediate of its ends, and includes single or one piece bodies formed in a continuous
manner.
INDEFINITE LENGTH WORK ­ For class 425
A self­sustaining body having a longitudinal dimension which is effectively infinite.
INDETERMINATE LENGTH ­ For class 226
An extent of material having the characteristic that the longitudinal dimension of the
material is effectively infinite insofar as can be determined from the claimed structure for
advancing such material. The term applies to an extent of material in which the distance
between the ends is irrelevant to the manner of, or structure for, handling and/or moving
such material. Thus, except for the lead­end threaders of subclass 91, the leading or
trailing end of the material is not utilized by the claimed means for moving the material,
nor recognized in a claimed method of moving. The term as used in this class also applies
to material which is formed in a closed loop, (i.e., the leading end and the trailing end of
definite length material have been joined together). However, the lead end may be used in
stopping the material to effect intermittent advance as in subclasses 125+, and a trailing
end (effected by a break or depletion of material) may be sensed to stop operation of the
advancer.
INDICATOR ­ For class 334
An element or device which is particularly adapted to point out or show, usually visually,
the position and/or condition to which a given element or elements are adjusted as, for
example, a scale and pointer, one of which is held stationary while the other is connected
to a rotatable or movable shaft such as the shaft of a variable capacitor. A second
example would be the use of a meter to indicate the amount of current and/or voltage
flowing in a given circuit.
INDICIUM ­ For class 234
A mark or configuration exhibited or carried by an object (such as a pattern* or token)
intended for use in the control of a machine.
INDIRECT BAND GAP SEMICONDUCTOR ­ For class 257
A semiconductor material in which a change in semiconductor crystal momentum for an
electron is required when it moves from the conduction band to the valence band and vice
versa. Silicon is an indirect band gap semiconductor.
INDIRECT BAND GAP SEMICONDUCTOR ­ For class 438
A semiconductor material in which a change in semiconductor crystal momentum for an
electron is required when it moves from the conduction band to the valence band and vice
versa. Silicon and aluminum arsenide are examples of indirect band gap semiconductors.
INDIRECTLY HEATED CATHODE (equiptential cathode) ­ For class 330
A cathode designed to be heated to its emitting temperature by a separate heating
element.
INDIRECTLY­HEATED CATHODE (Equipotential cathode) ­ For class 313
A cathode designed to be heated to its emitting temperature by a separate heating
element.
INDUCED NUCLEAR REACTION ­ For class 376
See section I, (1) Note.
INDUCTANCE ­ For class 334
That property of an electrical circuit, or of two or more neighboring circuits, by which a
varying current produces or induces an electromotive force in the circuit or neighboring
circuits. If an electromotive force is induced in the neighboring circuit or circuits, the term
mutual inductance is used.
INDUCTION HEATING ­ For class 373
The method of producing heat in a charge by placing it in a electromagnetic relationship
with an inducing winding, the charge forming the secondary.
INDUCTION MOTORS ­ For class 318
An asynchronous alternating current motor which operates during running speed conditions
as a result of electromagnetic induction and which has at least two electrical conductors
which are mounted or positioned in electromagnetic relationship with each other and for
movement relative to each other, and in which alternating current energy delivered to one
of the conductors (​
gprimary​
h or ​
ginducing​
h member) induces in the other of said
conductors (​
gsecondary​
h or ​
ginduced​
h member) an alternating current and the mechanical
energy is obtained as a result of the electromagnetic inductive action between the
magnetic field generated by the alternating current in the one conductor and the magnetic
field generated by the induced current in the other conductor. The secondary or induced
winding is usually short circuited or shunted by means of an impedance. An example of an
induction motor is the squirrel cage motor, that is, a motor where the secondary winding
consists of a plurality of short­circuited bars. See the definition of a ​
grepulsion motor​
h.
INDUCTIVE COUPLING ­ For class 336
The coupling between separate coils or windings due to the electromagnetic induction
between the coils or windings.
INDUCTOR ­ For class 334
An impedance device comprising a coil means, with or without core means, for introducing
inductance into an electric circuit. Both transformers and inductive reactors are included
within the meaning of ​
ginductor​
h.
INDUCTOR ­ For class 336
An impedance device comprising a coil means with or without core means for introducing
inductance into an electric circuit and wherein the inherent capacitive reactance thereof
does not resonate with the inductance of the coil within the frequency range of the electric
current adapted to flow therethrough. Both transformers and inductive reactors are
included within the meaning of "inductor". Excluded are inductor devices that are designed
to do more than introduce inductance into a circuit. Examples are: inductor devices
particularly designed to produce a magnetic field which radiates energy which is not
returned to the device, or devices designed to produce external mechanical work by
electromagnetic action.
INERT GASES ­ For class 423
The noble gases of the zero group of the periodic system, consisting of He, Ne, Ar, Kr, Xe,
Rn, which have no valency and combine only with great difficulty, if at all, with other
elements.
INERT MATERIAL ­ For class 210
Stuff that does not cause or promote any change in liquid or component being treated. May
act as filler, support, or carrier for active material. See subclass 679.
INFEED ­ For class 408
The relative movement of the tool and work along the tool­axis* during the cutting
operation. (Compare work­infeed* and tool­infeed*).
IN­FOCUS ­ For class 396
An in­focus condition occurs when an object image attains its sharpness.
INFORMATION ­ For class 345
Meaning that a human being assigns to data by means of the conventions applied to that
data.
INFORMATION ­ For class 706
Meaning that a human being assigns to data by means of conventions applied to that data.
INFORMATION ­ For class 707
Meaning that a human being assigns to data by means of the conventions applied to that
data.
INFORMATION ­ For class 709
Meaning that a human being assigns to data by means of the conventions applied to that
data.
INFORMATION ­ For class 710
Meaning that a human being assigns to data by means of the conventions applied to that
data.
INFORMATION ­ For class 711
Meaning that a human being assigns to data by means of the conventions applied to that
data.
INFORMATION ­ For class 712
Meaning that a human being assigns to data by means of the conventions applied to that
data.
INFORMATION ­ For class 713
Meaning that a human being assigns to data by means of the conventions applied to that
data.
INFORMATION ­ For class 714
Meaning that a human being assigns to data by means of the conventions applied to that
data.
INFORMATION ­ For class 715
Meaning that a human being assigns to DATA* by means of the conventions applied to that
data.
iNFORMATION ­ For class 718
Meaning that a human being assigns to data by means of the conventions applied to that
data.
INFORMATION ­ For class 719
Meaning that a human being assigns to data by means of the conventions applied to that
data.
INFORMATION ­ For class 726
Data with meaning concerning a particular act or circumstance in general. Note: May
include or consist of graphics or text or numerical or non­numerical values.
INFORMATION OR INFORMATION SIGNAL ­ For class 369
A time varying physical quantity representing desired intelligence, often an audible sound
or an electrical signal.
INGOT ­ For class 164
An open­mold casting that is intended for remelting and recasting or reworking to form
finished products. Also referred to as billet.
INGOT ­ For class 373
The casting obtained when molten metal is poured into a mold with the expectation that it
be further processed.
INGOT MOLD ­ For class 164
A heavy mold, usually of cast iron, into which molten metal is teemed, as in the casting of
ingots.
INGREDIENT ­ For class 426
Component part (usually a major one) of mixture that goes to make a food. (Compare
additive above which in some instance may be an ingredient).
INITIAL WRAP ­ For class 053
The wrapping of a cover around a contents to form a package is invariably done in two
stages, viz.: first, the shaping of the cover about a single end or surface of the contents,
and second, a further shaping of the cover by bending or folding the previously unfolded
portions thereof so that the latter portions are in contact with the contents end or surface
opposite to the end or surface about which the cover was previously shaped. The
intermediate state of the cover at the end of the first stage is referred to as the Initial
Wrap. The initial wrapping operation begins with the contact between the first end or
surface of the contents with the cover and proceeds in two ways, either by (a) an
unidirectional relative movement (which is not necessarily continuous) between the folding
instrumentalities and the cover material­contents unit or (b) by a first relative movement
between the folding instrumentalities and the cover material­contents unit, and one or
more succeeding relative movements therebetween, at least the first of which is in a
direction different from the first movement, and which serves to complete the shaping of
the cover along the first end or surface of the contents without bending or folding the
remaining unfolded portions of the cover into contact with the opposite end or surface of
the contents.
INJECTING ­ For class 060
Forcing into the reaction zone one or more streams of material which enter into the action
which produces thrust. Extruding a solid or semi­solid into the reaction zone, spraying a
stream of finely divided particles into the reaction zone and jetting a liquid or gas into the
reaction zone are illustrative but nonlimiting examples of the scope of the term.
INJECTION NOZZLE ­ For class 239
A terminal outlet member disclosed as connected to and as discharging into a relatively
large pressure chamber (e.g., an internal combustion engine or combustion turbine
combustion space).
INK ­ For class 400
A substance (usually fluid, may be viscous or solid) that is applied to the surface of a
record­medium* in the configuration of a typed character* symbol to make the character
visible to a reader of the typed text. An important property of ink is its ability to form a
gpermanent​
​
h symbol, that is, a symbol that is not easily erased (or erased only with great
difficulty), and it is this property that aids the production of an original copy of the typed
text. (See the definition of transfer­medium* in this Glossary, section III, for a discussion
of the difference between original copy and carbon copy.) A fluid ink may be applied
directly to a type­face*, from which type­face the ink is directly imprinted onto a record­
medium. A viscous ink may be applied to the record­medium via an ink­impregnated
ribbon*, and the ink therein will ​
gflow​
h by capillary action from unused portions of the
ribbon into the used portions of the ribbon. A solid ink may be applied via a so­called
gcarbon­ink​
​
h ribbon, which is often a single­use or one­use ribbon because all or most of
the coating of the ribbon is imprinted onto the record­medium when a type­face is
impacted thereagainst. A ​
ghecto­graphic​
h ink is a particular form of ink that is soluble and
is used to form a ​
gmaster​
h plate used in a ​
gspirit duplicating​
h copying process.
INORGANIC ­ For class 216
Pertaining to compounds that do not generally contain carbon and to elements in their free
form. It relates to any of the compounds not encompassed under the term Organic defined
below in this Glossary.
INORGANIC COMPOUND ­ For class 516
Any compound that is not organic*.
INPUT CIRCUIT ­ For class 323
Is the same as electrical source circuit.
INPUT CIRCUIT OR COUPLING ­ For class 330
The circuit or network of an amplifier extending from the source of electrical signal to the
input electrodes of the amplifier, which may include the source of electrical signal.
INPUT MEMBER ­ For class 475
Mechanism which receives rotational power from a power source*, and transfers such
rotational power to a planetary gear transmission.
INPUT SHAFT: ­ For class 477
Mechanism that receives rotational motion from an engine* and transfers such motion to a
gear transmission* or to a clutch*.
INPUT­IMPULSE ­ For class 234
A force or stimulus applied to a machine from an external source (such as the hand of an
operative, or the output mechanism of a calculator, etc.) or which originates from the
sensing of a pattern* presented to the machine, and which is capable of controlling tool
selection and/or auxiliary­operations*. (Cf. input­means*).
INPUT­MEANS ­ For class 234
An instrumentality which is effective to exert control over the operation of tool­selecting
mechanism and/or mechanism to perform an auxiliary­operation*, in response to the
application of an input­impulse* to such input­means, (e.g., a keyboard, a dial, a pattern­
sensing unit, etc.)
INPUT­OUTPUT COUPLING ­ For class 385
The introduction of electromagnetic light radiation into an optical waveguiding structure
from a source which is external to the structure, or the extraction of electromagnetic light
radiation from an optical waveguiding structure to a detecting device at its exterior. This
term ("input­output coupling") is specifically defined to include only the coupling of light
from a source (e.g., a laser) into an optical waveguide or the coupling of light from an
optical waveguide to a detector (e.g., a photodiode), and thus excludes the coupling of
light between optical waveguides.
INS ­ For class 438
intrinsic nondoped semiconductor
INSPECTION ­ For class 250
A term implying a source of radiant energy, and/or means to irradiate an object by said
source and a detector responsive to radiation from the object to provide a signal
representing some characteristic of the object.
INSPECTION OR EXAMINATION ­ For class 378
A term implying a source of X­ray energy, and/or means to irradiate an object by said
source and a detector responsive to X­radiation from the object to provide an indication
representing some characteristic of the object.
INSTRUCTION DATA ­ For class 345
Data that represent an operation and identify its operands, if any. (also see: Data)
INSTRUCTION DATA ­ For class 707
Data that represent an operation and identify its operands, if any. (Also see Data)
INSTRUCTION DATA ­ For class 711
Data that represent an operation and identify its operands, if any.
INSTRUCTION DATA ­ For class 714
Data that represent an operation and identify its operands, if any.
INSULATED­GATE FIELD EFFECT TRANSISTOR (IGFET) ­ For class 257
A unipolar transistor with source, gate, and drain regions and electrodes, in which
conduction takes place in a channel controlled by action of the voltage applied to the gate
electrode of the device, in which the gate electrode is separated from the channel by an
insulator layer.
INSULATED­GATE FIELD EFFECT TRANSISTOR (IGFET) ­ For class 438
A unipolar transistor with source, gate, and drain regions and electrodes, in which
conduction takes place in a channel controlled by action of the voltage applied to the gate
electrode of the device, in which the gate electrode is separated from the channel by an
insulator layer.
INSULATOR ­ For class 257
A material which has a high resistance to the flow of electric current. It has such low
electrical conductivity that the flow of current therethrough can usually be neglected.
INSULATOR ­ For class 338
A body of such low conductivity that the flow of current therethrough can usually be
neglected.
INSULATOR ­ For class 438
A material which has a high resistance to the flow of electric current. It has such low
electrical conductivity that the flow of current therethrough can usually be neglected.
INTEGRATED APPARATUS ­ For class 506
Apparatus specifically designed for performing at least two different operations (e.g.,
synthesis and screening, etc.).
INTEGRATED CIRCUIT ­ For class 257
See MONOLITHIC DEVICE (e.g., IC) as contrasted to HYBRID CIRCUIT.
INTERCALATES ­ For class 532
See CLATHRATES AND INTERCALATES (INCLUSION COMPOUNDS).
INTERELECTRODE CAPACITANCE ­ For class 330
The capacitive reactance for signal flow between any two electrodes of a vacuum tube,
transistor or similar device inherent in their relationship to each other electrostatically and
which for certain frequencies and voltages forms a path for the signal current usually
detrimental to the operation of the circuit.
INTERELECTRODE IMPEDANCE ­ For class 330
An impedance between electrodes of a vacuum tube, transistor, or similar device inherent
in its structure, and manner and frequency of operation. This term is generic to inter­
electrode capacitance above; and includes also input conductance caused by the transit
time of electrons, etc.
INTERFACE ­ For class 709
A connection between two elements so that they can work with one another.
INTERFACE ­ For class 718
A connection between two elements so that they can work with one another.
INTERFACE ­ For class 719
A connection between two elements so that they can work with one another.
INTERFACIAL BOND ­ For class 425
Cohesion among common boundaries of particles material without a mechanical interlock.
INTERFERENCE ­ For class 359
The interaction of two light waves which, as a result of their relative phases, produce a
cancellation or reinforcement of wave energy.
INTERFERENCE ­ For class 372
The interaction of two light waves which, as a result of their relative phases, produce a
cancellation or reinforcement of wave energy.
INTERMEDIATE FREQUENCY (IF) ­ For class 725
A frequency to which a signal wave is shifted locally as an intermediate step in
transmission or reception.
INTERMEDIATE NEUTRONS ­ For class 376
See Thermal Neutrons.
INTERMEDIATE­ARTICLE ­ For class 428
A fully shaped article, all three dimensions of which are definite, even though one or more
of these dimensions may be negligible. The article is not suitable for functional use in the
claimed condition, but must be subjected to one or more further significant shaping steps
to do more than merely occupy space. The following operations have been regarded as not
involving a further significant shaping: (a) Assembling or uniting the article with other
parts. (b) Distorting the article during an assembly operation to cause the article to
conform to discrepancies in the size or shape of a coacting part. (c) Bonding or distorting
those portions of the article which are to function as means for fastening the article to a
coacting part, as, for example, the bending of ears or tabs. (Structural)
INTERNAL BATTERY ­ For class 204
A device or means which generates an electrical current by chemical action within a zone
of desired electrolysis without the need for an external source of electrical current.
INTERPOSER ­ For class 234
An element which is movable to and from two or more positions, in one or more of which
positions it is effective to condition a tool pair for actuation by its engagement with a tool
of said pair and by thus completing a drive train for transmission of actuating force to the
tool pair (either by the transmission of energy to an active tool element, or by blocking an
inactive tool element in effective position).
INTERPUPILLARY DISTANCE ­ For class 351
The distance between the centers of rotation of a pair of human eyes.
INTERSTAGE CIRCUIT OR COUPLING ­ For class 330
The electrical circuit or network by means of which the output signal from the output
electrodes of the amplifying device of one stage of a cascaded amplifier is conveyed to the
input electrodes of the amplifying device of the following stage of the cascade amplifier.
INTRINSIC CONCENTRATION ­ For class 257
The number of minority carriers in a semiconductor due to thermal generation of electron­
hole pairs.
INTRINSIC CONCENTRATION ­ For class 438
The number of minority carriers in a semiconductor due to thermal generation of electron­
hole pairs.
INTRINSIC CONDUCTIVITY ­ For class 330
Refers to a semiconductor material which for a certain range of conditions has its free
electron carriers and free hole carriers in approximate balance, so that the semiconductor
material is neither N­ nor P­type. Sufficient change in temperature or sufficient radiant
energy impinging upon such a body will upset this equilibrium.
INTRINSIC SEMICONDUCTOR ­ For class 257
A pure semiconductor, i.e., one with no impurity atoms introduced therein.
INVERSION ­ For class 257
A condition in a semiconductor material in which the concentration of minority carriers
exceeds the concentration of majority carriers.
INVERSION ­ For class 438
A condition in a semiconductor material in which the concentration of minority carriers
exceeds the concentration of majority carriers.
INVERSION LAYER/CHANNEL ­ For class 257
A region in a semiconductor material in which the concentration of minority carriers
exceeds the concentration of majority carriers.
INVERSION LAYER/CHANNEL ­ For class 438
A region in a semiconductor material in which the concentration of minority carriers
exceeds the concentration of majority carriers.
INVESTMENT PATTERN ­ For class 164
A pattern of a material having a low melting point for use in processes employing special
techniques such as precision casting where pattern withdrawal would be difficult.
ION ­ For class 250
An atom or molecule with at least one more or less electrons than protons. Electrons, per
se, are not considered ions.
ION EXCHANGE ­ For class 423
A process in which ions are chemically transferred from a material to a liquid or solid
separatory substance or exchanger which, because of its chemical structure of loosely
bound ions, has an affinity for certain ions and gives up some of its own ions to the
material. The exchange occurs between ions of like charge; the exchanger substance can
usually be regenerated by passing another material through it to elute the previously
sorbed ions and replace them with the original kind of loosely bound ions. These ion
exchange substances are usually resins or zeolites or chelates.
IONIC CATHODE ­ For class 313
A virtual cathode formed by a discharge in a gas or vapor between two electrodes, the
discharge serving to supply electrons to a third electrode. See subclass 588 for discharge
devices having an ionic cathode.
IONIZATION ­ For class 250
The process of adding to or removing from an electrically neutral atom or molecule one or
more of its electrons. Note: Ionization, as sometimes used to denote the process of
increasing the energy level of an atom or molecule to some state short of the above, is
not encompassed by this definition. Such processes in this class are considered partial or
incomplete ionization.
IONIZED ­ For class 376
See (a) Fully Ionized and (b) Plasma.
IR ­ For class 438
infrared
IRON GROUP ­ For class 075
An element of the group Iron (Fe), Cobalt (Co), and Nickel (Ni).
IRON GROUP METALS ­ For class 257
Fe, Co, Ni.
IRON GROUP METALS ­ For class 423
Those metals in the central part of the third period of the periodic system consisting of Fe,
Co and Ni, all of which form colored salts and 2 or more series of compounds.
ISFET ­ For class 438
ion sensitive FET (i.e., CHEMFET)
ISOELECTRONIC ­ For class 438
A condition in which two constituents have the same number of valence electrons.
ISOLATED TRIGLYCERIDIC FAT OR OIL ­ For class 426
Fat or oil (as defined below) that is free of any of the plant or animal tissue from which it
is derived.
ISOLATION ­ For class 257
Prevention of the flow of electric current between electronic component parts of a solid­
state electronic device.
ISOLATION ­ For class 438
The separation or surrounding of active semiconductor regions or components with
electrically insulative regions to prevent the flow of electrical current between the active
semiconductor regions or between electronic component parts of a solid­state electronic
device.
ISOPLANAR CMOS ­ For class 257
A semiconductor device in which relatively thick regions of silicon dioxide, recessed into
the semiconductor surface, are used to electrically isolate device areas and prevent
parasitic device formation. More commonly called LOCOS CMOS.
ISOPLANAR CMOS ­ For class 438
A semiconductor device in which relatively thick regions of silicon dioxide, recessed into
the semiconductor surface, are used to electrically isolate device areas and prevent
parasitic device formation. More commonly called LOCOS CMOS.
ISOPLANAR ISOLATION ­ For class 257
A type of electric isolation in which relatively thick regions of silicon dioxide, recessed into
the semiconductor surface, are used to electrically isolate device areas and prevent
parasitic device formation. More commonly called LOCOS ISOLATION.
ISOPLANAR ISOLATION ­ For class 438
A type of electric isolation in which relatively thick regions of silicon dioxide, recessed into
the semiconductor surface, are used to electrically isolate device areas and prevent
parasitic device formation. More commonly called LOCOS ISOLATION.
ITERATIVE DECONVOLUTION ­ For class 506
Method for the identification of active library members which involves epeating the
deconvolution strategy a certain number of times. Usually the initial library is divided into
nonoverlapping subsets. The subsets are tested or screened separately, and the one with
the greatest activity is identified. This subset is re­synthesized as a collection of simpler
subsets which are tested for activity. The process is repeated until a unique library­
member with a high level of activity is identified.
ITO ­ For class 438
indium tin oxide (a TCO)
IVEC ­ For class 438
isolation vertical capacitor cell
JACKET ­ For class 313
Same as casing above.
JACKET ­ For class 412
A protective structure, e.g., dust cover, assembled to but not fastened to a completed
book(*).
JAW ­ For class 081
An element carrying at least one work engaging surface, two or more of such elements
engaging and holding the workpiece.
JAW ­ For class 269
(a) One of the plural portions of a work holder couple which engages or grips a workpiece.
Generally, the jaw is taken to include the work contacting surface and that part of the
holder which (1) is contiguous to said surface as well as that portion which (2) if
moveable, moves bodily in congruent fashion with said surface. (See subclass 271 for the
definition of a jaw attachment or insert).
(b) A work holder portion with an underlying work contacting surface, for which see
subclass 289, especially (2) Note, is not considered to be a jaw, unless claimed in
combination as one of plural coacting work gripping elements. However, a work holder
portion with an overlying work contacting surface, which portion ordinarily is incapable of
functioning as a work holder in the absence of a coacting underlying support means, will
be considered as a jaw even if there is no claimed reference to said coacting underlying
portion. (See subclasses 37­45 for plural holders which separately hold at least two
workpieces relative to each other; each such holder is considered to be more than a jaw).
(c) As an exception to (a) which states that a “jaw” must be one of a couple; a work
engaging member, which as claimed (1) includes plural, abutting, nonparallel, flat work
engaging surfaces; (2) each such flat surface, coacting with a different one of plural work
engaging elements as one of a plurality of work engaging elements as one of a plurality of
work holding couples, is considered to be a common jaw member cooperating with a
plurality of jaws. (See subclass 104 for patents to a holder with plural jaws coacting with a
common angle­corner jaw to hold the same workpiece). (See subclass 154 for patents to a
holder with plural jaws coacting with a common flat jaw surface to hold work or
workpieces).
(d) Unlike (c) above, a work engaging member which as claimed includes either (1) plural,
nonabutting, work engaging surfaces or (2) plural, abutting, curved, work engaging
surfaces, and which surfaces (1) or (2) each coact with a different one of plural work
engaging elements, is not considered to be a “common” jaw member. Hence, such a
configured work engaging member in combination with coacting plural elements does not
constitute plural jaw pairs either for subclass 104 or subclass 152. (See subclasses 257­
284 for specific jaw features, per se.)
The following figure is illustrative of plural, nonabutting, work engaging surfaces B1 and
B2 referred to in (d)(1) above.
The following figure is illustrative of plural abutting, curved, work engaging surfaces E1,
E2 and E3 referred to in (d)(2) above.
(e) Each of three mutually adjustable* and/or actuable* work contacting elements
effective to hold work (as in subclass 156) is also considered to be a jaw.
In both rotational and rectilinear movement, the movement may be in steps, backwards,
or forwards.
JFET ­ For class 438
junction field effect transistor (junction gate)
J­LEAD ­ For class 257
A rolled­under, J­shaped configuration of some surface mounted component leads.
JOFET ­ For class 438
Josephson junction field effect transistor
JOINT ­ For class 403
A connection between two or more members which utilizes an intrinsic property of at least
one of the members or wherein the members are related to each other in a particular
manner.
JOINT ­ For class 404
(1) Structure linking or uniting adjacent components, or (2) a gap between adjacent
components or (3) a parting member or spacer between adjacent components.
JOINT MECHANISM ­ For class 081
First means connecting the jaws movably to each other, second means for connecting at
least one of the jaws movably to the handles, and third means connecting the handles
movably to each other; said first, second and third means (either singly or in combination
with each other) converting handle manipulation into relative jaw motion. The joint
mechanism may consist, for example, of a common first, second and third means as for
example in Patent No. 2,325,035; or a common second and third means as for example in
a pair of cross­handled pliers.
JOSEPHSON JUNCTION ­ For class 505
A weak connection between superconductors through which the Josephson effect is
realized.
JOSEPHSON EFFECT ­ For class 505
The passage of paired electrons (Cooper pairs) through a weak connection (Josephson
junction) between superconductors as in the tunnel passage of paired electrons through a
thin dielectric layer separating two superconductors.
JTE ­ For class 438
junction termination extension
JUNCTION ­ For class 257
A joining of two different semiconductors or of a semiconductor and a metal at an
interface. Types of junctions include HETEROJUNCTIONS, SCHOTTKY BARRIER JUNCTIONS,
and PN JUNCTIONS.
JUNCTION BARRIER ­ For class 257
The opposition to the diffusion of majority carriers across a pn junction due to the charge
of the fixed donor and acceptor ions.
JUNCTION BARRIER ­ For class 438
The opposition to the diffusion of majority carriers across a pn junction due to the charge
of the fixed donor and acceptor ions.
JUNCTION CAPACITANCE ­ For class 257
The capacitance across a pn junction. It depends on the width of the depletion layer, which
increases with increased reverse bias voltage across the junction.
JUNCTION CAPACITANCE ­ For class 438
The capacitance across a pn junction. It depends on the width of the depletion layer, which
increases with increased reverse bias voltage across the junction.
JUNCTION GATE FIELD EFFECT TRANSISTOR (JFET) ­ For class 257
See FIELD EFFECT TRANSISTOR.
JUNCTION IN A TRANSISTOR OR SEMI­CONDUCTOR ­ For class 330
The boundary of P­type and N­type semiconductor material.
JUNCTION ISOLATION ­ For class 257
Electrical isolation of devices on a monolithic integrated circuit chip using a reverse biased
junction diode to establish a depletion layer that forms the electrical isolation between
devices.
JUNCTION ISOLATION ­ For class 438
Electrical isolation of devices on a monolithic integrated circuit chip using a reverse biased
junction diode to establish a depletion layer that forms the electrical isolation between
devices.
JUNCTION RESISTANCE ­ For class 257
The electrical resistance across a semiconductor PN junction.
JUNCTION RESISTANCE ­ For class 438
The electrical resistance across a semiconductor PN junction.
JUNCTION TRANSISTOR ­ For class 330
A transistor comprising two P­N Junctions back­to­back wherein a region of P­ or N­type
semiconductor material is common to both junctions (thus determining an NPN or a PNP
junction transistor, respectively); an emitter electrode connected to one of the conductivity
regions not common to the two junctions, normally forwardly biased (positive terminal of
bias means to emitter for PNP type and negative terminal for NPN type); a collector
electrode connected to the other conductivity region but common to the two junctions,
reversely biased (negative terminal of bias means for the PNP type and positive terminal
for the NPN type; and a base electrode connected to the region common to both junctions.
See definition of Point Contact Transistor, which operates similarly in many respects.
JUNCTION, SEMICONDUCTOR ­ For class 117
The region of transition between semiconduction regions of different electrical properties,
usually between p­type and n­type materials, and usually a junction exhibits asymmetric
conductivity.
JUSTIFICATION ­ For class 234
The computation or assignment of interword­spaces and/or type­widths, or symbols
representative of such spaces or type­widths, in connection with the composition of a line
of type or the production of an instrumentality (perforated tape, etc.) for the control of a
type­setting machine, for the purpose of predetermining the exact length of a completed
line of type.
KEEPER ­ For class 070
A part to receive the movable portion of a bolt usually a socket, pocket, opening, ledge,
abutment, seat, shoulder, etc.
KEEPER ­ For class 402
An element or mechanism which cooperates with a sheet retainer to releasably secure a
sheet* thereon.
KETONE ­ For class 520
Denotes an organic compound having the general structure n (n is 1 or more) and wherein
the carbon atoms bonded to the n group are not double bonded to oxygen, sulfur,
selenium, or tellurium. Ketone as used throughout includes ketene, i.e., CH2=C=O
KETONE (INCLUDING KETENE) ­ For class 514
Denotes an organic compound having the general structure ­C­[C(=O)]n ­C­ (n is 1 or
more) and wherein the carbon atoms bonded to the­[C(=O)]n group are not double bonded
to oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium. Ketone as used throughout includes ketene.
KEY ­ For class 070
A specially contrived implement for controlling or operating a lock and (1) having portions
designed to pass fixed obstructions or to arrange movable impediments to allow operation
of a securing device, or (2) embodying an unconventional design of predetermined secret
or nonpublic origin.
KEY ­ For class 380
A formula, word or signal used to define the code in encryption or decryption of the
information. Such a signal is often a digital signal having a predetermined or
pseudorandom content.
KEY ­ For class 400
An element on a typewriter, located on a key­board*, which element is pressed to cause
either (a) the actuation of a type­member* to imprint a character* that corresponds to the
selected key, or (b) the actuation of a selected function* of the typewriter. In a manual
typewriter a key is usually pressed by a finger of a user, and the movement of the
selected key is transmitted via a system of levers and links into movement of a
corresponding type­member actuator or function actuator. In some typewriters and
external power source assists the actuation. In other typewriters keys are pressed
successively in response to signals to the typewriter by a human or mechanical operator.
The key referred to in (a) above (i.e., a character key) also causes a character­space*
movement of the carriage* as well as actuation of the type­member.
KEY ­ For class 705
A formula, word or signal used to define a code in encryption or decryption of the
information. Such a signal is often a digital signal having a predetermined or
pseudorandom content
KEY­BOARD ­ For class 400
That portion of a typewriter which is located so as to face and be adjacent to the user of a
typewriter, and containing the key* elements that are to be pressed in succession to
produce a text that is being typed, or pressed as needed to actuate a particular function*
of the typewriter.
KEYSTONING ­ For class 348
A distorted scanning pattern, with a top wider than the bottom or vice versa, produced
when the electron beam in the television camera tube is at angle with the principal axis of
the tube.
KLYSTRON ­ For class 331
A beam tube including at least two apertured cavity resonators, the beam of charged
particles passing through the apertures of the resonators in succession, and a collector
electrode being provided to intercept the beam after passing through the resonators. The
first resonator causes bunching of the particles passing therethrough, the bunched particles
then travel in a field­free region where further bunching occurs and then the bunched
particles enter the second resonator giving up their energy to excite it into oscillations.
KMER ­ For class 438
Kodak metal etch resist
KNEADING ­ For class 425
Working a material by intermittent squeezing and relieving a semi­solid material such as
dough, rubber, etc. Synonym: BRAKING
KPR ­ For class 438
Kodak photo resist
KTFR ­ For class 438
Kodak thin film resist
LABEL ­ For class 435
A member of a signal producing system which is usually bound to or incorporated in the
ligand. Measurement of the label activity is an indication of the amount of unknown in the
sample.
LAC ­ For class 428
See natural oil, gum, rosin or lac below. (Nonstructural or Composition)
LACED­FASTENER­ For class 024
A securing mechanism including both a string (i.e., a thin elongated flaccid* member) and
guiding means (e.g., path defining eyelets) therefor located on two spaced edges of the
structure­to­be­secured*; wherein the string (a) links together the guiding means on
opposite sides of and traverses the gap between the edges, (b) draws the edges toward
each other when a portion of the string is pulled past its guiding means to shorten the
effective length of the remaining portion of the string traversing the gap, and (c) secures
the edges in fixed relationship to each other when the extracted portion of the string is
prevented from moving (e.g., tied).
LAGB ­ For class 438
low­angle grain boundary
LAMINA ­ For class 156
One of the component parts or layers of an adhesively bonded sandwich. Also an element
which by disclosure is to be bonded to a separate element.
LAMPS ­ For class 315
Are defined for the purpose of classification in this class as including a device designed for
converting electrical energy into ray energy, regardless of whether the ray energy is
within the visible or invisible part of the spectrum, but excluding (1) generators of X­rays,
and (2) generators designed primarily to generate infrared rays. Lamps may be in the
form of electric space discharge devices, for which see the next paragraph.
LAND ­ For class 257
The conductive areas, normally metal patterns, on a semiconductor integrated circuit,
which form part of the contacts and interconnections between components on the
integrated circuit.
LAND ­ For class 438
The conductive areas, normally metal patterns, on a semiconductor integrated circuit,
which form part of the contacts and interconnections between components on the
integrated circuit. See bonding pad, die bond.
LAND PATTERN ­ For class 257
A combination of lands on an integrated circuit.
LANDING­ For class 187
An in situ floor within a structure (e.g., building) located adjacent to an elevator shaft* and
to or from which a load (e.g., passenger, cargo) transfers during the charging or
discharging of the load­underlying support surface of an elevator.
LANGMUIR­BLODGETT FILM ­ For class 977
Film of surfactant molecules on a liquid surface forming regular stacks (a multilayer) or
can be only one molecule thick (a monolayer); may also be formed on solid surfaces.
LANGUAGE ­ For class 704
A systematic means of communicating ideas or feelings by the use of conventionalized
sounds, gestures, or marks having understood meanings.
LANOLIN ­ For class 106
Cholesterol esters of higher fatty acids.
LANOLIN ­ For class 106
Cholesterol esters of higher fatty acids.
LANOLIN ­ For class 106
Cholesterol esters of higher fatty acids.
LANOLIN ­ For class 106
Cholesterol esters of higher fatty acids.
LANOLIN ­ For class 106
Cholesterol esters of higher fatty acids.
LANOLIN ­ For class 106
Cholesterol esters of higher fatty acids.
LANOLIN ­ For class 106
Cholesterol esters of higher fatty acids.
LANOLIN ­ For class 106
Cholesterol esters of higher fatty acids.
LANOLIN ­ For class 106
Cholesterol esters of higher fatty acids.
LANOLIN ­ For class 106
Cholesterol esters of higher fatty acids.
LANOLIN ­ For class 106
Cholesterol esters of higher fatty acids.
LANOLIN ­ For class 106
Cholesterol esters of higher fatty acids.
LANTHANIDE ELEMENTS ­ For class 257
La, Ce, Pr, Nd, Pm, Sm, Eu, Gd, Tb, Dy, Ho,Er, Tm, Yb, Lu.
LANTHANIDE­ For class 075
A metal of the group Lanthanum (La), Cerium (Ce), Praseodymium (Pr), Neodymium (Nd),
Promethium (Pm), Samarium (Sm), Europium (Eu), Gadolinium (Gd), Terbium (Tb),
Dysprosium (Dy), Holmium (Ho), Erbium (Er), Thulium (Th), Ytterbium (Yb), and Lutetium
(Lu).
LANTHANIDE­ For class 420
An element of atomic number 57 to 71 inclusive.
LASER ­ For class 372
A device for generating a very narrow, intense beam of coherent light. The name is
derived from the initial letters of "Light Amplification by Stimulated Emission of Radiation".
In the emission of ordinary light the molecules or atoms of the source emit their radiation
independently of each other, and consequently there is no definite phase relationship
among the vibrations in the resultant beam. The light is incoherent. The laser, by means of
an optical resonator, forces the atoms of the material within the resonator to radiate in
phase. The emitted radiation is stimulated by the excitation of atoms to a higher energy
level by means of energy supplied to the device.
LAST ­ For class 425
A form for shaping a shoe.
LATCHING/LATCHED/LATCHUP ­ For class 257
The state or condition of a regenerative feedback device, e.g., a thyristor, in which the
device remains ON when the initializing signal is removed.
LATCH­OR LATCHING­BOLT ­ For class 070
One normally yieldably biased or urged by some form of constantly present potential force
to seek one position and operable to another position against such force, but automatically
returnable to its original position unless restrained.
LATERAL ­ For class 172
A direction which is transverse of the line of draft of a tool over the earth unless some
other meaning is clearly indicated by the context.
LATERAL ­ For class 226
As used in this class, the term refers to that direction simultaneously perpendicular to the
longitudinal* direction of movement of a web* and parallel to the surface of the web.
LATID ­ For class 438
large angle tilt implant drain
LATTICE CONSTANT ­ For class 117
Usually the edge length of a unit cell.
LAW OF A MACHINE ­ For class 425
Control of sequential operations of machine parts by electrical or mechanical program
means with operator control reduced to mere starting or stopping of operation of the
machine.
LAYER ­ For class 112
A single thickness of material or materials in the form of a panel, web, or sheet, or a
plurality of any of these in side­by­side coplanar relation, or particulate material arranged
in continuity to constitute a distinct stratum.
A layer may include a plurality of components as in Figure 4.
LAYER ­ For class 404
Stratum, course, lamina, coating or sheet which is sufficiently recognizable as such
regardless of the constituent material involved. Interface blending of otherwise distinct
layers still leaves plural layers.
LAYER ­ For class 428
A single thickness of material(s) in the form of web* or sheet*, or a plurality of any of
these in side­by­side coplanar relation; or particulate material arranged in continuity to
constitute a distinct stratum. A layer may include a plurality of components* as in Figure
2. See also (2) Note under A, above. (Structural)
LAYER ­ For class 451
A single thickness of material(s) in the form of a sheet(s) in side­by­side, coplanar
relation; or particulate material arranged in continuity to constitute a distinct stratum.
LAYER­ For class 349
For the purpose of this class, a layer is a periodic discontinuous material or materials
within a single plane having a single function, or a continuous material having one or more
functions.
LAYER­ For class 414
A series of equal (i.e., coplanar) articles having their bases located in a plane which
extends across a stack* in a horizontal direction relative to the support surface of the
stack*.
LB ­ For class 438
(a) Langmuir­Blodgett or (b) laser beam
LC RESONATOR ­ For class 331
A resonant circuit comprising separate inductance and capacitance elements, i.e., lumped
inductor and capacitor elements.
LCCC ­ For class 257
An abbreviation for a leadless ceramic chip carrier which is a hermetically­sealable
ceramic package in which an integrated chip can be placed to create a surface mounted
component. It has pads around its perimeter for connection to a substrate.
LCCD ­ For class 438
leadless ceramic chip carrier
LCD ­ For class 438
liquid crystal display
LDCC ­ For class 438
leaded ceramic chip carrier
LDD ­ For class 438
lightly doped drain
LEACHING ­ For class 423
The process of extracting or dissolving a soluble component from a mixture by contacting
the mixture with a solvent, resulting in dissolution or solution of the solubles and leaving
an insoluble material. (Note. Solution of a substance in a normally solid, molten material
is not considered to be ​
gleaching​
h as defined above.)
LEACHING ­ For class 588
The processes of extracting or dissolving a soluble component from a mixture by
contacting the mixture with a solvent, resulting in dissolution or solution of the solubles
and leaving an insoluble material. Note. Solution of a substance in a normally solid,
molten material is not considered to be leaching as defined above.
LEAD ­ For class 257
The conductor brought out from a component.
LEAD FRAME ­ For class 257
A metal frame which provides support for an integrated circuit chip or die as well as
electrical leads to interconnect the integrated circuit on the die or chip to other electrical
components or contacts.
LEAD­IN ­ For class 313
The conductor used to transmit electric current or potential from the exterior of the
envelope or casing into the interior of the envelope or casing. Where the envelope is made
of glass it usually consists of a conductor which passes through the wall of the envelope
and which is sealed to the glass by a glass­to­metal seal.
LEAF ­ For class 016
A rod or platelike portion by which the hinge is adapted to be secured to a hinged
member*.
LEAF ­ For class 281
A sheet other than a strip.
LEAF ­ For class 283
A sheet other than a strip.
LEAF ­ For class 462
A sheet* other than a strip*.
LEAF SPRING ­ For class 267
an element comprising a plate or bar or a plurality of superposed plates or bars and which
exhibits resilient characteristics when a portion is deflected transversely of length of the
element
LEAKAGE CURRENT ­ For class 257
Unwanted current flow.
LEC ­ For class 117
Liquid Encapsulated Czochralski (CZ*) method.
LEC ­ For class 438
liquid encapsulated Czoshralski
LECHER LINES ­ For class 330
A parallel transmission line with means to tune the parallel line.
LECITHIN ­ For class 106
A mixture of the diglycerides of stearic, palmitic, and oleic acids, linked to the choline
ester of phosphoric acid. Lecithin has the following structure, as shown below, wherein the
R’s are the same or different, and are acyclic hydrocarbon radicals of at least seven
carbon atoms chain length.
LECITHIN ­ For class 106
A mixture of the diglycerides of stearic, palmitic, and oleic acids, linked to the choline
ester of phosphoric acid. Lecithin has the following structure [wherein the R"s are the
same or different, and are acyclic hydrocarbon radicals of at least seven carbon atoms
chain length]:
LECITHIN ­ For class 106
A mixture of the diglycerides of stearic, palmitic, and oleic acids, linked to the choline
ester of phosphoric acid. Lecithin has the following structure [wherein the R’s are the same
or different, and are acyclic hydrocarbon radicals of at least seven carbon atoms chain
length]:
LECITHIN ­ For class 106
A mixture of the diglycerides of stearic, palmitic, and oleic acids, linked to the choline
ester of phosphoric acid. Lecithin has the following structure [wherein the R’s are the same
or different, and are acyclic hydrocarbon radicals of at least seven carbon atoms chain
length]:
LED ­ For class 438
light emitting diode
LEED ­ For class 438
low­energy electron diffraction
LEK ­ For class 438
liquid encapsulated Kyropoulus
LENS ­ For class 351
Ophthalmic lens or transparent material in goggles unless otherwise indicated.
LENS REPAIR DEVICES ­ For class 351
Structure embracing the broken portion of a lens by a metal or plastic strip so that the
lens can be restored to the mounting.
LEVEL­ For class 414
An article within a single article wide stack* or a tier* having its base located entirely
within a plane which extends in a horizontal direction relative to the support surface of the
stack* or tier*.
LEVELING AGENT­ For class 516
Term of the textile industry referring to a wetting agent* used to aid in the uniform
dispersal of a dye in a dye bath and generally have wetting properties.
LEVER ­ For class 049
An elongated rigid arm which is pivoted at least one point along its length.
LIBRARY ­ For class 506
A library is a created collection of a plurality of compounds, micro­organisms, or other
substances. The collection is useful as a test vehicle for determining which of its members
or its subsets of members possess activities or properties of interest. A library might, for
example, exist as (a) a solution, (b) a physical admixture, (c) an ordered or unordered
array, or (d) a plurality of members present on a support and affixed thereto (e.g., by
chemical bonding, physical attractive forces, coating, etc.).
LIFETIME ­ For class 257
The average time interval between the introduction of and recombination of minority
charge carriers in a semiconductor.
LIFT­OFF ­ For class 438
Process for the removal of unwanted deposited material from a substrate (and thus
patterning the same) by the dissolution of an intermediate layer and the commitant
physical separation of the overlying deposited material.
LIGAND ­ For class 435
Any organic compound for which a receptor naturally exists or can be prepared; a linking
or binding molecule.
LIGHT ­ For class 372
In this class, light includes not only optical wavelengths, i.e., that part of the spectrum
extending from the near infrared, through the visible, to the ultraviolet, but also includes
those portions of the spectrum which extends from the near infrared through the long
wavelength, far infrared, and from the ultraviolet to X­rays and gamma rays at the
shortest wavelengths.
LIGHT EMITTING DIODE (LED) ­ For class 257
Junction diodes which give off light when energized.
LIGHT FLUX ­ For class 396
Light flux is the rate of light flow across a surface.
LIGHT METAL ­ For class 532
This term denotes any metal having a specific gravity less than four.
LIGHT METAL­ For class 075
A metal of the group Lithium (Li), Sodium (Na), Potassium (K), Rubidium (Rb), Cesium
(Cs), Francium (Fr), Calcium (Ca), Strontium (Sr), Barium (Ba), Radium (Ra), Beryllium
(Be), Magnesium (Mg), and Aluminum (Al).
LIGHT METALS ­ For class 257
Alkali metals, alkaline­earth metals, Be, Al, Mg.
LIGHT PARALLELING STRUCTURE ­ For class 353
Optical elements for directing the light from the concentrated light source so that it
impinges on the object perpendicular to the plane of the object and uniformly illuminates
the object to be projected.
LIGHT POLARIZING LENSES ­ For class 351
Lenses comprising a polarizing element which reduces light losses due to reflection.
LIGHT SOURCE ­ For class 355
The source of illumination for the copier. It includes filters, reflectors, screens and other
light modifiers used to affect the spectral distribution, spatial distribution and intensity of
the illumination.
LIGHT SOURCE ­ For class 362
An element (e.g., filament) or material (e.g., neon) which converts energy into visible
radiant energy and/or the essential container of such an element or material, i.e., a light
source envelope including the envelope base (e.g., light bulb, fluorescent tube). Unless
otherwise specified, a light source is assumed to be a point source. For purposes of
classification within this class, nominal recitations such as "light unit," "lamp," "headlight,"
etc., are assumed to denote only a light source.
LIGHT SOURCE ­ For class 399
The source of illumination for the copier. The light source includes filters, reflectors,
screens, and other light modifiers used to affect the spectral distribution, spatial
distribution, and intensity of the illumination.
LIGHT TRANSMITTING ROD ­ For class 385
Any optically transparent elongated structure used to transmit light from one end to the
other end by other than modal transmission (e.g., in a random fashion).
LIGHT, VISIBLE LIGHT ­ For class 356
Visible light is radiation, which stimulates the optical receptors of the eye, and has a
wavelength from 3850 to 7600 Angstrom units. The term light in these definitions refers to
radiation in the above mentioned range, and when qualified by the terms ultraviolet and
infrared refers to the corresponding radiation ranges adjacent the visible range.
LIGHT, VISIBLE LIGHT ­ For class 359
Visible light is radiation which stimulates the optical receptors of the eye and has a
wavelength from 3850 to 7600 Angstrom units. The term light is used to refer to
wavelengths in the above mentioned range and, often, also to refer to the ranges
immediately adjacent, i.e., the ultra violet and infrared ranges which are nonvisible.
LIGHT, VISIBLE LIGHT ­ For class 372
Visible light is radiation which stimulates the optical receptors of the eye, and having a
wavelength from 3850 to 7600 Angstrom units. The term light is used to refer to
wavelengths in the above­mentioned range and, often, also to refer to the ranges
immediately adjacent, i.e., the ultraviolet and infrared ranges which are nonvisible.
LIGNIN ­ For class 510
Denotes a material usually derived during paper pulp manufacture by separation of the
cellulose from wood. Lignin is considered to be the binder for cellulose in wood. Lignin
includes crude mixtures of lignose, lignone, and lignin. Lignin, per se, is a complex
structure having some aromatic rings and phenolic groups.
LIGNIN ­ For class 520
Denotes a material usually derived during paper pulp manufacture by separation of the
cellulose from wood. Lignin is considered to be the binder for cellulose in wood. Lignin
includes crude mixtures of lignose, lignone and lignin. Lignin per se is a complex structure
having some aromatic rings and phenolic groups.
LIGNIN DERIVATIVE ­ For class 520
Denotes materials not otherwise provided for, derived from lignin or from sulfite or soda
paper pulping processes, e.g., sodium lignosulfonate, waste sulfite liquor, black liquor, etc.
LINE CIRCUIT ­ For class 363
The main power path between the source and the load.
LINE DEFECT ­ For class 257
A planar crystal defect (e.g., an extra plane of atoms in a crystal). It is also called an
edge dislocation.
LINEAR MOVEMENT MOTORS ­ For class 318
A motor having means for causing the working element to move in a substantially linear or
uni­directional path. The path may be straight, curved, tortuous, or even closed upon
itself, provided the movable element is not pivoted for rotation about an axis. The motor
may have means for reversing the direction of movement of the movable element. Where
the reversing means includes means for periodically or repeatedly reversing the motor at
predetermined intervals, the motor system is considered to be an oscillating or
reciprocating motor system. See the Glossary definition of Oscillating Or Reciprocating
Motor.
LINER ­ For class 166
A column of casing having screen forming perforations which does not extend to the top of
the well and which is usually the lowest column of casing in the well. The liner is placed in
position by lowering it from the top of the well through the casing sections already placed
in well. The perforations may be formed before the liner is run into the well or after. The
liner is sometimes surrounded by a perforated section of casing, the liner then becoming a
secondary lining section of the well.
LINE­SPACE ­ For class 400
The distance caused by relative movement between a record­medium* and a print­point*
of a type­member* against the record­medium, which movement effects separation of one
print­line* of typed text from a subsequently imprinted line of typed text on the same
page* of text. It is effected by incremental relative movement that occurs in a direction
perpendicular to the direction in which a print­line is formed. In most typewriters the type­
member is impressed in substantially the same area of the typewriter and the record­
medium is effectively held to a platen* which moves incrementally between successive
print­lines, but in some typewriters the type­member and its actuating mechanism moves
in a corresponding direction in incremental movements between successive print­lines.
Thus, in most typewriters, line­space movement is a specific form of record­medium
movement, but line­space movement is a determinate, incremental movement in selected
units of distance or in multiples or fractions thereof. If a unit of distance is considered as
one line­space, the multiples would include two or three line­spaces and the fractions
would include one­half, one and one­half, or two and one­half line­spaces, all these
distances being selected by the user of a typewriter according to the needs of the user.
The most significant aspect of line­space movement is that it is related to a preceding or
succeeding print­line on the record­medium as distinguished from record­medium
movement which is not related to a print­line, but rather is an indeterminate movement.
LINGUISTICS ­ For class 704
The study of human speech including the units, nature, structure, and modification of
language.
LINING­ For class 412
The material used for or process of reinforcing the back() of a bound book(*) by gluing a
strip of the material to the back(*) of the book.
LINK ­ For class 049
A type of lever which is pivoted at two or more points along its length, usually at its
extremities.
LINOLEIC ACID ­ For class 516
A diunsaturated fatty acid, the glyceride of which is present in drying oils such as linseed
oil. CH3(CH2) 4CH=CHCH2CH=CH(CH2)7COOH.
LINOLENIC ACID ­ For class 516
A triunsaturated fatty acid, the glyceride of which is present in drying oils such as linseed
oil. CH3CH 2CH=CHCH2CH=CHCH2CH=CH(CH2)7COOH.
LIPID ­ For class 977
Water­insoluble organic substances naturally found in cells that are extractable by
nonpolar solvents such as chloroform, ether, or benzene. Lipids generally serve four
general functions: (1) as structural components of membranes; (2) as intracellular storage
depots of metabolic fuel; (3) as a transport form of metabolic fuel; and (4) as protective
components of cell walls of many organisms. Some examples of natural lipids are long­
chain fatty acids, fatty acid esters, acylglycerols, phosphoglycerides, steroids, waxes,
terpenes, and fat­soluble vitamins.
LIPOSOME ­ For class 977
Particle with a lipid­containing outer wall that has an interior space that may contain
various molecule types.
LIQUID ­ For class 210
A flowable material comprising at least one component that is a true liquid under the
conditions of treatment. A slurry, wet sludge, pumpable sediment, emulsion, froth, all are
considered liquid for treatment in this class.
LIQUID ­ For class 510
Denotes a shapeless, fluid composition of high incompressibility. Included herein are
pumpable or flowable slurries or suspensions.
LIQUID SORBENT ­ For class 095
A liquid capable of retaining part of a fluid mixture with which it is contacted. The action in
most cases is that of selective retention (i.e., the sorbent removes only that part of the
fluid mixture for which it has the greatest affinity).
LIQUID SORBENT ­ For class 096
A liquid capable of retaining part of a fluid mixture with which it is contacted. The action in
most cases is that of selective retention (i.e., the sorbent removes only that part of the
fluid mixture for which it has the greatest affinity).
LIQUID­LIQUID EXTRACTION ­ For class 423
The process of transferring a substance (fluid or solid) from one liquid phase in which it is
dispersed or dissolved to a second liquid phase which is immiscible with the first liquid.
LIQUID­PHASE SYNTHESIS ­ For class 506
This terminology covers both solution­phase syntheses (i.e., reactions involving only one
liquid phase) as well as syntheses in multiple liquid­phase systems (i.e., involving more
than one liquid phase). The latter is concerned with syntheses performed on a liquid
macromolecular compound such as polyethylene glycol (PEG), on dendrimers, or wherein a
fluorocarbon phase is present in the system (fluorous synthesis).
LOAD ­ For class 330
The electric device or circuit which utilizes the output signal derived from the amplifier
after the input signal has controlled the electric power supply by means of the amplifying
device to yield a signal which is a replica of the input signal but usually of greater
amplitude.
LOAD ­ For class 388
That device, or system, which is the recipient of the mechanical work output of an electric
motor.
LOAD CIRCUIT ­ For class 322
Includes the system into which the electric energy from the electric generator is supplied,
and may include a load device recited broadly or by name only (such as a welding load) in
some cases. See Lines With Other Classes and Within This Class, above.
LOAD CIRCUIT ­ For class 323
The output terminals which are to be connected to a device which is to be supplied with
electrical energy.
LOAD DEVICE ­ For class 315
The device to which the system supplies electrical energy and which, as claimed,
constitutes the final or ultimate device for utilizing the electrical energy of the system.
LOAD DEVICE ­ For class 475
Mechanism which receives rotational power from an output member* to put such rotational
power to useful work.
LOAD LASHING RETAINER ­ For class 410
Retainer which includes flaccid material accommodating means, the virtue of the flaccidity
being in its infinite deflective capacity so that the means can (inter alia) (a) closely
conform to exterior configurations of load units, (b) extend in guided changes in direction
from the locus of securement to the freight carrier to that of the retentive engagement
with the load unit, and (c) most particularly, under subjection to force multiplying means,
be so tightly engaged with the load unit, and over such critical configurations of the load
unit surface that the engagement of this nature constitutes load unit retention. A load
lashing retainer may consist of a combination of rigid material and flaccid material
elements provided that the flaccid material element (or member) is significant in the
combination. Significance is present when the flaccid material element member is used (a)
to attach the load lashing retainer to the freight carrier or retentively to connect with the
load unit, or (b) to extend between the freight carrier attachment member and load unit
securement member (one or both of which members are rigid) to impart to the load
lashing retainer made up of these members unique advantages of flaccidity described in
the preceding paragraph. Not all flaccid load unit accommodating relationships are, in fact,
retentive. Tight encirclement of the load (i.e., wraparound lashing) tautened engagement
with the load under the effect of force multiplying means, and a tiedown (defined
hereinbelow) do, however, invariably accomplish load lashing retention.
LOAD, LOAD DEVICE, OR LOAD CIRCUIT ­ For class 320
Any electrical device for usefully converting or consuming electrical energy other than
those devices which are merely accessory, auxiliary, or appurtenant to the source and/or
the circuit which supplies electric energy. [An accessory or auxiliary device is a device
used to affect operation, control, or care of a source and/or supply circuit and may, for
example, comprise a device employed: (i) to test, indicate, or measure a condition of or in
a source or supply circuit, or (ii) to regulate or control the flow of electric energy from or
through the source or supply circuit.]
LOAD: ­ For class 477
Mechanism that receives rotational motion from a gear transmission* or clutch* to do
useful work.
LOAD­BEARING ­ For class 052
A construction or component which is sufficiently strong and rigid to act as the primary
support for other constructions or components against gravity or to resist transverse
loading (see sustainer).
LOADED ANTENNA ­ For class 343
An active antenna having an elongated portion of appreciable electrical length and having
additional inductance or capacity directly in series or shunt with the elongated portion so
as to modify the standing wave pattern existing along the portion or to change the
effective electrical length of the portion.
LOADED LINES ­ For class 333
A long line to which lumped impedance elements, usually capacitors or inductors, are
added at regularly spaced points along the length thereof, or to which an added impedance
is applied in a continuous manner, as for example, by wrapping a strip of magnetic
material about the line or device to increase the inductance of the line or device.
LOCAL AREA NETWORK (LAN) ­ For class 370
A relatively short distance data communication network linking computers and other
devices utilizing some type of standard control.
LOCAL OSCILLATOR ­ For class 725
An oscillator in a superheterodyne circuit whose output is mixed with the received signal to
produce a sum or difference frequency equal to the intermediate frequency of the
receiver.
LOCAL OXIDE CMOS (LOCMOS) ­ For class 257
Local oxide complementary metal oxide semiconductor structure which features oxide
isolation which is recessed into the semiconductor surface.
LOCKING MEANS­ For class 024
A component having the sole function of restricting the movement between and holding in
a particular position or orientation (e.g., not moving or reorienting) either (1) one portion
of the fastener relative to another portion of the fastener, or (2) one fastener relative to
another fastener.
LOCOS ­ For class 257
(Local Oxidation of Silicon) Patterns of oxide isolation which are recessed into the
semiconductor surface. Sometimes also called isoplanar, ROX (Recessed Oxide Isolation),
or planox.
LOCOS ­ For class 438
local oxidation of silicon
LOG ­ For class 144
A longitudinal section cut from a tree*, generally cut normal thereto at both ends.
LOGIC ­ For class 326
The science dealing with the basic principles and applications of truth tables, Boolean
algebra, etc.
LONG LINE ­ For class 330
A wave transmission device or line having distributed parameters and especially designed
to propagate electrical wave energy where the wave length of the transmitted energy is
relatively short when compared with the length of the transmission line or device. The
impedance of a long line is practically fixed by the constants of the line itself. The length
of the transmission line or device may be a multiple or a fraction of a wave length, e.g.,
1/4, 1/2, etc., or otherwise have its length proportioned to the wave length of the energy
with which it is to be used.
LONG LINE ­ For class 333
A wave transmission device or line having distributed parameters and especially designed
to propagate electrical wave energy where the wave length of the transmitted energy is
relatively short when compared with the length of the transmission line or device. The
impedance of a long line is practically fixed by the constants of the line itself. The length
of the transmission line or device may be a multiple or a fraction of a wave length, e.g.,
1/4, 1/2, etc., or otherwise have its length proportioned to the wave length of the energy
with which it is to be used.
LONG LINE ELEMENT ­ For class 330
A circuit element having distributed parameters, such as a resonator, or a wave guide. A
long line element may be a part of a long line wave transmission device or used in a
network with other circuit elements of the lumped parameter type, for example, as in the
case of delay networks, impedance matching networks, wave filters.
LONG LINE ELEMENT ­ For class 333
A circuit element having distributed parameters, such as a resonator, or a wave guide. A
long line element may be a part of a long line wave transmission device or used in a
network with other circuit elements of the lumped parameter type, for example, as in the
case of delay networks, impedance matching networks, wave filters.
LONGITUDINAL ­ For class 172
A direction which is parallel to the line of draft of a tool over the earth unless some other
meaning is clearly indicated.
LONGITUDINAL ­ For class 226
As used in this class, the term refers to the direction along the length of the
indeterminate­length* material.
LOOP ­ For class 352
A slack portion of a motion picture film strip useful to isolate tensionally derived speed
variations.
LOOP PATH ­ For class 330
In an amplifier having signal feedback, the path of the signal from the input point where
the signal feedback is applied forward through the amplifier to the point in the circuit from
which the signal feedback is derived through the signal feedback path to the aforesaid
input point.
LOPED ­ For class 438
lift­off using edge detection
LOW WORK FUNCTION ELECTRODE (cold cathode, cathodes containing or coated
with electron emissive material) ­ For class 313
A cathode containing or coated with a material which readily emits electrons, i.e., a
material which has a low work function. Examples of such materials are the alkali metals
and their oxides, alkaline earth metals and their oxides, thorium, magnesium. The
expression ​
glow work function electrode​
h includes thermionic electrodes which contain or
are coated with electron emissive material, photosensitive cathodes, secondary emissive
cathodes as well as cathodes which emit electrons without being heated.
LOWER­CASE ­ For class 400
A ​
gsmall​
h letter, similar in appearance to this text, as opposed to upper­case*. The names
lower­case and upper­case are derived from the printing art during the period when type­
faces* were handpicked and handset, the type being picked from a tray in which the
capital or upper­case type were held in compartments physically located above the
compartments for the small or lower­case type.
LPCVD ­ For class 438
low­pressure chemical vapor deposition
LPE ­ For class 438
liquid phase epitaxy
LRP ­ For class 438
limited reaction processing
LSI ­ For class 438
large scale integration
LSSL ­ For class 438
lateral surface superlattice
LST ­ For class 438
logic service terminal
LTCC ­ For class 438
low temperature co­fired ceramic
LTG ­ For class 438
low temperature growth
LTO ­ For class 438
low temperature oxidation
LUMBER ­ For class 144
Building material cut from a tree*, generally cut from a log*, generally without bark*.
LUMINESCENCE ­ For class 257
Emission of light by directly converting some other type of energy. Types include
thermoluminescence, photoluminescence, cathodoluminescence, and electroluminescence.
It includes fluorescence and phosphorescence. Active solid­state luminescent devices are
semiconductors which operate via injection luminescence. Active devices include pn
junctions (including heterojunctions), Schottky barrier junctions, metal­insulator­
semiconductor (MIS) structures, and high speed traveling domains, e.g., Gunn domain and
acoustoelectric wave generated domains; whereas passive solid­state electroluminescent
devices (phosphors) are insulators which operate in an intrinsic luminescence phenomena,
i.e., where an applied electric field generates free carriers (there being no free carriers in
an insulator to be accelerated by an applied field unless the field also generates them) to
initiate the light emission mechanism.
LUMINESCENCE ­ For class 438
The emission of visible or invisible radiation unaccompanied by high temperature by any
substance as a result of absorption of exciting energy in the form of photons, charged
particles, or chemical change. It is a general term which includes fluorescence and
phosphorescence. Types include hemiluminescence, bioluminescence, photoluminescence,
electroluminescence, photoluminescence, and triboluminescence. Active solid­state
luminescent devices are semiconductors which operate via injection luminescence. Active
devices include pn junctions (including heterojunctions), Schottky barrier junctions, metal­
insulator­semiconductor (MIS) structures, and high speed traveling domains (e.g., Gunn
domain and acoustoelectric wave generated domains). Passive solid­state
electroluminescent devices (phosphors) are insulators which operate in an intrinsic
luminescence phenomena (i.e., where an applied electric field generates free carriers) to
initiate the light emission mechanism, there being no free carriers in an insulator to be
accelerated by an applied field unless the field also generates them.
LUMPED PARAMETERS OR IMPEDANCES ­ For class 333
When the impedance of a transmission line or device at the operating frequency may be
considered as equivalent to devices concentrated at one point, and the parameters of the
system including the line or device is not substantially independent of the load devices
connected thereto, the transmission line or device may be said to have lumped
parameters. Lumped impedances is also used to include devices such as capacitors,
inductors, and resistors which have their impedance concentrated at the terminals thereof.
MACHINE ­ For class 015
Defined in this class as an organization including a mechanism, which contains within itself
its own guide for operation, to move either (1) a cleaning agency, or a coating agency of a
type recognized in this class, relative to the work surface or (2) a means to constrain the
work and said agency to some type of definite relative motion in response to manual or
other actuation. (Note: A guide on a stripping brush aids in directing the brush but does
not constrain it to any definite path other than that determined by the work itself).
MACHINE ­ For class 184
The term ​
gmachine​
h includes any device having bearing parts.
MACHINE ­ For class 249
Usually a power driven (e.g., motor) organization including a mechanism, which contains
within itself its own guide for operation which once commenced the operator lacks control
thereover except for starting and stopping the same.
MACHINE ­ For class 355
A complete unit in itself for imaging an original or carrier onto a receiver. It may also
include means for developing, transferring and fixing the image, as well as means for
handling the record carrier on which the image is fixed.
MACHINE ­ For class 399
A complete unit, in itself, for imaging an original or carrier onto a receiver. It may also
include means for developing, transferring, and fixing the image, as well as means for
handling the record carrier on which the image is fixed.
MACHINE ­ For class 407
An assembly of components adapted to support work and a tool* and bring them together
to perform a shaping operation by piercing the work with the tool and removing a chip
therefrom. Specifically, a machine for use with the cutter of this class will be a ​
gmilling,
gear cutting, or planing​
h machine or a lathe.
MACHINE­FRAME ­ For class 408
Structure relative to which a tool moves during operation, which structure is of particular
utility due to its physical configuration for supporting the weight of a tool or for
counteracting the thrust of the tool, wherein the tool to be supported or the force of which
is to be counteracted is adapted to perform an operation of this class type.
MACHINING ­ For class 029
The physical act of or means for shaping by removing material by means of a cutting
edge. This term includes milling, cutting, turning, boring, drilling, abrading, broaching,
filing, sawing, punching, blanking, and planing.
MACROSCOPIC ­ For class 510
Denotes a shape discernible by the naked eye.
MAGNETIC ­ For class 400
A property of nature resulting in attraction or orientation of a ferrous material relative to a
body having such a property. Examples of such a body include the earth, a loadstone, and
a coil of wire in an electrical circuit, all of which have, or can generate, a magnetic field.
Magnetism is used to produce a force, as in a magnetic solenoid, or to transmit a force, as
in a magnetic clutch. Magnetic also describes a property inherent in an auxiliary­record­
program* containing ferrous particles capable of being oriented or reoriented relative to
the auxiliary record, the orientation of the particles being sensed to effect a typing
operation in response to the sensing.
MAGNETIC ­ For class 428
A material exhibiting the inherent property of magnetism, which is dependent on the
electronic configuration of the atom, crystalline and molecular structure, and coupling
between electrons arising from the orbital and spin magnetic moments of the nucleus and
electrons. A material is considered magnetic for the purposes of this class if it exhibits a
nonzero magnetic moment, such as in paramagnetism, ferromagnetism, and
ferrimagnetism.
MAGNETIC BODY ­ For class 336
Same as "CORE" above.
MAGNETIC FORCE MICROSCOPE ­ For class 977
Scanning probe microscope in which a magnetic force causes the tip to move.
MAGNETIC MIRRORS ­ For class 376
See Mirror Field.
MAGNETICALLY CONTROLLED SPACE DISCHARGE DEVICE ­ For class 331
An active element comprising means for producing a space discharge of charged particles
and having further means for subjecting the space discharge to the direct control of a
magnetic field and an electric field.
MAGNETOSTRICTIVE MOTOR ­ For class 318
A motor having a magnetizable member or which has its dimensions changed as a result
of changing currents in the electromagnetic field producing means which effects the
magnetizable member, the physical distortion or change in dimensions producing the
mechanical energy.
MAGNETRON ­ For class 331
A magnetically controlled space discharge device comprising a linear cathode, an anode,
usually cylindrical, coaxial therewith, the magnetic field being parallel to longitudinal axis
of the cathode, while the electric field is transverse thereto.
MAGNITUDE OR LEVEL CONTROL ­ For class 323
Includes controlling either the amplitude of the current or voltage or controlling the
average or effective value of the current or voltage, even through the amplitude is not
controlled.
MAHOGANY ACIDS; MAHOGANY SOAP ­ For class 516
The oil soluble sulfonic acid products of sulfonation of petroleum oils. Cf. green* acids.
Mahogany soaps are the saponified acids.
MAINSTREAM ­ For class 210
The main body of liquid being treated as constrasted with separated constituents. The
mainstream may comprise several divided streams, some of which undergo treatment and
which are a substantial part of the overall feed but a relatively small stream diverted for a
dosing technique in which agents are added in a concentrated amount and the diverted
stream is diluted with the main body is not considered to be the mainstream, per se. A
recirculated portion of the stream is not considered to be the mainstream.
MAJORITY CARRIER ­ For class 257
The predominant charge carrier in a semiconductor. Electrons are majority carriers in n­
type semiconductors. Holes are majority carriers in p­type semiconductors.
MAJORITY CARRIER ­ For class 438
The predominant charge carrier in a semiconductor. Electrons are majority carriers in n­
type semiconductors. Holes are majority carriers in p­type semiconductors.
MAJORITY CARRIERS ­ For class 330
See the definition of N­ or P­type conductivity below.
MAJORITY CURRENT ­ For class 257
Current caused by the flow of majority carriers.
MALLEABLEIZING ­ For class 148
A process applied to cast irons whereby the combined carbon in the as­cast microstructure
is graphitized to form temper carbon. When combined with decarburization of the surface,
the resulting product is termed white­heart malleable iron.
MANDREL ­ For class 425
A shaping form over or around which material is shaped or a preform is resized.
MANIFOLDING ­ For class 462
The process of simultaneously producing indicia on an under­body* such as a flexible
sheet+ or strip* by impression* of such indicia on an upper­body*.
MANIPULATE ­ For class 269
see ​
gHAND​
h
MANIPULATING ­ For class 173
Moving the tool drive from one place to another to perform a function upon work. This
movement is separate from or in addition to the advance movement of the tool.
MANIPULATING HANDLE ­ For class 173
A means specifically intended to be grasped by the hand or hands of an operator to move
the tool drive, of which it forms a part, to different positions with respect to the work, and
to be continually grasped by the operator as the tool advances in performing a function
upon work.
MANUFACTURE ­ For class 141
In order to draw a line with the manufacturing classes which may include filling, the term
is used here as meaning an operation on material, or apparatus for operating on material,
to effect a permanent or irreversible change in the physical character of the material, e.g.
cutting, crushing, shaping and boring, or to arrange the parts of an article of manufacture
into their desired relation, i.e., assembling.
MANUFACTURING ­ For class 029
The physical act of or means for creating, constructing, fabricating, machining, working,
shaping, assembling, disassembling, and repairing of machines, devices, and things
(articles).
MARGIN ­ For class 400
The distance from an edge of the record­medium* to the closest character* symbol of a
print­line* to that edge. The term is most usually used when a plurality of print­lines are
typed and the first imprinted characters of each of the print­lines are all equally spaced
from the edge. When typing any language that is read from left to right, the left margin is
the distance from the left edge to these first characters and will usually be parallel to that
edge, whereas the right margin is the distance of the right edge to the last characters of
the successive print­lines. However, because the number of characters in a print­line is
subject to chance, the right margin will usually not be equally spaced from the right edge
unless ​
gjustification​
h is performed. For a discussion of justification, see (1) Note to the
definition of subclass 1 below.
MARGIN­STOP ­ For class 400
A member that is used to stop the movement of a carriage* when the carriage reaches the
margin* of the record­medium*. The margin­stop of a platen* carriage (see the definition
of carriage in this Glossary) is usually mounted on the platen carriage for movement
therewith and cooperates with a stop fixed to the frame of the typewriter, whereas the
margin­stop of a ​
gtypehead­carriage​
h (see the definition of carriage in this Glossary) is
usually mounted on the frame of the typewriter and cooperates with a stop mounted on
the type­head carriage for movement therewith, but in either typewriter one margin­stop
may be set for various margin distances for the left margin and another margin­stop may
be set for various margin distances for the right margin.
MARK ­ For class 347
A discrete area on the medium which contains the plurality of portions*. Unless otherwise
indicated, ​
gmark​
h and ​
gsymbol​
h are used synonymously in the subclass definitions of this
class.
MARKING ­ For class 347
The specific manner by which the mark* is formed; e.g., ink jet, impact, thermal, electric
(e.g., toner applied to a latent image), or radiation.
MARKUP LANGUAGE ­ For class 715
Any language that provides ways to indicate attributes in TEXT*.
MARTEMPERING ­ For class 148
A process which involves preliminary quenching of austenized metal to a temperature just
above the Ms temperature and holding until the temperature is equalized throughout the
metal, followed by air cooling through the martensite transformation range and subsequent
reheating to produce tempered martensite of the desired strength level.
MARVERING ­ For class 065
Rolling a gather of glass on a flat plate whereby it is shaped and cooled.
Masking ­ For class 704
1. The interference with the perception of one sound (the signal) with another sound (the
masker). 2. The number of decibels by which a masking sound will raise (or change) a
listener"s threshold of audibility of other sounds.
MASS ­ For class 428
A body of material of indefinite or indeterminate shape. (Structural)
MASTER ­ For class 060
An expansible chamber device which provides a contracting volume to expel fluid from the
chamber or to place the fluid therein under pressure. All valve means or chamber means
associated with the expansible chamber device are included under this definition.
MASTER ­ For class 355
(a) The negative or positive original from which reproductions are made; (b) a microform
copy which is used for the production of copies; or (c) a copy from which additional
reproductions are made.
MASTER ­ For class 399
(a) The negative or positive original from which reproductions are made, (b) a microform
copy used for the production of copies, or (c) a copy from which additional reproductions
are made.
MASTER CYLINDER ­ For class 060
An art term applied to a unitary assembly of a master and its associated holder of a
reserve supply of make­up fluid.
MASTER­KEY ­ For class 070
One designed for control of all of a plurality or series of lock operating mechanisms, each
of which has its individually distinct operating means or implement.
MASTERSLICE ARRAY/MASTERCHIP ­ For class 257
A substrate that contains active and passive electronic components in a predetermined
pattern which may be connected into different logic or analog circuits.
MASTERSLICE ARRAY/MASTERCHIP ­ For class 438
A substrate that contains active and passive electronic components in a predetermined
pattern which may be connected into different logic or analog circuits.
MATCH PLATE PATTERN ­ For class 164
A pattern plate with several patterns secured thereto or a plate having matching pattern
portions mounted on opposite sides.
MATERIAL ­ For class 100
The solid substance subjected to compressive force or about which a binder is applied.
MATERIAL ­ For class 226
The work, stock, web, strand or other interconnected stuff which is being advanced.
MATERIAL ­ For class 366
A mass of fluid, viscous, particulate, or plastic substance which is to be agitated.
MATERIAL ­ For class 401
A liquid or solid substance which is intended to be applied to a work surface as a coating.
MATERIAL ­ For class 516
Material is given its broadest meaning and includes mixtures (petroleum, alloys, cement,
etc.) and substances*.
MATERIAL GUIDE ­ For class 141
Means other than funnels to direct material from supply to receiver without forming a
flow­confining connection between them. Examples of material guides in this class are: (1)
A nonflow support for contents material associated with a receiver support over which the
material can be pushed or moved manually into the receiver; (2) A flow directing
detachable extension of a receiver inlet which may be either tubular or channel­shaped in
cross­section. If tubular and tapering, it must either engage the receiver externally or be
located entirely within the receiver. Cf funnel, above; or (3) An extension of a supply
container which is hand held, the extension being designed to engage the receiver and
direct the flow thereto.
MATING PART ­ For class 439
A coupling part for electrically connecting with a specific coupling part. Actually a coupling
part and a mating part are structurally the same, the distinct terminology is used in this
class as an aid to expression.
MATING­MEMBER ­ For class 227
A ​
gmating­member​
h. A. discrete element which has as its sole disclosed function that of
aiding in maintaining a driven member in its penetrated relationship with the work, or has
such a peculiar shape as to be obviously intended to perform this sole function; this sole
function being accomplished by permanent interassociation or interlocking of the member
and the ​
gmating­member​
h. (Note­A ​
gmating­member​
h for the purposes of this class is
considered a workpiece.)
MATRIX ­ For class 149
As used in this class refers to a shapeless mass resulting by solidifying at least one
component from either its liquid or molten state in more or less a continuous phase and
wherein there is dispersed throughout at least a second component in particulate form and
in substantially a discontinuous phase.
MAXWELL­BOLTZMANN STATISTICS ­ For class 977
Statistical distribution of classical (nonquantum) particles, such as molecules in a gas,
etc., between energy states.
MBE ­ For class 117
Molecular Beam Epitaxy*.
MBE ­ For class 438
molecular beam epitaxy
MBM JUNCTION ­ For class 257
Active solid­state devices having metal­barrier­metal layer junctions.
MBM JUNCTION ­ For class 438
Active solid­state devices having metal­barrier­metal layer junctions.
mc ­ For class 438
microcrystalline
MCM ­ For class 438
multichip module
MCT ­ For class 438
(a) MOS controlled thyristor or (b) HgCdTe
MCz ­ For class 438
magnetic Czoshralski
MEASURING­TESTING ­ For class 356
Measuring usually involves a more precise and quantitative determination of the
characteristic or property in question. Testing may be a mere indication of the presence or
absence of the characteristic or property, and may involve only a mere inspection or
viewing of the phenomenon or specimen. It should be recognized that the two terms
overlap to some extent in meaning.
MECHANICAL­INTERLOCK BOND ­ For class 425
A joint made by random lapping of discrete pieces, (e.g., as in a bale of paper, etc.).
MEDIA ­ For class 435
Material which supports or sustains growth of microorganisms which material may contain
substances which will not support or may inhibit the growth of selected microorganisms.
MEDIA/MEDIA TYPES ­ For class 715
A way of presenting information, including TEXT, audio, video or image.
MEDIUM ­ For class 347
A substrate on which the visibly distinguishable or latent symbol or mark is formed.
MEETING FACE ­ For class 228
That portion of a work part* intended to abut and be fusion bonded to another similar
portion of the same or another work part.
Mel ­ For class 704
A subjective measure of pitch based upon a signal of 1000 Hz. being defined as "1000
mels" where a perceived frequency twice as high is defined as 2000 mels and half as high
as 500 mels.
MELT ­ For class 164
Metal that has been melted in preparation for casting.
MEM ­ For class 438
micro­electromechanical
MEMBER ­ For class 227
An object, or the end portion of indeterminate length material, comprising at least one
pointed and/or generally elongated rod­like or tubular projection disclosed as being
intended to penetrate* work* when the member, or the work, is engaged and bodily
moved by a driver* substantially in the directing of said projection(s).
MEMBER ­ For class 403
One of a plurality of structures which are connected. See (1) Note.
MEMBER(S) ­ For class 277
These are component(s) that make up the seal.
MEMBRANE ­ For class 210
A skinlike thin film which acts as a barrier or container wall; the usual form of a
permeable or semipermeable septum. A semipermeable membrane is a skinlike, relatively
thin film which serves to define a barrier or container wall to at least one of the
constituents of a solution or colloidal suspension and allows at least one other constituent
to pass through by a mechanism which may include but goes beyond mere straining and
which mechanism is in part due to differences in behavior of the constituents of the
solution or suspension with respect to the material of the membrane. The constituents
vary in their ability to diffuse through or to wet the membrane. Membranelike includes
mambrane, per se, and material which, while not strictly in a self­supporting skinlike
structure, functions in an analogous manner and includes a layer of fine particulate matter
or an emulsion as set out in subclass 643. A process which depends only on the relative
size of pores and molecules or ions of a constituent is a filtering or straining process and
is classified under separation, subclass 767.
MEMORY ­ For class 345
A functional unit to which data can be stored and from which data can be retrieved.
MEMORY ­ For class 706
A functional unit to which data can be stored and which data can be retrieved.
MEMORY ­ For class 707
A functional unit to which data can be stored and from which data can be retrieved.
MEMORY ­ For class 709
A functional unit to which data can be stored and from which data can be retrieved.
MEMORY ­ For class 710
A functional unit to which data can be stored and from which data can be retrieved.
MEMORY ­ For class 711
A functional unit to which data can be stored and from which data can be retrieved.
MEMORY ­ For class 712
A functional unit to which data can be stored and from which data can be retrieved.
MEMORY ­ For class 713
A functional unit to which data can be stored and from which data can be retrieved.
MEMORY ­ For class 714
A functional unit to which data can be stored and from which data can be retrieved.
MEMORY ­ For class 718
A functional unit to which data can be stored and from which data can be retrieved.
MEMORY ­ For class 719
A functional unit to which data can be stored and from which data can be retrieved.
MEMS (MICROELECTROMECHANICAL SYSTEMS) ­ For class 977
Systems including components from 1­100 microns in size with a movable member and an
electrical input and/or output to the movable member; refers to scanning probes and other
devices interfacing with the nanoscale; differentiated from nanotechnology not just in size
but also via top­down versus bottom­up manufacturing approach.
MENSURATION ­ For class 356
Measurement of lengths, areas, or volumes.
MER ­ For class 516
The part of a monomer which is present in the reaction product of a reaction involving
what is commonly referred to as a monomer (e.g., dimer, trimer, tetramer, oligomer).
MESFET ­ For class 438
metal semiconductor FET (Schottky gate)
MESSAGE ­ For class 342
A signal used to convey intelligence, such as telephone signals (e.g., speech). ​
gMessage​
h
is used in a more limited sense than ​
gsignal​
h for the purpose of classification in this class,
in that ​
gsignal​
h includes the transmission of control impulses for operating mechanisms
other than mere signal reproducers.
MESSAGE ­ For class 343
A signal used to convey intelligence, such as telegraph signals or telephone signals (e.g.,
speech). Message is used in more limited sense than signal for the purpose of
classification in this class in that signal includes the transmission of control impulses for
operation mechanism other than mere signal reproducers.
MESSAGE ­ For class 725
In telecommunications, a combination of characters and symbols transferred from one
point to another.
METAL ­ For class 060
The term includes a free metallic element (e.g., lithium), an alloy of two or more metals
(e.g., 25% Na 75% K), and intermetallic compound (e.g., A1Ni) or a mere mixture of
particles of two or more metals.
METAL ­ For class 072
The material subjected to an operation of the class type; an elemental metal or alloy of
mixture thereof in self­shape­sustaining state (i.e., not molten, gaseous, or powdered);
metal as the term is employed in Class 29, Metal Working, and Class 148, Metal
Treatment.
METAL ­ For class 117
Element other than non­metal* (see non­metal*).
METAL ­ For class 216
As found in the periodic table of the elements, is any element not named in the following
listing, all group VIII, VIIB, VIB elements except polonium, nitrogen, phosphorus, carbon,
silicon, and boron.
METAL ­ For class 228
Material which may be subjected to an operation of the class type; an elemental metal or
alloy of mixture of metals in self­shape­sustaining state (i.e., not molten, gaseous, or
powdered).
METAL ­ For class 428
A material having a continuous phase of any element of the periodic table except
hydrogen, a noble gas, a halogen, a chalcogen (oxygen, sulfur, selenium, tellurium),
nitrogen, phosphorus, carbon and boron. Elemental silicon is considered to be a metal, but
a silicon compound is not considered to be a metal compound on the basis of silicon
content. The term ​
gmetal compound​
h in a subclass title does not include glass or asbestos,
unless specifically included by title or definition. The metal may be a pure metal or an
alloy as defined in Class 75, Specialized Metallurgical Processes, Compositions for Use
Therein, Consolidated Metal Powder Compositions, and Loose Metal Particulate Mixtures,
subclass 122, (1) Note. An intermetallic compound of two or more metals, e.g., a metal
silicide, aluminide, etc., is considered to be an alloy. (Nonstructural or Composition)
METAL ­ For class 502
An element that is not designated a nonmetal as listed infra. Nonmetals are H, B, C, Si, N,
P, O, S, Se, Te, Halogens (F, Cl, Br, I, At,) and noble gases (He, Ne, Ar, Kr, Xe, Rn). The
various types or groups of metals are as set out at the beginning of the schedule.
METAL CORROSION ­ For class 510
For purposes of this class, the term denotes impairment or deterioration of a metal
surface, such as erosion, embrittlement, tarnishing, or discoloration, usually by chemical
action.
METAL­ For class 075
Element other than nonmetal (q.v.).
METAL­ For class 420
Element other than nonmetal (q.v.)
METAL, NON­SEMICONDUCTOR ­ For class 117
See NON­SEMICONDUCTOR METAL.
METAL­GATE FET ­ For class 257
A field effect transistor having a gate conductor made of metal, rather than polycrystalline
semiconductor material.
METALLIC ­ For class 428
Composed entirely of metal* or having adjacent metal components. Since autogenous
bonding of two metallic parts is thought to involve inherently either a diffusion or alloying
between constituents of the two parts, this diffusion or alloy layer, even though of
appreciable thickness, does not prevent the undiffused or unalloyed regions from being
considered. (Structural)
METALLIC COMPOSITION ­ For class 075
A composition which contains a continuous phase of metal and no continuous phase of
nonmetal.
METALLIC COMPOSITION ­ For class 420
A composition which contains a continuous phase of metal and no continuous phase of
nonmetal.
METALLIZATION ­ For class 257
A single or multilayer film pattern of electrically conductive material deposited on a
substrate to interconnect electronic components, or the metal film on the bonding area of
a substrate which becomes part of the bond and performs both an electrical and a
mechanical function.
METALLIZATION ­ For class 438
Process of coating (a) metal or (b) other material which is identified as having the
conductive characteristic of a metal onto a semiconductor or a substrate containing
semiconductor regions to form electrodes, contacts, interconnects, bonding pads, or heat
sinks and also including formation of conductive material by doping of nonconductive
material.
METAL­OXIDE SEMICONDUCTOR FIELD EFFECT TRANSISTOR (MOSFET) ­ For class
257
See INSULATED GATE FIELD EFFECT TRANSISTOR.
METAL­OXIDE SEMICONDUCTOR FIELD EFFECT TRANSISTOR (MOSFET) ­ For class
438
See Insulated­gate Field Effect Transistor.
METALS ­ For class 257
Elements other than non­metals. See NON­METALS.
METALS ­ For class 520
Are limited to elements of atomic numbers 3, 4, 11­13, 19­33, 37­51, 55­84, 87, and
higher. Note. The Group IA metals are Li, Na, K, Rb, Cs, Fr. Note. The Group IIA metals
are Be, Mg, Ca, Sr, Ba, Ra. Note. The Group IIIA metals are Ai, Ga, In, Ti. Note. The
Group IVA metals are Ge, Sn, Pb. Note. The Group VA metals are As, Sb, Bi. Note. The
Group VIA metal is Po. Note. The Group IB metals are Cu, Ag, Au. Note. The Group IIB
metals are Zn, Cd, Hg. Note. The Group IIIB metals are Sc, Y, La, Ac. Note. The Group IVB
metals are Ti, Zr, Hf. Note. The Group VB metals are V, Nb, Ta. Note. The Group VIB
metals are Cr, Mo, W. Note. The Group VIIB metals are Mn, Tc, Re. Note. The Group VIII
metals are Fe, Ru, Os, Co, Rh, Ir, Nb, Pd, Pt. Note. ​
gTransition metal​
h is limited to
elements of atomic numbers 21­29, 39­47, 57­79, 89, and higher and does not include Zn,
Cd, and Hg.
METALS AND NONMETALS ­ For class 532
Hydrogen, boron, carbon, silicon, nitrogen, phosphorous, oxygen, sulfur, selenium,
tellurium, the noble gases and the halogens, including astatine, are considered to be
nonmetals. All other elements, including arsenic, are considered metals.
METHINE GROUP ­ For class 008
Methine group refers to ­CH=.
METHYLOL OR METHYLOL DERIVATIVE ­ For class 520
Methylol or methylol derivative is limited to
(a) A compound containing a
(b) A compound containing a T­(­O­A)n
(c) A compound containing a
Y" and Y” are H or hydrocarbon groups; Z is H or a carbon atom. T ­ is an atom other than
C or H. A ­ is a hydrogen or a carbon atom and which carbon atom is bonded to only H,
carbon, or single bonded oxygen atoms. X ­ is H, part of an ether group, or an inorganic
salt. n ­ is two or more, B is one or more.
MF3R ­ For class 438
modified fully­framed fully­recessed isolation
MGSi ­ For class 438
metallurgical­grade silicon
MICROFILTER ­ For class 210
See FILTER.
MICRON ­ For class 210
A linear measurement equal to one millionth of a meter, one thousandth of a mm, 39
millionths of an inch.
MICRO­ORGANISM ­ For class 210
Living plants or animals of a size normally visible only through a microscope and includes
bacteria, yeast, fungi, and virus. For purposes of this class, algae are not considered
micro­organisms. The scope of this term is coextensive with the organisms of Class 435,
Molecular Biology and Microbiology.
MICROORGANISM ­ For class 435
For purposes of this class, bacteria, actinomycetales, cyanobacteria (unicellular algae),
fungi, protozoa, animal cells or plant cells or virus.
MICRO­ORGANISMS ­ For class 506
Bacteria; actinomycetales; single­celled fungi (e.g., yeast, etc.); virus, human, animal, or
plant cells; tissues; protozoa; or unicellular algae.
MICROPROCESSOR ­ For class 388
A circuit which can be programmed with stored instructions to perform a variety of
functions, which functions may include, for example, one or more modes of motor control.
MICROWAVE ­ For class 725
Pertaining to the portion of the radio frequency spectrum above 1 GHz.
MIM ­ For class 438
metal­insulator­metal
MIM DIODE ­ For class 257
A junction diode with a thin insulating layer of material sandwiched between two metallic
surface layers which operates as a tunneling (direct or Fowler­Nordheim type) diode.
MIM DIODE ­ For class 438
A junction diode with a thin insulating layer of material sandwiched between two metallic
surface layers which operates as a tunneling (direct or Fowler­Nordheim type) diode.
MINERAL OIL ­ For class 208
Included in this term are natural petroleum, asphalt, tars, pitches and waxes which are
primarily mixtures of hydrocarbons. Included also are Fischer­Tropsch crudes, that is, the
liquid hydrocarbonaceous mixture resulting from the hydrogenation of a carbon oxide,
wood tars and wood tar oils which are similar to coal tar in that they include an
unidentified mixture, including hydrocarbons. Solid carbonaceous materials such as coal,
lignite, peat, etc., (as distinguished from solid asphalts or asphalt bearing shales or sands)
are not included.
MINERAL PLASTIC ­ For class 425
A naturally occurring mineral which can be formed into a stone­like product by grinding,
wetting, shaping and burning.
MINERAL­OIL ­ For class 516
Included by this term are (1) materials exploited from the Earth which are liquid, primarily
petroleum oil or relatively crude fractions thereof, which are primarily mixtures of
hydrocarbons, (2) liquid or semi­solid derivatives of solid materials exploited from the
Earth, including asphalts (from petroleum, shale, or sand sources), tars (including coal
tar), pitches, or waxes, which are primarily mixtures of hydrocarbons, (3) materials which
are Fischer­Tropsch crudes, that is, the liquid hydrocarbonaceous mixture resulting from
the hydrogenation of a carbon oxide, (4) wood tars or wood tar oils, which are similar to
coal tar in that they include an unidentified mixture including hydrocarbons. Note:
excluded are (1) substantially purified hydrocarbon compounds, (2) solid carbonaceous
materials such as coal, lignite, or peat (as distinguished from semi­solid petroleum­
derived asphalts or asphalt derived from shales or sands). See section LINES WITH OTHER
CLASSES AND WITHIN THIS CLASS, subsection Glossary References, for additional
information concerning this definition.
MINORITY CARRIER ­ For class 257
The less predominant charge carrier in a semiconductor. In a p­type semiconductor,
minority carriers are electrons, whereas in n­type semiconductor material, minority
carriers are holes.
MINORITY CARRIER ­ For class 438
The less predominant charge carrier in a semiconductor. In a p­type semiconductor,
minority carriers are electrons, whereas in n­type semiconductor material, minority
carriers are holes.
MINORITY CARRIERS ­ For class 330
See the definition of N­ or P­type conductivity below.
MINORITY CURRENT ­ For class 257
The current caused by flowing minority carriers.
MIRROR FIELD ­ For class 376
For confinement of plasma, a system has been devised whereby a longitudinal magnetic
field is applied to the plasma, but instead of being uniform, the field strength is increased
at spaced points. The region of enhanced magnetic field is referred to as a mirror field or
magnetic mirror. Substantially all of the charged particles moving from the region of lower
to that of the higher field strength, will be reflected back into the former region. This field
thus acts as a sort of potential well which inhibits escape of many of the charged particles
(and consequent loss of energy).
MIS ­ For class 257
Acronym for metal­insulator­semiconductor. Typically active solid­state devices with MIS
technology have a silicon dioxide layer formed on a single crystal silicon substrate. A
polysilicon conductor layer is formed on the oxide.
MIS ­ For class 438
Acronym for metal­insulator­semiconductor. Typically active solid­state devices with MIS
technology have a silicon dioxide layer formed on a single crystal silicon substrate. A
polysilicon conductor layer is formed on the oxide.
MISFET ­ For class 438
metal insulator semiconductor IGFET
MISSILE ­ For class 102
Any object thrown, dropped, projected, or propelled for the purpose of making it damage a
target.
MIXING CHAMBER ­ For class 366
A space bounded on at least three sides by well structure within which agitation takes
place. The chamber may be in the form of a trough, a conduit, or a container of any
shape. A supply reservoir or a conveyor for feeding material to a mixing chamber and
which includes means for agitating the material prior to its entry into the mixing chamber
will not be considered a mixing chamber.
MLC ­ For class 438
multilayer ceramic
MLEC ­ For class 438
magnetic LEC
MLO ­ For class 438
multilayer oxide
MLR ­ For class 438
multilayer resist
MMA ­ For class 438
methyl methacrylate
MMIC ­ For class 438
monolithic microwave integrated circuit
MNOS ­ For class 438
metal nitride/oxide IGFET
MOBILITY ­ For class 257
The facility with which carriers move through a semiconductor when subjected to an
applied electric field. Electrons and holes typically have different mobilities in the same
semiconductor.
MOBILITY ­ For class 438
The facility with which carriers move through a semiconductor when subjected to an
applied electric field. Electrons and holes typically have different mobilities in the same
semiconductor.
MOCVD ­ For class 117
Metal­Organic CVD*. CVD in which a precursor* contains an organo­metallic compound.
Also sometimes OMCVD.
MOCVD ­ For class 438
metal organic chemical vapor deposition
MODE ­ For class 372
One of several states of electromagnetic wave oscillation that may be sustained in a given
resonant system. Each type of vibration is designated as a particular mode, and has its
own particular frequency and electric and magnetic field configurations.
MODEM ­ For class 725
A contraction of MOdulator­DEModulator, an equipment that connects data terminal
equipment to a communication line. In broadband networks, a modulator­demodulator
device. The modulator encodes digital information onto an analog carrier signal by varying
the amplitude, frequency, or phase of that carrier. The demodulator extracts digital
information from a similarly modified carrier. A modem transforms digital signals into a
form suitable for transmission over an analog medium.
MODERATED NEUTRONS ­ For class 376
See Thermal Neutrons.
MODERATOR ­ For class 376
For the purpose of this class, is a substance used within a fission reactor core in special
relationship with the fuel to reduce the energy, and hence speed, of fast neutrons (so far
as possible) emanating from the fuel by means of collisions without capturing them.
Graphite and heavy water are examples.
MODFET ­ For class 257
Acronym for a modulation doped field effect transistor. A high speed semiconductor FET in
which dopant atom containing semiconductor layers alternate with non­doped
semiconductor layers, so that the carriers (electrons or holes) resulting from the dopant
atoms can travel in the undoped material, so that there is little scattering of carriers from
dopant atoms. Typically, the dopant atoms are in semiconductor material having a lower
carrier affinity than the undoped layers, to facilitate carrier spill over into the undoped
layers. Such a structure may typically constitute a superlattice. See also HIGH ELECTRON
MOBILITY TRANSISTOR (HEMT).
MODFET ­ For class 438
Acronym for a modulation doped field effect transistor. A high speed semiconductor FET in
which dopant atoms containing semiconductor layers alternate with nondoped
semiconductor layers, so that the carriers (electrons or holes) resulting from the dopant
atoms can travel in the undoped material, so that there is little scattering of carriers from
dopant atoms. Typically, the dopant atoms are in semiconductor material having a lower
carrier affinity than the undoped layers to facilitate carrier spill over into the undoped
layers. Such a structure may typically constitute a superlattice. See also High Electron
Mobility Transistor.
MODFET ­ For class 438
modulation doped MESFET (i.e., HEMT)
MODIFIER ­ For class 362
A recited element or combination of elements whose proximate function in the claimed
combination is, according to the claim or the claimed disclosure, to alter the distribution or
composition of light emitted from a light source by reflecting, refracting, or partially or
completely absorbing the light. Note. Certain terms such as "lens," "shield," "screen," etc.,
are used in the art in some instances to denote modifiers and in other instances to denote
structure whose proximate function is other than to modify light. For example, the term
"lens" is used in some instances to denote means whose proximate function is to refract
light and in other instances to denote merely a transparent window in a light housing
whose proximate function is to protect the light source. Whether or not a means recited in
a claim in such ambiguous terms is to be considered a modifier for placement within this
class must be determined by the proximate function (according to the claim or the claimed
disclosure) of the means in the claimed combination. Note. Certain terms such as "shade,"
"bowl," etc., are used in the art in some instances to denote recited modifiers which,
according to the claim or claimed disclosure, function to modify light in two or more ways
provided for separately in this class. A recited "bowl," for example, may, according to the
claim or claimed disclosure, function in the claimed combination to diffuse light by internal
scattering within the material of which the bowl is made (viz., translucent bowls) and
reflect light from one of its surfaces. Such a modifier is classifiable in the first­occurring
subclass providing for modifiers which perform at least one of its modifying functions.
MODULAR ­ For class 052
A construction utilizing modules.
MODULAR NEURAL NETWORK ­ For class 706
A system of plural neural networks, often of heterogeneous types; e.g., self­organizing
network connected to a feedforward network.
MODULATED CARRIER WAVE ­ For class 455
A wave resulting when the necessary characteristics of an intelligence or information
signal are impressed on a carrier wave.
MODULATED SIGNAL ­ For class 329
A repetitious wave which has had a characteristic thereof varied by a modulating signal.
MODULATING SIGNAL ­ For class 329
An information carrying signal whose informational content is to be impressed on a carrier
or pulse wave.
MODULATING SIGNAL ­ For class 332
Is an information carrying signal whose informational content is to be impressed on a
carrier or pulse wave.
MODULATION DOPING ­ For class 257
Spatial modulation of dopant atoms in a semiconductor crystal.
MODULATOR ­ For class 329
A device which varies a characteristic of a repetitious electrical or electromagnetic wave
of less than infrared frequency in accordance with a characteristic of an arbitrarily varying
modulating signal.
MODULATOR ­ For class 332
Is a device which varies a characteristic of a repetitious electrical or electromagnetic wave
of less than infrared frequency in accordance with a characteristic of an arbitrarily varying
modulating signal.
MODULE ­ For class 052
A component of building construction, usually designated by terms such as; brick, block,
slab, panel, tile, sheet, precast monolith, etc., which when assembled in repetitious
juxtaposition with other such preformed shapes (with or without interposed connecting
means or material) define a surface of a construction, e.g., of a wall, ceiling or floor.
MODULE ­ For class 249
A component of building construction, usually designated by terms as, brick, block, tile,
sheet, etc., which with other such preformed shapes assembled in repetitious juxtaposition
define a surface of construction, e.g., of a wall, ceiling or floor.
MODULE ­ For class 404
Monolithic component such as brick, block, slab, panel, tile, sheet, precast or preformed
member, etc. which may be utilized (1) in repetitious juxtaposition with similar
components, (2) with nonmodular components or (3) alone to constitute road structure.
MOIETY ­ For class 977
Component part of a complex molecule.
MOIL ­ For class 065
Surplus or waste glass which must be removed from the apparatus or a product after a
glass working operation.
MOLD ­ For class 249
See the Class Definition, section A and B.
MOLD ELEMENT ­ For class 249
See the Class Definition, section F.
MOLD WITH CORE ­ For class 249
See the Class Definition, section D.
MOLDING APPARATUS ­ For class 249
A generic term which denotes anyone of the structures set forth in the Class Definition,
sections A ­ F.
MOLECULAR ASSEMBLER or NANOASSEMBLER or ASSEMBLER ­ For class 977
Theoretical conception of a molecular machine capable of building other molecular
structures.
MOLECULAR DISTILLATION ­ For class 203
A high vacuum separatory distillation process for distilling high boiling, heat sensitive
substances in which the distance from the liquid surface to the condensing surface is less
than the mean free path.
MOLECULAR ELECTRONICS or MOLETRONICS ­ For class 977
Electronic devices based on components consisting of individual molecules.
MOLECULAR NANOTECHNOLOGY ­ For class 977
Broadly refers to nanotechnology involving molecules. (Drexlerian) Sometimes used to
distinguish nanotechnology employing theoretical molecular assemblers from other forms
of nanotechnology.
MOLECULAR OR PARTICLE RESONANT OSCILLATOR ­ For class 331
An oscillator wherein the frequency determining element consists of a material medium
comprising particles, molecules or atoms, the application of electrical energy by the
driving means to the medium setting the particles, molecules or atoms into a state of
vibration or oscillation, the vibration or oscillation being that of the particle, molecule or
atom itself and not the vibration or oscillation caused by the translational motion of the
particle, molecule or atom as a whole.
MOLECULAR RESONATOR ­ For class 331
A resonator comprising a material medium and wherein the vibration or oscillation of the
molecules of the medium determines the resonant frequency of the resonator. The
vibration or oscillation is of the molecule itself and not that due to the translational motion
of the molecule as a whole. See, also, above, the definition of a molecular or particle
resonant oscillator.
MOLECULAR SIEVE ­ For class 210
A sorbent with an extremely large volume of pores, each of about molecular size, capable
of selectively sorbing gases and other material in molecular form; generally of Zeolite.
MOMBE ­ For class 117
Metal­Organic Molecular Beam Epitaxy*. MBE in which a precursor* contains an organo­
metallic compound.
MOMOM ­ For class 438
metal­oxide­metal (tunnelling device)
MONITORING ­ For class 725
In communications, the process of observing or tracking system activities.
MONITORING ­ For class 726
Subject matter includes means of watching, tracking, inspecting, analyzing of system or
user activity. This includes the auditing of system vulnerabilities and system configuration,
assessing the integrity of files within a system, identifying and recognizing patterns that
dictate known attacks, analysis of abnormal activity patterns, recognizing user activity in
regards to policy violations and operating system audit trail management.
MONOCHROMATOR ­ For class 356
An instrument for producing a narrow band of the spectrum by dispersing a radiation beam
into its components or colors, and isolating the narrow band desired as by passing the
components or colors through a narrow slit.
MONOCHROME IMAGE ­ For class 430
An image which absorbs only part of the light in the visible electromagnetic spectrum.
MONOCYCLIC RING ­ For class 532
This term denotes a ring which is not part of a polycyclo ring system.
MONOLITH ­ For class 052
A structure erected in situ by casting a water­settable composition, e.g., plaster or
concrete.
MONOLITHIC DEVICE (e.g., IC) ­ For class 257
A device in which all components are fabricated on a single chip of silicon.
Interconnections among components are provided by means of metallization patterns on
the surface of the chip structure, and the individual parts are not separable from the
complete circuit. External connecting wires are taken out to terminal pins or leads.
MONOLITHIC DEVICE (E.G., IC, ETC.) ­ For class 438
A device in which all components are fabricated on a single chip of silicon.
Interconnections among components are provided by means of metallization patterns on
the surface of the chip structure, and the individual parts are not separable from the
complete circuit. External connecting wires are taken out to terminal pins or leads.
MONOPROPELLANT ­ For class 060
A material which contains within itself all of the components which enter into the chemical
change which occurs in producing thrust in a chemical reaction motor. A monopropellant
may be a pure compound, such as hydrazine, or a mixture of two or more substances
which react under the conditions of the reaction chamber.
MORDANT DYE ­ For class 008
Mordant dyes are dyes which require a mordant in their application and which upon
combination with the mordant deposit insoluble color on the substrate, e.g., dyes with
metal chelating groups.
MORDANTS ­ For class 008
Are substances of organic or inorganic origin which combine with the coloring matter and
are used to fix the same in the production of the color. For the purpose of this class, such
materials as oils and sulfonated oils, soaps, fats and higher acids, are not generally
considered as mordants, but as coming within the scope of ​
gassistants​
h in dyeing.
MOS FET ­ For class 117
Metal Oxide Semiconductor Field Effect Transistor.
MOSFET ­ For class 438
metal oxide semiconductor IGFET
MOTION PICTURE ­ For class 352
A pictorial representation of objects which change position with time comprising a plurality
of pictures in which objects are incrementally displaced in successive pictures
corresponding to a displacement in time, the plurality of pictures being displayed
sequentially at such a rate that they create, due to the persistence of vision, an illusion of
motion to the viewer.
MOTION PICTURE APPARATUS ­ For class 352
Instruments and machines for use in recording or reproducing motion pictures, and
includes cameras, projectors, and carriers.
MOTION PICTURE SEQUENCE ­ For class 352
A plurality of individual pictures presented at such a rate as to produce a motion picture.
MOTIVE FLUID ­ For class 060
Fluid that acts to drive a motor. The term is generic to ​
gpulse​
h fluid and ​
gpower​
h fluid.
MOTIVE FLUID ­ For class 060
Includes expansible or nonexpansible fluids, entrained in a system including a pump and
motor, or fluents whose characteristics permit a transmission of energy or flow between a
pump and motor which is not inconsistent with that of the fluents.
MOTIVE FLUID ­ For class 060
Used in this definition this term means a stream of moving particles, either gaseous or
liquid, as it exists in the area in the motor where it is accelerated, pressurized or
otherwise caused to become unstable up to and including the point where it exits the end
of the ejecting means, e.g., nozzle, through which it is ejected into the ambient to cause
thrust.
MOTIVE FLUID ­ For class 091
The fluid (expansible or inexpansible) which is introduced into or withdrawn from a
working chamber of the motor to cause the working member to move. The term ​
gmotive
fluid​
h applies to the fluid from the point of origin to the point of disposal. Fluid which is
withdrawn from the motive fluid supply to perform some other motor function, such as
motor valve operation, is still considered to be motive fluid even though said fluid never
enters the working chamber of the motor. Atmospheric air which acts upon the working
member of a vacuum motor is not considered to be motive fluid unless the atmospheric air
is controlled in some manner, as by valving. In a vacuum motor the fluid which is
evacuated from the working chamber is considered to be exhaust motive fluid and the
atmospheric air, if controlled, is considered to be inlet motive fluid.
MOTIVE FLUID ­ For class 173
A fluid used to drive a motor, and including fluid taken from a stream supplying a motor,
or from a stream exhausting from a motor. Fluid fuel for or fluid exhaust from a
combustion motor is included under this definition.
MOTIVE FLUID ­ For class 175
Any fluid which is derived from a pressurized stream which operates a drive motor for the
boring means. Motive fluid when exhausted into the bore is also considered to be drilling
fluid.
MOTIVE FLUID RESPONSIVE MEANS ­ For class 060
Comprises means actuated by the flow or pressure of the fluid or by the absence of such
flow or pressure between the pump and the motor.
MOTIVE FORCE ­ For class 440
Any force used to impart motion.
MOTOR ­ For class 415
Generally, an apparatus in which one form of energy is changed so that mechanical power
is obtained. Specifically for this class, an apparatus for obtaining mechanical power from
the kinetic or potential energy in a fluid material contacting a rotary member of the
apparatus, as further defined and limited herein.
MOTOR ­ For class 440
A device which receives and modifies electrical energy or energy from some natural
source in order to produce force or motion.
MOTOR BRAKING CONTROL ­ For class 318
Includes any device or means for applying a torque or force to the power output element
of the electric motor in a direction which is in opposition to the motor torque or force
(resulting from electrical energization of, or the kinetic or potential energy stored in, the
motor) and tending to retard, stop or prevent movement of the motor­­excepting, of
course, mere useful load devices actuated by the motor, or such forces that are normally
inherent in the motor structure, per se, such as bearing friction, windage, eddy current
reaction, etc. However, means providing for substantially increased or accentuated eddy
currents in the motor structure to increase the retarding or braking effect, are classified
herein. Examples of braking means included herein, include, auxiliary eddy­current disks,
electric generators, fans, pumps, propellers and other motor shaft loading devices when
such devices are limited in the claims to the function of braking the motor. When such
shaft loading devices are not limited as claimed to the function of braking, classification is
not herein, but in some other appropriate place. For the distinction between braking
control and deceleration control see the definition of Acceleration Control in the Glossary.
Braking of the motor to control the running speed of the motor (e.g., to maintain the
speed constant) is classified in the running speed control subclasses. For the distinction
between motor braking and motor reversing, see reversing control below.
MOTOR CONTROL ­ For class 388
A system or device (usually an electrical circuit) which causes one or more of the
operating parameters of a motor to be held constant or to be changed in a predetermined
way. Note: For a description of each of the several modes of motor control, see the class
definition above.
MOTOR DECELERATION CONTROL ­ For class 318
See the definition of motor acceleration control in the definition of motor deceleration
control.
MOTOR DRIVEN OR ACTUATED ­ For class 049
A powered means such as a motor or engine utilized as the moving force or input of the
operator. A mere spring is not a powered means, but a motor having a spring as the
source of power is included within the meaning of the term defined.
MOTOR LOAD CONTROL ­ For class 318
Controlling the mechanical load actuated by the motor or controlling the motor armature
or primary current during the starting and/or stopping period of the motor. Where the
current is controlled to control the acceleration or deceleration of the motor, the system is
classified as motor acceleration or deceleration control, see section IB4a of the class
definition. Where the current is controlled to effect motor braking the system is classified
as braking control see the definition acceleration control.
MOTOR OPERATION CONTROL ­ For class 318
See the Glossary terms Acceleration Control; Automatic Starting and Stopping; Motor
Braking Control, Motor Deceleration Control; Motor Load Control, Reversing Control,
Running Speed Control; Starting And/Or Stopping; Diverse Motor Operations.
MOUNTING ­ For class 351
A frame structure completely or partially surrounding a lens or utilizing a bridge and nose
pads for supporting vision­aids in front of the eyes of a user. This term is broader than
"frame", in that it includes the pince­nez type.
MOVABLE CLOSURE ­ For class 049
A closure mounted to move in a regular, repetitive, predetermined path with respect to a
passage so as to alternately open or close the passage.
MQW ­ For class 438
multiquantum well
MSM ­ For class 257
Acronym for metal­semiconductor­metal semiconductors. Active solid­state semiconductor
devices having a semiconductor layer sandwiched between two layers of metal.
MSM ­ For class 438
Acronym for metal­semiconductor­metal semiconductor device. Active solid­state
semiconductor devices having a semiconductor layer sandwiched between two layers of
metal and forming back­to­back Schottky diodes.
MTF ­ For class 438
mean time to failure
MTL ­ For class 438
merged transistor logic (i.e., I2L)
MUFFLE FURNACE ­ For class 075
A furnace in which the material to be heated is placed in an enclosed section (the muffle),
which protects the material from the combustion products of the furnace. The material is
heated by heat conducted through the walls of the muffle.
MULITIPLE (PHASE) EMULSION ­ For class 516
Emulsion having more liquid phases than one discontinuous and one continuous phase.
Types are water­in­oil­in­water (w/o/w), oil­in­water­in­oil o/w/o, water­in­oil­in­water­
in­oil (w/o/w/o), etc. See emulsion.
MULTIDIRECTIONAL MOVEMENT ­ For class 049
Motion along two or more distinct lines of travel or about two or more axes of rotation or
a combination thereof, in a single operation.
MULTIFOCAL LENSES ­ For class 351
Fused or onepiece lenses having areas of different refracting powers, usually one area part
being intended for distant vision and the other for close work.
MULTILAYER METALLIZATION ­ For class 257
Two or more layers of interconnecting metallization patterns in a monolithic integrated
circuit separated by insulator material except in interconnection areas.
MULTIPLEXING ­ For class 370
The simultaneous transmission of two or more information signals in either or both
directions over a common (same) transmission medium in such a manner that the
information signals may be discretely recovered.
MULTITASKING ­ For class 709
A mode of operation in which a computer works on more than one task at a time.
MULTITASKING ­ For class 718
A mode of operation in which a computer works on more than one task at a time.
MULTITASKING ­ For class 719
A mode of operation in which a computer works on more than one task at a time.
MUSCULAR IMBALANCE ­ For class 351
Abnormal eye muscle functioning, tending the eyes to cross or diverge.
MWNT (MULTI­WALLED NANOTUBE) ­ For class 977
Formed of multiple layers of graphene wrapped in cylindrical form.
NANOCLUSTER ­ For class 977
Cluster of atoms or molecules whose characteristic dimensions are a few nanometers;
sometimes synonymous with nanocrystal or denoting structures smaller than nanocrystals.
NANOCOMPOSITE ­ For class 977
Composite structure whose characteristic dimensions are found at the nanoscale.
NANOCRYSTAL ­ For class 977
Nanoscopic particle containing a few hundred to a few tens of thousands of atoms, and
arranged in an orderly, crystalline structure; often refers to metallic nanoparticles.
NANOPORE ­ For class 977
Pore of nanometer dimensions.
NANOROD ­ For class 977
Nanostructures shaped like long sticks or dowels with a diameter in the nanoscale but
having a length that is very much longer.
NANOTUBE ­ For class 977
Fullerene molecule having a cylindrical or toroidal shape.
NANOTWEEZERS ­ For class 977
Element used to pick up and place individual nanosized particles, usually including two
opposing nanosized elements, such as nanotubes, etc., that pick and place the nanosized
particles.
NANOWHISKER ­ For class 977
Often synonymous with nanorod, nanowire, or nanotube.
NANOWIRE ­ For class 977
Electrically conductive nanorod; alternatively, a wire with a diameter of nanometer
dimensions.
NATURAL OIL OR GUM, ROSIN OR LAC ­ For class 428
Any oil, gum or resin that occurs in nature, as cottonseed, linseed and castor oils, rosin,
mineral oil and the exudation of insects known as lac. These three classes of oil; drying,
semidrying and nondrying oil are included within the scope of the term. (Nonstructural or
Composition)
NATURAL RESIN ­ For class 520
Denotes the following: Those materials which have been customarily employed as such in
the paint, lacquer, varnish, adhesive, and ink trades. Thus, ​
gnatural resin​
h is a term of
art. Natural resins include but are not limited to shellac, copals from various sources, e.g.,
Congo, manila, etc.; amber, dammar, dead dammar, rosin (colophony), gum rosin, wood
rosin, burgundy pitch, gurjun balsam, Canada balsam, sandarac, mastic, accroides,
benzoin, elemi, gamboge, gum thus, venice turpentine, bordeaux turpentine, abietic acid,
pimaric acid, etc. Tall oil, per se, is not treated as a natural resin unless the rosin content
is specifically stated. In the event the rosin content is not stated, tall oil is treated as an
unsaturated fatty acid derived from naturally occurring glycerides. Unless indicated to the
contrary, ​
grosin​
h is presumed to be primarily abietic acid.
NATURAL RESIN DERIVATIVE ­ For class 520
Denotes the following: A. Heat decomposition products of natural resins which contain a
hydroaromatic nucleus and which are unprovided for elsewhere. B. Materials described by
patentee as natural resins. C. Modifications of natural resins wherein the carbon structure
of the abietyl nucleus is retained, including but not limited to: abietyl amine,
dehydroabietyl amine, abietyl alcohol, zinc abietate, hydrogenated rosin, dehydroabietic
acid, disproportioned rosin, rosin esters, ester gum (i.e., triglyceride of rosin),
polymerized ester gum, hydrogenated ester gum, oxidized ester gum, etc. D. Other
modified natural resins; for example, aceto­ and butyro­copal, copal ester, etc.
NATURAL RUBBER ­ For class 428
Containing the natural gum, know as caoutchouc, gutta percha, or balata obtained from the
latex or sap of ​
grubber​
h trees. The word ​
grubber​
h standing alone is considered to denote
natural rubber. (Nonstructural or Composition)
NAVIGATION ­ For class 701
The determination of a course, position, or distance traveled.
N­CHANNEL FET ­ For class 257
A field effect transistor that has an n­type conduction channel.
N­CHANNEL FET ­ For class 438
A field effect transistor that has an n­type conduction channel.
NDC ­ For class 438
negative differential conductivity
NDM ­ For class 257
Negative differential mobility (e.g., Gunn effect) intervalley active semiconductor devices
wherein an applied electric field imparts energy to electrons or holes to permit them to
jump to higher quantum electronic intervalley energy levels in which electrons have
lowered electron mobility.
NEA ­ For class 438
negative electron affinity (e­emitter)
NEAR FIELD ­ For class 342
The electromagnetic field within a distance of 1 wavelength from a transmitting antenna.
NEAR FIELD SCANNING OPTICAL MICROSCOPE ­ For class 977
Scanning probe microscope that analyzes an object by recording light intensity focused
through a pipette in the tip and scanned across the object at a distance less than a
wavelength of the light.
NEAR VIDEO­ON­DEMAND (NVOD) ­ For class 725
A programming event that is provided upon request, in which the event is broadcast on
plural channels in time­staggered intervals. These events are distributed to all subscribers,
but enabled on an individual basis through an interactive process. Due to the mode of
distribution, requests can be processed ​
gnear on­demand​
h, with a delay which is inversely
proportional to the broadcast interval.
NECK RING ­ For class 065
That portion of a segmented mold used to form a neck portion of a hollow article.
NECK RING ­ For class 425
The portion of a segmented mold which forms the neck portion of a hollow article.
NEGATIVE ­ For class 355
A visible image on a copy material in which the dark portions of an original appear light
and the light portions appear dark.
NEGATIVE ­ For class 399
A visible image on a copy material in which the dark portions of an original appear light
and the light portions appear dark.
NEGATIVE FEEDBACK ­ For class 330
Signal feedback having at least some component thereof in opposite phase with the signal
at the point where the signal feedback is applied.
NEGATIVE RESISTANCE OR NEGATIVE TRANSCONDUCTANCE DEVICE ­ For class 331
An active element of the two terminal type having a volt­ampere characteristic with
negative slope over the range of voltages or currents wherein it is operative, that is, an
increase in voltage results in a decrease in current, or vice versa.
NEGATIVE RESISTANCE REGION ­ For class 257
An operating region of an active solid­state electronic device in which an increase in
applied voltage results in a decrease in output current.
NEGATIVE RESISTANCE REGION ­ For class 438
An operating region of an active solid­state electronic device in which an increase in
applied voltage results in a decrease in output current.
NEGATIVE RESISTOR ­ For class 338
A resistor wherein the derivative of the voltage across the resistor with respect to the
current passing through is negative over a portion of the current range.
NEGATIVE TEMPERATURE COEFFICIENT ­ For class 257
The amount of reduction in a device parameter, such as capacitance or resistance, for
each degree of device operating temperature.
NEGATIVE TEMPERATURE COEFFICIENT ­ For class 438
The amount of reduction in a device parameter, such as capacitance or resistance, for
each degree of device operating temperature.
NETWORK ­ For class 333
A network is made up of two or more resistances, inductances, capacities or mutual
inductances connected together in some manner.
NETWORK ­ For class 709
A group of computers and associated devices that are connected by communications
facilities which exists to provide computer users with the means of communicating and
transferring information electronically. Some types of communication are simple user­to­
user messages; others, of the type known as distributed processes, can involve several
computers and the sharing of workloads or cooperative efforts in performing a task.
NETWORK ­ For class 718
A group of computers and associated devices that are connected by communications
facilities which exists to provide computer users with the means of communicating and
transferring information electronically. Some types of communication are simple user­to­
user messages; others, of the type known as distributed processes, can involve several
computers and the sharing of workloads or cooperative efforts in performing a task.
NETWORK ­ For class 719
A group of computers and associated devices that are connected by communications
facilities which exists to provide computer users with the means of communicating and
transferring information electronically. Some types of communication are simple user­to­
user messages; others, of the type known as distributed processes, can involve several
computers and the sharing of workloads or cooperative efforts in performing a task.
NETWORK ­ For class 725
A series of points interconnected by communication channels. Also, any set of devices or
subsystems connected by links joining (directly or indirectly) a set of terminal nodes. Also,
an arrangement of components or nodes and interconnecting branches.
NEURAL NETWORK ARCHITECTURE ­ For class 706
Neural Network Topology and functions computed by the neuron processors.
NEURAL NETWORK TOPOLOGY ­ For class 706
Interconnection pattern between neuron processors.
NEUTRALIZATION MEANS ­ For class 330
Circuit means to eliminate, mitigate, or lessen undesirable effects of inter­electrode
capacitance or inter­electrode impedance and which may include the input and/or output
impedance of the amplifying device involved (such input or output impedance includes the
inter­electrode impedance of the input or output electrodes).
NEUTRON ABSORBING MATERIAL ­ For class 376
As it relates to nuclear reactors, a substance that poses a high neutron absorption ability.
NEUTRON APLIFICATION ­ For class 376
See Subcritical Reactor.
NIPPERS ­ For class 070
Manually controlled portable devices for grasping, clamping, gripping or grappling an
extremity of the human anatomy and by the application of suitable force and consequent
imposition of pain placing the individual to whom the device is applied under the influence
and control of another, as in the case of an arrested individual.
NITRATE V. NITRO ­ For class 149
The term ​
gnitrate​
h is generally used as a suffix in the name of an organic compound, e.g.,
an ester containing the ­ONO2 radical, e.g., guanidine nitrate, while ​
gnitro​
h is generally
used as a prefix to designate an organic compound having the ­NO2 radical, e.g. nitro­
guanidine. The art, however has not maintained this distinction in all cases and thus
compounds having the ­ONO2 radical which should be known, more properly, as
gnitrates​
​
h, instead, have been known through the years as ​
gnitro​
h compounds. No attempt
is made in this class to correct this situation and the terms as applied to these compounds
in this class are the same as are currently accepted and used in this and related arts. For
example, the nitrates of such compounds as cellulose, glycerine and starch, among others,
are commonly known as ​
gnitro­cellulose​
h, ​
gnitroglycerine​
h and ​
gnitro­starch​
h
respectively, and when they so appear in this class, the reference, in spite of the
inconsistency, is to a compound of the ­NO3 radical or ­ONO2.
NITRATED ­ For class 149
As used in this class, unless otherwise specified, is intended as a generic expression for
compounds or substances both organic and inorganic which contain at least one of the
empirical radical (s)­(ONOx)y or ­(NOx)y, wherein ​
gx​
h and ​
gy​
h are whole numbers.
Predominately, in this class ​
gx​
h is 2 and ​
gy​
h, where the compound permits, is 3 or more.
NITRIDING ­ For class 148
A process wherein a metal substrate is treated with an externally supplied source of
nitrogen resulting in an increased nitrogen content of the metal by chemical reaction or
diffusion.
NITROCYCLIC ­ For class 260
Denotes the presence of a ring, all of whose ring atoms are nitrogens, e.g., azides, etc.
NITROCYCLIC ­ For class 532
This term denotes a ring or ring system where all ring members are nitrogens.
NMA ­ For class 438
N­methyl­acetamide
NMOS ­ For class 257
N­channel metal oxide semiconductor devices which use electrons as majority carriers.
NMOS ­ For class 438
N­channel metal oxide semiconductor devices which use electrons as majority carriers.
NMOS ­ For class 438
n­channel MOSFET
NMP ­ For class 438
n­methyl­pyrrolidone
NOBLE GAS­ For class 075
An element of the group Helium (He), Neon (Ne), Argon (Ar), Krypton (Kr), Xenon (X), and
Radon (Rn).
NOBLE GASES ­ For class 257
He, Ne, Ar, Kr, Xe, Rn.
NOBLE GASES ­ For class 588
The elements of the periodic table that consist of He, Ar, Kr, Xe, and Rn which have no
valency and combine only with great difficulty, if at all, with other elements.
NOBLE METAL­ For class 075
A metal of the group Ruthenium (Ru), Rhodium (Rd), Palladium (Pd), Osmium (Os),
Iridium (Ir), Platinum (Pt), Silver (Ag), and Gold (Au).
NOBLE METAL­ For class 420
A metal of the group Ruthenium, Rhodium, Palladium, Osmium, Iridium, Platinum, Gold
and Silver.
NOBLE METALS ­ For class 428
Those metals not readily oxidized, i.e., silver, gold, platinum, polladium, mercury, iridium,
rhodium, ruthenium, osmium. (Nonstructural or Composition)
NOISE ­ For class 704
Any sound which is undesirable and interferes with one"s hearing or with a system"s
analysis of desired sound.
NOISE ­ For class 725
In data transmissions, generally, an undesired disturbance within the useful frequency
band. Note : undesired disturbances within the useful frequency band produced by other
services may be called interference. In broadband networks, an unwanted signal in a
communications system. White noise (or random noise) is random energy (e.g., shot noise
and thermal noise) that has a uniform distribution of energy across the bandpass. The
analogy for white noise is white light. Johnson noise (thermal) is the noise generated by
electron movement (current through a resistor) above absolute zero. The noise level is
proportional to temperature. Shot noise is the type of unrandom noise generated when
current flows across an abrupt junction. Shot noise is characteristic of semiconductor
devices.
NONCOMBUSTIBLE FLUID ­ For class 110
A gas or liquid which itself does not burn but which is capable of supporting or promoting
combustion (i.e., air, steam, or water).
NONDOPANT ­ For class 438
An impurity added from an external source which does not modify the electrical properties
of a semiconductor.
NONIONIC BONDING ­ For class 514
As used in regard to bonding or attachment of specified moieties denotes the absence of
ionic bonding between the moieties. If the moieties are attached directly, the bonds
between them must be covalent or coordinate. If the moieties are attached indirectly, each
atom of the connecting chain must be attached by covalent or coordinate bonding to
another atom of the connecting chain or to one of the moieties. However, the connecting
chain may have substituents thereon which include ionic bonding. Some examples will be
given of compounds which could be classified in a subclass having the following titles:
“Oxygen attached indirectly to the six­membered hetero ring by nonionic bonding”.
Two typical compounds which would be classified in such a subclass are:
The following three compounds would also be classified in such a subclass but they are not
typical.
The three atypical examples are considered to meet the title since there is a chain of
atoms between the hetero ring and the oxygen in which each atom is connected to the
hetero ring, the oxygen, or another atom of the chain by nonionic bonding. The ionic
bonding between the ring nitrogen and the oxygen in the two betaine inner salts is
additional and does not keep the betaines out of such a subclass. However, a structure,
such as
is excluded since no oxygen is attached to the six­membered hetero ring by nonionic
bonding. The oxygen of an N—oxide, for example,
is considered attached to the ring by nonionic bonding (coordinated bonding).
NONIONIC BONDING ­ For class 532
As used in regard to bonding or attachment of specified moieties denotes the absence of
ionic bonding between the moieties. If the moieties are attached directly, the bonds
between them must be covalent or coordinate. If the moities are attached indirectly, each
atom of the connecting chain must be attached by covalent or coordinate bonding to
another atom of the connecting chain or to one of the moieties. However, the connecting
chain may have substituents thereon which include ionic bonding. Some examples will be
given of compounds which could be classified in a subclass having the following title:
“Oxygen attached indirectly to the six­membered hetero ring by nonionic bonding”. Two
typical compounds which would be classified in such a subclass are shown in Figure 5.
The three compounds shown in Figure 6 would also be classified in such a subclass but
they are not typical.
The three atypical examples in Figure 6 are considered to meet the title since there is a
chain of atoms between the hetero ring and the oxygen in which each atom is connected to
the hetero ring, the oxygen, or another atom of the chain by nonionic bonding. The ionic
bonding between the ring nitrogen and the oxygen in the two betaine inner salts is
additional and does not keep the betaines out of such a subclass.
However, a structure such as that shown in Figure 7 is excluded since no oxygen is
attached indirectly (or directly) to the six­membered hetero ring by nonionic bonding.
The oxygen of an N­oxide, as shown in Figure 8, is considered attached to the ring by
nonionic bonding (coordinate bonding).
NONIONIC COMPOUND ­ For class 510
Denotes an organic compound devoid of cationic or anionic substituents and thus lacking
any ionic charge at a neutral pH (i.e., pH=7).
NONLINEAR IMPEDANCE OR DEVICE ­ For class 330
An impedance or device, which may be reactive or resistive or a combination of both and
having the characteristic that for changes in voltage or current, the relationship of the
voltage drop across the impedance or device, or the voltage applied across the impedance
or device to the current flowing through it, is nonlinear.
NONMAGNETIC MOTOR ­ For class 318
A motor having means other than a magnetic field producing means for producing a
mechanical force. Example of nonmagnetic motors are piezo­electric crystals, thermo­
electric motors.
NON­METAL ­ For class 117
The twenty­one elements: hydrogen, boron, carbon, silicon, nitrogen, phosphorus, oxygen,
sulfur, selenium, tellurium, fluorine, chlorine, bromine, iodine, astatine, helium, neon,
argon, krypton, xenon, and radon.
NONMETAL­ For class 075
An element of the group Hydrogen (H), Boron (B), Carbon (C), Silicon (Si), Nitrogen (N),
Phosphorus(P), Oxygen (O), Sulfur (S), Selenium (Se), Tellurium (Te), Fluorine (F),
Chlorine (Cl), Bromine (Br), Iodine (I), Astatine (At), Helium (He), Neon (Ne), Argon (Ar),
Krypton (Kr), Xenon (Xe), and Radon (Rd). (1) Note. For subclasses 228+ Silicon is
considered to be a metal.
NONMETAL­ For class 420
An element of the group, Hydrogen, Boron, Carbon, Silicon, Nitrogen, Phosphorus, Oxygen,
Sulfur, Selenium, Tellurium, Fluorine, Chlorine, Bromine, Iodine, Astatine, Helium, Neon,
Argon, Krypton, Xenon and Radon.
NONMETALLIC ELEMENTS ­ For class 423
The electronegative elements on the right of the periodic system, which generally exist in
several stages of oxidation and whose oxides form acids. See main class definition for list
of nonmetals for this class.
NON­METALS ­ For class 257
H, B, C, Si, N, P, O, S, Se, Te, noble gases, halogens.
NONMETALS ­ For class 520
Denotes boron, oxygen, carbon, selenium, tellurium, nitrogen, sulfur, phosphorous, silicon,
hydrogen, fluorine, chlorine, bromine, iodine, astatine, helium, neon, argon, krypton,
xenon, and radon.
NONOXO­CARBONYLIC ­ For class 260
Denotes the presence of C=O in combination other than as found in ketone and aldehydes
and is generic, for example, to carbonyl, thus:
NON­SEMICONDUCTOR METAL ­ For class 117
A metal* other than which has a disclosed semiconductor property or intended use. For
example, a single­crystal* of germanium or indium antimonide would be inferred to be a
semiconductor even though composed of a metal* because of its known semiconductor
property.
NONTHICKNESS SURFACE ­ For class 112
The surface of a web, sheet, layer, or component on which both its length and width may
be measured. See Figure 5.
NONTHICKNESS SURFACE ­ For class 428
The surface of a web, sheet, layer or component on which both its length and width may
be measured. See Figure 3. (Structural)
NON­WORKING CHAMBER ­ For class 091
A chamber of the motor which expands and contracts incident to movement of the working
member, and which is neither expanded nor contracted to do work by fluid supplied to or
evacuated from said chamber.
NONWORKING CHAMBER ­ For class 092
Any space within a part of an expansible chamber device which is not designed to receive
working fluid for acting upon the working member, or for being acted upon by the working
member.
NORMAL PEPTIDE LINK ­ For class 930
Exists between an alpha­amino group of an amino acid and the carboxyl group ­ in position
1 ­ of another alpha amino acid.
NORMAL WHEEL­BASE ­ For class 180
Means the arrangement of the four wheels of a vehicle so that straight lines joining the
points of contact of the wheels with the road form approximately a rectangle when the
steering wheels are in the straight­away position.
NORMALIZING ­ For class 148
A process of heating the metal above it"s critical temperature range and cooling in air
thereby establishing a fine uniform grain size and improving microstructural uniformity.
NOTCHING ­ For class 083
The cutting of a discrete product from a workpiece through the thickness of the workpiece
with the line of cut starting at an edge of the workpiece and returning to the same edge.
The edge of the workpiece may be either an exterior edge or an interior edge. A cut which
extends solely along a single straight line is not considered to be a notching cut.
NOTCHING ­ For class 234
The cutting of a discrete product from a workpiece through the thickness of the workpiece
with the line of cut starting at an edge of the workpiece and returning to the same edge.
novolak ­ For class 438
Thermoplastic phenol­formaldehyde used as photoresist
NOWEL ­ For class 164
See Drag.
NPN ­ For class 438
(bipolar transistor)
NPN TRANSISTOR ­ For class 257
A transistor in which the base is made of p­type material and both source and drain are
made of n­type semiconductor material.
NPN TRANSISTOR ­ For class 438
A bipolar transistor with n­type emitter and collector regions separated by a p­type base.
NRD ­ For class 438
nitridation retarded diffusion
NRM ­ For class 523
Nonreactant material (as discussed in this class definition)
NSAG ­ For class 438
nonself­aligned gate
NTD ­ For class 438
neutron transmutation doping
N­TYPE CONDUCTIVITY ­ For class 330
The characteristic of a semiconductor material, usually imparted by the addition of
impurities of the ​
gdonor​
h type, of an excess of free electrons over holes (free positive
charges) at any time at room temperature, such negative charge carriers or electrons
being referred to as majority carriers for current flow in such material, and holes as
minority carriers for such current flow.
N­TYPE SEMICONDUCTOR ­ For class 257
An extrinsic semiconductor having n­type dopant atoms, e.g., atoms with one more
valence electron than the host atoms.
N­TYPE SEMICONDUCTOR ­ For class 257
An extrinsic semiconductor in which electron density exceeds hole density.
N­TYPE SEMICONDUCTOR ­ For class 438
An extrinsic semiconductor having n­type dopant atoms (e.g., atoms with one or more
valence electron than the host atoms). Electron density exceeds hole density.
NUCLEAR CARBON ­ For class 260
Denotes a carbon which is a ring carbon of a closed chain.
NUCLEAR FUEL ­ For class 376
(a) Light elements such as hydrogen, deuterium tritium, lithium, boron beryllium, etc.,
which are capable of fusing or combining to form a nucleus of higher mass number, (b)
fissionable fissile, or special nuclear material such as U233, U235, or uranium enriched
with either of these Pu239, etc., capable of sustaining a chain reaction.
NUCLEAR REACTION ­ For class 376
For the purpose of this class, a change in the composition or physical characteristics of an
atomic nucleus produced (a) directly or indirectly, by its irradiation or bombardment by
high energy alpha particles, protons, deuterons, slow or fast neutrons or high energy
radiations (gamma rays) or (b) by fusing or combining nuclei of low atomic number to
produce a nucleus of higher mass number. See also class definition, section I, and (1)
Note.
NUCLEAR REACTOR ­ For class 376
For the purpose of this class, a structure inside which an induced nuclear reaction is
confined, manipulated, or controlled. A nuclear fission reactor is a structure in which a
fission chain reaction is a fissionable material can be maintained and controlled. Besides
the fuel, it generally contains control apparatus, moderator, coolant, etc., and is often
surrounded by a biological shield. A nuclear fusion reactor is a structure in which a fusion
reaction in a nuclear fuel capable of fusing is controlled or manipulated. Although it is
implied that the rate of such reactions increases as the relative velocities of such particles
at the time of collision, nothing is implied about the means by which such precollision
velocities are attained. The same reaction may and usually does produce one or more
other particles such as neutrons or protons, in accordance with well­known reactions.
NUCLEIC ACID ­ For class 435
A polynucleotide or more than two nucleotides.
NUCLEIC ACID ­ For class 977
Compounds containing three components: (1) a nitrogenous base; (2) a five­carbon sugar;
and (3) phosphoric acid; forms include mononucleotides, oligonucleotides and
polynucleotides. The most common forms are DNA (deoxyribonucleic acid) and RNA
(ribonucleic acid), which predominantly occur in nature in polynucleotide form that are
polymers of mononucleotides.
NUMERICAL DIGITS ­ For class 708
Symbols that represent a specific quantity or amount of units.
NUTRIENT ­ For class 117
The source material from which the single­crystal* deposits or grows. See also
precursor*.
NVRAM ­ For class 438
nonvolatile RAM
O/W ­ For class 516
Oil­in­water emulsion. Cf. w/o, w/o/w.
OBG ­ For class 438
optical band gap
OBJECT ­ For class 250
A material subjected to radiation for treatment or whose response to or effect on the
radiation is used to indicate something about the material.
OBJECT ­ For class 353
The object is the subject, the image of which is to be projected (see definition of image).
OBJECT ­ For class 709
A variable comprising routines and data that is treated as a discrete entity.
OBJECT ­ For class 718
A variable comprising routines and data that is treated as a discrete entity.
OBJECT ­ For class 719
A variable comprising routines and data that is treated as a discrete entity.
OBJECT (or SUBJECT) ­ For class 396
An object or a subject refers to a person or thing within the scene to be recorded on a
photographic medium.
OBJECT HOLDER ­ For class 353
Structure for holding the object in the projecting position, as well as for moving the object
in and out of such position. Examples are slide transfer mechanisms and film holders.
OBJECT OR ANALYTE ­ For class 378
A material subjected to X­radiation for treatment or whose response to or effect on the X­
radiation is used to indicate something about the material.
OBJECTIVE ­ For class 396
An objective is a lens that normally faces the object. See Class 359 for a more specific
definition.
ODE ­ For class 438
orientation dependent etching
OED ­ For class 438
oxidation enhanced diffusion
OEIC ­ For class 438
optoelectronic integrated circuit
OF ­ For class 438
orientation flat
OIL ­ For class 210
Organic material of slick or slippery feel including long chain hydrocarbons esters of higher
fatty acid and derived from petroleum, fats, greases, and oils of animal or vegetable
origin.
OIL ­ For class 428
See natural oil, gum, rosin or lac, above. (Nonstructural or Composition)
OIL ­ For class 516
(1) Naturally occurring oils are glycerides*. Natural fats are the natural oils which are
solid at room temperature. (2) Mineral­oils* are exploited from the earth, or derived from
processing woody materials, generally comprising hydrocarbons. See definition,
hereinabove, of mineral­oil used for this Class.
OISF ­ For class 438
oxidation induced stacking fault
OLEIC ACID; OLEATE ­ For class 516
CH3(CH2)7CH:CH(CH2)7COOH. Mono­unsaturated fatty acid found in most natural fats and
oils. Glycerol monooleate is the monoglyceride formed from the esterification reaction
between glycerol and oleic acid.
OLEOPHILIC ­ For class 210
Oil attractive or wettable by oil.
OLEOPHOBIC ­ For class 210
Oil repelling.
OMCT ­ For class 438
octamethylcyclotetrasiloxane
OMCVD ­ For class 117
Metal­Organic CVD*.
OMCVD ­ For class 438
organometallic CVD
OMVPE ­ For class 438
organometallic VPE
ONE­HOLE­CODE ­ For class 234
A system of single­hole symbols each distinguished only by its position with respect to a
datum line.
ONE­STROKE­STORAGE ­ For class 234
Usually a misnomer, denoting merely a one­cyle delay in the actuation of selected tools.
(See subclass 91 for examples; also cf. Storage*).
ONE­WAY BRAKE ­ For class 475
A brake* which automatically engages to stop a rotating part when the rotating part
attempts to rotate in a first direction, but which permits rotation of the rotating part in a
direction opposite to said first direction.
ONE­WAY CLUTCH ­ For class 475
A clutch* which automatically couples two rotatable parts together for joint rotation when
a first of said parts rotates in a first direction, but which automatically uncouples said
parts when the first of said parts rotates in a direction opposite to said first direction, or
uncouples said parts when the second part rotates faster than the first part.
OPEN LOOP CONTROL ­ For class 388
A method of control in which the power input to a motor is varied so as to achieve a
desired running condition (e.g., constant running speed) without the use of feedback.
OPEN SEPARATOR ­ For class 171
A device which is provided with spaced portions having openings therebetween in which
the spaced portions are adapted to retain all objects above a predetermined particle size
while finer material passes through the openings.
OPERATING SYSTEM ­ For class 709
Software responsible for controlling the allocation and usage of hardware resources such
as memory, central processing unit (CPU) time, disk space, and peripheral devices. The
operating system is the foundation on which applications programs (e.g., word processing,
spreadsheets) are built.
OPERATING SYSTEM ­ For class 713
Software responsible for controlling the allocation and usage of hardware resources such
as memory, central processing unit (CPU) time, disk space, and peripheral devices. The
operating system is the foundation on which application programs are built.
OPERATING SYSTEM ­ For class 718
Software responsible for controlling the allocation and usage of hardware resources such
as memory, central processing unit (CPU) time, disk space, and peripheral devices. The
operating system is the foundation on which applications programs (e.g., word processing,
spreadsheets) are built.
OPERATING SYSTEM ­ For class 719
Software responsible for controlling the allocation and usage of hardware resources such
as memory, central processing unit (CPU) time, disk space, and peripheral devices. The
operating system is the foundation on which applications programs (e.g., word processing,
spreadsheets) are built.
OPERATION ­ For class 226
(n) A performing of work or a doing of an act. Exemplary operations are: cutting,
recording, viewing, dyeing.
OPERATOR ­ For class 049
A manipulatable mechanical means, movable relative to the closure, for imparting
movement to the closure relative to its mounting means, in its opening or closing
movement. A mere spring which effects the movement of the closure, for example, by
utilizing the stored energy to return the closure to starting position, is not included within
the meaning of this term.
OPERATOR­ For class 024
A manipulable mechanical means which contacts and moves with respect to a shiftable
portion of a fastener mechanism to reposition or transmit an input force to the shiftable
portion. A mere spring which effects the movement of the parts of the fastener
mechanism, for example, by utilizing stored energy to return its parts to a starting
position, is not included in the meaning of this term.
OPTHALMIC LENSES ­ For class 351
Lenses usually mounted in spectacle frames, in eyeglass mountings or in trial frames
having cylindrical, spherical or prismatic power for testing or correcting visual deficiencies
of the eye. These lenses cooperate with the refracting medium of the eye to form on the
retina a clear image of the object viewed, or in strabismus to modify the imbalanced
visual axis of the eye to make the eye gradually resume normal status to correctly
superimpose deviated images. The lenses may be spherical (plus or minus) to correct for
fairly simple defective near or far sightedness, or they may be cylindrical to correct for
astigmatism, or they may be prismatic to correct for strabismus, or they may be any of
these in combination. The magnification or minification power of these lenses serves
primarily to produce clear images on the retina of an eye with poor vision rather than to
produce any telescopic, microscopic or pictorial effects.
OPTICAL AXIS ­ For class 352
The path taken by a central ray of a light beam as it passes into the motion picture
camera or from the motion picture.
OPTICAL COMMUNICATION ­ For class 359
The conveyance of information from one location to another via at least one optical
transmitter and one optical receiver. These are used to transfer the information with an
optical beam and this beam can be used in various communication schemes to enable the
most effective or desired method of moving the information, including optical multiplexing
when plural information signals or plural transmitters and receivers are utilized.
OPTICAL ELEMENT ­ For class 356
A structure which performs a basic optical function. See Class 359 for a more specific
definition.
OPTICAL ELEMENT ­ For class 359
A structure which performs a basic optical function, i.e., the structure, when exposed to or
placed in the path of a light beam, will cause refraction, diffraction, attenuation, or
blocking of the light or a modification in the character or properties of the light. In lenses,
the complete lens is considered an optical element, while the individual masses of a plural
element lens are considered as lens elements or lens components.
OPTICAL ELEMENT ­ For class 372
A structure which performs a basic optical function, i.e., the structure when exposed to or
placed in the path of a group of light rays will cause a deviation of the rays in accordance
with a regular pattern, a blocking of the rays, or a modification in the character or
properties of the light.
OPTICAL FIBER ­ For class 372
A light guidance system that is cylindrical in shape. The fiber relies upon modal
transmission to transmit light along its axial length. Light enters one end of the fiber and
emerges from the opposite end with only minimal loss.
OPTICAL FIBER ­ For class 385
A light transmitting (optical) waveguide formed in a generally cylindrical form, often of
extremely small diameter and of great length, which confines the transmitted radiation
therewithin by means of the principle of total internal reflection. Optical fibers are usually
comprised of a central light transmitting core of relatively high refractive index,
surrounded by a concentric cladding of relatively low refractive index.
OPTICAL MODULATION ­ For class 359
The change of some characteristic of an optical beam in direct relation to a varying signal
applied thereto. The change may be temporal (e.g., amplitude, frequency, or phase) or
directional.
OPTICAL PATH ­ For class 351
Imaginary lines passing on the principal and secondary axes from the center of the retina
to the object viewed.
OPTICAL SYSTEM ­ For class 356
A combination of two or more similar or diverse optical elements which are optically
related, or an optical element combined with nonoptical structure where the overall
function performed is optical in nature. The optical systems in this class are for measuring
or testing purposes.
OPTICAL SYSTEM ­ For class 359
A combination of two or more similar or diverse optical elements which are optically
related.
OPTICAL SYSTEM ­ For class 372
A combination of two or more similar or diverse optical elements which are optically
related.
OPTICAL WAVEGUIDE ­ For class 385
An optical waveguide is a waveguide which guides radiation in the visible and near­visible
portions of the spectrum by means of total internal reflection.
OPTICS, OPTICAL ­ For class 351
The science of light and vision and the construction of optical instruments.
OPTICS, OPTICAL ­ For class 356
The science of light and vision and the construction of optical instruments.
OPTICS, OPTICAL ­ For class 359
The science of light and vision and the construction of optical instruments.
OPTICS, OPTICAL ­ For class 372
The science of light and vision and the construction of optical instruments.
OPTOMETRY ­ For class 351
The art of investigating vision defects such as refraction and ocular muscle function­
defects and correcting or aiding them by optical means such as opthalmic lenses, prisms,
muscle training and other optical measures.
OR ­ For class 425
This conjunction is used in this class to indicate either the combination of two
subcombinations or either one of the subcombinations.
ORANGE­PEEL ­ For class 037
This implement comprises an excavating tool having two hemispherical jaws which close
upon material for excavating and open when dumping.
ORBIT GEAR ­ For class 475
A gear mounted for rotation about the same axis as a planet carrier* and having a drive
face contacting a drive face of a planet pinion* at a location radially outward from the
rotational axis of the planet pinion*.
ORBITING ­ For class 065
Causing movement in a regular, generally a circular or elliptical path around a fixed point.
ORD ­ For class 438
oxidation retarded diffusion
ORDERED ­ For class 438
Crystalline arrangement in which different constituent atoms of a compound semiconductor
occupy specific lattice sites resulting in long range regularity of the resultant structure.
ORGANIC ­ For class 216
Is a compound containing carbon, which is further characterized by the presence in the
molecule of two carbon atoms bonded together; or one atom of carbon bonded to at least
one atom of hydrogen or halogen; or one atom of carbon bonded to at least one atom of
nitrogen by a single or double bond. The following compounds are specifically excluded as
being Organic for classification purposes, to­wit: hydrocyanic acid, cyanogen, isocyanic
acid, cyanamide, cyanogen halides, isothiocyanic acid, fulminic acid, and metal carbides.
ORGANIC ­ For class 424
Denotes compounds containing carbon, which are further characterized by the presence in
a molecule thereof of two carbon atoms bonded together; or one atom of carbon bonded to
at least one atom of hydrogen or halogen; or one atom of carbon bonded to at least one
atom of nitrogen by a single or double bond. Note. Compounds included within this
definition, but not considered organic are hydrocyanic acid, cyanogen, isocyanic acid,
cyanamide, dicyanamide, cyanogen halides, isothiocyanic acid, fulminic acid, and metal
carbides.
ORGANIC ­ For class 502
A compound in which carbon is bonded to (1) a second carbon; (2) at least one atom of
hydrogen or halogen; or (3) nitrogen by a single or double bond; except cyanic and
(HOCN) cyanogen (NCCN), cyanamide (H2NCN), cyanogen halide (HalCN), hydrocyanic
acid (HCN) isocyanic acid (HNCO) fulminic acid (HCNO) and metal carbides (MeCCMe). See
class definition of Class 260.
ORGANIC ­ For class 504
The term organic denotes compounds containing carbon, which are further characterized
by the presence in a molecule thereof of two carbon atoms bonded together; or one atom
of carbon bonded to at least one atom of hydrogen or halogen; or one atom of carbon
bonded to at least one atom of nitrogen by a single or double bond.
ORGANIC ­ For class 510
Denotes compounds containing carbon which are further characterized by the presence in a
molecule thereof of two carbon atoms bonded together, or one atom of carbon bonded to
at least one atom of hydrogen or halogen, or one atom of carbon bonded to at least one
atom of nitrogen by a single or double bond. Note. Compounds included within this
definition, but not considered organic for purposes of this class are hydrocyanic acid,
cyanogen, isocyanic acid, cyanamide, dicyanamide, cyanogen halides, isothiocyanic acid,
fulminic acid, and metal carbides.
ORGANIC COMPOUND ­ For class 204
A chemical compound limited by the definition of a ​
gcarbon compound​
h found under the
class definition in Class 260, Chemistry of Carbon Compounds.
ORGANIC COMPOUND ­ For class 423
A compound as defined in the definition of Class 260, Chemistry of Carbon Compounds as
qualified by (34) Note.
ORGANIC COMPOUND ­ For class 520
Denotes all compounds having carbon therein and which are further characterized by the
presence of (a) two carbon atoms bonded together, or (b) one atom of carbon bonded to
at least one atom of hydrogen or halogen, or (c) one atom of carbon bonded to at least
one atom of nitrogen by a single or double bond, with the proviso that hydrocyanic acid,
cyanogen, isocyanic acid, cyanamide, cyanogen halides, isothiocyanic acid, and metal
carbides are excluded from being organic compounds.
ORGANIC COMPOUND ­ For class 588
A compound as defined in the definition of Class 260, Chemistry of Carbon Compounds as
qualified by (34) Note.
ORGANIC METAL CONTAINING COMPOUND ­ For class 588
Any carbon containing compound as defined by the definition of Class 260, in which the
carbon compound contains a metal.
ORGANIC SEMICONDUCTOR ­ For class 257
A semiconductor compound in which the molecule is characterized by two or more carbon
atoms bonded together, one atom of carbon bonded to at least one atom of hydrogen or
halogen (i.e., chlorine, fluorine, bromine, iodine) or one atom of carbon bonded to at least
one atom of nitrogen by a single or double bond. Note. Exceptions to this rule include HCN,
CN­CN, HNCO, HNCS, cyanogen halides, cyanamide, fulminic acid, and metal carbides.
These are not regarded as organic semiconductor materials. Also, note that graphite and
diamond are not regarded as organic semiconductors since they are not compounds;
silicon carbide is not regarded as organic.
ORGANIC; ORGANIC COMPOUND; ORGANIC GROUP ­ For class 516
When the expression "organic" or "organic compound" or "organic group" is used in this
class, it means a compound or group which meets the requirements wherein the molecule
(or group) is characterized by two carbons bonded together, one atom of carbon bonded to
at least one atom of hydrogen or halogen, or one atom of carbon bonded to at least one
atom of nitrogen by a single or double bond; certain compounds are exceptions to this
rule, i.e., HCN, CN­CN, HNCO, HNCS, cyanogen halides, cyanamide, fulminic acid, and
metal carbides. Said exceptions and all other chemical compounds shall be regarded as
inorganic*. See section LINES WITH OTHER CLASSES AND WITHIN THIS CLASS, subsection
Glossary References, for additional information concerning this definition.
ORGANO­(prefix) ­ For class 516
The prefix organo indicates a requirement that the term meet the definition of organic*,
organic group * or organic compound *.
ORGANOSOL ­ For class 516
A colloid system of a dispersand* (discontinuous phase) in an organic* liquid dispersant*
(continuous phase). Examples are metal oxides such as silica or rare earth oxides
dispersed in liquid alcohols, or in non­polar organic* solvents. See sol*; cf. hydrosol*.
ORIENTED­CRYSTAL ­ For class 117
A material in which substantially all the crystal grains are oriented in a preferential way.
Also called preferred­orientation polycrystalline material.
ORIENTING ­ For class 342
Changing the beam direction of an antenna with respect to some reference point.
ORIENTING ­ For class 343
Changing the direction of the antenna beam.
ORIFICE ­ For class 072
A closed perimeter opening or aperture extending directly through the thickness of a plate
or wall and constituting (1) the mouth of a chamber, or (2) an interconnection between the
regions of space at either side of a plate or wall of substantial lateral extent. A
passageway* of such short length that it has only one effective work­shape­imposing
portion.
ORIGINAL ­ For class 355
Any object from which a copy is made by forming an image thereof on a photoreceptor.
ORIGINAL ­ For class 399
Any object (generally two­dimensional) from which a copy is made by forming an image
thereof on a photoconductor.
ORL ­ For class 438
optical return loss
OSA ­ For class 438
optical subassembly
OSCILLATING ­ For class 366
Rotating alternately in opposite directions about an axis.
OSCILLATING MOTION ­ For class 074
Alternating motion of less than 360 degrees along an arcuate path.
OSCILLATOR ­ For class 331
A system for initiating and maintaining oscillations whose frequency or period is fixed or
determined by the physical parameters of the system. The fundamental elements required
by an oscillator system are: (1) a frequency or period determining element, such as a
resonator or timing means, (2) a driving system for the frequency or period determining
element, and (3) means for deriving a useful output from the oscillator system. This class
is restricted to oscillators for generating electrical oscillations or waves and specifically
excludes alternating current generators of the mechanically driven dynamo­electric
machine type.
OSF ­ For class 438
(see OISF)
OSMOSIS ­ For class 210
Phenomenon in which solvent migrates or is transported across a barrier from a less
concentrated solution to a more concentrated solution separated by the barrier tending to
equalize the concentrations. The force driving the solvent is dependent on the materials of
the liquids and the barrier or septum, and a counter force of greater magnitude will effect
reverse migration or reverse osmosis causing solvent to migrate from the more
concentrated to the less concentrated solution. A comprehensive treatise on osmosis and
reverse osmosis is given in Kirk­Othmer Encyclopedia of Chemical Technology 2nd ed. Vol.
14, pp. 345­355.
OTCR ­ For class 438
over­the­cell routing
OTP ­ For class 438
one­time programmable
OUTDIFFUSION ­ For class 438
The solid­state diffusion of impurities from the underlying substrate into a deposited layer
during the growth thereof.
OUTLET CLOSURE ­ For class 221
A means associated with the egress opening of a dispenser which obstructs, inhibits, or
prevents passage of articles out of the dispenser in one position, such means being down
stream of the point of separation or segregation of the articles.
OUTPUT CIRCUIT ­ For class 323
Is the same as load circuit.
OUTPUT CIRCUIT OR COUPLING ­ For class 330
The circuit or network of an amplifier extending from the output electrodes of the amplifier
to the load device, which may include the load.
OUTPUT MEMBER ­ For class 060
An element of the system by which driving or loading force is delivered for utilization by
means other than the system itself.
OUTPUT MEMBER ­ For class 475
Mechanism which receives rotational power from a planetary gear transmission and
transfers such rotational power to a load device*.
OUTPUT SHAFT: ­ For class 477
Mechanism that receives rotational motion from a gear transmission* or clutch* and
transfers such motion to a load*.
OVERDRIVE ­ For class 475
Mechanism wherein an output member* is driven at a greater rotational velocity than the
rotational velocity of an input member*.
OVEREDGE STITCH ­ For class 112
A stitch wherein the sewing thread extends thickness­wise across a marginal extremity of
one or more layers of material without penetrating side extremity. See Figure 6.
OXIDANT ­ For class 210
An agent which extracts electrons from a chemical moiety and increases its positive or
decreases its negative valence. Often an oxygen or halogen containing material.
OXIDANT COMPONENT: ­ For class 149
As used in this class relates to that portion of a composition which carries sufficient
available oxygen to oxidize at least a substantial portion, if not all, of the fuel component
of the composition, and includes metal oxides, and organic compounds capable of yielding
metal oxide, nitrogen­oxygen or oxygen­halogen salts which are either organic or
inorganic, including the oxides and acids of nitrogen­oxygen, liquefied gaseous material,
and in the case of ​
gThermites​
h only, any inorganic oxygen salt.
OXIDATION DYE ­ For class 008
Oxidation dyes are dyes which produce a color by oxidation on the substrate of compounds
such as arylamino, hydrxyaryl, or similar compounds to produce, e.g., aniline black or
diphenyl black. Nitroaniline dyes are included.
OXIDE ISOLATION ­ For class 257
Electrical isolation of semiconductor electronic devices in a monolithic integrated circuit by
an oxide (e.g., silicon oxide).
OXIDIZER ­ For class 060
A substance (element or compound) which reacts with another substance to produce at
least one new substance in which at least a portion of the oxidizer furnishes at least part
of the more negative (electron acceptor) portion of the new substances. e.g. BH3 + NH3 ​
¨
BN + 3H2 ammonia is considered the oxidizer 2LiH + F2 ​
¨ 2LiF + 2HF fluorine is
considered the oxidizer CH4 + 2O2 ​
¨ CO2 + 2H2O oxygen is the oxidizer
OXO ­ For class 260
Denotes the presence of a carbonyl (C=O) bonded to hydrogen and/or carbon and is a
term generic to ketones and aldehydes.
OXO ­ For class 424
Denotes the presence of a carbonyl (C=O) bonded to hydrogen and/or carbon and is a
term limited to ketones and aldehydes.
OXSEF ­ For class 438
oxygen­doped silicon epitaxial film
OXY ­ For class 260
Denotes the presence of oxygen singly bonded to a carbon, which is not the carbon of a
carbonyl group, and is further bonded to hydrogen, metal, or an organic radical. The term
is generic to alcohols, phenols, alcoholates, phenolates, and ethers and esters thereof, but
in view of the fact that, in this classification, esters take precedence over hydroxy, the
term oxy, as herein employed, is generic to C­OH, C­O Metal, and C­OR (ether type).
OXY ­ For class 424
Denotes the presence of oxygen singly bonded to a carbon, which is not the carbon of a
carbonyl group, and is further bonded to hydrogen, metal or an organic radical. The term
is generic to alcohols, phenols, alcoholates, phenolates, ethers and esters thereof.
p ­ For class 438
high resistivity intrinsic semiconductor
P romoter ­ For class 800
Site on DNA where RNA polymerase binds and initiates transcription.
P/N JUNCTION ­ For class 117
An interface formed by two semiconductor materials in which one contains a charge
carrier which is an electron donor (n­type semiconductor) and the other contains a charge
carrier which is an electron acceptor (p­type semiconductor).
PAC ­ For class 438
photoactive compound
PACKAGE ­ For class 053
A unit consisting of an assembled cover material and contents, where the contents is, or is
to be, encased or encircled by the cover material. The cover need not be shaped around
the contents, e.g., the unit resulting from the final positioning of a contents upon a cover
blank or web, which is then handled as a unit through further packaging operations
including an encasement or encirclement, is also termed a package.
PACKAGE ­ For class 257
A container, case, or enclosure for protecting a solid­state electronic device from the
environment.
PACKAGE ­ For class 426
Mercantile combination of an edible material fully encased, encompassed, or completely
surrounded by a solid material.
PACKAGE ­ For class 438
A container, case, or enclosure utilized in the context of semiconductor art for protecting a
solid­state electronic device from the environment and which is considered a part of a
manufacture product (i.e., as opposed to a package utilized for passage of a product
through the channels of trade in a safe, convenient, and attractive condition).
PAD ­ For class 257
(1) The portion of a conductive pattern on a solid­state electronic device for making
external connection thereto; (2) the portion of a conductive pattern on a chip or a printed
circuit board designed for mounting or attaching a substrate or solid­state active electronic
device.
PAD ­ For class 438
A. The portion of a conductive pattern on a solid­state electronic device for making
external connection thereto. B. The portion of a conductive pattern on a chip or a printed
circuit board designed for mounting or attaching a substrate or solid­state active electronic
device. See also bonding pad, die bond, etc.
PADDLE ­ For class 440
A device used to propel a vessel in the water consisting of a broad fairly flat blade that is
dipped vertically or near vertically into the water.
PAGE ­ For class 400
A unit of printed text corresponding to that which would appear on one leaf or sheet of a
book, newspaper, or document. It usually refers to a sheet of text, but in the instance
where text is imprinted on a web (i.e., of indeterminate­length material), it refers to that
length of web which will subsequently be cut to form a sheet of determinate length.
PAGE­ For class 412
A side of a sheet().
PALLET ­ For class 425
A supporting surface used as a mold bottom or as a green material handling device.
PALMITIC ACID; PALMITATE ­ For class 516
CH3(CH2)14COOH. Hexadecanoic acid, cetylic acid, palmic acid, ethalic acid. Saturated
fatty acid found in most natural oils and fats. Glycerol monopalmitate is the monoglyceride
formed from the esterification reaction between glycerol and palmitic acid.
PANEL ­ For class 049
A sheet­like member which is a section of a closure structure.
PANEL ­ For class 112
A portion of material of finite perimeter having length and width greater than thickness
and (a) having a modification or embellishment of or on the entire periphery thereof or at
least two nonadjacent corners, (b) being completely enclosed in an envelope which
substantially conforms thereto, or (c) having a boundary shape which is other than
rectangle.
PANEL ­ For class 249
A separate or distinct molding surface or a plurality of separate and distinct molding
surfaces connected to form an integral molding surface.
PANEL (SEE MODULE) ­ For class 052
The term panel is used to denote a thin rigid sheetlike structure which may not be
disclosed as used repetitiously, e.g., table top or pane.
PAP ­ For class 438
peel apart
PAPER ­ For class 428
Unless otherwise specified, is a sheet or web of waterlaid felted cellulosic fibers. May also
be made of asbestos, mineral or synthetic fibers or blends of fibers, but must be so
disclosed solely, or must be so claimed for placement in a subclass other than cellulosic or
paper. (Nonstructural or Composition)
PAPER­FINGER ­ For class 400
A member that is in substantial contact with a platen* or with a record­medium* that is
supported or backed by the platen, which member thereby ensures contact of a record­
medium with the platen. It is usually an elongated element, and in those typewriters
wherein the platen is cylindrical the paper­finger is arcuate and conforms to the periphery
of the platen for a substantial length of the paper­finger in order to hold the record­
medium to the platen.
PARAMAGNETISM ­ For class 428
Paramagnetic materials have magnetic moments not completely canceled because of
electronic configuration and exhibit a resultant moment. Paramagnetic susceptibility is
strongly temperature dependent. Examples of paramagnetic materials are CoCr alloys at
specific Cr concentrations and materials exhibiting specific size ranges of either the
magnetic grains or particle dimensions.
PARASITIC CURRENT ­ For class 257
Unintended current which flows between devices in an integrated circuit, or which flows
between device regions and isolation regions.
PARASITIC DEVICES/CHANNELS ­ For class 257
Junctions forming unintended active solid­state devices which interconnect intended active
solid­state devices, which unintended devices are not designed to carry current flow.
PARASITIC DEVICES/CHANNELS ­ For class 438
A. Junctions forming unintended interconnection of intended active solid­state devices. B.
Devices which were not designed to carry current flow and which result from unintended
interconnection of intended active solid­state devices.
PARASITIC ELEMENT ­ For class 343
A conductive (usually metallic) structure (e.g., rod) which reradiates into free space
impinging electromagnetic radiation (waves) coming from or going to the active antenna,
the velocity of the reradiated wave having a component which is in the same direction
(director) as, or in the opposite direction (reflector) to, that of the velocity of the
impinging wave.
PARASITIC REACTANCE, IMPEDANCE, CAPACITANCE, OR INDUCTANCE ­ For class
330
Impedance characteristics of capacitive or inductive nature which are exhibited by
conductive elements or conductive parts of a circuit at only high frequencies in a circuit
designed for operation over a wide band and are inherent in the construction of such
element or part. The presence of such reactances is undesirable and generally detrimental
to the proper operation of the circuit. When a parasitic reactance is used as though it were
a predetermined lumped reactance as in the case of the distributed capacitance of a coil
being used to resonate therewith at a particular frequency; the distributed capacitance or
other parasitic reactance is treated, for classification purposes, as though it were a
predetermined lumped reactance in the circuit. Inter­electrode capacitances similarly
involved in amplifiers as part of a tuned circuit are similarly treated.
PARASITIC THYRISTOR ACTION ­ For class 257
Unwanted active solid­state device formation in which four adjacent complementary doped
regions not designed to act as an active solid­state device, lack sufficient isolation
therebetween and act as a thyristor. Parasitic thyristor action is typically a problem
encountered in CMOS integrated circuits.
PARASITIC TRANSISTOR ACTION ­ For class 257
Unwanted transistor formation in an integrated circuit structure.
PARISON ­ For class 065
A partially shaped article of manufacture requiring further significant shaping to arrive at
the form of a completed useful article.
PARISON ­ For class 425
An intermediate hollow preform from which a bottle or the like is made.
PART(S) ­ For class 277
These are component(s) (e.g., housing, casing, rod, shaft, etc.) of the joint or juncture.
PARTICLE ­ For class 428
A very small quantity of matter, so small as to be considered without magnitude although
possessing inertia and the force of attraction. (Structural)
PARTICULAR ATTACHMENT METHOD ­ For class 506
Specific method of attachment focusing on the way molecules are bound to the solid or
liquid support (e.g., by means of electrostatic interactions, formation of covalent bonds by
cycloaddition reactions, or by irradiation, etc.).
PARTICULATE MATERIAL ­ For class 425
Minute separate particles which are handled as bulk and not as individual pieces.
PARTING LAYER ­ For class 065
See Subclass References to the Current Class, above, for a subclass reference to the term
gparting layer.​
​
h
PARTING MATERIAL ­ For class 425
A material that prevents adhesion or sticking of work to the apparatus.
PARTITION ­ For class 249
Structure set forth under the Class Definition, section F, which divides a mold cavity into
plural cavities. Note. Structure set forth in this definition which forms a hole or recess in
the product is considered a core.
PARTITION MEMBER ­ For class 418
A member either fixed or movable on either the cylinder working member or other
reaction member having a surface portion forming part of the working chamber to either
(1) separate the working chamber into a plurality of working fluid compartments or (2)
separate the inlet from the outlet of the rotary expansible chamber device.
PASSAGE ­ For class 137
Channel or duct that surrounds and guides a stream of fluid or energy in a desired path or
direction.
PASSAGEWAY ­ For class 072
A conduit or path (especially for guiding and restraining the plastic flow of metal), having
at least one shape­imposing portion of closed perimeter definable in a plane normal to the
axis of the conduit. Note. A passageway is usually open at each end; the term may,
however be applied to a blind hole which, by disclosure, does not become completely and
forcibly filled with work during an operation of the class type. Note. A passageway is
capable of imposing more than one shape on work; it may be regarded as a sequence of
orifices, e.g., for drawing or extruding a twisted product of noncircular cross section.
PASSIVE DEVICE ­ For class 257
A solid­state electronic device or component in which charge carriers do not change their
energy levels and that does not provide rectification, amplification, or switching, but which
does react to voltage and current. Examples are pure resistors, capacitors, and inductors.
PASSIVE DEVICE ­ For class 438
A solid­state electronic device or component in which charge carriers do not change their
energy levels and that does not provide rectification, amplification, or switching, but which
does react to voltage and current. Examples are pure resistors, capacitors, and inductors.
PASSIVE INDUCTOR ­ For class 336
An inductor device which contains no source or sink of energy (i.e., an active element). A
"sink of energy" as used in this definition is an element or network which is designed to
absorb energy, by converting electrical energy into another form of energy. Excluded,
therefore, are variable or adjustable inductance devices in which the change in inductance
is effected, at least in part, by an active element such as, by way of example,
continuously rotating machinery (i.e., synchronous or asynchronous phase modifier or
phase advancer machines) or reactance tube systems having space discharge devices with
electrode biasing potential sources.
PASSIVE NETWORK ­ For class 330
A network containing no source of energy and in which no energy is dissipated other than
that accounted for by the resistance of the components of the network.
PASSIVE NETWORK ­ For class 333
A network containing no source of energy and in which no energy is dissipated other than
that accounted for the resistance of the components of the network.
PASTE MOLD ­ For class 065
A mold with an inner lining of a paste (generally made from resins and linseed oil, soap,
etc.) which is brushed into a hot mold and kept wet so that glass within the mold rides on
a steam cushion while being formed.
PATENTING ­ For class 148
A continuous process consisting of heating the metal to a temperature well above the
upper critical temperature, then rapidly cooling through the critical temperature at a
comparatively rapid rate to a predetermined elevated temperature, the cooling step being
commonly effected in a fused metallic bath.
PATTERN ­ For class 164
A replica of an object to be cast and around which the mold is constructed.
PATTERN ­ For class 234
A tangible object, which, when temporarily presented to a suitable machine of the class
type, affects the control of tool selection. (The workpiece itself may function as a pattern).
PATTERN PLATE ­ For class 164
A board to which patterns are to be attached and which extends substantially over the
flask opening.
PATTERN­ For class 382
For the purpose of this class, a pattern* is any form in an image having discernable
characteristics that provide a distinctive identity when contrasted with other forms. For
example, the character "A" has a distinctive identity when contrasted with all other letters
of the alphabet.
PATTERNRECOGNITION* ­ For class 382
For the purpose of this class, pattern* recognition* is defined as any procedure for
ascertaining differences, as well as similarities, between pattern*s under observation and
partitioning the pattern*s into appropriate categories based on these perceived differences
and similarities; or any procedure for correctly identifying a discrete pattern*, such as an
alphanumeric character, as a member of a predefined pattern* category.
PATTERN­FIELD ­ For class 234
A complete pattern or any part thereof which may be chosen to supply input data for any
purpose.
PATTERN­SENSER ­ For class 234
One or more elements which are capable of responding to certain indicia or characteristics
of a pattern* presented to a machine, which response may be utilized to exert a control
function on some portion of the machine.
PAVEMENT ­ For class 404
Hardened, treated or ​
gfinished​
h surface of a roadway­or an upper ​
glayer​
h thereof­exposed
to the wear of traffic. This roadway portion may constitute either (1) the entire roadway
with respect to untreated or unworked earth or (2) no more than an upper course of a
multilayer structure. In many instances, the ​
gpavement​
h itself is made up of more than
one distinct stratum.
PAWL ­ For class 400
A moveable member having a protruding portion that engages a notch between two
adjacent teeth of a ratchet* to cause or enable intermittent movement of the ratchet. The
movement of a pawl is usually two­way, that is, oscillation or reciprocation, and the
protruding portion of the pawl engages a notch between two adjacent teeth of the ratchet
and moves relative to the ratchet over or around one of the teeth to engage a notch
between the next two adjacent teeth. In one form of pawl and ratchet mechanism, the
pawl is driven while engaged in a notch between the teeth to thereby drive the ratchet,
and then is retracted to reengage a notch between the next teeth. In another form of pawl
and ratchet mechanism, the ratchet is urged to be moved, but its movement is restrained
by the pawl; movement of the pawl momentarily releases the ratchet for movement of the
ratchet, and return of the pawl to a notch between the next teeth again restrains the
ratchet. In either mechanism a plurality of pawls, or a pawl with a plurality of protruding
portions may be used alternately.
PAYLOAD ­ For class 102
A container for holding explosive, research, reconnaissance, or counter measure
equipment, animal life, parachute, etc., which is propelled into the air by an explosive
means.
PAY­PER­VIEW (PPV) ­ For class 725
A programming event that is provided upon request, in which the event is broadcast on a
particular channel at a particular time. These events are distributed to all subscribers, but
enabled on an individual basis through an interactive process.
PBG ­ For class 438
photonic band gap
PBL ­ For class 438
polybuffered LOCOS
PBM ­ For class 438
planarization blocking mask
PBN ­ For class 438
pyrolytic boron nitride
PBT ­ For class 438
permeable base transistor
PCB ­ For class 438
printed circuit board
PCE ­ For class 438
photoconductive element
P­CHANNEL ­ For class 257
A conduction path, made of p­type semiconductor material, located between the source
and drain of a field effect device.
P­CHANNEL ­ For class 438
A conduction path, made of p­type semiconductor material, located between source and
drain of a field effect device.
PEB ­ For class 438
postexposure baking
PECVD ­ For class 117
Plasma Enhanced CVD*.
PECVD ­ For class 438
plasma enhanced chemical vapor deposition
PELTIER EFFECT ­ For class 117
A thermoelectric effect wherein electric current between/through a solid/solid or a
solid/liquid junction creates heating in one side and cooling in the other.
PENETRATE ­ For class 227
Act of inserting or imbedding (e.g., by piercing, etc.) all or a portion of an elongated
member in work material, by bodily movement of the member or the proximate portion of
the work material (as distinguished from relative deflection or deformation of plural
portions of an exteriorly applied fastener, as in pinching, binding, clipping, hog­ringing,
etc.). The term may also refer to increasing or advancing an already established
penetrating relationship, by bodily movement of the member relative to the work.
PEP ­ For class 438
photo­engraving process
PEPTIDE; POLYPEPTIDE ­ For class 516
Compounds composed of amino acids bound together by amide linkages. Proteins are
polypeptides.
PEPTIDES ­ For class 930
Compounds containing a sequence of 4 to 100 amino acid units, which are bound through
at least one normal peptide link.
PERIODIC TABLE ­ For class 208
In this class metals and metal compounds may be identified as belonging to a certain
gGroup​
​
h distinguished by Roman numerals. These groups are taken from Henry D.
Hubbard"s ​
gPeriodic chart of the Atoms​
h (1956 Ed.). Note. The metals making up the
various groups are as follows: IA = Li, Na, K, Rb, Cs and Fr (these metals are also
identified as ​
galkali metals​
h). IB = Cu, Ag and Au IIA = Be, Mg, Ca, Sr, Ba and Ra (Mg,
Ca, Sr and Ba are also identified as ​
galkaline earth metals​
h) IIB = Zn, Cd and Hg III = Al,
Ga, In, Tl, Sc, Y, Rare Earth metals and Actinide series metals [Rare Earth Metals: La, Ce,
Pr, Nd, Pm, Sm, Eu, Gd, Tb, Dy, Ho, Er, Tm, Yb and Lu; Actinide Series Metals (atomic
numbers 89 and greater) Ac, Th, Pa, U, Np, Pu, Am, Cm, Bk, Cf, E, Fm and Mv] IV = Ge,
Sn, Pb, Ti, Zr and Hf V = As, Sb, Bi, V, Nb and Ta VI = Po, Cr, Mo and W VII = Mn, Tc and
Re VIII = Fe, Co, Ni, Ru, Rh, Pd, Os, Ir and Pt. (Ru, Rh, Pd, Os, Ir and Pf are also known
as ​
gNoble Metals​
h)
PERIPHERAL ­ For class 345
A functional unit that transmits data to or receives data from a computer to which it is
coupled.
PERIPHERAL ­ For class 706
A functional unit that transmits data to or receives data from a computer to which it is
coupled
PERIPHERAL ­ For class 707
A functional unit that transmits data to or receives data from a computer to which it is
coupled.
PERIPHERAL ­ For class 709
A functional unit that transmits data to or receives data from a computer to which it is
coupled.
PERIPHERAL ­ For class 710
A functional unit that transmits data to or receives data from a computer to which it is
coupled.
PERIPHERAL ­ For class 711
A functional unit that transmits data to or receives data from a computer to which it is
coupled (e.g., modems, keyboards, monitors, touch tablet, printers, joy stick, disk and
tape drives, etc.).
PERIPHERAL ­ For class 712
A functional unit that transmits data to or receives data from a computer to which it is
coupled.
PERIPHERAL ­ For class 713
A functional unit that transmits data to or receives data from a computer to which it is
coupled.
PERIPHERAL ­ For class 714
A functional unit that transmits data to or receives data from a computer to which it is
coupled.
PERIPHERAL ­ For class 718
A functional unit that transmits data to or receives data from a computer to which it is
coupled.
PERIPHERAL ­ For class 719
A functional unit that transmits data to or receives data from a computer to which it is
coupled.
PERIPHERAL ­ For class 902
A device associated with a terminal*, either as a subcombination adapted to enhance input
or output of data (e.g., a printer for output, a voice recognizer for input, etc.), or in
combination with the terminal to add a disparate function (e.g., means to identify
counterfeit money, a sheet feeder, etc.).
PERISTALTIC CCD ­ For class 257
See BULK CHANNEL CCD.
PERMANENT COATING ­ For class 204
A coating which remains as part of a finished article as distinguished from a coating which
is formed upon and removed or stripped from a base or substrate.
PERMEABLE ­ For class 210
Property of allowing passage or migration of other material through a barrier or septum of
the material so designated. The migration phenomenon is due primarily to the chemical
nature of the materials involved and may include molecular weight or size as a factor.
PERMEATE ­ For class 210
Material which has passed through a permeable or semipermeable membrane.
PERMISSIBLE ENERGY LEVEL ­ For class 257
An energy level in a conduction or valence band which a charge carrier (electron or hole)
may have.
PERMUTATION ­ For class 070
Variation or change of a combination to produce a different combination.
PERSONAL COMPUTER (PC) ­ For class 725
A system, containing a host and a limited number of peripherals designed to be used in the
home or in small offices, that enables individuals to perform a variety of computing or
word­processing functions or both, and that typically is of a size permitting it and its
peripherals to be located on a table surface. Note: Other definitions given in product
standards or applicable regulations may take precedence. Alternatively, a single­user
microcomputer designed for personally controllable applications.
PERSONAL IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (PIN) ­ For class 725
A unique code number assigned, as with automatic teller machine cards, to the authorized
user.
PETROLEUM, PETROLEUM OIL ­ For class 516
Crude oil. Mixture of hydrocarbons, with small amounts of compounds containing nitrogen,
Phosphorus, Sulfur, and oxygen, obtained from underground deposits. Often the terms are
applied to fractions derived from the basic yield, including distillation and cracking
fractions.
PFT ­ For class 438
peeled film technology
PGA ­ For class 438
(a) pin­grid array or (b) programmable gate array
PGMA ­ For class 438
poly(glycidyl methacrylate) (an EB resist)
pH ­ For class 210
The measure of the acidity or basicity (alkalinity) of a liquid. Also determines the
sweetness or sourness of a liquid. The original value was the log of the reciprocal of the
hydrogen ion concentration.
PHASE CONTROL ­ For class 323
Includes the maintenance of a predetermined value of or the predetermined variation of
the value of the phase angle between the current and voltage of a circuit or of the phase
angle of the current or voltage of a circuit with respect to itself or to the current or voltage
of another circuit.
PHASE CONVERSION ­ For class 363
The transformation of electrical energy having one number of phases to electrical energy
having another number of phases.
PHASE DISTORTION ­ For class 333
Results from different frequencies travelling with different velocities such that their
relative arrival times differ from their relative starting times.
PHASE DISTORTION CHARACTERISTIC ­ For class 333
Used to designate the change in displacement of different frequency components of a band
of frequencies transmitted by a transmission device or network. For example, certain
frequencies of the band will be retarded or advanced a different amount than other
frequencies.
PHASE LOCKED LOOP ­ For class 388
A closed loop circuit in which the output signal is compared to a reference signal and any
phase difference between the two signals is used to adjust the output signal to ​
glock​
h it to
the phase of the reference signal.
PHASE SHIFT ­ For class 330
Used to designate the change in phase relation between voltage and current of the same
wave energy, or between the voltages or the currents of different wave energy of the
same frequency.
PHASE SHIFT ­ For class 333
Used to designate the change in phase relation between voltage and current of the same
wave energy, or between the voltages or the currents of different wave energy of the
same frequency.
PHENOLIC REACTANT ­ For class 520
The term phenolic reactant as used is intended to include the subject matter enumerated
below:
A phenol for purposes of this subclass requires one or more ­OH groups directly bonded to
a nuclear carbon atom of a substituted or unsubstituted benzene ring, which benzene ring
can be an individual benzene ring or can be part of a polycyclic ring system.
A phenol ether for purposes of this subclass requires one or more ­O­C groups wherein the
oxygen atom of the ­O­C group is directly bonded to a nuclear carbon atom of a
substituted or unsubstituted benzene ring and wherein the carbon atom of the ­O­C group
is not double bonded to oxygen, sulfur, selenium, or tellurium or triple bonded to nitrogen.
The benzene ring may be an individual benzene ring or may be part of a polycyclic ring
system. The following examples of phenol ether are within the definition set out above:
(a) The ­O­C group may itself be part of a cyclic ring system, e.g., see Fig. 1 below, etc.
(b) The carbon of the ­O­C group may be a ring atom of a cyclic or aromatic ring, e.g.,
see Fig. 2 below, etc.
(c) An inorganic phenolate is an inorganic salt of a phenol (see phenol 1 above) wherein
the hydrogen atom of a ­OH group is replaced by a metal or an inorganic group. Tannin or
tannic acid is considered to be a polyhydroxy polycyclic carboxy­containing phenol.
Crysylic acid is considered to be cresol. Coal tar extracts are considered to be an
indefinable mixture of ingredients some of which are phenolic in nature. Cardanol and
anacardic acids are phenolic derivatives.
(d) The carbon of the ­O­C group may be a terminal carbon atom, e.g., Figure 3 below; or
may be the carbon atom of a chain, e.g., Figure 4 below, etc.
PHENOLIC­OXY ­ For class 260
Denotes the presence of an oxygen single­bonded to a ring carbon of a benzene nucleus.
Phon ­ For class 704
The loudness level of any other sound based upon the SPL (sound pressure level measured
in decibels) of a 1 kHz tone. For example, if we judge a certain waveform to sound as loud
as a 1 kHz tone at 70 dB, then this waveform has a loudness level of 70 phons.
PHOTOCELL ­ For class 250
A detector used to sense light incident thereon and generate a signal representative of
some aspect of the light such as intensity, phase, coherence, mode distribution,
interference pattern characteristics, etc.
PHOTO­CELLS ­ For class 313
A device to be used in an electrical circuit which is provided with means responsive to light
or analogous rays for altering the operation of the device. The only photocells included in
this class are photosensitive discharge devices and photosensitive electric lamps.
PHOTOCONDUCTIVE MATERIAL ­ For class 399
A material that is an insulator in the dark and conducts electricity in proportion to the
amount of impinging light or actinic radiation. This is usually provided as a layer of
electrically conductive material on a conductive support. During use, the electrical
conductor is charged (sensitized) in the dark, and light (in image configuration) allows or
causes the electrically conductive layer to conduct so that the charge leaks through to the
conductive layer leaving a charge pattern corresponding to the original image
(electrostatic latent image).
PHOTOCONDUCTIVE MEMBER ­ For class 399
A medium whose electrical conductivity, electrical charge, magnetic condition, or electrical
emissivity is selectively altered by the action of electromagnetic radiation during imaging.
PHOTODETECTOR ­ For class 250
See Photocell
PHOTODIODE ­ For class 257
A diode in which charge carriers are created by light which illuminates the diode junction.
It is a photovoltaic as well as a photoconductive device.
PHOTODIODE ­ For class 438
A diode in which charge carriers are created by light which illuminates the diode junction.
It is a photovoltaic as well as a photoconductive device.
PHOTOELECTRIC CELL ­ For class 250
See Photocell
PHOTOGRAPHIC MEDIUM ­ For class 396
A photographic medium is a material coated with a chemical that is photosensitive to
actinic light.
PHOTORECEPTOR ­ For class 355
A medium which changes its chemical or mechanical properties when exposed to light.
This term includes photosensitive members, etc.
PHOTO­SENSITIVE ­ For class 313
A device provided with means sensitive to light or analogous rays for altering the
operation of the device.
PHOTO­SENSITIVE CATHODE ­ For class 313
An electrode which emits electrons when subjected to the action of light or analogous rays.
Discharge devices having a photosensitive cathode or other photosensitive electrode are
classified in subclasses 523+ in this class. See photosensitive electrode above. See the
class definition for the classification of photosensitive cathodes, per se.
PHOTO­SENSITIVE ELECTRODE ­ For class 313
An electrode which has its electrical properties changed by the action of light or analogous
ray energy. The ray energy may be X­rays, ultraviolet rays, infrared rays, or any
analogous radiation. See the class definition for the classification of photosensitive
electrodes, per se.
PHOTOSENSOR ­ For class 250
See Photocell
PHOTOTRANSISTOR ­ For class 257
A transistor having no base terminal and in which charge carriers are created by light
which illuminates its collector­base junction.
PHOTOVOLTAIC CELL ­ For class 257
An active solid­state device with a pn junction that generates a voltage in response to light
impinging on the junction.
PHS ­ For class 438
plated heat sink
PIC ­ For class 438
photonic integrated circuit
PICKUP TUBE ­ For class 348
A television camera tube consists of a cathode­ray tube which includes vidicon, orthocon,
iconoscope, or plumbicon (i.e., vidicon with lead­oxide target, trademark of N. V. Philips
of Holland).
PID ­ For class 438
programmable interconnect device (fuse/antifuse)
PIERCE ­ For class 072
To stab or penetrate by a pointed, conical, or wedgelike tool, as distinguished from
punching (shearing) by coacting­edged tools.
PILOT BURNER ­ For class 431
A small auxiliary unit used to ignite a principal flame holder.
PIN ­ For class 438
P­type layer, intrinsic layer, N­type layer
PIN DIODE/DEVICE ­ For class 257
A diode having an intrinsic semiconductor (i.e., one with no dopants) sandwiched between
a p­type layer and an n­type layer. The depletion region (the intrinsic semiconductor
layer) thickness can be tailored to optimize quantum efficiency for use as a photo diode or
frequency response for use as a microwave diode.
PIN DIODE/DEVICE ­ For class 438
A diode having an intrinsic semiconductor (i.e., one with no dopants) sandwiched between
a p­type layer and an n­type layer. The depletion region (the intrinsic semiconductor
layer) thickness can be tailored to optimize quantum efficiency for use as a photo diode or
frequency response for use as a microwave diode.
PIN­ For class 024
A securing mechanism having both (a) a portion specifically shaped (e.g., pointed) to
facilitate impaling of and penetration into either the structure­to­be­secured* or a
supporting member therefor during its operation and (b) a remaining portion (e.g., head)
not intended to penetrate either the structure­to­be­secured* or a supporting member
therefor in the final securing position of the mechanism. In addition, the penetrating
portion of the securing mechanism is intended to be always easily impaled into and
extracted from the penetrated area of the structure­to­be­secured* or its supporting
member by unaided directed manual force. Finally, the normal securing or releasing
operation of the mechanism requires no portion of the mechanism to be destroyed or
undergo forces in excess of those causing plastic deformation of the material from which it
is constructed.
PINCH EFFECT ­ For class 376
The self­constriction that occurs in a plasma as a result of the passage of a unindirectional
current, which current produces an azimuthal self­magnetic field that tends to constrict (or
pinch) the plasma; or the equivalent effect which is produced when a plasma is contained
between parallel circuits carrying current in the same direction attracting each other.
PINCH­EFFECT RESISTOR ­ For class 257
A monolithic integrated circuit resistor having a layer of one conductivity type, typically a
P­layer formed at the same time as integrated circuit bipolar transistor base regions,
which is thinned by an inset region of opposite conductivity type, typically an N­layer
formed at the same time as integrated circuit bipolar transistor emitter regions.
PINCH­EFFECT RESISTOR ­ For class 438
A monolithic integrated circuit resistor having a layer of one conductivity type, typically a
P­layer formed at the same time as integrated circuit bipolar transistor base regions,
which is thinned by an inset region of opposite conductivity type, typically an N­layer
formed at the same time as integrated circuit bipolar transistor emitter regions.
PINCH­OFF ­ For class 257
The condition in a depletion mode field effect transistor wherein the conducting channel is
depleted of majority carriers and is thereby pinched off, no path remaining for the source­
to­drain majority carrier (e.g., electron) flow.
PIN­GRID ARRAY ­ For class 257
A semiconductor chip package having leads in the form of pins arranged in columns and
rows.
PIN­GRID ARRAY ­ For class 438
A semiconductor chip package having leads in the form of pins arranged in columns and
rows.
PIPE ­ For class 164
A cavity formed in metal during the solidification of the last portion of liquid metal,
causing by contraction.
PIQ ­ For class 438
thermosetting polyimide resin
PISTON ­ For class 092
A working member which has relative sliding sealing engagement with the encompassing
wall of a cylinder type working chamber. The principal parts of a piston consist of an end
face portion and a side wall portion which are defined as follows:
PITCH ­ For class 400
The term ​
gpitch​
h in the typewriter art derives from its usage in mechanics or machinery,
where it refers to the distance between two things in series, e.g., two adjacent threads of
a screw or two adjacent teeth of a toothed wheel or rack, etc. As used in the typewriter
art, ​
gpitch​
h refers to a line­space* distance or to a character­space* distance, as such
distances are caused by mechanical elements in the typewriter. Some typewriters are
capable of imprinting different character* sizes due to easily replaceable type­head*
elements. In order to maintain a proper or pleasing appearance to the type text, it is
necessary, when such a change in character size is made, also to change the character­
space and line­space distances in proper proportion to that of the character size. Such a
typewriter is therefore also capable of having the pitch changed when character size is
changed.
PITCH ­ For class 704
The measurable frequency or period at which the glottis vibrates.
PITCH (GEOMETRICAL) ­ For class 416
The distance an element of a rotating impeller* would advance in one revolution if it were
moving along a helix having an angle equal to the impeller blade angle*.
PIXEL OR ELEMENT RATE ­ For class 348
The smallest distinguishable and resolvable area in an image.
PIXEL­ For class 382
The smallest distinguishable and resolvable area in an image.
PLA ­ For class 438
programmable logic array
PLANAR TRANSISTOR ­ For class 257
A bipolar transistor in which the emitter base and collector regions terminate at the same
plane surface without indentations in or protrusions from the surface. Hence, the emitter
and base regions form dish shaped portions extending into the semiconductor from the
common surface.
PLANAR TRANSISTOR ­ For class 438
A bipolar transistor in which the emitter base and collector regions terminate at the same
plane surface without indentations in or protrusions from the surface. Hence, the emitter
and base regions form dish­shaped portions extending into the semiconductor from the
common surface.
PLANET CARRIER ­ For class 475
A device mounted for rotation about a first axis, and carrying a planet pinion*, the planet
pinion having a second rotational axis.
PLANET PINION ­ For class 475
A gear mounted on a planet carrier*, said carrier rotatable about a first axis, and said
gear rotatable about a second axis.
PLANT ­ For class 504
The term plant refers to all physical parts of a plant, including seeds, seedlings, saplings,
roots, tubers, stems, stalks, foliage, and fruits.
PLANT GROWTH ­ For class 504
Plant growth includes all phases of development from seed germination to natural or
induced cessation of life.
PLASMA ­ For class 216
A gas that is sufficiently ionized for its properties to depend on the ionization. It contains
approximately equal numbers of positive ions and electrons, so the mixture is electrically
neutral, highly conductive, and affected by magnetic fields. A thermal plasma is produced
by temperatures above 20,000 degrees centigrade.
PLASMA ­ For class 373
A wholly, or partially ionized gas in which the positive ions and the negative electrons are
roughly equal in number.
PLASMA ­ For class 376
For the purpose of this class is a very hot, at least partially, ionized gaseous system
consisting of equivalent (substantially so) numbers of positive ions and electrons,
irrespective of whether neutral particles are present or not. It is nearly neutral electrically
and highly conducting. See also Fully Ionized and subclasses 100+.
PLASTIC ARTICLE OR EARTHENWARE ­ For class 425
This generic title embraces the types of material, which have the common property of
plasticity under the working conditions of the apparatus and are shaped or reshaped by
apparatus within the scope of the class. These materials include the following: (1) natural
or synthetic resins or gums; (2) green ceramic compositions, (e.g., clay, etc.); (3)
particulate material or powder including powdered metal; (4) melts of solids or softened
solids except of glass or of metal where a shaping surface is used; (5) slurries except of
paper pulp; (6) dough or paste, including edible types.
PLASTICITY ­ For class 425
The property of a material to flow either in a fluent or conditioned solid state, whereby it
may be shaped or reshaped into a self­sustaining preform or product.
PLATE ­ For class 029
A sheetlike member the thickness of which is small in relation to its area measured in a
plane normal to its thickness.
PLATEN ­ For class 355
A flat or curved piece of rigid material on or against which an original is placed for
imaging the original onto a photoreceptor.
PLATEN ­ For class 399
A flat or curved piece of rigid material on or against which an original is placed for
imaging the original onto a photoconductive member.
PLATEN ­ For class 400
An element that serves as a support or backing for a record­medium* while a type­
member* is impressed against the record­medium and thereby prevents movement of the
record­medium during impression; or an element that serves as a support or backing for a
record­medium and also moves the record­medium toward the type­member for
impression of the type­member against the record­medium. Although from the derivation
of the word ​
gplaten​
h it should comprise a flat or planar plate, in the typewriter art it is not
so limited. In most typewriters the platen is a cylinder having a generally smooth surface,
and the record­medium is partially wrapped around the periphery of the cylinder. In use
the cylinder is rotated until the location of the record­medium corresponds to the desired
location of the print­line* to be imprinted thereon, and after the desired line has been
imprinted, the cylinder is rotated an increment corresponding to a desired line­space*,
thereby moving the record­medium. Some typewriters do include a flat platen, which may
be a plate having dimensions corresponding to the record­medium (i.e., sheet), or may be
a bar platen having dimensions corresponding to the height of a character* and the length
of a print­line, or may be an anvil having dimensions corresponding to the height and
width of a single character.
PLATEN ­ For class 425
Means providing a press­type shaping surface.
PLATINUM GROUP­ For class 075
An element of the group Osmium (Os), Iridium (Ir), Platinum (Pt), Ruthenium (Ru),
Rhodium (Rh), Palladium (Pd).
PLATINUM METAL ­ For class 204
A metal element from the group consisting of iridium (Ir), osmium (Os), palladium (Pd),
platinum (Pt), and rhenium (Re).
PLATINUM METALS ­ For class 423
A group of noble metals that occur together in nature and form 2 groups in the periodic
system, i.e., Ru, Rh, Pd, Os, Ir and Pt.
PLCC ­ For class 438
plastic leaded chip carrier
PLDD ­ For class 438
profiled LDD
PLM ­ For class 438
pad limiting metallurgy
PLUG­IN PACKAGE ­ For class 257
An electronic package for an active solid­state device in which the lead pins are
perpendicular to the mounting area of the substrate, as contrasted with a flat package in
which the leads are in the same plane as the substrate.
PLURAL AMPLIFIER CHANNELS ­ For class 330
An amplifier system having at least two signal channels each containing separate
amplifiers as defined above (wherein each amplifier may be a cascade amplifier), such
amplifier channels may be completely separate from each other having separate and
independent sources or loads; usually with some common control or they may be in
parallel, having a common source and a common load; or the plural channels may be in
branched circuits from separate sources or to separate loads.
PLURAL TOOL SET ­ For class 072
Three or more relatively movable tools* which are effective in any combination to perform
operations of the class type on one or more discrete pieces of work, of which tools less
than the total number are in actual contact with the same piece of work at the same time.
For example: (1) tool couples* located at spaced tool stations in a plural tool station
machine, if they act on distinct workpieces, or noncurrently on portions of integrally
connected work material, and (2) two movable tools alternately engaging a workpiece
resting upon an anvil, each tool retracting before the other tool touches the work.
PLZT ­ For class 438
lead lanthanate zirconate titanate
PMMA ­ For class 438
polymethylmethacrylate
PMOS ­ For class 438
p­channel MOSFET
P­MOSFET ­ For class 257
A metal oxide semiconductor field effect transistor having p­type source and drain regions
and a p­type conduction channel which may be formed by a p type doped region (depletion
mode) or induced by a voltage on the gate (enhancement mode).
PN­JUNCTION ­ For class 257
The interface and region of transition between p­type and n­type semiconductors.
PN­JUNCTION ­ For class 438
The interface and region of transition between p­type and n­type semiconductors. See also
barrier layer.
PN­JUNCTION DIODE ­ For class 257
A semiconductor device having two terminals connected to opposite type semiconductor
materials with a junction therebetween and exhibiting a non­linear voltage­current
characteristic, usually used for switching or rectification.
PN­JUNCTION DIODE ­ For class 438
A semiconductor device having two terminals connected to opposite­type semiconductor
materials with a junction therebetween and exhibiting a nonlinear voltage­current
characteristic, usually used for switching or rectification.
PNP ­ For class 438
(bipolar transistor)
PNP TRANSISTOR ­ For class 257
A bipolar transistor with a p type emitter, an n­type base and a p­type collector.
PNP TRANSISTOR ­ For class 438
A bipolar transistor with p­type emitter and collector regions separated by an n­type base.
POINT CONTACT TRANSISTOR ­ For class 330
A transistor comprising a body of P­ or N­type semiconductor material to which are
attached two closely spaced electrodes connected at sharply defined points to the
semiconductor material and a third electrode, the base relatively remote from the other
electrodes and having a relatively large contact area (low resistance) for connection to the
semiconductor. In this type of transistor the emitter is forwardly biased having, in N­type
semiconductor material, the positive terminal of the biasing means connected to the
emitter electrode, and for P­type semiconductor material the negative terminal of the
biasing means connected to the emitter relative to the base, to inject minority carriers for
the conductivity type semiconductor material (holes for N­type and electrons for the P­
type) and the collector is biased reversely (having the negative terminal of the biasing
means connected to the collector for N­type material and the positive terminal for P­type
material), relative to the base so that minority carriers are collected there.
POINT DEFECT ­ For class 257
A crystal defect occurring at a point in a crystal. Examples include, (1) a foreign atom
incorporated into the crystal lattice at either a substitutional (regular lattice) site or
interstitial (between regular lattice sites) site, (2) a missing atom in the lattice, or (3) a
host atom located between regular lattice sites and adjacent to a vacancy (called a Frenkel
defect).
POINT DEFECT ­ For class 438
A crystal defect occurring at a point in a crystal. Examples include (a) a foreign atom
incorporated into the crystal lattice at either a substitutional (regular lattice) site or
interstitial (between regular lattice sites) site, (b) a missing atom in the lattice, or (c) a
host atom located between regular lattice sites and adjacent to a vacancy (called a Frenkel
defect). See CRYSTAL DEFECT for other examples of crystalline defects.
POLARIZATION ­ For class 359
In a beam of polarized electromagnetic radiation, the polarization direction is the direction
of the electric field vector (with no distinction between positive and negative as the field
oscillates back and forth). The electric field vector is always in the plane which is normal
to the beam propagation direction. At a given stationary point in space, the electric field
vector of a beam can vary with time at random (unpolarized beam), can remain constant
(plane­polarized beam), or can rotate. In the latter two cases, the beam is said to be
gpolarized​
​
h and can be thought of as the resultant vector of two orthogonal component
vectors having equal amplitudes. If the phase difference of the two component vectors is 0
degrees, the light is plane polarized; if 90 degrees, the light is circularly polarized; and if
it is between 0 and 90 degrees, the light is elliptically polarized. Elliptical and plane
polarized light can be converted into each other by means of birefringent optical systems
which retard one of the orthogonal component vectors relative to the other.
POLARIZATION ­ For class 725
That property of a radiated electromagnetic wave describing the time­varying direction
and amplitude of the electric field vector; specifically, the figure traced as a function of
time by the extremity of the vector at a fixed location in space, as observed along the
direction of propagation. Note: In general, the figure is elliptical and it is traced in a
clockwise or counterclockwise sense. The commonly referenced circular and linear
polarizations are obtained when the ellipse becomes a circle or a straight line,
respectively. Clockwise sense rotation of the electric vector is designated right­hand
polarization and counterclockwise sense rotation is designated left­hand polarization.
POLICY ­ For class 726
Rules for protecting information, services and other data processing resources.
POLISHING ­ For class 210
An ion exchange process in which the ions released to the liquid are only H+ and OH­. A
method of achieving very pure water. See CONDUCTIVITY WATER.
POLL ­ For class 725
In data transmission, a flexible, systematic method, centrally controlled for permitting
stations on a multipoint circuit to transmit without contending for the line. Also, a method
for presenting questions to users in order to obtain information for analysis.
POLY(AMIDO­ESTER) ­ For class 428
A compound which is a polymer of linearly recurring amide and ester linkages. The
monomers do not have to have an equivalent number of amide and ester groups and they
do not have to occur in a regular pattern. The products of (1) a) polybasic acids b)
polyhydric alcohols and c) polyamines or, (2) a mixture of hydroxy acids and amino acids
or (3) polybasic acids and hydroxy amines are within the scope of the term. (Polyurethane
is exemplary): The manner in which the ester and amide groups linearly link the
monomers or moieties, of which the chain is built, is graphically indicated by the below
structure. The ester groups need not be carboxylic esters but may be, e.g., sulfate ester
groups. (Nonstructural or Composition)
POLYAMIDE ­ For class 428
A polymeric compound containing amide groups through which the monomers are linearly
linked, except urea­aldehyde (for which see alddhyde or ketone condensation product).
The term includes 1, the reaction products of polyamines and polybasic acids or 2, the
polymer of amino acids (e.g., nylon, peptides and proteins). The manner in which the
amide groups linearly link the monomers or moieties, of which the chain is built is
graphically indicated by the below: (Nonstructural or Composition)
Note. Wheat paste, which contains gluten, is considered to be a polyamide.
Note. Polyamide also includes polyimide.
Note. Urea­aldehyde condensation product is not included within the definition of
polyamide since the product is significantly different from other polyamide resins and are
similar to phenol­aldehyde resins. Hence, urea­aldehyde products are placed in the
subclass providing for aldehyde­ketone condensation products.
polycide ­ For class 438
polycrystalline silicide
POLYCRYSTALLINE ­ For class 257
A material composed of more than one crystal.
POLYCYCLO RING SYSTEM ­ For class 514
This term denotes a compound which contains fused or bridged rings. The polycyclo ring
system must contain at least two rings and each ring of the system must share two or
more of its atoms with another ring of the system. All ring members must be attached to
each other by nonionic bonding. The polycyclo ring system is usually only a moiety within
a compound. Indents such as bicyclo and tricyclo are meant to limit the number of rings or
cyclos in the polycyclo ring system to exactly two rings and three rings, respectively.
For polycyclo systems having bridges it should be remembered that the system is
regarded as composed only of the smallest number of smallest rings that will account for
all atoms and valences. This is in accord with the nomenclature employed by The Ring
Index. Second Edition, (1960).
An example of the use of this system of nomenclature is as follows. The compound (Ia)
can also be written as (Ib)
Said compound should also be considered as a (C4N—C4N—C2O) tricyclo system as in
(Ia), rather than as a (C4N—C4 NO—C2O) tricyclo system as possibly seen in (Ib). The
former interpretationis the one with smallest number of smallest rings that accounts for all
atoms and valences. Some additional illustrative examples of the principle set forth above
are: (II)
Compound II is considered as a bicyclo system composed of a C2N2O ring and a C4O ring;
it is not considered a diazine ring for classification. Further, 3—aza—bicyclo [3.1.0] hexane
is classified with pyrrolidines considering the structure a five­membered ring and a three­
membered ring rather than with piperidines which would require considering it a six­
membered ring. However, see page XI of The Ring Index for an explanation of “valence
bridges”.
Similarly, the structure is considered to be a pentacyclo ring system have three six­
membered carbocyclic rings, one five­membered hetero ring consisting of one ring oxygen
and four ring carbons, and one six­membered ring consisting of one ring nitrogen and five
ring carbons.
Betaine inner salts are sometimes shown as ring structures, etc.,
However, this is not a polycyclo ring system because nonionic bonding does not exist
between the N and O atoms. The bonding between them is ionic and such as compound is
classified as:
Additionally, a structure of the type:
is considered to be a polycyclo ring system composed of five rings:
C4N—C4O—C4N—C4O—C12N2O2.
POLYCYCLO RING SYSTEM ­ For class 532
This term denotes a compound which contains fused or bridged rings. The polycyclo ring
system must contain at least two rings and each ring of the system must share two or
more of its atoms with another ring of the system. All ring members must be attached to
each other by nonionic bonding. The polycyclo ring system is usually only a moiety within
a compound. Indents such as bicyclo and tricyclo limit the number of rings or cyclos in the
polycyclo ring system to exactly two rings and three rings, respectively. For polycyclo
systems having bridges, the system is regarded as composed only of the smallest number
of smallest rings that will account for all atoms and valences. This is in accord with the
nomenclature employed by The Ring Index, Second Edition, (1960). An example of the use
of this system of nomenclature is shown in Figures 9 and 10, which show two different
possible methods of representing the same compound.
The represented compound should be considered as a (C4N­C4N­C2O) tricyclo system as in
Figure 9, rather than as a (C4N­C4NO­C2O) tricyclo system as possibly seen in Figure 10.
The former interpretation is the one with the smallest number of smallest rings that
accounts for all atoms and valences.
A further example of the principle set forth above is illustrated by the compound of Figure
11, which is considered as a bicyclo system composed of a C2N2O ring and a C4O ring; it
is not considered a diazine ring for classification.
Another example is 3­azabicyclo [3.1.0] hexane, shown in Figure 12, which is classified
with pyrrolidines by considering the structure a five­membered ring and a three­
membered ring rather than with piperidines which would require considering it a six­
membered ring.
Similarly, the structure shown in Figure 13 is considered to be a pentacyclo ring system
having three six­membered carbocyclic rings, one five­membered hetero ring consisting of
one ring oxygen and four ring carbons, and one six­membered ring consisting of one ring
nitrogen and five ring carbons.
Betaine salts are sometimes shown as ring structures, e.g., as shown in Figure 14.
However, Figure 14 is not a polycyclo ring system because nonionic bonding does not exist
between the N and O atoms. To be regarded as a hetero ring, nonionic bonding must exist
between all members of a ring. The bonding between the N and O atoms in Figure 14 is
ionic and such a compound is classified as represented by Figure 15.
A structure of the type shown in Figure 16 is considered to be a polycyclo ring system
composed of five rings: C4N­C4O­C4N­C4N­C4O­C12N2O2.
POLYEPOXIDE ­ For class 520
Denotes a material having more than one 1,2­epoxy group per molecule.
POLYESTER ­ For class 428
A polymeric compound containing ester groups through which the monomers are linearly
linked to each other. The manner in which the ester groups linearly link the monomers or
moieties, of which the chain is built, is s:graphically indicated by the below structure. The
ester groups need not be carboxylic esters but may also be, e.g., sulfate ester groups.
(Nonstructural or Composition)
POLYIMICAL ­ For class 428
Included within the term polyamide. (Nonstructural or Composition)
POLYMER ­ For class 977
Extended molecule made by bonding together subunits called monomers; examples include
polystyrene, polyethylene, and protein (natural polymer of amino acids).
polySi ­ For class 438
polycrystalline silicon
POLYSILICON ­ For class 257
A polycrystalline form of silicon.
POLYSILICON ­ For class 438
A polycrystalline form of silicon.
PONTILE ­ For class 065
A dipstick used to gather charges of molten glass, punty, puntil, pontee, and ponto are
local variants.
PORE ­ For class 428
A tiny opening, usually microscopic, through which certain fluids may pass. Generally, the
pore opening is of such irregular direction that light will not pass through it. (Structural)
PORE FORMING (POROUS, MULTICELLULAR) ­ For class 501
These terms embrace porous compositions, compositions intended to be further treated to
make them porous or processes for effecting the porosity or multicellularity. A positive
step for causing porosity must be recited and porosity which is the result of including a
naturally porous material in the composition is not classified in the pore­forming
subclasses of this class (501).
PORTAL ­ For class 049
Structure defining an opening through a barrier for the passage of persons or things, e.g.,
the framing of a door or window opening.
PORTAL ­ For class 052
Structure defining an opening through a barrier for the passage of light, air, persons or
things, e.g., the framing for a door or a window opening.
PORTIONS ­ For class 347
Elemental sections of a symbol* or mark*. An elemental section is not, itself, a symbol*
or mark* as, for example, is an alphanumeric typeface used to create a picture or an
image.
POSITIVE CARRIER ­ For class 257
A charge carrier which has a net positive charge (e.g., a hole).
POSITIVE FEEDBACK ­ For class 330
Signal feedback having at least some component thereof in phase with the signal at the
point in the amplifier circuit where the signal feedback is applied.
POSITIVE IONS ­ For class 257
Atoms which are missing a valence shell electron.
POTENTIAL BARRIER ­ For class 257
The difference in electrical potential across a pn junction in a semiconductor.
POTENTIAL BARRIER ­ For class 438
The difference in electrical potential across a pn junction in a semiconductor. See also
barrier layer.
POTENTIAL HILL ­ For class 257
See POTENTIAL BARRIER.
POTENTIATOR OR SYNERGIST ­ For class 424
Denotes an agent (A) which will cooperatively act with an active ingredient for this class
(B) to the extent that the total effect (A+B) will be greater than the sum of the two effects
taken independently.
POTENTIATOR or SYNERGIST ­ For class 504
The terms denote an agent (A) which will cooperatively act with an active ingredient for
this class (B) to the extent that the total effect (A+B) will be greater than the sum of the
two effects taken independently.
POTENTIOMETER ­ For class 330
A network which permits the division of a voltage applied across it, including adjustable
means to select a particular division of the voltage applied across the network.
POTTING ­ For class 257
An embedding process in which an electronic component is placed in a can, shell, or other
container and buried in a liquid dielectric polymer which subsequently changes to a solid
material. The container is not removed from the finished part, and a release agent is not
used. This process differs from casting ­ which involves a removable mold.
POTTING ­ For class 438
An embedding process in which an electronic component is placed in a can, shell, or other
container and buried in a fluid dielectric which subsequently is hardened material. Even
though the container is not removed from the finished part, this is considered a molding
operation since the fluid is confined to a definite shape during hardening.
POWDER ­ For class 428
A mass of particles, that is, portions of matter so small that they are not ordinarily
handled as individual units. According to Metals Handbook, 8th Edition, 1961, volume 1,
page 28, powders currently used in powder metallurgy had a particle size within the range
of 0.1 to 1000 microns in their largest dimension, as determined by screens or other
suitable instruments. Powder particles generally are distinguished from filamentary
particles in that their shape and length­to­diameter ratio are such that in the dry state the
particles will not hold together as a massive article without the application of pressure or
heat. (Structural)
POWER FLUID ­ For class 060
An externally energized fluid that powers a pulsator system. Pulsator circuit: The
combination of elements in which the pulse fluid is trapped.
POWER INPUT ­ For class 137
Stream, referred to in the subclass definition, (A), above, that flows into the devices.
POWER OUTPUT ­ For class 137
Stream, referred to in in the subclass definition, (B), above, that flows out of the device;
POWER SOURCE ­ For class 475
Agency for supplying rotational power to an input member* of a planetary gear
transmission.
POWER SUPPLY ­ For class 330
The source of electrical energy applied to an amplifying device which is controlled by the
electric input signal. The term is used herein generically to include also a cathode heater
supply, and bias voltage or current supply.
POWER: ­ For class 073
The rate at which work is done or the rate at which energy is transferred.
POWER: ­ For class 073
The rate at which work is done or the rate at which energy is transferred.
PPL ­ For class 438
poly pad LOCOS
PR ­ For class 438
photoresist
PRACTICE ­ For class 705
A function directly related to the commercial activity of an enterprise (e.g. the exchange,
buying or selling of commodities). This class additionally provides for subject matter
described in the two paragraphs above in combination with cryptographic apparatus or
method.
PRECIOUS METAL ­ For class 075
Synonym for Noble Metal (q.v.).
PRECIOUS METAL ­ For class 204
A metal element from the group consisting of gold (Au), platinum metals, and silver (Ag).
PRECIOUS METAL ­ For class 420
Synonym for Noble Metal*
PRECIPITATION HARDENING ­ For class 148
See definition for ageing above.
PRECURSOR ­ For class 117
Any part, or all, of the starting material from which a single­crystal* is grown. This may
be a material which undergoes one or more chemical reactions* prior to the actual crystal
growth step. Hence, the term is not limited to the compound or composition present just
immediately prior to the growth of the single­crystal*. Contrast with immediate­
precursor*. See also nutrient*.
PREFILT ­ For class 210
Material to be filtered, also known as feed, influent, intake.
PREFORM ­ For class 065
Stock material that has been given a shape (the term preform is used interchangeably
with article, product, parison and blank).
PREFORM ­ For class 249
Stock material that has been given a shape.
PREFORM ­ For class 264
An article or stock material or bland which is self sustaining and which may be subjected
to a shaping or reshaping operation.
PREFORM ­ For class 425
A self­sustaining intermediate object having a configuration that contributes in part to the
shape or structure of a final product.
PREFORM OR PRESHAPE ­ For class 052
A component of a building construction which is in completed form before its use at the job
site. (Compare Module).
PREFORMED PRODUCT PART ­ For class 164
A self­sustaining body which is to be incorporated in the final product as a distinct part of
the same (e.g., insert, etc.).
PRESENTATION ­ For class 715
The visually perceptible display of IMAGE DATA*. This term is synonymous with VISUAL
IMAGE (see below).
PRESENTATION PROCESSING ­ For class 715
The manipulation of IMAGE DATA* for display.
PRESS MOLDING ­ For class 065
See Subclass References to the Current Class, above, for a subclass reference to the term
gpress molding.​
​
h
PRIMARY CELL OR BATTERY ­ For class 320
A cell or battery that cannot have its available charge usefully increased (i.e., recharged
like a secondary cell) by an electric current passing through it after having been
discharged from a usefully charged condition (i.e., the chemical reaction is not reversible).
(See the definition of Depolarization, above).
PRINCIPAL ELECTRODES ­ For class 315
The ​
gtwo spaced electrodes​
h referred to in the definition of electric space discharge
devices, between which the discharge current is primarily intended to flow.
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD ­ For class 257
A structure formed on one or more layers of electrically insulating material having
electrical terminals and conductive material deposited thereon, in continuous paths, from
terminal to terminal, to form circuits for electronic apparatus such as chips or substrates.
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD ­ For class 438
A structure formed on one or more layers of electrically insulating material having
electrical terminals and conductive material deposited thereon, in continuous paths, from
terminal to terminal, to form circuits for electronic apparatus such as chips or substrates.
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD ­ For class 439
A relatively thin, flat insulating sheet, panel, or plate having two or more circuit elements
or conductors deposited, adhered, or otherwise formed on a planar surface thereof, the
circuit elements or conductors being electrically insulated from one another or being,
during use, at electrical potentials different from one another.
PRINT­LINE ­ For class 400
A single row of imprinted, spaced character* symbols and word* groups that is part of the
text being typed. It is usually a straight row, but particular characters of the line may be
offset therefrom, as, for example, to imprint subscript (i.e., slightly below the line) or
superscript (i.e., slightly above the line), or to imprint a mathematical or chemical formula
without negating its characteristics as a line. It is usually formed and read across a page,
either from left to right as in European languages, or from right to left, as in Semitic
languages, but may also be formed and read parallel to one of the side margins* of a
page* (i.e., ​
gup​
h or ​
gdown​
h), as in some Oriental languages.
PRINT­POINT ­ For class 400
Print­point is the typewriter industry term for the area or spot on the record­medium* that
a type­member* is impressed against to imprint a character* on the record­medium. The
print­point may be fixed or movable relative to a typewriter main frame as discussed in
the definition of carriage* in this Glossary.
PRISMATIC LENS ­ For class 351
A light­deflecting medium which diverges or converges the lightrays entering the eyes.
PROCESS ­ For class 709
A coherent sequence of steps undertaken by a program to manipulate data such as an
internal or external data­transfer operation, handling an interrupt, or evaluation of a
function.
PROCESS ­ For class 718
A coherent sequence of steps undertaken by a program to manipulate data such as an
internal or external data­transfer operation, handling an interrupt, or evaluation of a
function.
PROCESS ­ For class 719
A coherent sequence of steps undertaken by a program to manipulate data such as an
internal or external data­transfer operation, handling an interrupt, or evaluation of a
function.
PROCESSING ­ For class 345
Methods or apparatus performing systematic operations upon data or information
exemplified by functions such as data or information transferring, merging, sorting, and
computing (i.e., arithmetic operations or logical operations). Note. In this class, the
glossary term data is used to modify processing in the term data processing; whereas the
term digital data processing system refers to a machine performing data processing. Note.
In an effort to avoid redundant constructions, in this class, where appropriate, the term
address data processing is used in place of address data data processing.
PROCESSING ­ For class 706
Methods or apparatus performing systematic operations upon data or information
exemplified by functions such as data or information transferring, merging, sorting and
computing (i.e., arithmetic operations or logical operations). Note. In this class, the
glossary term data is used to modify processing in the term data processing; whereas the
term digital data processing system refers to a machine performing data processing.
PROCESSING ­ For class 707
Methods or apparatus performing systematic operations upon data or information
exemplified by functions such as data or information transferring, merging, sorting, and
calculating (i.e., arithmetic operations or logical operations). Note. In this class, the
glossary term data is used to modify processing in the term data processing; whereas the
term digital data processing system refers to a machine performing data processing. Note.
In an effort to avoid redundant constructions, in this class, where appropriate, the term
address data processing is used in place of address data data processing.
PROCESSING ­ For class 709
Methods or apparatus performing systematic operations upon data or information
exemplified by functions such as data or information transferring, merging, sorting, and
computing (e.g., arithmetic operations or logical operations). Note. In this class, the
glossary term data is used to modify processing in the term data processing; whereas the
term digital data processing system refers to a machine performing data processing. Note.
In an effort to avoid redundant constructions, in this class, where appropriate, the term
address data processing is used in place of address data data processing.
PROCESSING ­ For class 710
Methods or apparatus performing systematic operations upon data or information
exemplified by functions such as data or information transferring, merging, sorting, and
calculating (i.e., arithmetic operations or logical operations). Note. In this class, the
glossary term data is used to modify processing in the term data processing; whereas the
term digital data processing system refers to a machine performing data processing. Note.
In an effort to avoid redundant constructions, in this class, where appropriate, the term
address data processing is used in place of address data data processing.
PROCESSING ­ For class 711
Methods or apparatus performing systematic operations upon data or information
exemplified by functions such as data or information transferring, merging, sorting, and
calculating (i.e., arithmetic operations or logical operations). Note: In an effort to avoid
redundant constructions, in this class, where appropriate, the term address data
processing is used in place of address data data processing.
PROCESSING ­ For class 712
Methods or apparatus performing systematic operations upon data or information
exemplified by functions such as data or information transferring, merging, sorting, and
computing (i.e., arithmetic operations or logical operations). Note.In this class, the
glossary term data is used to modify processing in the term data processing; whereas the
term digital data processing system refers to a machine performing data processing.
Note.In an effort to avoid redundant constructions, in this class, where appropriate, the
term address data processing is used in place of address data data processing.
PROCESSING ­ For class 713
Methods or apparatus performing systematic operations upon data or information
exemplified by functions such as data or information transferring, merging, sorting, and
calculating (i.e., arithmetic operations or logical operations). Note. In this class, the
glossary term data is used to modify processing in the term data processing; whereas the
term digital data processing system refers to a machine performing data processing. Note.
In an effort to avoid redundant constructions, in this class, where appropriate, the term
address data processing is used in place of address data data processing.
PROCESSING ­ For class 714
Methods or apparatus performing systematic operations upon data or information
exemplified by functions such as data or information transferring, merging, sorting, and
computing (i.e., arithmetic operations or logical operations). Note. In this class, the
glossary term data is used to modify processing in the term data processing; whereas the
term digital data processing system refers to a machine performing data processing.
PROCESSING ­ For class 715
Method or apparatus performing systematic operations upon DATA* or INFORMATION*
exemplified by functions such as data or information transferring, merging, sorting, and
calculating, i.e., arithmetic operations or logical operations.
PROCESSING ­ For class 718
Methods or apparatus performing systematic operations upon data or information
exemplified by functions such as data or information transferring, merging, sorting, and
computing (e.g., arithmetic operations or logical operations). Note. In this class, the
glossary term data is used to modify processing in the term data processing; whereas the
term digital data processing system refers to a machine performing data processing. Note.
In an effort to avoid redundant constructions, in this class, where appropriate, the term
address data processing is used in place of address data data processing.
PROCESSING ­ For class 719
Methods or apparatus performing systematic operations upon data or information
exemplified by functions such as data or information transferring, merging, sorting, and
computing (e.g., arithmetic operations or logical operations). Note. In this class, the
glossary term data is used to modify processing in the term data processing; whereas the
term digital data processing system refers to a machine performing data processing. Note.
In an effort to avoid redundant constructions, in this class, where appropriate, the term
address data processing is used in place of address data data processing.
PROCESSOR ­ For class 345
A functional unit that interprets and executes instruction data.
PROCESSOR ­ For class 706
A functional unit that interprets and executes instruction data.
PROCESSOR ­ For class 707
A functional unit that interprets and executes instruction data.
PROCESSOR ­ For class 709
A functional unit that interprets and executes instruction data.
PROCESSOR ­ For class 710
A functional unit that interprets and executes instruction data.
PROCESSOR ­ For class 711
A functional unit that interprets and executes instruction data.
PROCESSOR ­ For class 712
A functional unit that interprets and executes instruction data.
PROCESSOR ­ For class 713
A functional unit that interprets and executes instruction data.
PROCESSOR ­ For class 714
A functional unit that interprets and executes instruction data.
PROCESSOR ­ For class 715
A functional unit that interprets and executes instruction DATA*.
PROCESSOR ­ For class 718
A functional unit that interprets and executes instruction data.
PROCESSOR ­ For class 719
A functional unit that interprets and executes instruction data.
PRODUCT ­ For class 072
The object or material after an operation of the class type has been performed thereon.
Note. The ​
gProduct​
h of one operation is properly denoted as ​
gWork​
h for a subsequent
operation.
PRODUCT ­ For class 083
Material which has been treated by the cutting tool; the result of a cutting operation.
(Note: material which is ​
gproduct​
h for one cutting operation may be ​
gwork​
h for an ensuing
operation).
PRODUCT ­ For class 227
Article or material into which a member* has been driven. Note. The member is not
considered part of the product but retains its identity as a member for any further
operation to be performed on it.
PRODUCT ­ For class 228
Solid material or article after an operation of the class type has been performed thereon.
Note. The product of one operation may constitute work* for a subsequent operation.
PRODUCT ­ For class 234
A workpiece* which has been completely processed by a device of the Class 234 type.
PRODUCT ­ For class 269
The material that is placed in, or on, or in juxtaposition to, the work holder in the condition
in which such material exists after it has been treated.
PRODUCT ­ For class 408
Material which has been treated by the cutting tool; the result of a cutting operation.
(Note: Material which is ​
gproduct​
h for one cutting operation may be ​
gwork​
h for an ensuing
operation).
PRODUCT ­ For class 425
The material or article which has been shaped, reshaped or treated by the apparatus; the
result of a shaping, reshaping or treating operation. (Note: material which may be
gproduct​
​
h for one shaping operation may be ​
gwork​
h for an ensuing operation).
PROFILE ­ For class 425
Representation of an object in outline, (e.g., a shape obtain by sculpturing, etc.).
PROFILE ­ For class 725
For an individual, a concise biographical sketch, a measure of the extent to which one
exhibits traits or abilities, or a measure of one s likes and dislikes (perhaps based on
historical data).
PROGRAM ­ For class 234
A predetermined timed sequence of auxiliary­operations* of a Class 234 machine (i.e., not
directly including the selection of tools, but it may include a changeover from one code*
system to another; cf. Auxiliary­operation*).
pROGRAM ­ For class 713
A sequence of instructions that can be executed by a computer. The term can refer to the
original source code or to the executable (machine language) version.
PROGRAM ­ For class 725
A sequence of signals transmitted for entertainment or information.
PROGRAMMED­CONTROL­SYSTEM ­ For class 400
Means for regulating the operation of a typewriter to perform a predetermined sequence of
operations for typing, which means include a set of instructions which may be replaced or
modified at will, to which instructions the typewriter mechanism responds by performing
the sequence of operations. The instructions may be in the form of a tangible article such
as a tape or card or disc with visible or invisible indicia thereon, or may be in the form of
an intangible ​
gcomputer program​
h including a ​
gmemory​
h and related circuitry, but in any
event, must be related to the operation of a typewriter to be considered for this class.
PROJECTION OBJECTIVE OR PROJECTION LENS SYSTEM ­ For class 355
A lens or lens systems used to optically form an image of an original onto a sensitized
surface, viewing screen, or other image plane with or without magnification or reduction of
the original in the image plane.
PROJECTION OBJECTIVE OR PROJECTION LENS SYSTEMS ­ For class 353
Forms an image of the object on the viewing surface, and is located between the object
and viewing surface.
PROJECTION PRINTER ­ For class 355
See Copying Camera, defined herein.
PROJECTOR OR STEREOPTICON ­ For class 353
A device for projecting an image of an object by passing light through or around the object
or reflecting light from the object on a viewing screen for the purpose of more
conveniently viewing the image of the object. The image is usually enlarged or reduced in
size with reference to the object; and the image is also usually in a more convenient
position for viewing or recording. Since projection is a common property of lenses and
mirrors, the projectors in this class involve some structure for facilitating or enhancing the
projection over what incidentally occurs in these optical elements. A projector generally
includes (1) a concentrated light source from either an artificially or natural emanation,
(2) a light paralleling element (e.g., condensing lens), (3) a holding or positioning device
for the object to be projected, (4) a projection objective or projection lens system
comprising one or more optical elements for directing the light after it passes through or is
reflected from the object to form an image, and (5) a screen for receiving the image and
making the image formed by this light available for use. The projectors in this class utilize
natural or artificial (usually) light within the visible spectrum. The object to be projected is
usually planar in natural with the plane extending transverse to the direction of projection,
and may be transparent (e.g., slide or transparency) or reflective (e.g., opaque sheet).
The projection may be limited to the outline of an opaque object such as a shadow, and in
this case the object need not be planar. The term projector as used in this class designates
the above structure either with or without the screen. In operation the object is positioned
outside one focal plane of the projection lens system and the image is formed on a viewing
surface outside the opposite focal plane of the projection lens system. The closer the
object is to the one focal plane the farther the image will be from the other focal plane,
and the bigger the image will be. In the projector the relative positioning of the object is
usually obtained by moving the projection lens system and adjusting its focal length rather
than by changing the position of the object. As indicated in FACSIMILE, TELEVISION, AND
TELEGRAPHIC PRINTING, above, the projectors including or adapted for use with recording
surfaces are classified elsewhere.
PROJECTOR, MOTION PICTURE ­ For class 352
A device which forms a real optical image of successive elements of a motion picture
sequence at such a rate that an illusion of motion is produced due to the persistence of
vision.
PROM ­ For class 438
programmable read only memory
PROMOTER ­ For class 423
A substance which stimulates or aids the effect of a catalyst.
PROPELLANT ­ For class 060
The generic term for any or all of the components of the supply of materials which may be
converted (by expansion, combustion or other means) into motive fluid.
PROPELLING MEANS ­ For class 440
The element of the propulsion unit which acts upon the surrounding fluid (air or water) to
cause the vessel to move.
PROPS ­ For class 438
planarization with resist/oxide and polysilicon
PROPULSION UNIT ­ For class 440
The total combination of all elements including the engine, the propelling means, the
casing, etc., involved in moving a vessel.
PROTEIN ­ For class 520
Denotes polypeptides composed of more than 100 amino acids or having molecular
weights greater than 10,000. Included herein are, for example: (a) The so­called simple
proteins which yield alpha­amino acids upon hydrolysis (e.g., albumins, globulins,
glutelins, prolamines, histones, sceleroproteins, etc.). (b) The conjugated proteins wherein
protein is bound to some other molecule or group (e.g., nucleoproteins, glucoproteins,
etc.). (c) Derived proteins which are the cleaved products of proteins, excluding the
monomeric alpha­amino acids themselves (e.g., proteins, metaproteins, coagulated
proteins, proteoses, peptones, peptides, etc.). (d) Reaction products wherein the protein
has been reacted and wherein the final reaction product retains peptide linkages.
PROTEIN FOLDING ­ For class 977
Process by which a protein assumes its functional shape; protein folding problem involves
the prediction of the protein three­dimensional shape based on its amino acid sequence.
PROTEIN or PEPTIDE ­ For class 977
Polymer of amino acid monomeric units linked via peptide bonds; peptide is a short
polymer of amino acid units, commonly less than 100 such monomers therein.
PROTEINS ­ For class 930
Compounds containing an amino acid sequence of more than 100 amino acids, at least two
of which are different, bound mostly through normal peptide links.
PROTOCOL ­ For class 370
A specific set of rules about data format and data transmission timing between two
devices.
PROTOCOL ­ For class 709
A set of rules or processes which enable computers to exchange information with as little
error as possible.
PROTOCOL ­ For class 718
A set of rules or processes which enable computers to exchange information with as little
error as possible.
PROTOCOL ­ For class 719
A set of rules or processes which enable computers to exchange information with as little
error as possible.
PSD ­ For class 438
photosensitive diode or dielectric
PSG ­ For class 438
phosphosilica glass
PTC ­ For class 438
positive temperature coefficient
PTH ­ For class 438
plated through­hole
P­TYPE ­ For class 438
An extrinsic semiconductor in which the hole density exceeds the conduction electron
density.
P­TYPE CONDUCTIVITY ­ For class 257
Electrical conductivity associated with positive charge carriers (holes) in a semiconductor
material.
P­TYPE CONDUCTIVITY ­ For class 330
The characteristic of a semiconductor material, usually imparted by ​
gacceptor​
h type
impurities therein, of an excess of free positive carriers (holes) over free negative carriers
(electrons), such positive carriers or holes being referred to as majority carriers for
current flow in such material and the electrons as minority carriers for such current flow.
P­TYPE SEMICONDUCTOR ­ For class 257
An extrinsic semiconductor in which the hole density exceeds the conduction electron
density.
PULL TAB ­ For class 413
A member operated by the users fingers and used to open the container.
PULLEY ­ For class 474
A device rotatable about an axis and having a drive face radially spaced from the axis of
rotation for intended power transferring engagement with a belt* to drive the belt on its
endless path or to extract power from the belt to drive an output load device.
PULSATING CURRENT ­ For class 363
A nonuniform electron flow which varies periodically but does not reverse its direction.
PULSATOR SYSTEM ­ For class 060
An organization of which a pulsator circuit is merely a part.
PULSE ­ For class 375
A variation of a voltage or current normally having a constant value. This variation is
characterized by a rise and a decay approaching infinitesimal duration.
PULSE FLUID ­ For class 060
The definite volume of fluid trapped in the pulsator.
PULSE WAVE ­ For class 329
An electrical or electromagnetic repetitious nonsinusoidal wave. Examples are square
wave, saw­tooth wave, or trapezoidal wave.
PULSE WAVE ­ For class 332
Is an electrical or electromagnetic repetitious nonsinusoidal wave. Examples are square
wave, saw­tooth wave, or trapezoidal wave.
PUMP ­ For class 415
An apparatus used for adding energy to fluid material (gas or liquid).
PUNCHING ­ For class 083
The cutting of a discrete product out of the confines of a workpiece through the thickness
of the workpiece so that the cut does not intersect any edge (exterior or interior) of the
workpiece.
PUNCHTHROUGH ­ For class 257
Expansion of a depletion region* from one junction to another junction in an active solid­
state device.
PUNCHTHROUGH ­ For class 438
Expansion of a depletion region* from one junction to another junction in an active solid­
state device.
PUNTY ­ For class 065
See Pontile
PURGING ­ For class 431
The removal of unwanted material.
PURIFY ­ For class 065
See Subclass References to the Current Class, above, for a subclass reference to the term
gpurify.​
​
h
PURPLE PLAGUE ­ For class 257
A brittle, inter metallic electrically conductive compound which has a purplish color and is
formed when aluminum and gold, used as electrical contact materials in semiconductor
electronic devices, contact each other and interact. It is usually considered undesirable
because it breaks easily, reduces device reliability, and lowers product yield.
PUSH­PULL STAGE ­ For class 330
Includes two amplifiers each as defined above under ​
gAMPLIFIER​
h, the input electrodes of
each of the amplifying devices of the two amplifiers being balanced to ground or some
other convenient electrical reference plane, the source of electrical signal being such, and
so coupled to the input electrodes, that at any instant the signal on each input electrode is
substantially equal and opposite in sign to the signal on the other input electrode; and
wherein the signal on the output electrodes of each of the amplifying devices is similarly
balanced to a convenient electrical reference plane. Note. A balanced signal circuit is
treated in this class as a special case of a single source or a single load. See Balanced
Circuit. Note. A push­pull amplifier is treated in this class as a single channel, having a
single source and a single load.
PUT ­ For class 438
programmable unijunction transistor
PVD ­ For class 438
physical vapor deposition
PWB ­ For class 438
printed wiring board
PYRO­ELECTRIC LAMP ­ For class 313
An electric lamp which has as the light emitting body a material which is a second class
conductor. The lamps are designed to have the pyro­electric body heated by a separate
source until the pyro­electric material becomes conductive and then the current flow
through the pyro­electric body maintains the second class conductor material at a
temperature at which it emits light.
PYROMETALLURGY ­ For class 075
A somewhat inexact term for processes carried out at relatively high temperatures,
usually in furnaces, in which metalliferous material or metal is treated to prepare free
metal, to purify or to refine free metal, or to prepare intermediate materials more suitable
for use in preparing free metal (e.g., smelting, bessemerizing, roasting of ores, etc.).
PZT ­ For class 438
lead zirconate titanate
QE ­ For class 438
quantum efficiency
QFP ­ For class 438
quad flat package
QUANTIZED STATES ­ For class 257
Discrete energy levels due to the quantum mechanical properties of a material.
QUANTUM CELL ­ For class 977
Structure comprising four quantum dots arranged in a square, with two diagonally opposed
dots containing electron charges. One diagonal containing charges is arbitrarily defined as
representing a value of ​
g1​
h, the other as ​
g0​
h; in a five­dot cell, the fifth, central dot
contains no charge.
QUANTUM CELL WIRE ­ For class 977
Wire in which information is transferred by a change in orientation of quantum cells
arranged in a line as opposed to utilizing electron flow.
QUANTUM COMPUTING ­ For class 977
Computing scheme dependent upon wavelike properties of elementary particles.
QUANTUM DOT ­ For class 977
Broadly, a structure that promotes confinement of electron(s)/hole(s) in three dimensions;
alternatively, a location capable of containing a single electron charge; synonymous with
single electron transistor, qubit, and quantum bit.
QUANTUM ENTANGLEMENT ­ For class 977
The process of combining two separate pieces of information so that they can be treated
as a single entity; a correlation between quantum states, e.g., spin, polarization, etc., of
two or more particles.
QUANTUM TRANSISTOR ­ For class 257
Transistors whose operation is based on the properties of electrons confined in quantum
wells ­ semiconductor films only a hundred or so angstroms thick sandwiched between
high confining walls made of a second semiconductor material.
QUANTUM TRANSISTOR ­ For class 438
Transistors whose operation is based on the properties of electrons confined in quantum
wells ­ semiconductor films only a hundred or so angstroms thick sandwiched between
high confining walls made of a second semiconductor material.
QUANTUM TUNNELING ­ For class 977
Effect of transferring of particles through a potential barrier larger than the particles total
energy that occurs based upon the barrier thickness and the difference between the
potential barrier energy and the particle energy.
QUANTUM UNCERTAINTY PRINCIPLE ­ For class 977
Principle stating that the position of a particle and its momentum, or alternatively, energy
of the particle and time of measurement; cannot be simultaneously measured with
arbitrary precision; noted to not be a significant factor at length scales above the level of
an atom.
QUANTUM WELL ­ For class 257
Semiconductor films only a hundred or so angstroms thick sandwiched between high
confining walls made of a second material.
QUANTUM WELL ­ For class 438
Semiconductor films only a hundred or so angstroms thick sandwiched between high
confining walls made of a second material.
QUANTUM WELL ­ For class 977
Broadly, a structure that promotes electron or hole confinement in one dimension so that
the electron or hole can only propagate with two degrees of freedom; with respect to
semiconductor physics, a semiconductor heterostructure utilizing a narrow bandgap
semiconductor sandwiched between two layers of a larger bandgap semiconductor;
alternatively, a potential well that confines particles within a planar region wherein the
width of the region is on the order of the De Broglie wavelength of the particles.
QUANTUM WIRE ­ For class 977
Structure that promotes electron or hole confinement in two dimensions so that the
electron or hole can only propagate with one degree of freedom.
QUARTZ ­ For class 117
SiO2; silicon dioxide; silica. Polycrystalline forms include agate, cat"s eye, chalcedony,
and jasper. Crystalline forms include amethyst, catalinite, citrine, rose quartz, and smoky
quartz.
QUARTZ ­ For class 428
A fused silicon dioxide (silica). (Nonstructural or Composition)
QUARTZ, FUSED ­ For class 117
Vitreous or glassy quartz.
QUIP ­ For class 438
quad­in­line package
QUIRE­ For class 412
A term of art meaning 24 sheets() of paper.
QW ­ For class 438
quantum well
QWIP ­ For class 438
quantum well infrared photodetector
RADAR ­ For class 342
Acronym for radio detecting and ranging. A system that measures distance (and usually
the direction) to an object by determining the amount of time required by electromagnetic
energy to travel to and return from an object. Called primary radar when signals are
returned by reflection. Called secondary radar when the incident signal triggers a
responder beacon and causes it to transmit a second signal.
RADIANT ENERGY ­ For class 250
Energy propagated in the form of electromagnetic waves, or traveling subatomic, atomic
or molecular particles.
RADIANT ENERGY ­ For class 342
The energy (partially kinetic, partially potential) associated with waves produced in free
space by a source of energy, such as light wave, electromagnetic radiation (including radio
waves), or neutron and similar radiation, subsonic, supersonic and sonic waves.
RADIANT ENERGY ­ For class 343
The energy (partially kinetic, partially potential) associated with waves produced in free
space by a space by a source of energy, as light waves, electromagnetic radiations
(including radio wave), neutron and similar radiation, subsonic, supersonic and sonic
waves.
RADIATE ­ For class 343
The emanation of energy into free space.
RADIATION ­ For class 216
The propagation of energy through space or through a material. It may be in the form of
electromagnetic waves, corpuscular emissions or sound waves. The format is usually
categorized according to frequency, e.g., Hertzian, infrared, visible light, ultraviolet, X­
ray, gamma ray, etc. Corpuscular emissions are categorized as alpha, beta, or cosmic
rays.
RADIATION ­ For class 342
The emanation of energy into free space.
RADIATION ­ For class 430
The propagation of energy through space or through a material. It may be in the form of
electromagnetic waves, corpuscular emissions, or sound waves. The format is usually
categorized according to frequency, e.g., Hertzian, infrared, (visible) light, ultraviolet, X­
rays, gamma rays, etc., corpuscular emissions are categorized as alpha, beta, or cosmic.
RADIATION FIELD ­ For class 342
An electromagnetic wave whose frequency spectrum extends over a range from somewhat
above the frequency of audible sound waves to somewhat below the frequency of heat and
light waves. Values of 10 kilocycles and 30,000 megacycles have been given as the lower
the upper limits of the range for radio waves, although values exist beyond these limits.
Radio waves as defined here exclude compressional waves, light waves, heat waves,
infrared waves, ultraviolet waves, X­ray, cathode rays, gamma rays, and ion beams. The
radio waves are produced by oscillations of electric change in an antenna.
RADIO OR HERTZ WAVE ­ For class 343
An electromagnetic wave whose frequency spectrum extends over a range from somewhat
above the frequency of audible sound waves to somewhat below the frequency of heat and
light waves. Values of 10 kilocyles and 30,000 megacyles have been given as the lower an
upper limits of the range for radio waves, although values exist beyond these limits. Radio
waves as here defined exclude compressional waves, light waves, heat waves, infrared
waves, ultraviolet waves, X­rays, cathode rays, gamma rays, and ion beams. The radio
waves are produced by oscillations of electric change in an antenna.
RADIOACTIVE ­ For class 423
Able to give off rays by spontaneous disintegration. The radioactive elements are usually
those having an atomic number of 84 or greater and the phenomenon of radioactivity is
not affected by chemical or physical influences.
RADIOACTIVE ­ For class 588
Any element capable of giving off rays or subatomic particles by spontaneous
disintegration. The radioactive elements are usually those having an atomic number of 84
or greater and the phenomenon of radioactivity is not affected by chemical or physical
influences or matter adulterated by radioactivity.
RADIOACTIVE ACTIVE ­ For class 250
Exhibiting spontaneous nuclear disintegration with emission of particulate or
electromagnetic radiations.
RADIOACTIVE ELEMENT ­ For class 075
An element of the group Technetium (Tc), Promethium (Pm), Polonium (Po), Astatine (At),
Radon (Rn), Francium (Fr), Radium (Ra), Actinium (Ac), Thorium (Th), Protactinium (Pa),
Uranium (U), Neptunium (Np), Plutonium (Pu), Americium (Am), Curium (Cm), Berkelium
(Bk), Californium (Cf), Einsteinium (Es), Fermium (Fm), Mendelevium (Md), Nobelium
(No), Lawrencium (Lr), Unnilquadium (Unq), Unnipentium (Unp), and Unnilhexium (Unh).
RADIOTELEPHONE SYSTEM ­ For class 455
A system for establishing a voice communication link between a base and a mobile
transceiver via a wireless carrier wave channel that is allocated for use during a
communication link, and wherein the mobile transceiver has a specific assigned call
address number.
RAM ­ For class 438
random access memory
RAMMING ­ For class 164
The operation of compacting sand into a sand mold and around a pattern.
RANGE ­ For class 081
The extent of movement of the jaws relative to each other, unobstructed by the work to be
engaged or by contact of the jaw surfaces, which movement is effected by manipulation of
the handles from one extreme position of the handles to the other extreme position of the
handles relative to each other. The range is predetermined by the structural relationships
between the elements constituting the tool. To illustrate: assuming that the movement of
the handles between extremes of handle positions effects a jaw movement of one inch, the
one inch dimension equals the range, which range is the same even though the device may
be adjusted so that in one instance the jaws move from a zero gap position (closed) to a
one inch gap or in another instance from a one­half inch gap to an inch­and­one­half gap.
The shift described is defined as adjustment; the manipulation of the handles to effect the
one inch of jaw movement is defined as actuation.
RANGE ­ For class 269
The extent or span of relative jaw movement, without reference to the work to be
engaged, as predetermined by the structural relationship between elements of the means
to actuate* said jaws. For example, shifting a split nut on a screw to initially position a jaw
carried by said nut does not involve a range change since the nut can still travel the full
extent of the screw; however, changing the degree of eccentricity of a jaw actuating
element does involve a range change since the operation of said actuating element will
now result in a variation of the effective throw of said element and its associated jaw.
RANGEFINDING ­ For class 396
Rangefinding is the act of measuring the distance from a subject to the camera.
RARE EARTH ELEMENT ­ For class 501
As used in this class (501), this term encompasses those elements having atomic numbers
from 57 through 71 inclusive, and 89+. Thus, the following elements are herein treated as
rare earth elements: lanthanum, cerium, praesodymium, neodymium, promethium,
samarium, europium, gadolmium, terbium, dysprosium, holmium, erbium, thulium,
ytterbium, lutecium, actinium, thorium, protoactinium, uranium, neptunium, and
plutonium.
RARE EARTH METAL­ For class 075
An element of the group Scandium (Sc), Yttrium (Y), Lanthanum (La), Cerium (Ce),
Praseodymium (Pr), Neodymium (Nd), Promethium (Pm), Samarium (Sm), Europium (Eu),
Gadolinium (Gd), Terbium (Tb), Dysprosium (Dy), Holmium (Ho), Erbium (Er), Thulium
(Tm), Ytterbium (Yb), and Lutetium (Lu).
RARE EARTH­ For class 420
An element of the group Scandium, Yttrium and the Lanthanides*.
RARE EARTHS ­ For class 257
Sc, Y, Lanthanides.
RARE EARTHS ­ For class 423
The oxides of the rare earth metals consisting of the elements having atomic numbers 21,
39, 57­71, inclusive.
RARE EARTHS ­ For class 588
The compounds of the elements found on the periodic chart at atomic numbers 21, 39, or
57­71 inclusive.
RATCHET ­ For class 400
A movable member having teeth thereon and at least one notch between the teeth, which
notch is engaged by a protruding portion of a pawl* to cause or enable intermittent
movement of the ratchet. The manner in which a pawl and ratchet mechanism is used in a
typewriter is discussed under the definition of pawl in this Glossary, section III. Ratchet
teeth may be part of a ​
gratchet wheel​
h or of a ​
gratchet rack​
h, and the action of the pawl
is similar in both instances. However, since a ratchet wheel is circular, its motion will be a
one­way rotational intermittent motion; and since a ratchet rack is linear, its motion will
be a one­way rectilinear intermittent motion.
RBS ­ For class 438
Rutherford backscattering
RBT ­ For class 438
resonant tunneling bipolar transistor
RC OR RL FREQUENCY DETERMINING NETWORK ­ For class 331
A network of the nonresonant type comprising either resistive and capacitive or resistive
and inductive components. The network, by way of example, may be employed: (1) as a
frequency determining phase shift network in a sine wave oscillator of the phase shift
type, (2) as a frequency determining bridge network in sine wave bridge oscillators, such
as the Wien bridge type of the double­T type or (3) as a time constant network in a
relaxation oscillator to determine the period of the generated relaxation oscillations.
RCT ­ For class 438
reverse conducting thyristor
REACTANT ­ For class 429
The material which includes an active material as one of its components.
REACTANT ­ For class 528
A reactant for purposes of this Class is a material which occurs in a polymer as a
repeating unit and is present in at least three units. As used herein, reactant is meant to
exclude catalyst residues, chain transfer agents, etc.
REACTING SURFACE ­ For class 440
The area or face of the propelling means which directly displaces the surrounding fluid.
REACTION BY­PRODUCTS ­ For class 376
See By­Product Materials.
REACTION ZONE ­ For class 060
The space in which the propellant material undergoes chemical change to produce new
substances and heat which heat raises the temperature of the new substances. The
ejection of these heated substances from the reaction motor produces thrust or propulsive
force.
REACTIVE COUPLING ­ For class 330
A coupling network including reactive means which may be inductive or capacitive.
REACTIVE DYE ­ For class 008
A reactive dye reacts chemically with a substrate having reactive ­H atoms thereon, e.g.,
ester or ether formation with cellulose.
REACTIVITY ­ For class 376
A measure of the amount of the possible departure of a reactor from the critical condition
where the reaction is just self­ supporting. At any steady state of operation the reactivity
is zero. Addition of positive reactivity causes divergence; addition of negative reactivity
causes the reaction to die down.
REACTIVITY AFFECTING MATERIAL ­ For class 376
As it relates to fission nuclear reactors, this is a material which affects the criticality of the
reactor and can be (a) a neutron absorbing material (which for the purpose of this class is
a material which can absorb neutrons without reproducing them, e.g., boron, or a fertile
material such a uranium (U238 or thorium) thus providing a decrease in reactivity, (b) a
fissionable material such as U235, Pu239, U233 (thus providing an increase in reactivity),
and (c) a reflector (moderator) material such as graphite or water (thus providing an
increase in reactivity).
REACTOR CORE (FISSION REACTOR) ­ For class 376
The central or heart of a nuclear reactor containing as its main constituent the nuclear fuel
(e.g., enriched uranium, Pu239, etc.), and the moderator, if any. Also known as the active
volume of the reactor.
REACTOR GEOMETRY (FISSION REACTOR) ­ For class 376
See subclasses 347+.
READ­IN (n.) ­ For class 234
The transfer of data to a storage* device.
READ­OUT (n.) ­ For class 234
The transfer of data from a storage device or other means, to tool selection mechanism.
READ­OUT REGISTER ­ For class 257
Gated semiconductor devices which receive and accumulate charges and make them
available to an output device.
REBAR ­ For class 052
An art term for a concrete reinforcing rod. A rebar chair is a device for spacing a rebar
from a concrete form.
REBEADING ­ For class 425
Restoring a bead or rim on a product, usually a tire.
RECAPPING ­ For class 425
Restoring the wear surface on a tire casing.
RECEIVER ­ For class 141
A device which accepts the material from the dispenser and is capable of confining fluids
within a predetermined or predescribed volumetric configuration, and does not therefore
rely upon surface tension or molecular cohesive forces to preclude escape of material
therefrom.
RECEIVER ­ For class 258
As herein used, this term designates the device or element to which the load is delivered.
RECEIVER ­ For class 355
The light sensitive element onto which the image from the carrier is recorded.
RECEIVER ­ For class 725
The apparatus employed to accept data from a communications system.
RECEPTACLE ­ For class 053
A stage of cover formation in which the cover material has been fashioned into such shape
as to at least partially confine the contents, as for example, against lateral displacement.
A sheet of bendable or foldable cover material which has received a single preliminary
fold, such as a U­fold, as well as a completely formed carton, are both considered to be
receptacles.
RECEPTACLE ­ For class 406
A hopper or similar container for holding a quantity of load material or articles and having
a discharge or intake opening therein.
RECEPTACLE ­ For class 413
A tube closed at one end (e.g., drinking cup).
RECEPTOR ­ For class 435
Any compound or composition capable of recognizing a particular spatial and polar
organization of a molecule, i.e., epitopic site on an antigen. The receptor material can be
isolated from a cellular material from a living body such as a membrane or organ and
exhibits great specificity to the species to be tested for. A cell surface molecule which
binds specifically to particular proteins or peptides in the fluid phase.
RECEPTOR ELEMENT ­ For class 430
An element which receives a transferred image from another element.
RECESSED­ROLL ­ For class 226
A roll* having a radially stepped periphery, the radially outward portion engaging material
and the radially inward portion(s) not engaging the material.
RECIPROCATING MOTION ­ For class 074
Alternating motion along a straight­line path.
RECIPROCATING OR OSCILLATING MOTOR ­ For class 318
A motor which is structurally arranged or constructed so as to have a limited degree of
movement, and which is provided with means for moving the movable (working element)
of the motor to­and­fro repeatedly over substantially the same path or arc of movement
(including rotations about an axis co­incident with the geometrical or center­or­gravity
axis of the movable element of the motor). Compare this definition and the definition of
gLINEAR MOVEMENT MOTORS​
​
h.
RECIPROCATING RECTILINEARLY ­ For class 366
Moving bodily back and forth in a straight line in the same path so that at any instant, all
parts of the moving body move in the same direction at the same rate.
RECOMBINATION ­ For class 257
The process by which excess holes and electrons in a semiconductor crystal recombine and
and no longer function as charge carriers in the semiconductor. Basic recombination
processes are band­to­band recombination which occurs when an electron in the
conduction band recombines with a hole in the valence band, and trapping recombination
which occurs when an electron or hole is captured by a deep energy level, such as
produced by a deep level dopant, before recombining with an opposite conductivity type
carrier.
RECOMBINATION ­ For class 438
The process by which excess holes and electrons in a semiconductor crystal recombine and
no longer function as charge carriers in the semiconductor. Basic recombination processes
are band­to­band recombination which occurs when an electron in the conduction band
recombines with a hole in the valence band, and trapping recombination which occurs
when an electron or hole is captured by a deep energy level, such as produced by a deep
level dopant, before recombining with an opposite conductivity­type carrier.
RECORD ­ For class 369
(1) (noun) The pattern of modulation by the information signal of the variable storage
medium characteristic. (2) (verb) To effect storage of an information signal. As these
terms have the same spelling the terms ​
gstore​
h, ​
gstorage medium​
h, and variants thereof
will be preferred usage in the schedule and definitions in order to avoid confusion.
RECORD CARRIER ­ For class 369
A tangible object upon which an information signal is stored, synonymous with storage
medium.
RECORD­MEDIUM ­ For class 400
A piece of material, usually paper but not limited to paper, on which material is recorded
an imprint of a type­member* that is impressed against the material to form a character*
to be read. The material may be a relatively thin ​
gsheet​
h having a determinate width and
a determinate length, or may be a ​
gweb​
h having a determinate width and an
indeterminate length. The recording is usually by way of an ink* that coats the material in
the form of a line representing a character; but other kinds of recording may be done, as,
for example, embossing, which deforms the surface of the material to raise or lower the
surface into a line representing the character, or perforating, which punches a plurality of
holes in the material that taken together form a representation of a character.
RECOVERED OBJECTS ­ For class 171
Articles or plants which were formerly at least partially surrounded by a mass of earth and
which have been separated from said mass of earth as distinct objects, substantially free
from said earth and available at some identifiable time for any desired purpose which may
involve either use or destruction thereof.
RECOVERY ­ For class 423
The extraction or removal of a valuable constituent from a raw material, by­product or
waste product.
RECOVERY ­ For class 710
Responding to a fault in a system by either returning a system to a previous level of
correct operation, achieving a degraded level of correct operation, or safely shutting down
the system.
RECOVERY ­ For class 712
Responding to a fault in a system by either returning a system to a previous level of
correct operation, achieving a degraded level of correct operation, or safely shutting down
the system.
RECOVERY ­ For class 713
Responding to a fault in a system by either returning a system to a previous level of
correct operation, achieving a degraded level of correct operation, or safely shutting down
the system.
RECOVERY ­ For class 714
Responding to a fault in a system by either returning a system to a previous level of
correct operation, achieving a degraded level of correct operation, or safely shutting down
the system.
RECRYSTALLIZATION ­ For class 148
A thermal treatment of previously worked metal to effect an equiaxed microstructure
through the nucleation of strain free grains and the gradual consumption of the worked
matrix by the growth of these grains.
RECTIFIER ­ For class 330
A device with a unilateral current characteristic which permits the passage of only D.C.
current therethrough, and which is used to convert A.C. current applied thereto to D.C.
current.
RECTILINEAR MOVEMENT OF CLOSURE ­ For class 049
Straight line motion in opposite directions, such as up and down, right and left, to open or
close a passage.
RED ­ For class 438
radiation enhanced diffusion
RED OIL ­ For class 516
Commercial grade of oleic acid containing about 15% each of linoleic and stearic acids.
REFINING ­ For class 208
The removal of impurities or nonhydrocarbon, gums or gum forming components from a
mineral oil or the conversion of such components to some less objectionable form (e.g.,
sweetening: conversion of mercaptans to disulfides).
REFLECTION ­ For class 356
The return of light striking a surface back into the medium from which it came.
REFLECTION ­ For class 359
Light striking a surface and returning back into the medium from which it came, at an
angle equal but opposite to the angle of incidence.
REFLECTION ­ For class 372
Light striking a surface and returning back into the medium from which it came.
REFLECTOR ­ For class 343
A conductive structure, usually metallic (e.g., screen, rod or plate) which reradiates back
into free space impinging electromagnetic radiation (waves) coming from or going to the
active antenna, the velocity of the returned wave having a component in a direction
opposite to the direction of velocity of the impinging wave, thereby to modify the radiation
of the active antenna, there being no significant potential relationship between the active
antenna and the conductive structure.
REFLECTOR ­ For class 362
A light modifying device having a surface which redirects incident light back into the
medium from which it came. Reflectors are more commonly opaque but may be
transparent. Light incident on the redirecting surface of a transparent reflector may arrive
from the transparent material of the reflector itself in which case it is redirected back into
the transparent material of the reflector, or it may arrive at the redirecting surface from
some other material (e.g., air) in which case it is redirected back into the other material.
Whether a recited transparent modifier is a reflector or some other type of modifier or
both depends, for purposes of classification within this class, on its proximate function
according to the claim or claimed disclosure.
REFLECTOR ­ For class 376
A volume of material placed around the active volume (core) or other neutron yielding
source serving to scatter back into the active volume some of the neutrons which would
otherwise be lost to the chain reaction thus permitting a reduction in the critical size of the
active volume.
REFLEX KLYSTRON ­ For class 331
A klystron utilizing only a single apertured cavity resonator through which the beam of
charged particles passes in one direction, a repeller electrode being provided to repel or
redirect the beam after passage through the resonator back through the resonator in the
other direction and in proper phase to reinforce the oscillations set up in the resonator.
REFORMING ­ For class 208
A chemical conversion operation which results in a change of the hydrocarbon molecule
such that the product has substantially the same boiling range but has its ​
gantiknock​
h or
goctane​
​
h rating improved or increased. Various types of reaction are believed to be
involved including cyclization, hydrogenation, dehydrogenation, alkylation, isomerization
and dealkylation. Such reactions, if applied to a mineral oil, are classified in the subclass
providing for reforming.
REFRACTION ­ For class 356
The deviation of light which results when a ray of light passes obliquely from a medium of
one density to a medium of another density.
REFRACTION ­ For class 359
The deviation of light which results when a ray of light passes obliquely from a medium of
one refractive index to a medium of another refractive index.
REFRACTION ­ For class 372
The deviation of light which results when a ray of light passes obliquely from a medium of
one density to a medium of another density.
REFRACTOR ­ For class 362
A light modifier whose proximate function is to redirect light comprising a light pervious
material having a pair of opposed surfaces, at least one of which is, at least in part, so
angularly related to the other surface that the path of a light ray incident on one opposed
surface of the material and the path of the same ray after it emerges from the material
through the other opposed surface are not parallel. A nominally recited "lens" is
considered a refractor for purposes of classification within this class only if the structural
and functional characteristics of a refractor can be imputed to it from the claim or claimed
disclosure. (See (1) Note to the definition of "Modifier," above).
REFRACTORY ­ For class 428
Various materials, but usually clays or other cementitious or silicon containing. Consider to
be silicon unless clearly disclosed otherwise, as for example alumina. The refractory
metals are those in Groups IVB, VB and VIB of the Periodic System. (Nonstructural or
Composition)
REFRACTORY ­ For class 501
Compositions which are specifically formulated to be resistant to abrasion, corrosion and
physical or chemical disintegration when subjected to high temperatures, chemically
corrosive environments and/or rapid temperature changes. Note. Refractory materials are
typically used to produce furnace and kiln linings, fire brick, kiln furniture and saggers,
and pyroceramic cones. Note. Among naturally occurring materials widely used in making
refractory products are, e.g., magnesite, dolomite, and chrome­ magnesite.
REFRACTORY METAL­ For class 075
A metal of the group Titanium (Ti), Zirconium (Zr), Hafnium (Hf), Vanadium (V), Niobium
(Nb) or Columbium (Cb), Tantalum (Ta), Chromium (Cr), Molybdenum (Mo), and Tungsten
(W).
REFRACTORY METAL­ For class 420
A metal of the group Titanium, Zirconium, Hafnium, Vanadium, Niobium, Tantalum,
Chromium, Molybdenum and Tungsten.
REFRACTORY METALS ­ For class 257
Ti, V, Cr, Zr, Nb, Mo, Hf, Ta, W.
REFRACTORY METALS ­ For class 423
Those metals in Group IV B, V B and VIB of the periodic system, consisting of Ti, Zr, Hf, V,
Nb, Ta, Cr, Mo and W, some of which are used in making bricks or cement which resist
heat and are slow to soften.
REFUSE ­ For class 110
A combustible waste material which is burned for the sole or primary purpose of disposing
of that material.
REGENERATION ­ For class 095
Restoration of the separatory material to the condition it was in before the separatory
process.
REGENERATION ­ For class 096
Restoration of the separatory material to the condition it was in before the separatory
process.
REGISTERING ­ For class 425
Providing an exact fit of mating parts.
REGULATION ­ For class 320
Control of one or more characteristics or conditions whereby said characteristics or
conditions can be maintained at some predetermined value, or can be varied over a
plurality of values.
Regulator ­ For class 800
Codes for an RNA or protein product whose function is to control the expression of other
genes.
REINFORCEMENT, EMBEDDED ­ For class 052
A body placed within and covered by a cast material or a foraminous member wherein the
holes are filled by a cast material.
RELAXATION OSCILLATOR ­ For class 331
A free running oscillator for generating decidedly non sinusoidal waves. They usually
utilize a time constant network of the RC or RL type as the frequency determining element.
RELEASER ­ For class 221
This term as used herein includes elastic means (spring form) and spring biased means as
well.
REMOVABLE CLOSURE ­ For class 049
A closure which is mounted so as to be readily physically disassociated from its supporting
structure to form a passage.
REMOVE ­ For class 099
To spatially separate significantly one portion of food from another.
REPAIR ­ For class 029
The physical act of or means for restoring inoperative machines, apparatus, static
structures, and things (articles) when the operational limits of tolerance have become
exceeded by wear, imperfections, destructive oxidation, electrolysis, or failure by (1)
reshaping parts, (2) substituting a part and/or adding supplemental or additional parts or
material, and/or (3) taking away sections of worn, torn, broken, distorted, eroded or
otherwise unusable parts or material, and mending them by adding supplemental or
additional parts or material.
REPEATER ­ For class 725
A combination of apparatus for receiving either one­way or two­way communication
signals and delivering corresponding signals which are either amplified, reshaped, or both.
A repeater for one­way communication signals is termed a ​
gone­way repeater​
h and one
for two­way communication signals a ​
gtwo­way repeater​
h .
REPETITIOUS WAVE ­ For class 329
A cyclic wave whose individual component cycles are substantially identical. Examples of
repetitious waves are sine waves, square waves, saw­tooth waves and trapezoidal waves.
REPETITIOUS WAVE ­ For class 332
Is a cyclic wave whose individual component cycles are substantially identical. Examples
of repetitious waves are sine waves, square waves, saw­tooth waves, and trapezoidal
waves.
REPULSION MOTOR ­ For class 318
An induction motor (defined in INDUCTION MOTORS above) in which the secondary or
induced member is provided with a commutator, the commutator being engaged with a
pair of circumferencially spaced short­circuited brushes, and in which either means (e.g.,
an auxiliary winding) is provided in inductive relation to the secondary to produce a
magnetic field in time phase with, and displaced in relation to, the field produced by the
primary or inducing member, or the brushes are displaced from the mid­position between
adjacent primary (winding) pole positions whereby the motor may operate continuously
under running­speed conditions. See the definition of self­commutated impulse or
reluctance motors.
RESERVOIR ­ For class 401
A container or retainer for storing fluent coating material.
RESHAPING ­ For class 065
Changing the gross overall configuration of a glass preform by (a) confining a glass
preform within a configured mold and effecting significant flow of the glass to cause it to
assume the configuration of the mold or (b) distorting a glass preform by bodily moving a
portion of it throughout its entire thickness relative to a second portion during which the
thickness of the work piece remains substantially the same and no significant flow of the
glass occurs, i.e., bending. Changing at least one dimension of a glass preform throughout
its perimeter without any appreciable change in the original configuration thereof, e.g.,
stretching and shrinking.
RESHAPING ­ For class 264
A process in which a self sustaining body or a preform is subjected to a deforming, e.g.,
by plastic flow, bending, stretching, twisting, corrugating, so as to alter its overall shape.
RESHAPING ­ For class 425
Changing the configuration of a preform to a desired shape (deformation involving a
surface rather than an entire layer is included).
RESIDUE ­ For class 073
The portion of the source that remains after the sample is removed.
RESIDUE ­ For class 210
Material retained by membrane, septum, filter, settling tank, etc.
RESILIENT ­ For class 221
A means permitting segregation or separation of articles by unassisted gravitational
movement thereof, supports or restraining means being rendered inoperative as to the
articles to be dispensed and operative as to those to be retained, with return to the
previous state after the dispensing operation. Such means are permissive as distinguished
from discharge assistants which are affirmative force applying means (compulsive).
RESILIENT­ For class 024
Structure which is both capable (a) of distortion when subjected to a force of the
magnitude normally encountered within the disclosed environment and (b) of complete
resumption of its original shape due to the energy stored within it by the distortion force
after its removal.
RESIN CAPTURE ­ For class 506
Method involving contacting the reaction medium with a solid support after a reaction is
performed in solution in order to attach the reaction product to the resin and thus collect
the reaction product easily.
RESIN, NATURAL ­ For class 516
A broad term covering a variety of naturally derived products usually obtained by
secretion or disintegration (extraction). Vegetative sources are usually mixtures of
carboxylic acids or their esters, essential* oils (these are usually non­saponifiable, non­
glyceride), and terpenes; mostly insoluble in water and soluble in alcohols, ethers, and
carbon disulfide. Examples include balsam and rosin* which are obtained from coniferous
trees. Used in varnish, printing inks, and adhesives. Shellac resin is obtained from the
secretion of an insect indigenous to India. Amber resin is a polymerized vegetative resin
that occurs as a fossil. Amorphous sulfur is considered an inorganic natural resin. Cf.
drying oil. See section LINES WITH OTHER CLASSES AND WITHIN THIS CLASS, subsection
Glossary References, for additional information concerning this definition.
RESIN, SYNTHETIC ­ For class 516
Compound or mixtures of compounds produced from simpler compounds by polymerization
or condensation reactions.
RESINOID ­ For class 516
Thermosetting resin or resin like material which becomes solid and infusible upon heating.
Linseed oil and other drying­oils* and partially condensed phenol­formaldehyde are
examples.
RESISTANCE ­ For class 338
The property of a mass of material to impede the flow of a steady or fluctuating current
passing through the mass by conversion of electrical energy into heat.
RESISTANCE ELEMENT ­ For class 338
The part of the resistor which actually possesses the resistance characteristic, and which
may be a homogeneous mass of material having a resistance characteristic.
RESISTANCE TERMINAL ­ For class 338
Ordinarily one of the spaced conductors in physical contact with the resistance element,
and being appreciably more conductive (less resistive) than the resistance element. The
terminals are for the purpose of connecting the resistance element in an external electric
circuit. Since all resistors must include terminals in the sense that some structure is
necessary to permit energization of the resistance element, the term ​
gterminal​
h is
sufficiently broad to include one of the free ends of the resistance element.
RESISTIVITY ­ For class 257
A measure of the resistance of a material to electric current. Resistivity is a bulk material
property, measured in ohm­cm.
RESISTIVITY ­ For class 438
A measure of the resistance of a material to electric current. Resistivity is a bulk material
property measured in ohm­cm.
RESISTOR ­ For class 338
An apparatus or device exhibiting only and significantly a resistance characteristic as
above defined to the current flowing therethrough, the inductive or capacitive effects being
negligible. A resistor includes essentially a resistance element and spaced terminals.
RESIZING ­ For class 425
Changing a dimension but not the overall configuration.
RESOLVER ­ For class 516
See Breaker*.
RESONANCE ­ For class 334
The point in the adjustment of a tuned circuit to a particular channel or signal frequency at
which the inductive reactance equals the capacitive reactance. The resonance frequency
may also be described as the point where the oscillation or vibration present in the circuit
may be maintained with the least amount of external excitation with the excitation
producing a relatively large amplitude of oscillation or vibration.
RESONANT CAVITY ­ For class 372
A mode­selecting low­loss optical structure in which the laser action takes place by the
build­up of electromagnetic field intensity upon multiple reflection.
RESONANT CIRCUIT ­ For class 330
A circuit containing both inductive and capacitive reactance and in which the inductive
reactance equals the capacitive reactance for a particular frequency. The resonant circuit
may be series resonant, where the reactive elements are in series; or parallel (anti­
resonant), where the inductive and capacitive elements are in parallel. See also,
Resonator.
RESONANT TUNNELLING DEVICE ­ For class 257
A device that works on the principle of resonant electron (or hole) tunneling through a pair
of matched potential barriers. This occurs when the energy of the electrons (or holes)
matches that of a quantum energy level in the quantum well formed between the barriers.
RESONANT TUNNELLING DEVICE ­ For class 438
A device that works on the principle of resonant electron (or hole) tunneling through a pair
of matched potential barriers. This occurs when the energy of the electrons (or holes)
matches that of a quantum energy level in the quantum well formed between the barriers.
RESONATOR ­ For class 330
Devices comprising conductive enclosures, cavities, or wave transmission line sections of
the two terminal type, and having distributed inductance and capacitance, the line sections
being terminated in other than the characteristic impedance of the line sections, the
devices presenting resonant characteristics to the existing source of wave energy. See
also Resonant Circuit.
RESONATOR ­ For class 333
Devices comprising conductive enclosures, cavities, or wave transmission line sections of
the two terminal type, and having distributed inductance and capacitance, the line sections
being terminated in other than the characteristic impedance of the line sections, the
devices presenting resonant characteristics to the existing source of wave energy.
RESONATOR OR RESONANT CIRCUIT ­ For class 331
A frequency determining means comprised of substantially pure reactances of opposite
signs (i.e., mass and compliance in a mechanical resonator or inductive and capacitive
reactance in an electrical resonator) wherein the phenomenon of resonance (i.e., when the
positive and negative reactances are equal) is relied upon to determine the frequency of
the generated waves.
RESOURCE ­ For class 709
Any part of computer system or a network, such as a disk drive, printer, or memory, that
can be allotted to a program or process while it is running. In programming, a resource
can be used by more than one program or in more than one place in a program; for
example, dialog boxes, bitmaps, and fonts are resources in many windowing programs.
RESOURCE ­ For class 718
Any part of computer system or a network, such as a disk drive, printer, or memory, that
can be allotted to a program or process while it is running. In programming, a resource
can be used by more than one program or in more than one place in a program. For
example, dialog boxes, bitmaps, and fonts are resources in many windowing programs.
RESOURCE ­ For class 719
Any part of computer system or a network, such as a disk drive, printer, or memory, that
can be allotted to a program or process while it is running. In programming, a resource
can be used by more than one program or in more than one place in a program. For
example, dialog boxes, bitmaps, and fonts are resources in many windowing programs.
RESTRICTED SPACE ­ For class 343
A space or medium which tends to confine the energy within specified boundaries along a
predetermined path, as wave guides, hollow resonators, conductive wires.
resurf ­ For class 438
reduced surface field
RETAINER ­ For class 403
A component comprising a discrete element which serves either to hold the members
against separation or to hold another component in its proper position.
RETARDER ­ For class 431
A device that provides for the delay of completion of performance of an operation after its
initiating signal has been given, e.g., dashpot, time delay switch, etc.
RETARDING FIELD TUBE ­ For class 331
A tube having at least three electrodes, i.e., a source of electrons (cathode), control
electrode (grid) and anode or plate electrode, the control electrode being biased positively
with respect to the other electrodes. The electrode bias potentials are so chosen that the
electrons attracted from the cathode by the positive grid pass through the grid and are
slowed down by the repelling effect of the less positive (or negative) anode field and are
returned back to or through the grid. This phenomenon is repeated again and again so that
a cloud of electrons are caused to sweep back and forth through the grip, giving up energy
to the grid at a frequency which is a function of the transit time of the cloud of electrons.
The Barkhausen Kurz, Gill­Morrell and the reflex klystron are examples of oscillators
utilizing a retarding field tube.
RETENTATE ­ For class 210
Material held back by membrane or filter, not allowed to migrate or pass through.
RETRACTION ­ For class 175
Motion in a direction away from the bottom of a hole being formed.
RETRIEVAL ­ For class 369
Production or reproduction of a stored information signal from the storage medium
characteristics.
RETROREFLECTION ­ For class 359
Light striking a surface and returning back into the medium in the reverse direction (i.e., a
180 degree change from its original path).
RETT ­ For class 438
resonant electron transfer triode
REVEAL ­ For class 052
The sides of a door or window opening between the faces of the barrier.
REVERBERATORY FURNACE ­ For class 075
An enclosed furnace in which the material to be heated is placed in the bottom of the
furnace and gaseous fuel is burned over the top of the material or the flame or combustion
products from burning solid fuel separately from the material to be heated are reflected by
the top of the furnace and passed over the material. Types of reverberatory furnace are
the Siemen­Martin furnace, the open hearth furnace, and the puddling furnace.
REVERSE BIAS ­ For class 257
A voltage applied across a semiconductor junction in the reverse direction, i.e., wherein a
positive potential is connected to the n­type semiconductor and a negative potential is
applied to the p­type semiconductor.
REVERSE BREAKDOWN VOLTAGE ­ For class 257
The reverse bias voltage value at which electrical resistance drops appreciably and
operating current sharply increases.
REVERSE CURRENT ­ For class 257
The current flowing through a rectifying junction with a reverse voltage thereacross.
REVERSE OSMOSIS ­ For class 210
See OSMOSIS.
REVERSING CONTROL ­ For class 318
Motor systems in which means are provided for operating the motor in one direction at
one time and in the opposite direction at another time, or for causing the motor to operate
in a direction opposite to that in which it has previously been operating. In reversing motor
systems, means must be provided for causing the motor to produce a torque in both
directions of operations. Where the motor current is controlled only to bring the motor to a
stop or to brake the motor, there being no operation in the reverse direction, the system
is classified as motor braking or as motor deceleration control, depending upon whether
the motor is merely braked or whether the rate of deceleration is controlled. See the class
definition for a definition of deceleration control and motor braking control in the class
definition for a definition of braking control.
RF ­ For class 438
radiofrequency
RHEED ­ For class 438
reflected high energy electron diffraction
RHET ­ For class 438
resonant tunneling hot electron transistor (bipolar)
RIBBON ­ For class 400
A piece of elongated and relatively thin transfer­medium* material impregnated with, or
carrying, ink* that is to be applied to a record­medium*, which material is interposed
between the record­medium and a type­face* that is at the print­point*. When the type­
face is impressed against the record­medium (with the ribbon therebetween) a portion of
the ink on the ribbon will be transferred to the record­medium to form a readable
character* symbol corresponding to the symbol on the type­face that was impressed
against the record­medium. Although in most typewriters the ribbon is an elongated
relatively narrow strip of material, these dimensions are not critical in its usage as a
ribbon. (For example, a ribbon may be narrow and sufficiently short to be held in the hand
of a typist while being temporarily positioned adjacent to the print­point, or a ribbon may
be elongated and as wide as the record­medium to be typed on.) What is critical in its
usage as a ribbon for making an original copy is (a) its location directly between the
record­medium and the type­face that is at the print­point, and (b) the use of a
gpermanent​
​
h or not easily erasable ink; the combination forms an original copy of the
typed text, in contrast to a carbon copy. (See the definitions of transfer­medium and ink in
this Glossary for a discussion of carbon copy). Among the various forms of ribbon used in
a typewriter are: (a) a fabric ribbon coated or impregnated with ​
gpermanent​
h ink, the
ribbon being reusable many times or until the ink therein is depleted, and producing an
original copy; (b) a carbon­ink ribbon coated with permanent ink, the ribbon being usually
a single­use ribbon due to the operation wherein all or most of the coating is deposited on
the record­medium during the impact of a type­face thereagainst, and producing an
original copy (see the definition of transfer­medium in this Glossary, for a discussion of
the difference between the permanent ink used in a carbon­ink ribbon, and the carbon
coating of a ​
gcarbon­paper​
h transfer­medium); (c) a ​
ghectographic​
h ribbon that uses a
soluble ink and produces a ​
gmaster​
h plate subsequently used in a spirit duplicating copy
process; (d) a carbon­paper ribbon coated with a substance containing carbon or other
pigment to produce a carbon copy that is easily erasable; (e) a ​
gcorrection​
h ribbon that is
used to correct an error in typing as discussed in the definition of subclass 697 below. It
should be noted that in early typewriter technology the term ​
gribbon​
h usually referred only
to a fabric ribbon mentioned above; therefore, unless a disclosure particularly describes a
ribbon by an intended function or specific coating, it should be assumed that a fabric
ribbon is disclosed.
RIBE ­ For class 438
reactive ion beam etching
RIE ­ For class 438
reactive ion etching
RIGID ­ For class 403
Structure which when subjected to a distortion force normally encountered within the
environment (as defined by the disclosure), is capable of resisting this force if applied to
the structure in any orientation and maintaining its previous formational shape thereafter.
RIGID­ For class 024
Structure which when subjected to a distortion force normally encountered within the
environment (as defined by the disclosure and associated with the securing operation of a
Class 24 fastener) is capable of resisting this force if applied to the structure in any
orientation and maintaining its previous formational shape thereafter.
RIM ­ For class 351
A grooved­optical element made from metal or plastic material for framing lenses.
RING HETERO ATOM ­ For class 532
This term denotes nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur, selenium or tellurium as a ring member, i.e.,
as one of the members which forms a hetero ring.
RING NITROGEN ­ For class 532
This term denotes that nitrogen is one of the members which form a ring. Nitrogen bonded
directly to a ring is not a ring nitrogen. Terms such as ring sulfur and ring oxygen are used
similarly.
RISC ­ For class 438
reduced instruction set computing
RISER ­ For class 164
A reservoir of molten metal provided for feeding into a casting as the metal in the mold
solidifies thus preventing voids.
RISER: ­ For class 166
Structure for use with a submerged well intended to extend from the wellhead* toward the
surface of the water generally directly above the wellhead.
RMS ­ For class 438
refined metallurgical silicon
ROCHELLE SALT ­ For class 117
Potassium sodium tartrate; KNaTartrate.4H2O; (KNaCO2CHOHCHOHCO2.4H2O);
(KNaC4H4O6.4H2O). Seignette"s salt.
ROCKING ­ For class 366
Moving back and forth as a result of a back and forth motion of a curved surface on a flat
surface.
ROD ­ For class 029
An elongated member in which the transverse cross­sectional dimensions are substantially
uniform and are small in relation to its length.
ROD ­ For class 428
A relatively rigid and slender element having a width and thickness of the same order of
magnitude, a length which may be either indeterminate or finite, and a cross­section which
may be of any shape. (Structural)
ROI ­ For class 438
recessed oxide isolation
ROLL ­ For class 226
A shaft­mounted rotatable body, usually cylindrical, a portion of the periphery of which
engages material. Although a roll is usually cylindrical, the term is used in this class to
include a conical, truncated conical, or spherical body, a portion of the periphery of which
engages the material to be moved.
ROLL ­ For class 425
An endless shaping surface which has a substantially circular cross­section.
ROLL­COUPLE ­ For class 226
A group of at least two rolls*, material being disposed therebetween in simultaneous
tangential and/or peripheral engagement with all rolls, the roll(s) on one side of the
material counter­rotating relative to the roll(s) on the other side of such material. An
example of a roll­couple comprising more than two elements, is a plurality of equal­
diameter rolls co­axially mounted, all of which rolls are opposed by a single, parallel roll.
ROLLER ­ For class 072
A deforming instrumentality having a work­ engaging, work­deforming peripheral surface
which is generated by a line revolving about an axis, said instrumentality being disclosed
as revolving about said axis so that successive peripheral portions thereof cyclically move
into and out of contact with a work surface during deformation of the work, relative
movement occurring, during deformation, between said axis and the work surface along a
direction parallel to the work surface, thereby producing a relative rolling motion between
the roller surface and the work surface as contrasted with sliding motion (i.e., the surfaces
move in the same direction at substantially the same linear speed). Note. The generating
line of the peripheral surface may have any continuous profile (e.g., straight, curved, or
irregular), and the line may have any desired inclination, other than at right angles,
relative to the axis. Thus, to be considered a ​
gRoller​
h, any and all cross sections taken at
right angles to the axis must show a circular work­engaging periphery. Note. A hollow
member wherein the interior surface is generated and used as described is also considered
to be a ​
gRoller​
h. Note. A plurality of tools rotatable about the same axis in the same
direction and at the same rotational speed is considered to be a single ​
gRoller​
h in the
environment described herein.
ROLLER ­ For class 228
A tangible instrumentality having a peripheral surface which is generated by a line
revolving about an axis, said instrumentality being disclosed as revolving about said axis
so that successive peripheral portions thereof cyclically move into and out of engagement
with a generally planar surface of another member, with relative movement occurring
between said axis and the planar surface along a direction parallel to the planar surface,
thereby producing a relative rolling motion between the roller surface and the planar
surface as contrasted with a sliding motion, (i.e., the surfaces move in the same direction
at substantially the same linear speed so that there is no relative linear movement
between the roller surface and the planar surface at point of engagement). Note. The
generating line of the peripheral surface of the roller may have any continuous profile
(e.g., straight, curved, or irregular), and the line may have any desired inclination, other
than at right angles, relative to the axis. Thus, to be considered a ROLLER, any and all
cross­sections taken at right angles to the axis must show a circular material engaging
periphery.
ROLLER CLUSTER ­ For class 072
A group of three or more rollers* disposed relatively to one another and to the work* such
that the work passes between the rollers with a peripheral surface portion of each roller
engaging a surface portion of the work, the engaged surface portions being substantially
coextensive in the direction of movement of the work, and the rollers simultaneously
deforming the work.
ROLLER COUPLE ­ For class 072
A group of two coacting rollers* disposed opposite one another such that work passes
therebetween, the adjacent peripheral surfaces of both rollers simultaneously engaging
opposite sides, or opposed surfaces portions, of the work passing between the rollers and
thus deforming that work.
ROLLER­LIKE MEMBER ­ For class 228
A tangible rotating instrumentality having a peripheral surface with some, but not all, of
the characteristics of a roller*. Note. (a) In a first type of roller­like member the surface
is generated by a line revolving about an axis (thus the member looks like a roller), but
there is relative movement between the surface of the roller­like member and another
member to produce sliding action therebetween; or; (b) In a second type of roller­like
member the relative movement of the roller­like member and another member and
another member produces rolling engagement between their respective surfaces (thus the
roller­like member acts like a roller), but the surface is not generated by a revolving line
(e.g., the roller­like member is rough, gear­like, or recessed).
ROLLER­LIKE TOOL ­ For class 072
A deforming instrumentality having a work­ engaging, work­deforming tool surface with
some, but not all, of the characteristics of a roller*. Note. Usually (a) the surface is
generated by a line revolving about an axis (thus the tool looks like a roller), but the
relative movement of the axis and work produces a sliding motion of tool surface relative
to work surface; or (b) the relative movement of the tool axis and the work produces a
rolling motion of tool surface on work surface (thus the tool acts like a roller), but the
surface is not formed as a roller (e.g., the tool surface is rough, or gearlike, or recessed).
ROM ­ For class 438
read only memory
ROOF ­ For class 373
A cover, or lid for the furnace.
ROOF (SEE COVER) ­ For class 052
A rigid cover extending above and supported by the uppermost termini of walls or
columns.
ROSIN ­ For class 428
See natural oil, gum, rosin or lac. (Nonstructural or Composition)
ROSIN ­ For class 516
Colophony. Abietic­acid* (80­90%) types and remnants from derivation. Usually
designated according to its source, e.g., gum rosin (from exudate of incisions on living
trees); wood rosin (from Southern pine stumps); and tall oil rosin (from by­products of the
wood pulp industry). The principal constituents isolated from rosin are carboxylic acids
with a hydrophenanthrene nucleus, comprising abietic acid and its isomers, such as
pimaric acid. The acids may exist in rosin as acid anhydrides. The mixed acids are known
in the trade as rosin acids or resin acids, the two expressions sometimes being used
interchangeably. Gum rosin is obtained from the residue left after distillation of turpentine
from the exudate from live trees. Wood rosin is obtained by extracting the wood or stumps
with naphtha and removing the volatile portion. Tall oil rosin is obtained by fractionation of
tall­oil*. See section LINES WITH OTHER CLASSES AND WITHIN THIS CLASS, subsection
Glossary References, for additional information concerning this definition.
ROTARY KILN ­ For class 075
An approximately cylindrical apparatus which rotates on its axis in operation. The axis is
horizontal or inclined less than 45 degrees from horizontal. Usually, the axis is slightly
inclined from horizontal. In operation the kiln rotates substantially continuously in one
direction.
ROTARY MOTION ­ For class 074
The turning of a rigid body about an internal axis such that a point on the body travels
through an arcuate path, about the axis, having an extent of 360 degrees or more.
ROTATING ­ For class 366
Turning in but one direction about an axis.
ROTOR­TYPE COMBINE ­ For class 460
A machine equipped with rotor or cylinder designed so that the crop stays in contact with
the cylinder for several complete revolutions.
ROUTING ­ For class 709
Receiving transmitted messages within a network and forwarding them to their correct
destinations over a available route selected according to a predetermined criteria.
ROUTING ­ For class 718
Receiving transmitted messages within a network and forwarding them to their correct
destinations over a available route selected according to a predetermined criteria.
ROUTING ­ For class 719
Receiving transmitted messages within a network and forwarding them to their correct
destinations over a available route selected according to a predetermined criteria.
ROX ­ For class 438
recessed oxide
RTA ­ For class 438
rapid thermal anneal
RTP ­ For class 438
rapid thermal processing
RUNNER ­ For class 415
A member which is or which supports a means contacting a working fluid, the member
being mounted or supported so as to be capable of unidirectional rotational or orbital
movement for at least one revolution or orbit (in the absence of control means for limiting
movement to part of a revolution or orbit), the member being (1) caused to so move by
the kinetic or potential energy of the working fluid, or (2) caused to move by some
external force to increase the energy (velocity, pressure or potential) in the working fluid
by transfer of kinetic energy from the member to the fluid. This member may also
variously be called a rotor, wheel, piston or bucket wheel in the art literature.
RUNNING SPEED CONTROL ­ For class 318
Motor systems in which means are provided for regulating or controlling the speed of an
electric motor after it has been accelerated to some operating speed at which it is
designed to run until the work or useful load device driven by the motor has performed its
duty at that speed. Note. Means for controlling the speed of the motor during the starting
or accelerating period of operation (i.e., means for controlling the rate of change of speed)
are not classified herein even though the claims may term such control as ​
gspeed​
h
control, but are classified under ​
gacceleration​
h. For a definition of acceleration control, see
section IB4a, of the class definition. Since it is common practice to use the acceleration
means for also controlling the running­speed of the motor, patents in which both
acceleration and running­speed are claimed and in which both controls are effected by
precisely the same means in whole or in part, classification will be on the basis of
acceleration control only. Under these circumstances of control when some claims refer
only to ​
grunning­speed​
h control and/or some other claims refer only to acceleration
control, classification will only be on the basis of the acceleration control. When, however,
acceleration and running­speed control means are claimed in combination and any means
not a part of the acceleration means are used to control the running­speed, classification
will be on the basis of combined motor­operation controls including acceleration and
running­speed control. Where means are employed to affect the magnitude of the running­
speed of an electric motor and the magnitude of the means (e.g., resistance, reactance,
voltage, etc.), or the position (e.g., angle of brush position), of the running­speed control
means is not varied or changed, either inherently or otherwise, at any time during the
period of acceleration, classification will be on the basis of running­speed control and not
on the basis of acceleration control even though there may be some effect on the rate of
acceleration. For example, a motor speed control system comprising a fixed resistor
connected in the armature circuit, the magnitude of the resistance of which resistor does
not vary appreciably under the conditions of use and which resistor is not varied or
removed from the circuit during the acceleration period is classifiable under running speed
control and not under acceleration control. Since some running­speed control means may
be similar or even identical with some acceleration control means, searches for motor
acceleration control should be, in appropriate instances, extended to include the running­
speed control art.
salicide ­ For class 438
self­aligned silicide
SAFETY ELEMENT or ROD ­ For class 376
See Control Element.
SAFETY­CATCH LINKER ­ For class 506
A linker which is cleaved by performing two different reactions instead of only one, thus
providing greater control over the timing of compound release. In practice, the resin is
gactivated​
​
h before the actual cleavage takes place (e.g., cleavage by nucleophilic
displacement of a previously alkylated sulfonamide resin, etc.).
SAG ­ For class 438
self­aligned gate
SAM (SELF­ASSEMBLED MONOLAYER) ­ For class 977
Molecule­thick, self­assembled film formed at an interface, e.g., gas/liquid, gas/solid, etc.
SAMPLE ­ For class 073
A portion of material which is physically separated from the source.
SAMPLING SYSTEM ­ For class 073
A complete sampling system includes a capture device, a transport or handling means, and
a receiver.
SAND MOLD ­ For class 164
A mold made of sand and used for the making of sand castings. A green sand mold is a
mold used as made without any drying operations and contains the original moisture of the
mix.
SAND TEMPERING ­ For class 164
Adding moisture to molding sand to make it workable.
SATELLITE ­ For class 725
A manufactured object or vehicle intended to orbit the earth and to engage in the reception
and transmission of communication signals.
SATURABLE REACTOR ­ For class 330
An inductive device having a core and at least one winding thereon in which the inductance
is variable in accordance with magnetomotive force applied, up to a limiting value beyond
which increased magnetomotive force does not change the inductance.
SATURATED ­ For class 520
Denotes nonethylenically unsaturated; thus, for purposes of this class, materials containing
an aryl structure (e.g., benzene, naphthalene, etc.) are treated as saturated materials
unless otherwise excluded either specifically or hierarchically. Compare ethylenically
unsaturated.
SATURATION ­ For class 257
The current between the base and collector of a bipolar transistor when an increase in
emitter to base voltage causes no further increase in the collector current.
SAW ­ For class 438
surface acoustic wave (pressure sensitive device)
SBD ­ For class 438
Schottky barrier diode
SBH ­ For class 438
Schottky barrier height
SBS ­ For class 438
silicon bilateral switch
SCANNING ­ For class 343
Repeatedly moving the antenna beam over an area in space.
SCANNING ­ For class 348
The successive analyzing or synthesizing, according to a predetermined method, the light
values or equivalent characteristics of elements constituting a picture area.
SCANNING PROBE MICROSCOPE ­ For class 977
Generic term for Scanning Tunneling Microscope (STM) and Atomic Force Microscope (AFM)
in their many forms.
SCANNING TUNNELING MICROSCOPE (STM) ­ For class 977
Instrument with a nanosized tip that manipulates or detects operation based on a quantum
tunneling effect generating a current between the tip and an object being manipulated or
detected based upon the size of the gap between the tip and object.
SCATTERING CENTERS ­ For class 257
The impurities (dopants) in semiconductors that cause electrons or holes flowing through
the semiconductor to scatter. These reduce carrier mobility and represent a problem in
quantum devices because they affect electron coherence length.
SCAVENGER ­ For class 164
A chemically active material added to molten metal to remove oxides, gases, or other
impurities.
SCAVENGING ­ For class 431
The flushing out of unwanted gas or gas mixture by another gas or gas mixture.
SCCM ­ For class 438
standard cubic centimeter per minute
SCENE ­ For class 396
A scene is the view to be recorded on a photographic medium.
SCHOTTKY BARRIER ­ For class 257
A metal to semiconductor interface in which the carrier affinity and doping level of the
semiconductor are such that a rectifying junction is formed. Usually, minority carriers in
the semiconductor do not significantly contribute to the current flowing in a device with
such a barrier.
SCHOTTKY DIODE ­ For class 257
A diode with a Schottky barrier.
SCHOTTKY JUNCTION ­ For class 117
An interface formed by a semiconductor and a conductor.
SCM ­ For class 438
single chip module
SCR ­ For class 438
silicon controlled rectifier
SCRAM ROD ­ For class 376
See Control Element.
SCRAMBLE ­ For class 725
To disarrange the elements of a transmission in order to make it unintelligible to
interception.
SCRAP ­ For class 075
Discarded waste metal suitable for reprocessing.
SCREED ­ For class 425
An implement used to scrape off or smooth a surface of material which is being molded.
SCREEN ­ For class 353
This is a planar (usually) light diffusing surface positioned with its plane surface
substantially transverse to the projector light for presenting the image in viewable form.
SCREEN ­ For class 460
A device consisting of suitably mounted wirecloth, grate bars, or perforated sheet iron
which removes particles smaller than the grain being threshed, such as weed seeds, sand,
and other foreign matter.
SCREEN GRID ­ For class 330
A grid electrode placed between the control grid and the anode of a vacuum tube to reduce
inter­electrode capacitance.
SCREENING ­ For class 506
Determining whether a library contains a member or members which have a particular
property or activity of interest.
SDFL ­ For class 438
Schottky diode FET logic
SDHT ­ For class 438
selectively doped heterostructure transistor (e.g., HEMT)
S­DIP ­ For class 438
shrink DIP
SEAL ­ For class 070
A device or mechanism designed to so interfere with the normal operation or manipulation
of a securing arrangement as to show by rupture, visible external injury, or other
disfigurement from its original condition, any unauthorized or surreptitious tampering,
attack or manipulation.Included also in exception to the above definition are:
SEAM ­ For class 053
Two or more edges of the cover material brought together with or without adhesion.
Usually the seam is implemented by adhesion, folding or interfitting but a mere
overlapping of two edges is sufficient to constitute a seam.
SECOND CLASS CONDUCTORS ­ For class 313
A material having a very high electrical resistance at ordinary temperatures and a low
resistance when heated. Glowers formed of oxides, such as Th2 or the rare earth oxides,
used in the pyro­electric (e.g., Nernst) type of incandescent lamp are examples of second
class conductors.
SECONDARY CELL OR BATTERY ­ For class 320
A cell or battery that may have its available charge usefully increased (i.e., recharged) by
an electric current passing through it after having been discharged from a usefully charged
condition (i.e., the chemical reaction is reversible).
SECONDARY EMISSION ELECTRONIC OR VACUUM TUBE ­ For class 330
A tube which depends for its operation, at least in part, upon the emission of electrons
from a body due to collision of higher energy electrons with the body.
SECONDARY EMISSIVE CATHODE ­ For class 313
A cathode designed to emit electrons by virtue of the impact by electrons upon the
electron emissive surface. See the class definition for the classification of secondary
emissive cathodes, per se. See cathanode below.
SECONDARY EMISSIVE ELECTRODE ­ For class 330
An electrode which emits electrons upon collision with higher energy electrons. Since all
electrodes have this characteristic, the term applies only to those electrodes designed to
have an electron stream or beam impinge thereon to emit a stream or beam of secondary
electrons.
SECURITY ­ For class 710
Extent of protection for system hardware, software, or data from maliciously caused
destruction, unauthorized modification, or unauthorized disclosure.
SECURITY ­ For class 712
Extent of protection for system hardware, software, or data from maliciously caused
destruction, unauthorized modification, or unauthorized disclosure.
SECURITY ­ For class 713
Extent of protection for system hardware, software, or data from maliciously caused
destruction, unauthorized modification, or unauthorized disclosure.
SECURITY ­ For class 714
Extent of protection for system hardware, software, or data from maliciously caused
destruction, unauthorized modification, or unauthorized disclosure.
SEED ­ For class 099
A discrete article, constituting a propagative part of a naturally­occurring edible food,
usually found in or near the core­pit area. As to human consumption, it is frequently
gwaste​
​
h; but, as to the reproduction of the species, it is essential.
SEED ­ For class 117
A material, usually a single­crystal*, upon which a single­crystal* is grown. Seeded crystal
growth proceeds by the alignment of atoms or molecules or clusters into a
thermodynamically favored arrangement determined by the nature of the seed.
SEED ­ For class 438
self­enhanced electro­optical devices
SEG ­ For class 438
selective epitaxial growth
SEGREGATION ­ For class 164
The occurrence of impurities, inclusions, and alloying constituents in nonuniform
distribution.
SEIGNETTE"S SALT ­ For class 117
See Rochelle salt.
SEL ­ For class 438
(a)surface emitting laser or (b)state excitation by light
SELECTED WAVELENGTH MODIFIER ­ For class 362
A type of modifier which modifies light of at least one wavelength (color) differently from
light of another wavelength. Such modifiers may reflect, refract or filter light.
SELECTION ­ For class 234
The conditioning by a device of one or more of a number of available elements. (In this
class, the term ​
gselection​
h is usually employed with reference to tools; tool selection is
independent of tool actuation*).
SELF­ASSEMBLY ­ For class 977
Method of assembling molecules utilizing thermodynamic tendency to seek the lowest
energy state for a group of molecules.
SELF­COMMUTATED IMPULSE OR RELUCTANCE MOTORS ­ For class 318
A rotary motor of the type in which the rotor element tends to assume a predetermined
angular position when the motor is continuously energized and is provided with a
commutator or circuit making and breaking device which is actuated by the motor to
determine the instants of time at which the field producing windings thereof are energized
and de­energized relative to the angular position of the rotary element. See the definition
of a Repulsion Motor above.
SELFOX ­ For class 438
selective epitaxial layer field oxidation
SELF­SUSTAINING ­ For class 425
The capacity to retain an imparted shape.
SEM ­ For class 438
scanning electron microscopy
SEMICONDUCTOR ­ For class 257
A material whose electrical resistivity is between that of insulators and conductors. The
resistivity is commonly changed by light, heat, electric, or magnetic fields incident on the
material. Current flow is achieved by transfer of positive holes as well as by movement of
electrons.
SEMICONDUCTOR ­ For class 330
A material having a specific resistance value of the order of that of germanium, silicon,
selenium, etc.; or insulators whose specific resistance is reduced in value to the aforesaid
range in operation, by alpha particle or electron bombardment or other means, so that the
insulators operate broadly as semiconductors in an electrical circuit.
SEMICONDUCTOR ­ For class 338
A body of solid material whose conductivity is considerably more than insulators, yet
considerably less than metals.
SEMICONDUCTOR ­ For class 363
A solid or liquid electronic conductor, with resistivity between that of metals and that of
insulators in which the electrical charge carrier concentration increases with increasing
temperature over some temperature range. Over most of the practical temperature range,
the resistance has a negative temperature coefficient. Certain semiconductors possess two
types of carriers, negative electrons and positive holes. The charge carriers are usually
electrons, but there may be also some ionic conductivity.
SEMICONDUCTOR ­ For class 372
An electronic conductor, with resistivity between that of metals and that of insulators, in
which the electrical charge carrier concentration increases with increasing temperature
over some temperature range. Over most of the practical temperature range, the
resistance has a negative temperature coefficient. Certain semiconductors possess two
types of carriers, negative electrons and positive holes. The charge carriers are usually
electrons, but there may be also some ionic conductivity.
SEMICONDUCTOR ­ For class 438
A. A generic term for (1) a substance or material whose electronic conductivity at ordinary
temperature is intermediate between that of a metal and an insulator and whose
conductivity is capable of being modified by the addition of a dopant or (2) an electronic
device the main functioning parts are made from semiconductor materials. B. For the
purposes of Class 438, a semiconductor material (1) must have resistivity between that of
an insulator and a conductor and (2) be intended for use in a solid state device for at least
one of the following purposes: (a) conducting or modifying an electrical current, (b)
storing electrical energy for subsequent discharge,or (c) converting electromagnetic wave
energy to electrical energy or electrical energy to electromagnetic energy. The resistivity
is commonly changed by light, heat, or electric or magnetic fields incident on the material.
SEMICONDUCTOR ACTIVE ELEMENT ­ For class 331
A solid state active element comprised of a solid material having a conductivity
intermediate that of a good insulator and a good conductor.
SEMICONDUCTOR AMPLIFYING DEVICE ­ For class 330
An amplifying device constructed of a semiconductor with suitable electrodes for the
application of signal current, power supply energy, and for the derivation of output signal
current.
SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICE ­ For class 117
Used here to mean any article or structure comprised of semiconductor material, such as
the optical waveguides of Class 385 or the electronic semiconductor devices of Class 438.
The phrase is not determinative of proper classification; intended use frequently dictates
proper classification.
SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICE ­ For class 257
A device in which current conduction takes place within a semiconductor.
SEMICONDUCTOR JUNCTION ­ For class 117
See JUNCTION, SEMICONDUCTOR.
SEMICONDUCTOR JUNCTION ­ For class 438
The region of transition, which usually exhibits asymmetric conductivity, between two
joined semiconductors of different electrical properties or of joined semiconductor and
conductor (e.g., metal, etc.) and which is also referred to in the art as a barrier layer.
Types of junctions include heterojunctions, Schottky barrier junctions, and PN junctions.
SEMICONDUCTOR LASER ­ For class 257
A light emitting diode that uses stimulated emission of radiation to produce coherent light
output.
SEMICONDUCTOR LASER ­ For class 372
A light­emitting diode that uses stimulated emission to produce a coherent light output.
SEMIPERMEABLE ­ For class 210
Permeable to only some of materials which may be in intimate association as in a solution.
Usually applied to membrane, see MEMBRANE.
SEMIRIGID ­ For class 403
Structure which is both (a) capable of resisting distortion (i.e., maintaining its previous
formational shape or being self­supporting over all appreciable dimensions) caused by a
force applied to it in any of its orientation which is of a magnitude equal to or less than the
earth"s gravitational force, and (b) incapable of resisting distortion caused by a force
applied to it which is normally encountered in its working environment (e.g., ductile or
resilient structure).
SEMIRIGID­ For class 024
Structure which is both (a) capable of resisting distortion (i.e., maintaining its previous
formational shape or being self supporting over all appreciable dimensions) caused by a
force applied to it in any of its orientations which is of a magnitude equal to or less than
the earth"s gravitational force and (b) incapable of resisting distortion caused by a force
applied to it which is normally encountered in its working environment (e.g., ductile or
resilient* structure).
SEOT ­ For class 438
self­aligned epitaxy over trench
SEPARABLE­FASTENER­ For class 024
A securing mechanism including two, separate, dissociable, mating members having faces
which directly or through a separate linking member (1) contact and interlock (i.e., the
movement between the faces is restricted in the direction force is transmitted thereto by
the structure­to­be­secured*) with each other when fastening either (a) spaced portions of
the structure­to­be­secured* together, or (b) the structure­to­be­secured* to a supporting
member having a principle function not associated with this class (e.g., door, wall) and (2)
are intended to be always easily associated or dissociated from each other either by direct
manual force or by actuation of an operator* attached to one of the members. Both of the
mating members of this mechanism are intended to be attached to or formed from a
section of either the structure­to­be­secured* or a supporting member therefor and neither
of these members is ever structurally linked to the other by any structure other than the
structure­to­be­secured* when their faces are not in their interlock position. In addition,
both of the members when associated or dissociated do not exceed the elastic limit, or
destroy any portion, or the material forming the faces.
SEPARATING ­ For class 460
The operation which removes the threshed grain from the mixture of plant parts that
comes from the threshing section. The separation usually occurs at three places: (a)
concave grate, (b) finger grate beneath beater and (c) straw walker.
SEPARATING APPARATUS ­ For class 095
The entire gas separating means, which consists of all of the apparatus parts related to
gas separation and includes apparatus parts that are in addition to the separator.
SEPARATING APPARATUS ­ For class 096
The entire gas separating means, which consists of all of the apparatus parts related to
gas separation and includes apparatus parts that are in addition to the separator.
SEPARATING DIGGERS ­ For class 171
Diggers as defined above which comb through the earth and which are provided with
interstices through which the earth sifts while the desired objects rest on the digger and
are thus moved through the earth and separated from said earth.
SEPARATING MEDIUM (MEDIA) ­ For class 095
Liquid sorbent or means that effects the separation into constituent parts (e.g., deflector,
filter, molecular sieve, sorber, etc.). (Media has been used in the singular and in the
plural.)
SEPARATING MEDIUM (MEDIA) ­ For class 096
Liquid sorbent or means that effects the separation into constituent parts (e.g., deflector,
filter, molecular sieve, sorber, etc.). (Media has been used in the singular and in the
plural.)
SEPARATOR ­ For class 095
The portion of the apparatus that consists of a separating medium and the structure
supporting, retaining, or substantially confining the separating medium.
SEPARATOR ­ For class 096
The portion of the apparatus that consists of a separating medium and the structure
supporting, retaining, or substantially confining the separating medium.
SEPARATOR ­ For class 271
Refers to ​
gmeans for setting apart or individualizing a sheet relative to a stack of sheets,
and moving the individual sheet from the stack, particularly for the purpose of presenting
toward a position at which the sheet will be operated on.​
h
SEPARATOR ­ For class 429
A material used to space or maintain a pair of electrodes out of contact. This includes
material which function only to stop dendritic growth (treeing) between the electrodes.A
cell or group of cells.
SEPARATOR ­ For class 494
The combination of a BOWL plus such other devices or structure not clearly a part of the
BOWL as are necessary to constitute apparatus of the kind capable of subdividing material
by subjecting it to centrifugal force within the BOWL. The art terms, centrifuge and
centrifugal, are sometimes used to mean approximately the same as SEPARATOR.
SEPARATOR ELEMENTS ­ For class 171
Spaced portions of a separator which support objects larger than a certain size while
smaller particles or objects pass through the spaces therebetween.
SEPARATORY DISTILLATION ­ For class 201
A process of vaporizing at least a portion of a liquid mixture (distilland) and condensing at
least a portion of the vapor to separate the liquid mixture into distinct parts. The
substances recovered as products must have preexisted in the original mixture.
SEPARATORY DISTILLATION ­ For class 203
A process of vaporizing at least a portion of a liquid mixture (distilland) and condensing at
least a portion of the vapor to separate the liquid mixture into distinct parts. The
substances recovered as products must have preexisted in the original mixture.
SEPOX ­ For class 438
selective polysilicon oxidation
SER ­ For class 438
soft error rate
SERIES MOTOR ­ For class 318
A motor having at least one field producing winding and at least one armature winding, all
of the field­producing windings which are connected to be energized being electrically
connected in series­circuit relationship with all of the armature windings which are
connected to be energized.
SERVER ­ For class 709
A computer running administrative software that controls access to all or part of a network
and its resources (such as disk drives and printers). A computer acting as a server makes
resources available to computers acting as workstations on the network.
SERVER ­ For class 718
A computer running administrative software that controls access to all or part of a network
and its resources (such as disk drives and printers). A computer acting as a server makes
resources available to computers acting as workstations on the network.
SERVER ­ For class 719
A computer running administrative software that controls access to all or part of a network
and its resources (such as disk drives and printers). A computer acting as a server makes
resources available to computers acting as workstations on the network.
SERVER ­ For class 725
In a network, a device or computer system that is dedicated to providing specific facilities
to other devices attached to the network. Contrast: Client.
SETS ­ For class 425
A group of shaping couples each of which generally comprises plural coacting means.
SETTABLE MATERIAL ­ For class 052
A component which is applied or formed in a fluent condition but sets or hardens in the
final product, e.g., concrete, cement or plaster.
SET­TOP BOX (STB) ­ For class 725
A device that converts a cable television signal to an input signal to the television set. In
some cases, set­top boxes can be used to access the World Wide Web.
SEVER ­ For class 072
To forcibly part or separate a discrete portion from a body of material. See ​
gCut​
h.
SEVER ­ For class 425
To separate a portion from a body by cutting or breaking or perforating.
SFFT ­ For class 438
superconducting flux flow transistor
SGT ­ For class 438
surrounding gate transistor
SHAFT ­ For class 175
A part of the boring means which comprises an elongate, relatively slender structure (e.g.,
rod, tube, casing, strand, cable, etc., or any combination thereof), which is connected to
another part of the boring means for manipulating, supporting or driving said other part.
(1) Actuating Shaft. A shaft connected to another part of the boring means for modifying
or controlling said other part (e.g., cutter expansion shaft). (2) Shaft Section. One of the
individual elements of a multipart shaft. (3) Tool Shaft. A shaft which is connected to the
boring tool and extends above ground, or to another part of the boring means (e.g., to the
drive or advance means. (4) Tool Drive Shaft. A tool shaft connecting the tool to the drive
means, to transmit mechanical movement from the drive to the tool.
SHAFT ­ For class 415
A member which supports or mounts the runner for unidirectional rotational or orbital
movement, the member being itself supported in bearings for rotational motion and is
connected to a work producing element when the runner is caused to rotate by working
fluid impinging thereon or to a driving force so as to cause the runner to rotate and add
energy to work fluid.
SHAFT (SEE SUSTAINER) ­ For class 052
A member which has a limited closed periphery and which is greatly elongated relative to
its length. It is generic to ​
gsustainer​
h in that it may not have a load bearing function.
SHAFT FURNACE ­ For class 075
A vertical approximately cylindrical apparatus in which material to be treated is passed
downwardly through the shaft while it is heated in any manner. In this class the material
treated in the furnace is usually either reduced to free metal or melted or both.
SHAFT­ For class 187
A long, narrow, in situ passageway within a structure (e.g., building, ship, mine) which
defines the fixed path between the vertically spaced load entrance and exit levels traveled
by the load­underlying support surface of an elevator.
SHAPING ­ For class 029
The physical act of or means for permanently altering the form, configuration, dimensions,
proportions, or contour of a part or stock, either with or without the removal of material.
This term includes deforming, compacting, densifying, slitting, machining, and briquetting.
SHEARING ­ For class 083
Cutting effected by the relative motion of two cutting tools having edges which are initially
on opposite sides of the work with the cutting taking place by one tool moving towards the
other tool and the edge on the moving tool moving past and in close and overlapping
relationship to the edge of the other tool.
SHEET ­ For class 112
A rectangular portion of material of finite length and width which are each greater than its
thickness. A piece of material having a peripheral shape other than rectangular will be
considered a panel.
SHEET ­ For class 281
A body having two parallel surfaces both dimensions of which are large in comparison with
the third dimension of the body.
SHEET ­ For class 402
A three dimensional body having all opposed surfaces thereof disposed in substantially
parallel relation each nonthickness surface (See Figure 1 below) of which has a greater
surface area than the area of any one surface of the two remaining pairs of opposed
surfaces.
Note. A composite sheet including means such as an apertured or notched tab or strip
attached thereto for cooperation with a sheet retention means is considered the equivalent
of a one piece sheet likewise notched or apertured. Note particularly subclass 500 for a
device of this class employed to releasably retain such composite sheet.
Note. A sheet­like body (e.g., “divider”, “follower”, “sheet lifter”, etc.) serving as a
component of a device (e.g., container, depository, etc.) will not be considered a sheet as
defined above. Such body is a component of the device rather than a sheet intended for
temporary storage on or within the device.
SHEET ­ For class 428
A portion of web* material of finite length, whose width is greater than its thickness, and
which may be of any perimetric shape (e.g., triangle, circle, etc.). (Structural)
SHEET ­ For class 451
A rectangular portion of material of finite length, whose width is greater than its thickness.
SHEET ­ For class 462
A body* having two parallel surfaces, both dimensions of which are very large in
comparison with the third dimension (thickness) of the body.
SHEET RETAINER ­ For class 402
an elongated element which passes through the thickness dimension (See Figure 1 of the
Glossary) of a sheet* or a group of sheets to secure the same and cooperates with
structure (e.g., hole, peripheral incised opening, etc.) of the sheet(s) to releasably retain
such sheet(s) and may further cooperate with (1) another elongated element or (2) a
keeper*, to so retain such sheet.
SHEET­ For class 412
A body, usually paper, having two parallel surfaces both dimensions of which are large in
comparison with the third dimension of the body. Sheets can be printed on or blank.
SHELL ­ For class 099
Shell includes those outer coverings of articles of food which fracture upon impact, as
distinguished from those outer coverings that yield upon impact. Prime example of foods
having fractile and/or fracturable outer coverings are fowl eggs and nuts.
SHELL MOLDING ­ For class 164
A casting process utilizing a thin shell composed of resin­bonded sand for the cope and
drag section of the mold.
SHELLING ­ For class 460
The operation in which the kernels of corn are removed or separated from the ear of corn.
SHIELD ­ For class 376
For the purpose of this class, generally a mass or armor of concrete, lead or other heavy
material or other neutron absorbing material erected around a reactor or other radioactive
source to shield operating staff by absorbing and reducing dangerous radiations (especially
neutrons and gamma rays) to permissible levels. See also Neutron Absorbing Material.
SHIELDS ­ For class 313
Structures used in lamps and discharge devices to modify the electrical characteristics
thereof, or structures which are used to protect the lamp or discharge device from
external influences, or structures which are used to protect parts of the device from
influences, such as electron bombardment, originating in another part of the device, and
other structures used for protective purposes. Shields do not include mere electrodes even
though the electrode is defined as being a shielding electrode. Where an electrode of a
discharge device is provided with shielding structure in addition to the structure provided
for influencing the electric space discharge, such additional structure is considered to be
shielding structure. Examples of such additional shielding are where an indirectly heated
cathode is provided with a flange for shielding the discharge space from the influence of
the cathode heater current, or where an anode, grid, or lead wire is provided with
shielding means to shield the lead­in wires from the effects of electrostatic fields. Metal or
conductive envelopes for discharge devices are not considered to be shields where the
envelope is designed to function as an electrode of the discharge device, such as an
anode. Where the metal or conductive envelope is disclosed as being provided for
shielding purposes and not an electrode, the envelope is considered to be a shield.
SHIFT (n.) ­ For class 234
A change in the relative position of data, indicia, etc., incidental to its transfer from one
record or medium to another (e.g., data in columns 1­5 of a pattern card may be caused
to appear in columns 16­19 and 21 of a newly made card).
SHIM ­ For class 376
See Control Element.
SHOCK EXCITED RESONATOR OSCILLATOR ­ For class 331
An oscillator of the nonself­sustaining type wherein the driving system applies an electrical
impulse to the frequency determining element (i.e., resonator), which element is then
permitted to oscillate freely at its natural frequency.
SHUTDOWN ­ For class 431
The term is used in this class to indicate that a combustion device has been stopped and
that it cannot be made to operate except by manual intervention.
SHUTTER ­ For class 352
An element of a motion picture device which interrupts the light to provide the sequential
recording or presentation of the motion picture image.
SHUTTER ­ For class 396
A shutter is a device for blocking or unblocking the passage of light for controlling the
exposure time.
SI ­ For class 438
semi­insulating
Si ­ For class 438
silicon
SICOS ­ For class 438
sidewall base contact structure
SICP ­ For class 523
Specified intermediate condensation product (consistent with Class 520 Glossary)
SIDE WALL ­ For class 092
The side wall of the piston consists of that portion which is opposite the wall of the
cylinder which slidably engages the piston.
SIEVE ­ For class 460
A meshed or perforated device which is usually located under the chaffer on a combine
that separates larger particles from the grain or seed.
SIGNAL ­ For class 330
A variable electrical current or voltage having characteristic variations in time, which
characteristic variations are transmitted through an electrical network from a source in
which the signal originates to a load where the signal is utilized.
SIGNAL ­ For class 342
Control impulse, wave energy, intelligence or message, such as sing, or a noise indication
agreed upon, under stood and used to convey information at a distance.
SIGNAL ­ For class 343
Control impulse, wave energy, intelligence or message conveyed, such as a sign, noise
indication agreed upon, understood and used to convey intelligence at a distance.
SIGNAL ELECTRODE OR SIGNAL GRID ­ For class 330
The electrode to which the signal is applied; in the case where such electrode is a grid
electrode, the signal grid.
SIGNAL FEEDBACK ­ For class 330
The application of a signal derived from an output electrode, to an input electrode of an
amplifier or a prior stage of an amplifier. The input and output electrodes of the feedback
may be the same or a common electrode as where vacuum tube space current flows
through an unbypassed cathode impedance to change the potential on the cathode with
respect to the control grid in accordance with the signal output. (For the distinction
between signal feedback and bias control see the definition thereof, above).
SIGNAL FEEDBACK PATH ­ For class 330
Circuit means to apply a portion of the electrical signal output of an amplifier to the input
of the amplifier involving a shared impedance for the input and output circuits.
SIGNALING MEANS, ELECTRIC AND NONELECTRIC ­ For class 250
Detectors that produce in response to incident radiant energy either an increase or
decrease in electric potential or current flow (Electric) or some other perceivable change
(Nonelectric). The nonelectric change may be immediately perceived or may require
development to be perceived, e.g., photographic changes.
SIGNATURE­ For class 412
A book() section, composed of a plurality of sheets having a common fold; thus, the term
signature is usually used synonymously in this class with sheets(*) and quires(*) to
indicate printed or unprinted matter which is being fastened together at the edges to form
a bound book(*).
SILICON BILATERAL SWITCH (SBS) ­ For class 257
A silicon controlled switch that can conduct current in both directions.
SILICON CONTROLLED RECTIFIER (SCR) ­ For class 257
A four layer pnpn device that, when in a normal state, blocks applied voltage in either
direction. Application of a correct voltage to a gate terminal permits the device to conduct
in a forward direction.
SILICON CONTROLLED SWITCH (SCS) ­ For class 257
A four layer pnpn semiconductor switching device that can be triggered into conduction by
applying either positive or negative pulses.
SILICON ON INSULATOR (SOI) ­ For class 257
A semiconductor structure using an insulating substrate, instead of silicon as a substrate
material, with an overlying active layer of single crystal silicon containing active solid­
state devices. The substrate may typically be of the form of an insulating layer which is
itself formed on a single crystal substrate.
SILICON ON INSULATOR (SOI) ­ For class 438
A semiconductor structure using an insulating substrate, instead of silicon as a substrate
material, with an overlying active layer of single crystal silicon containing active solid
state devices. The substrate may typically be of the form of an insulating layer which is
itself formed on a single crystal substrate.
SILICON ON SAPPHIRE (S0S) CMOS ­ For class 257
A complementary metal oxide semiconductor device (e.g., a transistor) wherein single
crystal silicon is grown on a passive insulating base of sapphire (single crystal alpha phase
aluminum oxide) with complementary MOS transistors formed in the silicon in one or more
island portions.
SILICON ON SAPPHIRE (SOS) CMOS ­ For class 438
A complementary metal oxide semiconductor device (e.g., a transistor) wherein single
crystal silicon is grown on a passive insulating base of sapphire (single crystal alpha phase
aluminum oxide) with complementary MOS transistors formed in the silicon in one or more
island portions.
SILICON TRANSISTOR ­ For class 257
A transistor which uses silicon as the semiconductor material.
SILICON­GATE FET ­ For class 257
A field effect transistor which has a gate electrode made of silicon.
SILO ­ For class 438
sealed interface local oxidation
SIMILARITY ­ For class 704
A statistical measurement which is inversely proportional to distance. For example, if two
patterns are compared yielding a small distance, then the patterns would exhibit a large
(or high degree of) similarity.
SIMOX ­ For class 438
separation by implanted oxygen
SIMPLE MOVEMENT ­ For class 269
The following, only, are considered to be simple movements of a work holder: (a) A
movement in which all of the work holder swings about a fixed axis except for the part
lying on the axis, i.e., rotational movement. (b) A movement in which each point on the
work holder moves in a single rectilinear path; i.e., rectilinear movement.
SIMS ­ For class 438
secondary ion mass spectrometry
SINGLE CRYSTAL ­ For class 164
A metallic mass that consists of a single crystallographic grain instead of the usual
polycrystalline material.
SINGLE CRYSTAL ­ For class 257
A body of material having atoms regularly located at periodic lattice sites throughout.
SINGLE CRYSTAL ­ For class 438
A body of material having atoms regularly located at periodic lattice sites throughout.
SINGLE­CRYSTAL ­ For class 117
Solid phase material characterized by an absence of crystal boundaries and by a uniform
atomic structural arrangement. However, in this class, the term includes material
composed of twins*, superlattice*, epitaxy*, oriented­crystals*, or enlarged crystals
(when the enlarged crystals are used as though they are a single­crystal or when the
enlarged crystals are used individually as single­crystals).
SINGLE­IN­LINE PACKAGE ­ For class 257
A plug­in semiconductor device package with one row of pins with specified spacings
therebetween.
SINKER ­ For class 257
A buried electrically conductive, low resistance path in an integrated circuit which connects
an electrical contact to a conductive region buried in the integrated circuit. It may be made
up of a heavily doped impurity region.
SINKER ­ For class 438
A buried electrically conductive, low resistance path in an integrated circuit which connects
an electrical contact to a conductive region buried in the integrated circuit. It may be made
up of a heavily doped impurity region.
SINTERING ­ For class 065
The coalescence of particles into one solid mass through heating, generally with melting
limited to a surface layer only of each particle.
SINTERING ­ For class 419
The term sintering includes the union of finely divided material or powder by the action of
heat with or without pressure. The heat must result from a positive application of heat at
some point in the process. Heat resulting from the application of pressure alone is not
considered to be a positive application of heat in these subclasses. Some, but not all, of
the ingredients may melt. A chemical reaction such as reduction may occur during
sintering.
SINTERING ­ For class 425
The coalescence of parts into one solid mass through heating, generally with melting
limited to a surface layer only of each particle.
SIP ­ For class 438
single­in­line package
SIPOS ­ For class 438
semi­insulating polycrystalline oxygen­doped silicon
SIS ­ For class 257
An MIS structure (Metal­Insulator­Semiconductor) in which the ​
gmetal​
h layer is made of
semiconductor material, typically polycrystalline silicon.
SIT ­ For class 438
(a)static induct. thyristor or (b)static induct. trans.
SKIN ­ For class 099
That portion of the outer periphery of an article of food that is dissimilar with respect to
the inner portion of the food in at least one (and usually several) of the following respects:
color, consistency, density, firmness, flexibility, hardness, texture (​
grough​
h vs. ​
gslick​
h to
the touch), and toughness (resistance or lack of resistance to ​
gtearing​
h).
SKIP (n.) ­ For class 234
A suspension of cutting and/or pattern­sensing operations, accompanied by a
predetermined amount of feed* of a workpiece or pattern, for the purpose of omitting
operations on a portion thereof.
SLAB ­ For class 144
A portion of a log* comprising a longitudinally extending section cut from the side of a
log*, similar to lumber*, but with the bark* side uncut.
SLAG ­ For class 065
See Subclass References to the Current Class, above, for a subclass reference to the term
gslag.​
​
h
SLAG ­ For class 164
The nonmetallic product of refining metal ores which results from the reaction of the flux
with gangue.
SLAG ­ For class 373
A more, or less completely fused and vitrified material separated during the reduction of a
metal from its ore which generally floats on top of the molten metal during the heat
reduction processes found in this class.
SLAVE ­ For class 060
An expansible chamber device which provides an expanding volume to receive pressurized
fluid or a pressure transmitted through a passage connecting the slave to the master
transmitter. The slave includes all valve means or chamber means associated therewith.
SLIDE ­ For class 353
A piece of transparent film having a single image thereon, and also having a frame or two
glass plates to help keep the piece of film from bending.
SLIDE­STILE ­ For class 049
An elongated member extending along the edge of a closure in opposition to a portal
frame member, e.g., jamb, and connectable to the closure for sliding therewith.
SLIDING MOVEMENT OF CLOSURE ­ For class 049
Rectilinear motion which is constrained by stationary guides on the supporting member(s).
SLINGER ­ For class 065
See Subclass References to the Current Class, above, for a subclass reference to the term
gslinger.​
​
h
SLIP ­ For class 701
Loss of adhesion or friction between an object and a surface. An example in a vehicle
would be the reduction of friction between a wheel and a road surface (e.g., wheel
slippage).
SLITTING ­ For class 029
The physical act of or means for shaping solely by incising or severing the part or stock to
form a partial separation along a plane or surface through the part or stock. When this
separation is done by a true shearing operation, there is no material removed.
SLITTING ­ For class 234
The cutting of a narrow incision by a single straight or curved cutting edge, the incision
extending through the thickness of a workpiece, being of finite length, and having distinct
ends (i.e., not a punched hole).
SLM ­ For class 438
spatial light modulator
SLS ­ For class 438
strained layer superlattice
SLT ­ For class 438
solid logic technology
SLUDGE ­ For class 210
Concentrate of settled colloidal suspension with a mushy or mud texture, a gel with up to
more than 90 percent usually water) but quite viscous. It may contain indiscriminate solids
as grits, fiber, wood chip, and emulsions. While still wet, treatment is proper for this
class, but the same material when completely dry may be referred to as sludge. See
ACTIVATED SLUDGE.
SLUDGE ­ For class 588
Residue (usually viscous) from an industrial, home, or agricultural process which may
contain a harmful chemical substance. Examples of harmful chemical substances are:
heavy metals, sulfur compounds, phosphorus compounds, nitrogen compounds, and
halogenated compounds any of which may be organic.
SLURRY ­ For class 376
See Homogeneous Reactor.
SMOKE ­ For class 516
A colloid system of a solid dispersand* (discontinuous phase), in a gas dispersant*
(continuous phase), as an aerosol*. Cf. fog*.
SMOOTHING ­ For class 065
Removing surface irregularities or imperfections.
SMT ­ For class 438
surface mount technology
SNAPPING ­ For class 460
This expression is arbitrarily assigned as being generic to the separation of the corn ears
from the corn stalks. As the stalks are pulled downward between the cylindrical members,
the ears, being too large to pass through the available space are snapped off.
SOAP ­ For class 510
Denotes a water­soluble alkali metal (Li, Na, K, Rb, or Cs), ammonium or organic base
salt (e.g., phosphonium, substituted ammonium, etc.) of an unsubstituted or hydroxy­
substituted, saturated or unsaturated, higher fatty acid, or of rosin (abietic) acid, or of
mixtures of any of these acids.
SOFTENED GLASS ­ For class 065
Glass that has been heated to a temperature at which it is pliable or liquid.
SOFTENING POINT ­ For class 065
The temperature at which a uniform fiber, 0.5 to 1.0 mm. in diameter, elongates under its
own weight at a rate of 1 mm. per minute when the upper 10 cm. of its length is heated in
a prescribed furnace * at the rate of approximately 5​
‹C. per minute. (*See ​
gA Method for
Measuring The Softening Temperature of Glass​
h, J.T. Littleton, J. Am. Ceramic Soc., 10(4),
259 (1927).
SOG ­ For class 438
spin­on glass
SOI ­ For class 117
Semiconductor On Insulator. A layered structure commonly found as the starting point for
integrated circuit manufacture on silicon wafers.
SOI ­ For class 438
silicon on insulator
SOIC ­ For class 438
small outline IC package
SOJ ­ For class 438
small outline J­lead package
SOL ­ For class 516
Usually refers to a colloid system of a dispersand* (gas, solid, or liquid discontinuous
phase), in a liquid dispersant* (continuous phase). However, aerosol* refers to a colloid
system of colloid­sized particles in a gas continuous phase. Sol may also refer to just the
liquid phase of a colloid system. Examples are metal oxides such as silica or rare earth
oxides dispersed in an aqueous phase (aquasols*), or in liquid lower and higher alcohols
(alcosols*), or in organic solvents (organosols*). Sol is generic to organosol*, alcosol*,
aquasol*, and hydrosol*, where in each instance the prefix refers to the continuous phase.
SOLAR CELL ­ For class 257
A photovoltaic cell in the form of a semiconductor diode, usually made of silicon, that
generates electricity directly from sunlight impingent on the cell.
SOLID SORBENT ­ For class 095
A solid sorbent is a solid material which separates a constituent (e.g., a gas, vapor, etc.)
from a fluid mixture containing such constituents in a ​
gquasi­chemical​
h manner. The action
in most instances is that of selective retention (i.e., the sorbent removes only the part of
the fluid mixture for which it has the greatest affinity). The retained constituent cannot be
removed by shaking, brushing, or similar mechanical action, but generally can be removed
by heating, pressure reduction, or use of a stripping or denuding fluid.
SOLID SORBENT ­ For class 096
A solid sorbent is a solid material which separates a constituent (e.g., a gas, vapor, etc.)
from a fluid mixture containing such constituents in a ​
gquasi­chemical​
h manner. The action
in most instances is that of selective retention (i.e., the sorbent removes only the part of
the fluid mixture for which it has the greatest affinity). The retained constituent cannot be
removed by shaking, brushing, or similar mechanical action, but generally can be removed
by heating, pressure reduction, or use of a stripping or denuding fluid.
SOLID STATE ACTIVE ELEMENT ­ For class 331
A two­terminal or fourterminal active element of electrically conductive, semi­conductive,
ferromagnetic or ferroelectric material in the solid state. Examples are: The Hall effect
plate, semi­conductor (transistor), magnetic type and dielectric type amplifiers or negative
resistance devices.
SOLID SUPPORT ­ For class 506
Insoluble, functionalized, polymeric material to which library members or other reagents
may be attached (often via a linker) allowing library members to be readily separated (by
filtration, centrifugation, etc.) from excess reagents, soluble reaction by­products, or
solvents.
SOLID­PHASE SYNTHESIS ­ For class 506
Synthetic process wherein the reactions are performed on a solid support, usually in the
presence of a solvent (i.e., wherein one or more library building blocks are bound to a
solid support, e.g., polymer, resin, glass beads, etc.) during library creation.
SOLID­STATE ­ For class 326
(a) Technology utilizing solid semiconductors in place of vacuum tubes for amplification,
rectification, or switching. (b) Pertaining to circuits and components using semiconductors.
SOLID­STATE DEVICE ­ For class 257
An electronic device or component that uses current flow through solid (as opposed to
liquid), gas, or vacuum materials. solid­state devices may be active or passive.
SOLID­STATE DEVICE ­ For class 326
An electronic device which operates by virtue of the movement of electrons within a solid
piece of semiconductor material.
SOLID­STATE DEVICE ­ For class 438
An electronic device or component that uses current flow through solid (as opposed to
liquid), gas, or vacuum materials. Solid­state devices may be active or passive.
SOLID­STATE IMAGING DEVICE ­ For class 348
A device that uses a mosaic of tiny light­sensitive semiconductors (photo­transistors) to
produce individual outputs which are then converted into a coherent video signal.
SOLUTION TREATING ­ For class 148
A process whereby an alloy system possessing decreasing solute solidity with temperature
is treated to dissolve said solute in the parent phase. Subsequent quenching results in
solute supersaturation and thus places the metal alloy in a condition for age hardening.
Also applied to heating a multi­phase metal alloy to an elevated temperature to dissolve
one or more phases.
SOLUTION­PHASE SYNTHESIS ­ For class 506
Synthesis performed in solution (i.e., wherein the reactants and reagents are all soluble in
the reaction medium, irrespective of the fact that, for instance, a supported catalyst is
used during the reaction). Solution­phase synthesis is also known as ​
gsynthesis in
solution.​
h
SOLVENT DYE ­ For class 008
A solvent dye is a dye which si soluble in an organic solvent and is commonly introduced
in the form of a solution in an organic solvent.
Sone ­ For class 704
A measure of loudness as a function of frequency and sound pressure. A pure tone of 1
kHz. at 40 db above a normal listener"s threshold produces a loudness of 1 sone.
SORB ­ For class 502
The attracting and holding of a constituent of a contacting fluid, on the surface, within
pores, or throughout its mass by a material of solid character. The sorbing is often
selective, preferentially attracting a component and not attracting another but it may apply
to a complete fluid. The sorbent may comprise a solid impregnated with a normally liquid
material in which the mixture has a solid property but does not encompass a solution of a
solid in a liquid.
SORB, SORBING ­ For class 210
The attracting by a solid material of a liquid wherein the liquid permeates the body of the
solid, either in pores or throughout the material itself or of a finely divided constituent,
suspended or dissolved in a liquid, on the surface of or in pores of the material. Examples
of the former are methods using sponges, mops, and pads and of the latter are methods
using activated charcoal clays and zeolites. In this class, no distinction is made between
absorption and adsorption. Processes using sorption for separation are provided for in
subclasses 660+. (See Kirk­Othmer Encyclopedia of Chemical Technology 2nd ed. Vol. 1,
pp. 44­75 and 421­469.)
SORBITAN ­ For class 516
Cyclic ether tetrahydric alcohols derivable from sorbitol by removal of one molecule of
water.
SORBITAN FATTY ACID ESTERS ­ For class 516
Mixtures of partial esters of sorbitol and sorbitol anhydrides with fatty acids.
SORBITOL ­ For class 516
C6H8(OH)6, 1,2,3,4,5,6­hexanehexol. Reduction product of glucose, found in nature in
small quantities.
SORPTION ­ For class 588
The ability of a substance to undergo a surface reaction that causes that substance to be
able to retain other substances, these other substances are generally gases, liquids, or
dissolved materials.
SOS ­ For class 117
Silicon On Sapphire.
SOS ­ For class 438
silicon on sapphire
SOURCE (SUPPLY SOURCE) ­ For class 221
Any means for supporting or retaining a quantity of articles either in an orderly fashion or
arrangement or as a jumbled mass such as provided by a magazine, hopper, stack,
compartment, container, bin or receptacle.
SOURCE ­ For class 073
The material or bulk from which the sample is removed.
SOURCE ­ For class 257
In a field effect transistor, the electrode to which the source of charge carriers is
connected.
SOURCE ­ For class 438
In a field effect transistor, the active region/electrode to which the source of charge
carriers is connected.
SP ­ For class 523
Solid polymer (consistent with Class 520 class definition)
SPACE CHARGE REGION ­ For class 257
The region around a pn junction in which holes and electrons recombine to leave no mobile
charge carriers and a net charge density due to the residual dopant ions.
SPACE CHARGE REGION ­ For class 438
The region around a pn junction in which holes and electrons recombine to leave no mobile
charge carriers and a net charge density due to the residual dopant ions.
SPACE DISCHARGE DEVICE ­ For class 331
A device comprising at least two spaced electrodes and wherein conduction by charged
particles, e.g., electrons, or ions, takes place between the electrodes.
SPACE­BAR ­ For class 400
An element on a typewriter, located on a keyboard*, which element is pressed to cause a
carriage­feed movement of the carriage* without an imprint of a character*, thereby to
separate one word* from another word on a print­line*.
SPALLATION ­ For class 376
A nuclear reaction induced by high energy bombardment and involving the ejection of two
or more small particles or fragments leaving only one large residual nucleus.
SPARK PLUG ­ For class 313
A unitary spark gap having a plurality of insulated electrodes arranged out of contact with
each other so that the space discharge is a ​
gjump spark​
h and usually having a shell or
sleeve designed to be attached to an opening in an internal combustion engine or other
device, the shell or sleeve carrying one or more electrodes within it which are insulated
from the shell or sleeve by an insulating bushing or other insulation. The shell or sleeve
often carries an electrode which cooperates with the other insulated electrode to form the
jump­spark gap. Included are the devices known as spark plugs usually used on the
ordinary automotive internal combustion engine. Also included are spark plugs for other
uses which are similar in structure. It does not include ignitors where the spark is made by
moving the electrodes into contact and then separating them to draw the spark. It does not
include ignitors which are not similar in structure to the automobile spark plug even if they
are of the jump spark type. Spark plugs having only a single electrode which are designed
to be used with some other device, as the cylinder head, so as to form a jump spark
therewith are also excluded.
SPATIAL CONTENT, DOMAIN ­ For class 348
The content of a single video image.
SPE ­ For class 438
solid phase epitaxy
SPECIAL NUCLEAR MATERIAL ­ For class 376
See Nuclear Fuel (b).
SPECIAL TREATING CLASS ­ For class 426
Class that does not include the treatment of an edible, per se.
SPECIAL TYPE CATEGORIES ­ For class 137
Those comprising a group of related patents directed toward solving a problem in one
specific field of activity, which have been classified on the basis of and under a title
reflecting that activity rather than on a generalized basis. Examples of special type
categories are 94, Fuel controlled by boiler or water system condition; 108, Pump unloader
type (indented under Self­proportioning or correlating systems).
SPECIAL TYPES OF MOTORS: ­ For class 318
The several designations applied to distinguish the several types of motors such as series
motors, induction motors, synchronous motors, etc., shall apply to those motors whose
normal running characteristics are so described. Thus a synchronous motor is one which
runs as a synchronous motor under normal running or load conditions. This is true even
though the motor may be driven by some other device either (mechanical or electrical)
during the starting and/or accelerating period or may operate on some other motor
principle during the starting or accelerating period. Such an instance may be illustrated by
a synchronous motor which is provided with means to cause it to start as an induction
motor and subsequently and normally run at synchronous speed. Such a motor is
considered to be a synchronous motor, since under normal running conditions, it exhibits
all the characteristics of a synchronous motor.
SPECIFIC LIGAND­RECEPTOR BINDING ASSAY ­ For class 435
The interaction between a ligand material and a receptor which is specific to a class of
compounds or a single compound.
SPECIFICALLY STRUCTURED ­ For class 502
Having shape or size designed or calculated to increase the catalysis or sorbency of a
material, generally by presenting a greater surface area per unit volume or a pore size of
critical dimensions. Examples of specifically structured single materials are Raney nickel
and activated carbon. Since porosity and specific pore size are inherent in zeolites, critical
dimensions of the pores of a Zeolite alone are not considered to constitute specific
structure.
SPECIFIED ­ For class 052
The subclass definition must be referred to.
SPECIFIED INTERMEDIATE CONDENSATION PRODUCT (SICP) ­ For class 520
Specified intermediate condensation product is limited to:
(a) Reaction of an aldehyde or derivative and an amine or compound containing a N­ or N
group where R is hydrogen or hydrocarbon radical.
(b) Reaction of an aldehyde or derivative and a phenolic material.
(c) Reaction of an aldehyde or derivative and a ketone.
(d) A compound containing a
N­(­C­O­Z)n group.
(e) A compound containing a T­(­O­A)n group.
(f) A compound containing a group.
Y" and Y” are H or hydrocarbon groups, Z is H or a carbon radical.
T ­ is an atom other than H or C.
A ­ is a hydrogen or carbon atom and which carbon atom is bonded to only H, carbon, or
single bonded oxygen atoms.
X ­ is H, part of an ether group, or an inorganic cation.
n ­ is two or more, a is one or more.
SPECIFIED MATERIAL ­ For class 520
Denotes the intentional and deliberate presence of a material (other than as a reactant
monomer) during the polymerization reaction, which material may be removed subsequent
to the polymerization, or which may remain with or in the final desired polymeric product.
The term ​
gspecified material​
h is limited to an amount of a material (e.g., 2 percent of a
material, etc.). A recitation of at least one specified element in a compound or in
elemental form (e.g., oxygen­liberating compound, peroxy compound, chlorine­containing,
etc.) Groups of elements which can be identified from the periodic table, other than metal
or nonmetal (e.g., Group IA, transition metal, halogen­containing, etc.) Compounds which
have identified art meaning (e.g., alcohol, ethers, esters, etc.) Examples of material,
which are described in mere functional terms and are thereby excluded as being a
gspecified material​
​
h since they do not meet the parameters set out above, are terms such
as free radical catalyst, redox catalyst, emulsifier, dispersant, base, acid, organic
medium, etc. Water in any of its physical forms: inert gases (Group VIIIA), hydrocarbons,
and chlorinated hydrocarbons are specifically excluded from this area as being specified
material even if specifically recited as to name (e.g., chloroform, etc.) or as to amount
(e.g., 2 percent of chloroform, etc.). A search for these materials requires a search of the
appropriate product area. However, specific provision has been made in Class 526,
subclass 208 for a mixture of a chlorinated hydrocarbon and water, and in Class 526,
subclass 207 for a mixture of hydrocarbon and water. Terms such as complex,
coordination complex, chelate, sequestered, or adduct, and terms which are exemplary of
these but which are not limited to the enumerated examples, such as sequestered
complex, chelated compound, etc., are classified as are compounds, per se, when they are
products of a metal or metal compound and a nonmetal organic compound. These
materials are classified as separate compounds or elements when (a) the product is the
reaction product of at least two or more metals, metal­containing compounds, or mixtures
thereof (e.g., alloy, etc.) or (b) when the product is the reaction of at least a metal or
metal compound and an inorganic material. Patents in this area are to be classified on the
basis of the claimed final compound or composition that is introduced into the reaction
zone and is in direct contact with any of the monomers therein. If it is not possible to so
classify the introduced material, classification is then made on the basis of the individual
reactants used in the preparation of the unknown material. In the event that the claims
recite both the individual reactants and identify the product formed therefrom, then the
original classification should be made in the subclass that provides for the known product
and a cross­reference should be placed in the appropriate subclass that provides for the
reactants. Patents which claim an ​
gin situ​
h preparation of ​
gspecified material​
h in the
presence of the monomer are originally classified on the basis of the introduced reactants
and cross­referenced to the prepared ​
gspecified material​
h.
SPECIFIED POLYMER­FORMING INGREDIENTS (SPFI) ­ For class 520
Specified polymer­forming ingredients are limited to: (a) Aldehyde or derivative and a
phenolic material. (b) Aldehyde or derivative and an amine. (c) Aldehyde or derivative and
a compound containing N­. (d) Aldehyde or derivative and a hydrocarbon. (e)
Polyepoxides. (f) Polyisocyanates and a polyol. (g) Polyisocyanates and a polyamine. (h)
Polyisocyanates and a polycarbocyclic acid or anhydride. (i) Carbonic acid or carbonate
and a polyol. (j) Hal­­hal and a polyol. (k) Polycarboxlic acid or derivative and a polyol. (l)
Polycarboxylic acid or derivative and a polyamine. (m) Aldehyde or derivative and a
compound containing N group.
SPECTACLES ­ For class 351
Instruments for aiding vision consisting of lenses and supports therefor.
SPECTRUM ­ For class 356
The band of colors produced by separating white light into its component frequencies. The
term also denotes radiation arrayed over a frequency range where the frequency of the
radiation continuously increases or decreases over the range.
SPECTRUM ­ For class 359
The band of colors produced by separating a beam of white light into its component
frequencies.
SPECTRUM ­ For class 372
The band of colors produced by separating a beam of white light into its component
frequencies.
SPEECH ­ For class 704
The communication or expression of thoughts in spoken words.
SPEED RATIO ­ For class 475
Rotational velocity of an output member* divided by the rotational velocity of an input
member*.
SPEED RATIO: ­ For class 477
Rotational velocity of an output shaft* divided by the rotational velocity of an input shaft.*
SPFI ­ For class 523
Specified polymer­forming ingredients (consistent with Class 520 Glossary)
SPIKING ­ For class 438
Phenomena associated with electromigration wherein a fingerlike protrusion of a
metallization layer is allowed to grow through a dielectric layer and eventually contact a
further layer.
SPINE­ For class 412
The hollow or portion of the covering member which connects the boards.
SPINEL ­ For class 117
MAl2O4; rubicelle, ruby almandine, ruby balas. Also sometimes used generically to refer
to a crystal having the cubic crystal lattice form.
SPINNERET ­ For class 425
Means providing a shaping orifice of a size to produce pliable filaments.
SPINNING ­ For class 264
A molding operation for forming of continuous or indefinite length articles, generally
filaments, by extrusion through an appropriately sized orifice. Some types of spinning are
spinning into a reactive bath, melt spinning, evaporative spinning or solvent­extractive
spinning.
SPINNING ­ For class 425
Extrusion molding of indefinite length filaments.
SPIRO AND SPIRO RING SYSTEM ­ For class 514
These terms denote the sharing of one common ring member only by exactly two rings.
The following two structures are illustrative:
A structure such as:
is excluded because the carbon atom shared by two rings is also shared by a third ring.
The common ring member must be attached to two ring members of each of the rings by
nonionic bonding. Therefore, stuctures such as:
are also excluded from consideration as “spiro ring systems” because ionic bonding exists
between the hetero ring atom and an acyclic atom (an oxygen atom in both of these
cases) in the formation of these betaine inner salts. These structures will be considered
and classified as:
SPIRO and SPIRO RING SYSTEM ­ For class 532
These terms denote the sharing of one common ring member only by exactly two rings.
The following two structures shown in Figure 17 are illustrative of spiro systems:
A structure such as that of Figure 18 is not spiro because the “C” shared by the two rings
is also shared by a third ring.
The common ring member must be attached to two ring members of each of the rings by
nonionic bonding, and nonionic bonding must exist between all members of a ring in order
for the ring to be regarded as a hetero ring. Thus, the structures shown in Figures 19 and
20 are excluded from the category of “spiro ring systems” because ionic bonding exists
between the nitrogen hetero ring atom and an acyclic atom (an oxygen atom in each case)
in the formation of these betaine inner salts.
These two structures will be considered and classified in the forms depicted, respectively,
as Figures 21 and 22.
SPLITTER ­ For class 725
Splitters divide or combine power. The power division causes an insertion loss and a small
amount of internal loss that contributes to the attenuation of the signals passing through
the device. The splitter has a common port and split port(s).
SPLITTING ­ For class 376
See Fission.
SPOT ­ For class 438
self­aligned planar oxidation technology
SPREADING AGENT­ For class 516
A material*, energy, or means used for affecting the spreading and displacement of one
material* for another material*. In a type of wetting known as spreading wetting, a first
liquid in contact with a solid is displaced by a second liquid. See also wetting* agents. See
section LINES WITH OTHER CLASSES AND WITHIN THIS CLASS, subsection Glossary
References, for additional information concerning this definition.
SPRUE ­ For class 164
Gates and risers of a mold assembly; the hole through which molten metal enters the
mold; also, the waste portion attached to the product.
SPT ­ For class 438
substrate plate trench capacitor
SPUD ­ For class 037
In a dredge, this is an elongated member provided with a lifting tackle at the top and
fused to hold or remove the dredge by contact with the earth.
SPUR GEAR ­ For class 475
A gear having radially extending teeth on the rim, wherein the edges of the teeth extend in
a direction generally parallel with rotational axis of the gear.
SQUID ­ For class 438
superconductive quantum interference device
SQUID ­ For class 505
Superconducting QUantum Interference Device
SRAM ­ For class 438
static random access memory
SRO ­ For class 438
stress relief oxide
SSDP ­ For class 438
simultaneous single/polycrystalline deposition
SSI ­ For class 438
small scale integration
SST ­ For class 438
(a)super self­alignment tech. or (b)sealed sidewall tech.
STABILIZATION ­ For class 331
The maintenance of a desired condition or state of the oscillator which condition or state
may be subject to change.
STABILIZATION MEANS ­ For class 330
In an amplifier having a tendency to depart from a predetermined condition of operation,
any circuit means used to maintain such predetermined condition of operation of the
amplifier. See the definition of Control above.
STACK ­ For class 221
A single, contiguous, continuous, orderly sequence or linear arrangement of articles which
may constitute an article supply or result from operation on articles previously disposed as
a jumbled mass.
STACK­ For class 414
A freestanding or orderly assemblage of superposed or imbricated articles.
STALK ­ For class 460
The article usually consists of the stem or main axis of a plant or any lengthened support
on which an organ grows such as a corn ear stalk.
STARTING AND/OR STOPPING ­ For class 318
Generally, the only motor systems classified as starting and stopping are those where the
supply circuit to the motor is merely closed in the case of starting, or the supply circuit is
opened in the case of stopping, there being no control of the rate of starting or stopping,
or no auxiliary means to brake the motor. See the definition of acceleration control of the
class definition for the starting and/or stopping systems which include motor acceleration
and/or deceleration control means. See the definition of motor braking control of the class
definition for the stopping systems which include motor braking. See the definition of
motor braking control for the class definition for motor systems where the armature or
primary circuit is controlled during the starting and/or stopping period for purposes other
than motor acceleration, deceleration or braking control. Motor systems having only
starting and/or stopping control are classified in the miscellaneous subclasses of this class.
See Subclass References to the Current Class for motor systems where automatically
controlled means control the starting and/or stopping and for the motor systems where the
system includes a three or more position motor controller to control the starting and/or
stopping.
STATIC APPARATUS ­ For class 425
Apparatus having no relatively moving parts during the forming or shaping operation.
STATIC MOLD ­ For class 249
See the Class Definition, subparagraphs A­C, inclusive.
STATUS DATA ­ For class 345
Data that represent conditions of data, digital data processing systems, computers,
peripherals, memory, etc. (also see: Data)
STATUS DATA ­ For class 707
Data that represent conditions of data, computers, peripherals, memory, etc. (Also see
Data)
STATUS DATA ­ For class 711
Data that represent conditions of data, computers, peripherals, memory, etc.
STATUS DATA ­ For class 714
Data that represent conditions of data, digital data processing systems, computers,
peripherals, memory, etc.
STEAM ­ For class 122
To be taken in a generic sense as meaning vapor.
STEAM DISTILLATION ­ For class 203
A form of convective distillation in which the inert vapor passed through the heated liquid
is steam. The adding of water or steam to a distillation column or the adding of water to a
distilland is not within the meaning of this term.
STEAM TUBES ­ For class 122
Designate vapor tubes whether the vapor therein be formed from water or any other
liquid.
STEARIC ACID; STEARATE ­ For class 516
CH3(CH2)16COOH. The most common fatty acid in natural oils and fats. Glycerol
monostearate is the monoglyceride formed from the esterification reaction between
glycerol and stearic acid.
STEERING WHEEL ­ For class 180
Used in the Class 180 subclass definitions means a road­wheel, the axis of which may be
swung so as to change the course of the vehicle; however, see Subclass References in the
Current Class above.
STEM­END ­ For class 099
This expression relates to the surface area of food at the location of the natural
attachment to the food of a stalk, stem, branch, vine or cap that supports an article of
food such as a cherry or strawberry and may also include a small portion of the adjacent
skin; the expression is arbitrarily extended to include the area of attachment of the sprout,
leaf, stalk or foliage of food such as a potato.
STEMMING ­ For class 099
This expression is arbitrarily assigned as being generic to the separation of items such as
a blossom, leaf, root, tip, or similar portion of a naturally occurring food, in addition to
connoting the separation of a stem.
STEMMING ­ For class 460
This expression is arbitrarily assigned as being generic to the separation of items such as
a blossom, leaf, root, tip, or similar portion of a naturally­occurring crop product in
addition to connoting the separation of a stem.
STEP RECOVERY DIODE ­ For class 257
A pn junction active solid­state device in which a forward bias voltage injects charge
carriers across the junction but prior to recombination of the carriers, a reverse voltage is
applied to return the charge carriers to their source as a group.
STEREOPTICON ­ For class 353
See Projector.
STEREOSCOPIC VISION ­ For class 351
The ability to perceive distance and the three dimensional properties of a viewed object.
STIFFENER ­ For class 052
Means embedded in cast material or extending between sustainers or load bearing
components which act to strengthen a construction in contradistinction to acting as a
primary load​
bearing or bend­resisting member.
STILL (VIDEO) ­ For class 725
A portion of motion video material consisting of a single field or frame of video data.
STIRRER ­ For class 366
A device which is movable by an applied force and which in its movement causes agitation
of material. The force may be applied manually, by movement of the material, by relative
motion of the chamber, or by a power source, either directly or through a drive train.
STIRRERS, PLURAL ­ For class 366
Two or more devices or elements which are movable bodily by an applied force and which
move bodily relative to each other an in such movement cause agitation of material.
Where a plurality of like or diverse stirrer elements are in fixed relation to each other and
move together as a unit they will be considered a single stirrer even if the elements are
adjustable relative to each other prior to agitation or are flexible so that portions thereof
move relative to each other during agitation.
STITCHING­ For class 412
The process of fastening together sheets(), signatures(*), or quires(*) at one edge thereof
to form a bound book(*). Usually this is done by sewing with needle and thread, but this
may be done by a similar fastening operation.
STOCK ­ For class 072
A piece or an indeterminate length of material from which a plurality of blanks* or
products* may be made (usually in linear sequence).
STOCK ­ For class 425
A material being worked on or treated by apparatus. Synonym: WORK
STOCK­MATERIAL ­ For class 428
A sheet*, web*, rod*, strand*, tube or block, mass or layer. (Structural)
STONE GATHERING ­ For class 171
Moving of small stones and rocks resting on the surface of the earth into piles, rows or
collection receptacles.
STOOL ­ For class 164
The separable base of an ingot mold. The base provides a surface onto which the mold is
placed, and also serves as the bottom of the mold.
STORAGE ­ For class 234
The temporary retention, in a portion of machine, of input data, after cessation of the
input­impulse* and before a corresponding initiation of tool selection*.
STORAGE ­ For class 369
Retention of information in a permanent or semipermanent form, or establishing such
retention.
STORAGE MEDIUM ­ For class 369
An object having a characteristic which is, or may be, modified at positional increments in
accordance with the time variation of information which is stored thereon.
STRAND ­ For class 112
A relatively slender and flexible element having a width and thickness of the same order
of magnitude and a length which is either (a) indeterminate or (b) coextensive with the
length or width of a sheet or layer. A strand may be a monofilament or it may include
either a plurality of filaments or fibers disposed in parallelism (e.g., tow) or constituent
fibers and/or filaments knitted, plaited, braided, twisted, interlaced, interlocked, or
otherwise secured together to form a unit such as roving, thread yarn, cord, rope or cable.
STRAND ­ For class 226
Material having a cross­section (transverse of the longitudinal* dimension) of substantially
similar width and depth dimensions (compare with Web). Exemplary strand materials are:
rod, tube, cordage (i.e., rope, cable, etc.) chain, filaments, yarn, wire.
STRAND ­ For class 428
A relatively slender and flexible element* having a width and thickness of the same order
of magnitude and a length which is either (a) indeterminate or (b) coextensive with the
length or width of a sheet* or layer* with which it may be associated. A strand may be a
monofilament or it may include either a plurality of filaments* or fibers* disposed in
parallelism (e.g., tow) or constituent fibers* and/or filaments* knitted, plaited, braided,
twisted, interlaced, interlocked or otherwise secured together to form a unit such as
roving, thread, yarn, cord, rope or cable. (Structural)
STRAND PORTION ­ For class 112
A strand of finite length; or an unsevered but determinate part of a strand.
STRAND­PORTION ­ For class 428
A strand* of finite length; or an unsevered but determinate length of a strand. (Structural)
STRAW ­ For class 460
The material usually consisting of grain stalks mixed with leaves and chaff that is left after
the threshing operation.
STRAW WALKER ­ For class 460
A mechanism that imparts a fluffing, pitching motion to the material other than grain
before it ​
gwalks​
h out of the rear of the combine.
STRESS RELIEVING OR STRESS RELIEF ANNEALING ­ For class 148
The heating of metal to a comparatively low temperature to relieve microstructural strain
induced by working.
STRIP ­ For class 112
A web or sheet of relatively narrow ribbon­like material. A strip which is interwoven or
intertangled with other strips or strands in the same manner as a strand will be termed a
gstrand­like strip​
​
h.
STRIP ­ For class 281
A sheet folded back and forth along at least two fold lines and unattached to anything or
attached to a backing either at the ends only or in such a way that the folded portions can
be successively released without mutilation, or it is a sheet rolled up. Also patents
claiming fold lines or other features for so folding or rolling up sheets are classified as
gstrips​
​
h.
STRIP ­ For class 283
A sheet folded back and forth along at least two fold lines and unattached to anything or
attached to a backing either at one or both ends only or in such a way that the folded
portions can be successively released without mutilation, or it is a sheet rolled up. Also
patents claiming fold lines or other features for so folding or rolling up sheets are
classified as ​
gstrips​
h.
STRIP ­ For class 428
A web* or sheet* or relatively narrow ribbon­like material. A strip which is interwoven or
intertangled with other strips or with strands, in the same manner as a strand, will be
termed a ​
gstrand­like strip​
h. (Structural)
STRIP ­ For class 462
A sheet* in the form of a roll or a sheet folded back and forth along at least two folded
lines.
STRIPPED of ORBITAL ELECTRONS ­ For class 376
See Fully Ionized.
STRIPPING LAYER ­ For class 430
A layer or layers which are part of a combination of plural layers which layer or layers are
strippable from a layer immediately adjacent to it or are capable of separating by internal
cohesive failure.
STRUCTURAL ­ For class 256
As used herein, this term applies to any relatively rigid slat or bar member used as an
element of a fence.
Structural gene ­ For class 800
Codes for any RNA or protein product other than a regulator.
STRUCTURALLY DEFINED ­ For class 430
Defined in terms of: (a) numerical or relative dimension; e.g., 5 microns thick, twice as
long as wide, etc. As applied to products or layers, it is the overall exterior dimension of
either the completed product or an individual layer; (b) plural, non­coextensive layers,
e.g., leader strip, etc., however, nonuniform or non­coextensive images are not
considered structure; (c) overall mechanical shape, except mere rectangular or planar,
e.g., roll of film sprocket holes, etc.
STRUCTURE ­ For class 330
Refers to any details of a circuit element as to the nature or composition of the material or
materials of which it is made, the form or shape of the element or its parts or the
relationship in space of such elements or parts or such characteristics of the elements
relative to each other.
STRUCTURE­TO­BE­SECURED­ For class 024
Structure having a principle function other than that normally associated with this class
(i.e., not a component of a Class 24 fastener) which is attached, fastened, gripped, or
secured by a Class 24 fastener, either to itself or to another structure.
STT ­ For class 438
stacked transistor capacitor cell
STYLESHEET ­ For class 715
A file of DISPLAY ATTRIBUTES* to be applied to a document.
SUBATOMIC PARTICLES ­ For class 376
All particles of less than atomic mass, i.e., the elementary particles (proton, neutron,
electron, positron, neutrino, meson, etc.) as well as the alpha particles and deutrons, the
charge and mass of which indicates them to be composite particles.
SUBCRITICAL (FISSION) REACTOR ­ For class 376
For the purpose of this class, is a reactor which has (a) an active volume (core) containing
less than the necessary amount of fissionable material (fuel) to become critical, and (b) an
auxiliary neutron source combined therewith in such a way as to trigger fissioning with the
active volume and with proper amplification of neutrons whereby a steady state chain
reaction results, i.e., it becomes critical.
SUBHET ­ For class 438
superconducting base hot electron transistor
SUBLIMATION ­ For class 201
A process in which a solid passes into the vapor state without liquefaction and the vapor
returns to the solid state without passing through the liquid phase.
SUBLIMATION ­ For class 202
A process in which a solid passes into the vapor state without liquefaction and the vapor
returns to the solid state without passing through the liquid phase.
SUBLIMATION ­ For class 203
A process in which a solid passes into the vapor state without liquefaction and the vapor
returns to the solid state without passing through the liquid phase.
SUB­MASTER­KEY ­ For class 070
One designed for control of all of a limited number of a plurality or series of lock operating
mechanisms and subordinate to a master key.
SUBSCRIBER ­ For class 379
Telephone circuitry or instruments at subscriber location.
SUBSCRIBER ­ For class 379
Telephone user or service location.
SUBSCRIBER ­ For class 725
One who uses a communication or signaling service. Equipment is typically installed at a
subscriber s premises to enable the reception, and perhaps the transmission, of
communication signals.
SUBSIT ­ For class 438
superconducting base semiconductor isolated transistor
SUBSTANCE ­ For class 516
A substance is a chemical compound or element. Substance is characterized as being
homogeneous, particulary down to the molecular level. See The Condensed Chemical
Dictionary, (tenth edition, 1981) Van Nostrand Reinhold Company Inc. CF. material*. Note:
this definition may not be followed in other Classes; often the term is used loosely as a
synonym to material*.
SUBSTRATE ­ For class 008
The term substrate is used here to refer to the base material being dyed.
SUBSTRATE ­ For class 117
The surface upon which a coating is formed. In the case of single­crystal* growth, such as
epitaxy*, the substrate is also a seed*. Contrast with base*.
SUBSTRATE ­ For class 216
The entire article or workpiece contacted by the chemical reagent, except for materials
which have been applied to an article or workpiece for the sole expressed purpose of
protecting at least a portion thereof from the action of the chemical material, i.e., a resist.
SUBSTRATE ­ For class 257
The supporting material on or in which the components of an integrated circuit are
fabricated or attached.
SUBSTRATE ­ For class 425
A workpiece to which a layer or coating of material is applied. Synonym: BASE
SUBSTRATE ­ For class 428
See Base*. (Structural)
SUBSTRATE ­ For class 438
A. A base upon which a coating is formed. See the class definition for the requirements for
coating, per se, or etching, per se, when a base of semiconductor or containing a
semiconductive region is the substrate. B. The supporting material on or in which the
components of an integrated circuit are fabricated or attached.
SUBSTRATE BIAS ­ For class 257
The electric potential applied to a substrate, which typically serves as the reference
potential against which other voltages are measured. Also, in a MISFET, a voltage applied
to the substrate with respect to the source region.
SUBSTRATE­ For class 349
For the purpose of this class, substrate is a flexible or rigid member which provides
structural support in a cell.
SUBTRACTIVE COLOR ­ For class 430
A color (cyan, magenta, and yellow) which when combined with another subtractive color
produces an additive color (red, green, blue).
SULFOXY ­ For class 260
Denotes the presence of a radical containing sulfur bonded to oxygen and includes the
sulfoxide, sulfone, sulfonyl, sulfo, and sulfate groups.
SULFOXY ­ For class 510
Denotes a substituent having at least one oxygen atom double bonded to a tetravalent or
hexavalent sulfur atom.
SULFOXY ­ For class 516
A radical containing a Sulfur­oxygen double bond. Examples of sulfoxy containing
compounds include; sulfate, sulfonate, and sulfone compounds.
SULFUR DYE ­ For class 008
Sulfur dyes contain sulfur linkages within their molecules which are produced by
sulfurization, i.e., heating of organic compounds with sulfur or alkali polysulfides.
SUN GEAR ­ For class 475
A gear mounted for rotation about the same axis as the rotational axis of a planet carrier*
and having a drive face contacting a drive face of a planet pinion* between the axis of the
planet pinion and the axis of the planet carrier.
SUPERCONDUCTING ­ For class 505
The state of a superconductor in which it exhibits superconductivity.
SUPERCONDUCTIVE ­ For class 505
of or pertaining to a material or device which is capable of exhibiting superconductivity.
SUPERCONDUCTIVITY ­ For class 505
A property of a material that is characterized by zero electrical resistivity and, ideally,
zero permeability.
SUPERLATTICE ­ For class 117
A single­crystal*, usually composed of a semiconductor, having an internal structure of
more than two layers, each layer having a composition different from the next adjacent
layer. The term includes alternating layers of two compositions.
SUPERLATTICE ­ For class 257
A periodic sequence of variations in carrier potential energy in a semiconductor, of such
magnitude and spacing that the current carrier wave function is spread out over many
periods, so that carrier energy and other properties are determined in part by the periodic
variations. The variation may be in chemical composition of the material, as in a sequence
of heterojunctions, or in impurity concentration, forming a doping superlattice, or both.
SUPERLATTICE ­ For class 438
A periodic sequence of variations in carrier potential energy in a semiconductor, of such
magnitude and spacing that the current carrier wave function is spread out over many
periods, so that carrier energy and other properties are determined in part by the periodic
variations. The variation may be in chemical composition of the material, as in a sequence
of heterojunctions, or in impurity concentration, forming a doping superlattice, or both.
SUPPLY HOLDER ­ For class 239
A receptacle, container, or the like for retaining material to be sprayed with or without
additional mixing with or entrainment in a fluid; a vessel or retainer other than a flowing
stream or flow line.
SUPPLY MEANS ­ For class 141
The contents material confining means of the dispenser.
SUPPLY­MEANS ­ For class 401
A reservoir or a feeder for fluent coating material.
SUPPORT ­ For class 258
As herein used, this term designates the device or element from which the load is
delivered. Note. Either ​
greceiver​
h or ​
gsupport​
h may be mounted on the ground or on the
vehicle.
SUPPORT ­ For class 401
All the parts of an implement, collectively, which retain the piece. It may be a holder# or
it may include a carrier,# or follower, and a guide# as well as a housing for enclosing the
entire organization of parts.
SUPPORT ­ For class 416
A structure which bears the weight of an impeller* to maintain it in operative position. The
support does not partake of the working motion of the impeller (in this respect the support
is different from the carrier*) but may be adjustable to various positions of use or have
movement concurrent with the impeller movement as that of a rotatable or oscillating fan
support.
SUPPORT­CLAMP­ For class 024
A securing mechanism or element which (1) is attached to the structure­to­be­securedfor
subsequently mounting it on a rigid* or semirigid* member (e.g., wall, floor, roof) or
article (e.g., pen, vehicle) having an additional and usually principal function other than
normally associated with this class, and (2) having either (a) a gripping surface which is
mounted to and intended to coact with an opposed gripping surface formed by the
structure­to­be­secured* to engage the opposite sides of the rigid or semirigid member or
article positioned therebetween, or (b) two coacting members or member segments having
gripping surfaces which engage opposite sides of the rigid* or semirigid* member or
article in a jawlike manner, and (3) having structure which hinders the movement of the
gripping surfaces relative to the member or article and prevents the separation of the
structure­to­be­secured* from the member or article. The gripping surfaces of the
securing mechanism or element are intended to be always easily moved into and out of
engagement with the rigid* or semirigid* member or article by either direct manual or
tool force thereon or actuation of an operator* attached to the securing mechanism or
element. In addition, the gripping surfaces of the securing mechanism or element, when
engaging with or disengaging from the rigid* or semirigid* member or article, do not
exceed the elastic limit of or destroy any portion of the securing mechanism or element. If
the mechanism or element is formed from either a single piece or plural fixedly attached
pieces of rigid* material, then the structural shape of the gripping surfaces and the
outward force of the compressed structure­to­be­secured* provides the gripping force
required above.
SURFACE ACTIVE AGENT­ For class 516
A compound which reduces the surface tension of a liquid when dissolved therein or
reduces the interfacial tension between two liquids. A surface active agent* compound is
typically characterized by at least one hydrophobic portion and at least one hydrophilic
portion. Also referred to as surfactant.
SURFACE DEFORMATION ­ For class 065
A reshaping operation involving only the surface of the glass preform and only partially
through the thickness and wherein the overall shape of the preform throughout its breadth
and width is unaltered.
SURFACE DEFORMATION ­ For class 425
A reshaping operation involving only a surface of a preform, i.e., partially through the
thickness of a layer.
SURFACE MOUNT DEVICES ­ For class 257
Active or passive solid­state devices which are structured and configured to be mounted
directly to a printed circuit board surface. This type of mounting is distinguished from
gthrough­hole​
​
h mounting which involves the electrical and physical connection of devices
to a printed circuit board using drilled and plated holes through the conductive pattern of
the board.
SURFACE MOUNT DEVICES ­ For class 438
Active or passive solid­state devices which are structured and configured to be mounted
directly to a printed circuit board surface. This type of mounting is distinguished from
gthrough­hole​
​
h mounting which involves the electrical and physical connection of devices
to a printed circuit board using drilled and plated holes through the conductive pattern of
the board.
SURFACE RESISTIVITY ­ For class 257
The resistance of a material between two opposite sides of a unit square of its surface.
Also called Sheet Resistance. Measured in ohms, often written as ​
gohms per square​
h in
this case.
SURFACE RESISTIVITY ­ For class 438
The resistance of a material between two opposite sides of a unit square of its surface.
Also called Sheet Resistance. Measured in ohms, often written as ​
gohms per square​
h in
this case.
SURFACE TENSION ­ For class 516
The force exerted at an interface by the molecules below the interface. For example, in a
gas­liquid interface, the surface tension is due to the high concentration of the liquid
molecules relative to the lower concentration of the gas molecules. The strength depends
on the characteristics of the liquid, and to a lessor extent, the gas.
SURFACE­ACTIVE AGENT (Surfactant) ­ For class 510
Denotes an organic compound which alters (usually reduces) the surface tension of a
liquid, thus facilitating cleaning. Surface­active agents are commonly referred to as
surfactants, emulsifiers, wetting agents, or simply detergents, as distinct from detergent
compositions which include additional components, such as detergency builders or other
cleaning auxiliaries. A surfactant molecule contains a hydrophobic (water­repelling) portion
which is frequently an alkyl radical having a straight chain of eight or more carbons, and a
hydrophilic (water­attracting) portion. For purposes of this class, the broad categories of
surfactants are based on the nature of the hydrophilic portion of the molecule. Note. An
anionic (anion­active) surfactant, referred to in the schedule as ​
ganionically substituted,​
h
includes a hydrophilic portion which is most commonly a water­soluble salt of a carboxylic
or sulfonic acid, or of a long­chain alcohol ester of sulfuric, phosphoric, or phosphonic acid
(e.g., sodium higher alkyl sulfonate, etc.). Note. A cationic (cation­active) surfactant
includes a hydrophilic portion which is a cation (i.e., positively charged ion), such as an
ammonium or quaternary ammonium salt, having a long­chain alkyl substituent (e.g.,
higher­alkyl quaternary ammonium salts, etc.). Note. A nonionic surfactant includes a
hydrophilic portion which commonly is a poly(ethylene oxide) moiety (i.e., polyether
chain) attached to a hydrophobic portion which may be nonpolar or have a lower degree of
polarity than the hydrophilic part, such as poly(propylene oxide), higher alkyl, etc. Note. A
zwitterionic, amphoteric, or ampholytic surfactant includes both an anionic and a cationic
portion connected by a covalent bond, usually indirect (e.g., betaines, amino acids, etc.).
Note. Semipolar nonionic surfactants include water­soluble amine and phosphine oxides
and sulfoxides. Note. Soap, for purposes of this class, is an alkali metal, ammonium or
organic base salt of an unsubstituted or hydroxy­substituted, saturated or unsaturated
higher fatty acid, or of rosin (abietic) acid, or of mixtures of any of these acids. These
salts are water­soluble and are considered to be anionic surfactants.
SURFACE­CHANNEL CCD ­ For class 257
A charge coupled device in which charge resides at the semiconductor surface.
SURFACTANT ­ For class 516
See surface active agent*.
SUSPENSION ­ For class 210
Liquid carrying throughout its volume in extremely fine subdivision an insoluble substance
(solid or another liquid) which will not settle under gravity nor can be filtered without
special treatment such as addition of chemical agents. A DISPERSION. See FLOCCULATION,
GEL, and MEMBRANE.
SUSTAINER ­ For class 052
A rigid member or construction having a limited closed periphery which is (1) greatly
elongated relative to any lateral dimension (2) resists transverse loading and (3) supports
or retains other components of a building construction, e.g., stud, joist, beam, or column.
SUSTAINER ­ For class 249
A rigid member or construction having a limited closed periphery which is (1) greatly
elongated relative to any lateral dimension (2) resists transverse loading and (3) supports
or retains other components of a building construction; e.g., joist, beam or column.
SWAMI ­ For class 438
sidewall masked isolation
SWEEP ­ For class 164
A small section of a regular pattern which is generally rotated in sand to provide the whole
mold cavity.
SWEEPING ­ For class 343
Moving the antenna beam repeatedly along a single line (which may be straight or curved)
in space.
SWINGING MOVEMENT OF CLOSURE: ­ For class 049
A turning motion about a pivot to open or close a passage.
SWITCH ­ For class 330
A device or means for opening or closing an electric circuit.
SWITCH ­ For class 725
To establish communication channels among two or more switch interfaces at customers
demand.
SWNT (SINGLE­WALLED NANOTUBE) ­ For class 977
Formed from one layer of graphene wrapped in cylindrical form.
SYMBOL ­ For class 347
A mark* which conveys intelligent information. Unless otherwise indicated, ​
gmark​
h and
gsymbol​
​
h are used synonymously in the subclass definitions of this class.
SYNC PULSE ­ For class 725
In television, signals employed for synchronizing scanning that occur at rates related to
the line and field frequencies. In a television receiver, sync pulses are used to synchronize
the deflection generators.
SYNCHRONIZATION ­ For class 709
Matching of timing between separate computers or among the components of a system so
that all are coordinated.
SYNCHRONIZATION ­ For class 718
Matching of timing between separate computers or among the components of a system so
that all are coordinated.
SYNCHRONIZATION ­ For class 719
Matching of timing between separate computers or among the components of a system so
that all are coordinated.
SYNCHRONOUS MOTOR ­ For class 318
An alternating­current or a pulsating current motor which, under running­speed conditions,
operates at an average speed which is always exactly proportional to the frequency or
periodicity of the source which supplies electric energy to the armature or primary circuit
of the motor and which speed is independent of the voltage of the source, the magnitude
of the field excitation, or the load on the motor.
SYNERESIS ­ For class 516
The contraction of a gel* composition on standing, accompanied by the exudation of liquid.
SYNONYMS ­ For class 075
See the beginning of the Glossary section for a list of synonyms of names of metal
elements used in this class (mostly obsolete).
SYNTHESIS ­ For class 204
For purposes of this class, ​
gsynthesis​
h includes the production of a desired element or
compound by breaking down from complex forms to simpler ones as well as the building
up of complex forms from simpler ones.
SYNTHETIC ­ For class 210
A material not found in nature, but man­made from chemical building blocks, with
properties resembling naturally occurring materials. It does not include man­made
duplicates of natural material or chemical modified natural materials. For example,
regenerated cellulose and cellulose acetate are not included nor is zein, but polyester,
vinyl, and nylon are included.
SYSTEM ­ For class 137
A term applied to any apparatus of the class which comprises more than a single flow path
and/or a single valve unit. It may include only an unvalved branched flow path or a single
flow path having two or more valve units. In some instances subcombinations or elements
having special utility in the combination and having no other classification have been
included in the group of subclasses pertaining to the system, as subclasses 777­802,
Expansible Chamber Devices.
SYSTEM ­ For class 141
The combination of dispenser and receiver in flow exchange relation with any or all
appurtenances thereof.
SYSTEM ­ For class 902
A plurality of electronic devices (components*) functionally integrated to process data in
order to perform a transaction*.
T erminator ­ For class 800
A sequence of DNA, located at the end of the transcript, that causes RNA polymerase to
terminate transcription.
T ransposon ­ For class 800
Mobile genetic element that can change its position within or between cellular genomes.
TAB ­ For class 400
A tab is an abbreviated form of the term ​
gtabular​
h, which term refers to a columnar
arrangement of character* symbols on a page* of text. A ​
gcolumn​
h of text is formed by
imprinting a particular symbol on one print­line* and subsequently imprinting the same or
another particular symbol on another print­line directly below the first print­line (i.e.,
equally spaced from one of the side edges of the record­medium*), and repeating the
typing until a plurality of print­lines have been formed, all of which are in vertical array.
The particular symbol may be the first letter of the first word* in each of the successively
imprinted print­lines, and two or more columns are usually arranged in such a ​
gcolumn­
set​
h arrangement, each of the columns being arrayed at a preset distance from an edge of
the record­medium. The particular symbol may be the decimal point or the ​
gunits​
h digit of
a set of numeral digits representing a number; this arrangement is termed
gdenominational​
​
h. The terms ​
gcolumn​
h and ​
gtabular​
h are also discussed in (1) Note and
(2) Note to subclass 284, the term ​
gdenominational​
h is also discussed in (1) Note to
subclass 285, and the term column set is discussed in (3) Note to subclass 284 and defined
in subclass 285.1. It should also be noted that, in some disclosures, the term ​
gtab​
h has
been used as an abbreviation of an element which is better known as a ​
gtab­stop​
h element
and is discussed in this Glossary under tab­rack*.
TAB ­ For class 438
tape automated bonding
TAB­RACK ­ For class 400
A component of the carriage* mechanism that causes stopping of the carriage in any of
selected tabular (see tab* in this Glossary) positions. A tab­rack is an elongated member
extending parallel to the direction of carriage movement and having a length substantially
the same as the extent of carriage movement. On the tab­rack a plurality of ​
gtab­stop​
h
elements are mounted, each of said elements being movable transversely of the length of
the tab­rack form a ​
gclear​
h position at which the element is passive to a ​
gset​
h position at
which the element is able to cooperate with a ​
gcounter­stop​
h element. In operation,
relative movement between the tab­rack and the counter stop is effected in the lengthwise
direction of the tab­rack until a set tab stop abuts against the counter stop. Usually the
tab­rack is connected to the carriage and its tab stop abuts a stationary counter stop,
thereby stopping the carriage. The same result may be achieved by mounting the counter
stop on the carriage and abutting the counter stop against a set tab stop on a stationary
tab­rack, thereby stopping the carriage. A plurality of counter stops may be provided, one
of which counter stops may be set to stop the carriage in a preset column or
denominational position. A typewriter capable of tabular operation is provided with at least
three key* elements for regulating the operation. One of the keys, labelled ​
gset​
h (or a
variant thereof) is depressed by the typist to move a selected tab­stop element from its
passive position to its set position on the tab­rack. Another key, labelled ​
gtab​
h (or a
variant thereof), or unlabeled but having a distinctive shape, is depressed by the typist to
concurrently (a) release the carriage from its normal carriage­feed mechanism to enable
unrestrained movement of the carriage, and (b) set a counter stop into a position where it
will abut against the set tab stop when the counter stop and tab stop engage one another,
whereby the movement of the carriage will be stopped in the tabular position. A third key,
labelled ​
gclear​
h (or a variant thereof), is depressed by the typist to move any of the
previously set tab stops back to its passive position on the type­rack.
TAILINGS ­ For class 460
The material consisting of unthreshed heads and all trash that is too coarse to fall through
the sieves. Unthreshed heads are sometimes returned to the threshing section for second
threshing.
TALL OIL ­ For class 516
A mixture of rosin* acids (35­40%) and fatty acids (50­60%) and other remnants of
derivation. Obtained from the spent black liquor (alkaline) of the pulping (digesting)
process of pine wood (sulfate or kraft paper processes) by concentrating until the sodium
salts of the various acids separate, followed by acidification (e.g., by sulfuric acid). See
section LINES WITH OTHER CLASSES AND WITHIN THIS CLASS, subsection Glossary
References, for additional information concerning this definition.
TAMP ­ For class 425
To compact by a series of blows and thereby eliminate air pockets or other voids.
TAP ­ For class 725
In broadband networks, a passive device in the feeder system that provides a connection
between the drop cable and the feeder. The tap is the principle means of access to the
cable system by the user. It removes a portion of the signal power from the distribution
line and delivers it to the drop line. The amount of power tapped off the main line depends
on the input power to the tap and the attenuation value of the tap. Only the information
signal (and not 60 Hz power) goes to the outlet ports.
TAPERED LONG LINE ­ For class 333
A long line having a physical dimension which changes progressively in the direction of
wave propagation along the line.
TARGET ­ For class 313
In an X­ray tube, cathode­ray tube, or other beam type discharge device, the anode or the
member against which the principal electron or ion stream impinges. See the definition of
anode above.
TARGET ­ For class 376
The substance which is subjected bombardment by particles of photons of high energy in
order to produce nuclear reactions therein.
TASK ­ For class 709
A standalone application or a subprogram that is run as an independent entity.
TASK ­ For class 718
A standalone application or a subprogram that is run as an independent entity.
TASK ­ For class 719
A standalone application or a subprogram that is run as an independent entity.
TAT ­ For class 438
turn around time
TBCO ­ For class 438
thallium bismuth copper oxide (a HTSC)
TBES ­ For class 438
tritertiarybutoxyethoxysilane
TCE ­ For class 438
trichloroethylene
TCM ­ For class 438
thermal conduction module
TCO ­ For class 438
transparent conductive oxide
TDDB ­ For class 438
time dependent dielectric breakdown
TEAR TAB ­ For class 413
The metal torn when the pull tab is activated.
TEC ­ For class 438
thermoelectric cooler
TED ­ For class 438
transient enhanced diffusion
TEEMING ­ For class 164
Pouring metal into a mold.
TEEMING ­ For class 425
See Casting.
TEG ­ For class 438
(a) triethylgallium or (b) test element group
TELECOMMUNICATIONS ­ For class 455
All types of communications systems in which electric or electromagnetic signals are used
to transmit modulated carrier wave information between points. The transmission media is
via radio wave generally of a frequency above human speech, yet at a frequency lower
than infrared frequencies. Radiotelephonic communication via wireless link is included in
this class.
TELEDYNAMICS ­ For class 342
The transmission of signal energy for the control of apparatus or mechanisms, at a
distance.
TELEGRAPHY ­ For class 342
The transmission to a distance of signals, unlimited with respect to the extent of the
message communicated, by the utilization of energy, the elements of the message being
selected or composed at will according to a prearranged code.
TELEGRAPHY ­ For class 343
The transmission to a distance of signals, unlimited with respect to the extent of the
message communicated, by the utilization of energy, the elements of the message being
selected or composed at will according to a prearranged code.
TELEPHONE ­ For class 379
An instrument, known as a user terminal set, containing an audio reproducer, and a
speech­to­electricity transducer. An obsolete usage of this term (telephone) is broad
enough to include a microphone or reproducer; however, a microphone or reproducer, per
se, is classified in Class 381.
TELEPHONY ­ For class 342
The conversion of spoken or sound waves into energy which is transmitted a distance and
reconverted into sound waves for reproduction of the speech or sounds.
TELEPHONY ­ For class 343
The conversion of spoken or sound waves into energy which is transmitted a distance and
reconverted into sound waves for reproduction of the speech or sounds.
TELETEXT ­ For class 725
A form of videotex that allows users to receive textual or pictorial material via broadcast
signals interpreted by a spatial decoder attached to a television set. Contrast: Viewdata.
TEM ­ For class 438
transmission electron spectroscopy
TEMPER ­ For class 065
See Subclass References to the Current Class, above, for a subclass reference to the term
gtemper.​
​
h
TEMPERATURE ­ For class 374
A quantitative measure of the ability of a substance to transmit or receive heat energy.
TEMPERING ­ For class 148
Involves the heating of previously quenched or normalized metal alloy to an elevated
temperature, and then cooling under suitable conditions to obtain the desired mechanical
properties.
TEMPLATE ­ For class 425
A pattern used as a guide to the form of a piece being made.
TEMPLES ­ For class 351
The parts of a spectacle which are secured to the end of lenses or the frame and maintain
the glasses on the user"s head.
TEMPORAL CONTENT ­ For class 348
The content of the image is changed with respect to time.
TENDON ­ For class 052
A tensioned strandlike component of a unit which places the principal part of the unit under
compression.
TENSIDE ­ For class 516
A term widely employed in Europe which means surface active agents*.
TEOS ­ For class 438
tetraethylorthosilane
TERMINAL ­ For class 338
One of the resistance terminals unless otherwise indicated.
TERMINAL ­ For class 406
Structure at or adjacent the outlet or inlet of a fluid current conveyor for either (a)
effecting intake or discharge or load articles individually into or from the conveyor, or (b)
for accepting load articles as they are discharged individually from the conveyor.
TERMINAL ­ For class 902
A component* of a system* designed for interaction with a user*, having both input means
for receiving data from the user and output means for transmitting data to the user. A
terminal is often combined with one or more peripheral* devices to form a structural unit.
TERMINAL: ­ For class 029
An electrically conductive connective means having a portion or end designed for relatively
permanent attachment to an elongated conductor and having a second portion or end
designed to facilitate connection with another elongated conductor, an electrical
component, or another electrically conductive connective means.
TERMINAL IMAGE ­ For class 359
The last image formed by a compound system.
TERNARY COMPOUND ­ For class 423
A chemical compound consisting of 3 elements only, such as NaOH, H2SO4, KCN, etc.
TERPENE OILS ­ For class 516
C10H16. Unsaturated hydrocarbon based upon isoprene unit (C5H8), acyclic or cyclic, with
or without benzene moiety. Dipentene is monocyclic, pinene is dicyclic, and myrcene is
acyclic. Being non­glyceride oils, they are not saponifiable. Examples include tall and pine
oils. Cf. oil, essential oil, glyceride.
TEST MEDIA ­ For class 435
Distinguished from (propagation) media by the presence of an indicator, e.g.,
chromophore, etc.
TEST PROBES ­ For class 257
Mechanical points of contact used for electrical measurement.
TEXT ­ For class 715
DATA* including ALPHANUMERIC* characters representing words and symbols. Usually text
characters are coded using a standard such as ASCII, which assigns numeric values to
each character, number, or symbol.
TEXTILE ­ For class 428
A fabric* which, for purposes of the class is considered to be cloth*. See Class 442, class
definition. (Structural)
TEXTILE MATERIAL ­ For class 008
As employed in this classification is limited to organic fibrous and filamentous materials,
and mixed materials including same as a definite component part thereof and not in the
popular sense to include all materials, e.g., it does not include asbestos and glass fibers
adapted to be felted, woven or knitted not glass fiber fabric. In the dyeing subclasses
(400­696) paper has been grouped with the textile materials.
TFR ­ For class 438
thin film resistor
TFT ­ For class 438
thin film transistor
TGZM ­ For class 438
temperature gradient zone melting
TH ­ For class 438
through­hole
THEME ­ For class 725
A subject or topic of artistic representation.
THERMAL ­ For class 374
Related to heat or temperature.
THERMAL CHARACTERISTIC ­ For class 374
A property of matter related to heat or temperature.
THERMAL MEASUREMENT OR TEST ­ For class 374
A determination of a thermal quantity, or a determination of a quantity made under a
controlled thermal condition.
THERMAL NEUTRONS ­ For class 376
As the energy of any substance has a temperature factor, that of the prevailing
temperature is termed thermal energy, and when neutrons reach equilibrium with the
moderator they are called thermal neutrons. Their most probable energy is about 0.025
ev; or the speed of a gas molecule at room temperature. It is this type of neutron that can
best enter the nucleus of a fissionable atom and remain there long enough to excite the
atom to the breaking point, attaining fission. Two other categories of neutrons are
intermediate and fast. Fast neutrons are those resulting from fission that have lost
relatively little of their energy by collision, etc.; having energies exceeding 0.1 Mev.
Intermediate neutrons have energies lying between thermal and fast neutrons.
THERMAL PARAMETER ­ For class 374
Heat, temperature, or a thermodynamic quantity related thereto.
THERMALLY RESPONSIVE IMPEDANCE ­ For class 330
An impedance element whose impedance value is responsive to the temperature changes
therein by reason of the heat generated by the current flow therethrough, or the ambient
temperature of the impedance element, or whose impedance value may be changed by
separate electrical control means or other heat control means.
THERMIC COMPONENT: ­ For class 149
(See explosive component) is similar to an explosive component as defined above except
that the component may not react quite with the speed or power of an explosive and
includes such compositions or components thereof as ​
gThermite​
h, pyrotechnic, incendiary,
fuse, match, smoke, or those compositions or components thereof which react or are
capable of reacting to yield usable quantities of heat with or without desired chemical
products.
THERMIONIC CATHODE ­ For class 313
A cathode designed to operate at an elevated temperature. The expression, ​
gthermionic
cathode​
h includes directly heated cathodes, indirectly heated cathodes, and also cathodes
which are designed to be heated by ionic bombardment to the electron emitting
temperature.
THERMISTOR ­ For class 257
A semiconductor device whose electrical resistance varies with temperature. Its
temperature coefficient of resistance is high, nonlinear, and usually negative.
THERMISTOR ­ For class 438
A thermoelectric device whose electrical resistance varies with temperature. Its
temperature coefficient of resistance is high, nonlinear, and usually negative.
THERMOLYTIC DISTILLATION ­ For class 201
A distillation in which material found in the distilland undergoes chemical decomposition
(thermolysis) to form different substances at least some of which are volatile at the
temperature employed. The volatile substances are recovered by condensation or sorption.
THERMOLYTIC DISTILLATION ­ For class 203
A distillation in which material found in the distilland undergoes chemical decomposition
(thermolysis) to form different substances at least some of which are volatile at the
temperature employed. The volatile substances are recovered by condensation or sorption.
THERMONUCLEAR (FUSION) REACTORS ­ For class 376
Apparatus in which fusion reactions occur primarily as the result of random collisions
within the apparatus between gas particles having a Maxwellian distribution of velocities
about some average temperature. It is implied that such reactions are not the result of
accelerating one particle into another. While it is also implied that a high average gas
temperature is sought for to attain a high thermonuclear reaction rate, nothing is implied
as to the attainment of any minimum temperature.
THERMONUCLEAR FUEL ­ For class 376
See Nuclear Fuel.
THICK­FILM DEVICES ­ For class 257
Printed thin­film circuits. Silk screen printing techniques are used to make the desired
circuit patterns on a ceramic substrate. Active devices may be added thereto as separate
devices (see HYBRID CIRCUIT).
THICK­FILM DEVICES ­ For class 438
Printed thin­film circuits. Silk screen printing techniques are used to make the desired
circuit patterns on a ceramic substrate. Active devices may be added thereto as separate
devices (see HYBRID CIRCUIT).
THIN FILM ­ For class 372
A film of optically transparent material, usually deposited by sputtering or evaporation,
that may be made in a pattern on a substrate or used as insulation between successive
layers of components, and generally on the order of a few wavelengths thick.
THIN FILM WAVEGUIDE ­ For class 372
A thin dielectric guide film of high refractive index formed adjacent to a substrate or
support region of lower refractive index. The thin film relies upon modal transmission to
transmit light along its length. Light enters one end of the thin film where it is processed
(e.g., modulated or switched) and emerges from the opposite end.
THIN­FILM ­ For class 438
A material on a substrate with a thickness not greater than 10 microns and uniformity
within 20% of it"s average value (Grant and Hackh"s Chemical Dictionary, 5th Edition,
edited by Roger & Claire Grant, McGraw­Hill, Inc., 1987, page 235).
THIN­FILM DEVICES ­ For class 257
solid­state electronic devices which are constructed by depositing films of conducting
material on the surface of electrically insulating bases.
THIN­FILM DEVICES ­ For class 438
Solid­state electronic devices which are constructed by depositing films of conducting
material on the surface of electrically insulating bases.
THIXOTROPIC ­ For class 516
The property of materials, such as some gels*, to liquefy when subjected to shear, such as
by agitation or other mechanical energy and to return to gel* upon rest. CF. dilatancy*.
THREAD ­ For class 709
A path of processing execution within a larger process or program.
THREAD ­ For class 718
A path of processing execution within a larger process or program.
THREAD ­ For class 719
A path of processing execution within a larger process or program.
THREE OR MORE ELECTRODE DISCHARGE DEVICES ­ For class 313
Any discharge device having three or more electrodes whether all of the electrodes have
lead­wires for connection to the supply circuit or not. In some of the three or more
electrode discharge devices, the electrodes are arranged with one or more electrodes
disposed in the interelectrode space or in the discharge path between two other
electrodes, and have only the outer electrodes provided with lead­wires for connecting to
the supply circuit, the discharge passing from the outer electrodes to the interposed
electrode so that the discharge device has a plurality of series connected discharge
spaces.
THREE OR MORE TERMINAL SEMICONDUCTIVE DEVICES ­ For class 323
A transistor, semiconductor­controlled rectifier or other such controllable solid­state
device.
THRESHED ­ For class 460
The operation in which the grain is removed from the straw, the seed is removed from the
seed head, the kernel is removed from the corn cob, or the bean is removed from the pod
by a cylinder or rotor usually working against a curved, grated concave.
THRESHOLD VOLTAGE ­ For class 257
The voltage at which a pn junction begins to conduct current.
THROUGH­FLOW OR SERIES CONNECTED TYPE ­ For class 239
A species of terminal member but of special merit and therefore placed above in the order
of superiority comprising a plurality of terminal outlet members connected end­to­end so
that fluid may flow through them successively or a coupling member having a side outlet
means supporting and communicating with an adjacent terminal outlet means in addition to
a downstream fluid connection. At this level the terminal member itself will comprise
lesser fluid elements. The series connected is regarded at a level above mere individual
outlets, nozzles, or unitary plural outlet means.
THROUGH­HOLE MOUNTING ­ For class 257
The electrical and physical connection of components to the surface of a conductive pattern
using drilled and plated holes through the conductive and insulating layers of a printed
circuit board.
THYRISTOR ­ For class 257
A four layer p­n­p­n bistable switching device that changes from an off or blocking state to
an on or conducting state which uses both electron and hole type carrier transport.
THYRISTOR ­ For class 363
A bistable device comprising three or more junctions. At least one of the junctions can
switch between reverse and forward­voltage polarity within a single quadrant of the
anode­to­cathode voltage­current characteristics. Used in a generic sense to include silicon
controlled rectifiers and gate­control switches as well as multilayer two­ terminal devices.
THYRISTOR ­ For class 438
A four layer p­n­p­n bistable switching device that changes from an off or blocking state to
an on or conducting state which uses both electron and hole­type carrier transport.
TIBA ­ For class 438
triisobutylaluminum
TIE PIECE ­ For class 410
The anchor part which directly engages the end of a flaccid material member to secure
that end at an anchor location whereby to define the point from which the member
diverges from the freight carrier surface. The term is used in the context of bi­partite
construction in that the tie piece is an add­on (e.g., welded on) part, the other part of the
anchor being the mounting for freight carrier attachment. Commonly, the mounting is a
one­piece member shaped or otherwise so constructed or arranged on a freight carrier as
to define an array of anchor locations, at one or more of which the add­on tie piece is
attached. See Subclass References To The Current Class, above.
TIEDOWN ­ For class 410
A load lashing retainer which diverges from the freight carrier surface whereat it is
attached and extends and terminates at the point or localized area of attachment to the
load units.
TIER­ For class 414
A column of articles, a single article wide, located within a wider stack* and extending in a
vertical direction relative to the support surface of the stack*.
TILE ­ For class 052
A thin, relatively rigid module which when applied repetitiously in edge­to­edge
relationship to a backing surface forms an exposed facing
TISSUE ­ For class 426
Material containing a certain amount of the original animal or plant as against an extract
which is considered to be devoid of original cellular structure. Included within the term are
materials which are chopped, cut, comminuted, pulverized, milled, slice, etc.
TLTR ­ For class 438
transmission line tap resistor (test structure)
TMA ­ For class 438
(a) trimethylaluminum or (b) trimethylantimony
TMAH ­ For class 438
tetramethyl ammoniumhydroxide
TMAT ­ For class 438
tetramethylamidotitanium
TMB ­ For class 438
tetramethylborate
TMCTS ­ For class 438
tetramethylcyclotetrasiloxane
TMG ­ For class 438
trimethylgallium
TMOS ­ For class 438
tetramethyloxysilane
TMP ­ For class 438
trimethylphosphine
TMS ­ For class 438
tetramethylsilane
TMT ­ For class 438
tetramethyltin
TOFER ­ For class 438
topos:graphic feature enhancement by RIE
TOGGLE ­ For class 269
A linkage including at least two links, pitmans, bars or struts, and at least three pivots, the
end of one link being connected to the end of the other link by a pivot common to both
links, each of said links also having a pivot at the end remote from the common pivot,
which common or intermediate pivot is movable from a position not in a straight line with
the other two pivots, to a position substantially in line by a force applied to the
intermediate pivot in a direction substantially normal to one of the links, thereby moving
at least one of the two pivots away from the other. At least one of said links is articulated
at both ends and is not integral with either a jaw or handle.
TOGGLE JOINT OR TOGGLE ­ For class 081
A linkage including at least two links, pitmans, bars or struts, and at least three pivots, the
end of one link being connected to the end of the other link by a pivot common to both
links, each of said links also having a pivot at the end remote from the common pivot,
which common pivot or intermediate pivot is movable from a position not in a straight line
with the other two pivots, to a position substantially in line by a force applied to the
intermediate pivot in a direction substantially normal to one of the links thereby moving at
least one of the two pivots away from the other. At least one of said links is articulated at
both ends and is not integral with either a jaw or a handle. The intermediate pivot is on
the handle­lever or is connected to the handle­lever by a linkage or lever system between
said intermediate pivot and the handle­lever, so that force is applied to the intermediate
pivot by manipulation of the handle­lever.
TOGGLE­LINKAGE ­ For class 400
An assemblage of at least two links, pitmans, bars, or struts and at least three pivots, an
end of one link being connected to an end of the other link by a pivot that is common to
both links. Each of the links also has a pivot at the end remote from the common pivot,
which common or intermediate pivot is movable from a first (or ​
gbroken​
h) position at
which the common pivot is not in line with the other two pivots to a second (or
gstraightened​
​
h) position at which the common pivot is substantially in line with the other
two pivots, or which common pivot is movable from said second position to said first
position. Such movement is accomplished by a force applied to the common pivot in a
direction approximately at right angles to either link, thereby moving the remote pivots
relatively away from each other (i.e., when the common pivot moves to the second
position) or relatively toward each other (i.e., when the common pivot moves to the first
position).
TONER ­ For class 355
A material, e.g., finely divided (usually thermoplastic) powder, or pigmented polymer
particles, an ink, or magnetic particles, used in electrostatic processes to make visible a
latent image and which is treated, e.g., fused, dried, etc., to render the image permanent.
It may include or exclude a carrier element.
TONER ­ For class 399
Charged material (e.g., finely divided powder; i.e., usually thermoplastic or pigmented
polymer particles), ink, or magnetic particles used in electrostatic processes to make
visible a latent image and which may be treated (e.g., fused, dried, etc.) to render the
image permanent. Toner can be charged by triboelectric action, by the direct application of
charge (e.g., corona), or by inducing the charge through the action of the electrostatic
latent image. The material may include or exclude a carrier element and may also be
called ​
gmarking particles​
h or ​
gdeveloper material.​
h
TOOL ­ For class 072
A tangible instrumentality having a surface portion which is designed and intended to
engage or react against work with sufficient force to effect an operation of the class type.
Note. A core, mandrel, anvil, or the like, which may be ​
gpassive​
h in the sense of
supplying only reaction force is included in this definition. The tool may be either
transitory or enduring; it may be destroyed in a single use.
TOOL ­ For class 083
The instrumentality that contacts the work for effecting directly the operation of the class
either by itself or by cooperation with another tool.
TOOL ­ For class 172
That portion of the apparatus which actually works the earth.
TOOL ­ For class 173
A work contacting element which functions to effect some physical alteration in the work,
such as chipping or boring, but also includes other elements which are driven in the same
manner as a tool such as a nail or post.
TOOL ­ For class 175
Comprises the terminal or work applying element of the boring means including bits,
nozzles, drive points, projectiles, explosives, etc., which disintegrates, dislocates, erodes
or compresses the earth to form a bore. See the appropriate subclasses for the definition
of particular tools, and particularly Subclass References to the Current Class, above, for
the definition of ​
gbit​
h.
TOOL ­ For class 205
A solid (including a gel) coherent object which cooperates with a workpiece and an
electrolyte, either mechanically or electrically, to remove some of the material from the
workpiece. Thus, for example, a tool may be an electrode, a grinding wheel, an insulating
spacer, etc.
TOOL ­ For class 269
An instrumentality for effecting treatment of the work.
TOOL ­ For class 401
An instrumentality having a portion which is designed and intended to apply or spread
coating material on a work surface by contact therewith. The tool may be spaced from the
work surface only by the thickness of material deposited by the tool.
TOOL ­ For class 404
Material modifying or treating instrumentality actually contacting material (e.g., a roller or
screed component of a road making machine) or the most proximate instrumentality
guiding or directing modifying or treating energy against material (e.g., a nozzle of a soil
stabilization device or a heating means of a road repair machine.
TOOL ­ For class 407
A distinct unitary piece of material or plurality of unitary pieces of material permanently
affixed together having a sharp edge or point for penetrating work and thereby directly
effecting the operation of this class either by itself or by cooperation with another tool. A
tool may have a plurality of edges or points for penetrating the work either concurrently,
sequentially, or selectively and is adapted to be separably attached either directly or via a
tool holder* to a machine*.
TOOL ­ For class 408
The instrumentality that contacts the work for effecting directly the operation of the class,
either by itself or by cooperation with another tool.
TOOL CARRIER ­ For class 072
A device for holding a tool* (a) against the force of gravity, and/or (b) in cooperative
relationship with another tool(s) or the work, and wherein the tool moves with respect to
the device. For example, a stationary axle on which a roller* rotates is a ​
gTool Carrier​
h
because of the relative movement; however, a shaft to which a roller is keyed so that both
rotate together is not a carrier, whereas the bearing in which the shaft rotates is a ​
gTool
Carrier​
h in this instance.
TOOL COMPLEX ­ For class 072
Three or more relatively movable tools* which are in simultaneous contact with the same
work at some instant during a metal­deforming operation. Note. Typically, either all active
tools are concurrently actuated, or a tool couple deforms work and remains in contact
therewith while a third, fourth, etc., tool advances into deforming contact with the thus
restrained work. Note. The deformation effected by a ​
gTool Complex​
h is generally greater
in degree and/or more elaborate in detail than can be accomplished by repeated
operations of a tool couple*, or the successive strokes of a plural tool set*. Note. A ​
gTool
Complex​
h may accomplish two or more seemingly distinct operations (e.g., simultaneously
flanging opposite edges of a sheet). In many such instances, some advantage is gained
over the use of plural tool sets (e.g., balanced forces on work may permit the use of
lighter clamping structure or the elimination of a work­holding device, and the
simultaneous tool actions may enable closer control of dimensions).
TOOL COUPLE ­ For class 072
Two tools which are so related in position and relative motion that when both are engaged
with the same work they cooperate to effect an operation of the class type. See ​
gTool
Complex​
h.
TOOL COUPLE ELEMENT ­ For class 269
The portion of a work holder whose disclosed function is to (a) coact with a relatively
movable work treating tool to treat the work, or (b) act as a guide for a relatively
movable work treating tool to directly or indirectly constrain the tool for movement in a
particular path, or (c) limit the movement of a work treating tool relative to the work so
that it may contact only a portion of the work and is prevented from contacting another
portion of the work. To be recognized as such, the tool couple element, if it is part of the
work contacting portion of the work holder, must be of different structure than the rest of
the work contacting surface, or must be a particular, definable portion of the work
contacting surface such as an edge thereof.
TOOL CYCLE ­ For class 083
The elapsed time between, and all of the motion traced by the tool between, the time the
tool leaves any particular datum point in its approach to (or recession from) the work until
it again leaves that point in its next succeeding approach to (or recession from) the work,
the location of such datum point for a series of recurring cycles being determined without
giving significance to mere positioning movements of the tool with respect to the work
(Note: positioning movements of the tool are considered to be part of the cycle of motions
constituting the tool cycle, and the time they occupy is part of the span of the cycle. They
are disregarded only for the purpose of establishing the datum point of one cycle with
respect to that of a preceding or succeeding cycle).
TOOL FACE ­ For class 072
The surface portion(s) of a tool body which actually engage work at some time during an
operation of the class type. Note. ​
gTool Face​
h is distinguishable from supporting,
interconnecting, spacing, or surrounding surface portions which do not engage work during
normal or disclosed operation. Disclosure of the tool operation is thus necessary for
identification of the ​
gTool Face​
h proper, as is consideration for placement in subclasses
380+ (offset tool faces) or subclasses 392+ (relatively receding tool faces). (See diagram
under subclass 386 for example of a ​
gTool Face​
h.)
TOOL HOLDER ­ For class 072
A Device rigidly attached to a tool and effective to support and/or to transmit actuating
force thereto. See ​
gTool Carrier​
h.
TOOL HOLDER ­ For class 407
A device consisting of a single element or a plurality of elements having means to
removably carry a tool* and adapted to be separably attached to a machine* for
supporting the tool against gravity and against the reaction of working force.
TOOL PAIR ­ For class 083
A plurality of tools, each having a work contacting portion, said portions being initially
separated from each other and cooperating to effect cutting of the work when they have
relative movement toward each other.
TOOL SEAT ­ For class 407
That part of the tool holder* that is in direct contact with the tool. The tool seat may be
integral with the remainder of the support of may be separably carried thereby.
TOOL STROKE ­ For class 083
The motion of the tool toward and into the work to effect a cut, and the motion of
retraction of the tool from the product to its base position.
TOOL SUPPORT ­ For class 083
An element connected to the tool for supporting it against gravity and that partakes of all
of the movement of the tool and has no relative movement with respect to the tool except
for purposes of adjustment.
TOOL­AXIS ­ For class 408
The longitudinal center about which the cutting tool of this class rotates relative to the
work and relative to the machine­frame structure during the cutting operation.
TOOL­CYCLE ­ For class 408
The elapsed time between and all of the motions traced by the tool between the time the
tool leaves any particular datum point in its approach to (or recession from) the work until
it again leaves that point in its next succeeding approach to (or recession from) the work,
the location of such datum point for a series of recurring cycles being determined without
giving significance to mere positioning movements of the tool with respect to the work.
(Note: Positioning movements of the tool are considered to be part of the cycle of motions
constituting the tool­cycle, and the time they occupy is part of the span of the cycle. They
are disregarded only for the purpose of establishing the datum point of one cycle with
respect to that of a preceding or succeeding cycle).
TOOL­FIELD ­ For class 234
An area embracing all the points which can be operated upon in one cycle of acutation of a
given plurality of tools.
TOOL­INFEED ­ For class 408
the motion of a tool relative to work and relative to the base of the cutting machine along
the tool­axis toward the work during the cutting operation.
TOOLS­ For class 024
An instrument for affecting the operation of a Class 24 fastener usually operated by hand
and totally separable from the fastener after affecting operation.
TOOL­SUPPORT ­ For class 408
An element connected to the tool for supporting it against gravity and that partakes of all
the movement of the tool and has no relative movement with respect to the tool except for
purpose of adjustment.
TORQUE: ­ For class 073
A turning or twisting force or a force that produces or tend to produce rotation or torsion.
TORQUE: ­ For class 073
A turning or twisting force or a force that produces or tends to produce rotation or torsion.
TOTAL INTERNAL REFLECTION ­ For class 385
A principle based upon Snell"s Law, which defines the relationship between incident and
refracted light rays at a boundary between two media of different refractive indices: n1 sin
Q1 = n2 sin Q2 where n1 = refractive index of first medium; n2 = refractive index of
second medium; Q1 = angle of incident ray at boundary; Q2 = angle of refracted ray at
boundary; For Q2 = 90 degrees, the critical angle of incidence is given by Qc = sin­1
(n2/n1). At angles of incidence greater than Qc, the light is reflected from the boundary.
TOTALLY REFLECTORIZED ­ For class 385
The state of an optical element having all of its inward facing lateral surfaces made
reflectors, as for example by the coating thereof with a reflective metal.
TOXIC WASTE ­ For class 435
Materials that are direct physiological poisons to living organisms (e.g., pesticides, heavy
metal ion solutions, and other materials that are poisonous to life.
TOXIC WASTE ­ For class 588
Materials that are direct physiological poisons to living organisms (e.g., pesticides, heavy
metal ion solutions, and other organic and inorganic materials) that are poisonous to life.
TPF ­ For class 438
thermoplastic film
TRACELESS LINKER ­ For class 506
Linker which does not leave any residue on the cleaved compound (i.e., which is replaced
by a hydrogen atom).
TRACK OR STORAGE TRACK ­ For class 369
A continuous path of an intelligence varied characteristic on the storage medium.
TRACKING ­ For class 369
Following a storage track by a transducer assembly or a component thereof.
TRANSACTION ­ For class 902
An act between a user* and a monetary fiduciary party (e.g., a financial institution)
whereby monetary value is exchanged.
Transcription unit ­ For class 800
The region between the sites of initiation and termination by RNA polymerase.
TRANSDUCER ­ For class 347
The part of the head* which converts an input signal into the force for producing the
mark*.
TRANSDUCER ­ For class 352
A device which converts one form of energy to another. The term generally used in this
class in the recording or reproducing of sound accompaniment and denotes such devices as
a magnetic pick up or electro­mechanical phonograph pick up.
TRANSDUCER ASSEMBLY ­ For class 369
The combination of an energy conversion device (transducer) and device coupling the
energy conversion device to a storage medium so as to sense or to cause a variation of a
characteristic therein.
TRANSFER ­ For class 709
The movement of data from one location to another or the passing of program control
from one portion of a program to another.
TRANSFER ­ For class 718
The movement of data from one location to another or the passing of program control
from one portion of a program to another.
TRANSFER ­ For class 719
The movement of data from one location to another or the passing of program control
from one portion of a program to another.
TRANSFER­MEDIUM ­ For class 400
A piece of material, relatively thin as compared to its other dimensions, and flexible so as
to conform to various configurations as required in a typewriter, which material is
impregnated or coated on one or both of its opposite surfaces with a preparation of ink* or
gelatin or other substance­containing carbon or other pigment that is capable of being
transplaced from a surface of said material onto a surface of an adjacent record­medium*.
Among the various forms of transfer­medium used in a typewriter are: (a) a ​
gpermanent​
h
ink transfer­medium in the form of an elongated, narrow ribbon*, a wide ribbon, a disc,
etc., all of which have the property that the character* symbol imprinted with the use of
this transfer­medium is not easily erased, thereby producing an ​
goriginal copy​
h text; (b) a
gcarbon­paper​
​
h transfer­medium, so called because one of its surfaces is coated with a
substance containing carbon or other pigment having the property that the character
imprinted with this transfer­medium is easily erased, thereby producing a ​
gcarbon copy​
h
text; (c) a ​
ghectos:graphic​
h ink transfer­medium, using an ink that is soluble in a
particular solvent and is used to form a ​
gmaster​
h plate that is subsequently used in a
gspirit duplicating​
​
h copying process, and (d) a ​
gcorrection​
h transfer­medium that is coated
with a substance containing a pigment of the same color as that of the record­medium,
and is used to correct an error in typing (as discussed in the definition of subclass 697
below).
TRANSFERRED ELECTRON DEVICE ­ For class 257
See GUNN EFFECT. In such devices, advantage is taken of the negative differential mobility
of electrons or holes in certain semiconducting compounds, particularly GaAs or InP.
TRANSFERRED ELECTRON DEVICE ­ For class 438
See GUNN EFFECT. In such devices, advantage is taken of the negative differential mobility
of electrons or holes in certain semiconducting compounds, particularly GaAs or InP.
TRANSFORMER ­ For class 323
An electrical device which transfers electric energy from one circuit to another circuit at
the same frequency solely by electromagnetic induction.
TRANSFORMER ­ For class 336
An inductor having a plurality of coils or windings in mutually inductive relation.
TRANSFORMER: ­ For class 363
An electrical device which transfers electrical energy from one circuit to another circuit at
the same frequency solely by electrical induction.
TRANSISTOR ­ For class 257
An active solid­state semiconductor device having three or more electrodes in which the
current flowing between two specified electrodes is modulated by the voltage or current
applied to one or more specified electrodes, and is capable of performing switching or
amplification.
TRANSISTOR ­ For class 330
An amplifying device comprising a semiconductor material to which contact is made by
three or more electrodes.
TRANSISTOR ­ For class 331
A semi­conductive active element having at least three electrodes so arranged that the
application of electrical energy to one electrode controls the flow of current between two
other electrodes.
TRANSISTOR ­ For class 438
An active solid­state semiconductor device having three or more electrodes in which the
current flowing between two specified electrodes is modulated by the voltage or current
applied to one or more specified electrodes, and is capable of performing switching or
amplification. May be of unipolar type (i.e., field effect transistor) or bipolar type.
TRANSISTORS: ­ For class 363
An active semiconductor device usually made of silicon or germanium, having three or
more electrodes. The three main electrodes used are the emitter, base, and collector.
Conduction is by means of electrons (elementary particles having the smallest negative
electrical charge that can exist) and holes (mobile electron vacancies equivalent to a
positive charge).
TRANSIT TIME OSCILLATOR ­ For class 331
An oscillator system wherein the time of flight or transit angle of charged particles
between electrodes of a space discharge device is an appreciable part of the cycle of the
generated oscillations, the energy derived from the moving particles being continuously
supplied to the frequency determining network of the oscillator in proper phase to sustain
oscillations. Transit time effects are utilized in magnetron, beam tube and retarding field
type oscillators.
TRANSITION ELEMENTS ­ For class 257
Sc, Ti, V, Cr, Mn, Fe, Co, Ni, Cu, Zn, Y, Zr, Nb, Mo, Te, Ru, Rh, Pd, Ag, Cd, La, Ce, Pr, Nd,
Pm, Sm, Eu, Gd, Tb, Dy, Ho, Er, Tm, Yb, Lu, Hf, Ta, W, Re, Os, Ir, Pt, Au, Hg, Ac, Th, Pa,
U, Np, Pu, Am, Cm, Bk, Cf, E, Fm, Mv, No, Lw.
TRANSITION METAL ­ For class 520
Denotes elements of atomic numbers 21­29, 39­47, 57­79, 89, and higher and does not
include Zn, Cd, and Hg.
TRANSITION METAL­ For class 075
A metal of the group Scandium (Sc), Titanium (Ti), Vanadium (V), Chromium (Cr),
Manganese (Mn), Iron (Fe), Cobalt (Co), Nickel (Ni), Copper (Cu), Zinc (Zn), Yttrium (Y),
Zirconium (Zr), Niobium (Nb) or Columbium (Cb), Molybdenum (Mo), Technetium (Tc),
Ruthenium (Ru), Rhodium (Rh), Palladium (Pd), Silver (Ag), Cadmium (Cd), Lanthanum
(La), Cerium (Ce), Praseodymium (Pr), Neodymium (Nd), Promethium (Pm), Samarium
(Sm), Europium (Eu), Gadolinium (Gd), Terbium (Tb), Dysprosium (Dy), Holmium (Ho),
Erbium (Er), Thulium (Tm), Ytterbium (Yb), Lutetium (Lu), Hafnium (Hf), Tantalum (Ta),
Tungsten (W), Rhenium (Re), Osmium (Os), Iridium (Ir), Platinum (Pt), Gold (Au), Mercury
(Hg), Actinium (Ac), Thorium (Th), Protactinium (Pd), Uranium (U), Neptunium (Np),
Plutonium (Pu), Americium (Am), Curium (Cm), Berkelium (Bk), Californium (Cf),
Einesteinium (Es), Fermium (Fm), Mendelevium (Md), Nobelium (No), Lawrencium (Lr),
Unnilquadium (Unq), Unnilpentium (Unp), and Unnilhexium (Unh).
TRANSITION METAL­ For class 420
An element of atomic number 21­30, 39­48 or 57­80.
TRANSLUCENT ­ For class 362
Having the property of certain light pervious materials which results in the random internal
scattering of light rays passing through the material.
TRANSMISSION ­ For class 725
The electrical transfer of a signal, message, or other form of intelligence from one location
to another.
TRANSMISSION LINE ­ For class 333
As used in the subclass definitions is synonymous with wave transmission devices.
TRANSMITTER ­ For class 083
A system for sending the signal or impulse which has been effected by a detector (see
definition of ​
gdetector​
h above) to a means for establishing (in response to receipt of such
signal or impulse) a driving connection between a source of power and a machine part or
assembly; or sending such signal or impulse to a mart or assembly directly (as by a
linkage).
TRANSMITTER ­ For class 725
A device or circuit that generates high­frequency electric energy, controlled or modulated,
which can be radiated by an antenna.
TRANSMUTATION ­ For class 376
The bombardment of a nucleus by particle or photon so as to bring about a change in the
nucleus resulting in a different isotope of the original nucleus or resulting in different
element(s).
TRANSPARENT ­ For class 362
Having the property of certain light pervious materials which permits light rays to pass
through the material in straight lines. Transparent illuminating means may or may not be
light modifiers.
TRAP CHAMBER ­ For class 425
A compartment having means for providing a measured charge of material passing
therethrough.
TRAPATT DEVICE ­ For class 257
An acronym for trapped plasma avalanche triggered transit diodes, which are biased into
avalanche condition. As the diode breaks down, a highly conducting electron­hole plasma
quickly fills the entire n­type region, and the voltage across the diode drops to a low
value. The plasma is then extracted from the diode by the low residual electric field, thus
causing a large current flow even though the voltage is low. Once extraction of the plasma
is completed, the current drops and the voltage rises.
TRAPATT DEVICE ­ For class 438
An acronym for trapped plasma avalanche triggered transit diodes, which are biased into
avalanche condition. As the diode breaks down, a highly conducting electron­hole plasma
quickly fills the entire n­type region, and the voltage across the diode drops to a low
value. The plasma is then extracted from the diode by the low residual electric field, thus
causing a large current flow even though the voltage is low. Once extraction of the plasma
is completed, the current drops and the voltage rises.
TRAPPAT ­ For class 438
trapped plasma avalanche tunnel transit (diode)
TRAVEL GHOST ­ For class 352
A fault of a motion picture projection caused by presentation of the individual picture in a
motion picture sequence before the picture has come to rest. In projector systems this
superfluous image is of a lesser light intensity.
TRAVELING ­ For class 425
A movement to or from a station, (e.g., shaping, feeding or ejecting station, etc.), as
opposed to movement at a station essential to an operation, (e.g., mere mold opening or
closing, etc.).
TREAD ­ For class 305
A unitary ground engaging block or plate made of flexible or rigid material or a
combination of both and provided with securing means for connection to similar devices to
form a flexible track.
TREATMENT ­ For class 095
(a) With respect to the class subject matter, the term is restricted to reversible and
nonchemical changes in physical characteristics of the fluid mixture or a separated
constituent (e.g., heating, cooling, humidity control, agitating, pressure regulation, etc.).
(b) With respect to the media used to perform the gas separation or to a material used to
condition the fluid mixture for separation, the term may include chemical preparation,
reconditioning, or reaction.
TREATMENT ­ For class 096
(a) With respect to the class subject matter, the term is restricted to reversible and
nonchemical changes in physical characteristics of the fluid mixture or a separated
constituent (e.g., heating, cooling, humidity control, agitating, pressure regulation, etc.).
(b) With respect to the media used to perform the gas separation or to a material used to
condition the fluid mixture for separation, the term may include chemical preparation,
reconditioning, or reaction.
TREATMENT ­ For class 141
With respect to the treatment classes, treatment as here construed is concerned with
reversible changes in the physical characteristics of contents material such as exemplified
by agitating, heating, cooling, sorting and the like.
TREATMENT ­ For class 264
A physical, chemical or mechanical step applied to molding material or an article or
preform, (see conditioning).
TREATMENT ­ For class 425
Altering or actively maintaining some property or a product or preform.
TREATMENT OR TREATING ­ For class 269
An operation which modifies the shape or changes a characteristic of material, assembles
pieces of material together, disassembles pieces of material, or applies fluid
(nonpropellant) to material. See WORK HOLDER IN COMBINATION WITH TREATING MEANS
and RELATIONSHIP TO PRESS MEANS, above.
TREE ­ For class 144
A plant large enough to serve as a source of lumber*.
TRENCH ISOLATION ­ For class 257
Electrical isolation of electronic components in a monolithic integrated circuit by the use of
holes or other indentations in the surface of the device filled with dielectric material.
TRENCH ISOLATION ­ For class 438
Electrical isolation of electronic components in a monolithic integrated circuit by the use of
grooves or other indentations in the surface of the substrate, which may or may not be
filled with electrically insulative (i.e., dielectric) material.
TRIAL FRAME ­ For class 351
Adjustable lens holding frames for supporting lenses interchangeably during vision testing.
TRICKLING FILTER ­ For class 210
A particulate bed of designed coarseness through which liquid is gravity fed at a rate to
maintain relatively thin films on the particles and enhance air liquid contact to promote
aerobic treatment of the liquid. An alternate method may be programmed flooding and
draining of the bed. The treatment using such a bed is in subclasses 616+.
TRICYCLO RING SYSTEM ­ For class 514
This term denotes a polycyclo ring system which contains exactly three rings.
TRIGLYCERIDIC FAT OR OIL ­ For class 426
Esters of glycerol and a higher fatty acid (i.e., a monocarboxylic acid containing an
unbroken chain of at least 7 carbon atoms bonded to a carbonyl group) wherein the three
available hydroxyl functions of the glycerol are esterified by a same or different fatty
monocarboxylic acid. Triglycerides are the chief constituents of the naturally occurring fats
and oils.
TROLLEY ­ For class 212
A movable carriage adapted to shift a load laterally by moving along a track or other
guiding means and which supports or guides a member from which the load is suspended.
TSD ­ For class 438
temperature sensing diode
TSOP ­ For class 438
thin small outline package
TSP ­ For class 516
Tri­sodium Phosphate; sodium phosphate, tribasic; Na 3PO4 12H2O. Commodity product
used alone or compounded with other materials* for use in multitudes of applications
including; water softening, boiler water treating, detergency, textile treating, laundering,
industrial cleaning, dietary supplements, pH buffering, emulsifying.
TTL ­ For class 438
transistor­transistor logic
TUBE ­ For class 029
A pipe, hollow cylinder, or hollow rodlike member.
TUBE ­ For class 072
A pipe, hollow cylinder, or hollow rodlike member consisting of a wall shaped in the form
of a simple closed curve and extending axially, providing a conduit throughout its length.
The wall may vary along its axial length in transverse dimensions and/or shape.
TUBE ­ For class 331
An active element of the space discharge device type. See: active element; space
discharge device.
TUBING ­ For class 166
A pipe for conducting fluids which extends from the top of the well to some point below
and lies within the casing or is used without a casing as a temporary structure.
TUMBLER ­ For class 070
A movable impediment to the movement of a bolt or other movable element which may
respond to an operating element of corresponding complemental combination, or to a
combination of movements to be so disposed as to provide an unimpeded path of
movement of the bolt or other movable element.
TUNER ­ For class 334
A device for tuning which consists of an inductor and capacitor or an inductor, capacitor
and resistor so connected and resistor so connected as to form a resonance circuit, the
mean frequency or channel to which the tuner is resonant being variable. The resistance
may be in the form of the inherent resistance of the circuit or a lumped resistance element
connected in the circuit. For a lumped resistor element connected in a tuned circuit, see
Subclass References to the Current Class, above.
TUNING ­ For class 334
The step or steps by which a tuner is adjusted in relation to a signal frequency or channel
in order to obtain optimum or maximum resonance of the tuner circuit or system at some
selected operating point or signal frequency.
TUNNEL DIODE ­ For class 257
A semiconductor diode in which the electrons penetrate a quantum barrier that is
impenetrable in terms of classical physics, but which is penetrable in terms of quantum
physics due to the quantum mechanical uncertainty in position of current carriers.
TUNNEL DIODE ­ For class 438
A semiconductor diode in which the electrons penetrate a quantum barrier that is
impenetrable in terms of classical physics, but which is penetrable in terms of quantum
physics due to the quantum mechanical uncertainty in position of current carriers.
TUNNEL EFFECT/TUNNELLING ­ For class 257
See TUNNEL DIODE and RESONANT TUNNELING DEVICE.
TURKEY RED OIL ­ For class 516
Sulfonated castor oil or soluble castor oil. Sulfonated fats or oils obtained by the treatment
of a variety of hydroxylated or unsaturated natural fats and oils, usually castor oil, with
sulfuric or chlorosulfonic acids, and washing. Also known as alizarin oil or alizarin assistant
when used as a dyeing aid with alizarin dye(s).
TWIN ­ For class 117
(Twin plane) A polycrystalline material in which the adjoining lattices have a mirror­image
symmetrical relationship.
TWIN­TUB STRUCTURE ­ For class 257
CMOS device structure in which both p­type and n­type deep wells are formed into a
substrate for the n­channel and p­channel device (e.g., a transistor), respectively.
TWITCHELL PROCESS ­ For class 516
Splitting of fats to glycerol and fatty acids by acid hydrolysis, in the presence of steam and
catalytic amount of Twitchell Reagent*.
TWITCHELL REAGENT ­ For class 516
Catalyst for the Twitchell­process*. The sulfonation product of reacting sulfuric acid with
oleic acid and naphthalene (naphthalenestearosulfonic acid).
TWO­DIMENSIONAL ELECTRON GAS ­ For class 257
A description of the motion of electrons which are confined in only one direction, such as
electrons in the conducting channel of a MOSFET. In an electron gas, the electrons move
around without apparent restriction. The behavior of electrons in conducting metals (e.g.,
copper) is an example of a three­dimensional electron gas. In a two dimensional electron
gas, motion is restricted to a single plane (two dimensions).
TWO­DIMENSIONAL ELECTRON GAS ­ For class 438
A description of the motion of electrons which are confined in only one direction, such as
electrons in the conducting channel of a MOSFET. In an electron gas, the electrons move
around without apparent restriction. The behavior of electrons in conducting metals (e.g.,
copper) is an example of a three­dimensional electron gas. In a two dimensional electron
gas, motion is restricted to a single plane (two dimensions). See also MODFET.
TYPE­BAR ­ For class 400
An elongated member having at one end a type­member* (i.e., a type­die* or a type­
face*) element and at its other end a connection to one or more key* elements. In most
manual type­writers, the number of type­bars corresponds to the number of keys
provided, and the type­bars are pivoted to a type­bar­segment* so that the various type­
faces are all impressed at approximately the same print­point*, but many variations of the
construction are to be found. The type­bars may be pivoted to individual linkages, or may
be slidable to print position. In some typewriters a single key may actuate a plurality of
type­bars; in others, a plurality of keys may be depressed simultaneously to actuate a
single type­bar; and in others (e.g., stenographic typewriters), there may be a plurality of
character* symbols simultaneously imprinted.
TYPE­BAR­SEGMENT ­ For class 400
A type­bar­segment is an arcuate member that serves to support all the type­bar*
members for pivotal motion so that each of the type­member* elements carried by the
type­bar members will be impressed onto the record­medium* at approximately the same
print­point*. In some manual typewriters the type­bar­segment is moved to effect case­
shift*. (This occurs because the type­member (i.e., type­face* or type­die*) that is at the
print­point has been moved as a result of moving the type­bar­segment, so that an upper­
case* or a lower­case* form of character* symbol is imprinted on the record­medium
according to the choice of the typist.) The difference between a type­bar­segment and a
type­face­carrier* (which also permits a type­bar to move relative thereto) is that a type­
face­carrier moves both for selection of a character and for choice of upper­case of lower­
case, whereas a type­bar­segment moves only for choice of upper­case or lower­case.
TYPE­DIE ­ For class 400
An element that is impressed against a record­medium* to deform or pierce the surface of
the record­medium into a representation of a character*. It is that portion of a type­
member* that projects from the body of the type­member and contacts the surface of the
record­medium to raise or lower the contacted surface relative to the uncontracted surface
into a line representing a character, or to form one or more perforations in the contacted
surface, which perforations taken together represent a character.
TYPE­FACE ­ For class 400
An element that is impressed against a record­medium* to imprint a line representing a
character*. It is that portion of a type­member* that projects from the body of the type­
member, and contacts the surface of the record­medium to form the character by ink*
applied to the type­face and transferred to the record­medium, or by ink applied via an ink
ribbon* or similar transfer material that lies between the type­face and the surface of the
record­medium.
TYPE­FACE­CARRIER ­ For class 400
A type­face­carrier is a mechanism on which is mounted a plurality of type­member*
elements (i.e., type­face* or type­die*) for movement of any one type­member relative to
the remainder of the type­members mounted thereon. Usually a group of type­faces
comprising a type­set­assemblage* is mounted on a type­face­carrier, face­carrier, and
the type­face­carrier is capable of various kinds of movement. A typist will select one
key* element from among the many key elements available, causing the type­face­carrier
to move to a position at which the selected type­face will impact against a record­
medium* to imprint the selected character* symbol (e.g., a particular letter, or a
particular number, etc.) on the record­medium. A typist may choose to effect case­shift*
or not effect case­shift, thereby to choose from the character symbols available on one
key element the one symbol (e.g., the upper­case* or the lower­case* form of the same
letter, etc.) thereby causing the type­face­carrier to move to a position at which the
chosen type­face will imprint the chosen symbol. The mechanism also causes or enables
relative movement between the type­face and the record­medium (e.g., movement of the
type­face toward the print­point*) to imprint the selected or the chosen character or
symbol on the record­medium. (See this Glossary, section III, under the definitions of the
terms type­bar­segment* and type­head­carrier* for the differences between those
mechanisms and a type­face­carrier).
TYPE­HEAD ­ For class 400
A type­head is an element comprising one or more type­member* elements integral one
with the other(s). In most manually powered type­writers a type­set­assemblage* is
distributed among a plurality of type­heads, each of which as two type­face* elements.
Some of these type­heads include a type­face for imprinting a particular letter in lower­
case* and a type­face for imprinting the same letter in upper­case*, the choice being
made by a case­shift* mechanism. Other type­heads in these manually powered type­
writers include a type­face for imprinting a number and a type­face for imprinting a
symbol (see the definition of character* in this Glossary for examples of a symbol), the
choice of which is to be imprinted also being made by the case­shift mechanism. In some
electrically powered typewriters a single type­head includes a complete type­set­
assemblage, and said type­head is mounted on a type­head­carrier*. In such typewriters
the single type­head is moved for selection of the type­face to be imprinted, or for the
choice of the case to be used. In the definitions of the subclasses that follow, the term
gtype­head​
​
h has usually been reserved for the element that includes a type­set­
assemblage on an electrically powered typewriter, and the element on the type end of a
type­bar* has usually been referred to as a type­face.
TYPE­HEAD­CARRIER ­ For class 400
A type­head­carrier is a mechanism on which is mounted at least one type­head* that
includes a type­set­assemblage* (e.g., a group of type­face* elements) thereon for
movement of the type­head relative to the type­head­carrier. Usually a type­head­carrier
and the type­head mounted thereon are capable of various kinds of movement. A typist
will select one key* element from among the many key elements available, causing the
type­head to move (e.g., by oscillating and/or tilting) to a position at which the selected
type­face will impact against a record­medium* to imprint the selected character* symbol
(e.g., a particular letter, or a particular number, etc.) on the record­medium. A typist may
choose to effect case­shift* or not effect case­shift, thereby to choose from the character
symbols available on one key element the one symbol (e.g., the upper­case* or the lower­
case* form of the same letter, etc.) that is to be imprinted, thereby causing the type­head
to move to a position at which the chosen type­face will imprint the chosen symbol. The
mechanism also causes or enables movement of the type­head (i.e., by movement of the
type­head­carrier) between the type­face and the record­medium (e.g., movement of the
type­face toward the print­point*) to imprint the selected or the chosen character or
symbol on the record­medium. The difference between a type­head­carrier and a type­
face­carrier* (which also carries a type­set­assemblage that moves both for selection of a
character and for choice of upper­case or lower­case) is that a type­face­carrier supports
individually movable type­face elements, whereas a type­head­carrier supports a type­
head wherein all the type­face elements are integral therewith. In some typewriters that
use a type­head­carrier a single type­head includes a complete type­set­assemblage, and
this type­head may be removed from its carrier and be replaced with a different type­head
having a different font* (e.g., the style, character size, alphabet, or symbols that the
typewriter can produce). In some typewriters that use a type­head­carrier plural type­
heads may be provided, each including a complete type­set­assemblage (e.g., in different
fonts, etc.) or each including only part of a complete type­set­assemblage (e.g., one­half
of an assemblage on one type­head and the other half of that assemblage on the other
type­head).
TYPE­MEMBER ­ For class 400
An element having on a surface thereof a type­die* or a type­face* which is impressed
against a record­medium* to imprint a character* in or on the surface of the record­
medium. In most typewriters there is only one type­member corresponding to each
character* that is to be typed, and the user of the typewriter selects from the assortment
of type­members provided in the apparatus one type­member at a time to be imprinted,
and serially imprints the selected type­members to form the characters representing the
text to be typed.
TYPE­SET­ASSEMBLAGE ­ For class 400
A group of type­face* elements including a multiplicity of type­faces for imprinting the
different character* symbols that a typewriter is capable of imprinting in the same font* of
type. In many typewriters a type­set­assemblage is carried on a plurality of type­bar*
members that include all the type­faces that the typewriter can imprint, either in upper­
case* or in lower­case*, or in the various character symbols. In other typewriters a single
type­head* includes all type­faces that the typewriter can imprint in the same font, and
that type­head can be removed from the typewriter to be replaced by a type­head for
another type­set­assemblage of a different font. In still other typewriters two or more
type­heads are provided to comprise one type­set­assemblage, or to comprise two or
more type­set­assemblages in different fonts.
TYPEWRITER­ACTUATED­CONTROL ­ For class 400
Typewriter­actuated­control is intended to refer to a mechanism wherein a first part of a
typewriter moves to accomplish its intended first­part function, and during said movement
the first part engages a second part to move the second part, thereby accomplishing a
second function as the second part is moved. A simple example of a typewriter­actuated­
control exists in the instance of a typewriter wherein the ribbon* vibrator has means for
opening the guide means of the vibrator for the purpose of facilitating insertion of a new
ribbon. When the vibrator is next lifted or raised to enable the ribbon to cover the print­
point* to imprint the next character*, the upward movement of the vibrator for typing
causes engagement of elements that ​
gautomatically​
h causes closing of the vibrator guide
to its normal position without special intervention of the typist to accomplish the guide­
closing function.
UHV ­ For class 438
ultrahigh vacuum
ULTRAFILTRATION ­ For class 210
Filtration of a solution or colloid, retaining a constituent of macromolecule dimension. See
FILTRATION and MEMBRANE.
ULTRAVIOLET/INFRARED ­ For class 359
Electromagnetic radiation immediately above and below the optical visible frequency
spectrum is termed ultraviolet and infrared, respectively. This entire range of frequencies
is encompassed by the term ​
glight.​
h
UNBALANCED CIRCUIT ­ For class 330
A circuit having its conductors electrically unsymmetrical with reference to a potential
plane. For example, a concentric line is ordinarily unbalanced, the outer conductor being
ordinarily connected to ground.
UNBALANCED CIRCUIT ­ For class 333
A circuit having its conductors electrically unsymmetrical with reference to a potential
plane. For example, a concentric line is ordinarily unbalanced, the outer conductor being
ordinarily connected to ground.
UNDERDRIVE ­ For class 475
Mechanism wherein an output member* is driven at a slower rotational velocity than the
rotational velocity of an input member*.
UNDESIRED OBJECTS ­ For class 171
Trash, previously cut tops or foliage or other nonearth material accompanying the objects
disclosed as intended to be removed from the earth and recovered.
UNEARTHING ­ For class 171
This is the generic term for any of the various organizations for removing an object
imbedded in the earth, at or near the ground surface as by digging or picking the object
and separating it free from any substantial accumulation of earth, the separation being
accomplished either simultaneously with or subsequent to the removal of the object from
its position in situ in the ground.
UNEARTHING UNIT ­ For class 171
An entity which includes all of the apparatus necessary to completely unearth a buried or
partially buried object in its path regardless of the presence or absence of additional,
similar entities in the same organization.
UNIFORM RESOURCE LOCATOR (URL) ­ For class 725
An address for a resource on the Internet. URLs are used by Web browsers to locate
Internet resources. A URL specifies the protocol to be used in accessing the resource (such
as http: for a World Wide Web page or ftp: for an FTP site), the name of the server on
which the resource resides (such as //www.uspto.gov), and, optionally, the path to a
resource (such as an HTML document or a file on that server).
UNIPOLAR ­ For class 257
An active solid­state electronic device in which only one type of charge carrier, positive or
negative, is used to support current flow.
UNIPOLAR ­ For class 438
An active solid­state electronic device in which only one type of charge carrier (i.e.,
positive holes or negative electrons) is used to support current flow.
UNIPOLAR TRANSISTOR ­ For class 257
A transistor in which the source to drain current involves only one type of charge carrier.
UNITARY DOSAGE FORM ­ For class 424
Denotes that form of medication supplied in a manner requiring no further weighing or
measuring to provide the dosage; e.g., tablet, capsule, etc. Medicines in bulk form; e.g.,
powder, syrup, etc., are not included.
UNITARY DRIVE ­ For class 475
Mechanism wherein an output member is driven at the same rotational velocity as an input
member.
UNIVERSAL­BAR ­ For class 400
A member that is part of a drive train of a typewriter, which member is driven by any of a
multiplicity of elements and which member serves to drive any of a different multiplicity
of elements. A universal­bar may be driven, for example, by a space­bar*, or by a
character* key* element that causes imprint of a character and also drives the universal­
bar either directly or via a type­bar* member or associated linkage. The universal­bar
may then serve to drive a carriage­feed mechanism or a ribbon­feed mechanism or a
character­counter mechanism or all these exemplary mechanisms concurrently.
UNSATURATED ­ For class 260
Denotes the presence of a double or triple bond linking two adjacent carbon atoms, thus:
UNVOICED ­ For class 704
Speech sounds produced by a turbulent flow of air created at some point of stricture in the
vocal tract and usually lacking pitch.
UPPER­CASE ­ For class 400
A capital letter, similar in appearance to this text, as opposed to lower­case*. The
derivation of the terms upper­case* and lower­case is discussed in the definition of lower­
case in this Glossary. See the definitions of character* and case­shift* in this Glossary for
the forms of symbols that are imprinted when the case­shift mechanism is in the upper­
case mode.
USAGE CONTROL ­ For class 726
Subject matter includes means placing restrictions on computer and/or user use of
applications
USER ­ For class 902
A person interacting with the system* to perform a transaction* with a monetary fiduciary
party. The user initiates the transaction by operating the terminal*.
USER DATA ­ For class 345
Data other than address data, instruction data, or status data. (also see: Data)
USER DATA ­ For class 707
Data other than address data, instruction data, or status data. (Also see Data)
USER DATA ­ For class 711
Data other than address data, instruction data, or status data.
USER DATA ­ For class 714
Data other than address data, instruction data, or status data.
USER PROTECTION/PRIVACY ­ For class 726
Subject matter includes means for ensuring the state or integrity of information or data
associated with a user.
UV ­ For class 438
ultraviolet
VACCINE ­ For class 977
Suspension of attenuated or killed microorganisms or viruses that are incapable of
inducing severe infection but are capable of producing immune memory when inoculated
into a complex organism.
VACUUM TUBE ­ For class 330
An enclosed space evacuated of most of its gas wherein an electric discharge takes place
between two electrodes one of which emits electrically charged atomic particles, generally
electrons and the other electrode collects such particles. The vacuum tube has at least one
additional electrode or other means to control the flow of charged atomic particles
between the emitter electrode and the collector electrode. The electric discharge of a
vacuum tube is normally an electron discharge and any discharge of ionized particles is
normally fortuitous and unintended. A vacuum tube is usually involved in a four terminal
network, the input signal being supplied to two input electrodes usually the grid (control)
and cathode (electron emitting electrode) and the output circuit normally being comprised
of the power supply, the anode load impedance, the anode, the electron discharge, the
cathode impedance, the load and the output coupling means. Thus the cathode which is
normally present in the output and input circuits is normally the common electrode. Other
alternative configurations where the input and output electrodes are not as above, as for
example, where the anode is a common electrode and the cathode is the output electrode,
are known and provided for in the schedule of this class. The terms for the grid, cathode
and anode electrodes or auxiliary electrodes (as defined below) are referred to according
to the predetermined use usually assigned for them regardless of the alternative circuit
arrangements involved. The terms input, output, and common electrodes are used as in
these definitions.
VALVES AND VALVE ACTUATION ­ For class 137
The term ​
gvalve unit,​
h as used above, is applied to either a single or multiway valve. In
the multiway type plural passages are controlled by valve means having plural flow closing
areas or points, but the entire means is housed in a single casing or organized as a body
or unit. Valve units as such are classified in subclasses 625+. The class also provides for
some valve units under the special titles. Radiator vent check valves, Reversing cokes and
valves, Flush or water closet valves, Drain valves, Float valves, Temperature operated
cut­off valves, Safety valves, and certain analogous types. The class also takes valves
combined with other structure, as the tire inflation type combined with or adapted for
connection with inflation means and/or the inflatable article. Class 251, Valves and Valve
Actuation provides for valves combined with certain actuators, particularly the fluid and
electric motors and the more complex mechanical movement actuators. The term
gValves​
​
h includes variable restrictors, which frequently cannot be distinguished as
claimed, and have been set apart only in certain subclasses having the term restrictor or
choke in the title, as subclasses 436+, and 475+, primarily because of their special
function as silencers. Closures are also frequently indistinguishable from valves,
particularly as used and claimed in fluid handling systems. In some instances they have
been classified with valves, as in subclasses 613+, Single flow path with plural serial
valves and/or closures and Class 251, Valves and Valve Actuation, provides for restrictors
or flow guides in subclasses 118.01+.
VANE ­ For class 415
A static partition member (which however may be selectively adjustable to various
positions) in the working fluid flow path and shaped (often as an airfoil) to guide or direct
fluid flow. This vane member may also variously be called a nozzle, intermediate, diffuser
or diaphragm in the art literature.
VANE ­ For class 418
A partition member which generally moves with the working member but also has
movement relative to the working member incident to the expansion and contraction of the
chamber. The vane may be on the cylinder if the cylinder is the working member.
VAPOR ­ For class 095
The gaseous state of matter that is liquid or solid under a temperature of 0​
‹C and 760 mm
Hg pressure.
VAPOR ­ For class 096
The gaseous state of matter that is liquid or solid under a temperature of 0​
‹C and pressure
of 760 mm Hg.
VAPOR ­ For class 210
A normally liquid material in a gaseous state, e.g., steam. Separating or purifying a fluid
in the gaseous state is proper for Class 55, Gas Separation, but treating a liquid with
gaseous constituents is provided for in subclasses 603+, 640, 664, 707, 718, and 750.
VAPORIZATION ­ For class 202
The process of changing a liquid into a vapor. See ​
gEvaporation​
h.
VAPORIZATION ­ For class 203
The process of changing a liquid into a vapor. See ​
gEvaporation​
h.
VARACTOR ­ For class 257
A semiconductor diode that changes capacitance with a change in applied voltage,
comprising a two terminal active device using the voltage variable capacitance of a pn
junction or a Schottky junction.
VARACTOR ­ For class 438
A semiconductor diode comprising a two terminal active device using the voltage variable
capacitance of a pn junction or a Schottky junction that changes capacitance with a change
in applied voltage.
VARIABLE INDUCTOR ­ For class 334
A passive inductor wherein the inductor device includes a movable element which may be
adjusted to different positions or adjusted to vary its physical dimensions to change the
effective inductance from one value to another. Examples of such movable elements are:
a tap changing switch, a distortable coil or core, or movable coupled coils. Inductor
devices designed to change inductance (1) as a function of the current and/or voltage
flowing through the inductor winding, or (2) in accordance with a magnetic field or bias
applied to the core or coil of the device, or (3) as a function of the ambient temperature or
some external condition applied to the device, and wherein no physical element of the
inductor is moved to effect such change in inductance, are not considered adjustable under
the above definition. For such variable inductors, see Subclass References to the Current
Class, above for for magnetic field responsive tuners, for condition responsive tuners, and
for saturable core type tuners.
VARISTOR ­ For class 257
A term applied to both passive and active solid­state devices. A varistor is a two­electrode
semiconductor device with a voltage dependent nonlinear resistance which falls
significantly as the voltage is increased. In an active device, the non­linear property is due
to the presence of one or more potential barriers, whereas, in a passive type varistor, it is
due to electrical heating of the material due to current flow therethrough. Varistors are to
be contrasted with passive variable resistors such as rheostats or potentiometers.
VARISTOR ­ For class 438
A varistor is a two­electrode active or passive semiconductor device with a voltage
dependent nonlinear resistance which falls significantly as the voltage is increased. In an
active device, the nonlinear property is due to the presence of one or more potential
barriers. In a passive­type varistor, it is due to electrical heating of the material due to
current flow therethrough. Varistors are to be contrasted with passive variable resistors
such as rheostats or potentiometers.
VAT DYE ­ For class 008
Vat dyes are dyes which are applied to the substrate in reduced, soluble form and then
oxidize to the original insoluble pigment. Common vat dyes are quinonic dyes and
particularly common are anthraquinones and indigoids.
VCNR ­ For class 438
voltage controlled negative resistance
VEHICLE ­ For class 425
A fluid, generally a liquid, employed to carry stock material to a molding surface.
VEHICLE ­ For class 701
Any means in or by which someone or something is carried or conveyed. This term
includes, but is not limited to, automobiles, aircraft, spacecraft, blimps, trains,
motorcycles, bicycles, watercraft, and submarines.
VENT ­ For class 164
Small opening in a mold to allow trapped air to escape.
VERNEUIL ­ For class 117
A. Verneuil, French inventor of the crystal growth technique (1902) used for materials with
a high melting point. The Verneuil method is typified by use of a high temperature heat
source, such as a gas flame or plasma torch, into which powdered material is directed,
whereupon it melts as or prior to its arrival to a thin film of melt on a seed crystal which
is pulled away at an appropriate rate.
VERTICAL BLANKING INTERVAL (VBI) ­ For class 725
The time required for the electron beam in a raster­scan display to perform a vertical
retrace.
VERTICAL JUNCTION ­ For class 257
A junction of finite width which has a vertical axis. The materials which form it lie on
either horizontal side thereof.
VERTICAL RETORT ­ For class 075
A vertical, generally cylindrical, vessel closed at the bottom and heated externally so that
the contents are heated only by heat conduced through the retort walls. Often a product is
volatilized from the retort and collected in another container.
VFG ­ For class 117
Vertical Freeze Gradient. Also VGF.
VGF ­ For class 438
vertical gradient freeze (also VFG)
VHSIC ­ For class 438
very high speed integrated circuit
VIA ­ For class 257
A metallized or plated­through hole, in an insulating layer, e.g., a substrate, chip or a
printed circuit board which forms a conduction path itself and is not designed to have a
wire or lead inserted therethrough.
VIA ­ For class 438
A metallized or plated­through hole in an insulating layer, a semiconductor containing
substrate or chip, or a printed circuit board which forms a conduction path itself without
having a wire or lead inserted therethrough.
VIBRATOR ­ For class 363
A circuit interrupter that has a movable conducting member which moves between
contacts for converting D.C. to A.C. or A.C. to D.C.
VIBRATOR ­ For class 400
Vibrator is the typewriter industry term for an element or an assemblage of elements that
(a) guides a ribbon* or constrains the ribbon for movement along its elongated dimension,
and (b) is located on the typewriter adjacent to the print­point*, and (c) moves at least a
portion of the ribbon that is so guided transversely to its elongated dimension from a first
position adjacent to but not covering the print­point to a second position covering the print­
point. The first position is a normal, or ​
grest​
h position that permits the print­line* to be
seen by a typist, and the second position places the ribbon over the print­point so that a
type­face* will be impressed against the ribbon to imprint a character* on a record­
medium*. The vibrator movement may be controlled so as to move different zones of the
ribbon to the print­point, each of which zones extends longitudinally and is spaced
transversely to the others, whereby different colored characters may be imprinted.
VIDEO SIGNAL ­ For class 348
A signal in television derived from optical image (e.g., active video).
VIDEO SIGNAL ­ For class 725
The signal sent from a source to a display. The signal can include horizontal and vertical
synchronization signals, as well as image information.
VIDEOCASSETTE RECORDER (VCR) ­ For class 725
A videotape recorder that uses videocassettes.
VIDEO­ON­DEMAND (VOD) ­ For class 725
A programming event that is provided upon request, in which the event is delivered ​
gon­
demand​
h (with negligible delay). These events are delivered to individual subscribers
through an interactive process.
VIRTUAL LIBRARY ­ For class 506
A library which has no physical existence. This terminology encompasses two different
types of libraries: in silico libraries and dynamic libraries.
VIRUS ­ For class 977
Submicroscopic organism, which may be pathogenic, composed essentially of a core of
nucleic acid enclosed by a protein coat, able to replicate only within a living cell.
VISION CORRECTING ­ For class 351
Remedying vision defects by means of sight correcting lenses, eye muscle training
devices, etc.
VISUAL ELEMENT ­ For class 345
The smallest constituent part of a composite visual image*. A visual element* may be the
visual effect produced by a display element*.
VISUAL IMAGE ­ For class 345
The resultant image shown by the display device*.
VISUAL IMAGE ­ For class 715
The image shown by a DISPLAY DEVICE*.
VITREOUS, VITRIFY ­ For class 501
Vitrification is the progressive fusion of the particles in a ceramic body. As vitrification
progresses, the proportion of glassy bond increases and the apparent porosity of the
substance decreases. Glass in a massive form (rather than in a frit or powder) and
porcelain are considered to be fully vitrified.
VLE ­ For class 438
vapor levitation epitaxy
VLSI ­ For class 438
very large scale integration
VMOS ­ For class 438
vertical MOS
VOICED ­ For class 704
Speech sounds produced by vibratory action of the vocal cords and usually having pitch.
VOLATILIZING ­ For class 588
Converting a normally solid or liquid material into a gas or vapor state; mere evaporation
of water or other solvents is included under this definition.
VOLATIZING ­ For class 423
Converting a normally solid or liquid material into a gas or vapor state; mere volatization
of water or a solvent is excluded under this definition.
VOLTAIC CELL ­ For class 320
An elementary unit source of electrical energy stored as chemical energy, comprising two
separated dissimilar electrodes bridged by an electrolyte, wherein said unit source
produces a potential difference across said electrodes in a chemical reaction involving said
electrodes and electrolyte that converts chemical energy into electrical energy.
[Synonymous with cell, but distinguished from a fuel cell, in which the electrodes are not
required to be chemically involved in the primary reaction.]
VPE ­ For class 117
Vapor Phase Epitaxy*.
VPE ­ For class 438
vapor phase epitaxy
VSIS ­ For class 438
V­channel substrate inner stripe
W/O; W/O/W ­ For class 516
Water­in­oil emulsion and water­in­oil­in­water emulsion. Cf. o/w.
WAFER ­ For class 257
A thin slice of semiconductor material with parallel faces used as the substrate for active
solid­state devices in discrete or monolithic integrated circuit form.
WAFER ­ For class 438
A thin slice of semiconductor material with parallel faces used as the substrate for active
solid­state devices in discrete or monolithic integrated circuit form.
WARD ­ For class 070
A fixed impediment in the path of movement of a key in its normal capacity as a lock
operator.
WASTE ­ For class 210
A liquid that is to be discarded. The term includes effluent from domestic or industrial
sources, e.g, sewage wash water spent processing fluids, etc., and refers to liquid to be
treated and liquid which has been treated to allow discharge to the environment.
WATER ­ For class 122
To be taken in a generic sense as meaning liquid.
WATER TUBES ­ For class 122
Designate tubes, both large and small, through which liquid or vapor passes.
WAVE ENERGY ­ For class 204
For the purposes of this class, ​
gwave energy​
h includes radiation as well as wave energy
transmitted by various mediums and embraces electromagnetic wave energy or radiation,
sonic and supersonic waves, neutron, proton, deutron, and other types of corpuscular
radiation.
WAVE ENERGY ­ For class 330
An undulatory disturbance propagated through a medium, (usually periodic in nature), its
displacement varying periodically with respect to time or distance or both. The wave may
be manifested in electrical, mechanical or acoustical form. However, in this class the term
gwave energy​
​
h refers only to electrical wave energy.
WAVE ENERGY ­ For class 333
An undulatory disturbance propagated through a medium, (usually periodic in nature), its
displacement varying periodically with respect to time or distance or both. The wave may
be manifested in electrical, mechanical or acoustical form. However, in this class the term
gwave energy​
​
h refers only to electrical wave energy.
WAVE ENERGY ­ For class 522
The term ​
gwave energy​
h includes radiations as well as wave energies transmitted by
various mediums and embraces electromagnetic waves or radiations, ultrasonic and
supersonic waves, nuetrons, protons, duetron, and other corpuscular radiations.
WAVE FILTER ­ For class 333
Coupling networks which include significant structure permitting free transmission of
electric waves of a single frequency or band of frequencies (which may include zero
frequency) while attenuating substantially electric waves having other frequencies, or
attenuating substantially electric waves of a single frequency or band of frequencies
(which may include zero frequency) while permitting free transmission of electric waves
having other frequencies.
WAVE GUIDE ­ For class 330
A transmission device designed to propagate electrical waves having an electric or
magnetic field component extending in the direction of propagation. The wave guide may
be a hollow dielectric or metal tube, or a solid dielectric rod, the wave energy being
propagated along the interior of the tube or rod and confined by the walls of the tube or
rod.
WAVE GUIDE ­ For class 333
A transmission device designed to propagate electrical waves having an electric or
magnetic field component extending in the direction of propagation. The wave guide may
be a hollow dielectric or metal tube, or a solid dielectric rod, the wave energy being
propagated along the interior of the tube or rod and confined by the walls of the tube or
rod.
WAVE PROPAGATION CHARACTERISTIC ­ For class 333
Effect of the impedance characteristic of the transmission device upon the wave energy
propagated by the transmission device, (e.g., the effect of transmission device or network
to change the amplitude, phase of or delay in transmission as a function of frequency).
Changes in the impedance parameters of the transmission device or in impedances
associated therewith change the wave propagation characteristics of the transmission
device.
WAVE SHAPING ­ For class 333
Passive networks for modifying an electrical wave passing therethrough so that the
amplitude­time characteristic of the output wave is different from that of the input wave
and which have no function classified in other classes.
WAVE TRANSMISSION DEVICE ­ For class 330
Any device which is used to guide or constrain electrical wave energy and to convey the
energy from one place to another. Included are conductors, wave guides, resonant
structures (e.g., cavities, etc.).
WAVE TRANSMISSION DEVICE ­ For class 333
Any device which is used to guide or constrain electrical wave energy and to convey the
energy from one place to another. Included are conductors, wave guides, resonant
structures (e.g., cavities, etc.).
WAVE TRANSMISSION SYSTEM ­ For class 333
One of more wave transmission devices with or without appropriate coupling networks or
transmission line characteristic modifying means arranged to convey electrical energy
from one or more places to one or more other physically separated places. The system
may be arranged so that different electrical energies may be conveyed in different
directions at the same or different times over the system.
WAVE TRAP ­ For class 333
A resonant circuit designed to exclude the energy of one particular frequency. It is
analogous to a filter which is used to block one frequency and to pass other frequencies. It
usually has circuit components equivalent to a filter, but may be used only to exclude
energy of a particular frequency from a circuit.
WAVEGUIDE ­ For class 372
A system of material boundaries capable of guiding electromagnetic wave. A transmission
line comprising a hollow conducting tube within which electromagnetic waves are
propagated on a solid dielectric or dielectric­filled conductor.
WAVEGUIDE ­ For class 385
A waveguide is defined as any structure capable of guiding electromagnetic radiation in a
direction parallel to its axis, while substantially confining the radiation to a region within
and adjacent to its surfaces.
WAX OR WAXY ­ For class 428
A compound described as a wax (e.g., beeswax) or having the physical characteristics of a
wax or is a recognized wax (as carnauba). (Nonstructural or Composition)
WEB ­ For class 112
A portion of material having length and width each greater than its thickness and with at
least its longitudinal dimension undetermined. A web may comprise (a) a single thickness
of material, (b) a plurality of portions of a single piece of material folded onto each other
longitudinally or transversely, or (c) a plurality of individual web components joined
together in longitudinally coextensive face or edge contact to form a composite web.
WEB ­ For class 226
Material having a cross­section (transverse of the longitudinal* dimension) of relatively
thin dimension perpendicular to a relatively wide dimension (compare with Strand). Thus,
the material has two side edges defining its lateral* boundaries, and two surfaces defining
its other cross­sectional boundaries. Exemplary web materials are: fabric, screening, strip.
WEB ­ For class 428
A portion of material having length and width each greater than its thickness and with at
least its longitudinal dimension indeterminate. A web may comprise (a) a single thickness
of material or (b) a plurality of portions of a single piece of material folded on each other
longitudinally or transversely, or (c) a plurality of individual web components* joined
together in longitudinally coextensive face or edge contact to form a composite web.
(Structural) Note. Unless clearly disclosed or claimed otherwise (e.g., as a rod*, mass*,
filament*, etc.) a product will be placed in the appropriate web* or sheet* subclass. Note.
Included under the definition of component* or layer are the following: (a) The skin
formed on a porous layer* by curing (e.g., a foam, etc.). (b) The ​
glayer*​
h formed by
impregnating a substrate to a defined depth which must be recited either relatively to the
entire thickness or as an absolute dimension. (c) Either of a pair of layers* of the same
material cohered or adhered together by their own forces, if disclosed as plural separate
layers*. Note. For purposes of this class, paper* is limited to a waterlaid web* of
interfelted cellulose* (natural) fibers*. A waterlaid web* of resin, polymer or modified
cellulose* (e.g., cellulose acetate) fibers is excluded from the paper* subclasses and will
be classified on other features (e.g., composition, etc.). Note. Where a subclass title
includes a ​
gcoating​
h or ​
gcoat​
h or ​
gcoated layer*​
h, a bonded or adhered component or
layer* is intended to be included within the scope thereof. Thus, a product formed by
laminating or adhering two separate and distinct layers* is considered to be the equivalent
of a product made by applying a coating of a material onto a base* or substrate*.
WELL CONDUIT ­ For class 166
Either (1) a well tubing, (2) a well casing, or (3) the earth or cementitious wall of the well.
WELL ELEMENT: ­ For class 166
Any individual portion of well structure.
WELL FLUID: ­ For class 166
The desired fluid material of the earth. The purpose of the well is to remove this fluid.
WELL STRUCTURE: ­ For class 166
Equipment added to the earth in the formation or use of a well. Well structure may extend
above the surface of the earth (see wellhead*) as well as laterally away from the well
(see flow line*).
WELLHEAD: ­ For class 166
Means at the top of the well, generally extending above the surface of the earth, adapted
to cap the well, support the well structure* inside a well casing, regulate the operation of
the well, and/or supply well fluid* for distribution.
WETTING AGENT­ For class 516
The effective material*, energy, or means used for accomplishing the act of wetting a
surface. Wetting most generally is the process of displacing from a surface (solid or liquid)
one fluid, such as air, with another, such as water. See section LINES WITH OTHER
CLASSES AND WITHIN THIS CLASS, subsection Glossary References, for additional
information concerning this definition.
WHEEL ­ For class 305
The term ​
gwheel​
h as used in connection with this class includes resilient tires, sprocket
gears, rollers or any other annular members rotatable about an axis and adapted to propel
a flexible track or support a portion thereof.
WHIRLER ­ For class 239
A means upstream of the egress means for inducing or causing turbulent flow of a swirling
or turning nature.
WHISKER ­ For class 117
A single­crystal* which is typically small diameter, elongate, and generally cylindrical.
WINDING ­ For class 336
A coil or plurality of coils which are interconnected, or designed to be interconnected,
having terminal means adapted to be connected to an external source of current, to an
output or load circuit, or to some other circuit.
WIRE ­ For class 140
A wire (for the purpose of this class (140), is an elongated or attenuated metal or metal­
based material, wherein all the diameters of the cross­sectional area taken at right angles
to its length are of substantially the same dimension, and the cross­sectional area is small
enough to allow substantial flexibility or resiliency and permit bending or flexing without
substantial metal flow. A wire may be stranded, cored, coated or covered.
WIRE ­ For class 256
As used herein, this term includes not only metallic but also any nonmetallic rope, cord, or
strand.
WIRE BOND ­ For class 257
Attachment of a tiny wire, as by thermocompression bonding, to a bonding pad on a
semiconductor chip.
WIRELESS ­ For class 725
Of, pertaining to, or characteristic of communications that take place without the use of
interconnecting wires or cables, such as by radio, microwave, or infrared.
WIREWORKING ­ For class 140
The term wireworking includes the shaping and deforming of wire and/or the assembly and
uniting of wire with wire or nonwire material by twisting, bending, kinking, looping, etc.
WIRING CHANNEL ­ For class 257
An area on an integrated circuit, such as a gate array, which is left free of active devices
and in which interconnection metallization patterns are formed.
WIRING CHANNEL ­ For class 438
An area on an integrated circuit, such as a gate array, which is left free of active devices
and in which interconnection metallization patterns are formed.
WITH ­ For class 425
As used in a subclass title indicates the combination of basic subject matter of this class
and that of a diverse class.
WITH ­ For class 528
For purposes of this class, the term ​
gwith​
h under a specific reactant subclass requires the
presence of the specific reactant with a different reactant which meets the parameters set
forth by the ​
gwith​
h definition.
WOOD ­ For class 144
The fibrous material of a tree*.
WOOD ­ For class 428
The material of trunks and branches of trees or bushes, excluding bark. This term includes
lumber and finely divided wood chips, fibers or flour. ​
gFiber board​
h from wood fibers or
pulp will be considered wood or paper depending on the disclosure of the document in
which this expression occurs. Fiber board formed by compression of wood fibers with or
without a binder (and utilized as wood) is considered wood. Fiber board which is water laid
(and, used as cardboard or paste board) is considered paper. (Nonstructural or
Composition).
WORD ­ For class 400
For purposes of this class, a word is one or more imprinted character* symbols that are
grouped together and separated from other groups of characters to convey intelligence or
information to a reader. Usually a word consists of one or more letter characters that
taken together as a group may also be spoken by people of a national or ethnic folk, but
especially for purposes of this class, a word may consist of more number characters as
well as letter characters, the words then conveying information in a cryptos:graphic
glanguage​
​
h.
WORD­SPACE ­ For class 400
The distance that separates the last character* of one word* of imprinted text from the
first character of a subsequent word of the same text on the same line of text.
WORK ­ For class 072
The object or material which is intended to be subjected to an operation of the class type.
See ​
gBlank​
h.
WORK ­ For class 083
Article, material, or stuff to be treated (cut). (Compare ​
gproduct​
h).
WORK ­ For class 118
The base or material to which the coating is applied, either before or after coating.
WORK ­ For class 173
The object or mass of material which is contacted by the tool to be physically altered
thereby.
WORK ­ For class 225
A web, sheet, or strand (including tube, rod or bar) which is to be acted on.
WORK ­ For class 228
Material which is intended to be subjected to a treatment of the class type.
WORK ­ For class 269
The material that is placed in, or on, or in juxtaposition to the work holder for treatment in
the condition in which such material exists prior to its being treated or during treatment.
WORK ­ For class 407
Material which is intended to be subjected to an operation of this class.
WORK ­ For class 425
The material being shaped, reshaped or treated by the apparatus. Synonym: STOCK
WORK PART ­ For class 228
An article to be subjected to the class type operation.
WORK (n) ­ For class 408
Article, material, or stuff to be treated (cut). (Compare ​
gproduct​
h).
WORK FUNCTION ­ For class 257
The minimum energy required to remove an electron from the Fermi level of a material
and liberate it to free space outside the solid.
WORK FUNCTION ­ For class 438
The minimum energy required to remove an electron from the Fermi level of a material
and liberate it to free space outside the solid.
WORK SUPPLY ­ For class 225
A mass or quantity of work material in any regular or irregular arrangement.
WORK SUPPLY PACKAGE ­ For class 225
Work supply in regular form such as a wound roll, a folded strip or a pack or stack of work
material may include a core, a flanged core or other support to which the material is fixed
WORK THICKNESS ­ For class 083
In general, the least dimension along a substantially planar outer surface of work. As to
hollow workpieces, the thickness dimension at an annular section is taken as the wall
thickness; at a solid section, it is the thickness of the entire workpiece as though it were
not hollow. The thickness dimension of a strand is defined as follows: (a) as to those of
circular, triangular or elliptical cross­section, by any line passing through the strand from
surface point to surface point, (b) as to those of other polygonal cross­section, by any line
passing through the strand from one outer surface to a nonintersecting outer surface. As to
spheres a line extending through the sphere from one point on the surface to another is
deemed to define the thickness dimension. As to all other shapes of work pieces, thickness
is not considered significant for the purpose of this classification. Throughout the
definitions of subclasses herein below, the appearance of an asterisk (*) will indicate a
word or term which has been defined in this section. However, the words ​
gproduct​
h,
gtool​
​
h, and ​
gwork​
h, defined in this section, occur so frequently in the subclass definitions,
that the use of the asterisk in reference thereto has been omitted.
WORK TREATMENT ­ For class 072
Altering or actively maintaining some property, characteristic, or condition of work.
(Orientation or location of work, or juxtaposition of plural pieces, is not considered to be a
property, characteristic, or condition for the purpose of this definition in this class).
WORK, WORKPIECE ­ For class 227
Article or material other than the surface of the earth into which a member* is to be
driven; or an assemblage of juxtaposed workpieces (objects and/or layers of material) into
at least one of which a member is to be driven.
WORK: ­ For class 073
The transference of energy that is produced by motion at the point of application of force
which is measured by multiplying the force and the displacement of its point of application
in the line of action.
WORK: ­ For class 073
The transference of energy that is produced by motion at the point of application of force
which is measured by multiplying the force and the displacement of its point of application
in the line of action.
WORK­FEED MEANS ­ For class 083
An instrumentality for advancing work to the treating (cutting) zone.
WORK­FORCER ­ For class 072
A driven tool which, as disclosed, has the function of forcibly moving work against the
resistance of another tool. Note. If the tool also directly deforms the engaged face of the
work, it is specifically a die*.
WORK­GRIPPING CLAMP ­ For class 072
An instrumentality having a plurality of opposed solid jaws or surface elements which are
made effective, by movement of one or more of said jaws or surface elements, to grip a
portion of work frictionally and to hold it fixedly. Note. Some form of clamp­actuating
means is required; a so­called ​
gself­gripping​
h clamp, which closes upon work in response
to initial movement of work, is included. Note. Blank holders or ​
gclamps​
h, which are
intended to allow controlled slippage of work during an operation, are excluded, as
constituting ​
gTools​
h. See ​
gBlank Holder​
h.
WORK­INFEED ­ For class 408
The motion of work relative to the tool and relative to the base of the cutting machine
along the tool­axis toward the tool during the cutting operation.
WORKING CHAMBER ­ For class 418
The space in an expansible chamber device which includes the working member and which
is adapted to receive working fluid for acting upon the working member or for being acted
upon by the working member, the chamber expanding and contracting incident to
movement of the working member.
WORKING CHAMBER ­ For class 091
A chamber into which motive fluid is introduced or from which motive fluid is withdrawn
(vacuum) to cause the working member to move to perform work, the chamber expanding
or contracting incident to the movement of the working member. A chamber of a vacuum
motor to which atmospheric air has free ingress and egress without any control thereof is
not a working chamber. However, a chamber of a vacuum motor in which atmospheric air
acts and some control is exercised over the atmospheric air is a working chamber.
WORKING CHAMBER ­ For class 092
The space in an expansible chamber device which includes the working member and which
is adapted to receive working fluid for acting upon the working member, or for being acted
upon by the working member.
WORKING FLUID ­ For class 092
The fluid which is admitted into or withdrawn from the expansible chamber to effect
movement of the working member, or the fluid which is either drawn into or expelled from
the expansible chamber responsive to movement of the working member.
WORKING FLUID ­ For class 415
A fluid material (gas or liquid) which contacts the runner and causes it to move, or has
energy added thereto by a driven runner.
WORKING FLUID ­ For class 416
An unconfined or undirected fluid which acts or reacts with a working member* such that
movement of the fluid causes relative movement of the member or movement of the
member causes relative movement of the fluid. The fluid may be quiescent or flowing and
either natural (e.g., wind) or artificial (e.g., combustion gas). A patent including claimed
means for confining, guiding or directing the fluid to or from an impeller* will be classified
elsewhere. A waterfall has been determined to be directed fluid and an impeller claimed in
combination therewith is classified elsewhere. See References to Other Classes, above.
WORKING FLUID ­ For class 418
The fluid (expansible or inexpansible) which is introduced into and withdrawn from the
working chamber of the rotary expansible chamber device either to act upon or be acted
upon by the working member. Fluid which is withdrawn from the working fluid supply for
perfecting the operation of the device is considered to be working fluid even though it
never enters the working chamber of the device. A fluid combined with working fluid
introduced into and exhausted with the working fluid from the working chamber of the
device used merely to perfect the operation of the device (i.e., cooling, sealing,
lubricating, etc.), is considered to be a nonworking fluid.
WORKING MEMBER ­ For class 091
A movable wall of the expansible chamber to which motive fluid is applied or to which
atmospheric air is applied in the case of vacuum motor, said wall moving as a result of the
application of the motive fluid and in so moving doing work for utilization by means other
than the motor or some part thereof. In a reciprocating motor this term is generic to both
a moving piston and a moving cylinder. The working member is considered to include the
movable wall to which motive fluid is applied as well as all parts which are rigid therewith,
e.g., piston rod, etc. However, a pair of separate movable walls disposed in separate
working chambers (i.e., chambers which are not in fluid communication during at least
some part of the operation of the motor), even though rigidly connected together, are
considered to be plural working members if the application of motive fluid thereto urges
both walls in the same direction. A working member has a single working surface which
surface may have two or more relatively movable faces so long as adjacent faces are
always an extension of each other, e.g., flexible diaphragm or bellows, etc.
WORKING MEMBER ­ For class 092
The wall portion of the expansible chamber of an expansible chamber device which is
acted upon by the working fluid to be moved thereby to change the volume of the chamber
and produce a mechanical force output, or which, having a mechanical force applied
thereto is moved to change the volume of the chamber to either draw fluid into or expel
fluid from the chamber. The term includes the movable wall portion and any part which is
immovably fixed thereto (e.g., piston rod).
WORKING MEMBER ­ For class 416
A unitary means of which at least one surface functions to act or react with a working
fluid* such that movement of the means causes movement of the fluid or movement of the
fluid causes movement of the means. The working member is most commonly designated
as a blade, bucket or vane.
WORKING MEMBER ­ For class 418
A movable member in a rotary expansible chamber device having a surface portion
disposed to either receive the energy of a working fluid directed thereagainst for moving
the member to thereby produce a mechanical force output, or which, may move a working
fluid by the application of a mechanical force to the movable member whereby fluid is
admitted into and exhausted from the expansible chamber. The working member may
include a movable vane thereon having a surface portion for either receiving energy from
or energizing a working fluid passing through the expansible chamber.
WORKING MEMBER POSITION RESPONSIVE MEANS ­ For class 060
Comprises means positively actuated by the motor working member when it attains a
given predetermined position in the working chamber. Such position includes a position of
the working member attained after a predetermined number of strokes or revolutions of
the working member.
WORKPIECE ­ For class 205
A solid coherent object which serves as an electrode and is subjected to electrolytic
erosion, some of which is removed during the process and some of which remains as a
product. The workpiece may be a layer of one material supported by another material.
WORKPIECE ­ For class 234
The object which is cut or punched (before, during, or after such operation is effected). Cf.
Product*.
WORKPIECE ­ For class 407
An object which is intended to be subjected to an operation of this class.
WORKPIECE ­ For class 428
A stock­material* not suitable for functional use in the claimed condition, but requiring one
or more further significant shaping steps to do more than occupy space. Usually it is the
cross­sectional configuration which is to be further shaped. See the definition of
intermediate­article* for a list of operations not considered to be significant shaping.
WORK­STOP ABUTMENT ­ For class 269
(a) An element positioned adjacent a surface which supports the work against the force of
gravity, and which element presents an obstacle that restrains the movement of the work
across the surface in a particular direction, including the necessary supporting frame work
for such element. (b) The inclusion of an opposing or coacting element engaging the work,
so as to grip said work between the ​
gabutment​
h and said element, is considered to be
characteristic of a jaw* relationship and such combination, claimed or disclosed, is not a
work­stop abutment.
WORM GEAR ­ For class 475
A gear having radial teeth on the rim with the edges of the teeth arranged as a helix
extending around the rotational axis of the gear.
WRAPPER ­ For class 053
A species of flexible cover material in which the initial wrap is bent or folded about the
contents as the first step in the encasement of the contents to make a package.
WSI ­ For class 438
wafer scale integration
X­RAY ­ For class 378
Electromagnetic radiation lying in a range between "cosmic rays" and "ultraviolet rays".
This range is defined as lying between 0.001 and 100 angstrom units or 10­11 and 10­6
centimeters in wavelength.
X­RAY TUBE ­ For class 313
A discharge device designed to generate X­rays.
XRD ­ For class 438
x­ray diffraction
YAG ­ For class 117
Yttrium Aluminum Garnet.
YBCO ­ For class 438
yttria barium copper oxide (a HTSC)
YSZ ­ For class 438
yttria stabilized zirconia
ZDO ­ For class 438
zero drain overlap
ZENER DIODE ­ For class 257
A single pn junction, two terminal semiconductor diode reversed biased into breakdown
caused by the Zener effect, i.e., by field emission of charge carriers in the device"s
depletion layer. NOTE: True Zener breakdown occurs in silicon at values below 6 volts. It
is to be distinguished from the avalanche breakdown mechanism that occurs in reverse
biased diodes at higher (about 6 volts) voltages.
ZENER CURRENT ­ For class 257
The current generated by a Zener diode when its reverse voltage is increased above the
Zener breakdown value.
ZENER DIODE ­ For class 438
A single pn junction, two terminal semiconductor diode reversed biased into breakdown
caused by the Zener effect (i.e., by field emission of charge carriers in the device"s
depletion layer). NOTE: True Zener breakdown occurs in silicon at values below 6 volts. It
is to be distinguished from the avalanche breakdown mechanism that occurs in reverse
biased diodes at higher (about 6 volts) voltages.
ZEOLITE ­ For class 502
A hydrous alumino silicate characterized by a three dimensional framework of Si04 and
Al04 tetrahedra, cross­linked by the sharing of oxygen atoms being chemically balanced by
a cation, usually sodium or calcium and of crystalline structure such that openings or pores
allow access to a relatively large absorption area inside the crystal. The cation may be ion
exchanged for other metal ions, ammonia, an amine or hydrogen. Zeolites may be
activated for sorption by driving off the water of hydration. Note. Terms Recognized as
being Zeolite include Analcite, Cancrinite, Chabazite, Clinotilolite, Cordierite, Edingtonite,
Erionite, Faujasite, Ferrierite, Gmelinite, Heulandite, Laumontite, Levynite, Mesolite,
Mordenite, Natrolite, Offretite, Paulingite, Phillipsite, Ptilolite, Scolecite, Thomsonite, ZSM,
and ZK. Note. See the list in (3) Note of the definition of Clay, supra, for some silicon
compounds not treated as clays or zeolites in this class (502).
ZEOLITE ­ For class 516
A hydrated silicate of aluminum and sodium and/or calcium. Natural and synthetic.
Typical: Na2O.Al2O 3.xSiO2.yH2O.
ZIP ­ For class 438
zigzag­in­line package
ZIPPER­ For class 024
A mechanism for either closing an opening in structure­to­be­secured, or connecting
together separate members of structure to be secured* including (a) two, opposed,
elongated, cooperating, configured surfaces which are attached to the structure­to­be­
secured* by mounting means and intended to directly contact and interlock with each other
(i.e., the movement between the configured surfaces is restricted in the direction force is
transmitted thereto by the structure­to­be­secured*) when closing or connecting, and (b) a
sliding device which is much shorter in length than the surfaces and which travels along
the length of the surfaces sequentially contacting and simultaneously camming against
each segments of both surfaces to forcibly shift them into or out of interlocking
engagement, the direction of travel of the device generally being perpendicular to the
shifting motion of the interlocking configured surfaces.
ZMR ­ For class 117
Zone Melt Recrystallization.
ZMR ­ For class 438
zone melt recrystallization
ZONE MELTING ­ For class 373
A process where a selected area of a charge is heated in liquification.
KEY: =online business system =fees =forms
=help =laws/regulations =definition (glossary)
The Inventors Assistance Center is available to help you on patent matters.Send questions about USPTO programs and services to the USPTO
Contact Center (UCC). You can suggest USPTO webpages or material you would like featured on this section by E­mail to the
[email protected]. While we cannot promise to accommodate all requests, your suggestions will be considered and may lead to other
improvements on the website.
|.HOME | SITE INDEX| SEARCH | eBUSINESS | HELP | PRIVACY POLICY Last Modified: 08/11/2011 21:44:25